Me
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
VOLUME 47, 1957
PUBLISHED MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mount Royau & GuILFoRD AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 47
No. 1, pp. 1-32, March 15, 11957.
No. 2, pp. 68, April 9, 1957.
No. 3, pp. 69-96, May 7, 1957.
No. 4, pp. 97-132, June 1, 1957.
No. 5, pp. 133-168, July 29), 1957.
No. 6, pp. 169-204, August 26, 1957.
No. 7, pp. 205-248, October 9, 1957.
No. 8, p. 249-280, November 1, 1957.
No. 9, p. 281-320, November 26, 1957
No. 10, p. 321-856, January 6, 1958.
INOS INL, jo. 357-392, February 4, 1958.
No. 12, pp. 393-428, February 21, 1958.
=e
99
oD
I
a © eds
° 2
22W23
7OLUME 47
waGRE°
Sr
January 1957
JOURNAL
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
————
—————S=
MA SHINGTON
Published Monthly by the
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuuster H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JourNat is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors. '
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProceEpinGs should be sent to Haratp A. Reuper, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year.................-eee se eeeee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourNat (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monoeraru No.1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’? by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................+-+-+-00- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.......................-..-.. $25.00
Single:volumes} unbound ns)y.0))-ne ee ee eee eee ee cer Eee iggcooes 2.00
Single;numbersia.ascacceee hoe care eee CoO eee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Sprcut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
JANUARY 1957
INO!
BOTANY .—New plant names published by Luigi Castigliont. Hu1-Lin Lr, Morris
Arboretum, University of Pennsylvania.
(Received October 5, 1956)
A very interesting but much neglected
work on early American history in general
and especially on the flora of eastern North
America was written in Italian by Luigi
Castiglioni and published in 1790 in Milan,
Italy, in two volumes, entitled Vzaggio
negli Stati Uniti dell’ America Settentrionale
fatto negli anni 1785, 1786 e 1787 da Luigi
Castiglioni. Con alcune osservazioni sut
vegetabili piu utile di quel paese.
Luigi Castiglioni visited the early United
States in 1785-1787, traveling through all
the 13 states and a portion of Canada. His
purpose was, in his own words, twofold. One
was to witness the political birth of a repub-
lic composed of diverse nationalities extend-
ing over a vast area with varied climates
and products. Secondly, he desired to in-
vestigate the natural productions of the
country, particularly those of the vegetable
kingdom, studying methods of cultivating
and propagating these plants and their uses,
with a view of introducing the more useful
ones to Europe.
Shortly after his return to Italy Casti-
ghoni published the two volumes of his
travels and observations. The book is di-
vided into two parts. The main portion
consists of a narrative of his travels in the
various states, commenting extensively on
their histories and governments, with notes
on the manners and customs of the people
and on the natural products of the land. The
second part, entitled Osservazioni sui vege-
tabilt pia Stati Uniti, covers from page 169
of the second volume to page 402, the end
of the book. This part gives in alphabetical
order after the manner of Marshall’s Arbus-
tum, descriptions and observations on all
MAR oO 7 10%
the common trees and shrubs and some of
the more interesting herbs.
Elsewhere I have treated the observations
made by Castiglioni on the intriguing rela-
tionship between the flora of eastern Asia
and that of eastern North America.! The
present paper deals with the new plant
names given in Castiglioni’s work.
Castiglioni followed consistently Lin-
naeus’s binomial nomenclature. Aside from
Linnaeus, to whom he credited most of the
species he described, the other most fre-
quently quoted author is Humphrey Mar-
shall, his Arbustum Americanum of 1785.
The pre-Linnaean Flora Virginica, 1739, of
Gronovius is also often quoted. Other
authors frequently mentioned include Miller
and Lamarck.
As a taxonomic contribution, Castigloni’s
work is perhaps not comparable in impor-
tance to that of his immediate predecessors
Wangenheim and Marshall. However, he
consistently adopted a broad concept of
species, treating many specific names of
other authors as varieties of a single species.
Such species of inclusive nature were in
most cases not accepted by later authors,
but they did indicate relationships between
the component varieties, at least as Casti-
glioni interpreted them.
Most of the new names in Castiglioni’s
work are of varietal status. Only 14 new
species names are noted, indicated by
Castiglioni with the letter ‘“‘N”. Some of
these are actually the same as Linnaeus or
Marshall or other author’s earlier names
IL, H. L. Lwigi Castiglioni as a pioneer in
plant geography and plant introduction. Proc.
Amer. Philos. Soc. 99: 51-56, 1955.
2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
but without citation of these authors; some
of them were perhaps not intended as new
names by Castiglioni although he seems to
attach with care author’s names to all other
species. A few others, however, are genuine
new names first proposed by Castiglioni.
None of these specific names have been
taken up by Index Kewensis.
Castiglioni’s work, as noted above, has
been much overlooked by most later bota-
nists. In 1891 Faxon published a note? calling
attention to this interesting work especially
because of Castiglioni’s early notice of the
floristic relationships between eastern Asia
and eastern North America. But in sub-
sequent years Castiglioni’s work still re-
ceived little attention from taxonomists as
well as writers on early American botany.
So far as | am aware Sargent was the first
botanist who took account of any of Cas-
tiglioni’s taxonomic notes. He quoted
Castiglioni, though only occasionally and
sporadically in the biblographical refer-
ences given in his Sylva of North America
(1891-1902). He was the first and only one
to adopt for use a Castigloni epithet:
Populus balsaminifera var. virginiana (Cast.)
Sargent in Journ. Arnold Arb. 1: 63. 1919,
basing it on Populus negra B virginiana
Cast. Actually, Castiglioni is not to be
credited with this epithet, as he cited
clearly in the synonymy the earher Populus
virginiana Fouger. Sargent’s name was
later changed to Populus deltoides virginiana
(Cast.) Sudworth, Check List Forest Trees
U.S. (U.S. Dept. Agr. Cire. 92): 65. 1927.
Rehder adopted this name in his Manual of
cultivated trees and shrubs in 1940 but later
reduced this name into the straight syn-
onymy of Populus deltoides Marsh. in his
Bibliography of cultivated trees and shrubs of
1948.
In Rehder’s above-mentioned bibliogra-
phy, Castiglion1’s varietal names received the
most complete listing. However, only 20 out
of the total 44 new varietal names, and none
of the specific names are listed.
Rehder apparently did not give Castigli-
oni’s work a complete examination for its
2 Faxon, C. E. Castiglioni’s travels in the United
States. Garden & Forest 4(159): 110-111. 1891.
Iam indebted to Dr. Roland M. Harper for bring-
ing this article to my attention.
VOL. 47, NO. 1
botanical names. His varied versions in
abbreviating Castiglioni’s work indicate
that it had been consulted at random and at
separate intervals. In one instance, this
work is quoted in parenthesis. In other
instances, Castiglioni’s work is cited in
numerous variable forms as Viaggio Stat.
Un. Am. Sept. (sic); Viaggio Stati Un.;
Viagg. Stati Uniti; Viagg. Stati Unit.;
Viagg. Stat. Uniti; Viagg. St. Uniti; Viag.
Stati Uniti.
Most of the varietal names are found in
Gray Herbarium Card Index, but at least
six such names are noted to be unlisted there
and none of the specific names are listed.
The following notes list all the new names
appearing in Castiglioni’s work following
the same alphabetical order given by him.
The identifications are made from his
descriptions, given in all cases in Latin, his
citations of synonymy, common English
names, and his notes and observations. In
only one instance, Campsis radicans var.
minor, is a Castiglioni name herein adopted
to replace a name of current usage. Besides
the following, in his text on page 333,
Castiglioni mentioned a ‘Helianthus spec. |
nov.”’ from Virginia with the common name
“S. Andrew’s Cross.”
Ascyrum hypericoides Linn. Again, on
page 383, under Spiraea, he mentioned
Hypericum frutex, a name (nomen nudum)
which has also not appeared elsewhere. In |
the following list * marks those names that
are not recorded by Rehder (1948), ° those |
not recorded by Gray Card Index (to date),
and + marks specific names not listed in |
Index Kewensts.
*+° Aesculus pavia Cast. Viaggio 2: 187. 1790. =
Ae. pavia Linn. 1753. Castiglioni does |
not cite Ae. pavia Linn.
*+° Aesculus lutea Cast. Viaggio 2: 187. 1790. = —
Ae. octandra Marshall 1785. Castiglioni |
does not cite Ae. lutea Wangenheim |
1788.
* Betula lenta a rubra Cast. Viaggio 2: 207.
1790. = B. migra Linn. 1753.
* Betula lenta B papyrifera Cast. Viaggio 2:
207. 1790. = B. papyrifera Marshall
1785. Castiglioni does not cite Marshall’s |
hame.
This is probably |
JANUARY 1957
* Betula lenta y populifolia Cast. Viaggio 2:
207. 1790. = B. populifolia Marshall,
1790. Castiglioni does not cite Mar-
shall’s name.
* Betula lenta 6 humilis Cast. Viaggio 2: 207.
1790. = B. pumila Linn., 1767. Gray
Card Index considers this as based on B.
humilis Marshall, but Castiglioni does
not list that name.
* Bignonia radicans 8 minor Cast. Viaggio 2:
210. 1790. = Campsis radicans var.
speciosa (Parsons) Voss, 1911. =
Campsts radicans var. minor (Cast.),
comb. nov. This is undoubtedly the
variety with smaller more reddish
flowers. Castiglioni’s name should be
adopted to replace Parsons 1887 which
is a nomen nudum. See Rehder (1948,
cited above) for complete synonymy.
*7° Cercis canadensis Cast. Viaggio 2: 223.
1790. = C. canadensis Linn., 1753.
Castighoni gives Siliquastrum canadense
Tourn. in synonymy. The omission of
Linnaeus’s name might be just an over-
sight on the part of Castiglioni as he
otherwise cites C. stliquastrum Linn.
correctly.
* Fraxinus americana 8 alba (Marshall) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 244. 1790. = F. americana
Linn., 1753. Based on F. alba Marshall,
1785.
* Fraxinus americana y pennsylvanica (Mar-
shall) Cast. Viaggio 2: 244. 1790. (as
pensylvanica). = F. pennsylvanica Mar-
shall, 1785. Rehder gives F. americana
var. pennsylvanica Wesmael, 1892, in the
synonymy.
*Fraxinus nigra 8 juglandifolia (Lamarck)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 244. 1790. = F. ameri-
cana var. juglandifolia (Lamarck) D. J.
Browne, 1846. Based on F. juglandifolia
Lamarck 1788.
* Fraxinus nigra y pubescens (Lamarck) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 244. 1790. = F. pennsylvanica
Marshall, 1785. Based on F. pubescens
Lamarck 1788.
*Fraxinus nigra 6 sambucifolia (Lamarck)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 244. 1790. = F. nigra
Marshall, 1785. Based on F. sambuct-
folia Lamarck 1786. Rehder gives F.
migra var. sambucifolia D. J. Browne,
1846, in the synonymy.
Gleditschia triacanthos 8B aquatica (Marshall)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 249. 1790. = Gleditsia
aquatica Marshall, 1785.
Gleditschia triacanthos y inermis Cast.
Viaggio 2: 249. 1790. = Gleditsia tri-
acanthos {. inermis (Linn.) Zabel, 1903.
LI: CASTIGLIONI’S PLANT NAMES
(J)
Juglans alba € pacana Cast. Viaggio 2: 262.
1790. = Carya illinoensis (Wangen-
heim) K. Koch, 1869. Apparently based
on J. pecan Marshall, 1785, but Casti-
glioni gives a different spelling for the
specific epithet.
Lonicera sempervirens a virginiana (Mar-
shall) Cast. Viaggio 2: 284. 1790. = L.
sempervirens Linn., 1753. Based on L.
virginiana Marshall, 1785.
Lonicera sempervirens 8 caroliniana (Mar-
shall) Cast. Viaggio 2: 285. 1790. = L.
sempervirens f{. minor (Ait.) Rehder,
1903. Based on L. caroliniana Marshall,
1785.
*7° Mespilus Oxyacantha (Linn.) Cast. Viaggio
2: 292. 1790. = Crataegus Oxyacantha
Linn., 1753. Based on Linnaeus’s name.
Mespilus Oxyacantha B americana Cast.
Viaggio 2: 292. 1790. = Crataegus
marshallii Eggleston, 1908.
*1° Mespilus Azarolus (Linn.) Cast. Viaggio 2:
292. 1790. = Crataegus Azarolus Linn.,
1753. Based on Linnaeus’s name.
Mespilus Azarolus B americana Cast. Viaggio
2: 292. 1790. = Crataegus Azarolus
Linn., 1753.
Mespilus Azarolus 6 aurea (Marshall) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 292. 1790. = Crataegus uni-
flora Muenchhausen, 1770. Based on M.
Oxyacantha aurea Marshall, 1785.
*1° Mespilus coccinea (Linn.) Cast. Viaggio 2:
293. 1790. Based on Crataegus coccinea
Linn., 1753, an ambiguous name now
referred to C. pedicellata Sargent and C.
intricata Lange. Rehder lists a different
name M. coccinea Waldstein & Kitaibel,
1812, in the synonymy of Crataegus
tomentosa (Ait.) Lindl. Mesptlus cocci-
nea Marshall, based on the same Lin-
naean name, is not cited by Castiglioni
or by Rehder.
Mespilus coccinea 8 viridis (Linn.) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 293. 1790. = Crataegus viridis
Linn., 1753.
*1° Mespilus tomentosa (Linn.) Cast. Viaggio 2:
293. 1790. = Crataegus crus-galli Linn.,
1753. Castiglioni’s name is based on
Crataegus tomentosa Linn., an ambiguous
name. He considers it as synonymous to
Mespilus cunetformis Marshall. Rehder
lists M. cunetformis Marshall twice,
under Crataegus crus-galli Linn. and C.
punctata Jacq.
* Mespilus tomentosa 8 lutea Cast. Viaggio 2:
293. 1790. = Crataegus calpodendron
(Erh.) Medicus, 1798.
Mespilus amelanchier 8 nivea (Marshall)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Cast. Viaggio 2: 293. 1790. = Ame-
lanchier arborea (Mich. f.) Fernald,
1941. Based on M. nivea Marshall, 1785.
Mespilus amelanchier y prunifolia (Marshall)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 298. 1790. = Aronia
prunifolia (Marshall) Rehder, 1938.
Based on M. prunifolia Marshall, 1785.
* Mespilus amelanchier 6 canadensis (Linn.)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 294. 1790. = Ame-
lanchier canadensis (Linn.) Medicus,
1793. Based on M. canadensis Linn.
1753.
*1° Mespilus crus-galli (Linn.) Cast. Viaggio 2:
294. 1790. = Crataegus crus-galli Linn.,
1793. Based on Linnaeus’s name.
Castiglioni does not cite M. crus-galli
Marshall, similarly based.
* Mespilus crus-galli 3 lucida (Miller) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 294. 1790. = Crataegus crus-
galli Linn., 1753. Based on C. lucida
Miller, 1768.
* Mespilus arbutifolia B virginiana Cast.
Viaggio 2: 294. 1790. Castiglioni’s name
is derived from ‘Crataegus virginiana
Miller Dict. no. 4.” This name probably
refers to Mespilus virginiana Miller ed.
8. 8 m. no. 11. 1768. = Amelanchier
canadensis (Linn.) Medicus, 1793, and
is therefore not referable to Aronia
arbutifola (Linn.) Persoon, 1806.
° Myrica cerifera a arborescens Cast. Viaggio
2: 302. 1790. = Myrica cerifera Linn.,
1753.
*° Myrica cerifera B frutescens Cast. Viaggio 2:
302. 1790. = Myrica cerifera Linn., 1753.
*1° Nyssa aquatica Cast. Viaggio 2: 304. 1790. =
Nyssa aquatica Linn., 1753. This species
is described by Castiglioni without
citing Linnaeus as the authority but
evidently referring to the same plant
now circumscribed as Nyssa aquatica
Linn., the latter in its original form
being a composite name including in
part NV. sylvatica Marshall and N. ogeche
Bartram. The two latter species are also
correctly differentiated and described by
Castiglioni and properly credited to the
two authors. Sargent in his Sylva of
North America 5: 73-84. 18938 disregards
Linnaeus’s N. aquatica and credits all
three species to Marshall. Castiglioni,
however, attaches only Marshall’s name
to N. sylvatica. Sargent also cites in the
same work the references to Castiglioni
under NV. sylvatica and N. ogeche but
fails to mention him under N. aquatica.
Pinus Taeda B echinata (Miller) Cast.
VOL. 47, No. 1
Viaggio 2: 312. 1790. = Pinus echinata }
Miller, 1768.
*+ Pinus Taeda vy rigida (Marshall) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 313. 1790. = Pinus rigida
Miller, 1768. Based on “P. rigida
Marshall” listed in the synonymy.
* Pinus Taeda, 6 palustris (Miller) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 313. 1790. = P. palustris
Miller, 1768.
Pinus sylvestris 8 norvegica Cast. Viaggio 2:
313. 1790. = P. resinosa Aiton, 1789.
* Pinus sylvestris y novo-caesariensis Cast.
Viaggio 2: 313. 1790. = P. virginiana
Miller, 1768.
Pinus sylvestris 6 flava Cast. Viaggio 2: 314.
1790. = P. ecinata Miller, 1768.
*t° Pinus Balsamea Cast. Viaggio 2: 314. 1790.
= Abies balsamea (Linn.) Miller, 1768.
It is conceded that Castiglioni does not
intend to name this plant but has
failed to record Linnaeus as the au-
thority.
*1° Pinus americana (Miller) Cast. Viaggio 2: |
314. 1790. = Tsuga canadensis (Linn.)
Carriere, 1855. Castiglioni cites Abzes
americana Miller, 1768, and Pinus Abies
americana Marshall, 1785. Castiglioni’s
name is a later one than Pinus americana |
DuRoi, 1771, as given by Rehder.
Pinus canadensis a alba Cast. Viaggio 2:
314.1790. = Picea glauca (Moench) Voss, |
1908.
Pinus canadensis 8 nigra Cast. Viaggio 2: 315...
1790. = Picea mariana (Miller) Britton, |
1888. Gray Card Index considers this |
as based on P. nigra Aiton, 1789, but
Castiglioni does not give the latter
name.
“Pinus Larix B rubra, y nigra, 6 alba Cast. |
Viaggio 2: 315. 1790.” Rehder gives
these three names as synonyms of
Larix laricina (DuRoi) K. Koch and |
credits them to Castiglioni. Actually as |
clearly noted by Castiglioni, these were
named earlier by Marshall.
Populus nigra 8 virginiana (Fouger.) Cast.
Viaggio 2: 334. 1790. = P. deltoides
Marshall, 1785. This is the only name of |
Castiglioni that appears in current |
usage. As Castiglioni cites P. virginiana
Fougeroux, 1787, this is apparently the |
origin of this epithet, a fact neglected by |
later authors like Sargent and Sud- |
worth. Sargent is the first and only one —
to adopt a Castiglioni name, effecting
the combination Populus balsamifera
var. virginiana (Cast.) Sargent in
JANUARY 1957 LI: CASTIGLIONI’S PLANT NAMES 5
Journ. Arnold Arb. 1: 63. 1919. This was
subsequently changed to P. deltoides
virginiana (Cast.) Sudworth, Check
List Forest Trees U. 8. (U. 8S. Dept.
Agr. Mise. Cire. 92): 65. 1927, appar-
ently without verifying the original
work of Castiglioni. This is considered
as the typical form of the species in
Rehder’s Manual (1940) and as a
straight synonym of Populus deltoides
in his Bibliography (1948).
*7° Populus canadensis Cast. Viaggio 2: 334.
1790. = P. deltoides Marshall 1785.
The description shows that this species
is referable to P. deltoides Marshall
which Castiglioni lists as a synonym
with a question mark. Rehder gives P.
canadensis Michaux f. 1813 in the
synonymy of P. deltoides, which is ap-
parently the same name earlier estab-
lished by Castiglioni.
° Prunus domestica 8 americana (Marshall)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 339. 1790. = P. ameri-
cana Marshall 1785.
° Prunus lusitanica 8 serratifolia (Marshall)
Cast. Viaggio 2: 340. 179 = P. caro-
hniana (Miller) Aiton, 1789. Based on
P. Laurocerasus serratifolia Marshall,
1785.
*Quercus Prinus 8 platanoides Cast. Viaggio
2: 346. 1790. = Q. bicolor Willdenow,
1801.
*° Quercus nigra 8B aquatica Cast. Viaggio 2:
346. 1790. = Q. nigra Linn. 1753.
Rehder gives Q. nigra aquatica La-
marck, 1785.
*7° Quercus pumila Cast. Viaggio 2: 347. pl. 13.
1790. = Q. ilicifolia Wangenheim 1787.
In the synonymy Castiglioni gives Q.
pumila Banister and Q. rubra nana ?
Marshall. I have not been able to locate
Banister’s name in other references. It
appears that other then the nomen
nudum Quercus pumila W. Young, Q.
pumila Cast. is the earliest name bear-
ing this specific epithet. Quercus ilicifolia
Wangenheim, however, takes prece-
dence.
* Quercus rubra B hispanica Cast. Viaggio 2:
347. 1790. = Q. palustris Muench-
hausen, 1770.
*° Vaccinium corymbosum 8 myrsinites (La-
marck) Cast. Viaggio 2: 391. 1790. =
V. myrsinites Lamarck, 1783.
*T° Vaccinium laevigatum Cast. Viaggio 2: 391.
1790. This species is described by
Castiglioni as follows:
“2. V. LAEVIGATUM, floribus corym-
bosis, bracteis, corymbis alternis;
foliis lanceolato-oblongis, acuminatis,
subserratis, utrinque glabris, N.
“Obs. Frutex orgyalis. Differt a V.
corymboso, Linn. foliis subtus majis
venosis, utrinque glabris, a V. ligus-
trino. Linn. floribus corymbosis
bracteatis; foliis amplioribus magis
venosis.
“High-blue-berry nel Massachusset’’.
This plant appears to be referable to
Vaccinium corymbosum f. glabrum (Gray)
Camp. However, in this highly com-
plex genus, it will be more desirable to
leave the disposition to the experts. In-
cidentally this specific name is not
recorded in Index Kewensis and_ it
actually invalidates V. laevigatum Boj.
ex Dunal in DC. Prodr. 7: 571. 1838, of
Madagascar.
* Vaccinium oxycoccus B hispidulum Cast.
Viaggio 2: 392. 1790. = V. macrocarpum
Aiton, 1789. Castiglioni cites ‘“Vac-
ctnium hispidulum ? Lin.” in synonymy,
which is Chiogenes hispidula (Linn.)
Torrey & Gray, 1843.
* Xanthoxylwm clava-herculis $8 americanum
Cast. Viaggio 2: 399. 1790. = Zan-
thoxylum americanum Miller, 1768. Casti-
glioni does not cite Miller’s species. His
varietal name is also antedated by Z.
clava-herculis var. americanum (Miller)
C. F. Ludwig, 1783, as given by Rehder.
SSE
ACADEMY MEMBERS IN THE NEWS
Harry WExXLeER, chief of the science services
division of the U. 8S. Weather Bureau, has been
given the highest civilian award of the U. S.
Air Force, the Exceptional Service medal.
James M. Hunptry, former chief of the
Laboratory of Nutrition and Endocrinology,
NIAMD, is on a 2-year leave of absence, to ad-
minister a research program for the United
Nations Childrens Emergency Fund and_ the
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United
Nations.
JAMES A. SHANNON, director of the National
Institutes of Health, is the senior author of a
recent paper in Science, Medical Research in
Perspective.
6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 1
BOTANY .—New species of Erythroxylon from Colombia. WaurER A. GENTNER.!
(Communicated by Lyman B. Smith.)
Four new species were determined while
preparing a field guide to the genus Hryth-
roxylon in Colombia. The guide in its
entirety was submitted to the faculty of the
Columbian College of the George Washing-
ton University in partial satisfaction of the
requirements for the degree of master of
arts. Plans for the publication of this guide
have been delayed, and it seems well to
record the new species here.
Measurements in the descriptions are all
from dry material to keep the relative pro-
portions of all parts. In the illustrations the
details are from boiled material, but they
are not appreciably larger except in the case
of the stipules.
Erythroxylon cuatrecasasii Gentner, sp. nov.
Arbor 8 m alta; cortice obscure purpureo-
brunneo, verruculoso, lenticellis dilute rubris;
petiolo 3-6.5 mm longo, foliis lanceolatis, basi
acutis, apice acuminatis, 79-148 mm longis, 21—
44 mm latis, bilineatis; stipulis non persistentibus,
1.5-2 mm longis, triangulatis, asetulosis; floribus
uno vel plurimis in axillis foliorum vel ramen-
torum; pedicellis 4-9 mm longis, ad apicem
versus incrassatis, 5-angulatis; calyce ad 34 par-
tito, laminis 1-2 mm longis, late lanceolatis.
Floribus brachystylis: calyce superante urceolum
stamineum, orificio subintegro, staminibus 1.5
mm longis, stylis liberis, 1 mm longis, stigmatibus
depresso-capitatis. Floribus dolichostylis: non
visis. Drupa 8.5-10.5 mm longa, 3.5-4 mm
diametro.
VALLE DEL Cauca: Rio Yurumanguil, alt.
5-50 m, February 19, 1944. J. Cuatrecasas 15736.
This species differs from HL. gracilipes and E.
acutum in having lanceolate leaves.
Erythroxylon acutum Gentner, sp. nov.
Frutex vel arbor 3-4 m alta; cortice obscure
purpureo-brunneo, verruculoso, lenticellis minu-
tis dilute rubris; petiolo 3-7 mm longo, folis
oblongo-ellipticis, basi rotundatis, apice acumi-
natis, 30-81 mm longis, 14-32 mm latis, bilineatis;
stipulis persistentibus, 1-1.5mm longis, fimbratis,
triangulatis, 3-setulosis; floribus uno vel plurimis
1 Field Crops Research Branch, ARS, USDA,
Beltsville, Md.
in axillis foliorum vel ramentorum; pedicellis 4-6
mm longis, ad apicem versus incrassatis, 5-angu-
latis; calyece ad 14 partito, laciniis 1-1.5 mm
longis, triangulatis, acutis; floribus dolichostylis
non visis. Floribus brachystylis: urceolo stami-
neo calycem subaequante, orificio subintegro;
staminibus 2.5-3 mm longis; stylis liberis, 2 mm
longis; stigmatibus depresso-capitatis; floribus
brachystylis e fragmentis solum cognitis. Drupa
7.5-9 mm longa, 2.5-3 mm diametro.
Narino: Gorgonilla Island, alt. 130-200 m,
February 28, 1939, E.P. Killip and H. Garefa-
Barriga 33082.
This species differs from H. cuatrecasasii in
having oblong-elliptic leaves.
Erythroyxlon acrobeles Gentner, sp. nav
Frutex parvus, cortice griseo-brunneo, verru-
culoso; petiolo 3-5 mm longo, foliis obovatis vel
ellipticis, basi acutis vel rotundatis, apice acutis,
cuspidatis, mucronatis, 72-173 mm longis, 26-60
mm latis; stipulis 3.5-5 mm longis triangulatis,
apice acutis, 2-setulosis; floribus uno vel plurimis
in axillis foliorum vel ramentorum; pedicellis 4-9
mm longis, ad apicem versus incrassatis, 5-angu-
latis; calyce ad 14 partito, laminis 1-1.5 mm
longis, ovatis, mucronatis. Floribus brachystylis:
non visis. Floribus dolichostylis: staminibus
inaequalibus, episepalis 0.4 mm longis, epipetalis
1.5-1.75 mm longis, urceolo stamineo calycem
superante, orificio subintegro, stylis liberis, 0.75
mm longis, stigmatibus depresso-capitatis, ovario
obovoideo. Drupa 13 mm longa, 7 mm diametro.
VALLE DEL Cauca: Pacific coast at Rio Ca-
jambre, May 5-15, 1944, J. Cuatrecasas 17581.
This species differs from H. cwmanense and E.
havanense in having cuspidate leaves 72-173
mm. long.
Erythroxylon haughtii Gentner, sp. nov.
Frutex ultra 2 m alta; cortice griseo-brunneo,
verruculoso, lenticellis dilute rubris, ramulis
recurvatis, compressis; petiolo 3-6 mm longo,
foliis ovatis vel ellipticis, basi apiceque rotundatis,
22-57 mm longis, 23-32 mm latis; stipulis per-
sistentibus, 1.5-2 mm longis, fimbriatis, triangu-
latis, 3-setulosis; floribus 1-4 in axillis foliorum
vel ramentorum; pedicellis 7-11 mm_ longis,
graciliter obconicis, 5-angulatis; calyce ad 34
i
OF ERYTHROXYLON
SPECIES
NEW
AR?
GENTNE
JANUARY 1957
5 : ¢ X ‘atndiys ‘q fe X ‘suawIeys
O° & ‘xAyeo “Gg tT X “BIqQRy Sy swnjnov uopixosyplisg@—Z% DIT
¢
XG OX
xA[wo ‘g '3, &
‘
if
(
apndrys ‘
CRETE
d ‘¢ X ‘suoureys ‘9 SG &
SUUSDSDIALIONI UO xLOLY id ~— | “OLA
VOL. 47, No. |
SCIENCES
OF
MY
1
u
ACADE
WASHINGTON
=
vy
THI
JOURNAL OF
*¢ x ‘atndiys ‘qf fe x ‘KBvAo ‘qq {¢ X ‘AxBAO pu suduIeys ‘9 ‘¢ X ‘arndiys “oT *¢ X ‘AIeAO ‘qq fg X ‘AIBAO puk SUOUIRYS ‘OD
‘¢ x ‘xAyRo ‘gq fT xX “qIqeyEy SY -227ybnny Uojlixolyphig—F “DI '¢ X ‘xAyeo ‘g 53, & “qIqeyT ‘Vv sajaqgo..on Uopixosyjphug@— & “OTT
CO
a (
JANUARY 1957
partito, laciniis 1.5-2 mm longis, late lanceolatis;
petalis 2.5-3 mm longis, laminis 2.5-3 mm longis,
ligula laminam ad 34 aequante. Floribus brachy-
stylis: urceolo stamineo calycem subaequante,
orificio 10-crenulato; staminibus 2.5 mm longis,
stylis liberis, 1 mm longis, stigmatibus depresso-
GENTNER: NEW SPECIES OF ERYTHROXYLON 9
capitatis, ovario ovoideo. Floribus dolichostylis:
non visis. Drupa non visi.
Cauca: Near Mercaderes, alt. 1100 m, October
27, 1946, Oscar Haught 5148.
This species differs from EH. orinocense and E.
hondense in having pedicels 7-11 mm long.
—
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR TITANIUM
The National Bureau of Standards has
successfully electrodeposited hard, adherent
protective coatings on titanium. The pro-
cedure involves forming a titanium fluoride
film on the metal surface, electroplating with
chromium, and heat-treating the plated
specimen at 800°C. Developed for the
Springfield Armory by C. L. Stanley and A.
Brenner of the Bureau staff, the process is
expected to extend considerably the utility
of titanium metal, particularly for high-
temperature applications.
Because of titanium’s high strength-to-
weight ratio, it ranks with steel and alumi-
num as a structural material. However ti-
tanium has disadvantages for some applica-
tions: it tends to gall or seize when in loaded
contact with itself or other metals, and it
oxidizes at elevated temperatures. These dis-
advantages could be minimized if titanium
were coated with hard, oxidation-resistant
metals such as chromium or nickel, but pre-
vious attempts to produce such coatings
have not been entirely successful. Although
the Bureau had obtained good adhesion of
aluminum to titanium in an earlier investi-
gation using a nonaqueous plating bath, the
method was not suitable for job-shop appli-
cations and the results were not sufficiently
consistent.
The main problem in depositing metals on
titanium is lack of adhesion—some deposits
have actually exfoliated during the plating
operation and others have been easily pulled
off with the fingers. Poor adhesion has been
blamed on an oxide film on the base metal,
but attempts to remove the suspected film
with acid etches or anodic films were not
successful. For this reason, the present in-
vestigation included a study of the influence
of oxide films and methods to remove them.
In a preliminary investigation, the Bureau
designed an experiment intended to remove
any oxide film and to plate the titanium
specimen before it could reoxidize. In this
procedure, a small piece of titanium was en-
closed in an evacuated tube containing sili-
con carbide and ceramic balls. The tube was
tumbled for several hours to abrade the
metal surface and then placed in a chromium
plating bath, where it was crushed so as to
expose the metal specimen to the bath before
the atmosphere could touch it. In a control
experiment, a titanium specimen was simi-
larly abraded in an open tube. The adhesion
of the first specimen was distinctly better
than that of the control, supporting the hy-
pothesis that a film, probably an oxide, exists
on the surface of titanium and impairs adhe-
sion of metal deposits.
The Bureau investigated a number of
etching and plating procedures and obtained
the best chromium plates by pretreating
titanium to form a coating of titanium flu-
oride before plating the specimen. This pro-
cedure appears to prevent the formation of
an oxide and, when the specimen is placed
in the plating bath, the titanium fluoride
dissolves permitting the chromium to bond
directly to the basis metal.
Titanium specimens are thoroughly de-
greased and cleaned before this treatment.
Next they are dried and suspended in a solu-
tion of hydrofluoric and acetic acids. After
10 or 15 minutes a 60-cycle alternating cur-
rent is passed through the specimen for
another 10 minutes. The specimens are then
rinsed and transferred to a conventional
chromium plating bath, where they are
plated at a temperature of 85°C and a cur-
rent density of 120 amp/dm?.
Chemical analysis indicates that the film
produced by the preliminary acid treatment
contains a low valence titanium compound.
A sample of the dried film contained 37 per-
cent of titanium and 54 percent of fluorine,
10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and examination by X-ray diffraction
showed no lines characteristic of titanium
tetrafluoride.
Tensile strength tests indicate that ad-
herence of the chromium coating to titanium
is greatly improved by heat-treating the
plated specimen for two minutes at 800°C in
an inert atmosphere. Coating adhesion was
determined by the nodule method. Essen-
tially this procedure consists in electrode-
positing a cobalt nodule, 14¢ in. in diameter,
on the coating and then determining the
force necessary to detach the nodule to-
gether with the coating from the basis metal.
The bond strength of the heat-treated speci-
mens ranged from 4,000 to 18,000 Ibs/in.
Although the highest value obtained is some-
what below the tensile strength of heat-
vou. 47, no. 1
treated chromium, fracture occurred in all
cases in the chromium plate and not between
the two metals.
Coatings on titanium consisting of 0.02
mm of chromium plus 0.15 mm of nickel were
found to be moderately adherent without
heat treatment, but not comparable to that
of chromium on steel. If such specimens 0.5
inch wide are broken by repeated bending,
the chromium-nickel coatings can be
stripped from the titanium with a force of
about 10 pounds.
Procedures for depositing nickel and cop-
per on titanium have been formulated that
are similar to the process for depositing
chromium. However, the nickel and copper
deposits have not adhered as well as chro-
mium and have frequently blistered.
AWARDS FOR SCIENTIFIC ACHIEVEMENT
As part of its program of encouraging science in the Washington area, the ACADEMY makes
annual awards of recognition for achievement. At the 1957 annual meeting, on January 17,
President Gibson presented certificates to the following:
In the biological sciences:
EARL REESE STADTMAN
National Heart Institute
National Institutes of Health
FOR THE DISCOVERY OF THE ENZYME TRANSCETYLASE AND THE
DISTINGUISHED STUDY OF ITS INTRICATE PART IN FATTY ACID METABO-
LISM.
In the engineering sciences:
M. L. GREENOUGH
National Bureau of Standards
FOR DISTINGUISHED SERVICE IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF UNIQUE
METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING. :
Physical sciences:
K11as BuRSTEIN
Naval Research Laboratory
FOR DISTINGUISHED STUDY OF IMPURITY LEVELS AND EFFECTIVE
ELECTRON MASSES IN SEMI-CONDUCTORS.
Teaching of sciences:
PHOEBE Hau KNIPLING
Arlington County Public Schools
FOR DISTINCTION BOTH IN FOSTERING
AND IN THE PERSUASIVE
TEACHING OF SCIENCE IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS.
JANUARY 1957 PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ
AND VON
BRAND: 4A. GLABRATUS EGGS 11
PHYSIOLOGY Studies on the oxygen consumption of Australorbis glabratus eggs.
Aina PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICzZ! and THropor von Branp2
(Received November 29, 1956)
The possibility has been pointed out that
studies on the physiology of the intermediate
hosts of schistosomiasis may yield clues to
the development of chemical control meas-
ures, (von Brand, Nolan, and Mann, 1948).
This reasoning led to extensive studies on
snails by several investigators (Mehlman
and von Brand, 1951; von Brand and Mehl-
man, 1953; von Brand, McMahon, and No-
Jan, 1955; Newton and von Brand, 1955; von
Brand, 1955). They investigated the anaero-
bie and postanaerobic metabolism, the rela-
tion between the pre- and postanaerobic
oxygen consumption and the oxygen tension,
the effect of temperature and tissue hydra-
tion on anaerobic survival, and physiological
differences between geographical strains.
Such studies led to investigations of meta-
bole pathways potentially vulnerable to
chemical attack. Weinbach (1952, 1953)
studied the intermediate metabolism of A ws-
tralorbis glabratus, and subsequently the
mechanism by which pentachlorophenol
kills snails was elucidated (Weinbach, 1954,
1956, Weinbach and Nolan, 1956).
In marked contrast to these studies on
adult snails is the complete lack of knowl-
edge concerning the metabolism of snail eggs
and the mode of action of chemicals on them.
Studies on eggs of other animals suggested
that certain compounds such as di and tri-
halophenols block cleavage of fertilized Ar-
bacia eggs (Clowes et al., 1950). It seems
then possible that chemical control of the
developing eggs of disease-transmitting
snails may help in the control of certain
parasitic diseases. To lay a foundation to-
wards such an approach, a study of the res-
piration of Australorbis glabratus eggs was
_ undertaken and is reported below.
. 1 Permanent address: Instituto de Endemias
- Rurais do DNER, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. The
| present work was done at the National Institutes
of Health during a tenure of a WHO fellowship.
_ Requests for reprints should be addressed to the
_ Laboratory of Tropical Diseases, National In-
stitutes of Health, Bethesda, Md.
* Laboratory of Tropical Diseases, National
Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases,
National Institutes of Health.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
The eggs were obtained from Awstralorbis
glabratus, laboratory reared from Venezuelan
stock. Twenty-five to thirty adult specimens
were kept at room temperature (approx.
25°C) in jars containing 3 to 4 liter dechlo-
rinated tapwater which was renewed once a
week. The snails were fed abundantly with
lettuce leaves and calcium carbonate was
added to the water occasionally. Eight such
jars were lined with glass slides on which the
snails deposited the egg capsules. Egg
clutches were collected daily at 9 a.m. thus
permitting a rigorous control of their age.
They were carefully removed from the slides
with the help of a razor blade and placed in
open dishes containing 200 to 300 ml water.
Most of the eggs maintained in this way ap-
peared to develop normally and only 5 to
10 percent died before hatching time. Dead
eggs could, after some experience, be recog-
nized even macroscopically, at least in the
later stages of development. They usually
became moldy and heavily contaminated
with bacteria and were of course discarded.
A further check, especially important with
the young stages (zero and one day), was
provided by examining the egg capsules
under an entomological microscope.
The rate of oxygen consumption of the
eggs was studied by means of Warburg ma-
hnometers equipped with flasks of approxi-
mately 6 ml capacity containing 1 ml of
dechlorinated tap water as respiratory me-
dium. The carbon dioxide was absorbed in
the customary manner by means of 10 per-
cent IKOH. An equilibration period of 30
minutes was allowed, and readings were
taken at 30 minute intervals for 2 to 3 hours.
The manometers were shaken with an am-
plitude of 4 cm 100 times per minute. The
temperature in all experiments was 28°C.
The data were calculated per egg. In order
to minimize errors, the eggs contained in
each egg capsule used in a given experiment
were counted both before being introduced
into the Warburg flask and at the end of the
experiment.
12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
Because the respiratory rate was higher in
older eggs than in young ones, the number
of clutches, that is of eggs, had to be varied.
In most experiments with 0 to 2 day-old
eggs, 30 egg capsules were used per flask,
while 10 to 15 clutches containing older em-
bryos sufficed to give adequate manometer
changes. When it was desired to follow a cer-
tain group of clutches during its entire de-
velopment, the 30 egg clutches used per
flask during the first days were divided into
smaller lots during the later days, and all
these lots were tested on the same days sepa-
rately, when possible. The egg clutches were
introduced into the flasks individually by
means of a very fine spatula and at the end
of the experiment, they were washed out by
means of a little water. Although these ma-
nipulations were done with great care, an
occasional injury to an egg clutch could not
always be avoided. Any damaged clutch
was rejected.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Data on the embryology of various spe-
cies of fresh water snails are available in the
literature (Lymnaea spp., Lankester, 1874,
Crabb, 1927; Stagnicola, Lowrance, 1934;
various Planorbidae, Holmes, 1900, Roney
1943, Baker, 1945), but no information con-
cerning Australorbis glabratus specifically has
come to our attention. We therefore record
here briefly some pertinent observations.
The number of eggs per egg capsule is
quite variable. It varied in the 855 clutches
used in the present study from 5 to 58. But
it should be pointed out that clutches con-
taining only 2 to 3 eggs are frequently de-
posited by very young snails, while old speci-
mens occasionally lay capsules containing
over 60 eggs. The individual eggs are en-
closed by an inner capsule. In it, the ovum
proper usually occupies an eccentric posi-
tion, although it can also be located cen-
trally. Inner capsules containing two ovas or
none, occur occasionally. The inner capsule,
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 1
are arranged in a matrix im irregular, or
sometimes parallel rows (Fig. 1 (1, 2)) and
are bounded by a thin membrane.
Embryos allowed to develop at room tem-
perature of about 25°C started hatching on
the 6th to 8th day after oviposition. In-
creasing the temperature slightly mereased
the number of young snails hatching on the
6th day. Decreasing the temperature by 3
to 5°C retarded the development; the first
hatchings occurred as late as the 9th or 10th
day. There was some variation in the hatch-
ing time even among snails of a single egg
clutch; the first ones could, for example,
hatch on the 6th day with the remainder
following during the next 2 to 3 days.
A detailed study of the embryology of
Australorbis was not done. However, we did
make sufficient observations to indicate that
this snail follows the usual planorbid pat-
tern. Representative stages are shown in
Fig. 1 (3 to 9). They show the main stages
used during our determinations of the oxy-
gen consumption on the following days: 0, 1,
2, 4, 5, and 6, and, since taken at the same
magnification, can serve as indication of the
increase in living substance. The stage
reached on day 3, although tested for oxy-
gen consumption, was not photographed; it
corresponded approximately to pre-veliger
stage. Of some interest in connection with
our respiratory studies is the motility of the
embryos. First rotation of the developing
ova occurred on day 2. On day 4 the em-
bryos were already very active, moving
actively around within the inner capsule; at
this stage the heart beat was clearly visible.
During the last day of development some
variation in motility was noticed. Some of
the now fully developed young snails were
very active and were escaping the egg clutch.
Others were more quiescent, and these re-
quired one or two days more to leave the
clutch.
Two independent sets of experiments were
conducted in which the rate of oxygen con-
Fra. 1.—Representative stages in the development of the eggs of Australorbis glabratus : (1) Complete
egg clutch, 0 day, showing the arrangement of the inner capsules within the clutch, 10 X.
plete egg clutch, 6th day, showing the growth of the embryo, 10 X.
(4) Single egg, Ist day, probably trochophore stage, 90 X.
(6) Single egg, 3 days, veliger stage, 90 X.
(8) Freshly hatched snail in water, 90 X.
hatched snail in air, retracted into the shell. 90 X.
stage, 90 X.
post-trochophore stage, 90 X.
well developed embryo within the shell, 90 X.
(2) Com-
(3) Single egg, 0 day, cleavage
(6) Single egg, 2 days,
(7) Single egg, 5 days,
(9) Freshly
JANUARY 1957 PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ AND VON BRAND: A. GLABRATUS EGGS 13
Fie. 1—(See opposite page for legend).
14
TABLE 1—OxXYGEN CONSUMPTION OF
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
A UST RA-
LORBIS GLABRATUS EGGS FROM TIME
OF DeEposITION TO HaTCcHING
Number Number | Number of eggs| Age Mm‘ oxygen con-
experi- of egg- in a single in sumed by one egg
ments | capsules | experiment days in one hour
8 224 811 0 0.005
(867, 992) (0.004, 0.006)
7 203 774 iL 0.007
(589, 866) (0.006, 0.009)
8 206 703 2 0.014
(494, 992) (0.011, 0.018)
10 238 582 3 0.017
(367, 872) (0.014, 0.024)
8 189 554 4 0.031
(815, 877) (0.028, 0.034)
14 285 467 5 0.044
(280, 752) (0.035, 0.059)
13 245 438 6 0.057
(254, 752) (0.048, 0.068)
11 215 464 7 0.061
(266, 752) (0.049, 0.074)
11 146 357 8 0.066
(283, 504) (0.054, 0.088)
70
65
ao 60
=)
Gq) oS
ag
50
S45
ep)
(Hy G0)
(©)
inj oS
O 30
O
©) ZS
SS 20
N e
© is ‘
= Je
E 5
O
O (2 3
von. 47, No. 1
sumption was determined. In the first series,
the same egg clutches were used from 5 to 6
times on alternate or successive days. In
view of the rapid development of the ova,
care was taken to control the time intervals
rigidly, that is, all the experiments started
at 9 am. Because initially some doubts
existed whether the repeated handling of the
egg clutches and the shaking in the Warburg
flasks might interfere with normal develop-
ment, a second set was done in which ini-
tially a large number of freshly deposited
clutches were collected. Of these, certain
numbers were selected each day for the ex-
periments (2 to 7 experiments on the various
days of development), but they were not
used again. The data derived from this sec-
ond series coincided very closely with those
of the first series, both therefore, can be dis-
cussed together. The stages reached by the
developing embryos were also identical in
both series; it is hence justified to assume
4 S) 6 iG 8 9
DAVar Obs DEVIEIZO PR MENT
Fic. 2.—Rate of oxygen consumption of developing eggs of Australorbis glabratus
JANUARY 1957 PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ
that we were dealing with ‘normal’
clutches. This point was further checked by
comparing the developmental stages of our
experimental clutches with clutches that
were not handled at all; we were unable to
observe any differences.
Table 1 and Fig. 2 summarize the average
results, while Table 2 gives details of the
first series. It is evident that the variability
in oxygen consumption was relatively small.
This is true especially for the very young
stages, but even in the older ones uniform
results were obtained. This, undoubtedly,
was due to the large number of embryos used
per Warburg flask. The average values ar-
range themselves to a smooth curve (Fig. 2)
which has an S-shaped form. This is exactly
the same type of curve as found during the
development of the embryos of higher ani-
mals, e.g., hen’s egg (Bohr and Hasselbalch,
1900, 1903; Murray, 1925) or turtle egg,
(Lynn and von Brand, 1945).
This finding has a bearing on another 1m-
portant point. In working with the type of
material as ours, a perennial question is
whether the results obtained are really ex-
clusively due to the material one wishes to
study, or whether bacterial contaminants
obscure the picture. Our egg clutches were
certainly not bacteriologically sterile and we
cannot exclude categorically shght bacterial
contamination. Gross contamination is easily
AND VON BRAND: 4A.
GLABRATUS EGGS 195
recognized and occurs only when dying eggs
are present; as mentioned previously, such
clutches were always discarded immediately.
It does not seem likely that a smooth curve
as shown in Fig. 2 would have been obtained
if bacterial respiration had been superim-
posed to a marked degree on the respiration
of the developing snails. Furthermore, in
experiments unrelated to the present ones,
we tested the respiratory rate of 4 groups of
freshly hatched snails, each group compris-
ing 100 to 150 specimens. The egg clutches
from which these snails were derived con-
sumed per embryo, just before hatching,
0.064, 0.075, 0.087, and 0.088 mm? O» per
hour. The corresponding values after hatch-
ing were 0.086, 0.116, 0.117, and 0.117 mm*
per young snail per hour. The average value
for the embryos was 0.078 mm and for the
newly hatched snail 0.109 mm.* Bacteria
would of course not have developed to a
marked degree within the developing em-
bryos, but rather in the matrix. If a large
number would have been present, one would
have expected the respiration of the embryos
to have been higher than that of the young
snail, while the opposite was true. That the
freshly hatched snail should consume some-
what more oxygen than the fully developed
embryo is not surprising; the greater activ-
ity of the former alone is probably sufficient
to explain the difference. We are therefore
TABLE 2.—OXYGEN CONSUMPTION OF DEVELOPING EGGS OF AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS
Number N f pEatreme Number of Nema of : ‘4
Gee Aa eges'in each Feegeebeulee ee edit each Mm? Oxygen consumed by one developing egg in one hour on day
ese a cs eh capsule eaais ypeaalitest seth
aes 5 8th day 3
min. | max. 0 1 2 3) 4 5 5 if 8
30 872 16 42 16 395 0.005) — — {0.018} — |0.039) — |0.061 |0.064
30 851 15 45 20 504 0.005) — |0.016) — — |0.0400.055|0.058 |0.088*
32 992 14 43 20 410 0.005) — |0.018) — — |0.041)0.056|0.064 |0.073*
30 877 16 30 20 395 0.006) — — 0.031|0.059,0.068; — |0.087*
30 670 12 41 18 350 0.004) — — |0.017/0.033) — |0.049/0.059 —
18 367 13 40 18 367 0.005) — — |0.018 = = = —
24 589 5 42 18 423 — |0.008)/0.014; — — |0.047/0.057/0.060t| —
30 790 10 45 30 727 — |0.008|0.014/0.024) — = — |0.062 aa
30 854 12 42 29 752 — |0.006\0.013 — |0.043)0.050/0.074T| —
29 689 14 38 28 624 — |0.006) — — |0.030\0.040) — |0.066t) —
30 680 9 44 30 661 = — — |0.020/0.034/0.055/0.065)| = — —
20 410 a 34 20 381 = — — |0.014 0.040/0.058) —
20 512 6 43 20 493 = — — |0.016) — |0.044/0.061; — —
20 528 11 45 20 497 — — — |0.017} — |0.049|0.062) — —
20 397 7 30 16 358 0.042) — |0.067 —
* Many hatched snails attached to the surface of outer capsule.
7 After test hatched embryos present in the Warburg flask.
16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
confident that our data truly reflect the
respiratory activity of the developing snail.
SUMMARY
The rate of oxygen consumption of the
developing egg of Australorbis glabratus in-
creases from the time of oviposition to hatch-
ing, following a curve strikingly similar to
that found in egg-laying vertebrates.
REFERENCES
Baker, F.C. The molluscan family Planorbidae.
University of Illinois Press, 1945.
Bour, C., and Hasserpatcu, K. A. Uber die
Kohlensdureproduktion des Htihnerembryos.
Skand. Arch. Physiol. 10: 149. 1900.
— Uber die Wédrmeproduktion und den
Stoffwechsel des Embryos. Skand. Arch. Phys-
iol. 14: 398. 1903.
Branp, T. von Anaerobiosis in Australorbis
glabratus: Temperature effect and tissue hy-
dration. Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 45: 373.
1955.
——, McMaunon, P., and Notan, M. O. Ob-
servations on the post-anaerobic metabolism of
some fresh water snails. Physiol. Zool. 28: 35.
1955.
———, and Meniman, B. Relations between pre-
and post-anaerobic oxygen consumption in some
fresh water snails. Biol. Bull. 104: 301. 1953.
———, Noan, M.O., and Mann, E.R. Observa-
tions on the respiration of Australorbis glabra-
tus and some other aquatic snails. Biol. Bull.
95: 199. 1948.
Crowes, G. H. A., Kevrcn, A. K., SrRITTMATTER,
C. F., and Watter, C. P. Action of nitro-
and halophenols upon oxygen consumption and
phosphorylation by a cell-free particulate system
from Arbacia eggs. Journ. Gen. Physiol. 38:
555. 1950.
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. l
Craps, E.D. The fertilization process in the snail
Lymnaea stagnalis appressa Say. Biol. Bull.
53: 67. 1927.
Hormes,S.J. The early development of Planorbis.
Journ. Morphol. 16: 369. 1900.
LanKkesterR, E. R. Observations on the develop-
ment of the pond snail Lymnaeus stagnalis and
on the early stages of other Mollusca. Quart.
Journ. Mier. Sei. 14: 365. 1874.
Lowrance, E. On the early development of Stag-
nicola kingi (Meek)—the Utah ribbed snail.
Bull. Univ. Utah. 1934.
Lynn, W. G., and Brann, T. von Studies on the
oxygen consumption and water metabolism of
turtle embryos. Biol. Bull. 88: 112. 1945.
Meutman, B., and Branp, T. von Further
studies on the anaerobic metabolism of some
fresh water snails. Biol. Bull. 100: 199. 1951.
Murray, M. A. Physiological ontogeny. A.
Chicken embryos. II. Catabolism. Chemical
changes in fertile eggs during incubation.
Selection of standard conditions. Journ. Gen.
Physiol. 9: 1. 1925.
Newton, W. L., and Branp, T. von Comparative
physiological studies on two geographical strains
of Australorbis glabratus. Exp. Parasitol. 4:
244. 1955.
Roney, H. B. The effect of temperature and light
on oxygen consumption and rate of development
of Helisoma. Ecology 24: 218. 1948.
Wernsacu, EH. C. Metabolic block in minced snail
tissue. Federation Proceed. 11: 307. 1952.
Studies on the intermediary metabolism of
the aquatic snail Australorbis glabratus. Arch.
Biochem. Biophys. 42: 231. 1953.
The influence of pentachlorophenol on
oxidative and glycolytic phosphorylation in snail
tissue. Arch. Biochem. Biophys. 64: 129.
1956.
———, and No.an, M. O. The effect of pentachloro-
phenol on the metabolism of the snail Australor-
bis glabratus. Exp. Parasitol. 5: 276. 1956.
Vague similarities in certain properties are never sufficient to determine
a person who earnestly seeks for the truth and is not shackled by hypoth-
eses.— J. BERGMAN.
JANUARY 1957
HESS AND SHAFFRAN: CORTISONE AND FORMATION
OF GLYCOGEN 17
BIOCHEMISTRY .—The effect of cortisone on the formation of glycogen from 2-C-14
labeled alanine and lactic acid.| W. C. Hess and I. P. SHarrran, Georgetown
University School of Medicine.
(Received November 26, 1956)
The mechanism whereby cortisone stimu-
lates the production of liver glycogen is un-
known. Ever since the classical study of
Long, Katzin, and Dry (/) it has been gen-
erally accepted that tissue protein is the
source of the carbons in the glycogen. Using
the glyconeogenic amino acids glycine and
alanine, Hess and Shaffran (2, 3) showed
that cortisone did not increase the produc-
tion of liver glycogen from glycine but did
produce a slight increase from alanine. When
2-C-14 labeled DL-alanine and glycine were
fed the amount of labeled carbon incorpo-
rated at the time of maximum liver glycogen
formation was found to be the same whether
or not cortisone acetate was injected into the
animal (4).
It is possible that cortisone acetate may
act by influencing the rate of release or in-
corporation of amino acids in tissue protein
and consequently affect liver glycogen pro-
duction. The previous experiments (4) gave
no information on rate of incorporation of
the labeled carbon in either liver or muscle
glycogen and protein. In the present series
of experiments cortisone acetate and either
2-C-14 labeled DL-alanine or DL-lactic acid
were given to fasting normal rats at the same
time. Determination of liver and muscle gly-
cogen and protein nitrogen were made at in-
tervals up to 72 hours. The radioactivity of
the liver and muscle glycogen and protein
were measured, and also that of the respired
carbon dioxide and in the urine.
EXPERIMENTAL
The same procedures for the administra-
tion of the DL-alanine and DL-lactic acid
and the determination of glycogen were em-
ployed as previously described (3, 4). Rats,
weighing 100 to 150 g, were fasted for 24
hours and then given either 500 mg of 2-C-
14 DL-alanine or DL-lactic acid. When corti-
sone acetate was given 5 mg were injected
intramuscularly at the same time that the
1 These experiments were supported, in part,
by a contract with the Atomic Energy Com-
mission.
compound was fed by stomach tube. The
radioactivity of the compounds fed varied
from 1.0 to 1.5 X 10° counts per minute,
carrier DL-alanine and carrier DL-lactic
acid were used to dilute the activity of the
radioactive compounds, the 2-C-14 lactic
acid was purchased and used as the zinc salt.
The proteins from a weighed aliquot of liver
and muscle were isolated by the procedure
of Levine and Tarver (5) and the nitrogen
content determined. The radioactivity of the
isolated liver and muscle glycogen and pro-
tein was determined using an open window
gas flow counter. In one series of experiments
the rats were placed in a glass metabolism
cage and the activity of the respired carbon
dioxide and in the urine was counted.
RESULTS
Table 1 contains the data on the glycogen
content of the liver in all the experiments
and also the amount of the labeled carbon
that was incorporated. For each series of ex-
periments the average values are given, at
least six rats were used in each experiment.
The specific activity of the liver glycogen,
calculated as percent of the administered
dose per 100 mg of glycogen, is charted for
each of the experimental series in Fig. 1.
The data on the relationships between
liver weight and body weight are given in
Table 2, the results on the determinations of
the liver protein nitrogen and the percent
incorporation of the 2-C-14 activity in the
liver protein are also included. In order to
provide a uniform basis for comparison the
values are expressed per 100 g of body weight’
The initial weights and also the weights
at the end of 72 hours of the rats on the sev-
eral experimental regimens are given in T’a-
ble 3. The urine nitrogen values are also
included in this table and are expressed as
mg. of nitrogen excreted during the 72 hours
period per 100 g of body weight. Table 4
gives the data on the glycogen content of the
muscle and the nitrogen content of the iso-
lated muscle protein.
The radioactivity of the respired CO,
18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 1
= 2g
Ld
5
@) ~{s}
>
—}
ro)
D
eee
O
1S)
x ©
zZ
Ww
ro)
Gy 5
Oo
>
a |
©
4
ac
uw
ea
03
2
(ep)
Re
Z
=)
oO
Ope
So
LACTIC ACID
" "+ CORTISONE
ALANINE
W + CORTISONE
40 50 60 70 80
HOURS
Fra. 1.—Specifie activity/time relationships of the 2-C-14 fed to that found in the liver glycogen
after 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24 hours from 2-C-14
DL-alanine was 2.1, 5.6, 30.4, and 62.8 per-
cent respectively of the administered dose.
When DL-alanine and cortisone acetate were
given the values for the same periods were
1.8, 5.3, 28.3, 32.8, and 63.8 percent, respec-
tively. The activity in the urine for the 24
hour DL-alanine periods was 15.2 percent of
TABLE 1.—LiveR GLYCOGEN CONTENT AND C-14
INCORPORATION
Alanine Lactic acid
, Cortisone Cortisone| Cor-
Time tisone
(hours) Gly.
Tac. (Gly) Tac. |G | Tne. [SY Ine. | S| 7
% ° | % CN % 1% v
1 0.5 | 0.3 | 0.3 | 0.5 | 0.6 | 0.7 | 0.4 | 0.9 0.4
3 123) | OL9e 1 Se eS 226 2s 22a 2s: Ona
6 8.9 | 3.5 |10.3 | 4.5 | 6.1 | 4.0 | 8.4 | 5.1 1.6
8 6.5 | 2.5 | 7.8 | 38.2 | 6.9 | 3.2 | 6.7 | 4.0 ily
12 6.1 | 2.2))| 8:1) | 2.8 |.6.7 | 1.29) |k5.1 | 354 Werf
16 PRU ORS | Zale Ro 4a Sin) eileen zial btm |leoy3 0) 2.4
24 0.2 | 0.1 | 7.9 | 3.6 | 0.2 | 0.1 | 3.8 | 2.5 2.5
31 9.8 | 4.1 10.2 | 4.3 3.8
40 12.9 | 4.3 16.1 | 4.8 4.0
48 10.7 | 4.6 7.4 | 4.0 3.8
72 6.0 | 4.3 2.9 | 3.4 3.3
the administered dose and for the DL-ala-
nine plus cortisone periods 14.5 percent.
DISCUSSION
The 2-C-14 of the DL-alanine and DL-
lactic acid was rapidly incorporated into the
liver glycogen, 9 and 7 percent, respectively,
of the administered doses were found at the
end of 6 hours, the peak period for glycogen
production. Disappearance of the glycogen
and the labeled carbon was likewise rapid,
at the end of 16 hours 1.1 and 3.8 percent
remained from the alanine and the lactic
acid respectively. When 5 mg of cortisone
acetate was given at the same time either
DL-alanine or DL-lactic acid was given the
fate of the labeled carbon was quite differ-
ent. The initial incorporation was just as
rapid and approximately to the same extent
as when cortisone was not given but subse-
quently the labeled carbon remained in the
glycogen. There was a slight dip both in the
actual percent incorporated and in the spe-
cific activity between the eighth and the
twenty-fourth hours, and then there was a
JANUARY 1957
marked increase both in the amount incor-
porated and in the specific activity. The in-
crease in specific activity must mean that
some of the labeled carbon has been held
elsewhere in the animal body and was then
released and incorporated into the glycogen.
There was no change in the rate of oxida-
tion of the DL-alanine as reflected by the
rate of appearance of the labeled carbon in
the respired CO, with or without the ad-
ministration of the cortisone acetate. The
rate of elimination was approximately the
same as that found for glycine and serine
(6, 5). Boutwell and Chiang have reported a
slight decrease in the rate of CO. formation
from C-14 labeled glucose following corti-
sone acetate administration (7). However,
Welt et al. were unable to find any difference
in the rate of CO, production in rats fed
glucose with or without cortisone (8).
TABLE 2.—LiveR WEIGHT, PROTEIN NITROGEN
CONTENT, AND C-14 INcoRPORATION
| 6 6
Time Mee Lactic acid Gar ieeealigtneng
(hours) Cortisone Cortisone
6 FAG e350, 3.5 3.7 | 3.6 3.7 3.5
B| 95 88 87 | 92 86 90
€} 0.88 1.16 0.88 | 1.00
12 AU 3s6 3.50 3.5 SAD 3.6 3.6
|B} 96 90 90 97 96 94
1G] 1.40 2.00| 1.28 1.20
ZAGEAU|S- Onn |i) 1354 3.7 3.3 3.5 3.4
B/93 | 107 92 100 104 96
(G@aee20) | 1.28 1.00 1.12
48 Al} 3.4 | 3.6 3.5 3.5 3.9 3.4
Bi 95 | 117 94 108 117 98
Cc} 0.72 1.12 0.60 0.75
72 WNW Boch ae en 3.4 3.9 4.0 3.3
B| 95 122 98 120 125 104
C} 0.80 | 1.14 0.40 | 0.60
N g. liver mg. liver protein N d
~ 100 g. body wt. 3 100 g. body wt. 5
% ince. in liver protein
100 g. body wt.
TaBLE 3.—INITIAL AND 72-Hour Bopy WEIGHTS
AND URINE NirroGEN CoNnTENT
Weight A
Loss Urine Urine nitrogen
Init. |72 hrs.| 7 g. | 100 g. body wt.
g. g.
Alanine 130) |) 110) | 15 | 0.46 0.42
+ Corti- THOS 925 21 Oe sul 0.55
sone
Lactie acid 126 | 102 | 19 | 0.40 0.39
+ Corti- 112 | 86 23 | 0.39 0.45
sone
Fasting | 135 | 113 | 16 | 0.40 0.35
Cortisone 110 | 86 | 22 | 0.42 0.49
HESS AND SHAFFRAN: CORTISONE
AND FORMATION OF GLYCOGEN 19
There are several possible places where the
labeled carbon could have been held and
subsequently released, among these are liver
protein or lipide, muscle glycogen, protein,
or lipide or in the intracellular fluid. The
ratio of liver weight to the nitrogen content
of the liver protein was greater when corti-
sone was administered than that of the con-
trol that received only DL-alanine or DL-
lactic acid. Other investigators have also
noted the increase in the protein content of
the liver following cortisone administration
(9, 10). A slight increase at the end of 24
hours in the percent incorporation of the
labeled carbon in the liver protein was found
following cortisone administration. At the
end of 72 hours most of the labeled carbon
had disappeared, however the total amount
leaving the liver was too small to account for
the increase in the specific activity of the
liver glycogen. Pesch and Clark (11) used
the liver slice technic and found that corti-
sone increased the uptake of labeled glycine
into liver protein.
The muscle glycogen content was in-
creased following the administration of cor-
tisone, it reached a maximum value at the
end of 24 hours and then decreased, at the
end of 72 hours the values were still higher
than those found on fasting or with DL-
alanine or DL-lactic acid alone. The activity
of the muscle glycogen formed at the end of
24 hours was not affected by cortisone but
the loss in activity was slightly more rapid
following cortisone at the end of 72 hours.
The effect of cortisone on the extent of in-
corporation of the labeled carbon in muscle
protein was somewhat more noticeable. At
the end of 24 hours the amount incorporated
following cortisone was almost half of that
found with either DL-alanine or DL-lactic
acid alone. At the end of 72 hours there was
no labeled carbon left in the muscle protein
with cortisone and DL-alanine and only 0.06
percent with DL-alanine alone.
These findings with muscle protein sug-
gest the possibility that cortisone may pre-
vent incorporation of the carbon from the
deaminized amino acid residue into muscle
protein, thus increasing the size of the pool
for glycogen formation. These residues could
then return to the liver and be incorporated
into glycogen. As a result the specific activ-
ity of the liver glycogen would increase as
was found, Fig. 1. Marshall and Friedberg
20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(12) have found a decrease in uptake of the
C-14 label of carboxy] labeled glycine in the
protein fraction of muscle and kidney after
giving cortisone. Collateral evidence for this
explanation of the increase in specific activ-
ity is also found in the data of Tilton, To-
nalba, and Ingle (73) who gave cortisone
acetate subcutaneously to adrenalectomized,
eviscerated rats and found an increase in the
plasma level of amino acids. These amino
acids could come from tissue turnover and
reflect the blockage by cortisone of the syn-
thesis of protein in the peripheral tissue.
There was a greater decrease in the pro-
tein nitrogen per gram muscle after cortisone
administration than on fasting or feeding the
labeled compounds without cortisone. Like-
wise there was a greater decrease in total
body weight, Table 4. The total nitrogen
excretion during 72 hours per 100 g of body
weight was greater following cortisone, aver-
aging 80 mg. per 100 g. Since the muscle
contains 3.2 percent protein nitrogen this
amount is equivalent to 2.2 g of muscle. The
average increase in weight loss induced by
cortisone was 5.6 g per 100 g of body weight.
TaBLe 4.—Muscite GuycoGEN AND PROTEIN
NiTRoGEN ContTENT, C-14 INCORPORATION
Time in hours
Compound
6 12 24 48 72
Alanine A | 0.56 | 0.56 | 0.55 0.55
B | 0.12 | 0.16 | 0.22 0.15
© | Ball Bs | BoA |B. 2.9
D | 0.03 | 0.15 | 0.12 | 0.10 | 0.06
Alanine A | 0.57 | 0.70 | 0.86 0.70
+ B | 0.13 | 0.21 | 0.27 0.10
Cortisone © 1-864 1 8.3.) 8.0 |] Bs! |) Bez
D | 0.04 | 0.08 | 0.07 | 0.03 | 0.00
Lactic acid | A | 0.55 0.58
B | 0.10 0.25
Or] Bob NN BB | BoB | BsB Boil
D | 0.05 | 0.10 | 0.15 | 0.08 | 0.06
Lactic acid | A | 0.59 0.72
B | 0.08 0.32
Cortisone C | B68 B50 | BO | Be” | 2.6
D | 0.06 | 0.09 | 0.10 | 0.03 | 0.00
Fasting A | 0.58 0.60 0.47
© | 8.2 O50) 3.3 Boll 31
Cortisone A | 0.60 0.70 0.50
© | 8.8 18.0 | 2.7 D7 2.6
A per cent glycogen;
RB Pet cent C-14 incorporated in glycogen
gram muscle :
cq per cent nitrogen in muscle protein |
g. muscle i 4
per cent C-14 incorporated in protein
D
g. muscle
vou. 47, No. 1
Less than half of the weight loss can be ex-
plained by loss of muscle, a concomitant loss
of water and perhaps of lipide most prob-
ably occurred. Kinsell et al. (14) have sug-
gested the possibility that part of the liver
glycogen formed by cortisone action comes
from body fat.
SUMMARY
Cortisone acetate and 2-C-14 labeled DL-
alanine or DL-lactic acid were fed to previously
fasted rats for periods of time varying from 1 to
72 hours. Control experiments omitting the
cortisone acetate were also run. Liver and muscle
glycogen and protein were determined and the
degree of incorporation of the labeled carbon was
measured. The excretion of the labeled carbon in
carbon dioxide and in the urine was also deter-
mined.
The carbon-14 from both DL-alanine and DL-
lactic acid was rapidly imecorporated into the
liver glycogen and also rapidly released, peak in-
corporation was at 8 hours and negligible amounts
were left after 16 hours. Cortisone acetate pre-
vented the rapid release of the carbon-14, the
specific activity of the liver glycogen increased up
to 40 hours and then began to decline. A small
amount of the carbon-14 was incorporated into
liver and muscle protein. Cortisone increased
slightly the extent of incorporation into the liver
protein but not the muscle protem. There was
no effect upon the elimination of the isotope in
the carbon dioxide or the urine.
LITERATURE CITED
(1) Lone, C. N. H., Karzin, B., and Fry, E.
Endocrin. 26: 309. 1951.
(2) Hess, W. C., and SHarrran, I. P. Proc.
Soc. Exp. Biol. and Med. 83: 804. 1953.
(3) ———. Ibid. 86: 287. 1954.
(4) ———. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 46: 20.
1956.
(5) Levins, M., and Tarver, H. Journ. Biol.
Chem. 184: 427. 1950.
(6) GREENBERG, D.M.,and Winnicx,T. Journ.
Biol. Chem. 173: 199. 1948.
(7) Boutwe.u, R. K., and Curane, R. Arch.
Biochem. and Biophys. 50: 461. 1953.
(8) Weut, I. D., Sverren, Jr. D., Inez, D. J.,
and Morey, ©. H. Journ. Biol. Chem.
197: 57. 1952.
(9) Strper, R.H.,and Porrpr,C.C. Endocrin.
52: 518. 1953.
(10) CuarKx,I.J. Biol. Chem. 200: 69. 1953.
(11) Pescu, L. A., and Cuark, J. H. Proc. Soe.
Exp. Biol. and Med. 91: 510. 1956.
(12) Marsuaut, L. M., and Frrepsrere, F. En-
docrin. 48: 113. 1951.
(13) Truton, M. M., Tonasie, G., and Inetz, D.
J. Metab. Clin. and Exp. 4: 424. 1955.
(14) Kinsey, L. W., Micnants, G. D., Marcen,
S., Oarrripce, J. W., Boutne, L., and
Batcu, H. E. Journ. Clin. End. and
Metab. 14: 161. 1954.
January 1957
REED: HERPETOFAUNA OF VIRGINIA 21
HERPETOLOGY —Conitributions to the herpetofauna of Virginia, 2: The reptiles
and amphibians of Northern
municated by Doris M. Cochran.)
Neck. CiypE F. Ruep, Baltimore, Md. (Com-
(Received September 12, 1956)
Northern Neck is the peninsula that hes
to the south of the Potomac River and is
bounded on the north by that river, on the
south by the Rappahannock River, and on
the east by the Chesapeake Bay. As the
Maryland State line goes to the shore of
the Potomac River on the southern side,
many of the deep-sea turtles that get up the
Potomac River may be considered both as
Maryland and Virginia records. Five coun-
ties make up the peninsula (from the
northernmost to the southernmost): King
George, Westmoreland, Richmond, North-
umberland, and Lancaster.
The Peninsula is made up of coastal soils
only. There are some swampy areas and
mill ponds, but for the most part of the land
it is dry and woodsy. Several plants reach
their northern limit of distribution, west of
the Chesapeake Bay, on this Peninsula,
as for example Asarwm virginicum (heart-
leaves), Oxydendrum arboreum (sourwood),
and Galax aphylla (wandflower).
Since collections of the herpetofauna are
rather meager in museums for this penin-
sula, the author has collected rather exten-
sively in this region for several years. Some
species have never been found which un-
doubtedly are there, as Hyla cinerea, Hyla
versicolor, Plethodon cinereus, and the Am-
bystomas. Descriptions of “swamp pup-
pies” may be Ambystomas, but I have not
been able to find any. Large red salamanders
with black spots were reported to the author
by natives around Moraticco in Lancaster
County. While inquirmg about toads, the
author was told that all the toads vanished
some years ago, with apparently no cause.
However, in the last few years, they have
been reappearing. Both species have been
caught on the peninsula by the author.
Deep-sea turtles seem to be quite common
off the eastern shores of Northumberland
and Lancaster Counties in the Chesapeake
Bay and up the lower end of the Potomac
River (which would actually be Maryland
waters). Capt. Walter J. Biddlecomb of
Fairport is a fisherman in this region and
reported to the author that several of the
sea turtles are very common at certain times
of the year. As many as four Caretta or
loggerheads have been caught at a time in
the nets. Three were presented to the author
by Captain Biddlecomb from a_ single
eatch, along with a Ridley’s turtle. A picture
of a leatherback caught by Capt. Biddle-
comb in 1952 is illustrated herem (Higeal)):
Diamondbacks are fairly common, there
being two types as mentioned below.
(es Sore
mLinGe 1.—Capt. Walter J. Biddlecomb and son
with largest turtle (Dermochelys c. corvacea)
eyercauent in Chesapeake Bay. See listing no. 35,
p. 20.
i
22, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Below is given an annotated list of speci-
mens that have been collected or studied
by the author. With more extensive collect-
ing, the several species which should be
here may be added in the future.
1. Hyla cructfer crucifer Wied—Northern
spring peeper. LancastprR County: White
Stone, July 6, 1948, R. L. Hoffman (U.S.N.M.
no. 131939).
2. Scaphiopus holbrooky holbrooki (Harlan)—
Spadefoot toad. (Fowler, Copeia, 1918, no. 55: 44.
Tappahannock, Essex County, which is just
across the Rappahannock River from Richmond
County.)
3. Rana clamitans Latreille—Green frog.
LANCASTER County: 2 miles south of Lively,
August 17, 1948, R. L. Hoffman (U.S.N.M. no.
132404); 1 mile north of Moraticco. May 27,
1956, Reed 1047. Ricumonp County: Ivondale
near Farnham, June 5, 1954, Reed 899-904;
June 29, 1954, Reed 931 and 988.
4. Rana palustris WeConte—Pickerel frog.
Lancaster County: Kemper’s Mill Pond near
Kilmarnock, June 5, 1954, Reed 905-906.
5. Rana catesbeiana Shaw—Bull frog. Lan-
CASTER County: Kemper’s Mill Pond near
Kilmarnock, June 5, 1954, Reed observ.; pond
near Lancaster, May 27, 1956, Reed observ.
6. Bufo woodhousei fowlert Hinckley—Fowler’s
toad. NorTrHUMBERLAND County: fields _ be-
tween Reedville and Ophilia, June 9, 1956, Reed
1157-58.
7. Bufo terrestris americanus Holbrook—
American toad. WESTMORELAND CouUNTY: near
Chandler’s Mill Pond, May 29, 1954, Reed 896.
8. Desmognathus fuscus fuscus (Green)—
Dusky salamander. Kine Groree County:
U.S.N.M. no. 45875. RicuMonp County: Near
Village, edge of pond, May 29, 1954, Reed 889.
Lancaster County: Under log near Chinn’s
Mill, June 29, 1954, Reed 936. NorTHUMBER-
LAND County: Heathsville, May 29, 1954, Reed
888.
9. Hurycea bislineata bislineata (Green)—Two-
lined salamander. LANcAsTER County: U.S.N.M.
nos. 131927-28.
10. Pseudotriton montanus montanus Baird—
Eastern mud salamander. KiInG GrorRGE
County: Aylett, Dr. Paul R. Burch, Radford
College. (See Hoffman, Herpetologica 4 (2): 68.
1947.)
11. Cnemidophorus sexlineatus (Linnaeus)—
Eastern race runner. LANCASTER COUNTY:
Kemper’s Mill Pond, on dry hill slopes, plentiful,
May 29, 1954, Reed 884. RicHMonp County:
Near Village, July 1955, Reed. WrestMORELAND
County: Observed on sandy slopes, June 5,
VOL. 47, No. 1
1954, Reed; Kina Grorce County: Near
Shiloh, August 10, 1955, Reed observ.
12. Humeces fasciatus (Linnaeus)—Five-lined
skink. LANCASTER County: North of Kilmarnock,
May 29, 1954, Reed 891; south of Lively, June 5,
1954, Reed 915. RicuMonp County: South of
Warsaw. June 5, 1954, Reed 916-917. Wust-
MORELAND County: Chandler’s Mill Pond, June
5, 1954, Reed 909. Kine Grorce County: Near
Shiloh, August 10, 1955, Reed observ.
13. Eumeces inexpectatus Taylor—Florida five-
lined skink. NorTHUMBERLAND County: 1 mile
north of Heathsville, May 15, 1954, Reed 954
(verified by Walter Newman). (See Reed,
Herpetologica, 1956.)
14. Humeces laticeps (Schneider)—Greater five-
lined skink. Lancaster County: North of
Kilmarnock in wood pile, May 29, 1954, Reed
894. Kina Groren County: Near Shiloh, Aug.
10, 1955, Reed observ.
15. Sceloporus undulatus hyacinthinus (Green)
—Northern fence swift. LANcAsTER CoUNTY:
Near Kemper’s Mill Pond, May 29, 1954, Reed
890; June 5, 1954, Reed 908; south of Lively,
June 5, 1954, Reed 907. NorrHuMBERLAND
County: South of Wicomico Church, May 29,
1954, Reed 885-886; 1 mile north of Heathsville,
May 29, 1954, Reed 892-893. RicoMonp County:
Near Haynesville, May 29, 1954, Reed 887;
south of Warsaw, June 5, 1954, Reed 918; near
Village, July 10, 1955, Reed observ. Kine
GrorGE County: Near Shiloh, August 10,
1955, Reed observ.
16. Natrix sipedon sipedon (Linnaeus)—Com-
mon water snake. WESTMORELAND CouNTY:
Chandler’s Mill Pond, north of Montross,
August 10, 1955, Reed observ.; Dunn, Copeia,
1918, no. 53: 25.
17. Opheodrys aestivus (Lumaeus)—Rough
green snake. LANcAsTER County: U.S.N.M. no.
131930. NorTHUMBERLAND County: Climbing
over shrubs, south of Wicomico Church, May 29,
1954, Reed 895. WrsTMORELAND County:
Chandler’s Mill Pond, north of Montross, August
10, 1955, Reed observ.
18. Elaphe obsoleta obsoleta (Say)—Pilot black
snake. WESTMORELAND County: Hampton Hall
Creek, May 29, 1954, Reed; Chandler’s Mill
Pond, north of Montross, August 10, 1955, Reed
observ. RicuMonp County: At Ivondale near
Farnham, June 29, 1954, Reed observ. Kine
GrorGe County: Near Shiloh, 6-7 foot long,
August 10, 1955, Reed observ.
19. Elaphe guttata guttata (Linnaeus)—Corn
snake. WESTMORELAND County: Hague, DOR,
May 27, 1956, Reed 1046.
20. Coluber constrictor constrictor Linneaus—
Black racer. Kine GrorGe County: Oak Grove,
JANUARY 1957
DOR, June 9, 1956, Reed observ.; DOR, south
of Potomac River Bridge near Dahlgren, June 9,
1956, Reed 1156.
21. Thamnophis sauritus sauritus (Linnaeus)—
Eastern ribbon snake. LaNcasTER County: Near
Laneaster, climbing over shrubs along creek,
June 29, 1954, Reed 935.
22. Carphophis amoena amoena (Say)—East-
em worm snake. Shore of Potomac, Virginia,
U.S.N.M. no. 59954.
23. Storeria dekayt dekayt (Holbrook)—De-
Kay’s snake. RicHMonD County: Ivondale near
Farnham, June 5, 1954, Reed 913.
24. Storeria occipitomaculata occipitomaculata
(Storer)—Red-bellied snake. LANCASTER County:
South of Lively in sawdust pile, June 5, 1954,
Reed 914; shed skin, June 15, 1954.
25. Heterodon platyrhinos platyrhinos Latreille
—Hog-nosed snake. KING GEORGE COUNTY:
Near Shiloh, August 10, 1955, Reed observ.;
Dunn, Copeia, 1918, No. 53: 25. WESTMORELAND
Cotnty: Chandler’s Mill Pond, north of Mon-
tross, August 10, 1955, Reed observ.
26. Ancistrodon contortrix (Linnaeus)—Cop-
perhead. WESTMORELAND County: Reported by
natives from Chandler’s Mill Pond region, north
of Montross, August 10, 1955 (Reed).
27. Terrapene carolina carolina (Linnaeus)—
Common box turtle. King GrorGe County:
DOR, near Potomac River Bridge, June 10,
1956, Reed observ.; near Osso, August 10, 1955;
3 miles west of King George, August 10, 1955,
Reed observ. WESTMORELAND County: Oak
Grove, June 10, 1956, Reed observ.; west of
Montross, June 10, 1956, Reed observ.; south of
Oak Grove, May 29, 1954, Reed 882. NortHuMB-
ERLAND County: Near Burgess Store, May 29,
1954, Reed 880; near Remo, May 27, 1956, Reed
observ. LANCASTER County: Near Lancaster,
May 27, 1956, Reed observ.
28. Lepidochelys kempi (Garman)—Ridley
turtle. NoRTHUMBERLAND County: Reedville,
U.S.N.M. no. 86814; 3 miles off Great Wicomico
Lighthouse, in Chesapeake Bay, June 6, 1956,
Capt. Walter J. Biddlecomb collector. Specimen
donated to the U.S.N.M. (no. 137573) by Reed,
31 pounds.
29. Chelydra serpentina serpentina (Linnaeus)—
Snapping turtle. NorrHuMBERLAND CouNTY:
Village, crossing road, May 27, 1956, Reed
observ. WESTMORELAND County: South of Oak
Grove, May 29, 1954, Reed 881; near Colonial
Beach, May 15, 1954, Reed 855. LAaNcASTER
County: Near Lancaster, June 29, 1954, Reed
observ.
30. Chrysemys picta picta (Schneider)—Eastern
painted turtle. NoRTHUMBERLAND County: Mill
pond 4 miles east of Callao, June 29, 1954, Reed
REED: HERPETOFAUNA OF VIRGINIA 23
932; north of Heathsville, May 29, 1954, Reed
878-879. WESTMORELAND County: South of Oak
Grove, May 29, 1954, Reed 882; DOR, just west
of Potomac Beach, June 10, 1956, 6 observed on
logs in pond, Reed observ.; near Maple Grove,
August 10, 1955, Reed observ. LANCASTER
County: Near Lancaster, June 29, 1954, Reed
observ. Kane Grorce County: DOR, near
Potomac River Bridge, June 10, 1956, Reed
1065; just north of Maple Grove, August 10,
1956. Reed. Ricamonp County: Ivondale near
Farnham, June 5, 1954, Reed 912.
31. Sternotherus odoratus (Latreille)—Common
musk turtle. NoRTHUMBERLAND County: North
of Heathsville in pond, May 29, 1954, Reed 897;
LANcAsTER-RicHMoND County Line: Chinns
Mill. June 29, 1954, Reed 934.
32. Kinosternon subrubrum subrubrum (La-
cépede)—Common mud turtle. NoRTHUMBER-
LAND County: North of Heathsville in pond,
May 29, 1954, Reed 898; same locality, June 5,
1954, Reed 911; 4 miles east of Callao, June 29,
1954, Reed 933. LancastER County: Near
Lancaster, June 29, 1954, Reed observ. Wust-
MORELAND County: Dunn, Copeia, 1918, no.
53: 20.
33. Malaclemys terrapin terrapin (Schoepff)—
Northern diamondback terrapin. NoRTHUMBER-
LAND County: Off Fairport, Capt. Walter J.
Biddlecomb, observ., 1956.
34. Malaclemys terrapin centrata (Latreille)—
Southern diamondback terrapin. WrsTMORE-
LAND County: Near Machadoc, U.S.N.M. no.
65117. Carr gives the range as “vicinity of Cape
Hatteras southward to southern peninsula of
Florida”’; Schmidt gives the same range. Captain
Biddlecomb, who has collected in the mid-
Chesapeake Bay for many years, states that
there are two types of diamondbacks which he
catches off Fairport, Northumberland County,
Va. This would indicate that both subspecies live
in the lower Chesapeake Bay.
35. Dermochelys coriacea coriacea (Linnaeus)—
Leatherback turtle. NorTHUMBERLAND CounNTY:
2 miles southeast of Great Wicomico Light
House, near Fairport, May-June 1952, Capt.
Walter J. Biddlecomb collector (June 7, 1952,
Richmond News Leader), 700 pounds, 7 feet long,
8-foot flipper span. Fig. 1.
36. Caretta caretta caretta (Linnaeus)—At-
lantic loggerhead turtle. NoRTHUMBERLAND
County: 3 miles off Great Wicomico Lighthouse,
near Fairport, June 6, 1956, Capt. Walter J.
Biddlecomb collector. Three specimens caught
and observed. Two weighed about 110 pounds
each and let go. The third specimen weighed 134
pounds, donated to U.S.N.M. (no. 137572) by
Reed.
24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 1
ZOOLOGY .—Spongilla discoides Penney: A correction. JamEs T. Penney, Uni-
versity of South Carolina. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received October 9, 1956)
The identification of Spongilla discoides
Penney (1933a) as a new species was based
upon the presence of gemmules in the shape
of biconvex discs, the absence of gemmule
spicules, the presence of small equibirotu-
lates (microscleres) in the dermal mem-
brane, and the presence of two types of
flesh spicules (also microscleres) in the
tissue. Specimens containing these gem-
mules were first collected in 1930, and
many others were obtained for four or five
years afterward. They were extensively
used in reduction experiments (Penney,
1933b). The same sponge, without gem-
mules, was used for routine class experiments
and in dermal membrane studies for many
years. Most of this work was conducted
during the spring and summer and no at-
tempt at year round collecting was made.
No gemmules were observed during this
period. The pond from which this sponge
was collected has been dry for the last two
years.
Recent collections from various areas
within South Carolina have yielded speci-
mens in close association with bryozoans.
The presence of the latter led to the idea
that the gemmules of Spongilla discoides
may have been statoblasts of a bryozoan.
The United States National Museum was
requested to send my slide of the ‘gem-
mules” of Spongilla discoides to a competent
authority on the bryozoa. Dr. Mary D.
Rogick identified these ‘“‘gemmules” as
statoblasts of a phylactolaematous bryozoan.
Many hundreds of young sponges of this
species have been reared on slides in the
laboratory from adult specimens by a
method described earlier (Penney, 1932).
All distinctive characters listed above with
the exception of gemmules and absence of
gemmule spicules were constantly observed.
It was noted in the original description
(Penney, 1933, p. 4) that the two types of
flesh spicules. resembled closely the gemmule
spicules of Heteromeyenia ryderi and that a
new genus was possibly indicated.
Jewell (1952) remarked upon the similar-
ity of the birotulate dermal spicules to those
of Corvospongilla and Corvomeyenia and also
the similarity of the two types of flesh
spicules to the birotulate gemmule spicules
of Heteromeyenia ryderi. Jewell also stated
that on several occasions typical gemmule
birotulates had been found ‘‘embedded in
the flesh, when no gemmules were present,
in both Corvomeyenia everetti, and Hetero-
meyenia ryderiv. It is possible that the
scleroblasts had formed these spicules in
anticipation of the development of gem-
mules around which they would later have
been arranged, or that some condition in-
hibited the development of gemmules
without equally affecting the formation of
the spicules which should surround them”’
(p. 454). This writer has also observed free
gemmule spicules in Heteromeyenia rydert.
Owing to the lack of gemmule spicules and
the close similarity of other spicules to those
of the subfamily Meyeninae, Jewell very
soundly established the genus Parameyenia,
with Spongilla discoides Penney, 1933, as
genotype.
Weltner (1913) created the genus Corvo-
meyenia for the species of Heteromeyenia
having birotulate dermal spicules.
With the knowledge that Spongilla dis-
coides 1s now without known gemmules, that
it does have birotulate dermal spicules, and
on the basis of Jewell’s and my own observa-
tion of free gemmule spicules, I propose that
Spongilla discoides become Corvomeyenia dis-
coides (Penney).
LITERATURE CITED
JEWELL, Minna E. The genera of North American
fresh-water sponges. Parameyenia, new genus.
Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. 55: 445-457. 1952.
PENNEY, James T. A simple method for the study
of living fresh-water sponges. Science 75: 341.
1932.
———. A new fresh-water sponge from South Caro-
lina. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 88: 1-5. 1933a.
———. Reduction and regeneration in fresh-water
sponges (Spongilla discoides). Journ. Exp.
Zool. 65: 475-492. 1933b.
WELTNER, W. Stisswasserschwémme (Spongillidae)
der Deutschen Zentralafrika-Expedition 1907-
1908. Wiss. Ergebn. Deutsch. Zentr. Afr.
Exped. 1907-1908, Bd. 4, Zoologie 2, Lief 12:
475-485. 1913.
JANUARY 1957
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 25
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
1419TH MEETING, DECEMBER 16, 1956
Joun R. Mayer, of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science and the Uni-
versity of Wisconsin, spoke on Scientists and the
secondary schools.
His talk ranged widely, with abundant
quotations, over a number of aspects of the
problem of getting enough good teachers and
enough attention to the superior student in the
secondary schools. Some of the points made
were: In reply to the State Department of Edu-
cation head, who said: “We get better teaching
if we employ those who are not too good,”
he suggested that we have to find teachers who
are able to help all three groups: backward,
average, and superior, and that currently there is
little challenge to the better student. He urged
the necessity for a diversified program, one that
would treat better students differently, and
replied to the criticism that this was “un-
democratic” with the argument that in Speech,
Dramatics and Athletics, we give special treat-
ment with no thought of invidious implications.
Why should not Science be special in this sense
too?
In his view we have done a better job of pro-
viding a general education for more people than
ever before in the world’s history, particularly in
finding common ground for the gifted and the
less gifted, and in doing more for the backward.
He pointed out that the many new offerings
in the secondary schools compete with Science
when course elections are to be made. In the
AAAS program, the first responsibility for im-
proving science teaching in secondary schools lies
with the science department of universities and
colleges. They have to a large extent abdicated
this responsibility. Teacher education of science
teachers must be their function. Too many in
summer schools elect Education rather than
Science. He would like to see all teachers have
MA’s in their respective subjects: this is now
impossible but should be the ideal.
Our pressing current problem is better edu-
eation for the more gifted. He quoted Lippmann:
America is now rich enough to do both; that is,
give a general education to all and special treat-
ment to gifted. He also touches on the interesting
development called ‘‘Frontiers of Science” now in
progress in Oklahoma, and closed with a quota-
tion from the Illinois Chapter of the Mathe-
matics Association of America: “Knowledge and
the Wisdom to use it are essential to survival”.
In the discussion, Messrs. Potter, Tuckerman,
Eisenhart, Henderson, Melton, Frenkiel, Page,
Rotkin, Lashof, and others took part. Some of the
points made were: that current mathematics
texts may be seriously in error: that primary
school teaching in mathematics is wretched and
that the abominations contained in the texts are
past belief; and that it is always possible to give
instruction but never to give brains. Questions
asked were: What are the reasons for students not
taking algebra as much as they used to? Are
the teachers not there or have they lost interest
by the time they get to it? Mayer answered that
this is not known but that schools were trying to
meet the slump by providing two-track courses:
(1) General Mathematics for the 7th and 8th
erades, and (2) Algebra for those able and ready
for it. Mr. Eisenhart noted that he was glad that
Universities are now providing programs for
future teachers different from those provided for
men going in for stochastic processes or Hilbert
space. He also urged that teachers should be
checked as to their continued performance, and
that good teachers should be used for freshman.
“Should we turn out teachers or abstract papers?”
What are the motivations of teacher candidates?
Why do they enter, or more often, not enter the
profession? Answer: We do not yet know.
It was pointed out that many scientists, or
potential scientists were “lost before the sixth
grade’.
A brief notice was given of the program for
replacing the science teachers for two days, during
the Science Teachers’ Conference here in Wash-
ington. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1420TH MEBTING, JANUARY 13, 1956
Laurence A. Woop, of the National Bureau
of Standards, delivered the retiring president’s
address, Elasticity of rubber. The following is the
abstract provided by Mr. Wood. “Rubbers,
natural and synthetic, are unique in being highly
extensible and in retracting forcibly and quickly
to substantially their original dimensions when
released.
!
|
26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 1
“Tt has been found that the stress-strain curves
for extension and compression of most of the
simplest vulcanizates of natural rubber and of
the three most important synthetic rubbers are
similar in shape. The relationship is expressed by
the equation F/M = (L1 — LT *)X exp
(A-(L — L)). where F is the stress, Z the ratio
of stretched to unstretched length, and M and A
are constants. The constant M depends on the
nature of the rubber, the extent of vulcanization,
and the time of creep. The constant A has a value
of about 0.38.
“By the study of the stress-temperature re-
lations it is found that the most important
factor in the retraction of stretched rubber is the
tendency of long-chain flexible molecules to re-
turn to a configuration statistically more prob-
able than the one that the stretching has forced
them to assume. Calculations of entropy changes
arising from stretching can be made from
probability considerations, and a strain-energy
function deduced from the entropy changes.
Stresses calculated from the strain energy func-
tion agree with those observed in compression,
but are greater than those observed in extension
by almost 50 per cent at L equals 3.
A phenomenological approach shows that the
strain energy should be expressible as a function
of certain quantities called strain invariants,
calculable from the deformations. The simplest
behavior is found in the region of compression
(L less than 1), where the strain energy is merely
the first invariant times a constant calculable
from the entropy changes. For values of L
between 1.5 and 3, a different constant and an
added term involving the second strain in-
variant are required. The explanation of this
behavior in molecular terms is one of the most
important current problems of rubber elasticity.”
1421st MEBTING, JANUARY 27, 1956
Rospert M. Pace of the Naval Research
Laboratory spoke on Cosmological theories
ancient and modern. The address has been pub
lished in this Journal 46: 244-252. 1956.
FEBRUARY 10, 1956
1422pD MEETING,
JosrepH Kapnan, of the University of Cal-
ifornia at Los Angeles and chairman of the U.S.
National Committee on the IGY, read a paper
on The International Geophysical Year program of
the United States, commonly called the IGY.
International cooperation in the study of
man’s Physical environment is not new, as
witness the first International Polar Year in |
1882-83 and the Second IPY in 1932-33, but in
scope, intensity, wide-ranging geographical
coverage extending not only horizontally but
vertically to unprecedented heights (and in-
cidentally in cost) the 1957-58 international
effort surpasses them by orders of magnitude.
The year 1957-58 was proposed as the date of
this effort because a period of maximum solar
activity 1s expected then, and world-wide co-
ordinated efforts to measure the many effects to
be expected therefrom can best be carried out
through such an activity as the IGY. Histori-
cally, the story of the IGY goes back 5 years and
to meetings of the International Union of
Geodesy and Geophysics and of the International
Scientific Radio Union. These Unions recom-
mended that the International Council of
Scientific Unions do the technical planning.
Following this lead the ICSU has established a
special committee, and appropriate bodies in
cooperating countries have been called upon to
plan their national programs. In the USA the
National Academy of Sciences has established the
National Committee for the IGY, and this com-
mittee has the responsibility. Funds have been
provided by congress through the National
Science Foundation: so far in the amount of
$12,000,000. At least twice as much more will be
required in the scientific program alone before
the collection of data is completed.
Within the scope of these minutes it is im-
possible to do much more than list the current
projects and programs in which the United
States is interested. They are as follows: Aurora
and Afterglow, Cosmic Rays, Geomagnetism,
Glaciology, Ionospheric Physics, Longitude and
Latitude Determinations, Meteorology, Oceanog-
raphy, Seismology and Gravity, Solar Activity,
and Upper Atmosphere Rocket and Satellite
Studies. Each of these topics was discussed
briefly and the high lights of the programs de-
scribed. Of particular interest was a description
of the proposed satellite vehicle and the program
involving it, which goes under the same name of
“Project Vanguard”. This pioneering venture
involves launching a 21.5 pound satellite vehicle
by means of a three-stage rocket assembly which
will carry the vehicle to 300 miles before pro-
pelling it into its orbit to circle the earth at
18,000 mph, or once around the earth in 114
hours. An elliptical orbit, inclmed at about 40°
|
,
JANUARY 1957 PROCEEDINGS:
to the equator is anticipated, and the orbit will
precess forward around the earth about 25° per
revolution, while it covers all latitudes from 40°
N to 40° S. The satellite will be tracked during
its flight and will at times actually be visible to
the naked eye.
Half the satellite’s weight will be instrumenta-
tion including the telemetering system. Eight
experiments will be undertaken: air density,
composition of the earth’s crust and geodetic
determinations, temperature and pressure, meteor
observations, studies of the extreme ultraviolet
and cosmic ray intensity.
It is proposed to launch about 10 such satel-
lites, with the hope that at least five or six will
be successful.
From the program as a whole the speaker an-
ticipates startling discoveries, and an immense
body of data. Its digestion will take years and
tax even the newest systems for handling it.
The practice in cooperation gained in this field
may lead to more cooperation in other fields, and
a longed-for reduction in international tension.
In the discussion Messrs. McNish, Melton,
Tuckerman, Heilbron, Yagoda, Sangster, and
several other took part. Points were: On the
question of cost, the total over-all cost is, of
course, much in excess of $40 million if all
expeditions and the like are charged to the
IGY. Much of the satellite’s time will be spent
over uninhabited country. The orbit will be
elliptical “‘Because we probably can’t make it
circular.”” The weather balloon program is not
part of the IGY. Agreements to exchange data,
when made in advance, are usually kept. The
USSR has not announced a rocket or satellite
program of her own. The life of the satellite may
lie between 2 weeks and a year or so; we don’t
know the density of the air well enough to
predict it. There is no diplomatic problem here.
About 2000 people will be directly engaged on
the IGY in the USA. And there will probably be
different shapes of satellite, after the first
spherical one. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1956
T. H. Stmpson, of the U. S. Weather Bureau,
spoke on Aircraft instrumentation and recorders
for hurricane investigation.
The hurricane (including all storms of its type
however called: such as_ willi-willi, typhoon,
tropical storm, cyclonic storm, or equinoctial
gale) is the greatest geophysical killer we have.
1423D MEETING, FEBRUARY 24,
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 27
In its life of 8 to 10 days covering areas of
diameter of 3-400 kilometers, and traveling
thousands of miles, it dispenses energy in the
neighborhood of 300 trillion (3 X 10") KWH.
How it draws on the available energy of the at-
mosphere is a fascinating problem, as well as one
of immense practical importance. The cooperation
of the Air Force, Navy, and the Special Services
has borne fruit in the ‘‘National Hurricane Re-
search Project,” with the objective of under-
standing the formation, mechanics and move-
ment of these storms, ultimately with the hope
that some modification in their course or in-
tensity may be achieved.
The energy of hurricanes is provided in two
ways: by the spreading and sinking of air-
masses, releasing potential energy, as in a cold
front, and secondly, and predominantly, by the
release of latent heat in the rising and condensa-
tion of moist, warm air. The latter is recognized as
primary, but at the same time other energy is
fed in from anti-cyclones in the east to north to
northwest sector. If this supply fails the storm
dies very rapidly.
Several slides of wind directions in the course
of Edna, and of the seas, wind force and track of
typical storms were shown. It is apparent that
the track of such storms is not a monotonic
curve, but has wobbles of considerable amplitude.
These wobbles make detailed prediction of course
very difficult, but since the inundation caused by
the hurricane is the “real killer’, and this occurs
only in a path of limited width, precise predic-
tion is vital. We must know the internal forces.
An extensive description of the organization
and instrumentation of the project followed. It is
proposed to use Aircraft, balloons, and rockets
in the data collection program. There will be
photographs of the entire cloud system from 50
to 100 miles up using rockets; also balloons to
85-90,000 feet and aircraft at three levels 1,000
to 1,500, 15-20,000, and 30-42,000 feet; 2 B-50s
and a B-47 are used. From the data collected by
these agents, it is hoped to construct the com-
plete “energy budget” of the storm.
For navigation the APN-82 automatic Doppler
radar observes and computes position contin-
uously and automatically, gives the wind speed
and direction, and punches the data on a punch
card every 0.1 mile. PPI search radar scopes
photographed continuously, show the “rain
bands”. For temperature there are three types of
thermometer: vortex, aspirator, and stagnation.
28
(The problem here is to get a dry bulb temper-
ature in the midst of a tropical downpour.)
For humidity, the infra-red airborne hygrometer,
using the H»O absorption band is the instrument
of choice. For pressure, the radar altimeter is
continuously checked against the pressure al-
titude.
There are vertical and horizontal acceler-
ometers, time lapse cloud cameras, sea-surface-
temperature measuring instruments, cloud
physics instruments to measure icing, nuclei,
electric charges and fields, and other things; and
a battery of recorders beginning with a standard
movie camera and including a photopanel with
24 channels to record all navigation and meteor-
ological data as a back-up system to the Heiland
Recorder, and the IBM Digital Recorder with
5-23 Gang punch and Card Program Computer.
With this array of devices it is possible to process
the data from three planes in 24 hours.
We do not know explicitly what makes the
hurricanes move, nor how fast. If more heat is
produced in some area ahead of the storm there
will be more circulation through it and a reduc-
tion in pressure, and the storm will then move
that way. If we could release the energy in a
selected area we might move the storm a sig-
nificant amount. Possibly through the use of
“freezing nuclei’ it may be possible to do this.
There are of course always plenty of condensa-
tion nuclei.
In discussion Messrs. Mahan, Page, McNish,
Tuckerman, Frenkiel, Henderson, Mason, Steeler,
and others took part. The influence of land
masses in cutting off the supply of latent heat;
the circulation of tornadoes, particularly anti-
cyclonic ones; the controversy as to whether air
goes up or down in a tornado; laboratory models
of tornadoes, eye and all; and the proper way to
approach the center of a hurricane by air were
points discussed, if not exactly settled. Others
were the use of AgI and dry ice as nuclei, the
absence of cycles in weather, and Wexler’s theory
involving the increasing cleanness of the atmos-
phere owing to the lack of a renewed supply of
voleanic dust since Krakatoa and the accom-
panying increase of solar constant. (Secretary’s
abstract.)
14247H MEETING, MARCH 9, 1956
Z. 1. Suawsxy, of the Naval Ordnance Labor-
atory, spoke on High speed gas dynamics.
What happens when the impact forces be-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 1)
tween molecules are so great that they no longer
act as rigid spheres? These forces can arise at,
high Mach numbers. Here we should distinguish
between real Mach numbers at room temper- —
ature, and the so-to-speak “‘fake’”? Mach numbers |
of a wind tunnel, where the expansion has —
lowered the temperature to such a degree that |
the velocity of sound is much reduced. Small
nylon spheres, 8mm in diameter, are fired at 104
ft/sec into various gases. A luminous zone in
front of the missile appears at Mach 17 in Xenon.
The shock wave can be photographed, even |
though the velocity is 8 mm/microsecond, and
the distance from missile to shock front measured.
If there is ionization, or other means of absorbing
the energy, the shock moves closer to the missile.
Slides of the shock in Bromine at Mach 17.5
were also shown.
A theoretical discussion of the limits of gun
performance shows that guns are hard to im-
prove, as is always the case with devices that are
historically old, and shows also that there are
limiting muzzle velocities for any propellant no
matter how much is loaded in the chamber. The
best propellant has the lowest ‘“‘pc’’ 1.e. acoustic
impedance, and the highest temperature. The
maximum velocity an air gun can produce is
about 5500 ft/sec. Knowing the velocity of a
projectile at any point in its flight as it is being
accelerated in a gun gives a measure of the
“oc” of the propellant and thus of thermo-
dynamic properties.
By using a microwave radar interferometer
the position and time can be measured every
314 mm for 200 stations. The propellant giving
best performance is ‘steam heated helium,”
i.e., helium with oxygen and hydrogen added in
explosive proportions, and then touched off with
a spark. With this propellant, a 40 mm nylon
bullet has been accelerated to 11,000 ft/sec.
15,000 is expected to be the maximum attain-
able.
Question and comments were offered by Page,
Henderson, Hersey and several others. Measure-
ments are made from the muzzle end, and the
barrel is partially evacuated. The shock wave in
the remaining gas breaks the vacuum seal,
permitting the bullet to emerge undistorted by
any impact. Xenon was used in order to make a
study of ionization uncomplicated by dissoci-
ation. In general the energy in the shock is dis-
tributed in a complicated way between dis-
sociation, ionization, and excitation.
) JANUARY 1957
Informal Communications: Mr. Potter asked
Mr. Tuckerman to report on the talk given that
_ morning by Mr. Synge at the NBS, on the sub-
ject of the meaning of Time and Space. Mr.
Tuckerman obliged.
Mr. Henderson reported on the hearings be-
fore the Sub-committee on Government In-
formation of the Committee on Government
Operations, at which the question of the impact
of secrecy upon scientific progress was under
examination.
Mr. Potter reported on a book by Synge,
Science: Sense and Non-sense, and gave a brief
account of some of his own space models.
Mr. Tuckerman commented briefly on the in-
adequacies of modern education, and the small
amount of science, and most of it wrong, that
youngsters are expected to learn.
Mr. Frenkiel reported on the winners of the
Westinghouse science awards.
Mr. Brode noted that the offspring of multiple
births, of order M, and inherited brain NV, do not
have brain power of order N/M. (The speaker
and Mr. Brode are both members of identical
twin pairs.)
The Secretary commented that, in his ex-
perience, the number of informal communica-
tions at the meeting was an all-time record:
namely 6. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1956
F. G. Brickwepbb, of the National Bureau of
Standards, and a Past President of the Society
spoke on Temperatures in atomic explosions.
A great deal of information concerning the
sequence of growth of the “fireball”? and the
transfer of energy therein may be obtained
classically. The “fireball” is the familiar luminous
mass of air formed after a nuclear detonation.
For a “20 kiloton bomb” it reaches a radius of
about 500 feet.
Nuclear explosions are remarkable because of
their difference from chemical explosions. In-
eredibly high temperatures and pressures arise
in the tiny volume occupied by the fissioned sub-
stance, The energy release per cm* of TNT is
about 1.45 X 10% cal/em? whereas for WS, OF
Pu, it is about 3.5 x 10" cal/em?.
TNT and U2** have ordinarily about the same
specific heat, 0.3 cal/cm’, hence the temper-
atures that might be expected upon their det-
onation, calculated from C, = AH/AT, are
6000°K and 100 billion °K respectively. A TNT
explosion actually reaches 5000°K, but with
14257H MEETING, MARCH 23,
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 29
nuclear detonations the value is about one
thousand times less than expected: ie. only
about 50 million degrees K. Reversing the
calculation one therefore finds an apparent
specific heat of about 600 cal/em’ for the nuclear
material. This large value is due to the large
number of degrees of freedom which are pro-
vided by over 80 free electrons per fissioned
atom, and to the large heats of excitation and
ionization of the fragments.
At the enormous temperatures of nuclear
explosions the principal mode of energy transfer
is by radiation processes. The interior of the ball
of fire is in thermal equilibrium owing to the
high speeds imparted immediately to the atoms
of the engulfed atmosphere. The wavelength of
maximum energy density is 3 IN, hence the
photons are absorbed so soon after their emission
that the propagation is by diffusion of photons.
At a later stage of fireball growth the radiation
energy propagation is actually slower than the
propagation of the pressure shock. This fact has
an interesting consequence.
There are three stages of growth of the
“fireball.” The first is dominated by the radi-
ation conditions in the isothermal sphere. As the
pressure shock passes the boundary of the iso-
thermal sphere it now heats the atmosphere. The
heating is great and so the pressure front is
luminous but the temperature of the shock
heated air is not as high as the temperature of the
isothermal sphere inside the shock front. As the
“ball of fire’ grows the temperature of the
pressure shock decreases and “breakaway”
occurs; the pressure shock continuing its ad-
vance but not luminously. After a short time
the expanding iso-thermal sphere reaches the
outer surface of the fireball and is once again
seen and appears more brilliant (7) ~ 7500°K)
than the second stage (7 ~ 2000°K). The times
involved are exceedingly short, “breakaway”
occurring one hundredth of a second after
detonation.
Ten slides were shown illustrating these
points and developing the simplified model of
the complex process dominated by radiation
properties of space.
Comments and questions were offered by
Montroll, Henry, Maxwell, MeNish, Shuler,
and others. In the diffusion of radiation the mean
free path may be of less importance than the
“sitting time” of photons in the atoms and
results in radiation imprisonment. For atomic
explosions at high altitudes the rarified atmos-
30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
phere would change the character of the ex-
plosion fireball as would underwater explosions
in the relatively dense medium. The tremendous
energy gap between chemical and _ nuclear
explosions, tenths of electron volts versus 100
million volts indicates an improbable if not im-
possible solution for tapping energies of inter-
mediate values. It would be interesting to
calculate the rate entropy is produced in the ball
of fire as well as the thermodynamic quantities
presented by the speaker.
After announcing the speaker for the next
meeting, the spirited but sober discussion was
adjourned for beer and other refreshments.
All data from the AEC unclassified public
report: “The Effects of Atomic Weapons.”
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1426TH MEETING, APRIL 6, 1956
H. P. Brora, of the National Bureau of
Standards, spoke on the Stabilization of free
radicals at low temperatures.
A “free radical’ is an unstable chemical sub-
stance which lasts usually a very short time and
which is very reactive—combining with itself and
with other things. It is easier to give examples
such as nitrogen atoms, NH, CHs, etc., than
to define quite what is meant by such a sub-
stance. Reaction rates are very temperature
dependent: since at low temperatures the
velocities and the particle collision frequencies
are both reduced. It should therefore be possible
to, in a sense, ‘‘freeze’’ free radicals so that they
do not react, or at least react so much more
slowly that they can be studied at relative
leisure. It proves possible to do this at liquid
helium temperatures.
A dramatic demonstration of the actual re-
search apparatus was given by the speaker and
his assistants, in which nitrogen, after bom-
bardment in a glow discharge tube run by a
2450 MC radar generator, was collected on a
surface cooled by liquid helium. Various phe-
nomena, not always predictable, were observed,
including various green glows, colored flashes,
and exponential decays. Unobservable by the
audience, but vouched for the speaker, were
radiations in the near infrared and ultraviolet, as
well as considerable amounts of heat. Calcu-
lations from the heat released showed that the
order of 10% of the nitrogen condensed as atoms
in the solid state. Their recombination to mole-
cules then produced the various phenomena.
Several slides of the spectra of nitrogen dis-
charges and afterglow were shown for com- »
parison with the actual spectra from the tube.
One strange result is that the solid nitrogen gives
many sharp lines, an unusual phenomenon for a
solid. The doublet D and the quintet sigma levels
account for some of the bands observed, but the
Wegard-Kaplan bands are not seen. The ten-
tative explanation advanced is that the green
comes from the 2D to 4S atomic nitrogen transi-
tions. The origin of the yellow lines is not known.
The blue is molecular nitrogen *2 to *2 and the
UV from NO gamma and beta in the solid.
Other gases have been tried, and a very
efficient means of producing ozone was dis-
covered, having a yield of nearly 30 per cent.
Absorption spectra of the solids have been
photographed, and they show sharp absorption
edges. In the case of hydrogen it was found that
while molecular hydrogen is solid and opaque,
atomic hydrogen is clear and viscous. Water
vapor gives two different solids, and some HOs.
The work should be of significance in the
understanding of the solid state, will increase our
knowledge of reaction kinetics, and may lead to
new products with commercial possibilities.
In discussion Mr. Kaplan pointed out that
Wegard’s bands would not be expected, that
there might be O2 bands in the infra red, and
that there is a problem in the understanding
of quintet sigma levels. Mr. McNish mentioned
the history of aurorae and Wegard’s postulate of
glow from frozen N particles, and also Babcock’s
work on oxygen. Mr. Burstein asked if these free
radicals are the same as those postulated by
G. N. Lewis in solution. Mr. Tuckerman asked
if this was nascent nitrogen, in the old-time sense.
Both answers were yes. Mr. Herzfeld commented
on the auroral problem. Mr. Maxwell asked
about the production of O; and H.O., and
suggested that the measurement of paramagnetic
susceptibility might prove useful. Mr. Shuler
asked about the NH radical, and Mr. Rice
commented on its discovery in his laboratory,
which he made sound somewhat informal.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1427TH MEBTING, APRIL 20, 1956
Sir Grorce P. THomson, Master of Corpus
Christi College, Cambridge, England, delivered
the 25th Joseph Henry Lecture, on the subject
Atomicity and patterns. The address has been
published in this Journal 46: 201-205. 1956.
vou. 47, No. 1,
January 1957 PROCEEDINGS:
142STH MEETING, MAY 4, 1956
Terri Hit, of the Naval Medical Research
Institute, Bethesda, Md., spoke on A model for
muscular action on a molecular level.
The speaker’s colleagues, Messrs. Moralis and
Botts, have suggested a scheme to account for
muscle action and the speaker’s contribution has
been in making the relations quantitative. The
picture they propose is that the contractile
forces come from the configurational entropy of
long chain protein polymers and from electro-
static forces within them.
It is well known that the basic contractile
material in muscle is the protein myosine: a long
chain molecule whose component amino acids
are known as to quantities, not as to actual
arrangement. Myosine itself has a net negative
charge, when in biological materials at pH 7, but
the magnesium ions that are always present,
eancel this negative charge and leave a net
positive charge of one unit for each ninth amino
acid.
The other component in muscle action is
Adenosine triphosphate, a compound of adenine
and a five-carbon sugar plus three phosphate
molecules; known as ATP. ATP has nearly 4
negative charges per molecule. ATP is unstable
relative to the di-phosphate, ADP, with a reac-
tion energy of 7 to 8 KCal per mole, but the
reaction rate is negligible at pH 7. There is in
fact a resonance between the two.
Now myosine is an enzyme for this reaction.
ATP is believed to be the source of most of the
free energy for biological processes, and this
energy does the mechanical work of contraction.
How the release becomes contraction is the
problem to be solved.
Proteins have molecular weights of 70,000
within one power of ten, so there are hundreds of
amino acids per chain. Each acid can be oriented
in almost any direction with respect to its
neighbor, so in calculating the average length
of a protein molecule we have the statistical
“random walk” problem, and the most probable
configuration turns out to be a short one. Short
but not zero, since space is filled up by the chain
itself. An electric charge on the parts of the
protein molecule will tend to counteract this
tendency toward shortness. The Moralis and
Botts picture is that a relaxed protein at rest
has a net charge, furnished by Met, and the
ATP is remote from it. On contraction the ATP
attaches itself to the Mg, cancelling the charge
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 31
and causing the protein to seek a shorter con-
figuration and its lowest entropy. The enzyme
action of the myosine then splits the ATP into
ADP, which is not so closely bound to the myo-
sine, and it goes back into solution as ADP and P
while the molecule extends again. In this cycle
mechanical work has been performed. The ATP
is then reformed through the burning of fuel in
the body of the muscle.
While this proposed mechanism seems simple,
it is highly controversial. It is not known just
when the work is done, and there is a question
whether a real change in length can occur
through a change in charge. A relation between
length and tension is needed both with and
without charge. In a muscle fiber the change in
length is the order of 2:1.
The speaker has carried out calculations of the
Helmholtz free energy A, as a function of 1, V,
and N (length, volume, number of ions) on two
different pictures of the structure of the fiber:
one a random mass of molecules, the other a
‘combed” structure, in which all molecules lie
roughly parallel. The calculations can be done in
steps, from the dry protein, uncharged, through 1)
solution in water, 2) binding ions on the protein,
and 3) charging it. We then get A, and dA /dl
is T. Curves for both models were shown. The
“combed” or “accordion” model gives the greater
sensitivity to charge change because it permits a
type of ‘‘phase change” familiar to workers with
high polymers. In any case the proposed mecha-
nism seems to provide adequate extension and
contraction.
In the discussion Messrs. Henderson, Green,
Duryee, and _ several others took part. The
resemblance to the theories of the elasticity of
rubber was noted. The proposal of Flory, that
muscular action represents a change from random
to regular array, was mentioned. Other points
were: that the enzymatic action is fast, that
myosine has been studied in thread form at low
temperatures, that other ions such as bromine
will cause contraction too.
It is not known whether this model will account
for the extreme rapidity of insect wing’s motion or
not. And lastly, calcium is being studied as one
of the “relaxing factors,’’ since one alternative
theory is that ATP is already bound and the
muscle is relaxed by calcium ions. (Secretary’s
abstract.)
14297rH MEETING, MAY 17, 1956
At this joint meeting with the Washington
32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Academy of Sciences, GEoRGE WALD, of Harvard
University, delivered an address on The mecha-
nism of quantum sensitivity. This address con-
tinued the program of the Academy, which had
been devoted to the quantum aspects of vision
during the afternoon.
After a skillfully adapted paraphrase of “TI
come to bury Caesar, not to praise him’’—
Caesar being the photochemical theory of vision—
and the whole speech ironical in intention, a
series of slides showing the physiology and
biochemistry of the eye was shown. The relations
between vitamin A, retinene, and the various
“_opsins” was carefully sketched out. The
synthesis and the bleaching of rhodopsin and
iodopsin is the first reaction in line: admittedly
vision is a great deal more than this, but the
whole physiology of vision depends upon it.
The spectral sensitivity of vision as a function
of light intensity is determined by the differing
absorption spectra of rhodopsin and iodopsin.
That is to say, scotopic (dim light) vision has a
different sensitivity than does photopic (bright
light) vision, because the component purples in
the rods and cones absorb differently. This fact
underlies the Purkinje phenomenon.
A second problem is the question of dark-
adaptation. “It is the physical manifestation of
bleaching and synthesis of the pigments.” A
slide of the variation in sensitivity of the eye as it
becomes dark-adapted was illuminating, showing
that the cones gain sensitivity and approach an
asymptotic level quite quickly, while the rods
take nearly 45 minutes to develop their maxi-
mum. Analysis of the eye shows that these are the
growth curves of, respectively, iodopsin and
rhodopsin in the cone and rods.
A plot of the log of the sensitivity (reciprocal of
threshold) against the concentration of pigment
is a straight line.
A slide of the effect of vitamin A deprivation on
scotopic vision showed the dramatic character of
the recovery of this vision when the vitamin is
restored to the diet.
The third problem is the mechanism of con-
version of light to nervous excitation: What
happens? By dissolving rhodopsin in a glycerol-
water mixture and cooling to —S80°C the reac-
tions are so slowed down that the individual
steps can be followed. Light converts the rho-
dopsin to lumidopsin, which persists until
warmed to 23°, when it splits into half retinene
and half recreated rhodopsin, losing color in so
VoL. 47, No. lj}
doing. This behaviour is reminiscent of the —
photographic plate, with its latent image:
bleaching is a dark reaction, light produces only
the latent image. The bleaching is a restoring |
reaction and probably the conversion to lumi- i)
dopsin produces the excitation. Hi
For rhodopsin 45 KCal/mole is the bleaching |.
energy, and one mole of 600 my are needed to | i
bleach it. There is no temperature coefficient for — \
this reaction as long as the light is of shorter |
wavelength than this, but above this limit there
is a constantly falling sensitivity as more and
more energy is required to help the quanta excite
the rhodopsin.
Parenthetically, there are no real limits to the
sensitivity of the eye: the 4000 to 7006 A limits
merely express an average, the sensitivity out in
the red falls continuously.
It is clear from all this that the photochemical
theory is not dead.
By using a water model of the human eye the
speaker had demonstrated that bleaching a
small amount of this pigment raises the threshold
ereatly: specifically, with 006% bleached, the
threshold was up by 8.6 times. Most adaptation
seems to depend on the first little bit bleached, or
the last bit of pigment reconstructed.
A slide of the cone structure in the Perch eye
showed that the layers of pigment—rhodopsin—
are exactly one molecule thick: 41 A being their
thickness and equalling the diameter of the
molecule. Other eyes have layers twice, and four
times this. How can just one quantum stimulate
such a structure? This is still an undecided
question, and the speaker spent some time
examining the possibilities.
The symposium has made real contributions to
our understanding of the eye. The facts are —
clear: “The quantum demand for excitation rises |
in light adaptation” and ‘The concentration of
pigment is proportional to the logarithm of the
sensitivity’.
Messrs. Baumgardt, Jones and Potter took part
in the discussion, as did several others. It was
pointed out that the reactions are all in the solid
state: that all of the layers in a cone are equally
sensitive, except for a certain amount of filtering;
and that we don’t really know what happens
when the “light goes off’. The eye is in a sense
like a geiger counter, or scintillation counter, in
that one quantum can set it off, and to speak of a
threshold in such a case is perhaps misleading.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington.......................000- (Mr.) Brucz L. WiLson
Anthropological Society of Washington........................ (Mr,) Frank M. SEerzuEr
BrolosicaléSociety of Washington. ~.........-.-........+---. (Mr.) Herpert G. DEIGNAN
@Ghemicalisociety, of Washington.............0.2..+.6-000--- (Mr.) Bourpvon F. ScriBNER
Entomological Society of WashingtoOn......... 255.00. eec ence essence (Dr.) Frep W. Poos
ational Geographic Society... <....25 o2cesecic evacesee casas (Dr.) ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geological Society of Washington......................20000. (Mr.) Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................... (Dr.) FREDERICK O. CoE
COMM IAEMSTOTICAL SOCIELY = 2:5 0:05). 216: ere ee se eivinie cicileew hea sen
Botanicalgoociety, Of Washington. .-. 5.25 ..sce%seee senses cece cise (Dr.) E. H. WALKER
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters............ (Dr.) G. Furppo Gravatt
Washington Society of Engineers. ....................0e2000: (Mr.) Herpert G. Dorsry
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... (Dr.) ARNoLD ScotrT
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers......
Helminthological Society of Washington.....................200000 (Dr.) J. S. ANDREWS
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists............ (Dr.) L. A. BuRKEY
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers... (Lt. Col.) FLoyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers...............0.-
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.......... (Mr.) Doueuas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine..(Dr.) Grorer A. Hottie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............. (Mr.) THomas G. Dicers
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences........ (Dr.) F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society............. (Dr.) F. W. REICHELDERFER
CONTENTS
Botany.—New plant names published by Luigi Castiglioni. Hvu1-Lin Li
Botany.—New species of Erythroxylon from Colombia. WatTer A.
GENTNER 48.55 2 fogs ee dl ha Sos Ja Oe ee
PuHysioLocy.—Studies on the oxygen consumption of Ausiralorbis
glabratus eggs. ALINA PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ AND THEODOR
VONSBRAND): ooc.0 Se Ge bo delod cnt als Gate dies «ce
BIocHEMISTRY.—The effect of cortisone on the formation of glycogen
from 2-C-14 labeled alanine and lactic acid. W. C. Hess and
Te PeSHarrrany oa U.P oh ML ee
HERPETOLOGY.—Contributions to the herpetofauna of Virginia, 2:
The reptiles and amphibians of Northern Neck. Ciypr F. Resp..
-Zootocy.—Spongilla discoides Penney: A Correction. James T. PENNEY
PRocEEDINGS: Philosophical Society of Washington...................
Notestand) News 02/05 OTe es oS Bia i, 5, 9,
ll
17
21
24
25
10
tei dae
=m NM , 4
i VA"
Beiux 47 February 1957 NUMBER 2
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
—_—-
————
Published Monthly by the
AS HINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHESTER H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNaALD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs ‘of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the Journat and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
‘/ . minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReHpER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D.C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..............--.-----+---->- $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol. Ny Nea Miacage $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22; incl. (21 numbers per vol.). so abl) 0.60
Vol. 23 to current, vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourNnat (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
MonocraPu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX to JoURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS..............-00-eeeeeees $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..........................--- $25.00
Singleivolumes jun boundseeeeer crete eee eee arre Lahaina e 2.00
Singlemnumbers) 2.12.5 lik divi cise a seuaee oieoeeetee eet oy ees re eee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specur, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47 February 1957 No. 2
BOTANY —The evolutionary significance of the endosperm and its bearing on the
origin of angiosperms. Hvt-Lrn Li, Morris Arboretum, University of Penn-
svlvania.
(Received November 6, 1956)
The process of ‘‘double fertilization,” first tenable (Brink and Cooper, 1947). To avoid
described by Navashin (1898) and Guignard confusion, it 1s highly desirable to restrict
(1899) over half a century ago, is one of the the term ‘‘endosperm”’ to angiosperms and
most important finds in botany. It is a proc- to designate the endosperm of gymnosperms
ess peculiar to the angiosperms, involving, as simply megagametophyte or to use some
as is well known, the fusion of one male other term for it.
nucleus with the egg nucleus to form the There is no phenomenon in gymnosperms
zygote and the fusion of the second male to suggest double fertilization and _ triple
nucleus with two polar nuclei to form the fusion. In addition, there are other unique
primary endosperm nucleus. The endosperm features in the angiospermous endosperm.
develops usually into a short-lived nutritive These features and their possible evolution-
tissue nursing the growth of the embryo. ary and phylogenetic significance are re-
The study of the endosperm in the past viewed below.
has been largely morphological. For some
time there was much discussion about its
phylogenetic origin. In recent years more Besides one of the male nuclei, two polar
emphasis has been placed on its physiologi- nuclei take part in triple fusion. To trace the
eal and genetic significance. (Brink and origin of the endosperm therefore means
Cooper, 1944, 1947; Cooper and Brink, tracing the origin of the megagametophyte
1944). of angiosperms.
However, no evolutionary significance or All proposed explanations regarding the
historical explanation has so far been at- origin of the megagametophyte of angio-
tached to this remarkable event in the plant sperms attempt at homologizing it with that
kingdom. This is undoubtedly due in part to of the gymnosperms. There are three princi-
the confusion in terminology of the endo- pal views (Maheshwari, 1948, 1950): that of
sperms of gymnosperms and angiosperms. Schirhoff (1928) which considers the mega-
The endosperm of gymnosperms is a rela- gametophyte as formed by two archegonia
tively undifferentiated tissue, essentially nu- with prothalhal tissue; another of Porsch
tritive in function. It is, however, derived (1907) which considers it as formed by two
directly by the repeated cell divisions in the archegonia without prothallial tissue; and a
megagametophyte. In this respect, it is fun- third emphasizing the similarities between
damentally different from the angiospermous the megagametophytes of angiosperms and
endosperm, which is formed by the fusion of the Gnetales (Thompson, 1911; Fagerlind,
a male nucleus with one or more nuclei of the 1941) assumes that all the nuclei possess the
megagametophyte. In the light of modern same value and any one of them could de-
cytology and genetics, the older view that velop into an embryo. It is not necessary to
the endosperm of angiosperms should be go into detail concerning the objections to
considered as a gametophytic tissue is un- these theories (Langlet, 1927; Maheshwari,
30
ORIGIN
APR 15 1957
oA JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
1948) except to mention that none of these
explains the origin of the fusion of the two
polar nuclei and one male nucleus in the for-
mation of the endosperm.
As Maheshwari aptly poimts out, “The
question may well be asked as to why we
should at all expect to be able to explain the
angiospermous embryo sac in terms of that
of the gymnosperms, when there is no evi-
dence that the former group was derived
from the latter.”’ I am inclined to agree fur-
ther with him in his statement that “It is
far more likely instead that the angiosperms
have long passed the stage of archegonia and
probably never had them at any time in
their fossil history”’.
DEVELOPMENT AND STRUCTURE
While ultimately the endosperm may be-
come wholly or partly cellular, it originates
in three main structural types, namely, nu-
clear, cellular, and helobial (Schnarf, 1929;
Maheshwari, 1950).
The nuclear type, generally found in the
supposedly primitive angiosperms, develops
from the successive mitotic divisions of the
primary endosperm nucleus resulting in the
formation of a large multinucleate ceono-
cyte. This free-nucleate condition may be of
short duration or may persist for several
days or weeks. The number of free nuclei is
usually very large, ranging from over a hun-
dred to several thousand. Then follows cell
formation and the endosperm usually be-
comes entirely cellular, although in some
plants a central noncellular portion may per-
sist throughout the development of the seed.
In the cellular type, nuclear divisions are
accompanied by wall formation right from
the beginning. Some of the cells at one or
both ends may become differentiated as elon-
gated haustorial cells which may remain uni-
nucleate or become multinucleate.
The third type or helobial type is so called
because it is of common occurrence in the
Helobieae. Here the primary endosperm cell
divides into two cells of unequal size: a large
micropylar and a small chalazal cell. The
micropylar cell becomes multinucleate and
later cell formation occurs in it as in the
nuclear type. The chalazal cell may remain
uninucleate or may develop into a multi-
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vot. 47, NO. 2
nucleate cell. The helobial type is generally
considered to be intermediate between the
nuclear and cellular types.
The multinucleate condition is an unique
feature which does not exist elsewhere in the
higher plants except in early stages of the
development of the megagametophytes and
also in the proembryos of the Cycadaceae
and Ginkgo. Another peculiarity of the endo-
sperm is the process of cell division. There
are two methods of wall formation in the
endosperm: by cell plates or by furrowing
(Schnarf, 1929). The formation of cell plates
is as in other tissues. In the following
method, cleavage furrows are formed at the
outer wall and advance inwardly until they
meet and divide the protoplast into uni-
nucleate cells. It is a process frequently ob-
served in the lower plants but its occurrence
in the higher plants is restricted only to
pollen and endosperm formation. In pollen,
however, the pollen mother cell is limited to
four nuclei only. The extremely large num-
ber of nuclei formed in the angiospermous
endosperm and the subsequent divisions by
furrowing resulting into cellular condition
has no parallel in plant groups above the
thallophytes.
Aside from these distinctive characteris-
tics, it is noteworthy that the endosperm is
not only cellular but often highly differen-
tiated structurally, while the ‘“‘endosperm”’
of gymnosperms is more or less undifferen-
tiated. Some of the cells usually develop into
elongate haustorial cells or absorbing or-
gans. Sometimes the cells may branch at
their tips.
The endosperm persists in the seed of
many species as a storage organ. While the
mature endosperm generally has a more or
less smooth surface, in two whole families
the Annonaceae and the Myristicaceae and
in many genera of other families, it is ‘“‘ru-
minated.’”’ The significance of the latter con-
dition is subject to further investigation.
TIME RELATIONS
The fusion of the two polar nuclei shortly
before fertilization is also an unique feature
of the angiosperms. Both the endosperm and
the embryo seem to initiate more or less
simultaneously at the time of double fer-
FEBRUARY 1957 HUI-LIN LI:
tilization. Their subsequent developments
are, however, not parallel events.
The primary endosperm nucleus divides
soon after fertilization and by rapid succes-
sive divisions forms an active growing endo-
sperm within a short time. The zygote, on
the other hand, usually undergoes a period
of maturation before division starts. By this
time there are already from several hundred
to over a thousand nuclei in the endosperm.
The latter may even have completed its
growth entirely as in Fouquieria (Johansen,
1936). Only rarely does the zygote divide
concurrently with the primary endosperm
nucleus and the few reports that the division
of the zygote precedes that of the primary
endosperm nucleus have either proven erro-
neous or are doubtful (Brink and Cooper,
1947).
NUTRITION RELATIONS
The endosperm not only has a decided ad-
vantage in the time of development as com-
pared with the embryo, but in their nutri-
tional relationships also the endosperm
occupies apparently an earlier phase than
the embryo.
The endosperm is dependent on the sporo-
phytic tissues. In the nuclear type, the nu-
cellus furnishes the nutrition for the rapid
nuclear division and expansion of the endo-
sperm. The cellular type of the endosperm
develops in an ovule that has a much re-
duced nucellus already absorbed by the
megagametophyte. The endosperm develops
absorbing haustorial cells and obtains nu-
tritive materials from the conducting tissues
in the funiculus. The large single-celled hau-
storium in the helobial type has a similar
absorbing function.
The embryo depends in turn on the endo-
sperm for nutrition. The endosperm is di-
gested and absorbed during the growth of
the embryo. After the cotyledons are formed,
they digest their way through the endo-
sperm and absorb it until it nearly disap-
pears. Only remnants of the endosperm are
usually left in the mature seed, the cotyle-
dons becoming storage organs. In some spe-
cies the endosperm persists as storage tissues
while the cotyledons store little or no nutri-
tive materials.
SIGNIFICANCE OF ENDOSPERM oy)
Recent studies on the cultivation of ex-
cised embryos in vitro have shown that, dur-
ing the early period of development of the
embryo, there is an unique physiological
relationship between embryo and mother
plant through the endosperm. The mother
plant is only indirectly host to the offspring
through the medium of the endospermous
tissue. Cultivation of very young embryos is
extremely difficult and few investigators
have succeeded in growing seedlings from
them. The young embryo is, as stated by
Brink and Cooper (1947), initially incapable
of performing certain essential growth funce-
tions, and these functions are mediated for
the embryo by the endosperm.
CHROMOSOME NUMBER
The endosperm of gymnosperms, since it
is derived by continuous cell division of the
haploid megaspore, is haploid in its chromo-
some number. In the angiosperms, the endo-
sperm is triploid, having a diploid set from
the two polar nuclei and a haploid set from
the male nucleus. The triploid endosperm is
an unique structure characteristic of the
angiosperms. Not only nothing comparable
is found in the gymnosperms, but also in the
ferns, the ‘“‘fern-allies’’, and the bryophytes
as well. The triploid nature of the endosperm
indicates that it is neither sporophyte tissue
with 2n chromosomes, nor gametophyte tis-
sue having n chromosomes.
On chromosome number alone, there is no
basis to homologize the so called endosperm
of gymnosperms with the endosperm of an-
giosperms. The two tissues are only similar
in their function in nursing the developing
embryo. This distinct product of syngamy
must have a more fundamental and profound
significance in the history of angiosperms
than merely the provision of a nutritive tis-
sue to the developing embryo. This may well
be a collateral and incidental function, espe-
cially as maternal sporophytic tissues are
readily available to perform such a function.
A phylogenetic interpretation of the alter-
nation of generations in plants has been
offered by Allen (1937). He considers that a
regular alternation of generations in green
and brown algae and possibly also in the
ancestors of pteridophytes and of seed
36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
plants, seems to have been established by a
diploid duplication of the haploid genera-
tion. While in long-cycled red algae, alterna-
tion came about through duplication as well
as transfer, the latter referring to the trans-
ference of the post-zygotic phase from the
haplont to the diplont. Among other things,
he compares the extremely reduced haploid
generation in the angiosperms with that of
Fucus. The reduction series as represented
in seed plants is compared with parallel
series in algae. Allen’s interpretation, given
in the light of some obvious genetic con-
siderations, 1s a valuable contribution to a
much neglected subject. However, he does
not mention anything about the endosperm.
Taking the latter into consideration, the life
cycle of the angiosperms, following Allen’s
argument, probably approaches more closely
the red algae in general than other plant
groups.
GENETIC RELATIONS
Genetically, the endosperm differs from
the embryo in that it receives a double com-
plement of inheritance from the megagame-
tophyte. As a result of triple fusion, the
anglospermic seed is unique in being geneti-
cally a most diverse structure. The normal
chromosome ratio between the maternal
sporophytic tissues, the endosperm and the
embryo is 2:3:2. The successful formation
of the seed thus depends on the maintenance
of the genetical balance of the three com-
ponents. Seed collapse in interspecific hy-
brids is generally believed as due primarily
to embryo disfunction. However, recent
studies, as summarized by Brink and Cooper
(1947), have shown that impairment in de-
velopment or death of the embryo is fre-
quently due to the failure of the endosperm
formation. Young embryos in abortive seeds
with underdeveloped endosperm can some-
times be excised and cultured artificially into
seedlings (Sawyer, 1925; Werckmeister, 1937;
Lenz, 1954).
That the endosperm behaves genetically
differently from the embryo can be further
illustrated by the phenomenon known as
xenia, namely, the effect of foreign pollen on
visible characters of the endosperm, of which
there are several examples in maize (Hmer-
vou. 47, No. 2
son et al., 1935). This is due to the fact that
the two fertilizations occurring within a sin-
gle megagametophyte occasionally involve
participation of male nuclei from different
pollen grains, a phenomenon called ‘“‘hetero-
fertilization” by Sprague (1932).
Thus double fertilization actually involves
two distinct processes which may occur in-
dependent of each other. There are occa-
sional cases of plump grains found among
cereals without embryos. The immediate
cause of these embryoless grains is assumed
to be single fertilization whereby only the
endosperm develops (Brink and Cooper,
1947). All these observations show that both
the genotype and phenotype of the endo-
sperm are independent of the constitution of
the embryo with which it is associated.
ENDOSPERM AND THE ORIGIN
OF ANGIOSPERMS
As the embryo is directly in the line of
descent, it is necessarily the cardinal com-
ponent of the seed. Nevertheless, it is now
clearly demonstrated that the endosperm is
primarily responsible for the maintenance of
the continuity of the life cycle of the plant
at the early seed stage. During this critical
period, the embryo is dependent entirely on
the endosperm for performing certain growth
functions.
Brink and Cooper (1947) are of the opin-
ion that ‘the double complement of inheri-
tance perceived by the endosperm from the
maternal parent is an adaptation which fa-
cilitates functioning of the endosperm in its
intercalary position between mother plant
and embryo. The secondary fertilization is
thus interpreted as a method to confer on
the tissue the physiological advantage in
reproduction associated with the extreme re-
duction of the female gametophyte’’.
Compared with the gymnosperms which
have a massive megagametophyte readily
available to nourish the embryo at the time
of fertilization, the simple megagametophyte
of angiosperms is in a decidedly disadvan-
tageous position. As a device to compensate
this deficiency, the endosperm performs the
function very well. But the problem still
left unexplained is the de novo appearance
of this unique and complicated phenomenon
of double fertilization and triple fusion.
—
—————
FEBRUARY 1957
As mentioned before, I am inclined to
agree with Maheshwari (1948) in that the
origin and development of the megagameto-
phyte of angiosperms cannot be explained in
terms of the gymnosperms. Similarly, the
origin of the angiospermous endosperm, as
attested by its many distinct characteristics
discussed before, also cannot be sought
among the gymnosperms. An historical ex-
planation of the origin of the endosperm has
never been offered.
NM
&9a5
. OF
+V z % %,
<\ Y “Oo
SS ‘6, ‘©
$ ©.
oss 2N a “aN eS
OR ea Lonoss ass 235
Sa Saag ‘32 er
Ss '\ @ ¥ !
= 3 eae ae
y HS) 1 oo ERs
1 Sn) i)
I! Ri SS
H x
|
Fic. 1—Life cycle of an angiosperm.
The triple fusion and the consequent tri-
ploid condition of the endosperm, in my
opinion, clearly indicate that it is an equiva-
lent to the gametophytic and sporophytic
generations. Morphologically, physiologi-
cally, cytologically, and genetically as dis-
cussed before, the endosperm is distinct from
both the sporophyte and the gametophyte.
In other words, the life cycle of angiosperms
should be interpreted anew as constituting
three instead of only two distinct phases,
the third one represented by the endosperm
@Eye5 1):
While the endosperm and the embryo be-
gin more or less simultaneously at the time
of double fertilization, the precocious de-
velopment of the endosperm, the strict de-
pendence of the embryo on the latter in its
early life, as well as the relative position of
the two seem to suggest that the endosperm
represents a slightly prior phase in their se-
quence of development.
HUI-LIN LI: SIGNIFICANCE OF
ENDOSPERM ON
From an evolutionary point of view, the
origin of the angiospermous endosperm can-
not be sought among the bryophytes, the
ferns and the so called fern-allies, as well as
the gymnosperms, for any comparable struc-
ture is not found among these groups of
plants, at least among all the living forms.
On the other hand, among the algae and
fungi, the life cycles of many plants involve
three or more distinct phases, such as among
the red algae and in many fungi. Sometimes
two of the phases may develop almost simul-
taneously. The life cycle of angiosperms is
thus reminiscent of the situation common in
the thallophytes. The fusion of the two polar
nuclei is also a unique process but more or
less similar conditions are also found in many
of the algae and fungi, such as in the forma-
tion of teliospores in rusts (Uredinales) and
chlamydospores in smuts (Ustiginales),
where a binucleate condition eventually be-
comes uninucleate. An exceptionally similar
condition to triple fusion is found among the
Florideae, where a diploid connecting cell is
fused with a haploid axillary cell, though in
this case the nuclei concerned are probably
not actually united. (Fritsch, 1945). More-
over, the most unique morphological feature
of the endosperm, the large multinucleate
body with the furrowing method of cell for-
mation, also cannot be traced to the imme-
diate lower groups of plants, but it occurs
also only in some algae and fungi. It is espe-
cially common in the development of the
sporangia such as in the brown algae like
in the Ectocarpales and the Laminariales
and in fungi like in the Saprolegniales and
the Mucorales.
In my opinion, the origin of the endosperm
has important bearings on the larger prob-
lem of the origin of the angiosperms. It seems
futile to seek the origin of angiosperms in
some groups of plants that offer no clue to
the origin of the endosperm. The evolution-
ary significance of the endosperm deserves
critical evaluation. The many distinct fea-
tures mentioned above indicate relationships
traceable from the angiosperms more or less
directly toward the thallophytes but not
through the ferns or gymnosperms. The
angiosperms apparently represent a line of
development parallel to that of the ferns
and gymnosperms from a general algal an-
38
cestry, but not a derived group originated
from any of the gymnosperms.
CONCLUSIONS
This paper is presented primarily to pro-
pose a different approach for research to-
ward the problem of the origin of angio-
sperms. It calls attention to a neglected
field of study that seems to offer great pos-
sibilities. As yet our knowledge concerning
the endosperm is very limited. With new
developments in technique such as tissue
culture and advancement in some fields of
knowledge such as morphogenesis, physio-
logical genetics, and others, the study of
endosperm can be of great value in inter-
preting the evolution and phylogeny of the
plant kingdom. Lacking fossil evidence, dis-
cussions at present on the origin of angio-
sperms are still largely a matter of conjec-
ture. To quote the words of the late Sir
Albert Seward (1921), commenting on the
origin of angiosperms, ‘‘While admitting our
inability at present to do more than suggest
possibilities, we may encourage research by
speculation’.
SUMMARY
To summarize, the following point of view
is suggested as a working hypothesis toward
the problem of the origin of angiosperms.
The endosperm represents, in addition to the
gametophytic and the sporophytic genera-
tions, a third phase in the life history of the
angiosperms, possibly the remnants or a
much more reduced form of a formerly more
elaborate structure. Since a similar structure
is not found in the life histories of the gym-
nosperms and other lower groups of plants,
the origin of the angiosperms probably lies
in some extinct groups of plants derived
directly from the thallophytes.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
I am indebted to Drs. Ralph O. Erickson,
John M. Fogg, Jr., P. Maheshwari, and E.
H. Walker for valuable suggestions and criti-
cisms in the course of preparation of this
paper. I am, of course, solely responsible for
the opinions herein expressed, and for all
errors and omissions.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 2
LITERATURE CITED
ALLEN, C. E. Haploid and diploid generations.
Amer. Nat. 71: 193-205. 1937.
Brink, R. A., and Coorgrr, D.C. The antipodals
in relation to abnormal endosperm behavior in
Hordeum jubatum X Secale cereale hybrid
seeds. Genetics 29: 391-406. 1944.
The endosperm in seed development.
Bot. Rev. 13: 423-477, 479-541. 1947.
Coorrr, D. C., and Brink, R. A. Collapse of the
seed following the mating of Hordeum jubatum
X Secale cereale. Genetics 29: 370-390. 1944.
Emerson, R. A., et al. A summary of linkage
studies in maize. Cornell Univ. Agr. Exp. Stat.
Mem. 180: 1-83. 1935.
FaGEeRLIND, F. Baw und Entwicklung der Gnetum-
Gametophyten. Kung Svenska Vet.-Akad.
Handl. IIT. 19(8) : 1-55. 1941.
Fritscu, F. E. The structure and reproduction of
the algae. Cambridge, 1945.
GuianarpD, L. Sur les anthérozoides et la double
copulation sexuelle chez les végétaux angios-
permes. Comp. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 128:
864-871. 1899.
JonansEen, D. A. Morphology and embryology of
Fouquieria. Amer. Journ. Bot. 23: 95-99.
1936.
Laneuer, O. Uber die Entwicklung des Eiappa-
rates in Embryosack der Angiospermen. Svensk
Bot. Tidskr. 21: 478-485. 1927.
Lunz, L.W. The endosperm as a barrier to inter-
sectional hybridization in Iris. El Aliso 3:
57-58. 1954.
Manesuwart, P. The angiosperm embryo sac.
Bot. Rev. 14: 1-56. 1948.
An introduction to the embryology of the
angiosperms. New York, 1950.
NavasHiIn, 8S. Resultate einer Revision des Be-
fruchtungsvorgangs bei Lilium Martagon und
Fritillaria tenella. Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St.
Petersbourg 9: 377-882. 1898.
Porscu, O. Versuch einer Phylogenie des Embryo
sackes und der doppelten Befruchtung der
Angiospermen. Verh. Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien
1907: 120-134. 1907.
Sawyer, M. L. Crossing Iris pseudoacorus and
I. versicolor. Bot. Gaz. 79: 60-72. 1925.
Scunarr, K. Hmbryologie der Angiospermen. In
Linsbauer, Handbuch der Pflanzenanatomie.
Band 10. Lief. 23, 1928; Leif. 24, 1929.
Scutruorr, P. N. Uber die Entwicklung des
Eiapparates der Angiospermen. Ber. Deut. Bot.
Ges. 46: 560-572. 1928.
Sewarp, A. C. Links with the past in the plant
world. Cambridge, 1921.
Spracug, G. F. The nature and extent of hetero-
fertilization in maize. Genetics 17: 358-368.
1932.
Tuompson, W.P. The morphology and affinities of
Gnetum: Amer. Jour. Bot. 3: 135-184. 1916.
Wercxmetster, P. Uber Herstellung und kiinst-
liche Aufzucht von Bastarden der Gattwng
Tris. Gartenbauwiss. 10: 500-520. 1937.
{
:
FEBRUARY 1957
9
LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN: A NEW FORAMINIFERAL GENUS 39
PALEONTOLOGY—W oodringina, a new foraminiferal genus (Heterohelicidae)
from the Paleocene of Alabama. ALFRED R. Lorsiicu, Jr., U. 8. National
Museum, and HELEN Tappan, U. 8S. Geological Survey.
(Received January 7, 1957)
In the course of investigations of the
planktonic species of Foraminifera occur-
ring in the Paleocene strata of the Gulf and
Atlantic Coastal Plains, a distinctive and
minute species was obtained from the Pine
Barren member of the Clayton formation
of Alabama. Although tiny, the relative
abundance and distinctive characters of
this species suggest that it may prove valu-
able as an horizon marker for strata of early
Midway age. These distinctive characters
necessitate the proposal of both new generic
and specific names to accommodate this
form.
Family HETEROHELICIDAE Cushman, 1927
Woodringina Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen.
Type species —W oodringina claytonensis Loeb-
lich and Tappan, n. gen., n. sp.
Test free, early stage with a single whorl of
three chambers, followed by a biserial stage;
chambers inflated; wall calcareous, radial in
structure, finely perforate; aperture a low arched
slit, bordered above by a slight lip.
Remarks.—W oodringina, n. gen. differs from
Tosaia Takayanagi in having a much reduced
early coil consisting of a single whorl of three
chambers, whereas Tosaia has an early trochoid
stage followed by a triserial and finally a reduced
biserial stage.
It superficially resembles Heterohelix Ehren-
berg, but has a reduced ‘“‘triserial’’ stage and
lacks the early planispiral stage of that genus.
It has a low slitlike aperture instead of a high,
arched, and open one. Chiloguembelina Loeblich
and Tappan has a high narrow aperture bordered
with lateral flanges, and the test is wholly bi-
serial.
The generic name is in honor of Dr. Wendell
P. Woodring in recognition of his work on the
Tertiary stratigraphy and paleontology and for
his encouragement of micropaleontological stud-
ies in the Caribbean area.
Woodringina claytonensis Loeblich and Tappan,
n. sp.
Fies. 1, a-d
Test free, tiny, flaring rapidly; early stage
with a single whorl of three chambers (reduced
“triserial’’), commonly followed by three, or more
rarely up to five, pairs of biserial chambers, the
plane of biseriality slightly twisted in develop-
ment; chambers few in number, subglobular, in-
creasing rapidly in size; sutures distinct, con-
stricted; wall calcareous, finely perforate and
very finely hispid; aperture a low, arched slit
Figs. la-d.—Woodringina claytonensis Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen., n. sp: la, Side view of holo-
type, showing small test, appearing from this view to be biserial throughout; 1b, edge view, with speci-
men slightly tilted to show asymmetrical low arched aperture; 1c, opposite side, showing protruding
third chamber above proloculus, which forms the reduced triserial stage of a single whorl, characteristic
of this genus, and the later biserial stage; 1d, basal view, showing proloculus, single whorl of three
chambered stage, and biserial later development. All X 280. Camera lucida drawings by Patricia Isham,
scientific illustrator, U. S. National Museum.
40 JOURNAL OF THE
bordered above by a slight lip, somewhat asym-
metrical in position.
Length of holotype 0.15 mm, greatest breadth
0.12 mm. Other specimens range from 0.12 to
0.22 mm in length.
Remarks.—This_ species superficially resem-
bles Tosaia hanzawai Takayanagi from the Plio-
cene of Japan, but differs in being about one-
third as large, in having a reduced “triserial”’
stage of three chambers, and better developed
biserial stage, whereas the Japanese form has a
trochoid whorl, followed by a triserial stage, and
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 2
only an occasional specimen has the poorly de-
veloped biserial stage. The chambers of the pres-
ent species are also more inflated and sub-
globular.
Types and occurrence.—Holotype (U.S.N.M.
P5685) from the Pine Barren member of the
Clayton formation (Paleocene), blue-black mi-
caceous clay exposed in road cut opposite small
country store, 0.8 mile west of Alabama River
bridge on Alabama State Highway 28, Wilcox
County, Ala. Collected by Alfred R. Loeblich,
Jr., July 1956.
— Be
EMISSION SPECTRA OF ACTINIUM
Detailed information about the configuration
of electrons around the actinium nucleus has
been obtained in a study of emission spectra of
actinium recently completed by W. F. Meggers,
chief of the National Bureau of Standards spec-
troscopy laboratory. The results also establish
that the elements following actinium in the
periodic table form a series of “rare earths’’
analogous to the series that follows lanthanum.!
The spectrograms were made by M. Fred and
F. 8. Tomkins of the Argonne National Labora-
tory, and the actinium for the study was pro-
duced at the Argonne laboratory by transmuting
radium.
Because of its low abundance, radioactive in-
stability, and lack of commercial uses, actinium
has never been concentrated in pure form from
mineral sources. For a long time, therefore, little
was known about its physical properties. The
situation changed during the past decade when,
after the discovery of nuclear fission and the
construction of uranium piles, neutrons became
available in sufficient quantities to produce
ponderable amounts of any desired element by
transmutation. Thus, several milligrams of
actintum were made at the Argonne National
Laboratory by bombarding radium with neu-
trons, thereby transmuting radium of atomic
number 88 and mass 226 (ssRa”°) to actinium of
atomic number 89 and mass 227 (ggAc”"),
Although actinium was artificially prepared
primarily for chemical research, portions of the
samples were loaned to physicists for investiga-
tion of the optical emission spectra. Because the
Argonne laboratory was fully equipped with
devices for the safe handling of “hot” materials,
the actinium spectra were photographed there;
the spectrograms were then shipped to the
National Bureau of Standards, where they were
measured and interpreted.
1 For further technical details, see The emission
spectra of actinium, by W. F. Meggers, M. Fred,
and F. 8. Tomkins, Journ. Res. NBS (in press).
EARLIER STUDIES
In 1899, André Debierne, assistant to Madame
Curie, discovered a new chemical element in
pitchblende. After chemically removing uranium,
polonium, and radium, he found a residue 100,000
times more radioactive than uranium. He ealled
this new element actinium.
After many years of research in radioactivity
it has been established that actinium occurs in
nature only as the daughter of protactinium,
which in turn results from the spontaneous decay
(emission of alpha and beta particles) of the
relatively rare isotope of uranium, 9:U23°—the
isotope that produced the first atomic bomb. The
half-life of actinium is only 22 years, and its
unstable atoms quickly decay to a stable end
product, actinium-lead (s»Pb?). For this reason,
the abundance of actinium in igneous rocks is
only about 3 x 101° grams per metric ton, Le.,
3 parts in 101°,
About thirty years ago the quantum theory
of atomic spectra had developed to the point
where all atomic and ionic spectra could be inter-
preted in terms of energy levels described by
quantum numbers, and spectral terms were
correlated with configurations of the outer
(optical or valence) electrons. This provided a
positive and practically unique method of deter-
mining the electronic structure of any and all
atoms, thus giving meaning to the periodic ar-
rangement of the chemical elements that the
Russian chemist D. Mendeléef had proposed in
1869. The method could not be applied to
actinium, however, until sufficient quantities of
the pure element were available.
In the modern periodic chart of the atoms,
scandium, yttrium, lanthanum, and actinium
each occupy third place in the fourth, fifth, sixth,
and seventh periods respectively. All have 3
electrons in the outer, unfilled “shells” and,
consequently, have similar chemical properties.
In the language of the chemist, they are homolo-
FEBRUARY 1957
gous trivalent elements. The emission spectra of
scandium, yttrium, and lanthanum were de-
scribed, interpreted, and published by the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards between 1924 and
1932. In each case it was found that the normal
electron configuration includes one of type d.?
This suggested that instead of 8 elements as in
the two previous periods, the fourth, fifth, and
sixth periods could contain at least 18 elements,
since 10 electrons of type d are permitted by the
Pauli exclusion principle.
Although the spectra of scandium, yttrium,
and lanthanum exhibited common features, as
just indicated, the spectra of ionized lanthanum
proved to be more complex than those of the
other two elements. It was necessary to conclude
that additional excited states of lanthanum are
caused by the presence of electrons in f orbits,
thus anticipating the firmer binding of type f
electrons in the elements immediately following
lanthanum in the periodic table. The presence of
f-type electrons gives the 6th period a total of 32
elements, since the exclusion principle permits 14
electrons of that type to be added. The extra 14
elements in period 6 are commonly called “rare
earths” or ‘‘Janthanides.”
METHOD AND RESULTS
Although Bureau scientists were eager in 1932
to investigate the spectra of actinium to see if
they resembled those of lanthanum, it was
necessary to wait until a sample of actinium was
synthesized from radium and neutrons. For the
present study, the Argonne spectroscopists made
are and spark spectrograms of actinium by
“burning” one-milligram samples on silver elec-
trodes and again on copper electrodes. The two
kinds of electrodes were used so that any spectral
lines of actinium that were masked by silver lines
could be seen in the copper spectra, and vice
versa. Two different excitations, are and spark,
were employed in order to distinguish actinium
lines (Ac I) emitted by neutral atoms from those
(Ac II) belonging to single ionized atoms, or
those (Ac III) that arise from doubly charged
ions. More intense spectral lines were obtained,
at the expense of reduction in the wavelength
range that could be photographed, by the use of
a diffraction grating with a “blaze”, i.e., with
specially shaped saw-tooth rulings.
Although blaze of grating and smallness of
sample restricted the spectral observations to the
visible and near ultraviolet regions, the data
were adequate to reveal the principal features of
the first three spectra of actinium. Wavelengths
were measured and intensities estimated for
2 Literal symbols, s, p, d, f, stand for electrons
having angular orbital momentum of 0, 1, 2, 3
units of h/27, respectively. They correspond to
“‘subshells”’ in the older shell picture of the atom.
EMISSION SPECTRA OF
ACTINIUM A]
approximately 500 lines in the wavelength range
from 2,062 to 7,887 angstroms. The measured
wavelength of each line was first converted to
the vacuum wavenumber (number of wavelengths
per em in vacuum), which is proportional to
radiation frequency or atomic energy emitted
per photon. Then constant differences between
the wavenumbers were sought. In this way
atomic energy levels were found from each of the
spectra, and these levels could then be interpreted
as spectral terms that arise from a specific electron
configuration according to rules given by the
quantum theory.
Analysis of the spectra shows the ground state
of Ac III to be (7s) 2so:; that of Ac II (7s?)'So;
and that of Ac I is (6d 7s’)?Diz. Thus, it is shown
that neutral actintum atoms, just like those of
scandium, yttrium, and lanthanum, each have
one d-type and two s-type electrons as valence
bonds. Again, it is found that Ae II, like La IT,
is more complex than either Se II or Y II; and
to explain the extra lines it is again necessary to
conclude that, in excited states, electrons of type
fas well as type p are present, though less tightly
bound. This is the most spectacular result of the
investigation. It shows that actinium introduces,
in the 7th period, another group of 14 “rare
earths” in which f-type electrons will be more or
less firmly incorporated into the outer structure of
the heavier elements: thorium, protactinium,
uranium, neptunium, plutonium, etc.
Between 1926 and 1946, there was much
theoretical speculation’ about the first appearance
of f-type electrons in the outer structure of
neutral heavy elements. Most authorities con-
tinued to regard thorium, protactinium, and
uranium as homologs of hafnium, tantalum, and
tungsten, respectively, which have only d and s
electrons. In 1946, spectroscopic investigations
of the first spectrum of uranium‘ were published
which proved conclusively that the normal elec-
tron configuration of uranium was f?d's? (.e.,
three f, one d, and two s electrons). Since that
time no further information of this kind has been
disclosed, but the present work on actinium
spectra indicates that f-type electrons will appear
only in highly excited states of Th I, and that the
normal electron configuration of neutral thorium
atoms will indeed be found to be d?s?. It seems
probable that type f electrons will first be found
in the normal configuration of protactinium
atoms.
2 Hlectron configurations of “rare earth’ ele-
ments, by W. F. Meggers, Science 105: 514. May
1947.
4 Preliminary description and analysis of the
first spectrum of uranium, by C. C. Kiess, C. J.
Humphreys, and D. D. Laun, Journ. Res. NBS 37:
57. July 1946. RP1729. The information in this
paper was first made available in February 1944 to
the Manhattan Project.
42 JOURNAL OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 2
ENTOMOLOGY .— Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States National
Museum: IV, The genus Culex (Diptera, Culicidae).! ALAN Svone, Entomology
Research Branch, U.S. Department of Agriculture, and Kenneru L. Knicur,
Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, U. S. Department of the Navy?
(Received December 20, 1956)
The introductory remarks in the first
paper of this series, particularly those on
early, possibly questionable holotypes, also
apply to this one. Following our treatment
of nominal taxa requiring special attention,
we present a list of those in the collection
based on unique specimens or for which
holotypes were clearly designated.
Culex abominator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 257. 1909.
The lectotype from Plano, Tex., selected by
King and Bradley (1937, p. 353), is in the col-
lection.
Culex (C.) acharistus Root, Amer. Journ. Hyg. 7:
578. 1927.
Both sexes were described, but there is only
one type specimen in the collection now. This is
a fragmentary male with the thorax and one leg
on a pin and the terminalia on a slide. We select
this specimen as lectotype. The data are: “Agua
Limpa, Brazil, March 27, 1925. F. M. Root
No. 64-1.”
Culex (C.) aglischrus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 12:
121. 1924.
The syntypes were three females and three
males selected from 80 specimens. These are in
the collection and we select as lectotype a male
bearing the labels “1904/B2/Barranquilla, Co-
lomb./L. H. Dunn Coll. 1923/Type No. ——U.
S. N. M.” The terminalia are on slide no. 1904.
1 Harlier papers in this series are: I, The genera
Armigeres, Psorophora, and Haemagogus, Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 45: 282-289. 1955; JT,
The genus Aedes, ibid. 46: 213-228. 1956; IIT, The
genera Anopheles and Chagasia, ibid. 276-280.
1956.
2 Studies upon which this paper is based were
conducted under an exchange of funds from the
Office of Naval Research (Biological Science
Division) to the Smithsonian Institution. The
opinions or assertions contained here are the pri-
vate ones of the writers and are not to be construed
as official or reflecting the views of the Navy De-
partment or the Naval Service at large.
Culex aikenii Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 35: 61. 1908.
The three male syntypes are in the collection,
all bearing the labels “Feb. 17, O8/J. Aiken
Collector/Bred from larvae /F6 & / from long
syphon larva 17.2.08 / Type No. 11977 U.S.N.M.
/ Culex aikenti D. & K.”’ We select one of these
as lectotype. The terminalia of none of the
specimens have been cleared.
Lutza allostigma Howard, Dyar, and Knab,
Mosquitoes of North and Central America
and the West Indies 3: 471. 1915.
The original description gives no indication of
the number of specimens in the type series, but
lists 11 localities in Nicaragua and Panama with
dates of collection and collectors for most of them.
The type no. 14501 is given, but no specimens
bear type labels, and only the name was entered
in the type catalogue. Although a considerable
number of topotypic specimens in the collection
were with little doubt before the describers, there
are only 13 specimens that agree in locality, date,
and collector with the original data. We select as
lectotype a male bearing the labels ‘149 / A. H.
Jennings Collector / See Slide No. 592 / Las Cas-
cadas, Canal Zone, Panama / Jan. 16, 08”. The
terminalia are on slide No. 592 and this bears the
number 149.8. The larval and pupal skins for this
rearing number have been mounted on another
slide.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) alogistus Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 6: 126. 1918.
The specimen from Surinam that Rozeboom
and Komp (1950, p. 87) accepted as lectotype is
in the collection. These authors are in error in
stating that Dyar selected a lectotype, but we
consider Rozeboom and Komp to have selected
it. The mounted terminalia, pinned adult, and
associated larval skin are all part of the same
lectotype, but the slide of the larval skin could
not be found.
FEBRUARY 1957
Culex amitis Komp, Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 29:
333. 1936.
Two male syntypes were originally stated to be
deposited in the U.S. National Museum. We have
found only the male terminalia of one specimen
from Quiriquire, Venezuela, June 14, 1935,
mounted on a slide. We select these terminalia as
leetotype of the species.
Culex (Choeroporpa) aneles Dyar and Ludlow,
Military Surgeon 50: 63. 1922.
This species was described from a male and a
female syntype collected at Cardenas, Canal
Zone, February 11, 1921. They are both in the
collection, and we select as lectotype the male,
mounted on a slide and bearing the label ‘““Type
No. 25069 U.S.N.M.”
Culex anips Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 4: 48. 1916.
This species was described from a pair of
specimens from San Diego, Calif., and assigned
type no. 20304. These specimens are in the col-
lection, and we select as lectotype the male with
terminalia mounted on slide no. 747.
Culex (Melanoconion) antillum-magnorum Dyar,
Mosquitoes of the Americas: 344, 1928.
Three of the four male syntypes are in the col-
lection, the one numbered Pazos 786 not having
been found. We select as lectotype the one
bearing the labels ‘416 / Slide 785 / Cotype No.
40778 U.S.N.M.” This was collected by J. H.
Pazos at San Antonio de los Banos and the
terminalia are mounted on slide no. 785.
Culex apateticus Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 3: 321, 1915.
This species was described from an unstated
number of males and females and assigned type
no. 12707. According to the type catalogue there
were eight specimens, and according to the origi-
nal description these were collected by A. H.
Jennings at Tabernilla, Canal Zone, December 12,
1908, and Upper Pequini River, March 27, 1909.
There are six specimens with Jenning’s numbers
in the collection bearing the label “Type no.
12707 U.S.N.M.” Three are numbered 498 and
were collected at Porto Bello, February 19, 1909,
and are therefore not of the type series; two bear
the number 454 and were collected at Tabernilla,
December 15, 1908. Since Jennings’ notes show
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 43
no collections made on December 12, we can
assume that the date was incorrectly transcribed
and that these are the Tabernilla types. One
specimen is numbered 522 and was collected on
the Upper Pequini River, March 27. Since this
specimen is a male bearing exact original data, we
select it as lectotype. The terminalia are on slide
no. 512.
Culex (Microculex) aphylactus Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 584. 1927.
This species was described from one male and
two females, but the only type material in the
collection consists of the male terminalia on a
slide. The data are ‘‘Rio Soberbo, Brazil, May 1,
1925, F. M. Root No. 79.” Weselect this fragment
as lectotype of the species.
Culex aseyehae Dyar and Knab, Ins. Inse. Mens.
B38 WY, IP,
The syntypes consist of one female and three
males. We select as lectotype a male labeled
“RPI, New Providence, Bahamas 1915 / Collec-
tion Dr. H. G. Dyar / Slide 748 / Type No. 19978
U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are on slide no. 748.
Culex badgeri Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 12: 125.
1924.
The syntypes are a male and a female, and we
select the male as lectotype. This bears the labels
“1945 / 34A / Bakersfield, Cal. Jan. 29, 1924 /
C. K. Badger / Type No. U.S.N.M.” The
terminalia are on slide no. 1945.
Culex bahamensis Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 210. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only,
collected in the Bahamas by T. H. Coffin. No
adults were reared. No material in the collection
is marked as type, but there are four larvae on
one slide labeled ‘‘bahamensis Coffin.”’ There is no
other larval material from the Bahamas in the
collection, and so we think that this is, with little
doubt, the original material, and we select the
larva nearest the label as lectotype.
Culex basilicus Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol. Soc.
Washington 19: 169. 1906.
The five syntypes are in the collection, all
bearing the labels ‘“‘Trinidad W.I. / F. W. Urich
Collector / Type No. 10021 U.S.N.M.” Although
only the female and larva were described, one of
the syntypes is a male. We select as lectotype
44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the female bearing the additional labels “26-10 /
Culex basilicus D. & K. Type.’’ Since there are
two specimens labeled 26-10, it is not possible to
establish the larval skin of the lectotype, nor has
one bearing this number been found.
Culex bastagarius Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soe. Washington 19: 170. 1906.
It is not entirely clear from the original descrip-
tion whether this is based on a single male from
Laventille, Trinidad, or also on two others from
Arima, Trinidad. Only the first one bears a type
label, and to establish this specimen as type
without question we select it as lectotype.
Fragments of a larval skin of this specimen are
on one slide and the terminalia are on slide no.
275.
Culex bidens Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10: 190. 1922.
The five syntypes bear the labels ‘Rosario
Bolivia (L. Rocagua) Wm. M. Mann / Mulford
Biological Exploration 1921-22 / Nov. 1921 /
Type No. 25760 U.S.N.M.” The single male
bears the additional labels ‘‘1687 / Culex bidens
Dyar Type.” We select as lectotype this male,
with terminalia on slide no. 1687.
Culex ([sostomyia) bifoliata Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 10: 94. 1922.
The four syntype males are in the collection.
We select as lectotype the one bearing the labels
““Miraflores, C.Z., Pan. 1921 / Dec. 15 / J. B.
Shropshire Collector / 1644 / Type No. 25254
U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are on slide no. 1644.
Culex (Carrollella) bihaicolus Dyar and Nunez
Tovar, Notas Sobre Nuevos Dipteros Hema-
tofagos de Venezuela, Maracay: 4. 1927.
This species was described from an unstated
number of specimens of both sexes collected by
Nunez Tovar in the flowers of Heliconia bihar
in July 1927 at Ocumare de la Costa, Venezuela.
There are four specimens in the collection, labeled
“Maracay, Aragua, Venezuela VII.5.1927 M.
Nufiez Tovar Coll. Bihai.” Since these are not
topotypic and since the only specimen from
Ocumare de la Costa was collected August 12, we
must assume that the syntype series is not in the
collection. It is probable that these four speci-
mens were labeled following the second publica-
tion of the name in English (Dyar and Nunez
Tovar, 1928, p. 91).
VOL. 47, No. 2
Micraedes bisulcatus Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 7: 185. 1906.
Two syntypes are in the collection, one male
and one female, bearing the labels ““Guadeloupe,
W.1. July / Aug. Busck Collector / Type No.
8291 U.S.N.M.,” the male syntype from Santo
Domingo not having been found. We select as
lectotype the male bearing the additional labels
“82.3 / 1648 / Micraedes bisulcatus Coq.,” with
terminalia on slide no. 1648 and the larval and
pupal skins on a second slide.
Culex bonneae Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc. Mens.
7: 3. 1919.
The two males and three female syntypes are
in the collection, all labeled “3 / Paramaribo
Dutch Guiana Mrs. J. Bonne-Wepster / Culex
palus? Theobald / Type No. 21646 U.S.N.M.”
We select as lectotype the male with terminalia
on slide no. 882. Five larval and two pupal skins
of this series (no. 3) are mounted together on a
slide.
Culex (Carrollia) bonnet Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens. 9:
155. 1921.
Dyar proposed this as a new name for what
Dr. and Mrs. Bonne determined as iridescens
Lutz in Surinam. He attached the U.S. N. M.
type no. 24862 to a male and two females col-
lected by Mrs. Bonne-Wepster in Surinam. One
female bears the label “‘Carrolla iridescens Lutz’”’
in Mrs. Bonne’s hand. The male has had the
terminalia clipped but no slide has been found
bearing them. However, we select this male as
lectotype, hoping that the terminalia slide will
eventually be found in the collection.
Culex (Choeroporpa) borinquent Root, Amer.
Journ. Hyg. 2: 400. 1922.
This species was described from an unstated
number of males, females, and larvae from Rio
Piedras, Martin Pena, and Aguirre, Puerto Rico.
There is a male and a female labeled type in the
collection, and we select as lectotype the male,
bearing the labels “Rio Piedras, Porto Rico,
July 7, 1921 F. M. Root / Culex (Choeroporpa)
borinqueni Root 1922 Type &.” The terminalia
have not been mounted.
Lutzia brasiliae Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 11: 67.
1923.
The syntypes consist of one male and one
female collected by A. Lutz in Sao Paulo, Brazil.
FEBRUARY 1957
We select as leectotype the male, with terminalia
on slide no. 1778.
Culex brehmei Knab, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington
29: 161. 1916.
The published type number of this species 1s
20411, and there are in the collection 13 specimens
(of an original 15), each bearing the label “Type
No. 20411 U.S.N.M.” Only one specimen bears
the locality label, which is “Newark, N. J. 12.
VI. 1916 H. H. Brehme.” The original locality is
given as Laurence Harbor, Middlesex County,
New Jersey, and the specimens emerged from
pupae April 29 and 30, 1916. There are no speci-
mens in the collection bearing the original pub-
lished data, but perhaps the specimens were
labeled before Knab received the correct data on
the material, which had been sent to him in
June, and when he did get the field notes and
rearimg data he did not correct the label on the
specimen. We believe that this can be considered
the type series, and we select as lectotype the
female, with the locality label cited above and
the label “Culex brehmet Knab. Types.”
Culex caraibeus Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 3: 257. 1915.
The syntype series consists of four females,
each bearing the labels “59 / Barbados, W. I.
July / Aug. Buseck Collector / Type No. 12207
US.N.M.” Two other specimens bear the same
labels except for the type label. We select as
lectotype the specimen bearing the additional
label, “Culex caraibeus D. & K. Type.” Although
the larva was described, there are no larval skins
individually associated with the specimens.
Culex carcinophilus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 220. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected from crab holes near Santo Domingo City
by Busck (nos. 89 and 94). We select as lectotype,
larval skin no. 89.3 with associated pupal skin
and male.
Culex carmodyae Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 210. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only,
collected in two localities in San Domingo. These
are represented by Busck numbers 88 and 151.
There are five specimens bearing these numbers
in the collection, two males and three females, but
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 45
rn
the larval skins of only two of the females have
been found. We select as lectotype larval skin no.
151.2. The associated pupal skin and female are
also lectotypic. The larva was collected in a slow
running water course inthe San Francisco Moun-
tains, Santo Domingo, West Indies, September
28, 1905.
Mochlostyrax caudelli Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 224.1905.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected by Busck (no. 47) at Arima, Trinidad,
June 15, 1905. There are six adults of this series
(no. 47) in the collection. None of them is asso-
ciated with a larval skin, but there is a slide with
two larval skins and one larva, and we select as
lectotype the larval skin farthest from the label.
Culex (Choeroporpa) cenus Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 591. 1927.
Root refers to this as a common species with
males bred from several places, but there is only
one male, bearmg the labels ‘Type No. 40527
U.'S.N.M. / Magé, Brazil June 21, 1925, No.
115-1 / Culex (Choeroporpa) cenus Root. Type.”
We select this male, with terminalia on a slide, as
lectotype.
Culex (C.) chidesteri Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 9:
Is WEAN
The two male syntypes are in the collection,
bearing the labels “Colon Hosp. Sereen, Pan.
June 24, 1921 / W. F. Chidester Coll. /Thru
James Zetek / Type No. 24716 U.S.N.M.” We
select as lectotype the one with the additional
labels ‘1520 / Culex chidesteri Dyar Type”
with terminalia on slide no. 1520.
Culex chryselatus Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 7: 5. 1919.
The one male and two female syntypes are in
the collection, all labeled “23 / Paramaribo
Dutch Guiana Mrs. J. Bonne-Wepster / Type
No. 21647 U.'S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the
male with terminalia on slide No. 885. There are
a number of larval and pupal skins, at least one of
them from the original series, but they are not
individually associated with the adult specimens.
Culex chrysonotum Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 25: 57. 1908.
The lectotype (male terminalia slide) selected
by Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 88) is in the
46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
collection. The pinned specimen from which these
terminalia came is also lectotypic. The type data
are ‘“Ancon, C. Z., Pan., Aug. 14, 1908.”
Culex comitatus Dyar and Knab, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 11: 35. 1909.
The only specimens bearing type labels or
entered in the type book are three males and
three females. We select as lectotype the male
labeled “Nat. City June 3 / Dyar & Caudell /
See Slide No. 374 / Type No. 12201 U.S.N.M.”
The terminalia are on slide no. 374.
Culex conservator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 221. 1906.
The original material of this species, described
from larvae only, was collected at St. Joseph,
Trinidad, by Busck (no. 13) as well as other
localities, but specimens other than those of
series no. 13 were doubtfully determined by the
authors. There are eight adults reared from this
collection. We select as lectotype larval skin no.
13.12 with associated pupal skin on the same
slide and associated male with terminalia un-
mounted.
Culex conspirator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 217. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected at Almoloya, Mexico, and Las Loras, near
Puntarenas, Costa Rica. No larval material from
Las Loras has been found and only a few skins
from Almoloya, although there are 20 adults of
the Almoloya series. We select as lectotype larval
skin No. 312f, with which is associated a pupal
skin and a female that emerged July 24, 1905,
and was labeled as type by Dyar.
Culex consternator Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 59. 1908.
Thirty-five of the 39 syntypes are in the col-
lection, a male and two females being labeled as
types. We select as lectotype the male with ter-
minalia unmounted. This is no. 429.1 of Knab’s
notes, and was reared from a larva collected at
Cérdoba, Veracruz, Mexico, March 7, 1908.
Culex (Choeroporpa) corentynensis Dyar, Ins.
Insc. Mens. 8: 65. 1920.
The lectotype (slide of male terminalia) from
Surinam selected by Rozeboom and Komp (1950,
VOL. 47, NO. 2
p. 89) is in the collection. The pinned adult from
which the terminalia came is also lectotypic.
Culex coronator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 215. 1906.
This species was described from many larvae
collected in Trinidad, Mexico, Guatemala, El
Salvador, and Costa Rica. We select as lectotype
larval skin No. 7.2 collected in St. Joseph, Trint-
dad, June 12, 1905, by August Busck. Associated
with this is the pupal skin and an intact male
reared from it, also lectotypic.
Mochlostyrax cubensis Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 225. 1906.
This species was described from badly damaged
larvae collected in Havana, Cuba. There are five
adults in the collection, but they are not individ-
ually associated with larval skins. No original
larval material has been found; so we assume
that all the syntypic material is lost.
Culex (Choeroporpa) curryi Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 14: 112. 1926.
This species was described from a male and a
female from Panama. We select as lectotype the
male mounted whole on a slide. It was collected
in the Mojinga River Swamp, April 20, 1926, by
D. P. Curry.
Culex daumastocampa Dyar and Knab, Proc.
U.S. Nat. Mus. 35: 58. 1908.
The three syntypes are in the collection, two of
them bearing type labels. We select as lectotype
the only male, labeled “135.4 / A. H. Jennings
Collector / Type No. 11967 U.S.N.M. / See Slide
No. 402.”” The terminalia are on slide no. 402, and
fragments of the larval skin on another slide.
Culex daumasturus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 220. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected by Busck (no. 48) in leaf sheaths of a
century plant on the pitch lake at La Brea,
Trinidad. There are two pinned adults, one with
an associated larval and pupal skin, of this series
(no. 43). The larval skin is extremely fragment-
ary, but it is the only larval specimen available
for lectotype designation, and therefore we so
designate it, the fragmentary pupal skin and
reared female also being lectotypic.
FEBRUARY 1957
Phalangomyia debilis Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 2: 58. 1914.
In describing this species, the authors refer to
“Types and paratypes in the U. 8S. National
Museum”’, etc. There are nine females and nine
males in the collection, one female being labeled
as type, and one male as allotype, and the re-
mainder as paratypes. Each bears the label
“Matucan, Peru, June-July 1913. 7300 ft. C. T.
Brues.”” The “type” is in poor condition, with
damaged thorax, one leg and one wing only
remaining. Since the authors did not select a
holotype or select a sex for the type in the original
publication, we feel that it is permissible to
select as lectotype one of the ‘“‘paratype” males,
with terminalia and three legs mounted on slides
numbered 597 and 598.
Culex deceptor Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 257. 1909.
The two female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection, all bearing the labels
“Ht. White, Fla. H. Byrd / Type No. 32104
US.N.M.” We select as lectotype the male with
terminalia on slide no. 346.
Culex declarator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 211. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in Trinidad (Busck no. 21). The collection
contains two larval skins, two pupal skins, frag-
ments of another of each, a female in balsam, and
a pinned male of this series. We select as lectotype
larval skin 21.1 with associated pupal skin and
male. The male was labeled as type by Dyar, and
the terminalia are on slide no. 268.
Culex decorator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 218. 1906.
We have been unable to find any original
material of this species, which was described from
larvae that were brought to Washington alive
but failed to complete their development. This
material seems to have been from Busck lot no.
53, but no specimens have been found with this
number.
Culex (Choeroporpa) degustator Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 9: 39. 1921.
This species was described from two males,
both in the collection. We select as lectotype the
one labeled “Scott, Ark. 11 Aug. 09 / J. K. Thi-
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 47
bault Coll. / 1333 / Type No. 23833 U.S.N.M. /
Culex degustator Dyar Type.” The terminalia are
on slide no. 1333.
Culex derivator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 216. 1906.
This species was described from a larva or
larvae collected at Cérdoba, Mexico, by Knab.
No adults were reared and no type larvae have
been found.
Culex dictator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian Misc.
Coll. 52: 255. 1909.
The one female and five male syntypes are in
the collection, and we select as lectotype a male
bearing the labels “75.1 / Dominica, W. I. July /
Aug. Busck Collector / Type No. 12099
U.S.N.M.” The terminalia and larval skin of this
specimen are on one slide.
Culex (Phalangomyia) diplophyllum Dyar, Amer.
Journ. Hyg. 9: 509. 1929.
For this species Dyar wrote, “Types, two
males, paratypes three males and sixteen females,
Verrugas Canyon, Lima, Peru, April 5, 1928
(R. C. Shannon).”’ Nineteen of these specimens
are in the collection, 6 males and 13 females. It is
evident that Dyar miscounted the number of
males. All the specimens bear red type labels,
without number, but two males have “Type”
written in the space for the number. We can
assume that these are the two male “types”
selected by Dyar, and we select as lectotype the
one with terminalia on slide no. 2398.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) distinguendus Dyar, Mos-
quitoes of the Americas: 305. 1928.
The lectotype (slide of male terminalia) from
Mojinga Swamp, Panama, selected by Rozeboom
and Komp (1950, p. 89), is in the collection. The
pinned specimen from which these terminalia
came is also lectotypic.
Culex divisior Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 222. 1906.
The type series of this species, which was
described only by key characters and a figure of
the larva, consisted of specimens reared by Urich
in Trinidad (B15). Ten adults of this series are
in the collection and a number of fragmentary
larval and pupal skins. The larval material is in
such poor condition that selection of a lectotype
48
is of questionable value, but we select the frag-
mentary larval skin B15-6 with which is associ-
ated fragments of a pupal skin and an intact
male, labeled by Dyar, “Culex divisor (sic) D &
K. Type.”
Culex (Melanoconion) dunni Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 6: 128. 1918.
The two syntypes, one of each sex, bear the
labels ““Mandingo R., Pan. C-93 L. H. Dunn /
Type No. 21714 U.S.N.M.” We select as lecto-
type the male, with terminalia on a slide.
Culex duplicator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Misc. Coll. 52: 258. 1909.
The four male and one female syntypes are in
the collection, all bearing the labels “S Frnesco
Mts. St. Domingo, W. I., Sept. 05 / Aug Busck
Collector / Type No. 1211 U.S.N.M.” We select
as lectotype the male with terminalia on slide
no. 740.
Culex (Choeroporpa) dysmathes Dyar and Ludlow,
Ins. Insc. Mens. 9: 47. 1921.
All but one of the 14 syntypes are in the col-
lection. We select as lectotype the male bearing
the labels “1346 / Cativa, Pan. Oct. 19, 1920 /
thru Dr. C. S$. Ludlow / Type No. 23943
U.S.N.M. / Culex (Choeroporpa) dysmathes D. &
L. Type.” The terminalia are on slide no. 1346.
Culex educator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 217. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected near the Aranjuez River near Puntarenas,
Costa Rica, by Knab (no. 337). Since no isolations
were made, the six adults reared from the series
are not individually associated with their larval
or pupal skins. A mass of broken larval skins and
one larva on one slide are all the larval material
of the type series in the collection. We do not
select a lectotype, because the whole larva is in
poor condition, and no larval skin is complete.
Culex egberti Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 214. 1907.
This species was described from three females,
all in the collection, from Warner’s Camp, North
Shore, Lake Okeechobee, Fla., March 1906, J. H.
Egbert Collector. One bears the red type label
No. 10876, one bears the label in Knab’s hand,
“Culex egberti D. & K. Type,” and the third is
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 2
labeled ‘“‘egberti.”” We select as lectotype the first
of these, which is the least rubbed.
Culex (Choeroporpa) egcymon Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 11: 68. 1928.
The syntypes consist of a male and four
females collected at Tabernilla, C. Z., Panama,
May 2, 1907, by A. Busck. These are in the
collection, and we select as lectotype the male
with three legs dry mounted and the rest on slide
no. 1780.
Culex (Transculicia) eleuthera Dyar, Ins. Inse.
Mens. 5: 184. 1917 [1918].
The four syntypes are in the collection, all
bearing the labels ‘‘Gov. Harbor, Bahamas 03 /
T. H. Coffin Coll. *19 / Type No. 21570
U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the intact male
bearing the label “Culex (Transculicia) eleuthera
Dyar Type.”
Culex elevator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 217. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected at Puerto Limén, Costa Rica, by Knab
(No. 355). It was stated that adults were not
bred, but there are four adults from this series,
one female being labeled as type. Larval skin
355a is associated with the specimen labeled type.
We select this larval skin, with head capsule
missing, and the associated pupal skin, and reared
female as lectotype of the species.
Culex elocutilis Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 255. 1909.
The type series consisted of two specimens
from Coscajar River, Porto Bello Bay, Panama.
These specimens are in the collection, each bear-
ing the labels ‘339. / Type No. 12051 U.S.N.M.”
The female is labeled “Culex elocutilis D. & K.
type,” and the male ‘“‘elocutilis” and ‘See Slide
No. 340.” We select as lectotype the male, with
terminalia on slide no. 340.
Culex equivocator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 208. 1907.
The five females and three male syntypes
(Busck no. 49) are in the collection, a male and a
female being labeled as types. We select as lecto-
type the intact male bearing the labels ‘49.10 /
Tabernilla, Canal Zone, Panama / Collected by
August Busek / Type No. 10873 U.S.N.M.”
FEBRUARY 1957
Culex eremita Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mosqui-
toes of North and Central America and the
West Indies 3: 261. 1915.
There are three syntypes, a male and two fe-
males, in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male bearing the labels ‘94.7 / St. Domingo
W. I. Aug / Aug. Busck Collector / Type No.
12798 US.N.M. / See Slide No. 398 / eremita.”
The terminalia are on slide no. 398.
Mochlostyrax erraticus Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 224. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only,
collected by Dupre at Baton Rouge, La. King and
Bradley (1937, p. 348) refer to a slide of one
larval skin in the National Museum labeled
“Oulex erraticus D. & K. Dupre.” Such a slide is
in the collection, but it includes three larval skins.
We select as lectotype the skin nearest the label.
Culex erythrothorax Dyar, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus.
32: 124. 1907.
This species was described from 80 specimens
collected in California. One female only bears a
type label, and this we consider the holotype. The
labels on it are “Nigger Slough, June 6. 06 / Dyar
& Caudell / Type No. 10009 U.S.N.M. / Culex
erythrothorax Dyar Type.”
Culex eumimetes Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 35: 61. 1908.
The 10 syntypes are in the collection, a male
and a female being labeled as types. We select as
lectotype the male, bearmg number 437.6, with
terminalia unmounted.
Culex (Choeroporpa) evansae Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 593. 1927.
The original material consisted of specimens
reared from larvae collected in two places. The
collection contains only two of the original speci-
mens, both from Magé, Brazil, February 26, 1925,
F. M. Root (No. 34). Both have U.S.N.M. type
labels, but only the male is labeled ‘‘type’’ by
Root. Larval and pupal skins of these two speci-
mens are on one slide, and so it is impossible to
determine with certainty which larval skin is
associated with the male. We select the male,
with terminalia on slide no. 34a as lectotype of
the species.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 91) selected as
lectotype a slide No. 30-1 from Magé, February
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 49
26, 1925. This was apparently an error in tran-
scription of the number, since Root’s No. 30-1
was from Porto das Caixas, Brazil, February 24,
1925, and is one of the syntypes of C. exedrus
Root. The two slides are adjacent in the type
slide collection, which presumably accounts for
the error.
Culex (Melanoconion) exedrus Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 580. 1927.
Both sexes were described, but only a male of
the type series is in the collection. This bears the
data “Porto das Caixas, Brazil, Feb. 24, 1925,
F. M. Root No. 30-1.” The head is missing and
the terminalia are on a slide. We select this speci-
men as lectotype.
Culex exilis Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 12: 127. 1924.
Only one of the two original male syntypes is
in the collection. This bears the labels ‘“Vladi-
vostok, Siberia, Cockerell 1923 / 1950 / Type
No. US.N.M.” The terminalia are on slide
no. 1950. We select this specimen as lectotype.
Culex extricator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 211. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected at Cedros, Trinidad, by Busck (no. 27).
The only adult in the collection under inflictus
(= extricator) of the original series is a female
(No. 27xx) labeled “Culex extricator D. & K.
Type.” The larval skin of this specimen is in
very poor condition, with the last abdominal
segments and air tube missing. There are two
larvae on a slide and other skins, pupae, and
larvae in alcohol. Since all the material is in
poor condition and of questionable identity, we
do not feel justified in selecting a lectotype.
Culex factor Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 212. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in four localities in Mexico. We select as
leetotype larval skin no. 296s, collected by Knab
at Tehuantepec, Oaxaca, Mexico, July 3, 1905.
With it are associated the pupal skin and male,
the skins and the male terminalia being on slide
no. 234.
Culex falsificator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 257. 1909.
There are seven females and one male in the
collection, all bearing the labels “Havana Cuba /
50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, No. 2
J. R. Taylor Coll. 2/15/14/ U.S.D.A. No.October 25, 1908, by Major Fuller. There are
10399.”’ Four of these specimens bear type labels.
Since there were only seven original syntypes, it
is not possible to say which of the four not labeled
as type is not syntypic, and Dyar and Knab
might have miscounted. We select as lectotype
the single male with terminalia on slide no. 408.
Culex federalis Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens. 11: 187.
1923.
The syntypes are two males, both in the col-
lection, with the terminalia of both mounted on a
single slide. We select as lectotype the specimen
with terminalia mount no. 1821. The data are
“Regino Balzanario, Xochimilco, D. F. Mex.
19232
Culex (Neoculex) fidelis Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8:
180. 1920.
Three of the four syntype males are in the col-
lection, bearing the labels ‘“Los Bafios, P. I. 28.
VII.1915 / Type No. 23720 U.S.N.M.” We
select as lectotype the specimen bearing Dyar’s
determination and type label with terminalia on
slide no. 1309.
Mochlostyrax floridanus Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 171. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only
collected at Estero, Fla., by J. B. Van Duzee. No
specimens have been found bearing the type no.
10025 given by Dyar and Knab. There is one
larval skin labeled “Culex pilosus D. & K.”
mounted since Dyar’s time, that bears original
data, but one cannot be certain that it is one of
the type specimens of floridanus. In the absence
of specimens labeled as the type series, we must
assume that no material is available for lectotype
designation.
Culex fragilis Ludlow, Journ. New York Ent)
Soc. 11: 142. 1903.
The male and female were described from Oras,
Samar, Philippine Islands. There are 18 speci-
mens in the collection bearing unnumbered type
labels, one male being labeled “Culex fragilis
Ludlow, Types, Oras, Samar, P. I., Aug. 6, 02...
Presumably all are of the same collection. We
select as lectotype this male, with terminalia on
slide no. 45.1X.10a.
Oculiomyia fulleri Ludlow, Can. Ent. 41: 97. 1909.
The syntypes consisted of several females col-
lected at Parang, Mindanao, Philippine Islands,
seven specimens bearing unnumbered type labels.
A female bears the label “Oculiomyia fulleri n. sp.
Parang, Mindanao, Oct. 28, 8 p. m.”’, and a male
is labeled ‘“Oculiomyia fulleri Ludlow, male
types, Parang, P. I., Feb. 21. Fuller.” Since this
male does not bear original data and since the
female only was originally described, we select as-
leucotype the female bearing nearly the original
data.
Culex (Microculex) gairus Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 583. 1927.
The male and larva were described apparently
from several specimens, but the collection con-
tains only one male of the type series. This bears
the data “Rio, Brazil, Feb. 15, 1925. No. 22c.”
The male terminalia of this specimen are on
one slide and the associated larval and pupal
skins on another. We select this male as lectotype.
Culex jenningst var. gaudeator Dyar and Knab,
Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 15: 204. 1907.
See Culex jennings.
Culex gravitator Dyar and Knab, Journ New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 218. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected at Cérdoba, Mexico, June 14,° 1905.
Although specimens of this no. 261 series have
been found, there are no Culex larval skins, but
only those of Aedes, with which the culture
became contaminated later. We must consider
that there is no type material in existence.
Culex habilitator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 212. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in Santo Domingo, August 10, 1905, by
Busck (no. 102). We select as lectotype larval skin
no. 102.2 with associated pupal skin and male.
The terminalia are on slide no. 409.
Culex hesitator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 205. 1907.
The seven syntypes of this species, bearing
the labels ‘75 pupae / Las Cascadas, Canal Zone,
Panama / Collected by August Busck” are in
the collection, one pair labeled as types. We
select as lectotype the male of this pair with
terminalia unmounted.
i
{
FEBRUARY 1957
Culex ignobilis Dyar and Knab, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 11: 39. 1909.
This species was described from four specimens
collected at San Antonio de los Bafios, Cuba, by
J. H. Pazos. There are four pins bearing type no.
12239, but the specimen is missing from one. The
only data are four different Pazos numbers. We
select as lectotype the specimen no. 648 bearing
a determination label, with a hind leg mounted
on slide no. 424.
Culex incriminator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 257. 1909.
The two male and one female syntypes, all
bearing the labels ‘‘Agric. Coll. Miss. 8-18-05 /
W. V. Reed Collector / Type No. 12105
U.S.N.M.” are in the collection. We select as
lectotype the male with terminalia on slide no.
407.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) inducens Root, in Dyar,
Mosquitoes of the Americas: 307, 1928.
The female and male were described from
Venezuela, with no indication of the number of
specimens and no type selection. There are four
male and one female specimens of the Root
material in the collection. Two of the males
(157.1 and 157.2) are labeled as ‘“‘Types”’ and the
entire abdomens of both are on one slide. A third
male, bearing the same data “Sombrero, Ven.,
Aug. 10, 1927, No. 157,” is intact. We select the
abdomen to the right, farthest from the determi-
nation label, as lectotype. It is not possible to
determine from which pinned specimen this
abdomen came. It should be noted that the slide
is labeled Maracay, not Sombrero.
Culex inhibitator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 216. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in the San Francisco Mountains of Santo
Domingo by Busck (no. 135). The collection
contains a slide of approximately seven larvae in
poor condition, a fragmentary larval and pupal
skin with an associated female, and four other
pinned adults. Female no. 135.1, for which no
associated immature skins have been found, was
labeled as type by Dyar. Since the larval material
is sO poor, we have not selected a lectotype.
Culex inimitabilis Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 221. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV ol
collected by Urich in Trinidad. There are two
adult specimens collected by Urich in Trinidad,
but no associated larval skins have been found.
We must assume that the larval material has
been lost and there are no specimens available for
lectotype designation.
Culex inquisitor Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 211. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in Trinidad, Dominica, Mexico, and Costa
Rica. We select as lectotype larval skin No. 29.1
collected by Busck June 27, 1905, at Montserrat,
Trinidad. There is an associated pupal skin and
female. The female bears the label “Culex in-
quisitor D. &. K. Type.” The locality was given
as Cedros, Trinidad, but this does not agree with
Busck’s notes.
Culex (C.) interfor Dyar, Mosquitoes of the
Americas: 372, 1928.
The two male and three female syntypes are
in the collection. We select as lectotype the male
bearing the labels ‘2364 / 532 / at light on train /
bet. Tucuman and Jujuy, Argentina / M.Kisliuk
Jr. May 4, 1927.” The terminalia are on slide no.
2364.
Culex interrogator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 209. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected at Rincén Antonio, Mexico. There are 10
pinned adults reared from these larvae. We select
as lectotype larval skin no. 270y. This was col-
lected June 23, 1905, by Knab. With it is the
associated pupal skin and adult male which can
be considered lectotypic also. We have mounted
the skins on slide no. 231, which also bears the
male terminalia.
Culex investigator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 216. 1906.
This species was described from a larva or
larvae collected in Santa Lucrecia, Mexico, by
Knab. There is no specimen labeled as type and
only a larval head capsule and poor pupal skin
from the original material. Knab’s notes for this
specimen (265a) state that the larval skin may
not belong with this pupa. Since the specimen is
uncertainly associated and nearly worthless, we
do not think that it should be selected as lecto-
type.
52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Culex invocator Pazos, An. Acad. Cienec. Habana
45: 426. 1908; Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 258. 1909.
This species, credited to Dyar and Knab by
Pazos and described as new in the Dyar and
Knab reference, must be credited to Pazos by
priority. We think that the type material can be
considered the same for the two publications of
the name. The syntype series was given as 16
specimens. The collection contains 22 collected
by Pazos in Cuba, bearing numbers but no data,
and two of them bear type labels. We select as
lectotype the male of this pair, with terminalia on
slide no. 337.
Culex jenningst Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 204. 1907.
There are 13 specimens of Busck series no. 191
in the collection under this name. A male and a
female bear the label “Type No. 10867
U.S.N.M.,” and are two of the four syntypes of
jenningst. We select as lectotype the male, with
terminalia unmounted. Another pair of speci-
mens bear the label ‘“Type No. 10871 U.S.N.M.”
and are two of the seven syntypes of Culex jen-
ningst var. guadeator Dyar and Knab. We select
the male of this pair with terminalia unmounted
as the lectotype of this variety. It is difficult to
say which of the other nine specimens not bearing
type labels are the other two and five syntypes,
respectively, of genningst and guadeator. All the
specimens were collected at Tabernilla, C. Z.,
Panama.
Culex jubilator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 201. 1907.
Twelve of the 16 syntypes have been found, a
male and a female being labeled as types. We
select as lectotype the male bearing the labels
“3 / Taboga I., Panama / A. H. Jennings Collec-
tor / Type No. 16916 U.S.N.M.”
Culex lactator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 209. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in several places in Mexico and Costa Rica.
There are no specimens labeled as type, but there
are many that were reared from the type locali-
ties and with associated larval and pupal skins.
We select as lectotype larval skin no. 270i, col-
lected at Rincén Antonio, Mexico, June 23, 1905,
by Knab. With it is associated a pupal skin and
VOL. 47, NO. 2
an adult male with terminalia on slide no. 226.
The adult was labeled ‘‘lactator’’? and the slide
“Culex lactator.”’ The larval and pupal skins have
been mounted on the same slide as the male
terminalia.
Culex lamentator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 219. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in the San Francisco Mountains, Santo Do-
mingo, August 28, 1905, Busck no. 124. There are
nine individually reared adults as well as a
number of others mass-reared. Dyar labeled
specimen 124.1 as the type, and since all the indi-
vidually reared specimens are females, we select
as lectotype the larval skin of this specimen. The
pupal skin is on the same slide.
Tinolestes latisquama Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 7: 185. 1906.
The lectotype from Limén, Costa Rica, se-
lected by Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 92) is
in the collection.
Culex leprincet Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 202. 1907.
This species was described from 16 specimens
collected at Tabernilla and Pedros Miguel, Canal
Zone, Panama, by August Busck. A male and a
female are labeled as types in the collection, and
there are eight other specimens from Tabernilla
that are presumably syntypes. No early material
from Pedro Miguel has been found. We select as
lectotype the male “type”? with terminalia un-
mounted.
Culex (Choeroporpa) ligator Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 12: 1238. 1924.
The syntypes are two females and one male.
We select as lectotype the male, bearing the labels
“1910 / Barranquilla, Colomb. / L. H. Dunn
Coll. 1923 / Type No. —— U.S.N.M.” The ter-
minalia are on slide no. 1910.
Culex lactator var. loguaculus Dyar and Knab,
Smithsonian Mise. Coll. 52: 254, 1909.
The original description states, “We have se-
lected six specimens as types from the Panama
Canal Zone.” We find only one specimen bearing
the label “Type No. 12050 U.S.N.M.,” and no
others that can be definitely recognized as of the
syntype series. We select this female, from Coro-
zal, as the lectotype. ;
FEBRUARY 1957
Culex (C.) lygrus Root, Amer. Journ. Hyg. 7: 579.
1927.
Both sexes of this species were described, but
the only type material in the collection consists
of a male bearing the data “‘Magé, Brazil, June 21,
1925, No. 115.2.’ The terminalia are on a slide.
We select this specimen as lectotype.
Culex mastigia Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 3: 426. 1915.
There are two male and two female syntypes
in the collection. We select as lectotype a male
bearing the label ‘793 / See Slide No. 499 /
Type No. 12679 U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are
on slide no. 499. The type locality is San Antonio
de los Banos, Cuba.
Culex (C.) maxi Dyar, Mosquitoes of the Ameri-
cas: 387. 1928.
The two male syntypes, both mounted on
slides, are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the one on slide no. 2360 labeled “‘San Pedro,
Arg. June 11, 1927, M. Kishuk Jr., Type.’’ Some
of the legs of this specimen remain on a pin
mount. The other slide is also labeled ‘“Type.”’
Culex (Choeroporpa) maxinocca Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 71. 1920.
The lectotype (slide of male terminalia) from
Surinam, selected by Rozeboom and Komp
(1950, p. 92) is in the collection. The pinned adult
from which the terminalia came is also lectotypic.
Culex (Choeroporpa) merodaemon Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 9: 100. 1921.
It was not clear from the original description
that a holotype was selected for this species. The
collection contains the original 32 specimens col-
lected at Orotina, Costa Rica, Dec. 20, 1920,
one male being labeled as type, the other speci-
mens as paratypes. We consider this male, with
terminalia on slide no. 1391, as the holotype.
Culex (Carrollia) metempsyta Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 9: 154. 1921.
The syntype series consisted of “seven males
and eleven females, No. 24863 U.S. Nat. Mus.;
Alajuela, Costa Rica, July and August 1921 (A.
Alfaro).”’ These specimens are in the collection.
We select as lectotype an intact male collected
July 4.
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 53
(r=
Culex (Microculex) microphyllus Root, Amer.
Journ. Hyg. 7: 586. 1927.
The original description referred to specimens
from both Rio de Janeiro and Magé, but there is
only one specimen in the collection. This male
bears the data ““Magé, Brazil, May 26, 1925,
F. M. Root No. 92-1.”’ We select as lectotype this
male, with terminalia on a slide.
Culex carmodyae mollis Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soe. Washington 19: 171. 1906.
The four male and two female syntypes are in
the collection, bearmg numbers 27-1 to 27-6,
respectively. Only one female (27-5) bears the
red type label and a label in Dyar’s hand, “Culex
carmodyae subsp. mollis D. & K. Type.” Since
the recognition of this taxon is dependent upon
the male terminalia, we have selected as lectotype
male no. 27-4, with terminalia on slide no. 283,
and fragmentary larval and pupal skins on a
second slide.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) mooret Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 6: 108. 1918.
The one male and two female syntypes are in
the collection, and we select as lectotype the male
bearing the labels “19 / larvae in ditch Pln.
Plaisance, Georgetown, B. G. April 10, 1916.
H. W. B. Moore / See Slide No. 571 / Type No.
21573 U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are on slide no.
Hiple
Culex mortificator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 210. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only
collected at Zent, Costa Rica, September 26,
1905, by Knab. All the larvae died before pu-
pating. No original specimens have been found.
Culex mutator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 216. 1906.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 93) selected as
lectotype a slide of male terminalia No. 1811,
Knab 259b. Since the original description is of a
larva only, we do not consider these terminalia
solely to be available for lectotype designation.
The collection contains five specimens of the 259
series from Cérdoba, Mexico, bearing museum
type labels, and two are also labeled in Dyar’s
hand, “Culex mutator D. & K. Type.” Fortu-
nately the larval and pupal skins of specimen
259b were found. These have been mounted, and
54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the larval skin, except for the loss of antennae and
head hairs, agrees well with Dyar and Knab’s
original description. We select this as lectotype
and can consider the pupal skin, the pinned adult
which emerged June 14, 1905, and the terminalia
slide as lectotypic also, thereby confirming Roze-
boom and Komp’s designation.
Culex neglectus Bourroul, Mosquitoes do Brasil:
27. 1904.
Although this species has been credited to Lutz,
the original description is in that portion of
Bourroul’s work not credited to Lutz; so it seems
necessary to credit the description to Bourroul.
Lane and Whitman (1951, p. 364) have selected a
specimen in the U. 8. National Museum as
lectotype.
Culex nematoides Dyar and Shannon, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 13: 84. 1925.
The syntypes of this species are six females and
one male, all collected at ‘“Haghthorpe, 234 miles
south of hospital, August 5, 1922” [Philippines].
Since the male has no abdomen we select as
lectotype one of the females.
Culex ocossa Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7:
6. 1919.
The six syntypes, three of each sex, are in the
collection, all bearing the labels ‘14 / Type No.
21705 U.S.N.M. / Georgetown,. Br. Guiana /
H. W. B. Moore.” We select as lectotype the only
male with terminalia on a slide. This specimen
also bears the authors’ determination and type
label.
Culex (Choeroporpa) oedipus Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 588. 1927.
The single specimen in the collection is the
male collected at Magé, Brazil, February 4, 1925,
F. M. Root No. 8-1, with terminalia on a slide.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 94) selected the
terminalia slide as the lectotype, but the entire
specimen can be considered lectotypic.
Culex (Choeroporpa) opisthopus Komp, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 14: 44. 1926.
The two male and three female syntypes are
in the collection. We select as lectotype a male
bearing the labels “2177 / Pto. Castillo R.,
Honduras / III. 1925 W.H.W. Komp, Coll.”
The terminalia are on slide no. 2177.
VOL. 47, No. 2
Culex pallens Coquillett, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
21: 303. 1898.
The ten original specimens are in the collection,
one only bearing a type label (No. 3963) and
Coquillett’s determination label. This female we
consider to be the holotype.
Culex (Melanoconion) panocossa Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 11: 120. 1923.
The collection contains 18 of the original 19
syntypes, all from Bas Obispo, Canal Zone, Feb-
ruary 1923. We select as lectotype a male with
terminalia on slide no. 1809.
Lutzia patersont Shannon and Del Ponte, in
Dyar, Mosquitoes of the Americas: 268.
1928.
The two male syntypes are in the collection.
We select as lectotype the specimen bearing the
labels, ‘2356/San Pedro Jujuy 4.27.26/Ins. Bac.
Ent. nota 44/Shannon & Shannon/Lutzia argen-
tiniae S. & DP Type.” The terminalia are on
slide no. 2356. It is evident that the name of
the species was changed before publication, since
the name argentiniae was never published and
the second syntype is also labeled patersoni.
Culex peccator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Misc. Coll. 52: 256. 1909.
The two male and nine female syntypes are
in the collection, all bearing the same data.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 94) selected as
lectotype, “‘slide 396, J. K. Thibault, Scott, Ark.
U.S.N.M.,” bearing male terminalia. The speci-
men from which the terminalia came can also
be considered lectotypiec.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) peribleptus Dyar and Knab,
Ins. Inse. Mens. 5: 181. 1917 [1918].
The two male and two female syntypes are in
the collection, along with 22 other specimens
bearing the same data. The males are both on
slides, and we select as lectotype the one bearing
the label ‘Culex peribleptus D. & K. Type, Parr
Shoals, 8.C. 18 Aug. 1915, Larvae in grasspond.
T.H.D. Griffiths.”
Mochlostyrax pilosus Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 224. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected by Knab at Santa Lucrecia, Mexico,
June 21, 1905 (No. 267). There are four pinned
adults of this series (no. 267), but the one that
FEBRUARY 1957
was labeled type by Dyar has no associated lar-
val skin; so we select as lectotype larval skin
no. 267b, with associated pupal skin and intact
male.
Culex pinarocampa Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 59. 1908.
Of the 117 syntypes of this species, 113 are
in the collection, a female and a male only bear-
ing type labels. We select as lectotype the male
with terminalia unmounted. This was reared
from a pupa collected at Cérdoba, Veracruz,
Mexico, January 31, 1908.
Culex (Choeroporpa) plectoporpe Root, Amer.
Journ. Hyg. 7: 589. 1927.
It is not evident from the original description
whether it was based on more than one speci-
men. There is only one original specimen in the
collection now, a male from Bangt, Brazil,
June 11, 1925, F. M. Root no. 109-1, with ter-
minalia on a slide. We select this male as lecto-
type.
Culex proclamator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 211. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected by Knab at Santa Lucrecia and Almoloya,
Mexico, and Puntarenas, Costa Rica. We found
one male, six females, and seven larval and pupal
skins of the original series, not all associated. We
select as lectotype larval skin no. 262p. with
associated pupal skin and pinned female.
Culex proximus Dyar and Knab, Proc. Ent. Soe.
Washington 1: 38. 1909.
There are three male and two female syntypes
in the collection. We select as lectotype a male
bearing the labels “5.10/Taboga I., Panama/A.
H. Jennings Collector/See Slide No. 397/Type
No. 12208 U.S.N.M./prozimus.” The terminalia
are on slide no. 397.
Culex (Choeroporpa) psatharus Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 173. 1920.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 95) selected a
lectotype from Célon, Panama, and this, with
terminalia on slide no. 1318, is in the collection.
Culex reflector Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Misc. Coll. 52: 256. 1909.
The two male and two female syntypes from
Ancon, Canal Zone, Panama, are in the collec-
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 55
tion, and we select as lectotype the better of the
two males.
Culex regulator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 213. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected by Busck (no. 119) in Santa Domingo,
August 22, 1905. We select as lectotype larval
skin No. 119.3 on slide no. 423, with associated
pupal skin and male terminalia, the rest of the
male being mounted on a pin.
Culex rejector Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 221. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected in a large bromeliaceous plant in Cérdoba,
Mexico. According to the authors, a'l the larvae
died, and we have been unable to find any pre-
served larvae. Knab did collect and rear the
species at Cérdoba in 1908, and it may be desir-
able to select one of these specimens as a neo-
type in the future, but we prefer not to do so at
the present time.
Culex restrictor Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 222. 1906.
This species was described from a single larva
collected by Knab at Almoloya, Oaxaca, Mexico,
July 21, 1905. This was 3lle of Knab’s notes,
and the larval skin is in very poor condition,
with much of it missing. We have mounted these
fragments and the associated female pupa, which
did not produce an adult, on a slide, and this
material constitutes the holotype.
Culex revelator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 202. 1907.
Two of the four syntypes have been found in
the collection, one of each sex. We select as lecto-
type the male bearing the labels “25.2/Taboga
I., Panama/A. H. Jennings Collector/See slide
No. 341/Type No. 10917 U.S.N.M./revelator.”’
The terminalia are on slide no. 341.
Culex revocator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 256. 1909.
The 25 syntypes are in the collection, 14 males
and 11 females. We select as lectotype a male
from Hope Gardens, Jamaica.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) rooti Rozeboom, Ann. Ent.
Soc. Amer. 38: 251. 1935.
Only the male terminalia were described, and
it was stated that the type slides had been de-
56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
posited in the U. 8S. National Museum, no holo-
type beimg designated. There are two slides of
male terminalia in the collection, labeled ‘‘col-
lected near Panama City, R. de Panama, Nov.
24, 1934/Type No. 50942 U.S.N.M.” One is
labeled type, the other paratype, and we select
the first as lectotype.
Culex salinarius Coquillett, Ent. News 15: 73.
1904.
The only information on type specimens given
in the original description is that they were bred
from larvae collected in the salt marshes of New
Jersey in the autumn of 1902. They had also
been previously determined by Coquillett as
Culex nigritulus Zetterstedt. There are no speci-
mens marked as types in the collection but two
males and three females bear the labels ‘‘Eliza-
beth, N. J. VIII.30 [one of them X-VIIT]/SIt
Meadows, N.J.,’’ and are, we believe, the origi-
nal specimens. One female bears, in Coquillett’s
hand, “Culex nigritulus Zett.” and “Culex sali-
narius Coq.” We select one of the males as lecto-
type.
Culex saxatilis Grossbeck, Can. Ent. 37: 360.
1905.
Three of the six syntype females are in the
collection, one labeled as type and the other two
as cotypes. We select as lectotype the specimen
bearing the labels ‘Garret Mts., N. J. [X.1/
Paterson/Culex saxatilis Gross. 2 type.”
Culex simulator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 218. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected by Busck at Arima, Trinidad, July 10,
1905. The only specimens in the collection are
three larvae on one slide. We select as lectotype
the larva farthest from the label.
Culex sphinx Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 3: 301. 1915.
There are 25 original specimens of this species
in the collection, but only one female and one
male bear type labels. We select as lectotype the
male, bearing the labels “Nassau, Bahamas
7-2-03/T. H. Coffin Coll. *142/Type No. 12196
U.S.N.M./See Slide No. 394/sphinz.” The ter-
minalia are on slide no. 394.
VOL. 47, NO. 2
Culex stenolepis Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 60. 1908.
Of the 47 syntypes of this species 44 are in
the collection, a male and a female bearing type
labels. Since the male ‘‘type’”’ has lost its abdo-
men, we select another male as lectotype. This
bears the number 431.9 and the terminalia are
on slide no. 780.
Culex stigmatosoma Dyar, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.
32: 123. 1907.
This species was described from 321 speci-
mens from California and Oregon. We consider
as holotype the single specimen bearing the label
“Type No. 10008 U.S.N.M.” The additional
labels are “Iss May 26 C78mr/Dyar & Caudell/
Culex stigmatosoma Dyar Type.” This is a fe-
male, collected in a cement-lined pool at Pasa-’
dena, May 21, 1906.
Culex (Microculex) stonei Lane and Whitman,
Rev. de Ent. 14: 401. 1943.
This name was proposed for a species from
Trinidad that had been determined by Dyar as
Culex ocellatus Theobald. The authors also re-
ferred to this species, specimens collected in
Surinam by Bonne and Bonne-Wepster. The col-
lection contains eight of the Trinidad specimens
and three from Surinam, but no types were la-
beled. We select as lectotype a male bearing the
labels ‘‘24-4/Trinidad W.I./F. W. Urich/See
Slide No. 247 /ocellatus.’”’ The terminalia are on
slide no. 247.
Culex (C.) surinamensis Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens.
6: 121. 1918.
The number of specimens in the syntype series
was not originally stated. There are three fe-
males and four males from Paramaribo, Surinam,
each bearing the label ‘Type No. 21912 US.
N.M.” We select as lectotype a male with the
additional labels ‘‘21 Slide 975/Paramaribo,
Surinam/Mrs. J. Bonne-Wepster Collector /Culex
surinamensis Dyar Type.” The terminalia are
on one slide; the larval and pupal skins on an-
other.
Culex (Choeroporpa) sursumptor Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 12: 128. 1924.
The syntypes are three females and a male.
We select as lectotvpe the male, bearing the
labels ‘1909/Barranquilla, Colomb./L. H. Dunn
Coll. 1923/Type No. —— U.S.N.M.” The ter-
minalia are on slide no. 1909.
FEBRUARY 1957
Culex tarsalis Coquillett, Can. Ent. 28: 43. 1896.
The original material consisted of one male
and four females from the Argus Mountains and
Folsom, Calif. There are four specimens in the
collection from the former locality, but none from
Folsom. Only one specimen, the male, bears a
type label, and we select this as lectotype. The
labels are “Argus Mts. April 91 K/Type No.
904 U.S.N.M./Culex tarsalis Coq.”
Culex (Choeroporpa) tecmarsis Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 6: 124. 1918.
The lectotype (slide of male terminalia) from
Trinidad River, Panama, selected by Rozeboom
and Komp (1950, p. 97) is in the collection. The
pinned adult from which this came is also lecto-
typic.
Culex (C.) thriambus Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens. 9:
33. 1921.
The three syntypes are in the collection. We
select as lectotype the male bearing the labels
“VY6/Kerrville, Tex. Aug. 20, 1920/H. G. Dyar
Coll./1356/Type No. 23926 U.S.N.M./Culex
thriambus Dyar Type.” The terminalia are on
slide no. 1356.
Culex toweri Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 13. 1907.
This species was described from 39 specimens
collected at Mayaguez, Puerto Rico, by W. V.
Tower. There are 61 specimens bearing these
data in the collection, but only one female bears
a type label, and so we consider this the holo-
type.
Culex trachycampa Dyar and Knab, Can. Ent.
41: 101. 1909.
This species was described from a male and a
female. We select as lectotype the male, bearing
the labels ‘“54.1/Las Cascadas, Canal Zone,
Panama/Collected by August Busck/Type No.
12194 U.S.N.M./See slide No. 401 /trachycampa.”
The terminalia are on slide no. 401.
Culex (Helcoporpa) trifidus Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 9: 115. 1921.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 97) selected
as lectotype “slide 1436, U.S.N.M.”’ This slide
has mounted upon it the terminalia of a speci-
men collected at Riverside, San José, Tiribi,
Costa Rica, January 7, 1921, by A. Alfaro. These
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 57
terminalia and the specimen from which they
came comprise the lectotype.
Culex (Microculex) trychnus Root, Amer. Journ.
Hyg. 7: 585. 1927.
The syntypes consisted of one male and one
female, but only the male has been found in the
collection. This bears the labels “Rio Soberbo,
Brazil, May 1, 1925 No. 79/Type No. 40531
U.S.N.M./79-2/Culex (Microculex) trychnus Root
Type.” We select this male as lectotype. The
terminalia are on a slide.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) wnicornis Root, in Dyar,
Mosquitoes of the Americas: 291, 1928.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 97) selected
“specimen no. | (on left); slide labeled, Maracay,
Venezuela, June 27, 1927. Nos. 92-1, 2, 3” as
lectotype. They assumed that the male termina-
lia farthest from the red cotype label was No. 1.
Since this is only an assumption, we cannot be
sure from which pinned specimen this terminalia
came, but accept the terminalia only as lecto-
typic.
Culex usquatissimus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10:
19. 1922.
The syntype pair is in the collection, and we
select as lectotype the male bearing the labels
“Toro Point, C. Z. 1921/Oct. 27/J. B. Shrop-
shire Coll./1588/Type No. 25147 U.S.N.M/
Culex usquatissima Dyar.”’ The terminalia are on
slide no. 1588.
Culex (C.) usquatus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 6:
122. 1918.
The collection contains two male and three
female syntypes, each bearing the labels ‘“Type
No. 21913 U.S.N.M./Paramaribo, Surmam/Mrs.
J. Bonne-Wepster Collector/3.”’ We select as lec-
totype the male bearing the additional labels
“Slide 967/Culex ousquatus (sic) Dyar Type.”
The terminalia are on slide no. 967. There are a
number of larvae and larval skins mounted on
one slide, also labeled ‘“Type.”’
Culex (Choeroporpa) vapulans Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 69. 1920.
The lectotype (slide of male terminalia) from
Surinam selected by Rozeboom. and Komp
(1950, p. 88) is in the collection. The pinned adult
from which these terminalia came is also lecto-
typic.
ind
Culex (Choeroporpa) vaxus Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens.
8: 73. 1920.
The three original specimens are in the collec-
tion, one labeled as type, and the other two as
paratypes. It is not clear from the original de-
scription that a type was selected, particularly
since the specimens bear Bonne and Bonne-
Wepster numbers but no locality other than
Surinam and no dates of collection. We select as
lectotype the specimen labeled ‘“Type No. 22748
U.S.N.M./BBII 671.’ The terminalia are on a
slide.
Culex vector Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 220. 1906.
This species was described from larvae col-
lected from bromeliads in Trinidad by Urich.
The only larval specimen we find is a larval skin
No. B 12-1 with associated pupal skin and reared
male. We select this series as lectotype.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) vexillifer Komp, Ann. Ent.
Soc. Amer. 29: 320. 1936.
Rozeboom and Komp (1950, p. 97) selected a
lectotype (male terminalia on slide) from Barro
Colorado Island, Canal Zone. We have found
no pin mounted adults of the type series.
Culex vindicator Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 255. 1909.
This species was described from four speci-
mens from Dominica collected by A. Busck in
July. These consist of three males and one fe-
male, each with the label “Type No. 12098
U.S.N.M.” The female also bears Dyar’s label
“Culex vindicator D. & K. Type.” This is in poor
condition. We select as lectotype one of the
males, which bears the labels ‘‘74.25/Dominica,
W.1. July/Aug. Buseck Collector /Slide 776.”’ The
terminalia are on slide no. 776. The larval and
pupal skins have been mounted on another slide.
Culex (Choeroporpa) xivylis Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 78. 1920.
The four original male specimens are in the
collection, one labeled as type and the other three
as paratypes. It is not clear from the original de-
scription that a type was selected, particularly
since the specimens bear Bonne and Bonne-
Wepster numbers, but no locality other than
Surinam, and no dates of collection. Rozeboom
and Komp (1950, p. 92) recognize the specimen
labeled as type, No. BB714c, as the holotype,
58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 2
and we recognize this as lectotype selection if
this was necessary.
The following species are based either on
unique specimens or on clearly designated holo-
types:
Culex
Culex
(Aedinus) accelerans Root, 1927.
(Choeroporpa) alfarot Dyar, 1921.
Culex (Choeroporpa) andricus Root, 1927.
Culex (Phalangomyia) archegus Dyar, 1929.
Culex (Neoculex) arizonensis Bohart, 1948.
Culex aureopunctis Ludlow, 1910.
Culex (Choeroporpa) automartus Root, 1927.
Culex azymus Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Culex (Carrollia) babahoyensis Levi-Castillo, 1953.
Culex (Isostomyia) bamborum Rozeboom and
Komp, 1948.
Culex barbarus Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Culex (Melanoconion) batesi Rozeboom and Komp,
1948.
Culex (Acallyntrum) belkini Stone and Penn, 1948.
Culex (Choeroporpa) bequaerti Dyar and Shannon,
1925.
Culex (Choeroporpa) bibulus Dyar, 1920.
Culex bicki Stone and Penn, 1947.
Culex (Melanoconion) bilobatus Galindo and Blan-
ton, 1954.
Culex (? Neoculex) binigrolineatus Knight and
Rozeboom, 1945.
Culex (Isostomyia) browni Komp, 1936.
Culex (Neoculex) caeruleus King and Hoogstraal,
1947 (terminalia only).
Culex coronator camposi Dyar, 1925.
Culex (Melanoconion) caribeanus Galindo and
Blanton, 1954.
Culex (Lophoceraomyia) carolinensis Bohart and
Ingram, 1946.
Culex (Melanoconion) changuinolae Galindo and
Blanton, 1954.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) colombiensis Dyar, 1924.
Culex (Choeroporpa) comminutor Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Melanoconion) confundior Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only).
Culex consolator Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Culex corrigani Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Culex (Choeroporpa) crybda Dyar, 1924.
Culex (Choeroporpa) cuclyx Dyar and Shannon,
1924.
Culex delys Howard, Dyar, and Knab, 1915.
Culex (Choeroporpa) dornarum Dyar and Shannon,
1
Culex (Choeroporpa) dyius Root, 1927 (terminalia
only).
Culex (Choeroporpa) eastor Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Melanoconion) elaphas Komp, 1936.
Culex (Microculex) elongatus Rozeboom and Komp,
Culex (Choeroporpa) epanastasis Dyar, 1922.
Culex (Microculer) erethyzonfer Galindo and
Blanton, 1954.
Culex (Melanoconion) fairchildi Galindo and Blan-
ton, 1954.
Culex (Choeroporpa) fatuator Dyar and Shannon,
1924
Culex (Melanoconion) flabellifer Komp, 1936 (ter-
minalia only).
Culex (Melanoconion) foliafer Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only).
Culex frickii Ludlow, 1906.
Culex fur Dyar and Knab, 1907.
FEBRUARY 1957
Culex (Culiciomyia) fuscicinctus King and Hoogs-
traal, 1946.
Culex (Melanoconion) galindot Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only).
Culex (Upsiloporpa) haynet Komp and Curry,
1932 (terminalia only).
Culex (Microculer) hedys Root, 1927 (terminalia
only).
Culex (C.) hensemaeon Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Choeroporpa) holoneus Dyar, 1921.
Culex (Melanoconion) homoeopas Dyar and Lud-
low, 1921.
Culex (Choeroporpa) idottus Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) inadmirabilis Dyar, 1928.
Culex (C.) inelegans Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Melanoconion) intonsus Galindo and Blan-
ton, 1954.
Culex (Choeroporpa) iolambdis Dyar, 1918.
Culex (Neoculex) jenkinsi Knight, 1953.
Culex (Melanoconion) jocasta Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only).
Culex (Choeroporpa) jonistes Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Choeroporpa) jubifer Komp and Brown,
1935 (terminalia only).
Culex (Lophoceraomyia) kuhnsi King and Hoogs-
traal, 1955.
Culex (Melanoconion) kummi Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only).
Culex (Melanoconion) lacertosus Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only).
Culex (C.) laticlasper Galindo and Blanton, 1954.
Culex (Lophoceraomyia) lavatae Stone and Bohart,
944
Culex (Lophoceraomyia) leet King and Hoogstraal,
1955.
Culez (C.) lepostenis Dyar, 1923.
Culex (Melanoconion) limacifer Komp, 1936 (ter-
minalia only).
Culex (C.) litoralis Bohart, 1946.
Culex (Melanoconion) loturus Dyar, 1925.
Culex (Melanoconion) lucifugus Komp, 1936 (ter-
minalia only).
Culez (Choeroporpa) macaronensis Dyar and Nu-
fiez Tovar, 1927 (terminalia only).
Culex (Culiciomyia) pullus maplei Knight and
Hurlbut, 1949.
Culex (C.) annulirostris marianae Bohart and In-
gram, 1946.
Culex (Lophoceraomyia) marksae King and Hoogs-
traal, 1955.
Culex marquesensis Stone and Rosen, 1953.
Culex (Neoculex) mattinglyi Knight, 1953.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) megapus Root, 1927 (termi-
nalia only).
Culex (Helcoporpa) menytes Dyar, 1918.
Culex (Choeroporpa) meroneus Dyar, 1925.
Culex (Melanoconion) mistura Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951.
Culex (Melanoconion) mulrennani Basham, 1948.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) mychonde Komp, 1928 (ter-
minalia only).
~
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IV 59
Culex (Culiciomyia) nailont King and Hoogstraal,
1946.
Culex (Neoculex) okinawae Bohart, 1953.
Culex (C.) ousqua Dyar, 1918.
Culex (Melanoconion) paracrydba Komp, 1936.
Culex (Carrollia) paraplesia Dyar, 1922.
Culex (Choeroporpa) pasadaemon Dyar, 1921.
Culex (Neoculex) pedicellus King and Hoogstraal,
1947.
Culex (Acallyntrum) perkinst Stone and Penn,
1948
Culex (Transculicia) petersont Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Choeroporpa) phlabistus Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Choeroporpa) phlogistus Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Mochlostyrax) pose Dyar and Knab, 1918.
Culex (Melanoconion) pseudotaeniopus Galindo
and Blanton, 1954.
Culex putumayensis Matheson, 1934.
Culex (Melanoconion) quadrifoliatus Komp, 1936
(terminalia only).
Culex (Melanoconion) quasthibridus Galindo and
Blanton, 1954.
Culex (Neoculex) reevesi Bohart, 1948.
Culex (Culiciomyia) ryukyensis Bohart, 1946.
Culex (Melanoconion) ruffinus Dyar and Shannon,
24
1924.
Culex (C.) saltanensis Dyar, 1928.
Culex (C.) scutatus Rozeboom and Komp, 1948.
Culex (Choeroporpa) serratimarge Root, 1927.
Culex (C.) summorosus Dyar, 1920.
Culex taeniopus Dyar and Knab, 1907.
(Eubonnea) tapena Dyar, 1919.
Culex (Choeroporpa) terebor Dyar, 1920 (terminalia
only).
Culex termi Thurman, 1955.
Culex (Choeroporpa) tosimus Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Lophoceraomyia) tuberis Bohart, 1946.
Melanoconion urichii Coquillett, 1906.
Culex vomerifer Komp, 1932 (terminalia only).
Culex (Melanoconion) wepsterae Komp and Roze-
boom, 1951 (terminalia only). This is an emen-
dation of wepsterz, since it was named after
Mrs. C. Bonne-Wepster.
Culex (Choeroporpa) ybarmis Dyar, 1920.
Culex (Melanoconion) zeteki Dyar, 1918.
LITERATURE CITED
Dyar, Harrison G., anp NuNez Tovar, M. De-
scription of new species of mosquitoes from
Venezuela. Amer. Journ. Hyg. 8: 89-92. 1928.
Kine, W. V., ano Braptey, C. H. Notes on Culex
erraticus and related species in the United
States. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 30: 345-357. 1987.
Lane, J., AND WHITMAN, L. The subgenus Micro-
culex in Brazil (Diptera, Culicidae). Rev. Bra-
zil Biol. 11: 341. 1951.
RozexBoom, L. E., anp Komp, W. H. W. A review
of the species of Culex of the subgenus Melano-
conion. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 43: 75-114. 1950.
The phenomena are our data, and behind them we cannot go
except in Imagination.—ScHOPENHAUER
60 JOURNAL OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 2
HERPETOLOGY — Descriptions of two new frogs from Colombia. CoLemMan J.
Gorn, University of Florida. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received October 30, 1956)
The Silver Springs South American Ex-
pedition of 1956 was organized for the pur-
pose of collecting and bringing back to
Silver Springs for exhibition and study live
specimens of the fresh-water porpoise, /nza
geoffrensis (Blainville), which occurs in the
Amazon drainage. Two members of the
expedition, E. Ross Allen of Ross Allen’s
Reptile Institute and Dr. James N. Layne,
mammalogist from the University of Florida,
in addition to their regular duties, found
time during the evenings to collect repre-
sentatives of about two dozen species of
frogs. Included among them are two hylas
that seem to be undescribed.
Both of these species belong to the group
of South American hylas to which Hyla
leucophyllata belongs. This group is charac-
terized by having immaculate or nearly
immaculate thighs that are bright pink or
red in life; by the presence of a fold of skin
(patagium) extending from the arm to the
side of the body; and, as Dr. Charles F.
Walker recently pointed out to me, by a
pair of glandular areas in the skin of the
pectoral region. Many of the species in this
group are brightly marked in life.
One of these new species is a_ brightly
marked little frog represented by two speci-
mens that were collected on grass growing
in the edge of a stream. It is with pleasure
that I dedicate this species to KE. Ross
Allen, friend of many years standing and
leader of the expedition.
Hyla alleni, n.sp. Hig
Type.—Univ. Florida 8501, adult male, col-
lected near Leticia, Amazonas Comisaria, Colom-
bia, February 24, 1956, by James N. Layne and
E. Ross Allen.
Paratype—Univ. Florida 8502, adult male
from the same locality as the type, collected
March 1, 1956.
Diagnosis.—A small, brightly marked Hyla
characterized by having bright, creamy white,
supraocular spots which may join to form an
interocular bar, and a row of similar spots ex-
tending from the tympanum to above the arm;
by the absence of vomerine teeth; and by the
presence of a pair of glandular areas in the pec-
toral region. From leucophyllata it differs in pat-
tern and in the absence of vomerine teeth while
from sarayacuensis and bifurca it differs in its
smaller size and in lacking definitive white
stripes along the anterior sides of the body.
Description of type—Head broad, width
greater than distance from snout to occiput;
snout nearly rounded as seen from above, upper
jaw very slightly projecting; eyes large and pro-
tuberant; diameter of eye greater than distance
from eye to nostril; nostril very near tip of
snout; interorbital space about equal to diameter
of individual eye; tympanum distinct but small,
not more than one-third the diameter of the eye;
distance from tympanum to eye slightly less than
diameter of tympanum; upper eyelids, top of head
and dorsum smooth. Well developed dises on all
fingers and toes; disc of second finger about equal
to diameter of tympanum (dise of third finger of
left hand partially removed to permit view of
terminal phalanx). Fingers not particularly
slender; third finger fully webbed for only about
one-third its length but a slender margin of web
extends distally to the base of the penultimate
phalanx; fingers 3-4-2-1 in order of decreasing
length with fingers 4 and 2 being nearly sub-
equal. Toes slender, fully webbed except the
fourth toe which has the web extending to the
base of the penultimate phalanx; toes 4-3-5-2-1
in order of decreasing length. Heels slightly over-
lapping when legs are flexed with femora held at
right angles to the body; knees and elbows in
contact when limbs are pressed along the side;
heel extending to anterior margin of eye when
leg is pressed along body. A moderately devel-
oped fold of skin (patagium) extending from the
back of the upper arm to the side of the body.
Venter and under side of thighs rugose; under
side of chin covered by loosely folded external
vocal pouch which is very finely rugose. There is a
pair of glandular areas in the skin of the pectoral
region. Hach area is about 2! mm in diameter
and lies just posterior to the insertion of the arm.
The areas are separated on the median line by
FEBRUARY 1957
about 2 mm. Tongue nearly round, not notched
behind and but slightly free behind, its diameter
about two-thirds the width of the mouth. Vomer-
ine teeth absent. Choanae moderate in size,
rounded, and well separated.
Fre. 1.—Dorsal view of the type of Hyla alleni,
n.sp., Univ. Florida 8501. Drawn by Esther
Coogle. X 2
Coloration of type—Ground color above tan-
nish brown, scattered punctulations of darker
brown on the back between the eyes and the
shoulder region and a similar patch of darker
punctulations above the sacral region. Darker
pigment is also in evidence on the elbows and in
bands across the tibia. There is, above each eye,
a conspicuous creamy patch that extends from
the free margin of the upper lid down onto the
interocular region where it approaches, but does
not quite meet, its fellow from the opposite side.
Similar creamy white patches make up a short,
arched row of light flecks that extends from
above the tympanum on each side to above the
axilla where it becomes obsolescent. The dorsal
surface of the thigh has some tannish pigment
similar to the dorsal ground color on it but is
nevertheless paler than the dorsum and is with-
out a distinct pattern. The entire ventral surface
is immaculate except for a few flecks of dark pig-
ment on each side of the throat near the posterior
portion of the lower jaw.
Measurements of type (in millimeters) —Snout-
to-vent length, 22.8; head width, 8.3; tip of snout
to posterior margin of tympanum, 7.7; diameter
of eye, 3.0; diameter of tympanum, 1.0; hind leg
(vent to tip of longest toe), 38.5; hind leg (vent
to heel), 22.3.
GOIN: TWO NEW FROGS FROM COLOMBIA 61
Coloration in life—When captured this speci-
men was predominately brown above and whitish
below. The thighs were salmon pink below and
somewhat dusky dorsally. The bars above the
eyes and the row of light flecks on each side
behind the head were creamy white. A few tiny
flecks of a similar nature were present along the
shank although these have faded somewhat in
preservative.
Variation —The only noteworthy variation
between the two specimens is in the supraocular
pattern. In the paratype the creamy white
patches above the eyes are joined on the median
line, thus forming an interocular bar that extends
from the margin of the upper eyelid on one side
to the margin of the upper eyelid on the other.
In size the two specimensare essentially the same,
the paratype having a snout-to-vent length of
22.5 mm.
The other species is a small spotted Hyla. In
appreciation of Dr. Layne’s zeal as a field collec-
tor and the care with which he kept notes on these
frogs, this species may appropriately be called
Hyla laynei, n.sp. Fig. 2
Type.—Univ. Florida 8503, adult male, col-
lected near Leticia, Amazonas Comisaria,
Colombia, February 28, 1956, by James N.
Layne.
Paratypes—Univ. Florida 8504, 8505, two
adult males collected at the same locality as the
type, February 23 and 24, respectively.
Diagnosis.—A small, brightly marked Hyla
characterized by having a yellowish or tannish
Fic. 2.—Dorsal view of the type of Hyla laynez,
n.sp., Univ. Florida 8503. Drawn by Esther
Coogle. X 2
62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
dorsum with a mid-dorsal row of round, dark
brown spots and a similar row of spots on each
side where the dorsal and ventral ground colors
meet; by the presence of small, rounded patches
of vomerine teeth; and by the presence of a pair
of glandular areas in the pectoral region. The
absence of creamy white markings on a dark
background distinguishes this species from the
forms closely allied to leucophyllata while its
pattern of a row of round spots down the middle
of the back seems to be unique among the more
somber members of the leucophyllata group.
Description of type-—Head broad, width
slightly greater than distance from snout to occi-
put; snout somewhat triangular as seen from
above with the tip broadly rounded; upper jaw
projecting but slightly beyond tip of lower; eyes
moderate in size and not pronouncedly protuber-
ant; diameter of eye about equal to distance
from eye to nostril; nostril near tip of snout;
interorbital space about equal to diameter of
individual eye; tympanum distinct but small,
not more than one-third the diameter of the eye;
distance from eye to tympanum slightly less than
diameter of the latter. Upper eyelids, top of head
and dorsum smooth. Well developed discs on all
fingers and toes; discs of second and third fingers
about equal to the size of the tympanum. Fingers
not particularly slender; fingers two, three, and
four webbed to the bases of their penultimate
phalanges, with a narrow margin of web extend-
ing to the base of the disc of the fourth finger;
fingers 3-4-2-1 in order of decreasing length. Toes
slender, fully webbed except for fourth toe
which is webbed to the base of the penultimate
phalanx; toes 4-3-5-2-1 in order of decreasing
length. Heels slightly overlapping when legs are
flexed with femora held at right angles to the
body; knees and elbows in contact when limbs
are pressed along the side; heel extending to
anterior margin of eye when leg is pressed along
body. A well developed fold of skin (patagium)
extending from the back of the upper arm to the
side of the body. Venter strongly rugose, but
under sides of thighs and chin nearly smooth;
no well marked external vocal pouch. There is a
pair of glandular areas in the skin of the pectoral
region. Each area is about 4 mm in diameter and
lies just posterior to the insertion of the arm. The
paired glandular areas do not quite meet on the
median line. Tongue nearly round, very slightly
notched and slightly free behind; its diameter
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. |
about one-half the width of the mouth. Vomerine
teeth in two small oval patches between the
choanae, each patch about the size of a choana
and the distance between the patches about
equal to the distance between a patch and a
choana.
Coloration of type-—Ground color on top of
head, dorsum, top of arm and top of shank a light
tannish gray; a single median row of dark,
chocolate brown spots extends from between the
eyes to just posterior to the sacral hump. These
spots are roundish and each is about a millimeter
or slightly more in diameter. A dark stripe of the
same nature extends from behind each eye
through the tympanum and then breaks up into
a row of spots similar to, but slightly smaller than,
those on the back, which continues along the side
to the vent. Dark spots similar to those in the
row along the side occur on top of the arms, the
shanks and the feet. The upper lip is whitish,
while rounded brownish spots are distributed on
the loreal region and upper lip. Brown pigment
flecks are distributed along the margin of the
lower jaw, otherwise the entire ventral surface is
immaculate.
Measurements of type (in millimeters) —Snout-
to-vent length, 25.6; head width, 9.5; tip of snout
to posterior margin of tympanum, 7.8; diameter
of eye, 3.0; diameter of tympanum, 1.2; hind leg
(vent to tip of longest toe), 39.8; hind leg (vent
to heel), 24.0.
Coloration in life—In life the ground color of
the dorsum was yellow and the spots were a rich
brown. The hands, feet and thighs were a bright
salmon pink and the venter was tinged with the
same color.
Variation —In dorsal ground color one of the
paratypes is lighter than the type, the other
darker. In the specimen with the lightest ground
color the dark brown spots are double at two
places along the back and between the eyes, thus
giving the impression of a double row of spots
down the back. In the darkest specimen the
ground color is a light brown and consequently
the dark brown spots do not show up quite so
prominently. In this specimen there are five spots
in the middorsal row, not counting those on top
of the head and the spots are somewhat smaller
than in the other two individuals. In life this
specimen had a dorsal ground color of tan and
the under parts of the abdomen and hind legs
were salmon pink.
FEBRUARY 1957
Structurally there is but little variation
amongst the three specimens. The other two do
not have the patagium quite so well developed
as the type but even in them it is prominent. In
none of the three is the external vocal pouch
prominent.
Both of the paratypes are 24.7 mm in snout-to-
vent length.
The two paratypes were collected in grass that
was growing in the water at the edge of a cove
of a small stream. The type was collected when
EMPLOYMENT PROFILE OF SCIENTISTS 63
calling in a wet meadow. Dr. Layne described its
voice as a musical rattling trill—kle-kle-kle-klee.
Acknowledgments.—While full acknowledgment
of all those who helped in identifying the mate-
rial collected by this expedition must await pub-
lication of a general report upon this collection,
I do wish at this time to thank particularly Dr.
Doris M. Cochran of the United States National
Museum and Dr. Robert Mertens of the Sencken-
berg Museum for the help they have given me
concerning these two species.
EMPLOYMENT PROFILE OF SCIENTISTS, 1954-55
Comprehensive information on the employ-
ment and other characteristics of American
scientists is made available in a bulletin released
by the National Science Foundation. The report
—Employment Profile of Scientists in the National
Register of Scientific and Technical Personnel,
1954-55, is based on the replies of more than
94,000 scientists who supplied information to the
Register. It contains the most recent data avail-
able on so large a number of scientists, including
about 27,000 chemists, 16,300 biologists, 12,200
psychologists, 11,800 geologists (including 3,400
geophysicists), 11,200 physicists, 6,700 chemical
engineers, 5,400 mathematicians, 3,200 mete-
orologists, and 400 astronomers.
More than 41 percent of the employed scien-
tists in the Register held the Ph.D. degree; 25
percent attamed a master’s degree; and 32 per-
cent had the bachelor’s or first professional
degree (M.D., etc.). Fewer than 2 percent of
scientists reported no degree.
Scientists at the doctorate level in 1954-55
reported a median annual salary of $7,000,
those with less than a Ph.D. degree $6,125
($875 less). Highest median salary was for Ph.D.
physicists and meteorologists—$7,850. Lowest
salaries were for psychologists—$5,850. Salaries
are not only dependent on educational attain-
ment, but also on such things as age, sex, type of
employer, and functions to which scientists de-
vote the major part of their time. The data on
salaries are less representative than the informa-
tion on other employment characteristics, how-
ever, because the chemists and chemical en-
gineers did not report salary information.
About one-half of the employed scientists held
a job in industry (private companies, self-em-
ployed, nonprofit foundations, and privately
controlled research foundations). Almost one-
third were employed by educational institutions;
and the remaining 18 percent by the Government
(Federal, State, and local).
Research, development, or field exploration
was the primary function of half the scientists;
management or administration, of 18 percent;
and teaching, of 16 percent. In this as in other
respects, basic differences among the various
scientific fields appear. Teaching, for example,
was reported as the major function of almost 40
percent of the mathematicians, but of only 4
percent of the chemical engineers.
About 7,000 women scientists were included
in the Register total of 94,000, of whom 85 per-
cent were in three scientific fields—psychology,
chemistry, and biology. The psychologists made
up the largest group of women scientists—one
out of every four psychologists was a woman.
Next to psychology in terms of the proportion of
women scientists was astronomy—one out of
every six; in mathematics—one out of every ten.
The National Science Foundation Act of 1950
established the Register, which is administered
jointly by the Foundation and a number of pro-
fessional societies. The information in the bulletin
is based on voluntary registration with these
cooperating societies.
64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 2
HERPETOLOGY .—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, 12:
The herpetofauna of Anne Arundel County, Md. Cuypr F. Reerp, Baltimore,
Md. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received November 13, 1956)
Anne Arundel County hes mainly on the
Inner Coastal Plain in Maryland. The main
Piedmont tributaries that bound the county
are the Patapsco River on the north and
the Upper Patuxent River on the west and
southwest. On the east the county is bounded
by the Chesapeake Bay, in from which
several tidal rivers flow, as the Severn,
Magothy, South, and West Rivers. Each of
these rivers has its headwaters within the
coastal soils of Anne Arundel County.
Other than the meager Piedmont areas
where Anne Arundel, Howard, and Prince
Georges Counties come together, the eco-
logical habitats are typically coastal. Pitcher-
plant, cranberry, and sphagnum bogs are
not infrequent in the northeast-central
areas of the county, as Lake Shore, Mount
Carmel Lake, Lake Waterford, and the
headwaters of Severn.
The author has collected the herpetofauna
in Anne Arundel County since 1936, when
he collected Humeces laticeps and Chelydra
serpentina at Mount Carmel Lake, near
Lake Shore.
New to the county are the author’s and
Daffin’s records for Pseudemys rubriventris
(1088); Desmognathus fuscus (876); Pseudo-
triton ruber (210-211, 504-505, 916-928);
Scaphiopus holbrooki (1077-80); Hyla cruci-
fer (Daffin 242); Rana pipiens (509; Daffin
41, 517, 136, 560); Rana sylvatica (13);
Graptemys geographica (Daffin 388). Of
course, I realize there may be specimens for
many of these species in private and public
collections, but their presence has not been
published, and so the present list constitutes
the first published record for some of these
species in this county.
I wish to thank Dr. Doris Cochran, of the
United States National Museum, for the
use of the data and the specimens from
Anne Arundel County. Also, I wish to thank
Ralph Daffin and Donald Linzey, two
young Baltimore herpetologists, for enabling
me to study and cite their specimens from
this county. In the combined collections
annotated below, there are 47 species of
herptiles represented in Anne Arundel
County, Md.
1. Desmognathus fuscus fuscus (Green): Dusky
salamander. Lake Waterford, along stream,
May 26, 1954, Reed 876.
2. Plethodon cinereus cinereus (Green): Wood
or red-backed salamander. South River (Fowler,
Copeia 1925, No. 145: 62), woods near Solley,
May 21, 1958, Reed 218-219; woods near
Brooklyn. May 21, 1953, Reed 243; woods 214
miles northwest of Friendship Airport, Septem-
ber 25, 1953, Reed 6-12; woods 1 mile south of
Mountain Road on Ritchie Highway, March
7, 1954, Daffin 64.
3. Pseudotriton ruber ruber (Sonnini): Red
salamander. Wet woods near Solley, May 21,
1953, Reed 210-211; August 7, 1953, Reed 504—
505; under logs, 2 miles south of Glenburnie,
June 25, 1954, Reed 926-928; Glenburnie, June
15, 1955, Daffin 376; Priests Bridge (U.S.N.M.
101426; 101427-8).
4. Ambystoma maculatum Shaw: Spotted
salamander. Harwood (U.S.N.M. 103740).
5. Ambystoma opacum (Gravenhorst): Marbled
salamander. Stine (Maryland Nat. 23(1-2):
77. 1953, no specimens cited).
6. Scaphiopus holbrooki holbrooki (Harlan):
Spadefoot toad. Edgewater, July 21, 1956,
Daffin 541; west of Owings, July 22, 1956, Reed
1077-1080; 1.5 miles south of U.S. Highway 50
on Maryland Route 2, near Edgewater, July 21,
1956, Daffin 543; along U.S. Highway 50 at
Maryland Route 2, July 21, 1956, Daffin 544.
7. Bufo woodhousei fowlert Hinckley: Fowler’s
toad. Swampy area near stream, 14 mile south
of Harundale, June 10, 1954, Daffin 133; along
US. Highway 301, 1 mile north of Priests Bridge,
July 14, 1956, Daffin 519, Linzey 148-151; west
of Owings, July 22, 1956, Reed 1076.
8. Acris gryllus gryllus (Le Conte): Cricket
frog. Patuxent River (U.S.N.M. 101222); De-
fense Highway near Bowie (U.S.N.M. 101220-1);
along U.S. Highway 301, 1 mile north of Priests
Bridge, July 14, 1956, Daffin 518, Linzey 142-144.
9. Acris gryllus crepitans Baird: Cricket frog.
Woods near Solley, May 21, 1953, Reed 282;
pond at Alpine Beach, near Fort Smallwood,
FEBRUARY 1957
October 16, 1953, Daffin 32; July 24, 1956,
Dagfin 563; Lake Shore near Mountain Road,
October 16, 1953, Daffin 33 and Linzey 5-10;
Pinehurst near Gibson Island, April 2, 1955,
Daffin 243; sand pits 1 mile north of Priests
Bridge, May 10, 1954, Reed 766-770; August 4,
1956, Reed 1183-1190; July 14, 1956, Linzey
145-147.
10. Hyla cinerea (Schneider): Green tree frog.
Ritchie Highway between Magothy and Severn
Rivers, July 1956 (reported to author by Robert
Simmons; also reported to author from Anne
Arundel County by Dr. Doris Cochran).
11. Hyla crucifer crucifer Wied: Spring peeper.
Pinehurst near Gibson Island, April 2, 1955,
Daffin 242.
12. Hyla versicolor versicolor LeConte: Com-
mon tree frog. Millersville (Noble and Hassler,
Copeia 1936(1); 63-64); Priests Bridge, Brown,
Aschemeier, & East, May 1936 (U.S.N.M.
101429-32): 1.8 mile south of Route 214 on
Maryland Route 2, July 21, 1956, Daffin 540;
Edgewater, 6 miles south of Annapolis, July 21,
1956, Daffin 542.
13. Rana catesbeiana Shaw: Bull frog. Mary-
land Beach near Fort Smallwood, July 28, 1956,
Daffin 566; Rhodes River (Fowler, Copeia 1925,
No. 145: 62); Pinehurst near Gibson Island,
Apr. 2, 1955, Daffin & Reed; Laurel (U.S.N.M.
36091 and 26320-22).
14. Rana clamitans Latreille: Green frog.
Along Old Annapolis Road, April 18, 1953,
Reed 482; woods near Sherwood Forest, June 7,
1953, Reed 288; woods near Solley, May 21, 1953,
Reed 286; along Severn River and Dicus Mill
Road, summer 1953, Reed 488; May 26, 1954,
Reed 877; Mount Carmel Lake, Lake Shore,
August 7, 1953, Reed 510; September 16, 1953.
Linzey 11; stream south of Harundale, June 10,
1954, Daffin 134, 137-143; Priests Bridge (U.S.-
N.M. 101433); 1.5 mile north of Priests Bridge,
July 14, 1956, Linzey 154; along U.S. Highway
301, 2 miles south of Conway, July 14, 1956,
Daffin 520; west of Owings, July 22, 1956, Reed
1074-75; Alpine Beach near Fort Smallwood,
July 24, 1956, Daffin 561; Muddy Creek (Fowler,
Copeia 1925, No. 145: 62).
15. Rana pipiens pipiens Schreber (incl.
sphenocephala): Leopard frog. Mount Carmel
Lake, Lake Shore, August 7, 1953, Reed 509;
‘Patapsco River near Old Annapolis Road, Aug.
31, 1953, Daffin 41; U.S. Highway 301, 1-1.5
miles north of Priests Bridge, May 10, 1954,
Reed 771; July 14, 1956, Daffin 517, Linzey
152-153; stream south of Harundale, June 10,
1954, Daffin 136; August 11, 1956, Linzey 197;
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 12 65
Alpine Beach near Fort Smallwood, July 24,
1956, Daffin 560.
16. Rana palustris LeConte: Pickerel frog.
Stream south of Harendale, June 10, 1954,
Daffin 135; Muddy Creek (Fowler, Copeia,
1925, No. 146: 62).
17. Rana sylvatica LeConte: Wood frog.
Woods, 215 miles northwest of Friendship Air-
port, September 25, 1953, Reed 13.
18. Cnemidophorus sexlineata seaxlineata (Lin-
naeus): Six-lined skink or racerunner. Sandy
woods 2 miles south of Glenburnie, June 25,
1954, Reed 925; McCauley, 1945: Bodkin Point,
Camp Linstead, Fort Smallwood, Furnace
Branch near Glenburnie, Lake Shore, Priests
Bridge, Severna Park.
19. Sceloporus undulatus hyacinthinus (Green) :
Fence swift. On pine tree, Mount Carmel Lake,
Lake Shore, June 25, 1954, Reed 929; common in
woods near Friendship Airport, June 1955,
Reed; mouth of Barrow Creek (Fowler, Copeia
1925, No. 145: 63); McCauley, 1945: Annapolis,
3 miles southwest of Annapolis, Camp Linstead,
Crownsville, Fort Armstead, Fort Smallwood,
Glenburnie, Lake Shore, Round Bay, Severna
Park.
20. Eumeces fasciatus (Linnaeus): Five-lined
skink. Near Priests Bridge, pinewoods, May 10,
1954, Reed 765; Annapolis (A.M.N.H.); Me-
Cauley, 1945: Annapolis, 11 miles north of
Annapolis, Lake Shore, Priests Bridge, Severna
Park; Severn Run Bridge at U.S. Highway 301,
July 21, 1956, Linzey 167.
21. Eumeces laticeps (Schneider): Greater
five-lmed skink. Lake Shore, summer 1936,
Reed; McCauley, 1945: Indian Landing, Lake
Shore, Severna Park, Shore Acres near Arnold.
22. Carphophis amoenus amoenus (Say): Worm
snake, Along Severn River, under logs, west of
Annapolis, September 7, 1953, Reed 1-3; woods
near Mount Carmel Lake, July 16, 1956, Reed
1167; Joyee Lane, near Briar Cliff-on-Severn,
August 11, 1956, Daffin 573; McCauley, 1945:
Camp Linstead, Crownsville, Little Round Bay,
Priests Bridge, Severna Park.
23. Diadophis punctatus edwardsi (Merrem):
Ring-necked snake. South River (Fowler, Copeia
1925, No. 145: 63); McCauley, 1945: Camp
Linstead near Laurel, Montevideo.
24. Heterodon platyrhinos platyrhinos Latreille:
Hog-nosed snake. McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel
County, without definite records.
25. Opheodrys aestivus (Linnaeus): Rough
green snake. McCauley, 1945: Camp Linstead,
Crownsville, Glenburnie, Lake Shore, Little
Round Bay Creek, Severn River, Severna Park
near Stoney Run.
66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
26. Coluber constrictor constrictor (Linnaeus):
Black racer. Mouth of Barrow Creek (Fowler,
Copeia 1925, No. 145: 63); McCauley, 1945:
Anne Arundel County, without definite records.
27. Elaphe guttata (Linnaeus): Corn snake.
McCauley, 1945: Briar Cliff-on-Severn near
Arnold, Wardaur on Severn River near Annapolis.
28. Elaphe obsoleta obsoleta (Say): Pilot black
snake. McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel County,
without definite records; Jessup record near
Anne Arundel-Prince Georges County boundary.
29. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linnaeus):
King snake. McCauley, 1945: Near Annapolis
Junction; Camp Linstead; Crownsville; near
Glenburnie; Indian Landing; Lake Shore; Severn;
near Severn River; Severna Park.
30. Lampropeltis calligaster rhombomaculata
(Holbrook): Brown king snake or mole snake.
McCauley, 1945: near Annapolis Junction
(UM); road between Millersville and Odenton:
(U.S.N.M. 108753).
31. Lampropeltis doliata triangulum (Lacé-
pede): Milk snake. McCauley, 1945: near Laurel;
intermediates between triangulum and temporalis:
Annapolis; near Round Bay on Severn River
(JHU).
32. Cemophora coccinea (Blumenbach): Scarlet
snake. McCauley, 1945: St. Margaret’s (Steg-
neger, 1905); Mill Creek, June 8, 1947, Dr.
Phillip A. Butler (U.M.); see Littleford, Her-
petologica 11: 104. 1955.
33. Natrix sipedon sipedon (Linnaeus): Com-
mon water snake. Along Severn River near
Annapolis, June 4, 1953, Reed 487; 14 mile south
of Harundale, Ritchie Highway, June 10, 1954,
Daffin 132; Alpine Beach near Fort Smallwood,
July 24, 1956, Daffin 562; Priests Bridge, July
22, 1956, Reed; McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel
County, without definite records; mouth of
Barrow Creek (Fowler, Copeia 1925, No. 145:
63).
34. Natrix septemvittata (Say): Queen snake.
Along Patapsco River near Linthicum, June 11,
1953, Reed 293; McCauley, 1945: Annapolis;
Camp Linstead; Sawmill Creek, 1 mile north
of Glenburnie.
35. Storeria dekayi (Holbrook): DeKay’s
snake. McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel County,
without definite records.
36. Haldea valeriae valeriae Baird and Girard:
Eastern ground snake. Woods under log, near
Brooklyn, May 21, 1953, Reed 4; McCauley,
1945: near Marley Creek; Severna Park; near
Annapolis.
37. Thamnophis sirtalis sirtalis (Linnaeus):
Garter snake. McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel
County, without definite records, map 32.
VoL. 47, No. 2
38. Thamnophis sauritus sauritus (Linnaeus):
Ribbon snake. McCauley, 1945: Camp Lin-
stead; Furnace Branch; map 31.
39. Ancistrodon contortrix mokeson (Daudin):
Copperhead. Woods near Sherwood Forest,
summer 1953, Reed 466; McCauley, 1945: Briar
Cliff-on-Severn near Arnold; Crownsville; Lake
Shore; map 33.
40. Sternotherus odoratus Latreille: Musk
turtle. McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel County,
without definite records, map 35 (Brooklyn).
41. Kinosternon subrubrum subrubrum (La-
cépéde): Mud turtle. Magothy River, 1935,
Reed; McCauley, 1945: Glenburnie; Lake Shore;
North River and Defense Highway; Priests
Bridge; Severna Park, South River, 3 miles
southwest of Annapolis.
42. Chelydra serpentina serpentina (Linnaeus):
Snapping turtle. Severn River, near Sherwood
Forest, west of Annapolis, June 7, 1953, several
caught. Reed 1247; DOR, east of Laurel at
Patuxent River, June 13, 1956, Reed; mouth of
Barrow Creek (Fowler, Copeia 1925, No. 145:
64); McCauley, 1945: Anne Arundel County
(Laurel), map. 37; Mount Carmel Lake, summer
1936, Reed.
43. Clemmys guttata (Schneider): Spotted
turtle. DOR, just south of Annapolis Junction,
Baltimore-Washington Parkway, June 4, 1954,
Reed 910; McCauley, 1945: Camp Linstead;
Crownsville; Glenburnie; near Harmans; Lake
Shore; Priests Bridge; map. 38.
44. Terrapene carolina carolina (Linnaeus):
Common box turtle. Friendship Airport, June
20, 1956, DOR, Reed; near Chesapeake Bay
Bridge, DOR, July 13, 1956. Reed; North River
along U.S. Highway 50, July 22, 1956, Reed;
U.S. Highway 301 near Millersville, July 14,
1956, Daffin 516; Joyce Lane near Briar Cliff-on-
Severn, August 11, 1956, Daffin 574; McCauley,
1945: Anne Arundel County, without definite
records, map 41; woods near Friendship in
southern Anne Arundel County, July 22, 1956,
Reed 1245.
45. Graptemys geographica (LeSueur): Map
turtle. Alpine Beach near Fort Smallwood,
August 5, 1955, Daffin 388; Bodkin Point, Daffin.
46. Chrysemys picta picta (Schneider): Painted
turtle. Pond at Maryland Beach near Fort
Smallwood, July 16, 1954, Daffin 167; McCauley,
1945: Anne Arundel County, without definite
records, map 44; Brooklyn, May 15, 1953, Reed
277.
47. Pseudemys rubrwentris (LeConte): Red-
bellied terrapin. DOR, North River and US.
Highway 50, July 22, 1956, Reed 1088—new to
Anne Arundel County. é
FEBRUARY 1957
PREE RADICALS RESEARCH 67
FREE RADICALS RESEARCH PROGRAM
A three-vear program of basic research on free
radicals has been undertaken by the National
Bureau of Standards. The object of the program
will be to increase fundamental knowledge of the
formation, properties, and storage of these highly
reactive molecular fragments. Plans have been
made for a series of experimental and theoretical
investigations which, it is hoped, will not only
provide valuable data but will also stimulate
new areas of research in this important new field.
The work is receiving support from the Depart-
ment of Defense through the Office of Ordnance
Research, U. 8S. Army.
The free radicals research program will consist
of many separate projects to be carried out in
various laboratories of the Bureau, and much of
the investigative work will be done by scientists
on loan from industrial laboratories. However,
overall direction and coordination will be cen-
tered in a Free Radicals Research Section re-
cently established for this purpose.
Ordinarily free radicals exist only for very
short periods in systems such as flames and hot
gases. However, within the past five years numer-
ous methods have been developed in a number
of laboratories for capturing and storing them,
mainly at low temperatures. Recently, by freez-
ing the products of an electric discharge at a few
degrees above absolute zero, scientists at the
Bureau were able to store some types of free
radicals in highly excited states, making it pos-
sible to study and analyze them by spectroscopic
methods! Free radical storage techniques now
promise to provide an important tool for the
study of atomic and molecular physics and for
research in basic chemistry. However, before
these applications can be seriously considered,
much additional research must be done on free
radicals of all types in order to provide informa-
tion on such topics as their properties in solid,
liquid, and gaseous phases; their recombination
rates at various temperatures; and their reactions
with other materials. The free radicals program
was set up to provide an integrated approach to
these problems.
To encourage broad dissemination of the in-
formation obtained in the program, and also to
minimize interference other established
projects at the Bureau, participating scientists
with
1 Low temperature storage of free radicals, NBS
Tech. News Bull. 40: 112. August 1956.
will be drawn largely from other institutions.
Approximately half of the technical staff for the
free radicals research program will be on loan
from industrial research laboratories, working
under a unique cooperative plan. Others will come
from and various
agencies.
The guest scientists will be selected for par-
ticipation on the basis of competence in their field
and interest in the new research problems. It is
expected that the work of this central research
group will be continued and expanded in many of
the industrial laborarories after termination of
the present program.
Insofar as possible, each visiting scientist will
be assigned to the Bureau laboratory most
closely allied with his field of interest. There he
will work with colleagues and facilities in his
special field while retaining the advantage of close
cooperation with the remainder of the staff of
the free radicals research program throughout
the Bureau.
A technical data center is being set up so that
free radical research at other laboratories, both
in the United States and abroad, may be closely
followed. Other activities serving to knit together
the various research projects making up the
program will include weekly colloquia and a
general conference now being planned for mid-
1957.
Although the free radicals research program
is still largely in the planning stage, a number of
projects are already under way. These include
spectroscopic investigations of condensates from
electric discharges; X-ray and electron-diffrac-
tion studies of the structure of solids containing
free radicals; methods of preparing pure free
radicals by photolysis and gamma irradiation;
and theoretical calculations of recombination
rates, heats of reaction, and other properties.
Dr. Herbert P. Broida, who has been named
chief of the new Free Radicals Section, will serve
as technical coordinator for the entire program.
Dr. Arnold M. Bass is to serve as assistant chief
of the Free Radicals Research Section. Dr. James
W. Moyer will serve as consultant for the pro-
gram, and A. K. Stober, formerly of the NBS
eryogenic physics laboratory, will assist with
universities government
low-temperature experiments. Dr. Robert D.
Huntoon, associate director for physics, will
have over-all responsibility for the program.
68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47, NO. 2
INSECT STUDIES
ARMY ANTS
There are ants that build complex, air-condi-
tioned hanging houses out of thousands of their
own suspended bodies. Within these structures
the queen is sheltered, eggs are laid, young
hatched and reared. Much of the time the struc-
tures are built anew each night.
These ants are the Ecitons, one of the two
species of army ants—‘‘the Huns and Tartars of
the insect world’’—of Barro Colorado Island, the
tropical preserve of the Smithsonian Institution
in the Canal Zone. Their curious ways of life are
described by Dr. T. C. Schneirla, of the American
Museum of Natural History, in the most recent
Smithsonian Annual Report. Dr. Schneirla has
observed the Barro Colorado ant colonies for
nearly 25 years.
Aside from the ruthlessness and military
efficiency of their raids, long well known in ento-
mological literature, perhaps the home-building
behavior is the most interesting feature of the
life of these ants. It is unique in nature.
Without any active excavating and without any
manipulating of fallen materials [Dr. Schneirla
says], colonies of these species form a domicile
with their own bodies. A typical bivouac .. . is a
cylindrical mass hanging as most of them do from
the underside of some projecting surface to the
ground. In addition to the sides or under surface
of logs, other typical places are the spaces between
buttressed tree roots, masses of brush, or even the
undercut banks of stream beds or the overhanging
edge of a rock.
“The characteristic Hciton ability to cluster
their bodies, as well as the manner of clustering,
depends first of all upon an anatomical charac-
teristic, the opposed recurved hooks present on the
terminal tarsal segments of the workers’ legs. .. .
The first ants to settle in a new place catch into a
rough or soft surface by means of their tarsal
hooks, or rather are pulled into this anchored
position as newcomers run upon them as they
stand and stretch them out in a hanging position.
In fact, the hooks are really anchored by the
added weight of others that have crawled down
over the body of the first ant, fixing it in place and
soon immobilizing it.
“In the nomadic phase a new bivouac is
formed at the end of each day of raiding, and
this is a most interesting event to watch. In the
advanced and most complicated stages of raid-
ing in the afternoon, caches of booty tend to be
formed at each busy junction of raiding trails,
increasing in size as more and more ants are
knocked around and forced out of traffic. As
darkness comes and raiding ceases, such clusters
grow.”’ Several hanging clusters start from ele-
vated ceilings. ““As each new cluster begins the
initial slender hanging threads may become ropes
which extend to the ground, depending upon a
continued flow of traffic to the place. As the ropes
continue to grow they are joined together into a
single columnar mass. At first this mass is small
in diameter, but as more and more ants pour into
it the wall spreads outward from the center, and
so a symetrical cylinder results.”
In the tropical environment of the army ants
some sort of air conditioning is necessary for
comfortable living—perhaps, with this particu-
lar species, for any living at all. It has been well
developed during the more than 70 million years
the social insects have been on earth. Says Dr.
Schnetrla:
The interior of the bivouac, where the brood is
sheltered and the single colony queen rests, offers
an impressively stable environment to these more
susceptible members of the community as well asa
central resting place for the worker population.
The hanging cluster traps a cubic area of atmos-
phere which does not reach the extremes of
temperature and dryness attained by the general
forest environment. ... Workers cluster more
closely together at night in reaction to the lower
temperatures of the forest at that time, the
bivouac walls become tighter and better conserve
heat produced internally (by the brood in particu-
lar). Conversely, after dawn, when increasing
light excites growing numbers of ants to leave the
bivouae walls, as the raid grows, this wall thins
out, usually develops small apertures, and is
undercut at the bottom. The effect is to increase
the internal air circulation as well as to cool the
atmosphere in the interior through evaporation
so that the internal temperature of the bivouac
does not rise to the height reached at midday in
the environs. The incubation properties of the
bivouac represent an imporant factor in Hciton
life, for with less regular atmospheric conditions
in the nest, the stages of brood development could
not have their typical regularity in timing.
CONTENTS
Botrany.—The evolutionary significance of the endosperm and its bearing
on the origin of angiosperms. Hur-Lin Li......................
PALEONTOLOGY.—Woodringia, a new foraminiferal genus (Hetero-
helicidae) from the Paleocene of Alabama. Atrrep R. LoEBLIcH,
JR., and HELEN, TAPPAN......00.005 2 J40% fuss gee eto ee
ENTOMOLOGY.—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States
National Museum: IV, The genus Culex (Diptera, Culicidae).
ALAN STONE and KENNETH L. KNIGHT......................00:
HerPETOLOGY.—Descriptions of two new frogs from Colombia. CoLE-
man Ji GOIN): ices ah os a ee es eee ne eee
HERPETOLOGY.—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, 12: The herpetofauna of Anne Arundel County, Md.
@rypn EoRBED. gyi. «al oe cal o 2 Jor sc neo eee
Page
39
64
INotest and sNeGwsiGy moves Sock vice ean eae te ase 40, 63, 67
OLUME 47 March TIS7F NUMBER 3
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
mea SHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Pas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BamrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EXSTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProceEepiNneés should be sent to Harautp A. Reuper, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
SOOT OOO, IEOTTAS WO? WS OUIURU J etee WEBI, 55 on oconncencooesoaescadouGs $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourNnat (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
MownoarapH No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEXx to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................. = -2 $7450
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
Sinelefvolumestunbound te merse rete reese eee eee enn tir eer 2.00
Singlemmumibers diese eee see ee rae eer erence Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949. sl
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
March 1957
No. 3
ICHTHYOLOGY .—4 key to the species and subspecies of the cyprinodont genus
Fundulus zn the United States and Canada east of the continental divide. JERRAM
L. Brown, Cornell University. (Communicated by Epwarp C. Raney.)
(Received November 8, 1956)
There has not been a complete, reliable
guide for the identification of the species and
subspecies of the fishes of the genus Pundu-
lus. The genus is found in more than half of
the United States, in southeastern Canada,
Bermuda, northern Cuba, and certain
coastal areas of Mexico. Only in the United
States and Canada east of the Continental
Divide, the area covered by this key, and in
Mexico (?) do two or more species occur
sympatrically, so far as known.
Of the 33 currently recognized species and
subspecies, 7 do not occur in the area cov-
ered by this key. Two of these, Fundulus
grandissimus Hubbs (1936: 209) and Fundu-
lus persimilis Miller (1955: 13), have been
collected only in the Mexican state of Yu-
catan. Two are insular subspecies, Pundulus
heteroclitus bermudae of Bermuda and Fun-
dulus grandis saguanus Rivas (1948) of the
north coast of Cuba. The remaining three
are allopatric on the Pacific coast. They are
Fundulus p. parvipinnis from Morro Bay,
Calif., south along the coast to the area oc-
cupied by the next form; F. p. brevis in
Magdalena Bay, Baja California; and Fun-
dulus lima in fresh-water springs at San Ig-
nacio, Baja California. All but one of these 7
forms are related to Fundulus heteroclitus
and F’. grandis. Fundulus persimilis is closest
to F. similis.
The center of speciation may have been
in the southeastern United States, where 20
species are now found. Fundulus occurs in
habitats ranging from salt marshes and the
ocean to upland streams, but it is usually
found in relatively quiet water.
69
I wish to thank Dr. Edward C. Raney for
his generous assistance and encouragement
in this study. The work was completed at
Cornell University in 1954 as a master’s the-
sis, which may be consulted in the Cornell
University Library for additional details.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
This study was based on counts and meas-
urements made on over 1,500 specimens in
the Cornell University fish collection. In ad-
dition, 31 specimens of Fundulus notti dispar
were examined on loan from the University
of Michigan Museum of Zoology, for which
I thank the curator, Dr. Reeve M. Bailey.
External characters have been used ex-
clusively. The descriptions of coloration are
based entirely on preserved specimens. For a
few species counts were taken from published
accounts by authors who used the methods
of counting described by Hubbs and Lagler
(1947). These instances have been acknowl-
edged in the key in order to remind the
reader of the differences in the methods of
counting used by these authors, which result
in one fewer ray in the dorsal and anal fins
and from one to several more scales in the
lateral line. Numbers in parentheses in the
text of the key represent the known range
or extreme values not often encountered. It
is frequently necessary to know the sex of a
specimen since all of the species show some
degree of sexual dimorphism. This can be
determined in the adults of all species by the
presence of a pouch covering the anterior
base of the anal fin of females and by its
absence in males. The pouch carries the ovi-
70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
duct down the first ray of the anal fin and is
of various degrees of prominence depending
on the species. For some species the key is
based on a relatively small number of speci-
mens; consequently, some specimens which
do not fit the descriptions exactly will un-
doubtedly be discovered.
Dorsal, anal, and pectoral rays were
counted at their bases; the last two rays
were not counted as one. Lateral-line scales
were counted according to the method of
Hubbs and Lagler (1947: 11) except that the
most anterior scale counted was the one in
which the center of the exposed field of the
scale lay exactly on, or just posterior to, a
vertical line through the upper extremity of
the gill slit. Scales around the caudal peduncle
(often, but not necessarily, the least count)
were counted vertically half way between
the posterior bases of the dorsal and anal
fins and the anterior limits of the upper and
lower procurrent caudal rays. Scales above
the lateral line were counted in front of the
dorsal fin from the first scale above the lat-
eral line of one side, in a vertical row, to and
including the last scale above the lateral line
of the other side. Mandibular pores corre-
spond to pores W, X, Y, and Z of Gosline
(1949: pl. 2). Most species of Fundulus have
four on each side.
Head length was measured with dividers
from the bony opercle at its most posterior
projection to the tip of the snout, with the
mouth in its normal closed position. Snout
length was taken on the midline from the tip
of the snout to the anterior bony rim of the
orbit, with the point of the dividers inserted
to the bony interorbital septum. Postorbital
head length was measured from the posterior
fleshy rim of the orbit to the posterior edge
of the bony opercle at a level with the upper
base of the pectoral fin. The orbit was meas-
ured horizontally with dividers between the
fleshy rims of the orbit. Other measurements
and counts were made according to the
methods of Hubbs and Lagler (1947: 8-15).
KEY TO THE SPECIES AND SUBSPECIES OF FUNDULUS
IN THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA EAST OF
THE CONTINENTAL DIVIDE
1. Gill slit restricted; upper end of gill slit op-
posite or only slightly above upper base of
pectoral fin, relatively far from postero-
dorsal corner of opercle.................-- 2
6.
. (7) Blackish
OF SCIENCES vou. 47, NO. 3
Gill sht normal, not restricted; upper end of
gill slit relatively far above upper base of
pectoral fin, at or anterior to posterodorsal
. (1) Vertical bars absent in both sexes; D.
13=163 JA, T3=19% . oc yea Be ae ees 20
Vertical bars present in both sexes except in
females of F. luciae, for which D. 8; A. 10
3
. (2) Dorsal rays 8; anal rays 10; lateral-line
scales 31-32; smallest species of Fundulus;
females plain; males vertically barred and
with a black ocellus on last few rays of dorsal
fin; dorsal over anal in females, behind in
males; Atlantic coast, North Carolina to
ong: Island... 3....445 Sanne F. luciae
Dorsal rays 11 or more; anal rays 13 or more;
lateral-line scales 41-64 (Hubbs, 1926: 15);
dorsal in advance of anal; 11-21 vertical bars
4
. (3) Lateral-line scales 52-64 (Hubbs, 1926:
15); dorsal rays 15-17; anal rays 15-16;
Wyoming and South Dakota to northern
Texas and New Mexico........... F. kansae
Lateral-line scales 41-49; body more robust;
eye larger (Hubbs, 1926: 15); upper Brazos,
Colorado, and Pecos drainages of Texas and
New Mexico and the Llano [stagado of
northwestern Texas............F. zebrinus
, @)) Dorsal rays 9 or less’ eee ©
Dorsal rays 10 or more....................- 14
(5) Anterior insertion of dorsal behind (or
over) anterior insertion of anal; dorsal rays
fewer than) anal Trays...) ee eee eae a
Anterior insertion of dorsal before or over
anal; dorsal rays more than or equal to anal
TAY Si csis Secw oe eels red eS 14
. (6) Lateral, longitudinal band single, median,
broad (several scale rows in width), brown
or black, extending from tip of snout and
chin through eye to base of tail; D. 8-12; A.
11-13; pectoral 14 to 15; lateral-line scales 32
tO°8Gi.e vod cues kl Bb ee eee 8
Lateral, longitudinal bands either absent or
several (about 5-9), each the width of one
scale row or less, not extending onto head
9
. (7, 14) Spots on sides of back conspicuous,
discrete, black; lateral band of females even-
edged; vertical bars in males not prominent;
spots on vertical fins irregular in size, shape,
and distribution, often very small, like
finely ground pepper; young conspicuously
black about base of anal fin
F. olivaceous
Spots on sides of back inconspicuous, diffuse,
olive-brown; lateral band of females strongly
serrated; vertical bars in males prominent,
sometimes disrupting the longitudinal
band; spots on vertical fins large, often ar-
ranged in rows; very fine spots often absent;
young with pigment about anal fin brownish
and inconspicuous................F. notatus
subocular blotch present on
Marcu 1957
10.
11.
12.
13.
cheek; caudal fin oboval, almost pointed;
about 5-9 lateral, longitudinal, dark lines in
females (except in F. n. nottz); vertical bars
SURON WIN IMaeSa a ho ee oa F. notti 10
Blackish subocular blotch absent; cheek
lighter than rest of head; caudal fin square
or round; no lateral, longitudinal dark lines
on either sex; vertical bars usually not
SUTROTT EG a Gos Oca Reo RT Con eee eee 12
(9) Seales around caudal peduncle 16-17
(16-19); Ochlockonee River of western
Florida eastward and northward in Atlantic
coast drainages to southern Virginia
F.. notti lineolatus
Seales around caudal peduncle 20 (18-20)... .11
(10) Anal rays usually 10; dark, longitudinal
lines of females not outstanding; light rows
between them crossed by the dark edge of
each scale; in large females all body colora-
ation virtually absent except the dark spots
in the seale centers; Gulf coast drainages
from New River of western Florida to Texas
F. notti notti
Anal rays usually 11; dark longitudinal lines
of females prominent; light rows between
them virtually clear: Mississippi Valley
F. notti dispar
(9) Sides of body with 12-30 round spots the
size of a scale or less, often arranged in two
rows lying along or above the lateral line,
blended in some specimens to form short,
indistinct, vertical bars: scales around
caudal peduncle usually 16; top of head flat
or slightly concave in front of eyes; snout
SINDID). 6 a mis Oe a oer ce cer ee F. jenkinsi
Sides of body rarely spotted; if so, spots in the
nature of dense, black irregular blotches
randomly scattered over body and _ fins;
vertical bars distinct in most males, absent
in females (except F’. cingulatus); scales
around caudal peduncle usually 20; top of
head flat or shghtly convex in front of eyes
13
(12) Total mandicular pores 6; scales above
lateral line 9 (8-11); dorsal rays 8 (7-9); anal
rays 10 (11); lateral-line scales 29-30 (28-33) ;
snout short and rounded, length 1.6-2.2 into
postorbital head length; anal fin of adult
males usually longer than head; small, light,
“Nearl’’? spots on sides of body absent;
vertical bars on sides of males and females
narrow, straight, with distinct edges, usu-
ally WD OW WORE: cooo00000 50% F. cingulatus
Total mandibular pores 8; scales above lateral
line 10-11 (9-12); dorsal rays 9 (8-10); anal
rays 11 (10-12); lateral-line scales 31-33
(30-84); snout longer and more pointed,
length 1.4-1.7 into postorbital head length;
anal fin of adult males usually shorter than
head; small, light, ‘“‘pearl’”’ spots present in
females, irregularly scattered over sides of
body; vertical bars on sides of males wider,
often wavy and irregular, edges often in-
distinct, usually less than 12... .F'. chrysotus
BROWN: CYPRINODONT
GENUS FUNDULUS
14.
16
I F/
IQ),
. (17) Range:
qs
(5, 6) Lateral, longitudinal band single,
median, broad (several scale rows in width),
brown or black, extending from tip of snout
and chin through eye to base of tail; D. 8-12;
A. 11-18; pectoral 14 to 15; lateral-line scales
SPER Ba a bc his ate SBCA hase Steet Mates pana 8
Lateral, longitudinal bands, if present, not ex-
tending onto head or snout, often more than
OM OR aes Senate pacman resyd me Antnlog 15
. (14) Lateral-line scales 40 or more; or if less
(as sometimes in F. diaphanus) caudal
peduncle depth into distance from caudal
base to anterior insertion of dorsal 3.4 or
more, a slender species with vertical bars in
DOthESEXeS Ha baeiny reaches Sanur area tek 16
Lateral-line scales 39 or less; caudal peduncle
depth into distance from caudal base to
anterior insertion of dorsal 3.2 or less... .22
(iS) Dorsal aS 1 OF IESS,.coccccuscseccse il?
DorsalerayselSxorn Ore anaes cee ree LO,
(16) Caudal peduncle depth into distance from
caudal base to anterior insertion of dorsal
3.3 or more; A. 11-14; sides with crossbars in
IDOCHESEXES Paster OP esa estes nee geen 21
Caudal peduncle depth into distance from
caudal base to anterior insertion of dorsal
Seoe Ola CSS ACO Is teeter aeons yates ii: seta 18
coastal, in fresh or brackish
water, Chesapeake Bay to Texas; a black
ocellus or spot between last few rays of
dorsal fin of female; vertical fins never nar-
rowly black-edged; cheek dark or coarsely
speckled; both sexes vertically barred (fe-
males from Gulf Coast sometimes spotted or
longitudinally streaked) ; see also first halves
Or COUNeIS BO) euNCl AS, oscccncadcesscc06 32
Range: reported only from the lower Tennes-
see River drainage of Alabama and Tennes-
see; ocellus not present on dorsal; vertical
fins often narrowly black-edged; cheek clear
or coarsely speckled; vertical bars absent;
males with interrupted white lines following
centers of scale rows; females with fine,
dark, broken lines following centers of scale
rows; D. 10-11; A. 10-11; lateral-line scales
AO OU GEADS sna enna soe F. albolineatus
Range: Oklahoma to Wyoming and South
Dakota; ocellus not present on dorsal;
vertical fins not narrowly black-edged;
cheek clear or finely speckled only immedi-
ately below eye; vertical bars absent; see
ASO COW Oe AB.cacccovosseoson. F. sciadicus
(16) Vertical bars absent on the sides of both
sexes; males with light lines following
centers of scale rows, alternating with dark
lines running between scale rows, sometimes
irregularly broken or dashed; females with
fine, dark, dashed lines following centers of
scale rows, or irregularly speckled with
black; dorsal behind or over anal; A. 13-19;
SMOULESTONtAr Re ress ae EE ae eee ee 20
Vertical bars usually present on the sides of
both sexes, sometimes fused into a short
longitudinal band on caudal peduncle;
20.
21.
23.
24.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
dorsal before or over anal; A. 10-15; snout
SUG) aR aM sania nie Sy chon ake om A aa ia armor 21
(2,19) Anal rays 14-15 (95 percent separation),
(138-16); seales around caudal peduncle
19-23; orange or dark flecks scattered ran-
domly over sides of body or loosely arranged
in broken, irregular, longitudinal lines;
found only in Alabama River System
F, stellifer
Anal rays 16 (95 percent separation), (15-19);
scales around caudal peduncle 16-20; orange
or dark flecks arranged in orderly parallel
lines following seale rows; not found in
Alabama River System......... F.. catenatus
(17, 19) Found in Florida only; D. 13-20; A.
10-15; pectoral 18 to 21; lateral-line scales
49-61; scales around caudal peduncle 24-29
F, seminolis
Found only in Lake Waccamaw, N. C.; D.
13-15; A. 10-12; pectoral 15 to 18; lateral-
line seales 54-64; scales around caudal
peduncle 19-25 (range and counts from
Hubbs and Raney, 1946: 12-17)
F’, waccamensis
Found from South Carolina north to Maritime
Provinces (Ff. d. diaphanus) and from the
eastern Dakotas to western New York (F.d.
menona), with intergrading populations be-
tween. F. d. diaphanus: l\ateral-line scales
45-49 (40-55); D. 138-14 (12-15); A. 11-12
(10-13); pectoral 16 to 17 (15 to 19). Fd.
menona: lateral-line scales 40-44 (35-49); D.
11-18 (10-14); A. 10-11 (9-12); pectoral 14 to
15 (13 to 17). For more detailed separation of
subspecies see Hubbs and Lagler (1947:
77-78), from which the above information
and counts were taken........ F., diaphanus
. (15) Dorsal behind (or over) anal; dorsal rays
fewer banwanalenaiyise mee anaes ser 23
Dorsal before or over anal; dorsal rays more
than or equal to anal rays............... 27
(22) Sides of body with 12-80 round spots the
size of a scale or less, often arranged in two
rows lying along or above the lateral line,
blended in some specimens to form short,
indistinct, vertical bars; scales around
caudal peduncle usually 16; top of head flat
or slightly coneave in front of eyes; snout
short and sharp; Texas to western Florida
F. jenkinsv
Sides of body not spotted as above; scales
around caudal peduncle usually 20; snout
Vessisibairpp wai lp ties Meee ene Une ee sche ea 24
(22) A fine dark line running from beneath
eye to, or almost to, corner of mouth (usu-
ally absent in young); a thicker line on the
same level on the opercle, distinct In young
(sometimes blurred or absent in adults);
found only in the Piedmont region of North
Carolina; see couplet 27 for additional
descrip tlonye eee eee ee F.. rathbuni
A fine, dark line from beneath eye to corner of
mouth absent; no line on opercle, as de-
scribed above; males vertically barred;
25.
26.
28.
29.
VOL. 47, No. 3
females variously colored but not with dark
speckling?.i.7.. Ano eee 25
(24) Cheek below eye dark or coarsely dotted;
dorsal before or over anal; dorsal rays com-
monly more than anal rays; a dark ocellus on
last few rays of dorsal in females; coastal,
Chesapeake Bay to Texas; see first half of
couplet 30 for additional description..... 32
Cheek below eye clear or only finely dotted;
dorsal behind (or over anal); dorsal rays
commonly fewer than anal rays; ocellus on
dorsal absent (except very rarely when also
found ion body) 92 sane eee 26
(25) Dorsal rays 8-10; anal rays 11 (10-12);
lateral-line scales 30-34; males with dark
vertical bars; females with small light spots
irregularly scattered on sides; both sexes oc-
casionally occur with heavy dark blotches
anywhere on body or fins; see couplet 13 for
additional description.......... F.. chrysotus
Dorsal rays 11-12 (10); anal rays 13 (12-14);
lateral-line scales 28-41; both sexes plain
colored or with broad, faint lateral stripe; a
Plains species, from Oklahoma to Wyoming
and South Dakota.............. F. sciadicus
. (22) A fine, dark line running from beneath
eye to, or almost to, corner of mouth, usu-
ally absent in young; a thicker line at the
same level on the opercle, distinct in young
(sometimes blurred or absent in adults);
males plain with few if any spots on body,
each scale with dark outline; females with
dark spots and flecks irregularly scattered on
sides, rarely forming vague bars or lines;
fins usually unspotted; D. 11-14; A. 10-12;
pectoral 15 to 18; lateral-line scales 33-38;
found in the Piedmont region of North
Carolinass. 2254). 409 3 eee F. rathbuni
A fine, dark line from beneath eye to corner of
mouth absent; line on opercle (as described
above) also absent; males vertically barred;
females variously colored................ 28
(27) Snout pointed, long, a little less than 2
times eye in side view (except in young),
distinctly below a horizontal line through
middle of eye (except in young); orbit into
postorbital head length from 2.0 in small
adults to 2.7 in large adults; dark vertical
bars when present narrower than two-thirds
the interspace; a silvery sheen on sides of
young and adults of both sexes.......... 29
Snout round, short, a little over one times eye
in side view, usually on a level with or above
a horizontal line through middle of eye;
orbit into postorbital head length from 1.5
in small adults to 2.0 in large adults; dark
vertical bars in males generally broader than
or equal to interspaces; bars variable in
females; silvery sheen not conspicuous on
SUES) sea cd cedencinng axa ltaeheit ee ae eee 30
(28) Dorsal rays 14-15 (12-16); lateral-line
scales 33-35 (32); adult females with one to
several dark longitudinal lines on sides;
Marcy 1957
head length into standard length 3.0-3.3
(2.9) Florida to New Hampshire. .F. majalis
Dorsal; rays 12-13 (11-14); lateral-line scales
30-82 (33); females lack dark longitudinal
lines on sides; head length into standard
length 2.7-2.9 (2.7-3.1); Florida to Texas
F. similis
30. (28) Anal rays 10 (9-11); pectoral rays 17 (18)
or less; lateral-line scales 34-387 (32-45);
females with an ocellus or one or two black
blotches on last few rays of dorsal fin, re-
mainder of dorsal fin usually unmarked;
pouch at anterior base of anal very small or
lacking in females, higher on first ray of
spread anal fin than on any succeeding ray,
usually one-tenth length of depressed anal
or less; back mottled with dark spots; all
fins much shorter in both sexes; caudal fin
length 5 to 6 into standard length of adults
over 35 mm, 4.4 to 5.0 in young; Chesapeake
Bay to Texas.....
Anal rays 11 (10-12); pectoral rays 18 (17) or
more; lateral-line scales 31-34 (35); females
with dorsal fin clear, no ocellus or dark
bloteh; easily separated by the anal pouch,
which is shorter on the first ray than on the
several immediately succeeding rays when
the fin is spread and is often much longer
than one-tenth the length of the depressed
fin; upper half of body usually of uniform
tone; all fins longer in both sexes and in
young; caudal fin more square, length 3.5 to
4.5 into standard length in young and adults;
Maritime Provinces to Texas.............3l
31. (30) Range: Maritime Provinces to north-
eastern Fla.; total mandibular pores 8; long-
est anal ray into head length 1.2-1.9
(mean 1.5-1.6); head length ito standard
length 2.9-3.7 (mean 3.2-3.4); base of dorsal
into head length 1.7-2.4 (mean 1.95-2.2);
(above proportions taken from 13 specimens
from North Carolina, 42-75 mm standard
length, mean 59.4, and 25 specimens from
New York, 48-98 mm _ standard length,
Toa OSA oe oie a eee ee een F. heteroclitus
Range: peninsular Florida to Mexico; total
mandibular pores 10; longest anal ray into
head length 1.9-2.6 (mean 2.1); head length
into standard length 2.8-3.3 (mean 3.0);
base of dorsal into head length 2.1-3.1
(mean 2.6); (above proportions taken from
35 Florida specimens 34-105 mm standard
lenge Ghesmeantos:S) meee ee eee F. grandis
32. (18, 25, 30) Sides of females with numerous
dark spots as large as pupil of eye, sometimes
confluent into longitudinal lines, vertical
bars absent; dorsal rays usually 10 (9-11);
along coast from Alabama to southern
Texas (Corpus Christi)........ F.. pulvereus
Sides of females with numerous dark, narrow,
vertical bars; spots as above absent; dorsal
rays usually 11 (10-12); along coast from
Chesapeake Bay to Alabama
F. confluentus
BROWN: CYPRINODONT GENUS FUNDULUS 73
LIST OF SPECIES AND SUBSPECIES
Subgenus Fundulus Lacépéde
Fundulus heteroclitus heteroclitus (Linnaeus)
MummMicHoG
Until the variation in Fundulus heterochtus
has been adequately described, it seems best not
to recognize the northern part of the species as
being subspecifically distinct. The characters
involved appear to be clinal and do not afford a
clear separation. A detailed study of the varia-
tion in this species, Fundulus grandis, and the
populations on Bermuda is needed.
Range: From Anticosti Island in the Gulf of
St. Lawrence (Kendall, 1909: 221, 242) south
along the Atlantic Coast to the Matanzas River,
St. Johns County, northeastern Florida (Miller,
1955: 78). Primarily in brackish water.
Fundulus grandis grandis (Baird and Girard)
Gur KILLIFIsH
Range: From the Matanzas River, St. Johns
County, northeastern Florida, south along the
Atlantic Coast to the Florida Keys, and north
and west from there along the Gulf coast at least
to Laguna de Tamiahua, Mexico (Miller, 1955:
8). Typically in brackish water.
Fundulus majalis (Walbaum)
SrripeD KILLIFISH
Range: From New Hampshire (Jackson,
1953: 192) along the Atlantic coast to the Matan-
zas River, St. Johns County, northeastern Florida
(Miller, 1955: 9). Typically in salt or brackish
water.
Fundulus similis (Baird and Girard)
LONGNoSE KILLIFISH
Range: From the Matanzas River, St. Johns
County, northeastern Florida, along the Atlantic
coast to Key West and along the Gulf coast at
least to a lagoon 385 miles north of Tampico,
Mexico (Miller, 1955: 9). Typically in salt to
brackish water.
Fundulus confluentus Goode and Bean
Marsu KI.uirisu
Fundulus chaplint Fowler (1940: 8) and Fundu-
lus bartrama Fowler (1941: 235-236) are syno-
nyms, respectively, of the male and female of
Fundulus confluentus. This may be seen by ex-
74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
amination of Fowler’s plates and original de-
scriptions and is supported by notes taken by
Dr. C. Richard Robins on the type specimens
at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia. Miller (1955: 2, 4-5) concurs and elabo-
rates on these allocations.
Range: From Chesapeake Bay, Md., along
the Atlantic coast to Key West, Fla. (Miller,
1955: 8), and along the Gulf coast to Big Lake,
Gulf Shores, Baldwin County, Ala., a few miles
west of the mouth of Pensacola Bay (Bailey,
Winn, and Smith, 1954: 132). Typically in
brackish water.
Fundulus pulvereus (Hvermann)
Bayou IK TLLIrisH
From the original description Zygonectes
funduloides Evermann (1892: 85) appears to be
the male of Fundulus pulvereus, which Kvermann
described from females in the same paper. It
bears little resemblance to Fundulus grandis
despite Jordan and Evermann’s (1898: 2528)
suggestion.
Range: From Bayou Minette at Old Spanish
Fort, Baldwin County, Ala., a few miles west of
the limit of the known range of Fundulus con-
fluentus (Bailey, Winn, and Smith, 1954: 132),
west along the Gulf coast at least to Corpus
Christi, Tex. (Evermann, 1892: 85). Typically
in brackish water.
Subgenus Fontinus Jordan and Evermann
Fundulus diaphanus diaphanus (Le Sueur)
BanprED KILLIFISH
The variation in this species has been sum-
marized by Shapiro in Hubbs and Lagler (1947:
77). Hybrids between this subspecies and Fundu-
lus heteroclitus occur rarely (Hubbs, Walker, and
Johnson, 1943: 3).
Range: From Waverly Mills, 8. C. (Hubbs
and Raney, 1946: 14) “north to the Maritime
Provinces; west through the eastern parts of
Pennsylvania and New York including the Lake
Champlain basin; locally in the Allegheny River
System of Pennsylvania (doubtless through
introduction)” (Hubbs and Lagler, 1974: 78).
Typically in fresh water but occasionally in
brackish water.
Fundulus diaphanus menona Jordan and Copeland
BANDED KILLIFISH
Range: “From the eastern parts of the Dakotas
through Minnesota, Wisconsin and Michigan
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 3
and through the northern parts of LIlhnois,
Indiana, and Ohio to southern Ontario and
westernmost New York. Intergrading with
F. d. diaphanus in the Lake Ontario and St.
Lawrence basins (as determined by Sydney
Shapiro)” (Hubbs and Lagler, 1974: 78). Found
in fresh water.
Fundulus waccamensis Hubbs and Raney
WACCAMAW KILLIFISH
This species is closely related to Fundulus d.
diaphanus.
Range: Known only from Lake Waccamaw,
N. C. (Hubbs and Raney, 1946: 14; Frey, 1951:
22). Fresh water.
Fundulus seminolis (Girard)
SEMINOLE KILLIFISH
Range: Peninsular Florida in Lake, Sumter,
Okeechobee, DeSoto, Osceola, Charlotte, Polk,
and Lee Counties (various Cornell collections)
and Wakulla County (University of Florida
Collection no. 103). Fresh and brackish water.
Subgenus Xenisma Jordan
Fundulus catenatus (Storer)
NorTHERN STUDFISH
Range: Headwaters of the Tennessee and
Cumberland Rivers, and the Green River, in
Kentucky, Tennessee, Virginia, and Alabama;
in clear streams of the Ozarks in Kansas, Arkan-
sas, and Missouri; in tributaries of the Red River
in southwestern Arkansas; in the Homochitto
River, Miss.; and in the upper part of the East
Fork of White River, Ind.; in moderate to swift,
clear streams (Miller, 1955: 9).
Fundulus stellifer (Jordan)
SoUTHERN STUDFISH
This species is closely related to Fundulus
catenatus.
Range: Known only from the Alabama River
System in Georgia and Alabama. Cornell ma-
terial is from tributaries of the Etowah and
Oostanaula Rivers of Georgia and the Talladega
River in Alabama. Habitat similar to that of
F., catenatus.
Fundulus albolineatus Gilbert
WHITELINE TorpMINNOW
Range: Known only from clear, cold springs
and spring-fed creeks in the lower Tennessee
River System of Alabama and Tennessee (Miller,
1955: 9). Hubbs’s (1926: 11) mention of albo-
Marcu 1957 BROWN: CYPRINODONT
lineatus from the ‘Alabama basin”? gives no
details and is probably an error.
Fundulus rathbuni Jordan and Meek
SPECKLED KILLIFISH
The intraspecific variation, subgeneric afhlia-
tions, and synonymy of this species have been
treated by Brown (1955).
Range: Streams of the Piedmont region of
North Carolina in the Roanoke, Cape Fear,
Neuse, and Pee Dee River systems (Brown,
1955: 212).
Subgenus Plancterus Garman
Fundulus zebrinus Jordan and Gilbert
SoUTHWESTERN PLAINS KILLIFISH
Range: Shallow, open streams in the upper
portions of the Brazos, Colorado, and Pecos
drainages of Texas and New Mexico, and from
saline waters on the Llano Estagado of north-
western Texas (Miller, 1955: 10-11).
Fundulus kansae Garman
CENTRAL PLAINS KILLIFISH
This species has hybridized with Fundulus
scladicus (Hubbs, Walker, and Johnson, 1943:
15).
Range: In shallow streams of the Great Plains
from Wyoming (Simon, 1946: 96) and South
Dakota (where possibly introduced) south to
the Red River in northern Texas and the Arkan-
sas River in New Mexico, east to Missouri (Miller,
1955: 11-12).
Subgenus Zygonectes Agassiz
Section A
Fundulus luciae (Baird)
SpotFin KILLIFIsH
Range: Salt marshes from Long Island and
New Jersey, where rare (Nichols and Breder,
1927: 55; Greeley, 1939: 84), south to North
Carolina (Hildebrand, 1941: 255).
Fundulus jenkinsi (Evermann)
SALTMARSH TorpMINNOW
Range: Salt marshes from Galveston Bay,
Tex., to the mouth of the Escambia River,
Fla. (Bailey, Winn, and Smith, 1954: 133).
Fundulus cingulatus Valenciennes
BanpED TorpMINNOW
Fundulus cingulatus superficially resembles
Fundulus chrysotus and Fundulus luciae, with
GENUS FUNDULUS 795
which it has been confused in the literature. For a
description of the variation in the characters
distinguishing cingulatus from chrysotus see
Brown (1956).
Range: In lowland, fresh-water swamps from
the region of Okefinokee Swamp in southwestern
Georgia south in Florida to the Tamiami Canal
and Fort Myers (Brown, 1956), and west to
the Escambia River, Ala. (Bailey, Winn, and
Smith, 1954: 132).
Fundulus chrysotus (Giinther)
GoLDEN TopMINNOW
Range: In lowland, freshwater swamps from
South Carolina to the Tamimai Canal in southern
Florida (Brown, 1956), west along the Gulf
coast to eastern Texas, and north to southern
Missouri and Tennessee (no records from Okla-
homa) (Miller, 1955: 10).
Fundulus sciadicus Cope
Piatns TorpMINNoW
Range: Streams of the Great Plains in the
Missouri, Platte, and Arkansas River systems
from South Dakota (Churchill and Over, 1938:
62-63), eastern Wyoming (Simon, 1946: 96),
and eastern Colorado (Beckman, 1952: 73),
east and south to Iowa (Harlan and Speaker,
1951: 137), Missouri (Meek, 1891: 122), and Okla-
homa (Hubbs and Ortenburger, 1929: 98).
Section B
Fundulus notti notti (Agassiz)
STARHEAD TOPMINNOW
For a discussion of the variation in Pundulus
notti see Brown (in press). Range: Gulf coast
river systems from the New River of western
Florida to Louisiana and eastern Texas (where
subspecies uncertain) (Brown, in press).
Fundulus notti dispar (Agassiz)
STARHEAD ToOPMINNOW
The range of this subspecies where it meets
that of F. n. notti remains to be adequately
determined.
Range: Lowlands from Iowa, southern Wis-
consin, and the Lake Michigan drainage of
Michigan and Indiana south to northeastern
Arkansas and western Tennessee (Hubbs and
Lagler, 1947: 78).
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
Fundulus notti lineolatus (Agassiz)
STARHEAD TOPMINNOW
Range: Bottomlands from Isle of Wight and
Nansemond Counties (Cornell specimens) in
southeastern Virginia south along the Atlantic
Coastal Plain to central peninsular Florida and
west along the Gulf Coastal Plain to the Och-
lockonee River of Georgia and western Florida
(Brown, in press).
Fundulus notatus (Rafinesque)
BLACKSTRIPE TOPMINNOW
For details on variation and distinguishing
characters of this species and Fundulus olivaceus
see Brown (1956).
Range: In streams and lakes from Mitchell
and Grundy Counties of northeastern Iowa,
southeastern Wisconsin (both sides of the divide),
southern Michigan, and the prairie regions of
western and central Ohio south to Kentucky,
the Duck River of Tennessee, the Gulf drainages
from the Tombigbee River System of Alabama
to the Guadalupe River System of Texas, and
west to Kay, Creek, and Johnston Counties of
eastern Oklahoma, and Kansas (Brown, 1956:
132).
Fundulus olivaceus (Agassiz)
BLackKspoTTED TopMINNOW
In view of the following statement about the
type of Fundulus balboae Fowler by Hubbs (1931:
6) I feel that this nominal species should be
allocated to the synonymy of Fundulus olivaceus
rather than that of Fundulus notatus. “Traces are
evident of the black spots on the dorsal fin
and upper part of the body, which are conspicu-
ous in many southern specimens of F. notatus.”’
In 1931 when Hubbs wrote the above, it was
thought that the characters mentioned, which
are now recognized as those of F’. olivaceus, were
merely color variations of F’. notatus.
Range: In streams and lakes from the Chat-
tahoochee River System of Alabama and Florida
and the Clinch River System of Tennessee west
to Texas and the Arkansas and Red River
systems of eastern Oklahoma, and north to
Morgan County, Missouri, western Kentucky
and Tennessee, and the Mississippi and Ohio
drainages of Illinois (Brown, 1956: 127-128;
Miller, 1955: 10).
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 74, No. 3
LITERATURE CITED
BatLey, Reeve M., Winn, Howarp Euiiort, and
SmirH, C. Laverr. Fishes from the Escambia
River, Alabama and Florida, with ecologic and
taxonomic notes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila-
delphia 106: 109-164, fig. 1. 1954.
Beckman, WititaAM C. Guwide to the fishes of
Colorado. Univ. Colorado Mus. Leaflet no. 11:
1-110, many figs. 1952.
Brown, JERRAM L. Local variation and relation-
ships of the cyprinodont fish Fundulus rathbuni
Jordan and Meek. Journ. Elisha Mitchell Sct.
Soe. 71 (2): 207-213, fig. 1. 1955.
———., Identification and geographical variation of
the cyprinodont fishes Fundulus_ olivaceus
(Storer) and Fundulus notatus (Rafinesque).
Tulane Stud. Zool. 3 (7): 119-134, figs. 1-6.
1956.
Distinguishing characters of the cyprino-
dont fishes Fundulus cingulatus Valenciennes
and Fundulus chrysotus (Giinther). Copeia,
1956 (4): 251-254, fig. 1.
Geographic variation in southeastern popu-
lations of the cyprinodont fish Fundulus notti
(Agassiz). Amer. Mid]. Nat., in press.
CHURCHILL, EpwarpD P., and Over, WiiuiamM H.
Fishes of South Dakota, pp. 1-87, figs. 1-71.
South Dakota Department of Game and Fish,
1938.
EverMANN, Barton W. Report upon investiga-
tions made in Texas in 1891. Bull. U.S. Fish
Comm. 11 (1891): 3-60, pls. 28-36. 1892.
Fowier, Henry W. A collection of fishes ob-
tained on the west coast of Florida by Mr. and
Mrs. C. G. Chaplin. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia 92: 1-22, pl. 1, figs. 1-37. 1940.
A collection of fresh-water fishes obtained
in Florida, 1939-1940, by Francis Harper. Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 92: 227-244, figs.
1-13. 1941.
Frey, Davin C. The fishes of North Carolina’s bay
lakes and their intraspecific variation. Journ.
Elisha Mitchell Sei. Soc. 67 (1): 1-44. 1951.
GostinE, Wriiram A. Sensory canals of the head
in some cyprinodont fishes, with particular
reference to the genus Fundulus. Occ. Pap.
Mus. Zool. Univ. Michigan, no. 519: 1-17, pls.
1-2. 1949.
GREELEY, J. R. Fishes and habitat conditions of
the shore zone based wpon July and August
seining investigations. In: A biological survey of
the salt waters of Long Island, 1938. New York
Cons. Dept. Suppl. 28th Ann. Rep., pt. 2:
72-91, 6 figs. 1939.
Haran, James R., and Spraker, Everetr B.
Towa fish and fishing, pp. 1-288, pls. 1-22. lowa
State Conservation Commission, 1951.
HILDEBRAND, S. F. An annotated list of salt and
brackish water fishes, with a new name for a
menhaden, found in North Carolina since the
publication of “The Fishes of North Carolina”
by Hugh M. Smith in 1907. Copeia, 1941 (4):
220-232. ;
Marcu 1957 BROWN: CYPRINODONT
Husss, Cart L. Studies of the fishes of the order
Cyprinodontes. Misc. Publ. Mus. Zool. Univ.
Michigan, no. 16: 1-87, pls. 1+. 1926.
Studies of the fishes of the order Cyprino-
dontes. X, Four nominal species of Fundulus
placed in synonymy. Occ. Pap. Mus. Zool.
Univ. Michigan, no. 231: 1-8. 1931.
Fishes of the Yucatan Peninsula. Publ.
Carnegie Inst. Washington, no. 457: 157-287,
pls. 1-15. 1936.
,and Lager, Kari F. Fishes of the Great
Lakes region. Cranbrook Inst. Sci. Bull. 26:
i-xi, 1-186, pls. 1-26, figs. 1-251. 1947.
—. and OrrenspurRGER, A. I. Fishes collected
in Oklahoma and Arkansas in 1927. Publ.
Univ. Oklahoma Biol. Surv. 1: 45-112, pls.
113~ 1929:
. and Raney, Epwarp C. Endemic fish
fauna of Lake Waccamaw, North Carolina.
Mise. Publ. Mus. Zool. Univ. Michigan, no.
65: 1-30, pl. 1, maps 1-2. 1946.
, WarkerR, Boyp W., and Jounson, Ray-
MOND E. Hybridization in nature between
species of American cyprinodont fishes. Con-
trib. Lab. Vert. Biol. Univ. Michigan, no. 23:
1-21, pls. 1-6. 1948.
Jackson, C.F. Northward occurrence of southern
fishes (Fundulus, Mugil, Pomatomus) 7n
NEWS OF
WaxuaceE R. Brope has been elected president-
elect of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science. Wittiam W. Rupey and
Aan T. WATERMAN are new members of the
AAAS board of directors. Other officers and com-
mittee members include C. B. Warts, E.
Raymonp Hatt, J. Howarp McMiI.Lien, Kari
S. QUISENBERRY, A. NELSON SayRE, J. FRANKLIN
YEAGER, and Warp Pieman.
Leo A. Watt, National Bureau of Standards,
was one of five young Government scientists
honored as 1956 of the Arthur S.
Flemming Award.
Witrram D. Apprt, National Bureau of
Standards, has been honored by the American
Society for Testing Materials for outstanding
achievement in research on fibers. He
awarded the Harold De Witt Smith medal.
Francis O. Rice, head of the chemistry de-
partment of the Catholic University, has been
given the 1957 Hillebrand Award of the Washing-
ton section of the American Chemical Society.
The award is in recognition of his pioneer work
in the field of free radical research.
Lewis M. Branscoms, National Bureau of
Standards, has been awarded a Rockefeller
Public Service Award to study the physics of
winners
was
GENUS FUNDULUS edi
coastal waters of New Hampshire. Copeia,
1953 (3): 192.
Jorpan, Davip Starr, and EvermMann, BARTON
WarREN. Fishes of North and Middle Amer-
ica. U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 47, pt. 3: i-xxiv,
2183-3136. 1898.
Kenpatt, Witnttam Converse. The fishes of
Labrador. Proc. Portland Soe. Nat. Hist. 2:
207-244. 1909.
Meek,SeruH HuGene. A listof fishes and mollusks
collected in Arkansas and Indian Territory in
1894. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. 15 (1895): 341-
349. 1896.
Mixtuer, Ropert Rusu. An annotated list of the
American cyprinodontid fishes of the genus
Fundulus, with the description of Fundulus
persunilis from Yucatan. Occ. Pap. Mus. Zool.
Univ. Mich., no. 568: 1-25, pl. 1. 1955.
Nicuots, J. T., and Breprr, C. M., Jr. The
marine fishes of New York and southern New
England. Zoologica 9 (1): 1-192, many figs.
1927.
Rivas, Luis RENE. Cyprinodont fishes of the genus
Fundulus in the West Indies, with description
of anew subspecies from Cuba. Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 98: 215-222, pl. 14. 1948
Smuon, JAMES R. Wyoming fishes. Bull. Wyoming
Game and Fish Dept. 4: 1-129, figs. 1-92,
frontis. 1946.
MEMBERS
negative ions and low-energy ionic collisions at
University College, London, for a year.
Deane B. Jupp, National Bureau of Stand-
ards, was awarded the Inter-Society Color
Council’s Godlove Award for outstanding con-
tributions to the knowledge of color in science,
art, and industry. The award is symbolized by a
prism enclosing a gold diffraction grating.
Francis E. Wasueir, National Bureau of
Standards, was given the Talbert Abrams Award
of the American Society of Photogrammetry, for
authorship and scientific developments in photo-
grammetry.
BeNO GUTENBERG, director of the Seismo-
logical Laboratory of the California Institute of
Technology, has been awarded the Emil Wiechert
medal of the German Geophysical Association in
appreciation of his accomplishments in seismology
and in the investigation of the earth’s structure.
This is the second award of the medal, founded in
1955, for outstanding accomplishment in geo-
physics.
The Phi Delta Epsilon Fraternity has pre-
sented its annual award of merit to JosEePH
Kapuan, professor of physics at the University
of California, Los Angeles, who is at present
serving as coordinator of the American contribu-
tions to the International Geophysical Year.
78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 3
ZOOLOGY .—Some exotic terrestrial isopods (Isopoda: Oniscoidea) from New York
State) Wrtt1am B. Mucumore, University of Rochester. (Communicated by
Alan Stone.)
(Received December 17, 1956)
The great majority of the terrestrial
isopods found in northeastern United States
have undoubtedly been introduced from
Europe. Some of the immigrants have been
more successful and have become more
widely distributed than others and at
present are among our commonest sowbugs
and pillbugs. In upstate New York, for
example, the following European species
have been reported and may be present lo-
cally in great numbers:
Oniscus asellus Linnaeus
Porcellio scaber Latreille
Porcellio spinicornis Say
Metaponorthus pruinosus (Brandt)
Cylisticus converus (De Geer)
Tracheoniscus rathkei (Brandt)
Armadillidiwm vulgare (Latreille)
On the other hand, several species are
represented in the local fauna which have
been reported from the United States only
infrequently. These are:
Trichoniscus pygmaeus Sars
Hyloniscus riparius (C. L. Koch)
Miktoniscus medcofi Van Name
Haplophthalmus danicus Budde-Lund
Platyarthrus hoffmannseggi Brandt
Armadillidium nasatum Budde-Lund
_ To add to the information concerning the
ecology and distribution of these less com-
mon forms, the following notes are presented.
Trichoniscus pygmaeus Sars
This species has so far been reported from
North America only three times. Lohmander
(1927) reported specimens found in New York
on lily bulbs imported from Scotland (not from
Sweden as stated by Van Name, 1936, and
Palmén, 1951), and Van Name (1940) reported
the finding of a number of specimens in the Gar-
field Park Conservatory, Chicago, Il. Recently
Palmén (1951) has found a few specimens in two
locations in Newfoundland. These two latter finds
1 Part of this work was done during tenure of a
Summer Research Fellowship at the Edmund
Niles Huyck Preserve, Rensselaerville, N. Y.
were both from gardens and represent the first
outdoor records for this species from North Amer-
ica. On the basis of these finds, Palmén predicted
that T. pygmaeus would turn out to occur in fur-
ther localities on this continent. This prediction
has been borne out by the following New York
collections:
Rochester, Monroe County, near the Mount
Hope Cemetery; numerous specimens found on
several occasions along railroad tracks, with Hy-
loniscus riparius and Haplophthalmus danicus.
Rochester, Monroe County, Durand-Hastman
Park, May 22, 1955; 11 %@ and 8 @ @ in debris be-
tween large rocks at edge of Lake Ontario, with
Trichoniscus demivirgo, Armadillidium nasatum,
and Tracheoniscus rathket.
Bridgewater, Oneida County, June 19, 1955; 2
oo and 1 2 under rocks and trash on bank of
small stream at side of highway, with Trichoniscus
demivirgo.
Rensselaerville, Albany County; many speci-
mens found on several occasions under rocks in
ruins of an old felt mill on the E. N. Huyck Pre-
serve, with Trichoniscus demivirgo and Cylisticus
CONVELUS.
It is certain that 7. pygmaeus is an importa-
tion from Europe where it is widespread and
synanthropic. It has in all probability been in-
troduced into this country on numerous occa-
sions and has obviously become established in a
number of localities. The possibility that the
populations discovered in New York represent
very recent introductions is remote, since, with
the possible exception of the Bridgewater local-
ity, no recent dumping of vegetable wastes or
soil has occurred at these stations. The Rens-
selaerville population, in particular, seems to be
a very old one, since it is established around the
foundations of an old felt mill which was aban-
doned in 1879 and fell into ruins before 1895.
Many other old isolated populations such as
these are undoubtedly scattered around the
countryside, at least in the eastern United States.
That they have not yet been discovered is cer-
tainly due to the very small size of the animal
(<2.5 mm) and to its secretive habits, as well
as to the scarcity of terested observers.
Marca 1957
Hyloniscus riparius (C. L. Koch)
There is only one previous report of this wide-
spread Central European form from North
America. Palmén (1951) found several speci-
mens in two locations in St. John’s, Newfound-
land—in a garden and in a greenhouse. From
these finds he concluded that the species is
probably not able to survive outdoors, but is
completely dependent. on man in Newfoundland.
In Rochester an apparently permanent out-
door population has been located near the Mount
Hope Cemetery. Numerous specimens have been
found under logs, rocks and debris over a dis-
tance of more than half a mile along a railroad
embankment and on the cemetery grounds. Both
sexes and all stages of the life history are repre-
sented. Active animals have been found on
various occasions during the ice-free portion of
the year, and their hardiness is attested to by
the fact that they have just survived the most
rigorous winter in Rochester for many years, the
average temperature for December having been
244° F. and that for January 23.1° F. These
points, together with the fact that the main
body of the population along the railroad tracks
has been separated from the cemetery (the prob-
able point of origin) by a busy 4lane highway
for at least 25 years, indicate that this species is
perfectly able to survive and thrive in such a
climate as that of Rochester. In this connection
it is interesting to note that in this same loca-
tion where H. riparius is found, the exotic chilo-
pod Chaetechelyne vesuwiana (Newport) also oc-
curs (ef. Crabill, 1955). These two species of
organisms, which have somewhat similar ranges
in Europe, apparently have similar ecological re-
quirements and have been almost equally suc-
cessful in establishing themselves in this foreign
niche.?
It is very interesting to note that in the area
along the railroad tracks H. riparius almost com-
pletely replaces the indigenous trichoniscid iso-
pod, Trichoniscus demivirgo Blake. The latter
species is common under rocks and logs in damp
places throughout the Rochester region, and »
indeed, is abundant at the periphery of the
area occupied by H. riparius. Within this area,
2 Since preparation of this manuscript, a popu-
lation of Hyloniscus riparius has been discovered
in a small trash dump along U. 8. Highway 20,
ee us east of Lafayette, Onondaga County,
IN 6 1S
MUCHMORE: SOME EXOTIC TERRESTRIAL ISOPODS
79
however, very few 7. demivirgo can be found,
although, as mentioned above, the other trichonis-
cids T. pygmaeus and H. danicus occur in num-
bers along with H. riparius. It appears that H.
riparius and T. demivirgo have very similar eco-
logical requirements and that the former is more
successful in its occupation of a favorable habitat
than the latter, with the result that 7. demwirgo
is excluded almost completely.
Miktoniscus medcofi Van Name
In the greenhouse of the University of Roch-
ester are several small, but thriving, colonies of
a small isopod which has been identified provi-
sionally as Miktoniscus medcofi. This species was
described by Van Name (1940) from specimens
found in the greenhouse of the University of
Illinois, Urbana, Ill. At the same time Van Name
reported specimens from another greenhouse in
Urbana, and from the Garfield Park Conserva-
tory, Chicago. The only other record of this
species is the recent report by de Castro (1953)
of specimens from three outdoor locations in
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. On the basis of these
finds, de Castro suggests that Brazil may be the
native habitat of the species.
Although he was confident in the identifica-
tion of his specimens as M. medcofi, de Castro
recognized certain peculiarities of his specimens
and presented an extensive redescription of the
species. In particular, he pointed out differences
in the second pleopod, namely, the exopodite is
larger in its terminal portion and the endopodite
is proportionally much shorter than the corre-
sponding structures as figured by Van Name
(1940, p. 111). Furthermore, it should be noted
that the Brazilian specimens are without pig-
ment, while the United States specimens are
described as “strongly pigmented, having the
upper surface handsomely variegated with brown
or purplish-brown pigment on a light back-
ground...” (p. 112). And the distal segment of
the endopodite of pleopod I of the male is dis-
tinetly shorter than the proximal segment in
Brazilian, but subequal in the United States
specimens. Also, the basal segment of the uropod
is apparently much narrower in Brazilian, than
in United States specimens.
The specimens found at Rochester generally
resemble those described by Van Name and de
Castro but seem to differ from one or both forms
in certain respects, namely, im the shape and
proportions of the endopodite of pleopod IT of
80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
the male; in the shape of the ischium, merus and
carpus of perelopod VII of the male; and in de-
tails of the antennae, pleopods III-V and uro-
pods. In addition, it should be noted that these
specimens are similar in many respects to speci-
mens which have been described as M. linearis
(Patience, 1908; Kesselyak, 19380; Vandel, 1950)
and M. humus (Mulaik, 1942), though again
certain differences are evident. Furthermore,
Eberly (1954) has noted the finding in Cascades
Park, Bloomington, Indiana, of a single speci-
men probably belonging to the genus Miktonis-
cus, but having ‘“‘some differences from any of
the species of Miktoniscus described from Amer-
ica.”’ It seems certain that two or more species
are represented by these several lots of specimens
but, because of inaccuracies and inadequacies of
the published descriptions, it is impossible at
present to decide exactly what species are in-
volved. As Vandel points out, it will not be pos-
sible to determine the identity or non-identity of
the forms until a direct comparison of types can
be made. Until such time as a positive identifica-
tion can be made, it seems best to consider the
Rochester specimens as belonging to M. medcofi,
which they most closely resemble.
Haplophthalmus danicus Budde-Lund
This is another common European form which
has been widely spread by man’s activities. It
has become established in a number of places in
this country, living both indoors and out. It has
been recorded outdoors from Indiana, Mary-
land, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Kentucky,
Tennessee, and Utah, and from greenhouses in
Toronto, Ontario. Palmén (1951) has reported
outdoor finds in southern Newfoundland and
concludes from the circumstances that the spe-
cies may be able to survive there. Eberly (1954)
has found this species widely distributed in
Indiana, frequenting ‘‘moist soil under boards
and logs.”
In New York I have found the species well
established in the greenhouses of the University
of Rochester, and in four outdoor locations as
follows:
Rochester, Monroe County, near the Mount
Hope Cemetery; number of specimens on several
occasions, under logs along railroad tracks; with
Trichoniscus pygmaeus and Hyloniscus riparius.
Powder Mill Park, Monroe County, April 1955;
numerous individuals in two locations at least a
mile apart; under logs on wet ground.
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 3
Rensselaerville, Albany County; large popula-
tion in old trash on creek bank in the village; with
Trichoniscus demivirgo, Tracheoniscus rathkei, and
Oniscus asellus.
There is no doubt that these outdoor popula-
tions are permanent. Judging from the numbers
of individuals found and from the surroundings,
they cannot have been introduced recently. On
the basis of these records, it appears that H.
danicus can withstand rather rigorous winters,
and in all probability will be found to be more
widespread than supposed, even in the northern
portion of the country and in southern Canada.
As Eberly suggests, these small animals are
probably “often overlooked because of their size,
by people who think they might be just the
young ones of other common species with which
they are found.”
Platyarthrus hoffmannseggi Brandt
This species also is widespread through Eu-
rope, being commonly found in the nests of ants,
with which it apparently enjoys some sort of
symbiotic relation. It has been reported in North
America only from the vicinity of New Haven,
Conn. (see Van Name, 1940, and Brooks, 1942).
In Rochester, a colony of P. hoffmannseggi has
been found along the railroad tracks near the
Mount Hope Cemetery, in the same area occu-
pied by Hyloniscus riparius and other exotic
forms. The colony is established in an ants’ nest
under an old railroad tie lying on the roadbed of
stones and cinders. The nest is occupied by the
ant, Formica sanguinea subnuda Emery and its
slave Formica fusca Linnaeus. On June 8 and
June 27, 1956, brief collection by hand and
Berlese separation of some of the material from
under the tie yielded 69 specimens (25 males and
44 females), together with specimens of the
other isopods Haplophthalmus danicus, Hylonis-
cus riparius, Trichoniscus demivirgo, Oniscus
asellus, and Tracheoniscus rathkev.
Though I find no mention in the literature of
such a situation, there seems to be a considerable
difference in size between the sexes of P. hoff-
mannseggi. Contrary to the opinion of Brooks
(1942, p. 436) that this species is “never more
than four millimeters in length”, and the state-
ment of Edney (1953, p. 74), “up to 3.6 mm
long’, the largest female collected here is 5.76
3 The ants were determined by Dr. Marion R.
Smith at the United States National Museum.
Marcu 1957
mm long, and the average length of 33 mature
females is +.32 mm. On the other hand, the larg-
est male collected is only 3.40 mm long, the av-
erage length of 23 males being 2.61 mm. It may
be, of course, that all the males collected are
immature animals, therefore are smaller than
the females. But if this is so, then it must be
assumed that mature males were not, at the
time of collection, present in the colony, or else
that the mature males were deep in the nest and
escaped capture. Either of these situations should
provide the basis for an interesting study.
The large size of female specimens and the
size differential between males and females might
suggest that we are dealing here with a species of
Platyarthrus distinct from hoffmannseggi or with
a subspecies of P. hoffmannseggi. No significant
morphological differences have been detected,
however, on comparing our specimens with the
descriptions given by Meinertz (1934), Verhoeff
(1936), and Edney (1953). Until direct compari-
son with European material should prove other-
wise, it can only be concluded that our specimens
are minor variants of P. hoffmannsegqt.
Armadillidium nasatum Budde-Lund
This species has been widely reported through
the U. 8. and in southern Canada but its occur-
rence has for the greater part been confined to
greenhouses and warmed buildings (cf. Van
Name, 1936, and Hatchett, 1947). Only one re-
port (Van Name, 1940) specifically mentions the
finding of specimens (two) outdoors ‘under
pieces of wood at Glenview, Illinois, northwest of
Chicago, Oct. 3, 1936.’ There is no indication
how close the point of capture was to human
habitations or hothouses. Eberly (1954) notes
that A. nasatwm has been found in Brown and
Monroe Counties, Ind., but he neglects to men-
tion the habitats of the animals collected. It may
be presumed, however, they do exist outdoors in
these southern Indiana localities.
In Rochester, A. nasatum is very common in
greenhouses at the University of Rochester and
in Highland Park. In addition specimens have
been found outdoors in four separate locations.
Immediately around the university greenhouse,
A. nasatum is very common through the summer
months, along with A. vulgare and Cylisticus con-
verus. This population is without doubt one
which winters in the building foundations and
expands outside, with the coming of warm
MUCHMORE: SOME EXOTIC TERRESTRIAL ISOPODS 81
weather. Further finds have been made, however,
at stations some distance removed from any
warmed building: under old wooden ties on a
railroad embankment at Genesee Valley Park
(2 oo on April 29, 1955; 3 #7@# on May 20,
1956); in a similar situation at the shore of Lake
Ontario in Durand-Eastman Park (4 #7 and
1 @ on May 22, 1955); and under a board in a
trash dump of the Mount Hope Cemetery (1 9°
on May 29, 1955). The latter specimen, while
found outdoors, might have been carried to this
place only shortly before collection on greenhouse
flowers brought to the cemetery. The first two
mentioned finds, however, seem certainly to be
from permanently established populations, since
in each case the station is not near a building and
no reasonable mode of recent introduction can be
conceived. It is probable that the animals are
able to overwinter in these locations by burrow-
ing deeply into the loose material of the railroad
bed.
The population of A. nasatum living outside
the greenhouse at the University of Rochester is
actually a very hardy lot. Although they un-
doubtedly burrow deeply along the building
foundations during the very cold weather, they
apparently can tolerate temperatures near freez-
ing, for immediately after the snow melted and
the ground thawed from our past winter (March
30, air temperature about 35° F.) specimens were
found active under a 1-foot-square piece of insu-
lating board lying on the ground 2 feet from the
building. Also present were individuals of Cylisti-
cus convecus and Tracheoniscus rathkei. A few
days later, after a 514-inch snowfall, the snow
was brushed away and a few specimens were
found under the board, lethargic but still alive.
This observation is noteworthy in view of the
fact that Hatchett (1947) never found A. nasatum
outside the greenhouse in Ann Arbor, Mich., even
though inside it was as abundant as A. vulgare,
which in turn was common outside as well as in.
DISCUSSION
The outdoor occurrence in upstate New
York of Hyloniscus riparius, Haplophthalmus
danicus, Trichoniscus pygmaeus, and Arma-
dilidium nasatum is most interesting from a
biogeographical point of view. These species
are found throughout central and western
Europe as far north as the North Sea coast.
The last three named are also common in
82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the British Isles, but H. rzparcus apparently
has not been introduced across the channel
(see Edney, 1953); and 7. pygmaeus and H.
danicus have been reported from Norway
(Oslo) by Sars (1898). In the cooler regions
of Europe, which correspond climatically
to upstate New York, these four species have
been found only in greenhouses and other
artificially warmed situations. Meinertz
(1932, 1934) has reported all four in and
around greenhouses in Denmark, and
Palmén (1946, 1947) has found them in
similar situations in Finland. Furthermore,
in Newfoundland, which has a_ similar
climate, H. riparius, T. pygmaeus, and H.
danicus have been found living outdoors
during the summer, but under such cir-
cumstances as to raise a doubt whether they
are able to survive the winters outside (see
Palmén, 1951).
The New York state localities, namely
Rochester and Rensselaerville, are similar in
climate to Denmark, southern Finland, and
Newfoundland, at least in so far as the
winters are concerned. In all these places the
winters are fairly rigorous and damp, with
the January temperature averaging 5 to 10
degrees below freezing, Fahrenheit. Con-
sidering climate alone, one would definitely
not expect to find these isopods in either
Rochester or Rensselaerville. Fortuitous
circumstances have, however, made survival
possible through the coldest winters ex-
perienced by these localities. All of my finds
of the isopods under consideration have been
made in situations where the substratum is
very loose, that is, in railroad beds of rocks
and cinders, in dumps of rocks, trash and
ashes, and among crumbling building foun-
dations. In such situations, apparently, the
animals are well provided with food and
moisture during warm weather and in cold
weather are able to descend quickly to a
depth sufficient to protect them from
freezing.
Platyarthrus hoffmannseggi also is wide-
spread in Europe, being found as far north
as the British Isles (Edney, 1954) and
Denmark (Meinertz, 1934), but apparently
absent from Norway (Sars, 1898) and
Finland (Palmén, 1946). This species, being
myrmecophilous, might be expected to be
VOL. 47, NO. 3
more resistent to cold weather than many
other isopods, since it always has the op-
portunity to retire easily to the depths of the
ants’ nest whenever conditions become
adverse. On this basis, its occurrence in
Rochester is easy to understand, and the
possibility that it could withstand even
more rigorous climates seems good.
The finding of P. hoffmannseggi with
Formica sanguinea subnuda and Fermica
fusca adds these two forms to the list of ant
hosts in this country. It should be noted,
however, that in England the isopod has
been found living with F’. fusca and with the
typical form of F. sangwinea (see Brooks,
1942, p. 428). It seems probable that the
isopod was introduced from Europe into
Rochester along with F. fusca and that
subsequently the local ant, F. sanguinea
subnuda, moved in to enslave F’. fusca and to
share the nest with its other occupants.
The geographical distribution of the
several species in the genus Mzktoniscus has
been discussed by Vandel (1949, 1950), who
points out that MWrktoniscus is a typical
North Atlantic genus. The recent suggestion
of de Castro (1953) that I. medcofi origi-
nated in the southern hemisphere may or
may not be valid. Two of the three finds of
M. medcofi mentioned by de Castro were
made in areas modified by human habita-
tion, that is, in a banana grove and on a
country estate. (Habitat data for the third
find is not given.) It is entirely possible that
the species has been introduced into the Rio
de Janeiro region from some North American
or European locality and that it has become
locally established there, where it should
have no difficulty in living outdoors. Only
further, more intensive, collection can cast
more light on this problem.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I am _ indebted to Prof. Kenneth
Cooper, Department of Biology, University
of Rochester, for his continuing encourage-
ment and for his critical reading of this
manuscript. Also, I wish to thank Dr.
Marion Smith, at the United States National
Museum, for prompt identification of the
ants mentioned herein.
Marca 1957 MUCHMORE:
REFERENCES
Brooks, J. L. Notes on the ecology and the occur-
rence in America of the myrmecophilous sowbug,
Platyarthrus hoffmanseggi Brandt. Ecology
23: 427-437. 1942.
Castro, A. L. pe. Fauna do Distrito Federal. VIII.
Sobre a occurréncia dos generos Miktoniscus e
Cordioniscus no Rio de Janeiro (Isopoda, Tri-
choniscidae). An. Acad. Brasil. Ciéne. 25: 527—
534. 1953.
CraBILt, R. E., Jr. Report of another European
chilopod in eastern North America (Chilopoda:
Geophilomorpha). Ent. News 66: 248-249. 1955.
EpeErty, W. R. The terrestrial isopods (Oniscoidea)
of Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 63: 272-
277. 1954.
Epney, EB. B. The woodlice of Great Britain and
Ireland. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 164: 49-98.
1953.
Hatcuett, S. P. Biology of the Isopoda-of Michi-
gan. Ecol. Monogr. 17: 47-79. 1947.
Kessetyak, A. Uber Isopoden. Zool. Anz. 91: 50-
66. 1930.
LouMaNbeER, H. On some terrestrial isopods in the
United States National Museum. Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 72, (17): 1-18. 1927.
Mer1nertz, T. Die Landisopoden Dénemarks. I.
Die Ligiiden und Trichonisciden. Zool. Jahrb.
(Abt. Syst.) 63: 352-406. 1932.
. Die Landisopoden Dénemarks. IT. Die Oni-
sciden. Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Syst.) 66: 211-284.
1934.
Mcuuargk, 8. and D. New species and records of
American terrestrial isopods. Bull. Univ. Utah
32, (6) (Biol. Ser. 6, no. 7): 1-11. 1942.
SOME EXOTIC TERRESTRIAL ISOPODS 83
PatMEN, E. Die Landisopoden Finnlands. Ann.
Zool. Soe. Zool. Bot. Fenn. 11, (6): 1-36. 1946.
. Zur Kenntnis der Trichonisciden (Isopoda
terr.) Finnlands. Ann. Zool. Soc. Zool. Bot.
Fenn. 18, (1): 1-23. 1947.
. A survey of the Oniscoidea (Isopoda terr.) of
Newfoundland. Ann. Zool. Soe. Zool. Bot.
Fenn. 14, (1): 1-27. 1951.
PaTIENcE, A. On a new British terrestrial isopod
(Trichoniscus linearis, sp. n.). Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (8) 1: 280-282. 1908.
Sars, G. O. An account of the Crustacea of Norway
(with short descriptions and figures of all the
species). Vol. II. Isopoda: 1-270. Bergen Mu-
seum, 1896-1898.
VANDEL, A. La faune Nord-Atlantique. Rev. Fran.
Ent. 16, (1): 1-12. 1949.
, Isopodes terrestres recueillis par C. Bolivar
et R. Jeannel (1928) et le Dr. Henrot (1946).
Campagne spéologique de C. Bolivar et R. Jean-
nel dans l’ Amérique du Nord (1928) No. 14.
Biospéologica 71: Arch. Zool. exp. gén. 87:
183-210. 1950.
Van Name, W. G. The American land and fresh-
water isopod Crustacea. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat.
Hist. 71: 1-535. 1936.
. A supplement to the American land and
fresh-water isopod Crustacea. Bull. Amer. Mus.
Nat. Hist. 77: 109-142. 1940.
———. A second supplement to the American land
and fresh-water isopod Crustacea. Bull. Amer.
Mus. Nat. Hist. 80: 299-329. 1942.
VerHoErr, K. W. Ueber Isopoden der Balkanhal-
binsel, gesammelt von Herrn. Dr. I. Buresch.
IIT Teil. zugleich 58. Isopoden-Aufsatz. Mitt.
naturw. Inst. Sofia 9: 1-27. 1936.
rrr
WIND RIVER FOSSILS
Finding of a “missing link” in the evolution
of modern mammals—a creature that had
branched off from the great family of odd-toed
ungulates, which includes the horse and rhino,
toward the present tapir—is reported by C.
Lewis Gazin, Smithsonian Institution curator
of vertebrate paleontology.
This ancient animal, of which a fossil jaw and
parts of a skull were found in the Wind River
basin of Wyoming, was Dilophodon, about the
size of a fox, which lived during the upper Eocene
period of geological time, about 45,000,000 years
ago. The Wind River area long has beena favorite
hunting ground for mammals of the Eocene, the
period when the warm-blooded creatures began to
take on some of their present forms.
Also encountered were the fossil remains of a
somewhat larger tapiroid, Desmatotherium, rather
resembling the smaller tapir, Dilophodon, but
cannot be considered directly ancestral to any
living form although representative of the gen-
eral complex from which arose rhinos, horses,
taps, and certain groups of extinct hoofed
mammals.
The points at which the divergence to the
modern forms took place are of considerable sig-
nificance to paleontologists. The Wind River
area, Dr. Gazin says, is especially rich in tapiroid
material and living in the same area, at roughly
the same time, were ancestral opossums, rabbits,
rodents, and carnivores.
84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ZOOLOGY .— The systematics, affinities, and hosts of the one-tentacled, commensal
hydroid Monobrachium, with new distributional records. Caper Hanp, Uni- |
versity of California. (Communicated by F. M. Bayer.)
(Received December 21, 1956)
The hydroid Monobrachium parasitum was
first described by Mereschkowsky (1877)
from the White Sea. Subsequently Leche
(1878) reported it from Nova Zembla in the
Kara Sea, Wagner (1890) from the Bay of
Solowetzk near the isles of Baby-Loudy and
Nowny-Loudy in the White Sea, Levinsen
(1893) from Umanak, Egedesminde, and
Frederikshaab along the west coast of
Greenland, and Bonnevie (1899) from near
Spitsbergen. All these localities are within
the boundaries of the Arctic Ocean. It was
not until Stafford (1912) discovered Mono-
brachiwm in the Gaspé region of Canada that
its distribution was extended to the Atlantic
and to lower latitudes. Fraser (1918) further
extended the known range of this species
when he described it from Nanoose Bay,
British Columbia, on the Pacific coast of
Canada. Fraser’s report is the last new
record of Monobrachium to the present date,
and the known distribution would include
the Arctic, Atlantic, and Pacific stations
reported above. In view of the presumed
circumboreal distribution of Monobrachium,
and the fact that it has never been reported
south of lat. 48° N. in either the Atlantic or
Pacific, it was with some surprise that I
discovered Monobrachium parasitum to be
abundant in relatively shallow water off the
west coast of California and Baja California
in the area from about lat. 34° to 32° N.
Mereschkowsky gives no precise Latin or
Greek stem for the specific name parasitwm
which he choose for this species, and it is
interesting that certain authors [Leche
(1878), Wagner (1890), Bonnevie (1899)]
have used the name parasiticum for this
animal. If we assume that Mereschowsky
derived his specific name from the Latin
noun for “‘a parasite” it would appear that he
has treated this noun as an adjective and
caused it to agree grammatically with the
generic name, a procedure at variance with
the modern Rules, which state that nouns
H
|
|
VOL. 47, No. 3 |
must be appositional, nominative, or pos- —
sessive genitive. It may have been because of
the agreement of the genders of the two |
names that the authors cited above chose to |
use the adjectival specific name parasiticum. |
No matter what Mereschkowsky’s intention |
in this matter was, there seems to be no way
in which we can change the orthography of
the name at this date. We must accept
Mereschkowsky’s name as an abbreviated
adjectival stem which he chose in preference
to the full stem of the original Latin adjec-
tive. Therefore, I shall use Mereschkowsky’s
name J/. parasitum for this species.
This hydroid has been reported only as
living upon the shells of bivalves and always
near the posterior end of the shells or sur- |
rounding the siphons. Mereschkowsky found
it upon Tellina solidula, although Leche
(1878) had specimens of both T. solidula
and 7. lata but found it only on T. lata. Leche |
comments that Mereschkowsky’s drawing of
T. solidula looks more like T. lata than T. |
solidula. Wagner (1890) describes the mol- |
lusk host only as a Tellina, but he cites in
his introduction the occurrence of Mono-
brachium on Tellina calcarea. In a footnote to |
that citation he refers to the work of Leche
(1878) who does not mention 7’. calcarea. |
Perhaps Tellina calcarea of Leche is Macoma |
calcarea. Levinsen (1893) found Monobrach- |
zum on Macoma calcarea and Tellina moesta,
while Bonnevie (1899) does not identify the
host clam. The Atlantic examples of A/ono-
brachium found by Stafford (1912) occurred
on Tellina tenera and the Pacific material of
Fraser (1918) on Aainopsis sericatus. Most
of the above bivalves are small species, |
seldom exceeding 4 cm in greatest dimension, |
while others such as Axinopsis are minute
and are little more than 2 mm in diameter.
The material from California occurs on
several different species of bivalves. These
include a 2 mm long immature Tellina sp., |
Axinopsis viridis and Aligena redondoensis.
Marcu 1957
These mollusks were kindly identified for
me by Dr. Myra Keen of Stanford Univer-
sity. The latter two species above are minute
species and seldom exceed 2 few millimeters
in diameter. One notes here that the Atlantic
and Arctic hosts of /onobrachium are clams
of considerably greater size than those from
the Pacific. Also, it seems worthy of mention
that with the exception of J/acoma calcarea,
all the clam hosts have very short siphons,
or none at all, and live at the surface of the
ocean’s bottom. This habit of the clam hosts
must be a prerequisite for J/onobrachium,
since if these hosts were to burrow much
below the surface it seems unlikely that the
hydroid could survive. Unfortunately, there
are no adequate descriptions of the hydroid
as a living animal, although Fraser (1918)
notes the similarity of the posturing of
Monebrachium to that described by Gosse
(1857) for Proboscidactyla (= Lar).
The material upon which the present re-
port is based came into my hands from
several sources. The first five specimens were
collected by William Walton, of the Scripps
Institution of Oceanography, from depths of
40 to 65 fathoms in Todos Santos Bay, Baja
California, November 1952 and March and
April 1953. Mr. Walton also gave me a sixth
specimen which he collected on August 20,
1952, in Todos Santos Bay. This specimen,
taken at a depth of 165 fathoms, is unique
not only in the great depth at which it was
found but also in that it was living upon the
test of the arenacious foraminiferan Haplo-
phragmoides planissimum. This is the first
indication that Monobrachium will accept
any others than bivalves as a host substrate.
Six specimens of Monobrachium were
received from Dr. Olga Hartman, of the
Allan Hancock Foundation of the University
of Southern California. These specimens
were taken at 42 fathoms in Santa Monica
Bay, Calif.
The remaining material consisted of 72
specimens which were collected in June,
October, and November 1953 in depths of
from 30 to 120 fathoms by Robert Bieri, of
the Scripps Institution of Oceanography.
This material was obtained from positions
southwest and west of Point Loma, San
HAND: THE HYDROID MONOBRACHIUM 85
Diego, Calif., and within approximately one
mile of the Poimt. The bottom varied at
these stations from a fine sand to soft, silty
deposits.
The hydroid AWonobrachium parasitum has
been well described by its original finder, and
Wagner (1890) has given a very complete
description of both the hydroid and medusa.
Bonnevie (1899) added to Wagner’s descrip-
tion and Fraser (1918) redescribed this
species. The material I have observed seems
to differ in no significant way from what has
been described previously and little is to be
gained by a redescription. However, certain
features of the material I have examined do
not agree precisely with what has been
previously recorded and these will be men-
tioned, along with some new observations.
Fie. 1.—A colony of Monobrachium parasitum
with one adult female medusa.
I have already commented on the fact
that the bivalve hosts of the Pacific repre-
sentatives of Monobrachium are smaller than
those in the Arctic and Atlantic Oceans.
This condition may result merely from an
absence in the Pacific fauna of clams of
86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
several centimeters’ length of suitable habits
and habitats, or could reflect genetic dif-
ferences in the Pacific hydroid. It is possible
that the Pacifie Monobrachium is another
species, but I have little evidence to favor
this view. As a result of the smaller hosts,
however, the appearance of the colonies
which I have observed is slightly different
from that of those figured from the Arctic.
The accompanying Fig. 1 illustrates a small
colony of Monobrachium from Santa Monice
Bay and shows how the hydrorhizal network
wanders over the whole shell surface to the
very margin where the curious knobbed
defensive zooids stand. If one compares this
with the descriptions and figures of Meresch-
kowsky, Wagner, and Bonnevie one notes
that in their material the colony, including
all of the hydrorhizal net and defensive
zooids, seldom covered more than the
posterior one-third of the host shell.
Another minor difference between Pacific
and other representatives of Monobrachium
coneerns the size of the polyps. in the
material I have examined it has been very
seldom that a polyp 1 mm long has been
present. Fraser (1918) gave the polyp size as
0.7 to 0.8 mm in height. Arctic polyps are
reported up to 2 mm long with the single
tentacle as long as 5 mm. However, knowing
from observations of other naked hydroids
the extreme changes in size of which they are
capable, it seems unlikely that the smaller
size of the Pacific material has any very
ereat significance.
Some interesting and important observa-
tions have been made on the medusae found
attached to various colonies. In general, the
medusae are not more than 2 mm in greatest
dimension and only rarely have I found more
than one large medusa on a colony. Perhaps
for this reason I have not been able to con-
firm Bonnevie’s observation that medusae of
both sexes occur in a single colony. The wide
and thick radial canals, the paired gonads
along the canals, the nearly solid ring canal
and the light covering of perisare over the
medusae all agree with previous descriptions.
Also the delicate velum, the very short,
closed manubrium and the 16 small hollow
tentacles agree with earlier observations.
However, between the second and _ third
order of tentacles in each quadrant there
occurs a single, external, closed, endodermal
VOL. 47, NO. 3
statocyst which has been all but overlooked
by previous authors (see Fig. 2). It was only
Wagner (1890) who seems to have seen these
structures at all, and he describes them as
masses of cells which he took to be rudiments
of marginal sensitive bodies. He goes on to
say that such sensitive bodies are wanting in
the medusae of Monobrachium. I have found
in sections of 3 medusae and in several
examined under the pressure of a cover slip
that the statocysts are readily demonstrable
and are clearly closed and endodermal. The
three medusae sectioned were to all ap-
pearance adult, and the eggs of the two
females showed large germinal vesicles and
looked as if the eggs were ready to be shed.
There is no indication in the material I have
examined that these medusae are released,
and one attached medusa I observed had
shed all but a few of its eggs. This, however,
is not positive evidence that the medusae
may not be released before spawning, since
it is quite possible that the eggs could have
been squeezed out of the medusa by other
material in the dredge or when the haul was
sorted.
Mereschkowsky (1877) figured a nemato-
cyst of Monobrachium which is clearly a
microbasic eurytele. I have examined both
the hydroid and medusoid stage and can find
but one type of nematocyst, a microbasic
eurytele from 7 to lly in diameter by 9 to
16u in length. There is no difference in size
Fre. 2.—Diagram of the arrangement of tenta-
cles and statocysts of an adult medusa of Mono-
brachium parasitum.
Marcu 1957
ranges between the nematocysts of the
hydroid and its medusa.
The systematic position of JWonobrachiwm
has not to date been clearly established.
Mereschkowsky (1877) believed it a member
of the Athecata and on the basis of its
single tentacle he established a new family,
Monobrachiidae, for it. Mereschkowsky was
impressed with the many analogies of his ani-
mal to “Lar’’, but felt that the two were quite
separate. It seems curious that Meresch-
kowsky did not give more weight to his own
observation that the gonads were developing
beneath the radial canals, which should have
suggested to him, as it did later to Bonnevie
(1899), that Monobrachium was a leptome-
dusan. Levinsen (1893) listed Monobrachiwm
in the Laridae (now the Proboscidactylidae)
withcut comment. Bonnevie (1899), after
considermg the evidence available to her,
felt that this hydroid was on the borderline
between the thecate and athecate hydroids.
Fraser (1918) made a point of the differences
in number of radial canals between the
genera Lar and Monebrachium, but com-
mented that if the gonads of Lar were
placed in a position similar to those of
Monobrachium, the two genera should be
placed in the same family. Fraser seems not
to have been aware of the work of Browne
(1896), who demonstrated that Lar was the
hydroid stage of Proboscidactyla (= Willia)
and that the medusae of the two genera in
question have very different gonadal pat-
terns. Fraser (1937, 1944) listed JMJono-
brachium in its own family, the Monobrachi-
idae, and he continued this classification in
1946. Hand and Hendrickson (1950) con-
sidered Monobrachium to be a member of
the family Proboscidactylidae.
As mentioned earlier, Monobrachium
possesses closed endodermal statocysts and
has a monocnidom of microbasic euryteles.
Also, the endoderm of the tentacles of the
hydroid is in direct continuity with that of
the gastric cavity, end the tentacles of the
medusa are hollow. These characters, taken
in their totality, can only be indicative of
one group of Hydrozoa, the Limnomedusae.
Among the Limnomedusae only a single
family, the Olindiidae, has endodermal
statocysts; we face the question of whether
or not to place Monobrachium in this family.
HAND: THE HYDROID MONOBRACHIUM 87
There seems to be no question that both
hydroid Monobrachium and medusa of
Monobrachium are highly specialized. The
hydroid, as a commensal, presumably
“fishes” in the incurrent stream of the
bivalve host, and the one tentacle appar-
ently suffices as a food-gathering organ.
The hydroid is more reduced than that of
Gonionemus (= Haleremita), but not so
reduced as the tentacle-less hydroid of
Craspedacusta (= Microhydra). The medusa
of Alonebrachium, however, would be the
most highly specialized of all the Olindiidae.
It is presumably never released and_ its
minute tentacles, nearly closed ring and
radial canals, and closed mouth all point to
its reduced nature. If we compare the
development of Gonionemus murbachi with
what I call the adult Monobrachium, we see
a close resemblance in the 16 tentacles and 4
statocysts of Monobrachium to the young of
Gonionemus (see Russell, 1953, p. 402). Also,
the monocnidom of Monobrachium is the
same as that of Craspedacusta (and Micro-
hydra), Gonionemus (and Halermita) and
Olindias (see Weill, 1934). From the above
facts and considerations I have come to the
conclusion that Monobrachium should be
assigned to the Olindiidae, and there is no
reason why we should retain the monotypic
Monobrachiidae.
I wish to thank Dr. Erik Zeuthen for
translating for me pertinent parts of the
papers of Leche and Levinsen and Dr.
Ralph I. Smith for reading the manuscript.
LITERATURE CITED
BonNEVIE, K. Hydroida. Den Norske Nordhavs—
Expedition. Zoologi. I: 1-103, 8 pls, 1 map.
1899.
Browne, E. T. On British hydroids and medusae.
Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1896: 459-500, 2 pls.
1896.
GosskE, P. H. On a new form of corynoid polypes.
Trans. Linnean Soc. London 22: 113-116, 1 pl.
1857.
Fraser, C. M. Monobrachium parasitum and other
west coast hydroids. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada,
(3), 12: 181-188, 2 pls. 1918.
. Hydroids of the Pacific Coast of North
America: 207 pp., 44 pls. Univ. Toronto Press,
1937.
. Hydroids of the Atlantic coast of North
America: 451 pp., 94 pls. Univ. Toronto Press,
1944.
———. Distribution and relationship in American
Hydroids: 464 pp. Univ. Toronto Press, 1946.
88 JOURNAL
Hanp, C., and Henpricxson, J. R. A two-tenta-
cled, commensal hydroid from California (Lim-
nomedusae, Proboscidactyla). Biol. Bull. 99,
(1): 74-87, 5 figs., 2 pls. 1950.
Lecun, W. Ofversigt Ofver de af Svenska Expedi-
tionerna till Novaja Semlja och Jenissej 1875
Insamlade Hafs—Mollusker. Kongl. Svenska
Vet.-Akad. Handl., N.-F., 16, (2): 1-86, 2 pls.
1878.
Levinsen, G. M. R. Meduser, Ctenophorer og Hy-
droider fra Gronlands Vestkyst, Tilligemed Be-
maerkninger om Hydroidernes systematik.o- C
penhagen Naturh. Foren. Videns. Medd. 1892.
44: 143-220. 1893.
MERESCHKOWSKY, C. On a new genus of hydroids
OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 3
from the White Sea, with a short description of
other new hydroids. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (4)
20: 220-229, 2 pls. 1877.
RussE.u, F.8. The medusae of the British Isles: pp.
x + 530, 35 pls. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1953.
STAFFORD, J. On the fauna of the Atlantic coast of
Canada. Third Report—Gaspé, 1905-1906.
Contr. Can. Biol., 1906-1910: 45-67. 1912.
Waaner, J. Recherches sur Vorganisation de Mo-
nobrachium parasitum Méréjk. Arch. Biol. 10:
273-309, 2 pls. 1890.
WeILL, R. Contribution a l étude des cnidaires et de
leurs nematocysts: Vol. II, Valeur taronomique
du cnidome. Trav. Stat., Zool. Wimereux, 11,
1934.
oe
PLANT-GROWTH “BRAKE”
There is a ‘“‘brake”’ on plant development—
perhaps one of Nature’s most fundamental con-
tols over surging life. It is a relatively narrow
band of light on the edge of the invisible infrared
in the solar spectrum. This phenomenon is re-
ported by Dr. R. B. Withrow, head of the Smith-
sonian Institution’s Division of Radiation and
Organisms, where the effects of light on the
growth and development of plants and animals is
being investigated.
Plant life, and through plants all life, is tied
intimately to certain solar wave bands. It has long
been recognized that the cornerstone of all life
on earth is the process of photosynthesis by which
plants, through energy provided by sunlight, are
able to synthesize carbohydrates from water and
carbon dioxide taken from the air. Animals eat
these carbohydrates, the basic food. Other ani-
mals eat the carbohydrate eaters, and thus the
chain extends from the simplest organisms to man.
But without some other process the carbo-
hydrates might be a formless mass. The second
process, long studied by the Smithsonian work-
ers, is that which shapes a plant and controls
development of stems, leaves, and blossoms. This,
Dr. Withrow points out, may be a light effect
second in importance only to photosynthesis
itself. It requires very little solar energy. Experi-
ments have demonstrated that the control is
exercised by red light with a maximum of efh-
ciency at wavelengths around 660 millimicrons—
or millionths of millimeters. The Smithsonian
findings have been substantiated in several other
laboratories. It has been demonstrated, however,
that this formative action can be blocked ef-
fectively by irradiation with wavelengths in
the far red. The greatest effect is at wavelengths
between 710 and 730 millimicrons.
The “brake” is not applied immediately. The
maximum efficiency of the far red energy occurs
a little more than an hour after the plant is ex-
posed to the formative wavelengths, Dr. William
Klein, another Smithsonian scientist, has found.
The implication is that the action is an inter-
ference with the development process by acting
on some product the formation of which is
initiated by the shorter red wavelengths. The
experiments have been carried out with seedlings
of beans.
In other experiments by Dr. Withrow and Dr.
C. C. Moh, at the Radiation and Organisms
laboratory, it was found that damage to plants
from X-ray exposure—insofar as this results in
breaking the bundle of genes, or units of heredity
—can be increased from 380 to 50 percent by
previous exposure to about the same wave band
of far red light that reverses the formative proc-
ess. On the other hand, the increase in damage is
nullified if the X-ray exposure is followed by
exposure to the red wave band.
Breaking of the chromosomes, or strings of
genes, is one of the first evidences of damage to
living organisms by exposure to ionizing radia-
tion. This breaking is responsible for some of the
adverse hereditary effects concerning which there
has been a great deal of publicity, because of
possible effects of the atomic bomb fall-out.
The Smithsonian experiments were carried
out with pollen of Tradescantia flowers and root
tips of beans where results are relatively easy to
determine. Work is now in process to determine
how the red and far red spectra exert their effects,
and how the results may be applied to altering
effects of ionizing radiation in higher animals
and men.
Marca 1957
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF VIRGINIA, 3 89
HERPETOLOGY .— Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, 3: The herpetofauna
of Accomac and Northampton Counties, Va. CtypE F. Reep, Baltimore, Md.
(Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received December 6, 1956)
The southernmost area of the Delmarva
Peninsula consists of two counties of Vir-
ginia, Accomac, the more northern, and
Northampton, the more southern. Both are
isolated from the mainland of Virginia by
the lower Chesapeake Bay.
The herpetofauna as well as the flora
indicates that these counties have had some
land connections in the past with south-
eastern Virginia. Many plants in this region
range from coastal Florida and Georgia,
northward through the Carolinas to south-
eastern Virginia, and then find their north-
ern limit on the Delmarva Peninsula; these
same plants are totally absent west of the
Chesapeake Bay in Maryland. Most notable
of the plants having the foresaid distribution
are: Baptisia alba, Callicarpa americana,
Smilax bona-vox, Zanthoxylum clava-herculrs,
Bignenia capreolata, Tillandsia usneoides,
Trillium pusillum var. virginianum, Smilax
laurifolia, Berchemia scandens, Vitis rotundi-
felia, Symplocos tinctoria, and Passiflera
incarnata. The herptiles having a similar
distribution from the south on Delmarva
are: Hyla cinerea (see Reed, Journ. Wash-
ington Acad. Sci. 46(10): 328-332. 1956),
Scaphiopus holbrooki (see Reed, Herpeto-
logica 12(4): 295. 1956), Eumeces laticeps,
Sceloporus undulatus hyacinthinus, Lygosoma
laterale, Diadophis punctatus punctatus,
Lampropeltis getulus getulus, Natrix erythro-
_ gaster (see Conant, Herpetologica 2(5):
83-86. 1943), Pseudemys rubriventris and
— Malaclemys terrapin.
On the other hand, Delmarva-Virginia is
. terrestrially attached firmly to the larger
land mass to the north, which in turn is
continuous with the Piedmont Region of
Maryland, Delaware and Pennsylvania.
As a result of this land continuity, many
Piedmont species of plants and animals have
taken up residence on the Delmarva Penin-
sula; both have migrated the whole length
of the peninsula, but it is interesting to note
_that both have become localized together.
About 150 species of Piedmont species of
plants are known from various areas on the
peninsula; these have been discussed in
detail in a botanical paper, The Piedmont
Flora of the Delmarva Peninsula, by the
author. The herpetofauna of the Delmarva
Peninsula has been annotated in detail in
Contribution 13 to the Herpetology of
Maryland and Delmarva, published by the
author. Most notable of the Piedmont
herpetofauna found in Accomac and North-
hampton Counties, Virgimia are: Bufo
terrestris americana, Diemictylus viridescens
viridescens, Eurycea bislineata bislineata,
and Haldea valerrae. Other Piedmont herp-
tiles found on Coastal Delmarva in other
Piedmont areas are: Hemidactylium scu-
tatum, Clemmys insculpta, Natrix septem-
vittala, Desmegnathus fuscus — fuscus,
Pseudotriton ruber ruber, Rana sylvatica
sylvatica, Storeria dekayi dekayi, Storeria o.
occipttomaculata. Many of these Piedmont
herptiles have also been collected in South-
ern Maryland and on Northern Neck,
Virginia (see Reed, Journ. Washington Acad.
Sci. 47(1). 1957).
There are 38 species of herptiles definitely
known from Accomac and Northampton
Counties, Virginia. Four of these species are
Piedmont in distribution otherwise and are
quite removed from the nearest next area of
distribution. Many of the species show
definite affiliations with species of more
southern distributions.
In addition to the papers mentioned
above, the following articles provide pub-
lished records of herptiles from Accomac
and Northampton Counties. In the following
annotated check list of the herptiles for
these two counties of Virginia, these publica-
tions will be referred to by date only. Dunn,
KE. R. (A preliminary list of the reptiles and
amphibians of Virginia), Copeia 1918, no.
93: 16-27. Brady, M-. K. (Notes on the
Herpetology of Hog Island (Va.)), Copeia
1925, no. 136: 110-111. Fowler, H. W.
90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
(Records of amphibians and reptiles from
Virginia), Copeia 1925, no. 146: 65-67.
Conant, Roger (An annotated check list of
the amphibians and reptiles of the Del-
Mar-Va Peninsula), Publ. Soc. Nat. Hist.
Delaware, pp. 1-8. 1945.
The specimens in the United States
National Museum have been seen and
records for those specimens are cited below.
I wish to thank Dr. Doris M. Cochran for
allowing me to study these specimens. New
or additional records have been obtained
by the author in his many trips to this region
in the past five years. These are also cited
below along with citations of the records
previously published by other responsible
herpetologists.
1. Scaphiopus holbrooki holbrooki (Harlan):
Spadefoot toad. Accomac Country: Conant,
1945; Reed, Herpetologica 12(4): 295. 1956.
2. Bufo woodhouser fowlert Hinckley: Fowler’s
toad. Accomac Country: Chincoteague, Fowler,
1925; Wachaprague. July 9, 1956, Reed 1143-48;
Chincoteague Island (U.S.N.M. 61733-41).
NorrHAmptTon County: north of Cape Charles,
Oct. 22, 1955, Reed 1059; Smith Island (U.S.N.M.
40227-41); Accomac AND NorTHAMPTON CoUN-
tims: Dunn, 1918; Conant, 1945.
3. Bufo terrestris americanus Holbrook: Ameri-
can toad. Accomac Country: Conant, 1945,
northern part of county. NorTHAMPTON County:
Hog Island, Brady, 1925.
4. Acris gryllus gryllus (LeConte) and A. g.
crepittans Baird: Cricket frogs. AccomMac County:
Dunn, 1918; Locustville, Fowler, 1945; Conant,
1945. Norruampron County: Conant, 1945.
5. Hyla cinerea (Schneider): Green tree frog.
Accomac Country: 2 miles south of Oak Hall,
July 9, 1956, Reed 1107. See Reed, Jour. Wash-
ington Acad. Sei. 46(10): 8328-832. 1956. Norrx-
AMPTON County: Conant, 1945.
6. Hyla crucifer crucifer Wied: Spring peeper.
AccoMac AND NORTHAMPTON CouNTIbs: Conant,
1945.
7. Hyla versicolor versicolor LeConte: Common
tree frog. Accomac County: Wachaprague,
July 9, 1956, Reed 1136-1142; 2 miles south of
Oak Hall, July 9, 1956, Reed 1108. Norrx-
AMPTON County: Conant, 1945.
8. Pseudacris nigrita feriarum (Baird): Upland
chorus frog. AccomMac AND NORTHAMPTON CouN-
pins: Conant, 1945, as P. n. triseriata (Wied).
9. Rana catesbeiana Shaw: Bullfrog. Accomac
Country: Dunn, 1918; Locustville, Fowler,
1925; Conant, 1945.
10. Rana clamitans Latreille: Green frog.
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 47, NO. 3
Accomac County: Dunn, 1918; Wallops Island
and Locustville, Fowler, 1925; Accomac and
NortTHAMPTON Counties: Conant, 1945.
11. Rana pipiens pipiens Schreber: Leopard
frog. Accomac Country: Chincoteague and
Assateague, Fowler, 1925; Accomac anp NorvtH-
AMPTON CounTiIbs: Dunn, 1918; Conant, 1945.
12. Diemictylus viridescens viridescens (Raf-
inesque): Newt or eft. NorrHampron County:
Cape Charles, Conant, 1945.
13. Plethodon cinereus cinereus (Green): Red-
back or lead-back salamander. Accomac County:
Conant, 1945; woods near Silva, October 23,
1955, Reed 1060; under log south of Wattsville,
April 22, 1956, Reed 1035-36.
14. Hurycea bislineata bislineata (Green):
Two-lined salamander, NorrHampron County:
Eastville, Conant, 1945.
15. Sceloporus undulatus hyacinthinus (Green) :
Fence swift. Accomac Country: Wattsville,
summer 1953, Reed; 6 miles north of Accomac
(U.'S.N.M. 129523). Norraampron County:
Dunn, 1918; common on sands and in woods near
Kiptopeke, August 1955, Reed. AccomMAc AND
NORTHAMPTON Counties: Conant, 1945.
16. Lygosoma laterale (Say): Little brown
skink. Accomac Country: Woods near Silva on
road to Sinnickson, April 22, 1956, Reed; woods
's mile east of Wattsville, female with egg,
June 5, 1955, Reed 1017. NorrHamMpron County:
Dunn, 1918; Smith Island (U.S.N.M.).
17. Natrix sipedon sipedon (Linnaeus): Com-
mon water snake. Accomac County: Locustville,
Wallops Island, Fowler, 1925. NorrHampron
Country: Hog Island, Brady, 1925. Accomac
AND NorrHampron Countries: Dunn, 1918;
Conant, 1945.
18. Thamnophis sauritus sauritus (Linnaeus):
HKastern ribbon snake. NorrHamMpron County:
Dunn, 1918; Conant, 1945.
19. Haldea valeriae valeriae (Baird and Girard):
Eastern ground snake. Accomac County:
Woods near Silva, April 22, 1956, Reed 1037.
NortHAMPTON County: Dunn, 1918; Cobb’s
Island and Hog Island, Conant, 1945; Hog Island,
Fowler, 1925.
20. Heterodon platyrhinos platyrhinos Latreille:
Hog-nosed snake. Accomac County: Locustville,
Assateague, Wallops Island, Fowler, 1925.
NortHampton County: Hog Island, Brady,
1925; Accomac anp NortTHAMPTON COUNTIES:
Dunn, 1918; Conant, 1945.
21. Diadophis punctatus punctatus (Linnaeus) :
Ring-necked snake. Accomac County: Chinco-
teague Island (U.S.N.M. 107667); Conant,
Bull. Chicago Acad. Sci. 7(10): 4738-482. 1946.
22. Coluber constrictor constrictor Linnaeus:
Black racer. Accomac Country: Locustville,
Marcu 1957
Assateague, Wallops Island, Fowler, 1925;
Nortaampton County: Hog Island, Brady,
1925; AccoMac AND NORTHAMPTON COUNTIES:
Dunn, 1918; Conant, 1945.
23. Opheodrys aestivus (Linnaeus): Rough
ereen snake. Accomac Country: Locustville,
Wallops Island, Fowler, 1925. NorrHampron
County: Hog Island, Brady, 1925; Accomac
AND NORTHAMPTON CouNTIES: Dunn, 1918;
Smiths Island, Conant, 1945.
24. Elaphe obsoleta obsoleta (Say): Pilot black
snake. NorTHAMPTON County: Conant, 1945.
25. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linnaeus):
Kang snake. Accomac AnD NORTHAMPTON
Counties: Cape Charles. Conant, 1945.
26. Lampropeltis doliata temporalis Cope:
Coastal Plain milk snake. Accomac County:
Locustville, Wallops Island, Fowler, 1925.
27. Ancistrodon contortrix mokeson Daudin:
Copperhead. Accomac County: !3 mile north
of Cypress Branch on road to Onancock, July
1955. Illustrated in Onancock newspaper.
28. Chelydra serpentina serpentina (Linnaeus):
Snapping turtle. Accomac Country: Locustville
and Chincoteague, Fowler, 1925; Dunn, 1918.
NortHampton County: Hog Island, Brady,
1925. AccomMac AND NORTHAMPTON COUNTIES:
Conant, 1945.
29. Kinosternon subrubrum subrubrum (La-
cordane): Mud turtle. Accomac County: Locust-
ville, Chincoteague, Wallops Island, Fowler,
1925: Norraampron County: Hog Island,
Brady, 1925 (U.S.N.M. 67412-7 and 73256-9)-,
Smiths Island (U.S.N.M. 99029 and 40225-6).
AccomMac AND NorTHAMPTON Countries: Dunn,
1918; Conant, 1945.
30. Clemmys guttata (Schneider): Spotted
turtle. Accomac County: in pitcherplant bog
near Wattsville, June 5, 1955, Reed 1016; Chin-
coteague, Fowler, 1925; Dunn, 1918. Norrn-
AMPTON County: Hog Island, Brady. (U.S.N.M.
73253-5). Accomac AND NorTHAMPTON CouN-
TIES: Conant, 1945.
31. Terrapene carolina carolina
Box turtle. Accomac County:
(Linnaeus):
Woods near
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF VIRGINIA, 3 91
Wattsville, June 5, 1955, Reed; Dunn, 1918.
Accomac AND NORTHAMPTON CountiIEs: Conant,
1945.
32. Malaclemys terrapin terrapin (Schoepff):
Diamondback turtle. Accomac snp Norru-
AMPTON CouNntTIES: Conant, 1945. Norrs-
AMPTON County and Chesapeake Bay: Hog
Island, Brady, 1925; Dunn, 1918. (Sometimes
called M. centrata concentrica.)
33. Chrysemys picta picta (Schneider): Painted
turtle. Accomac County: Dunn, 1918; Locust-
ville and Chincoteague, Fowler, 1925. Norru-
AMPTON County: Conant, 1945.
34. Pseudemys rubrwentris rubriventris (Le-
Conte): Red-bellied terrapin. Accomac County:
Dunn, 1918.
35. Chelonia mydas mydas (Linnaeus): Atlantic
green turtle. NorrHampron Country: Hog
Island (stranded on beach), Brady, 1925; mouth
of Chesapeake Bay, January 25, 1893, J. A.
Bully (U.S.N.M. 51212).
36. Caretta caretta caretta (Linnaeus): Logger-
head. NorrHampron County: “Large numbers
caught around Hog Island,” Brady, 1925;
Chesapeake Bay near Great Wicomico Light
House, June 10, 1956, Capt. W. J. Biddlecomb,
three specimens caught, one donated by Dr.
Clyde F. Reed to the United States National
Museum (no. 137572); two other specimens
studied and let go.
37. Dermochelys coriacea coriacea (Linnaeus):
Leatherback turtle. Chesapeake Bay off Great
Wicomico Light House, May—June, 1952, Capt.
W. J. Biddlecomb. Specimen illustrated in the
Richmond News Leader, June 7, 1952, 700 lbs.,
7 ft. long, 8 ft. flipper spread, Reed, Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1). 1957. Accomac
County: Parramore Island (fF. M. Uhler);
McCauley (The Reptiles of Maryland, 1945);
Chesapeake Bay (U.S.N.M. 029492, bones).
38. Lepidochelys (olivacea) kempi (Garman):
Atlantic ridley. Chesapeake Bay off Great Wi-
comico Light House, June 10, 1956, Capt. W.
J. Biddlecomb, specimen donated by Dr. Clyde
F. Reed to the United States National Museum
(no. 1387573).
a
The basis of all knowledge is experiment; the very essence of experiments is
exactness; and exactness can be obtained only by precise measurements.—J. T.
SPRAGUE.
92 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 3
THE AUSTRALOPITHECINES
The major gap between man and his apelike
progenitors is bridged by the astoundingly man-
like called australopithecines that
flourished in South Africa about a million years
ago, it is claimed by Dr. Raymond A. Dart of
the University of Witwatersrand, Johannesburg,
in the Annual Report of the Smithsonian In-
stitution recently issued. Dr. Dart has been one
of the major workers in this field since the dis-
covery of the African man-ape skeletal remains a
little more than a decade ago. More than a
hundred specimens have been found.
These australopithecines, Dr. Dart points out,
creatures
)
had “almost human” bodies and brains. They
walked erect in human fashion. They improvised
and used tools and weapons. Probably, however,
they did not have the human faculty of speech.
Their brains, as determined from skull capacities,
fill the gap between the true apes, such as modern
gorilla and chimpanzee, and protohumans, such
as the grotesque Neanderthalers of ice age Europe.
Dr. Dart says:
The apparent gap between living apes and
living sapient men has been completely bridged by
overlapping australopithecine, pithecanthropine
{the Java ape-man], and neanderthaline phases of
human development. Nothing illustrates this
better than brain volume. Although living men
generally have fairly large brains, they vary in
volume from 790 to 2,350 ec. In other words, a
person can still be called a sapient man even when
his brain is only one-third the size of his fellows.
The living apes’ brains, however, vary in volume
to a relatively far greater degree: from 87 to 685
ec. ... Indeed the gap in brain volume between
the smallest brained gibbons and the largest
brained gorillas is nearly 600 ec., while the gap
between the biggest gorilla’s brain and the
smallest known sapient man’s brain is only 105
ec. The gorilla should be more insulted to have
his brain compared to that of a gibbon than we
should be to have the human brain compared with
that of a gorilla. The australopithecine skull
capacity varies...from 400 to 1,000 cc.; the
pithecanthropine-sinanthropine skull capacity
_. varies from 750 to 1,250 ec.; and the neander-
thaline .... from 1,250 to 1,600 cc. Therefore, the
range of skull capacity in living man overlaps not
only that of the extinct neanderthaline and pithe-
canthropine races of man but even that of some
members of the australopithecine race.
We know that P7zthecanthropus was a primitive
man, although his brain volume in some cases
was 750 cc., i.e., only 65 ec. bigger than a gorilla’s.
...We know, of course, that there are today
and always have been some people in every human
race, whether European, Mongolian, or Negro,
who are Homo sapiens even though their skulls
fail to exceed 500 cc. in volume. Nowadays we
hide such individuals in asylums and eall them
abnormal or microcephalic idiots; but that does
not change their sapient human ancestry; nor does
it prevent them from living and speaking or acting
like the sapient human beings they are; or learning
to do anything that a very primitive man with a
similar brain content, like Awstralopithecus, 1s
likely to have been able to do.
Brain size, Dr. Dart admits, does not neces-
sarily parallel intellectual ability. Investigations
during the past few years in one of the major
australopithecine sites, the Makapansgat Valley
about 200 miles north of Johannesburg, have
shown quite clearly that the creatures were
adapters and thinkers.
A major distinction between man and lower
animals has been the manufacture and use of
tools by humans. Hitherto it has been assumed
that the earliest artifacts were of crudely fash-
ioned stone. The australopithecines, however,
used the teeth and bones of the hyenas and other
animals upon which they preyed. Out of these
they made clubs, saws, axes, hammers, and many
other contrivances essential to their hunting mode
of life. Says Dr. Dart:
These extinct australopithecines had brains
about twice as big as those of chimpanzees; more
important, they were not semi-erect creatures
that built nests of broken branches in the tops of
trees like chimpanzees, where they chattered and
munched shoots of leaves and fruit. Australopi-
thecines greatly exceeded chimpanzees and
gorillas in the use of tools because, along with
bigger brains, they had hip bones and a pelvis,
thighs, legs, and feet that were in no sense apelike.
Their trunk and lower limb bones and muscles
were just as human as those in the torso and hips,
buttocks and thighs, legs, and feet of Pygmies or
Bushmen. They did not spend their lives clamber-
ing in trees or swinging from branches, nor did
they scamper over the rocks on all fours like
baboons; they strode and raced across the veld
like men. They did not lollop along supporting a
great part of their body weight on their knuckles
like chimpanzees and gorillas, when they are on
the ground; they marched on their heels and their
arms swung free, and customarily they carried in
their hands weapons, just as all human beings
have carried them since they became upright.
Their weapons were not fashioned of stones—
they were crude, unshapen clubs, such as were
borne by Hercules. They flourished the jawbones
Marcy 1957
of prehistoric buffaloes, antelopes, zebras, and
giraffes, just as Sampson is reputed to have
wielded the jawbone of an ass to slay the
Philistines. They seized the back ends of antelope
skulls as handles and employed their double-
pronged horns as picks.... They slashed their
opponents with antelope hip bones and shoulder
blades; they struck them down with tibiae, thigh
bones, and upper arm bones. These long bones
made excellent bludgeons until their heads were
smashed to smithereens by use or their shafts were
broken. Then their sword-sharp shattered ends
were as formidable as stilettos. Thus armed with
SCENT LANGUAGE OF HONEY BEES 93
implements of bone and horn for striking and
thrusting, and tusks of giraffes, baboons, wild
bears, hyenas, or saber-toothed tigers for slashing
down or slitting open—these weapons torn from
the carcasses of beasts slain by themselves or other
carnivores—they were just as competent hunters
as human beings...
were so big that ....I was at first misled into
belheving that only human beings of advanced
intelligence could have been responsible for such
manlike hunting work as the bones revealed.
SEO
SCENT LANGUAGE OF HONEY BEES
With honey bees it’s share and share alike. A
single sample of sugar or nectar brought into a
hive by a forager is participated in by all the
members of a family—all progeny of a single
queen—which may number more than 50,000
individuals. Thus all get essentially the same diet,
and all acquire a common odor by which they can
recognize one another. This odor constitutes a
“scent language,’ which is a basis of the ex-
tremely complex bee social life.
These observations, based on experiments with
radioactive sugar, are reported by Dr. Ronald
Ribbands, of Cambridge University, in the most
recent Annual Report of the Smithsonian
Institution.
In one of these experiments, Dr. Ribbands
says, “‘a marked bee is trained to collect sugar
solution from a small glass tube, and when radio-
active sugar is substituted the bee continues to
collect the radioactive syrup quite happily.
It returns to the hive, and what happens to the
labeled sugar can be followed quite easily. Every
bee that receives some can be spotted by means of
a geiger counter. By collecting a sample of bees
from the hive one can discover what proportion
of the colony has acquired some of the sugar. We
now know that one stomachful can be shared
among almost all the bees of a large colony. The
experiments indicate that this sharing is a random
affair. The sugar is passed on irrespective of the
recipient’s age or occupation.”
This building up of a colony odor through
universal sharing of the food supply enables mem-
bers of the colony to recognize each other. This
apparently makes little difference when food is
abundant, Dr. Ribbands points out, but becomes
of great importance in periods of scarcity.
At those times of the year [he says], when there
are insufficient flowers to provide all the bees with
food, they often try to steal the honey stored in
other colonies. Then the ability to recognize hive
mates and to distinguish them from other honey
bees will enable a colony to defend itself against
attempts at robbery.
However, the honey-bee community does not
defend itself by attacking every invader who does
not possess the community odor. Strangers are
attacked only under certain circumstances. In
order to investigate these circumstances, two
colonies of differently colored bees were placed
close together, with their entrances only 2 inches
apart, so that bees often went into the wrong
colony by mistake. When good supplies of nectar
were available, the intruders were allowed to enter
the strange colony, but when nectar was short the
strangers were attacked and thrown out, often
being killed in the process.
In further experiments, carried out at the end
of the season when no nectar could be collected,
bees from one of the two colonies were trained to
visit dishes filled with sugar solution, but no syrup
was made available to bees from the other colony.
When this happened I found that the colony whose
foragers were collecting syrup would tolerate
strangers from the other colony, although these
intruders went into it without food. On the other
hand, the colony that was not foraging attacked
strangers even when they were carrying full loads
of the rich sugar solution. This experiment showed
that the chance of successful entry was determined
by the behavior of the bees of the colony which the
intruder tried to enter. The fact that the robbing
occurs when foragers are not otherwise employed
and that colonies are mostly guarded by unem-
ployed foragers makes this result understandable.
The production of a common and distinctive
odor, which enables the colony to defend itself
members. of other honey-bee communities, is a
very important consequence of the habit of food-
sharing. Better sharing means better defense, and
so a greater likelihood that the community will be
able to survive and perpetuate its kind.
94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The habit plays the key rolein the system of
communication which enables the new forager to
learn about suitable crops, in that the new recruit
always received a sample of the crop the colony is
working. The first flight becomes a search for a
crop with a similar scent. The food-sharing habit
enables the worker bees in a colony to be apprised
of the presence of their queen. A substance derived
from her body is conveyed from bee to bee in the
vou. 47, No. 3
shared food, and in the event of any deficiency in
the substance they take steps to rear another
queen. In addition, it probably helps to ensure an
effective division of labor in the colony, which has
to be so integrated that a suitable proportion of
the worker population carries out each of the
various tasks necessary for maintenance of the
colony.
qm ——_.
REVERSAL OF PARITY LAW IN NUCLEAR PHYSICS
Recent low-temperature experiments at tbe
National Bureau of Standards have demon-
strated that the quantum mechanical law of
conservation of parity does not hold in the beta
decay of cobalt-60 nuclei. This result, together
with experiments on parity conservation m p-
meson decay at Columbia University’s Nevis
Cyclotron Laboratories, shatters a fundamental
concept of nuclear physics that has been uni-
versally accepted for the past 30 years. It thus
clears the way for a reconsideration of current
physical theories with the possibility of new, far-
reaching discoveries regarding the nature of
matter and the universe.
In particular, removal of the restrictions im-
posed by parity conservation promises to bring
order to the theoretical] chaos now existing in
regard to subatomic particles. It is generally
held that the new ‘elementary’ particles from
proton accelerators are manifestations of the
forces that bind the nucleus together. Thus, a
better understanding of these particles may well
lead to a more fundamental, unifying theory of
the nature of matter and energy.
The beta-decay experiments were carried out
by C. S. Wu of Columbia University and NBS
staff members Ernest Ambler, Raymond W.
Hayward, Dale D. Hoppes, and Ralph P.
Hudson. The Bureau’s low temperature labora-
tory was chosen for the experiments because of
its previous experience im low-temperature
alignment of atomic nuclei,’ an essential feature
of the beta-decay study.
1 For further details, see An experimental test
of parity conservation in beta decay, by C. 8. Wu,
EF. Ampuer, R. W. Haywarp, D. D. Horpgs, and
R. P. Hupson, Phys. Rev. (in press).
2 Low-temperature alignment of radioactive
nuclei, NBS Tech. News Bull. 40: 49. April 1956.
See also, AMBLER, E., Hupson, R. P., and TEMMER
G. M., Phys. Rev. 97: 1212. 1955; and 101: 1096.
1956.
Basically, parity conservation m quantum
mechanics means that two physical systems, one
of which is a mirror image of the other, must
behave in identical fashion except for the mirror
image effect. In other words, nature is symmetri-
cal and makes no fundamental distinction
between right- and left-handed rotations or
between the opposite sides of a subatomic par-
ticle. Thus, for example, two similar radioactive
particles spinning in opposite directions about the
same axis should emit the same intensity of radio-
activity in any given direction. Neither the right-
nor the left-handed rotation should be favored
by a greater intensity of emission so long as
parity is conserved.
Since 1925 physicists have accepted the
principle that parity is conserved in all types of
interactions. During the past few years, however,
phenomena have been described in high-energy
physics that could not be explained by existing
theories. Large accelerators such as_ the
Cosmotron and Bevatron have been producing
a variety of subatomic particles whose behavior
has defied systematic analysis. One such particle
is the K meson, a short-lived particle which the
proton beam ejects from atomic nuclei. Although
K mesons are alike in all significant ways, some
of them decay into three 7 mesons while others
decay into only two 7 mesons. Mathematically
this inconsistent behavior led to the suspicion
that an explanation might be found im a violation
of the principle of conservation of parity.
In the summer of 1956 T. D. Lee of Columbia
University and C. N. Yang of the Institute for
Advanced Study made a survey® of experimental
information on the question of parity. They
concluded that the evidence then existing neither
supported nor refuted parity conservation m the
3 Ler, T. D., and Yane, ©. N. Phys. Rev. 104:
254. 1956.
Marca 1957
so-called “weak interactions”, such as emission
of a beta particle or K-meson decay. They also
proposed a number of experiments on beta
decays and hyperon and meson decays that
would provide the necessary evidence for or
agaist parity conservation in weak interactions.
One of the proposed experiments involved meas-
uring the directional intensity of beta radiation
from oriented cobalt-60 nuclei. At the suggestion
of Professor Wu of Columbia, arrangements were
made to carry out this experiment in the Bureau’s
low temperature laboratory.
Polarization of the nuclei was achieved by cool
ing a paramagnetic crystal containing cobalt-60
to within 0.01°C. of absolute zero, and subjecting
it to a magnetic field. At this temperature the
effects of thermal agitation are so small that
atomic nuclei can line up in a given direction
within the crystal lattice when a magnetic field
is applied.
The magnetic polarity of the nucleus is_ deter-
mined by its direction of spin, and, under the
influence of a magnetic field, most of the cobalt-60
nuclei align themselves so that their spin axes are
parallel to the field.
As cobalt-60 is radioactive, its nuclei con-
tinuously emit beta and gamma rays. If parity is
conserved in such interactions, then the intensity
of the beta emission should be the same in either
direction along the axis of spin. This, of course,
was the critical question in the cobalt-60 experi-
ments. It was resolved by measuring the intensity
of beta emission in both these directions, i.e.,
along and against the field direction.
The cobalt-60 was located in a thin (0.002-inch)
surface layer of a single crystal of cerium mag-
nesium nitrate. The crystal was placed in an
evacuated flask which in turn was immersed in
liquid helium within a Dewar flask surrounded
by liquid nitrogen. An inductance coil on the
surface of the inner flash was used to measure
the temperature of the crystal in terms of its
magnetic susceptibility.
A major experimental problem was the loca-
tion of a radiation counter within the evacuated
flask for detection of beta particles. This problem
was solved by placing a thin anthracene crystal
inside the chamber to serve as a scintillation
counter. The anthracene crystal was located
about 2 cm above the cobalt-60 source. Scintilla-
tions caused by beta particles striking the crystal
were transmitted through a glass window and a
4-foot lucite rod acting as a light pipe to a photo-
REVERSAL OF PARITY LAW IN NUCLEAR PHYSICS 95
multiplier at the top of the flask. The resulting
pulses were counted on a 10-channel pulse-height
analyzer.
In addition to the beta counter within the
vacuum chamber, two sodium iodide gamma
scintillation counters were used externally to
measure the directional intensity of the more
penetrating gamma radiation. In this way the
investigators were able to determine the degree
of polarization of the cobalt-60 nuclei. The two
gamma counters were biased to accept only the
pulses from the photopeaks in order to dis-
criminate against pulses from Compton
scattering.
Cooling to the low temperature necessary for
nuclear alignment was accomplished by the
process of adiabatic demagnetization using a
magnetic field of about 23,000 oersteds. This
process involved successive magnetization and
demagnetization of the paramagnetic salt, cerium
magnesium nitrate, which supported the
cobalt-60 specimen. The heat produced by
magnetization was removed by the boiling off
of liquid helium in the surrounding dewar. The
specimen was then thermally isolated and upon
demagnetization the temperature fell to about
0.003°K.
A vertical solenoid was then raised around the
lower end of the outer dewar to provide a mag-
netic field for polarization of the cobalt-60 nuclei.
After the beta emission had been measured for
this condition, the direction of the magnetic field
was reversed, and the beta emission again
measured for nuclei polarized in the opposite
direction. It was found that the emission of beta
particles is greater in the direction opposite to
that of the nuclear spin. Thus, a spinning
cobalt-60 nucleus has a beta emission distribution
that is not the same as that of its mirror image.
This result unequivocally demonstrates that
parity is not conserved in the emission of beta
particles by cobalt-60.
According to the theoretical studies of Pro-
fessors Lee and Yang, the present experiment
indicates not only that conservation of parity is
violated in beta decay, but also that invariance
under charge conjugation is violated.4 This can
be interpreted to mean that when the algebraic
signs of. all electric charges in a physical system
are changed, the physical behavior of the system
may not always remain unaltered. Most re-
4 Ler, T. D., Orumer, REINHARD, and YANG,
C. N. Phys. Rev. (in press).
96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
cently, Lee and Yang have developed a new
theory for the neutrino as a result of the fore-
going work.°
5 Ler, T. D., and Yane, C. N. Phys. Rev. (in
press).
VOL. 47, No. 3
Further low-temperature studies of beta decay
are proceeding at the bureau. In this work it is
hoped that the invariance of time reversal—
changing the algebraic sign of time in time-space
equations—can be decided.
————————— ——
GUAYMI “MEDICINE”
“Medicine” is the supreme secret among the
Guaymi Indians of Panama. Healing practices
are guarded more zealously than the whereabouts
of gold, and even the most welcomed outsiders
are told nothing. This was the case with the
Reverend Ephraim §8. Alphonse, for many years
a Wesleyan Methodist missionary among these
people. However, after years of observation, Mr.
Alphonse is able to describe a few of the practices
in a grammar and vocabulary just published by
the Smithsonian Institution. The descriptions
will cause little enthusiasm among American
physicians, although some of the treatments may
be based on sound psychology.
For a pain in any part of the body a ‘pain
diversion” therapy is used by the Guaymi medi-
cinemen—that is, they relieve the suffering by
causing a more severe pain in the same part.
Toothache, for example, is treated by attaching
a nail to a bit of wood, heating it red hot, and
then briskly touching the parts around the
affected tooth nine or ten times. The same is
done for gallstones or pains in the liver or spleen.
When there is a swelling in which there is pus, the
red-hot nail is thrust in until the pus drains out.
The treatment is quite effective. ‘““The wound
generally heals in afew days,” Mr. Alphonse
observed. -
Certain sores, like those of yaws, are smoked.
A hole is dug in the ground, the nest of a colony
of wood termites is broken and put in, and a fire
is set. This gives off a heavy smoke which rises
for hours. An affected leg is held over this smoke
for a whole day while the patient lies prostrate.
The cure, Mr. Alphonse says, usually works so
far as the sore is concerned,
When a man dies his body is handled by
specially appointed persons, the ‘‘mubai.’’ The
body is wrapped in cloth and with it are placed
the weapons used in hunting. The bow and
arrows, clothes, and a drinking gourd of the dead
man are put on the grave. The mourners are sup-
posed to weep aloud every morning from 5 to 6
o’clock for nine days. When those who dig the
grave and bury the body return home they
change their clothes at the village watering
place, bathe, and wash their hands with a scented
concoction from a plant known as “culantro.”
Then they may return to their homes, but the
hut from which the body was taken is abandoned
for a long time.
If a snake bites a man, the missionary relates,
after various preliminary treatments a bush that
has the color of the snake is boiled, and the brew
is given the victim to drink until he recovers.
Before that, however, these preliminaries are
necessary:
The victim must not be touched or seen by
either a pregnant woman or her husband. If the
snake is killed the head is cut off and burned, and
the ashes are mixed with gunpowder. The patient
eats this mixture after swallowmg whole the
gall of the serpent. The wound is opened with a
knife, gunpowder is put in, and a match applied.
“To kill a really bad snake,’ Mr. Alphonse
relates, ‘tobacco is chewed to an odorous paste,
wrapped in a thin leaf, and put on the end of a
long stick. With this the snake is teased until
it snaps at the tobacco. Instantly it is paralyzed
and can be handled with the bare hands.”’
Knowledge of herbs is handed down from
father to son. When a medicineman dies, a rela-
tive whom he has instructed steps into his place
after a period of mourning. Eventually a case
comes up to test the skill of this relative. If he
effects a cure, his fame spread and he encourages
this with boasts of spiritual revelations. Once
both fear and confidence are inspired, his practice
is established.
Twin babies, Mr. Alphonse says, forebode evil
to their parents. The only way to offset this is
to cause one to die. This is usually done at birth,
but at times one of the babies is allowed slowly
to perish.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington ..........0sccccecsscc ence wees CuHESTER H. Pacu
Anthropological Society of Washington....................cece eee eee Prank M. Serzuer
eBvoloricalisociety: Of Washington: 6.5.60 <2 si so0 ccs sesicie orcs e tis eine HeRBERT FRIEDMAN
NETH G MESOCIETVNON WASHING COMG, «)-.acc0eisaiasisaiessie oajeisiaue ars date es se: CuHarues R. NAansER
Entomological Society of Washington........................... Cari F. W. Mursepuck
DUCULONA GE GeOPTAPNIC SOCIELY. : ecco sicce ccc ccc cece cecie ce tente neces ALEXANDER WETMORE
Gemocivcalasociehy<Ol Washington. 5..)...3¢4a54 asses eset veens nae Epwin T. McKnicur
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. Coz
Mlumbianetistorical Society. 422% oceteceeee qecae ee aceness ce esiv an seeees U.S. Granz, III
Eecalnsocieuycol Washington... a0). ae once tec e cic d saree chociias eke Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furpro Gravarr
Washineton society of Engineers.......0.... css cs pees ence ee senses Herspert G. Dorsry
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ ARNOLD H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers........ Howarp 8S. Bran
Helminthological Society of Washington......................... Donavp B. McMutuien
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHakEu J. Petczar, Jr.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Doveuas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorce A. Horrie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HerBert C. VacuEr
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..WiuLiam T. SwEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. FP. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CuHar.es 8. Ginman
CONTENTS
IcHtTHyoLocy.—A key to the species and subspecies of the cyprino-
dont genus Fundulus in the United States and Canada east of the
continentall divides JERRAMEID ROWING =] ace elie ene
ZooLoGcy.—Some exotic terrestrial isopods (Isopoda: Oniscoidea) from
New York State. Wiut114m B. MucHMORE.......%...2..5.9.205
Zootocy.—The systematics, affinities, and hosts of the one-tentacled,
commensal hydroid Monobrachium, with new distributional records.
CAD ETIVANDS 68 ccticc unos aia e els Mian Shona et Solan oe
HerPETOLOGy.—Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia, 3: The
herpetofauna of Accomac and Northampton Counties, Va. CLYDE
Page
69
78
84
89
VOLUME 47
April 1957
JOURNAL
|
OF SCIENCES
‘3
>
ceeneeee eccercen
a
ou
[ sifalie;is ij
| net c .
Slane!
went
Published Monthly by the
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
BX SHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
NUMBER 4
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CuesterR H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD BamMrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EstTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage -
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are pequesved to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. Reuper, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U.S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..................--2eeeeeees $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ _ _
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monoararu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’? by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................5.+-.-00- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete....................--------- $25.00
Single volumes, unbound)! eb i ektcayhin sc eley ayers scaseies ccctcoe guauee ee e 2.00
Singlewmumberst 22 echoes ee te ote eter yen ree Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
Aprit 1957
No. 4
MATHEMATICS.—A note on values of a quadratic form. M. Marcus,! National
Bureau of Standards and University of British Columbia. (Communicated
by O. Taussky-Todd.)
(Received March 13, 1957)
If A is an Hermitian n-square complex
matrix then the multiplicity ¢ of an eigen-
value \ is the dimension of the null-space
N(A) of AJ — A. N(A) is the set of vectors
z for which (AJ — A)x = 0. It is clear that
x e N(\) implies
(1) (Ax, x) =
and the maximum number of orthonormal
(o.n.) solutions in N(A) to the equation
(1) is of course t. However, if x ¢ N(A) then
it is still possible for (1) to be satisfied. The
problem then arises: for a in the field of
values of A determine the largest integer
p for which there exist p o.n. solutions x
of the equation
(2) (Me, B= &
and exhibit the vectors x satisfying (2).
We denote this maximal p by m(a). We
recall that the field of values of a matrix
A is the image of the unitsphere || x || = 1
under the mapping x — (Az, x). It is a
classical theorem of Hausdorff that the field
is convex and hence for an Hermitian matrix
it is the closed interval with endpoints the
largest and smallest eigenvalues (for an
account of this see, e.g. [4]).
Let A; > --- => X, be the eigenvalues of
A and let
pee |
Ch = ene dy = =
j=
1 This work was completed under a National
Research Council—National Bureau of Standards
Postdoctoral Research Associateship.
97
for k = 1, --- ,n. Let I; be the closed in-
terval [c, , d,| and let y, be the characteris-
tic function of J;,. Clearly from the ordering
of the d; it follows that cx < cry < diy <
d, . This implies that
Hiss EG Il 0. = I
Theorem 1.
ma) = py j(@).
Proof. We show first that for ae J; the
number m(a) > k by exhibiting a set of
k om. vectors z, for which (Az,, 2,) = a.
First we consider the case when the two sets
Oi wD Mig oro, Ws, LynGl Ws coe
Nn—k41 Overlap in A,,--- , Ax where s =
n—k-+ 1. Since A is Hermitian choose
an o.n. set of eigenvectors u; such that
’
Au; = AjU; q = 1, F098 1s
For te[0, 1] define the vectors
AG) =
1 ks os aca ae
Wik {x 0 Ung aE oe 2, 0’;
n—k ; |
IF Ys Ca P= Ie coo, Uf
i=
where @ is a primitive kth root of unity.
Now,
k(Z,(t),. 2m(t))
k—s k—s é
j=0 q=0
BBtay .
98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
s—l s—l
+t (= Pu >, rw)
j=l iil
n—k : n—K t
+ (1 — 2) 2 Pa prs, DD, oui]
j=l j=l
k—s ( : s—l 4
at (CL k—j) a t Aime 4)
> »
j=l
n—k
faloD ee
j=l
Sincen —k =s— 1
k(z, (0), Zm(t)) = 5 gta) an Pa gems
7=0)
(r—m) 4
-3
But r — m ¥ 0 (mod k) unless r =
thus (2-(t), 2m(t)) = drm. Now set
or(t) a (Az,(d), z,(t))
and compute that
y(t) = a A (es J) Wave ye r(k—j), us)
m and
s—l s—l
Joy ( GND vu)
j=l j=l
n—k
ap (1 <r t) i OP Nos Un—j+1 »
j=
n—k ’
De, a)
p=
1 k—s s—l
~ t{p m+ iD r»A+ 1-24)
K | 5=0 j=l
n—k
es devel .
j=l
Thus
Gil) a) een)
and we check that
OO) = Cp, Ox!) = de 3
thus for some fy € [0, 1]
QCD) EM) ah 0 i
VoL. 47, No. 4
and m(a) > k. On the other hand, suppose
ael, — Ing, and m(a) =k+ p, p= 1.
Then there exist k + p o.n. vectors x; for |)
which
(Ag; , xj) = ©&
Summing on 7 we have
k+p
d (Aa, a
i
A result of K. Fan [2] states that
k+ p
» (CAlavs ) x;)
j=l
is a point in J;,,. It follows that
Cri < Ck42 Sooo S Ck+p
k+p kt+ p
i Dp n—j+1 > CS aa =
JS j=)
aa di+-p SGwiom SS diya
and hence that aeJi4,. Now, in case
yj", Ay and) Aye eee eC Ommon
overlap, the situation is considerably |
simpler. Define
By) = ve » Ou; |
I. Vi id Huns
and again note that 2, ---
orthonormal set and also that
y(t) = (Az,(t), z,(t))
= Ltt (1 = t) Y dre oi
5 Gy WOBIN Lyn |
The argument then proceeds as above.
This completes the proof.
A set that arises often in computing ex- |
treme values of a function of Hermitian
quadratic forms is the convex hull H(A) of
the points PA where X = (Ai, °°: , An) and
P runs over all n-square permutation |
matrices (see [/], [3]). For ae; let f(a) |
be the largest p for which there exists a
point ae H(\) with p coordinates equal to
Aprit 1957
ea. Then Theorem 1 has the following
geometric interpretation:
Theorem 2.
l(a) = m(a).
Proof. Suppose m(a) = k and choose
mnaea.7 — |, --- , n for which
Al — (AG, c;)) 1a
i — ills Osteo 9 k
Axsp == a Pp => i dion n— k.
Then define K(\) to be the convex inter-
section of the half spaces
and the hyperplane
(4) Di = DL».
j= j=
It is known [3] that H(A) = K(). By the
cited result of Fan,
a = Canoes
and hence ae H(\). Thus (a) > k. On the
other hand suppose that for some b =
(b1, --- , bn) « H(), the point b has k + p
coordinates equal to a, p > 1. Then since
be K(\) it follows from [3; Theorem 4]
5 ALY GION)
MARCUS: VALUES OF QUADRATIC FORM 99
Nee
b, = SS | U,;
j=1
Now let V be unitary satisfying V*AV =
diag (A1, --- , An) = D, and let U, be the
rth row vector of U. Then
bp S (Us 5 Ue) = (WV Ales Us)
(AViUis Vit) =" Aekere).
wheres —n aGhr)—le wee OLMNsAaT core
set. Since b, = @ for k + p values of 7,
then m(a) > k + p. This contradiction
completes the proof.
We remark that Theorem 2 is easily re-
stated as follows: There exists a solution of
the system (3) and (4) with k coordinates
equal to a if and only uf
» v;(a) > k.
j=l
Actually, Dr. E. Haynsworth has pointed
out that this result can be obtained directly
from the system (3) and (4) and hence
by Horn’s result, Theorem 1 above follows.
However, this method does not exhibit
explicitly the vectors we have called 2,(¢).
REFERENCES
(1) Betiman, R., and Horrman, A. Ona theorem
of Ostrowski and Taussky. Arch. Math. 5:
123-127. 1954.
(2) Fan, K. On a@ theorem of Weyl concerning
eigenvalues of linear transformations I.
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sei. 35: 652-655. 1949.
(3) Horn, A. Doubly stochastic matrices and the
diagonal! of a rotation matrix. Amer. Journ.
i Eee Aa cert, Math. 76 (3): 620-630. 1954.
that ON Os where Qi | Wis ine (4) Parker, W. V. Sets of complex numbers
(U;;) = U is a unitary n-square matrix. associated with a matrix. Duke Math. Journ.
But then 15: 711-715. 1948.
SS
JUNIOR ACADEMY EXCURSION
Under the auspices of the Washington Junior
Academy of Sciences, 1,049 teen-agers came to
Philadelphia on Saturday, December 8, on a
special 17-car train, to spend a scientific day
visiting the Museum and the Planetarium of The
Franklin Institute and also the Academy of Natu-
ral Sciences. An overflow of 1,137 who could not
be accommodated on the first trip, followed the
same procedures on Saturday, December 15.
Railroad officials report this to be the largest
student group ever transported by rail from that
vicinity. The first such trip was taken from Wash-
ington in 1954, when 60 members of the Academy
and their sponsors came to Philadelphia. Last
year’s one-day trip to New York, numbering 560,
was no adequate preparation for the enthusiastic
response for this year’s trip to Philadelphia.—The
[Franklin] Institute News, Feb. 1957.
100
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 4
PHYSIOLOGY .—On the quantum efficiency of scotopic and photopic vision.’ R.
Criark Jongs, Research Laboratory, Polaroid Corporation, Cambridge,
Mass. (Communicated by A. M. Stone.)
(Received September 28, 1956
Before beginning the discussion of the
technical part of this material, I should
like to express my very sincere appreciation
to the Washington Academy of Sciences for
inviting me to take part in this symposium.
It is truly a privilege to share the platform
with such distinguished participants.
I should lke to begin with the ‘“‘quantum
efficiency of vision.’”’ When anyone uses this
term, the first thing that most people think
about is the quantum efficiency at the
threshold of vision of the dark-adapted eye.
This is the quantum efficiency that Dr.
Baumgardt was discussing during most of
his talk. It is the quantum efficiency that
Hecht talked about in his Ives’ Medal ad-
dress? in 1941.
But I am concerned now exclusively with
the quantum efficiency of the visual process
at adaptation levels that are above the dark-
adapted threshold. In fact, I shall refer to it
as a function of the adaptation level of the
eye. I am concerned also with adaptation
levels that cover a fairly wide range: from
one-millionth of a foot-lambert or milli-
lambert—they’re about the same—up to
1,000 foot-lamberts. The kind of quantum
efficiency I shall be talking about is that
which was given this name by Dr. Albert
Rose® of RCA.
The intuitive idea of quantum efficiency
is quite simple. We simply ask, at any given
adaptation level, what fraction of the light
that enters the eye effectively participates
in the visual process—that is to say, what
fraction effectively contributes to the re-
1 Paper presented before the Washington
Academy of Science on May 17, 1956, as a part
of a Symposium on the Quantum Relationships in
vision.
2 Hecut, Seria, The quantum relations of vision,
Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 32: 42-49. 1942.
3 Rosh, ALBERT, Sensitivity performance of the
human eye on an absolute scale, Journ. Opt. Soc.
Amer. 38: 196-208. 1948; A unified approach to the
performance of photographic film, television pickup
tubes, and the human eye, Journ. Soc. Mot. Pict.
Eng. 47: 273-294. 1946; Television pickup tubes
and the problem of vision, Adv. Electronics 1:
131-166. 1948.
sponse of the eye and brain combination.
For example, of every 100 photons that enter
the eye, perhaps only 10 are absorbed by the
visual pigments; perhaps only 5 participate
in the actual response of that rod or cone,
and perhaps only 2 actually succeed in get-
ting through the torturous nerve pathways
into the interpretive centers of the brain. If
the number be 2, then we should say that
the over-all quantum efficiency of vision is 2
percent. Now, as you seek the quantum effi
ciency defined in this way isa kind of utiliza-
tion factor that tells what fraction of the
light incident on the entrance pupil of the
eye is actually used in the over-all visual
process. Nothing more than just that should
be read into it.
The quantum efficiency I am _ talking
about has no necessary connection whatever
with the quantum efficiency of the photo-
chemical processes that go on in the receptor
cells. Because of this possible source of con-
fusion, some of my friends feel that the term
quantum efficiency is a bad term and that I
should use some other term, such as utiliza-
tion factor or quantum utilization factor.
But I am going to continue to use this term,
quantum efficiency, not only because I am
used to it and would find it difficult to
change, but also because it is already in the
literature in this sense.
Now it is an unfortunate fact, or perhaps
fortunate, that there is no direct way of
measuring the quantum efficiency of the
visual process. Perhaps some day, when we
know a lot more about the function of the eye
and the function of the nervous system, we
shall be able to make an educated guess as to
what the over-all efficiency is. But in the
meantime we are forced to make use of in-
direct methods. These consist of comparing
the actual performance of the eye with the
computed performance of an ideal image
evaluating system, either an ideal contrast
perceiving device or an ideal flicker perceiv-
ing device. We compare the computed per-
formance of an ideal device that makes use
Aprit 1957
of every incident quantum, with the actual
performance of the human eye.
My notes say that there are two kinds of
performance of the human eye that have
been studied for their relevance to the quan-
tum efficiency of vision. The first is contrast
perception and the second is flicker percep-
tion. And now after hearing Dr. Hartline’s
talk, I feel we have to add a third—the
procedures used by him. There’s a great deal
involved in what Dr. Hartline called the
quantum hypothesis. But one part of it—the
one that he used in discussing the way that
the slopes vary as the state of light adapta-
tion varies—this part of the quantum hy-
pothesis is that the quantum efficiency, as
I defined it, is a constant. I believe that you
will agree with that, Dr. Hartline.
(Dr. Hartline nodded assent.)
So far as I know the first suggestion that
quantum fluctuations (the statistics of the
quanta that reach the eve)—the first sugges-
tion that these quantum fluctuations might
limit the contrast perception of the eye—was
due to Barnes and Czerny,’ in 1932. They
mention the idea only qualitatively. The
idea was first given quantitative form, I
think, by De Vries® in 1948, but the full
power of the method awaited the classic
work of Rose in 1946 and 1948. So far as I
know there have been no published results
on the use of flicker perception to determine
the quantum efficiency of vision. I did a
little work on the subject in 1954, and
during the last few weeks I have made a few
more measurements.
Now, I should lke to present a more
explicit idea of just how one computes the
quantum efficiency from information on the
performance of the eye. In Table 1 we meas-
ure the ability of the eye to perceive contrast
in a small spot 14° in diameter with the
adapting field at a brightness of 49 of a
foot-lambert. Now, experimentally, ac-
cording to Blackwell’s results the eye can
see with 90 percent probability a contrast
of 2.2 percent—1.e., if this 14° spot is brighter
than the adapting field by 2.2 percent it can
* Barnes, R. B., anp Czerny, M., Observation
with the eye of a Schrot effect for photons, Zeitschr.
fiir Physik 79: 436-449. 1932.
> pE Vrigs, Hu., The quantwm character of light
and its bearing upon threshold of vision, the differ-
ential sensitivity and visual activity of the eye,
Physica 10: 553-564. 1943.
JONES—QUANTUM BFFICIENCY OF VISION
101
be seen by the average observer 90 percent
of the time. It is easy to compute that such
a source delivers to the eye 400,000 photons
every second, and information I will present
later will suggest that the integration time
of the eye is about 62 milliseconds at this
adaptation level. From this we conclude that
the number of photons that reach the eye
every integration period is about 25,000
under these conditions.
Let us now introduce the important and
very well-founded idea that the arrival of
each quantum is an independent event—that
is to say that its arrival time is statistically
independent of the arrival time of all the
other photons. It follows that the statistical
distribution of the number of photons that
arrive in successive integration periods is a
Poisson distribution. A Poisson distribution
has the important property that the root
mean square fluctuation in the number is
proportional to the square root of the num-
ber of events. Thus we find that the root
mean square fluctuation in successive inte-
gration periods is 158 photons, which is a
fluctuation of 0.635 percent.
Right here we reach the heart of the cal-
culation. Since the actual amount of light
that reaches the eye during successive
periods is varying by a root-mean-square
amplitude of about 0.6 percent, it is clear
that even an ideal device that makes use of
every one of these 400,000 photons per
second would be unable to discriminate a
contrast difference less than this amount.
These fluctuations constitute a kind of
noise, and it is a well-known fact that one
can not discriminate a signal that is less than
the root-mean-square amplitude of the noise.
I shall now make this assumption specifically
—1.e., I assume that if we did have an ideal
device with 100 percent quantum efficiency
then the contrast threshold of this ideal de-
vice would be about 0.6 percent. But now
you see experimentally, the contrast thresh-
old of the eye is not 0.6 percent but is 2.2
percent.
How can we understand this fact? We
can very easily understand this discrepancy
if we suppose that the eye does not have a
quantum efficiency of 100 percent but in-
stead has a lesser quantum efficiency. If we
assume provisionally, as in the lower part
of Table 1, that the quantum efficiency is
100 %
uJ
Oo
Z
<a
Zz
=
=
a
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Fig. 1.—Curve showing the luminance as a function of the time for a sinusoidally modulated target.
The index of modulation is 30 percent.
8 percent—i.e., that the eye makes use of 8
percent of these 400,000 photons every
second, then the number in each integration
period is about 2,000 and the square root of
this is about 44, which is 2.2 percent of this
aoa T al
= —
le ed
‘—
Zz
WwW
1S)
WW
Gray J
i} i
«x
WwW = =]
(a)
2
= fs OBSERVER 2l Bi
Zz
S ~ gt
_—
aq =
5
= oO °
a © 1S, Fite, i
S bs
= = © 150 FTL, I¢
o
150 FTL, 10°
20
5 10 20 50
FREQUENCY — CPS
™ Fie. 2.—The threshold modulation index in
percent plotted versus the modulation frequency
for three different combinations of adapting
luminance and target diameter, for one observer.
number. And so we see that if we do assume
that the number used is only 8 percent of
the number available we compute a perform-
ance of the eye which is in accord with the
experimental threshold. Thus by comparing
the performance of an ideal device with the
actual performance of the eye we find that
the eye behaves as though it uses effectively
8 percent of the incident light—that is, an
overall quantum efficiency of 8 percent under
these conditions.
We can also get at the quantum efficiency
of vision through flicker perception. But
first let me define the index of modulation
of a flickering source of light. Figure 1 shows
how the luminance varies with the time in a
sinusoidally modulated light source. In this
plot the luminance rises 30 percent above its
mean value and then falls to 30 percent be-
low. This amount we call the index of modu-
lation, or modulation index—ie., for a
source that follows that curve, the modula-
tion index is 30 percent. Obviously, the
maximum possible modulation index is 100
percent. Figure 2 shows some experimental
results obtained in 1954. Figure 2 is for a
young man whose age was 21. (We did not
have 21 observers!) The three curves in the
plot are for three different measuring condi-
tions. The top curve is for a 10° source with
a mean luminance of 150 foot-lamberts. This
is quite a big source and quite a high lumin-
VOL. 47, No. 4
APRIL 1957
ance. The middle curve is for a source
diameter of only 1° but still for 150 foot-
lamberts. And in the bottom curve the
source diameter is still 1°, but the luminance
has dropped to 1.5 foot-lamberts. The max-
imum of the top curve corresponds to a
threshold modulation index of only 0.6
percent and this occurs at a modulation
frequency of about 18 cycles.
The measurements we made in 1954 had a
very limited objective. At that time I was
interested merely in trying to get some
information on the band-width of the eye
and had no intention of trying to compute
quantum efficiency from the results. For
that reason the measurements were made
iS
+
= a
2
w
Si zs)
x
uw 4
a
=
~ =|
= {K) 4
=
2
2
=
<
a
=)
fa)
2 |
L
Peabo AA oy mms !
(o} 10 20
FREQUENCY IN cps
Fig. 3.—The threshold modulation index in
percent plotted versus the modulation frequency
for two target diameters at an adapting luminance
of 0.1 foot-lambert, for one observer.
JONES—QUANTUM EFFICIENCY OF VISION
103
with a very limited range of luminance and
with flicker targets of excessive angular
diameter.
In the past few weeks I have been making
a set of measurements over a wide range of
luminance, and with target angular diam-
eters in the range where I anticipated that
the quantum efficiency would be a max-
imum. Figure 3 shows a sample of my results.
The pair of curves was measured at an
adapting level of 145 foot-lambert, but with
a flicker spot luminance of 149 foot-lambert.
The upper curve is for a spot diameter of
15°, and the lower curve for a spot diameter
of 1<°. Both of the curves correspond to
about the same quantum efficiency. The
threshold indicated here corresponds to a
probability of detection of roughly 90 per-
cent.
We shall now compute the quantum
efficiency indicated by the upper curve. The
upper curve is the one we used to determine
the integration time of the eye at 49 foot-
lambert—this curve has a bandwidth of
about 8 cycles per second, which corresponds
to an integration time of about 62 milli-
seconds. Note also that the threshold modu-
lation index of the flat, low-frequency,
portion is about 1.54 percent: this corre-
sponds to an rms fluctuation of 1.09 percent.
Just as before, we compute in Table 2
the number of quanta that enter the eye
each second from the test spot of 14° diam-
eter, and find it to be 1,670,000 quanta per
second, which in the integration time of 62
milliseconds becomes 86,500, whose square
root is 294 photons, which corresponds to a
fluctuation of 0.34 percent.
Again, if the eye had a quantum efficiency
of 100 percent, we might expect that the
threshold modulation index would be 0.34
percent. But the experimental threshold is
much higher, having an rms value of 1.09
percent. This comparison corresponds to a
quantum efficiency of about 10 percent, and
to prove this we note that 10 percent of the
86,500 photons in an integration period is
8,650, whose square root is 93 photons,
which corresponds to 1.07 percent of the
15,600. Thus we have proved that the ob-
served flicker threshold corresponds to a
quantum efficiency of about 10 percent.
If we compare the threshold indicated by
104
TABLE 1
Source: 14°, 0.1 ft-lamb
Coo = 2.2 percent (exp)
R = 400,000 photons/see
N = 24,800 photons in 62 msec
AN = 158 photons = 0.64 percent of N
If Q = 8 percent, N = 1980 photons
AN = 44.5 photons = 2.2 percent of N
Coo = 2.2 percent
(cale for Q = 8 percent)
Blackwell’s contrast data in Table 1 with
the result indicated by my flicker data in
Table 2, we have 8 percent efficiency com-
pared with 10 percent. In this business, that
is very good agreement.
Now my 1956 flicker measurements are
still in a preliminary state. We still have a
number of calibration refinements to carry
out, and so far we have data on only one
observer, namely my right eye. But pre-
liminary as they are, they do serve to show
quite well the way that the bandwidth of
the eye varies with adaptation level.
TABLE 2
Source: 14°, 0.1 ft-lamb
msgo,rms = 1.09 percent (exp)
R = 1,670,000 photons/see
N = _ 86,500 photons in 62 msec
AN = 294 = 0.34 percent of NV
If Q = 10 percent, N = 8,650 photons
AN = 93 photons = 1.07 percent of NV
mg, rms = 1.07 percent
(cale for Q = 10 percent)
Figure 4 shows the frequency bandwidths
indicated by my frequency measurements.
The ordinate is the frequency bandwidth on
a logarithmic scale, and the abscissa is the
logarithm of the luminance in foot-lamberts.
You will note that the bandwidth varies
from 3.2 eps at very low luminances up to
16 eps at very high luminances. This corre-
sponds to a range of integration time from
156 milliseconds down to 31 milliseconds. At
one tenth of a foot-lambert you see from the
curve that the bandwidth is 8 cycles per
second, which corresponds to an integration
time of 62 milliseconds, as used in Tables
1 and 2.
Now let us go back to the computation
of the quantum efficiency from data on the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
performance of the eye. If we take the com-
putational procedure outlined in Tables 1
and 2 and put it in the form of equations,
we find the following equations:
Contrast Perception
= KA feps
Jo = 0.765 = 5 1
Oy. = 0.188 7 Gy BRAD CI ad
Flicker Perception
kA feps
Qo, = 1.53 (2)
2 D 2
jen M% Bett Diam S
These equations differ only in the numer-
ical constant and in the substitution of m
for C in the lower equation. In fact, 1f 15m?
= (?, the two equations are identical.
Let us look at one of these equations; the
upper one, for example. Q is the quantum
efficiency we are seeking. Af is the bandwidth
of the eye, and data on this are shown in
Figure 4. The angle a isthe angular diameter
of the spot, and C is the corresponding
threshold contrast. The performance of the
eye enters primarily through these two
factors, a and C. B is the adapting lumin-
ance, and D is the pupillary diameter. S is a
factor that corrects for the Stiles-Crawford
effect in the photopic range of luminance.
S is unity for the scotopic range. Very
adequate data on D and S are available in
Sc nitmiienis ila. l
10
vv
a
oO
2
a 6
Re
=
6
Om
a
@
2 = Al petal tse fata fairs
-6 -4 <2 fo) 2
LOG LUMINANCE
Fia. 4.—The effective bandwidth in cycles per
second plotted versus the adapting luminance in
foot-lamberts.
Aprit 1957
the literature; they both depend on the
adapting luminance, and plots of them will
be shown on a later slide.
The factor & I have left till last; / is the
threshold signal-to-noise ratio of the visual
process. This factor k is the most uncertain
factor in this equation, and is the weakest
link in our computation of the quantum
efficiency. Unfortunately, / occurs squared.
Rose assumed that / was 3, whereas I used
i equal to 1 in the computations carried out
in the earlier slides. So far, no adequate
measurement of the factor k have been
made; it is necessary to assume a plausible
value. In summary, the uncertainty in the
value of k is the chief weakness of the in-
direct method of evaluating the quantum
efficiency of vision.
These equations indicate that we must
have data on a and C to determine the
quantum efficiency by the first equation,
and we must have data on a and m to de-
termine the quantum efficieacy by the second
equation.
Fortunately, Blackwell® has provided us
with abundant data on the relation between
the target diameter a, the adapting luminance
B, and the contrast threshold Cg. Figure
5 shows Blackwell’s data in the form of the
product aC plotted against the target
diameter. The separate curves are for dif-
ferent values of the adapting luminance. The
square of this product enters downstairs in
the formula for the quantum efficiency.
Let us look specifically at the fifth curve
from the bottom. This curve is for a lumin-
ance of 149 foot-lambert. The aC product
for this curve has a minimum value of 0.55
degree-percent for a target diameter of 240°;
these were the numerical values we used in
Table 1. At this adapting level, the quantum
efficiency of vision is highest for a 249° tar-
get diameter, and is less for larger or smaller
targets.
The top curve is for a luminance 1,000
foot-lamberts, and it has its minimum for a
target diameter slightly more than 140°.
This diameter is just about the size of the
small ganglion cells mentioned by Dr. Baum-
gardt. In contrast with this, the lowest
6 BLACKWELL, H. R., Contrast thresholds of the
human eye, Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 36: 624-643.
1946.
JONES—QUANTUM EFFICIENCY OF VISION
105
curve, for a luminance of 10~° foot-lambert,
has its minimum value for a target diameter
of slightly over 1°, which is very close to the
70’ diameter of the giant ganglion cells. It
is interesting that the diameter of these two
cells appears so clearly in Blackwell’s raw
data on the performance of the eye.
From each of the separate curves, I have
picked off the minimum value of aC, and in
Figure 6 the minimum value of aC is plotted
versus the adapting luminance in the lower
curve. Unlike Figure 5, the aC product is
here plotted on a right-side-up logarithmic
scale.
In Figure 6 we meet one of the complex-
ities of the situation. Blackwell, in his report
on the work of the Tiffany Foundation, did
not present just one complete set of data
but rather three complete sets of data.
In the upper curve we have the results
given in Part I of Blackwell’s report. For
these data the subjects had 6 seconds to
determine in which of eight positions the
target was located. Six seconds, however,
is not long enough to yield a minimum con-
trast threshold; Blackwell remarks that not
even 60 seconds is long enough.
The lower curve in Figure 6 corresponds
to the data shown in Figure 5, from Part
III of the report, and for these data the
subjects had 15 seconds to determine merely
the presence or absence of the target. The
lower curve indicates lower contrast thresh-
olds, much lower in the photopic range.
The difference between the two curves corre-
sponds to a difference in quantum efficiency
by a factor of nearly 20.
The upper curve is the one used by Rose
in his publications, and as we shall see it
yields a quantum efficiency nearly independ-
ent of the adapting luminance. But the
upper curve does not correspond to mini-
mum thresholds, and it seems to me that
the lower curve is the one that should be
used to compute the quantum efficiency.
The six points indicated by open circles
in Figure 6 show the values of 0.7 of the
aperture diameter-threshold modulation in-
dex product as determined from the flicker
threshold measurements on my right eye.
The agreement with the lower curve is quite
striking, except for the point at the low
luminance of 10-° foot-lambert. The point
106
at 149 foot-lambert represents the informa-
tion used in the calculation in Table 2. The
open circles, representing flicker measure-
ments made by me, are in definite disagree-
ment with the upper curve but are in good
agreement with the lower curve.
In Figure 7 we have plots of the various
parameters that enter into Eq. (1) for the
quantum efficiency. We see a plot of the
bandwidth Af, of the luminance B, of the
D’S product, and the square of the aC prod-
uct, all plotted as a function of the luminance
B. The ordinate coordinate scale is different
for each of the four types of curves 1.e., the
relative position vertically of the various
curves has no significance. By comparing the
slopes of the various curves, you can see the
relative importance of the various factors in
contributing to changes in the quantum
efhciency as the adapting luminance is
changed. The two nearly horizontal curves
are the bandwidth, which varies only over
the range from 3.2 to 16 cps, and the square
of effective pupillary diameter, which varies
over the range from 64 to 3.5 square milli-
meters.
The two factors that do change by many
1000 FOOT - LAMBERTS
IN DEGREES-PERCENT
aC,,
T
(o0)
u
re)
a
ae
ro)
Lt
-4
B=10 i
100 me ad a
B= 10 va
L eee I ! ibis (ak
0.1 1.0
APERTURE DIAMETER a IN DEGREES
Fic. 5—The threshold diameter-contrast
product in degrees-percent plotted versus the
target diameter in degrees. The several curves
are for different adapting luminances. The curves
are based on Blackwell’s data.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
ee:
© = 0.707 am,, 5
IN DEGREE PERCENT
ia legal
one
1
8 POSITIONS
va 6 SECONDS
aCyy IN DEGREES-PERCENT
O°
en onll
1
15 SECONDS
UUs) Fs Tr Ces ee es Ta ALE f
———| i | ‘ l jae
-6 -4 -2 (e) 2 4
LOG LUMINANCE FOOT LAMBERTS
Fig. 6.—Curve showing the minimum threshold
diameter-contrast product at each adapting
luminance, plotted versus the adapting luminance.
The distinction between the two curves is ex-
plained in the text. The circles are 0.707 times the
threshold diameter-modulation index product
based on the writer’s flicker measurements.
orders of magnitude over the billion to one
range of adapting luminance are the square
of the aC product, and the luminance itself.
As you see these two factors have slopes
that are nearly equal and opposite so that,
roughly speaking, the variation in these two
factors tends to cancel out in the formula
(1) for the efficiency.
Figure 8 shows the quantum efficiency of
vision, as computed from the data shown in
Figure 7. The upper curve shows the quan-
tum efficiency computed from Blackwell’s
15 second data, whereas the middle curve
is computed from Blackwell’s 8 position,
six second data. The bottom curve is com-
puted using Rose’s assumption that the
bandwidth is 2.5 eps at all adaptation levels.
You will note that this bottom curve is
remarkably flat. Between 10~® and 1 foot-
Aprit 1957
lambert, the bottom curve varies less than
any of the factors that enter into the
formula.
But the flicker data show pretty clearly
that the bandwidths are greater than 2.5 cps,
particularly at photopic luminances, and the
15 second Blackwell data seem to me to be
the most relevant data for the purpose of
computing the quantum efficiency. Thus,
in my opinion, it is the top curve that is
most significant.
All these curves are computed with the
parameter k taken equal to unity. It seems
to me that this is the lowest value of / that
makes sense at all. It is hard to see how the
eye could detect a signal that has less ampli-
tude than the noise, particularly since the
eye can scarcely see this noise, if it can see
it at all.
As mentioned before, Rose used a much
larger value of k, a value that gave quantum
efficiencies is’-cer by a factor of ten. But
this larger value of / seems unacceptable
since the upper curve would then predict
unbelievably large values of quantum effi-
ciency—values very close to 100 percent.
JONES—QUANTUM EFFICIENCY OF VISION
107
Figure 8 is the chief result of this talk,
and I give it considerable attention. The
most striking thing about all of these three
curves is the fact that the quantum efficiency
varies so little over this very wide range of
adapting luminance.
Ever since Rose published his papers in
the late forties, workers in vision have been
impressed by the fact that the quantum
efficiency remains high at relatively high
luminance. Let us focus our attention on the
value indicated by the upper curve at ten
foot-lamberts. The value is 3.5 percent—
i.e., at this high luminance, one out of every
30 photons that enter the pupil of the eye
is actually contributing to the discrimination
of contrast. If the eye did not use this many,
the eye could not perform the contrast
discrimination that it actually can perform
at 10 foot-lamberts. Since the over-all utiliz-
ation factor is 3.5 percent, it follows that
the absorption factor of the visual pigments
must be at least this value, and because of
other imperfections of the eye, the absorp-
tion factor must be somewhat larger, perhaps
10 percent.
el (0) \ 2 3
LOG LUMINANCE
Fic. 7.—Four of the factors that occur in Ea: © plotted versus the adapting luminance in foot-
amberts.
108
8 POSITIONS
6 SECONDS
QUANTUM EFFICIENCY IN PERCENT
-6 aCe -3 -2
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
LOG LUMINANCE
Fic. 8.—The quantum efficiency of human vision in per cent plotted against the adapting luminance
in foot-lamberts. The upper curve is based on Blackwell’s ‘‘one position, 15 second”’ data and on the
bandwidths derived from the writer’s flicker measurements. The middle curve is based on Blackwell’s
“8 position, 6 second” data and the writer’s bandwidth data; the bottom curve is based on the same
Blackwell data, and on Rose’s assumption of a bandwidth that is independent of adapting luminance.
And now I join the two preceding speakers
in driving nails in the coffin of the classical
theory of dark adaptation. Let us note that
at an adapting level of 10 foot-lamberts, the
absolute threshold of the eye is more than
10,000 times the absolute threshold of a
well dark-adapted eye.’ If we should try to
explain this large shift in absolute threshold
by a corresponding change in the amount of
absorbing material, we would be in violent
conflict with the fact that the eye is actually
7 BLANCHARD, JULIAN, The brightness sensi-
bility of the retina, Phys. Rev. 11: 81-99. 1918.
absorbing about 10 percent of the incident
light. Thus the quantum efficiency data in
Fig. 8 preclude the possibility that lght
adaptation can be explained by any large
change in the absorption coefficient of the
retina, at least up 10 or 100 foot-lamberts.
If it has not already been clear, let me
emphasize that the main contribution to
what I have talked about has been made by
Albert Rose. This talk has primarily been
an exposition of Rose’s procedure, supple-
mented with some additional information
on the effective bandwidth of the eye that
has resulted from my flicker measurements.
CHIGGERS
What are ‘“‘chiggers’’—the irritating pests of
woods and brier patches that bore into the skins
of man and other animals and engorge themselves
with blood? They are only one stage in the life
cycle of a tiny, spiderlike mite that goes through
seven stages from egg to adult. They represent the
only stage that is parasitic. Later ones are active
and carnivorous, preying on insects and insect
eggs. This is pointed out by Charles E. Farrell, of
Vanderbilt University, in a systematic study of
one genus of these creatures, the Huschongastia,
common over much of North America, which has
just been published by the Smithsonian Institu-
tion.
Relatively little has been known about the
systematics of the pest in the past, but recently
there has been a considerable awakening of
interest. During World War II especially, there
-was an urgency to find out everything possible
about the mites supposedly of the chigger family,
which spread scrub typhus in the Pacific area.
This interest, Mr. Farrell points out, has spread
to other members of the group not necessarily
concerned with transmission of any malady.
Those mites which prey on man, however, always
are suspect. ¢
Aprit 1957
NARDONE: ELECTROGRAM OF TURTLE HEART
109
PHYSIOLOGY —The electrogram of the turtle heart in situ and after isolation.’
Rotanp M. Narpone, Catholic University of America.
(Received January 22, 1957)
The durability of the turtle heart makes it
suitable for a variety of physiological studies.
Eyen after isolation the heart exhibits rhyth-
mic beating for long periods of time. This
hardiness has prompted investigators to use
the isolated turtle heart in a variety of
studies including hypothermia (Adolph,
1951), contractility (Katzung and Farah,
1956), and bioelectricity (Churney et al.,
1948).
Izquierdo (1930) reported that excision
of the frog’s heart has a profound affect on
heart rate. The heart rate at first accelerates,
then decreases and finally, after approxi-
mately 25 minutes, reaches a steady state
which approaches the heart rate in stu. With
this in mind, it was decided to observe the
effect of isolation of the turtle heart on
heart rate. When preliminary studies indi-
cated that a sharp decline in rate immedi-
ately followed excision, it was decided to
pursue the study further and quantitatively
study the effect of excision on the compo-
nents of the electrogram.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
The turtle Pseudemys elegans was used
for this investigation. The specimens were
purchased from Carolina Biological Supply
Co. and divided in three groups. Group A,
consisting of seven turtles, was maintained
at 18°-22° C and served as a control. Group
B, consisting of 12 turtles, was refrigerated
at 3° C. for 1 month, while Group C (12
turtles) was exposed to short-term hypo-
thermia (colon temperature 4° C. for 2
minutes). The Group C specimens were then
rapidly rewarmed, and electrograms re-
corded, in situ and after isolation.
Electrograms (electrocardiograms __ re-
corded directly from the heart surface) were
1 This work was accomplished under contract
with the U.S. Air Force (* AF18(600)-364), Arctic
Aeromedical Laboratory, Alaska. The splendid
cooperation of Lt. Col. A. I. Karstens and his
staff is gratefully acknowledged. George Kolacs-
kovszky served as technical assistant and _per-
formed the tedious task of measuring the electro-
grams.
obtained as follows: The animals were
pithed, the carapace and pericardium re-
moved, and an exploring electrode placed
on the apex of the ventricle. The electrodes
were made of 26-gauge silver wire mounted
in glass tubing. The electrode tip was cov-
ered with blood-soaked cotton so that good
contact was affected with no damage to the
musculature. The indifferent electrode was
in contact with a seared portion of the
pubis.
This set-up is similar to the precordial
lead IVF used on human beings (Hein and
Reavis, 1950). The hearts were then isolated
and transferred to Petri dishes containing
amphibian Ringer’s solution (room temper-
ature) after the aortic trunk and the pre-
and postcaval veins were ligated. Amphibian
Ringer’s solution consists of NaCl 6.5 gm,
KCl 0.140 gm, CaCl, 0.120 gm, NaHCO;
0.200 gm, and H.O 1000 ml (pH 7.65). The
exploring electrode was, once again, placed
on the ventricle apex (which was not sub-
merged during recording), while the indif-
ferent electrode was 2-3 inches away im-
mersed in Ringer’s solution. Isolation and
recording was completed within two
minutes.
A Grass Instrument Co. model IIIB elec-
troencephalograph was used for recording
the electrograms. Electrograms were studied
and interpreted after standard measure-
ments of the records were obtained.
RESULTS
Heart rate-——The results are summarized
in Table 1. In all three groups there was a
decrease in the mean heart rate upon exci-
sion. In the control group, the heart rate of
five of the seven specimens decreased
markedly upon isolation; it remained con-
stant in the ether two preparations. The
change was from 34 to 23 beats/minute.
Group B had a mean heart rate of 37 (after
rewarming) which fell to 30 beats/minute
after isolation. Group C had a mean rate of
29 (after rewarming), which fell to 25 beats/
minute after isolation. Of the 31 specimens
110
studied, the heart rate decreased immedi-
ately after isolation in 23 cases; it remained
constant in four cases and increased in four
cases.
Electrogram in situu—The electrogram
shown in Fig. la is typical of those recorded
from the three groups. The P wave was up-
right in 17 specimens, diphasic in 7, negative
in 5, and undiscernible in 2 specimens
(Table 2). The upright QRS complex was in
24 instances, N-shaped, and slurred on the
upstroke. It was rounded in four cases and
notched in three.
The T wave was diphasic in all speci-
TaBLe 1.—Herart RATE aNp DIMENSIONS OF THE
ELECTROGRAM COMPONENTS RECORDED FROM
THREE Groups or TurtTLE Hearts, IN SITU
AND AFTER ISOLATION
Group A, control; Group B, long-term hypo-
thermia; Group C, short-term hypothermia.
Group A Group B Group C
In Iso- | In Tso- In Tso-
situ | lated} situ | lated | situ |lated
Duration P, see........ 0.06 | 0.10 | 0.08 | 0.09 | 0.09 | 0.09
Duration P-R segment,
MXhegcuhasdoospoccnsaal) Woes | Ose |LOsey [Ose |) sata" |} Wo283
Amplitude R, milli-
VOltstas: Aeron. 4.3 2.5 4.1 2.4 .0 3.1
Duration R, sec........| 0.09 | 0.09 | 0.09 | 0.07 | 0.13 | 0.11
Duration Q-T interval,
SCCueer = BAA oupertte PAS We tls) Weel | WeGsl |) alah tats 78
Duration of T, sec......| 0.45 | 0.80 63 | 0.93 | 0.74 | 0.85
Heart-rate, beats/min-
Ube A ans eet ee: : 34 23 37 30 29 25
TABLE 2—THE ELecrricaAL NATURE OF THE P AND
T WAVES OF THE ELECTROGRAM OF THE TURTLE
HEART IN SITU AND AFTER ISOLATION
Group A, control; Group B, long-term hypo-
thermia; Group C, short-term hypothermia.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
Group A Group B Group C
P AR 1p av T
Wave | Wave! Wave | Wave | Wave | Wave
i 3 4} 3 3 3 = 3 =} o S) 3
@) Sal 8 in| 8a) l-a| sas
§ io 3 o Si ill &
$1415) 4) 81/4) 8).919)3)8)8
NAMM TICS noose soa all yh eNO EO Hea Oe Te OW Oh OH it
Number —. 21/3/)0/0/]2/)10;0/1;);1)/9/0]0
Number a oy ea ls 2 aI a7 ronnie! 9) a8
Number +—.......;0/2/4/4/0]/0/]5/5/0/0] 3] 3
Number indiscern-
ibleveaeescewee 2/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0]0
Number changing
sign upon isola-
tion} Pema ee 3* 2 9 4 9 6
* This is only a minimum because 1 P wave was indiscernible
because of flutter.
OF SCIENCES — VOL. 47, NO. 4
mens. Twelve specimens had a +— type T
wave (4 Group A, 5 Group B, and 3 Group
C). The 19 —+ type T waves were dis-
tributed as follows: Group A, 3; Group B,
7; Group C, 9. In all other respects, the in
situ electrograms of the three groups were
similar.
Electrogram after isolation of heart—The
major effect of isolation of the heart on the
P wave was the change in direction of the
wave, especially in Groups B and C. These
results are summarized in Table 2. The
effect of isolation of the heart on the R wave
shape was evident in all groups especially
B and C. Jn situ, 24 specimens showed a
normal, slurred upstroke of the QRS com-
plex. After isolation, such a configuration
was evident in only 15 specimens (3 in Group
A, 8 in Group B, and 4 in Group C). The
main change was in the rounding or notching
of the upstroke of the QRS complex
(Fig. 1b).
Note (Table 1) that the heart rate decline
after isolation is due to changes in duration
of ecg components other than the R wave.
The P wave and Q-T interval increased in
duration, substantially. The amplitude of
the R wave was diminished.
DISCUSSION
Kisch (1949) studied the electrogram of
the univentricular heart (fish and bullfrog).
He found that the electrogram recorded
from the apex consisted of a high R and a
small 8 component. In these studies (77 situ)
the S wave was almost always very deep
(4 mv). Our studies on the electrogram of
Rana pipiens show greater variability of the
S wave than those recorded from the turtle.
The T wave of the turtle electrogram was
always diphasic. The electrograms recorded
by Kisch (1949) were recorded using a mod-
ified form of Wilson’s central terminal for
an indifferent electrode. They show an up-
right T wave in the frog electrogram and a
downward T wave in the fish electrogram.
Hein and Reavis (1950) report a downward
T wave for a V4 and D4 human electrogram.
Burch and Winsor (1949) report that the
human adults rarely, if ever, have a negative
lead 4V; furthermore, the T wave is rarely
notched or diphasic. The diphasic T wave
Aprit 1957
NARDONE: ELECTROGRAM OF TURTLE HEART
111
Fie. 1.—A, Typical electrogram with heart in situ; B, typical electrogram after isolation of the
heart.
suggests that the repolarization pattern in the
normal turtle is typical of systems with
tissues of diverse repolarization rates (Chur-
ney, et al., 1948). This view is supported by
the histological study of Robb (1953) which
shows that the turtle heart contains a variety
of muscular tissues.
Izquierdo (1930) maintains that the
change in the heart rate of the isolated frog
heart is due to the difference in composition
of the ionic solution as compared with blood.
These studies, while demonstrating a uni-
formity of response in three groups of turtles,
does not offer information relative to this
problem. What is of significance, however,
is the fact that the decrease in heart rate
accompanying isolation is attributable to
components of the electrogram other than
the QRS complex. If Izquierdo’s view is
correct, then it would be indicated that the
ventricle conducting system is far less sensi-
tive to changes in ionic composition than
are the auricular conducting system and
the factors responsible for repolarizarion—
at least under the conditions of this experi-
ment. The P wave was negative in 22 iso-
lated hearts and negative in only 3 hearts
m situ which suggests that after isolation,
the direction of depolarization may be
changed so that depolarization now proceeds
from the epicardial surface to the endocar-
dial surface instead of in the reverse direc-
tion. The R duration was not affected while
the duration of the Q-T interval and T wave
were greatly affected. The R wave ampli-
tude, however, did decrease after isolation
of the heart.
SUMMARY
A study of the heart rate and electrogram
of the turtle heart 7m s¢tu and after isolation,
was made. Isolation of the heart resulted in
a decrease in heart rate, change in direction
of the P wave, diminution of the R ampli-
tude, and increase in duration of the Q-T
interval. The duration of the R wave was
not affected. The T wave was almost always
diphasic, in situ and after isolation. Little
difference was noted when the electrograms
of control animals were compared to the
electrograms of turtles exposed to short-term
and long-term hypothermia.
LITERATURE CITED
Avoupu, EK. F. Amer. Journ. Physiol. 166: 92.
Burcu, G. E., and Winsor, T. A primer of
electrocardiography, ed. 2, p. 136. Philadelphia,
1949.
CuurnNeyY, L., ASHMAN, R., and Byer, E.
Journ. Physiol. 154: 241. 1948.
Hern, G. E., and Reavis, J. C. Circulation 1:
964. 1950.
IzqurerDo, J. J. Journ. Physiol. 68: 363. 1930.
Karzune, B., and Faran, A. Amer. Journ.
Physiol. 184: 557. 1956.
Kiscu, B. Exper. Med. Surg. 7: 55. 1949.
Ross, J. 8. Amer. Journ. Physiol. 172: 7. 1953.
Amer.
112
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
ZOOLOGY .—The new planktonic foraminiferal genus Tinophodella, and an emenda-
tion of Globigerinita Bronnimann. ALFRED R. Lorsuicu, Jr., and HELEN
TAPPAN, Smithsonian Institution.
(Received March 1, 1957)
In a study of Recent foraminiferal faunas,
specimens were obtained which at first ap-
peared to be referable to Globigerinita
naparimaensis Bronnimann. Further exam-
ination showed that two distinct types were
represented, and a restudy of Bronnimann’s
type specimens showed that both had been
included by him in G. naparimaensis. As
these types differ morphologically, the genus
Globigerinita Bronnimann is here restricted
to include only those species like the holo-
type of G. naparimaensis, the type species,
and a new generic name is proposed for those
which differ morphologically from that
species as thus restricted. Various earlier
writers have also separated specifically these
two morphologic types in Recent deposits.
Rhumbler (1909) described and illustrated
specimens like the holotype of G. napari-
maensis (= Globigerinita, s.s.) as the species
Globigerina lamellosa Terquem. As noted by
LeCalvez (1949, p. 38) and Parker (1954,
p. 476), Terquem’s species is quite unlike the
present form. Parker recorded this latter
type as Globigerina sp., stating that it was
similar in many respects to Globigerinita,
but probably “represents a new genus’’.
Apparently she considered as typical Globi-
gerinita, the paratypes there referred by
Bronnimann, and did not consider the holo-
type of that species, which is morphologic-
ally more like her Globigerina sp., although
specifically distinct.
Rhumbler (1909) recorded specimens sim-
ilar to the paratypes of G. naparimaensis
(not = Globigerinita, s.s.) as Globigerina
glutinata Egger, although Egger’s original
description and figures appear to represent a
distinct species of true Globigerina.
Phleger, Parker, and Pierson (1953, p. 16)
followed Rhumbler’s interpretation and re-
corded Globigerinita glutinata (Egger) as
widely distributed in the North Atlantic, as
did Parker (1954, p. 477), who recorded it
as present in some abundance in the north-
eastern Gulf of Mexico.
The genus Globigerinita is therefore here
emended and restricted, and the new generic
name Tinophodella is proposed to include
certain other forms that have been errone-
ously referred to Globigerinita.
Family ORBULINIDAE Schultze, 1854
Genus Globigerinita Bronnimann, 1951, emended
Globigerinita Bronnimann, Contr. Cushman
Found. Foram. Res. 2 (pt. 1): 18 (part). 1951.
Type species.—Globigerinita naparimaensis
Bronnimann, 1951. Fixed by original designation
and monotypy.
Test free, trochospiral, early chambers spheri-
cal to ovate, final chamber modified and extending
on the umbilical side across the umbilical region;
sutures depressed, radial; wall calcareous,
perforate, radial in structure, surface smooth or
hispid; primary aperture imteriomarginal and
umbilical, in the final stage this primary aperture
is covered by the modified final chamber which
extends across the umbilical region and is replaced
by one or more small arched supplementary
apertures at the umbilical margin of the final
chamber.
Remarks.—Globigerinita differs from Globigerina
@Orbigny in the presence of a modified final
chamber which extends on the umbilical side to
cover the earlier primary aperture and the
umbilicus. Tinophodella, new genus, differs in
having a distinct and separate supplementary
plate over the umbilicus, extending somewhat
along the sutures, with numerous accessory
apertures along all margins.
In addition to the type species, Globigerinita
naparimaensis Bronnimann, Globigerina quinque-
loba Natland, and the new species here described
as G. parkerae are referrable to this genus.
Range.—Miocene to Recent.
Globigerinita naparimaensis Bronnimann,
restricted
Globigerinita naparimaensis Bronnimann (part),
Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 2 (pt. 1):
18, text figs. 1, 2 (not figs. 3-14). 1951.
Not Globigerinita naparimaensis Bronnimann,
Conato, Riv. Ital. Pal. Strat. 60 (1): 30, pl. 3,
figs. 1-12. 1954. ‘
Aprit 1957
Remarks.—Bronnimann (1951, p. 18) originally
included in Globigerinita naparimaensis, a speci-
men with a modified final chamber and double
aperture on the umbilical side (the holotype) and
also other specimens (paratypes) which have a
distinct umbilical-sutural ‘‘supplementary”
chamber, with numerous accessory apertures
around its periphery. The two forms were present
in the same strata and were considered to be
conspecific. As, in other horizons, the planktonic
assemblage may include only one or the other
type, they appear to be distinct and are here
separated. The holotype of the present species
(Bronnimann, 1951, text figs. 1, 2) has a modified
final chamber which covers the Globigerina-like
aperture of the previous chamber, and itself has
two supplementary apertures at its umbilical
margin. The true characters are well shown in
Bronnimann’s original figures of the holotype,
and the species is here restricted to include only
morphologically similar specimens.
The paratypes figured by Bronnimann (1951,
text figs. 3-14) differ from the holotype in having
a distinct supplementary plate over the umbilical
and apertural region. This plate does not resemble
the true chambers as does the umbilically ex-
panded modified final chamber of true Globigert-
nita. These paratypes of G. naparimaensis are
referrable to the new genus and species, Tinopho-
della ambitacrena.
Types and occurrence.—Holotype (Cushman
Coll. 64182) from the Lengua formation, Globoro-
talia menardii zone, Miocene, Naparima area,
Trinidad, B. W. I. The species as here restricted
is known only from the Miocene of Trinidad.
Globigerinita parkerae Loeblich and Tappan, n. sp.
Figs. la-c
Globigerina lamellosa Terquem, Rhumbler (not
Terquem, 1882), Ergeb. Plankton-Exped.
Humboldt-Stift. 3: pl. 30, figs. 1-6. 1909.
Globigerina sp. F. Parker, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.
111 (10): 476. 1954.
Test free, tiny, trochospiral, compressed, sides
flattened, periphery rounded, peripheral outline
lobulate; chambers ovate to spherical, increasing
slowly in size, 5 to 7 in the final whorl, with
modified final chamber extending far onto the
umbilical side to completely cover the umbilical
region; sutures distinct, depressed, radial; wall
calcareous, finely perforate, surface finely spinose;
primary aperture in the early stages interio-
marginal and umbilical, but that of the modified
LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN—NEW FORAMINIFERAL GENUS
113
final chamber is multiple, consisting of small
arched supplementary openings around the
extended umbilical margin of the final chamber.
Greatest diameter of holotype 0.21 mm, thick-
ness 0.07 mm.
Remarks.—Globigerina lamellosa Terquem of
Rhumbler (1909, pl. 30, figs. 1-6) is undoubtedly
identical with the present species. However,
Terquem’s species was originally described from
the Lutetian (middle Eocene) of the Paris Basin.
The original illustration is poor and diagram-
matic, and could represent any coiled form. It was
described as having lamellar expansions from the
later chambers which cover the apertural region.
Le Calvez (1949, p. 38), stated that this species
is not a Globigerina, and the type specimen of
Terquem is in reality a Discorbis, analogous to
Rotalina coarctata Terquem or Rosalina propinqua
Terquem. She therefore considered (Le Calvez,
1949, p. 17) that G. lamellosa Terquem was a
synonym of Discorbis propinqua (Terquem).
Parker (1954) recorded this species as Gilo-
bigerina sp., although noting that it was similar to
Globigerinita. She stated that it probably repre-
sented a new genus. However, it is similar to the
holotype of Globigerinita naparimaensis Bronni-
mann having only a modified final chamber and
lacking the secondary umbilical plate of the
adult stage, such as is found in Tinophodella
ambitacrena, new species.
Globigerinita parkerae, new species, differs from
G. naparimaensis Bronnimann in being much
smaller, with more chambers per whorl, and these
are less closely appressed and show a more
gradual increase in size.
The present species differs from Globigerina
quinqueloba Natland in being much smaller, in
having more chambers in the final whorl and a
more gradual increase in chamber size, and more
numerous supplementary apertures in the final
chamber.
The specific name is in honor of Miss Frances
Parker, Scripps Institution of Oceanography,
La Jolla, Calif., in recognition of her work on
Recent foraminiferal faunas.
Types and occurrence.—Holotype (U.S.N.M.
P5897) from the Recent, eastern Gulf of Mexico,
lat. 29°04’ N., long. 85°49’ W., depth 183 meters.
Sample received from Frances Parker.
Tinophodella Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen.
Type species.—Tinophodella ambitacrena Loe-
blich and Tappan, n. sp.
114 JOURNAL OF THE
Derwation.—Teino, Gr., stretch, extend, spread
+ phos, phodos, Gr., blister + ella, diminutive.
Gender, feminine.
Test free, trochospiral; chambers spherical to
ovate; sutures depressed, radial; wall calcareous,
perforate, radial in structure, surface smooth,
pitted or hispid; primary aperture interio-
marginal, umbilical, in the final stage the aperture
is completely covered by an irregular plate which
covers the umbilicus and expands along the
earlier sutures, with numerous accessory aper-
tures along the margins of the umbilical plate,
both at the junction of the plate with the sutures
of earlier chambers, and along the contact with
the primary chambers.
Remarks.—This genus includes forms which
have in the past been variously referred to
Globigerina VOrbigny, Globigerinatella Cushman
and Stainforth and Globigerinita Bronnimann.
As here emended, Globigerinita is now restricted
to include only forms with a modified final
chamber with supplementary apertures and the
present genus differs in having a distinct umbilical
plate with numerous small accessory apertures
opening beneath its margin.
Globigerinoitta Bronnimann differs in having
supplementary apertures on the spiral side which
are also covered by small cover plates.
Range.—Miocene to Recent.
Tinophodella ambitacrena Loeblich and Tappan,
n. sp.
Figs. 2a-3¢
Globigerina glutinata Egger, Rhumbler (part,
not Egger, 1893), Ergeb. Plankton-Exped.
Humboldt-Stift. 3: 148, pl. 29, figs. 15, 18-20,
22, pl. 34, fig. 1 (not pl. 29, figs. 14, 16, 17, 21,
23-26, and not pl. 33, fig. 20). 1909.
Globigerinatella aff. <insueta Cushman and
Stainforth, Bronnimann, Contr. Cushman
Found. Foram. Res. 1: (pts. 3-4): 82, pl. 14,
fig. 11. 1950.
Globigerinita naparimaensis Bronnimann (part),
Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 2 (pt. 1):
18, text figs. 3-14 (not text figs. 1-2). 1951;
Conato, Riv. Ital. Paleon. Strat. 60 (1): 30,
pl. 3, figs. 1-12. 1954.
Globigerinita glutinata (Egger), Phleger, Parker,
and Pierson (part), Rept. Swedish Deep-Sea
Exped. 7 (1): 16, pl. 2, fig. 15 (not figs. 12-14).
1953; Parker, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 111 (10):
477. 1954.
Test free, inflated, low trochospiral, with
broadly rounded periphery; chambers inflated,
globular, increasing rapidly in size, early whorls
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
with 4 to 5 chambers per whorl, rapidly reducing
to 3 per whorl, which is most common in the
adult; sutures distinct, depressed, radial; wall
calcareous, finely perforate, surface finely spinose;
primary aperture interiomarginal, umbilical, in
the adult covered by a thin-walled umbilical
plate which extends along the sutural depression
over most of the umbilical side, and may even
extend slightly onto the spiral side, outer margin
of the umbilical plate with numerous accessory
apertures which lie against the primary chambers
and over the sutures as well, to open beneath the
umbilical plate.
Greatest diameter of holotype 0.35 mm, thick-
ness 0.25 mm.
Remarks.—The specific name is from the Latin
ambitus, circumference + crena, notch, rounded
projection. The name refers to the crenulated
appearance of the border of the umbilical plate,
caused by the accessory apertures.
Rhumbler (1909) referred this form to Glo-
bigerina glutinata Egger, but the latter species
appears to be a true Globigerina, and shows no
trace of a supplementary chamber on the umbili-
cal side. Rhumbler also included specimens of
Glotigerinoides under Egger’s species, but these
differ in having supplementary apertures on the
spiral side, as well as in lacking the umbilical
cover plate.
Phleger, Parker, and Pierson (1953) followed
Rhumbler’s interpretation of Egger’s species,
but placed it in the genus Globigerinita. They also
included specimens of a distinct species of
Globigerinoides under this name.
Bronnimann (1950) figures a specimen of the
present species as Globigerinatella aff. insueta
Cushman and Stainforth, and the following year
(1951) included it in the synonymy of Globiger-
inita naparimaensis. All figured paratypes of G.
naparimaensis belong to the present species, as
they differ in their apertural character from the
holotype. Other writers have also recorded the
present species as G. naparimaensis (i.e., Conato,
1954), but true G. naparimaensis is known only
from the Miocene of Trinidad, having a modified
final chamber, but no true cover plate.
The present species occurs in the Miocene of
Trinidad, Pliocene of Italy, and Recent of the
North and South Atlantic and the Gulf of Mexico.
Types and occurrence-—Holotype (U.S.N.M.
P5898) and figured paratype (U.S.N.M. P5899)
from the Recent, Albatross station D 2763, off
the east coast of Brazil, lat. 24°17'00” S., long.
Aprit 1957 LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN—NEW FORAMINIFERAL GENUS 115
Fig. 1.—Globigerinita parkerae Loeblich and Tappan, n. sp., holotype (U.S.N.M. P5897): a, Spiral
side, showing normal appearing final chamber; b, umbilical side, showing modification of the final
chamber, and extension over the umbilical-apertural region, and the numerous supplementary apertures
at its margin; c, edge view, showing compressed form. X 280.
Frias. 2, 3.—Tinophodella ambitacrena Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen., n. sp.: a, Spiral side; b, umbilical
side;c,edge. 2, Paratype (U.S.N.M. P5899), showing relatively small umbilical cover which is distinct
from the true chambers, and occupies the umbilical-sutural area. 3, Holotype (U.S.N.M. P5898), show-
ing extensive umbilical cover plate and distinctly crenulated margin, due to the numerous accessory
apertures. X 145.
Illustrations are shaded camera-lucida drawings by Patricia Isham, scientific illustrator, Smith-
sonian Institution.
116
42°48’30’"" W., depth 671 fathoms. Surface
temperature 75°F., bottom temperature 37.9°F.
Brown Globigerina ooze.
REFERENCES
BRONNIMANN, P. Occurrence and ontogeny of
Globigerinatella insueta Cushman and Stain-
forth from the Oligocene of Trinidad, B.W I.
Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 1: 80-
82, pls. 18, 14. 1950.
Globigerinita naparimaensis n. gen., n.
sp., from the Miocene of Trinidad, B.W.I.
Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 2: 16-
18. 1951.
Conato, V. Sulla presenza del genere Globigeri-
nita Bronnimann nel neogene italiano. Riv.
Ital. Pal. Strat. 60(1): 29-32, pl. 3. 1954.
Le Catvez, Y. Révision des foraminiferes Luté-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 4
tens du bassin de Paris. II. Rotaliidae et
famulles affines. Mém. Carte Géol. Dét. France:
1-54, pls. 1-6. 1949.
Natianp, M. L. New Species of Foraminifera
from off the west coast of North America and
from the later Tertiary of the Los Angeles Basin.
Bull. Scripps Inst. Ocean. Techn. Ser. 4: 137-
164, pls. 3-7. 1988.
Parker, F. L. Distribution of the Foraminifera
in the northeastern Gulf of Mexico. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. 111: 453-588, pls. 1-13. 1954.
Puuecer, F. B., Parker, F. L., and Pierson,
J. F. North Atlantic Foraminifera. Rept.
Swedish Deep Sea Exp. 7: Sed. Cores North
Atlantic Ocean. 1: 3-122, pls. 1-12. 1955.
RuumMBLER, L. Die Foraminiferen (Thalamo-
phoren) der Plankton-Expedition. Ergeb.
Plankton-Exped. Humboldt-Stift. 3: 1-331,
pls. 1-39. 1909.
WEIGHT OF METEORITE
The great shooting star that plunged to earth
thousands of years ago and dug the famous
Arizona Meteorite Crater weighed at least
12,000 tons (the size of an average house) and
approached from a direction slightly south of
west. Hitherto it has been estimated that the
giant meteorite weighed between 10,000 and
10,000,000 tons, and that it crashed to earth
from a point slightly west of north. These most
recent measures of weight and direction are
based on an on-the-spot study by scientists of
the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory
headed by Dr. John 8. Rinehart, assistant director
of the observatory.
Direction of the meteorite’s flight was deter-
mined by sampling earth over an 80-square-mile
area for tiny fragments of the meteorite. These
particles of metals were found distributed over a
symmetrical swath running nearly west to east
(actually 15° north of east). Samples were taken
every half mile in a square pattern, and sifted
by screen and magnetic separator. Particles
adhering to the magnet were all strongly mag-
netic and mainly in three categories: a meteoric
iron particle, a meteoric iron-oxide bit, and a
shiny particle probably volcanic.
From the area immediately surrounding the
crater—which is 4,100 feet in diameter and
about 600 feet deep—the scientists sampled
earth that contained a concentration of meteorite
particles. The weight of these particles, taking
into consideration the area over which they
were collected, constituted the basis for estimat-
ing the 12,000-ton weight of the meteorite.
Dr. Rinehart poimts out that a ballistics
estimate previously made determined that the
missile would have had to weigh 12,000 tons to
have made a crater of the dimensions of the one in
Arizona. His report on the survey states that
there is no evidence to indicate any sizable
portion of the meteorite lies under the floor of the
crater. The meteor apparently exploded on
impact, scattering into bits and chunks. The
larger pieces remain now as particles, and the
original smaller pieces have undoubtedly dis-
integrated through oxidization since the meteor
fell thousands of years ago. The time is estimated
variously at from 5000 to 50,000 years ago.
The true logic for this world is the calculus of probabilities, the only mathe-
matics for practical men.—M AaxwELL.
Aprit 1957
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. V
IIE
ENTOMOLOGY .—Type specimens of mosquitoes inthe United States National
Museum, V: The Sabethint (Diptera, Culicidae).1 ALAN Sronn, Entomology
Research Division, U.S. Departmentof Agriculture, and Kenneru L. Knieut,
Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, Department of the Navy.?
(Received February 12, 1957)
The introductory remarks in the first
paper of this series, particularly those on
early, possibly questionable holotypes, also
apply to this one. Following our treatment
of nominal taxa in each genus, we list those
in the collection based on unique speci-
mens or for which holotypes were clearly
designated.
Genus Limatus Theobald
Limatus cacophrades Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 52: 266. 1909.
This species was based upon 12 specimens col-
lected from a series by A. H. Jennings at Taber-
nilla, Canal Zone, Panama. Since only two speci-
mens are labeled as types in the collection, it is
impossible to tell which of the rest of the series
are syntypic. We select as lectotype the male,
bearing the labels “385.1/A. H. Jennings/Type
No. 12130 U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are not
mounted, but the larval and pupal skin of this
specimen are on a slide.
Limatus methysticus Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 266, 1909.
The two male and two female syntypes are in
the collection. We select as lectotype a male bear-
ing the labels “Port Limon, C. R./Fredk Knab
Collector/Type No. 12131 U.S.N.M./See Slide
No. 368/methysticus.” The terminalia are
mounted on slide no. 368.
Limatus hoffmani Root, 1927. Holotype, unique.
Genus Malaya Leicester
Since the generic name Malaya Leicester (Cul.
Malaya, p. 258, 1908) is earlier than Grahamia
Theobald, May 1909, or Harpagomyia de Mei-
1 Karlier papers of this series appeared in this
JOURNAL 45: 282-289. 1955; 46: 213-228, 276-280.
1956; 47: 42-59. 1957.
2 Studies upon which this paper is based were
conducted under an exchange of funds from the
Office of Naval Research (Biological Science
Division) to the Smithsonian Institution. The
opinions or assertions contained here are the
private ones of the writers and are not to be
construed as official or reflecting the views of the
Navy Department or the Naval Service at large.
jere, December 1909, and since it is not pre-
occupied by Malaia Heller, 1892, we adopt this
name in place of the generally used Harpagomyia.
Harpagomyia caeruleovittata Ludlow, 1911. Holo-
type, unique.
Genus Phoniomyia Theobald
Wyeomyia (Dodecamyia) incaudata Root, in
Dyar, Mosquitoes of the Americas: 54. 1928.
The original description is of the male, with no
statement as to the number of specimens, al-
though two collection dates are given. There is
only one specimen taken by Root in the collec-
tion. This male, which we select as lectotype, is
labeled “Rio, Brazil, April. 12, 1925 No. 66/Type
No. 44163 U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are
mounted on a slide. The date of collection agrees
with neither the February 15 nor May of the
original description, but since Root labeled the
slide as type, we think it should be accepted as
such. It is possible that the larva collected on
April 12 produced an adult on May 1.
Wyeomyia (Dodecamyia) pilicauda Root, in
Dyar, Mosquitoes of the Americas: 55. 1928.
The female and male were described by Root
and the larva by Dyar in the original publication.
The collection contains one original specimen,
a male, labeled ““P. das Caixas, Brazil, May 29,
1925, No. 95.2/Type No. 44164 U.S.N.M.” The
slide, which was labeled as type by Root, con-
tains the male terminalia and the larval and
pupal skins. The date and locality do not agree
with the original description, but we think it can
be assumed that the original “Rio de Janeiro”
refers to the state, and the date “June 7, 1925”
the date of emergence of the adult from a larva
collected on May 29. We select this single male
as lectotype.
Genus Sabethes Robineau-Desvoidy
Sabethes bipartipes Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 136. 1906.
The two female syntypes are in the collection.
We select as lectotype the better specimen. It
118
bears the labels ‘St. Domingo W. I. Aug./Aug.
Busck Collector/Type No. 9980 U.S.N.M./
Sabethes nitidus Theob.”
Sabethes identicus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 207. 1907.
This species was described from four specimens
from Tabernilla, Canal Zone, Panama, collected
by August Busck. One female bears the labels
“51.2/Tabernilla, Canal Zone, Panama/Collector
August Busck/Type No. 10851 U.S.N.M./
Sabethes identicus D. & K. Type.” Since this is
the only one of a considerable number from
Tabernilla that bears a type label, we consider it
to be the holotype.
Sabethes tarsopus Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 62. 1908.
This species was described from three speci-
mens collected in Panama and Mexico. These
three females are in the collection and we select
as lectotype the one bearing the labels “Bocas d.
Toro, 28 Sept., 03/U.S.D.A. No. 10413/P. Oster-
hout Collector/Type No. 11972 U.S.N.M./
Sabethes longipes Fabr./Sabethes tarsopus D. &
K. Type.”
Sabethoides wndosus Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soe.
Washington 7: 186. 1906.
This species was described from 10 specimens
collected in Trinidad by Urich and Busck. All
these are in the collections and the only one
bearing a type label we consider to be the holo-
type. This female bears the labels, “Trinidad,
W.1./F. W. Urich Collector/B 3.6/Type No.
8292 U.S.N.M./Sabethoides undosus Coq.”
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Sabethoides chroiopus Dyar and Knab, 1913.
Sabethoides glaucodaemon Dyar and Shannon, 1925.
Sabethes goeldii Howard, Dyar and Knab, 1915.
Sabethes schausi Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Genus Topomyia Leicester
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Topomyia barbus Baisas, 1946.
Topomyia dejesusi Baisas and Feliciano, 1953.
Kingia gregoryt Ludlow, 1911.
Topomyia hernandoi Baisas and Feliciano, 1953.
Topomyia imitatus Baisas, 1946.
Genus Trichoprosopon Theobald
Lesticocampa dicellophora Howard, Dyar, and
Knab, Mosquitoes of North and Central
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
America and the West Indies 2: figs. 43,
305. 1913; 3: 166. 1915.
This name was first validated by publication
of figures of the male terminalia and larva, fol-
lowed by descriptions of the female, male, and
larva in 1915. There are 15 specimens in the col-
lection, each bearing the label “Type No. 12708
US.N.M.” We select as lectotype a male bearing
the additional labels ‘‘476.3/1763.” This was
reared from a larva collected at Miraflores,
Panama, February 8, 1909, by A. H. Jennings.
The terminalia are on slide no. 1763.
Phoniomyia homotina Dyar and Knab, Proce.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 141. 1906.
The five original specimens are in the collec-
tion. Only one bears a type label, and this we
consider the holotype. This female bears the
labels ‘Port Limon, C. R./Fredk Knab Collector /
Type No. 9993 U.S.N.M.”
Lesticocampa lampropus Howard, Dyar, and
Knab, Mosquitoes of North and Central
America and the West Indies 2: fig. 44,
IOI SR WGor Ale:
This name was first validated by the publica-
tion of a figure of the male terminalia in 1913. In
1915 the full descriptions of female and male
were given. The lectotype selected by Stone
(1944, p. 340) is in the collection.
Lesticocampa leucopus Dyar and Knab, Proce.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 137. 1906.
The five female syntypes are in the collection.
We select as lectotype the one bearing the labels
“Bluefields, Nicaragua/W. F. Thornton Collec-
tor/Type No. 10,003 U.S.N.M./Lesticocampa
leucopus D. & K. Type.”
Joblotia mogilasia Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 206. 1907.
The lectotype female selected by Stone (1944,
p. 388) is in the collection.
Lesticocampa moralesi Dyar and Knab, Ins.
Insc. Mens. 7: 3. 1919.
Both female syntypes are in poor condition.
We select as lectotype one bearing the labels “‘S.
Felipe, Dpto. Retalhuleu, Guat./Dr. Morales
Coll./Type No. 21997 U.S.N.M.”
Lesticocampa rapax Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 137. 1906.
Aprit 1957
The lectotype male selected by Stone (1944, p.
339) is in the collection.
Lesticocampa schedocyclia Dyar and Knab, Proc.
US. Nat. Mus. 35: 64. 1908.
The two female syntypes are in the collection,
both bearing the labels “‘Bluefields, Nicaragua/
W. F. Thornton Collector/Type No. 11974
U.S.N.M.” We select one as lectotype.
Trichoprosopon (Joblotia) shropshiret Ludlow,
Psyche 26: 168. 1919 [1920].
Four of the five female syntypes are in the
collection, each labeled “Type No. 27803
U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the one bearing
the additional label, “‘Trichoprosopon shrop-
shiret Ludl. Ancon, C. Z. July.”
Joblotia trichorryes Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 206. 1907.
The lectotype male selected by Stone (1944,
p. 338) is in the collection. He erroneously stated
this specimen to be a female.
Lesticocampa vonplessent Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soe. Washington 19: 137. 1906.
The four female syntypes are in the collection,
labeled as having been collected by M. Grabham.
These were actually collected by Baron von
Plessen on the Upper Pastazza River and sent to
Dyar by Grabham. One specimen is labeled
“Pastazza R. Superior, Peru,” but it is probable
that these were collected in the Ecuadorian por-
tion of the river. We select the best of the four as
lectotype.
Trichoprosopon wilsont Ludlow, Psyche 25: 66.
1918.
As pointed out by Stone (1944, p. 335), there
are no specimens in the collection bearing original
data, although there are specimens labeled as
type. For this reason it does not seem advisable
to select a lectotype.
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Trichoprosopon (Runchomyia) cerqueirat Stone,
1944. 5
Lesticocampa culicivora Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Trichoprosopon (T'.) digitatum var. townsendi
Stone, 1944.
Lesticocampa trichopus Dyar, 1919.
Lesticocampa ulopus Dyar and Knab, 1906.
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. V
119
Genus Tripteroides Giles
Rachionotomyia monetifera Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens.
8: 176. 1920.
The female collected at Los Banos, P. I.,
selected as lectotype by Bohart and Farner
(1944, p. 72) is in the collection.
Wyeomyta (Dodecamyia) mus Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 176. 1920.
The two syntypes, a female and a male,
labeled “‘Los Banos, P. I., 16-II, 1915” are in the
collection. The male is in very poor condition,
but since the terminalia are well preserved on a
slide we select as lectotype this specimen, which
bears the additional labels ‘1315/Type No.
PMG?
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Tripteroides (T’.) apoensis Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.) barraudi Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.)
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T'.) binotata Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides (T'.) christopherst Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (Mimeteomyia) cohent Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides (T.) delpilart Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides dyari Bohart and Farner, 1944.
Tripteroides (T’.) dyi Baisas and Ubaldo-Pagayon,
1952.
Tripteroides (T.) erlindae Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.) powella
Ubaldo-Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides floridensis Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides folicola Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides hoogstraali Baisas, 1947.
Tripteroides (T.) indeterminata Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T’.) intermediata Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.) knighti Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
belkini Baisas and Ubaldo-
escodae Baisas and
Tripteroides (T.) powelli laffooni Baisas and
Ubaldo-Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.) lipovskyi Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides (Rachisoura) mabinit Baisas and
Ubaldo-Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.) malvari Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (Rachisoura) mathesoni Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides (T.) powelli mattinglyt Baisas and
Ubaldo-Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides melanesiensis Belkin, 1955.
Rachionotomyia microcala Dyar, 1929.
120
Uranotaenia powelli Ludlow, 1909.
Tripteroides (T.) roxasi Baisas
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T'.) rozeboomi Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T'.) simulata Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (Rachisoura) stonet Belkin, 1950.
Tripteroides (T.) sullivanae Baisas and Ubaldo-
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T.) toffaletii Baisas
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (Rachisoura) torokinae
Tripteroides (T'.) wichancoit Baisas
Pagayon, 1952.
Tripteroides (T’.)
Pagayon, 1952.
and Ubaldo-
and Ubaldo-
Belkin, 1950.
and Ubaldo-
wernert Baisas and Ubaldo-
Genus Wyeomyia Theobald
Wyeomyia abascanta Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 35: 65. 1908.
The two syntypes, a male and a female, are in
the collection. We select as lectotype the female,
bearing the labels ‘Trinidad, W. I. Jun./Type
No. 11983 U.S.N.M./Wyeomyia abascanta D. &
K. Type.”’ The male terminalia were apparently
mounted, but the slide has not been found, and
so we select the female, which is in much better
condition.
Wyeomyia abebela Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus. 35: 67. 1908.
This species was described from six syntypes
of both sexes, but only two specimens bear type
labels and the others have not been found. One
of these consists of one leg only. We select as
lectotype the other, a male, no. 430.7 with ter-
minalia and a portion of the pupal skin on slide
no. 355. This was reared from a larva collected
at Cordoba, Mexico, March 17, 1908, by Knab.
W yeomyia abia Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 35: 67. 1908.
The two syntypes of this species are in the
collection. The male lacks most of the -abdomen
but no slide mount of it has been found. The
female bears the labels, “Dominica, W. I./F. E.
Campbell Collector/4-2/Type No. 11988
US.N.M./Wyeomyia proper HGD 1922/Wyeo-
myia abia D. & K. Type”. We select this female
as lectotype.
Wyeomyia ablabes Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 66. 1908.
The authors of this species described it from
18 specimens, ‘“‘selected from a series.”’ There
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
are four numbered series (414, 415, 421, 430)
agreeing with the original data and aggregating
25 specimens, but no one series reaches 18 in
number. There are also 13 additional specimens
from the type locality without rearing data. Two
pins bear the labels, “Type No. 11986 U.S.N.M.”
and a third bears Dyar’s hand written type label,
but only one of these three specimens remains on
the pin. It is impossible to determine which of
the remaining specimens are the 15 other syn-
types. We select as lectotype the only specimen
left marked as type, a male, no. 421.103 with
terminalia on slide no. 302.
Wyeomyia ablechra Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 66. 1908.
Twelve of the 18 female syntypes of this species
are in the collection, all bearing the labels, “‘Son-
sonate, Salv./Fredk Knab Collector.”” One bears
the labels, “Type No. 11895 U.S.N.M./Wyeo-
myta ablechra D. & K. Type” and we select this
as lectotype.
Wyeomyia abrachys Dyar and Knab, Smithson-
ian Mise. Coll. 52: 262. 1909.
The one female and two male syntypes are in
the collection. We select as lectotype the male,
bearing the labels, “119.3/A. H. Jennings Col-
lector/Type No. 12133 U.S.N.M./See slide No.
436 /abrachys.”’ The terminalia are mounted on
slide no. 4386 and the larval skin on another slide.
Wyeomyia adelpha Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 140. 1906.
Ten of the 11 original specimens are in the
collection, all bearing the labels, ‘“‘Esparta,
C. R./Fredk Knab Collector.’ No one of these
females bears a type label, and it is possible that
the specimen that had been labeled type is lost,
but we select one of these ten specimens as the
lectotype.
Wyeomyta andropus Dyar and Knab, Proe. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 35: 68. 1908.
The 26 syntypes of this species are in the col-
lection, two bearing the label ““Type No. 11989
U.S.N.M.” and a third “Wyeomyia andropus D.
& K. Type.” We select as lectotype the male
(No. 133.2) with terminalia unmounted, bearing
the Museum type label. This was reared from a
larva collected in a bromeliad at Porto Bello,
i
Aprit 1957
Fort San Felipe, January 4, 1909, by A. H. Jen-
nings.
Wyeomyta aporonoma Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 230. 1906.
This species was described from larvae only,
collected in Salvador, Mexico, and Costa Rica by
Knab. The collection contains three specimens
bearing red type labels and six others probably
of the type series. One of these specimens with a
red type label and one without each bear Dyar’s
hand-written label ‘““Wyeomyia aporonoma D. &
K. Type.”’ Only one larval skin was found that
could be associated with the four specimens
marked as types. We select this (no. 330zd) as
lectotype and have mounted it with the associ-
ated pupal skin on a slide. The adult male from
this pupa was reared from a larva collected at
Sonsonate, El Salvador, August 30, 1905. It
bears the labels “No. 330zd see F. Knab’s
Entom. notes /Sonsonate Salvador/Type No.
9983. U.S.N.M./Dendromyia quasiluteoventralis
Theob.,” the latter in Coquillett’s hand.
Wyeomyia autocratica Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 230. 1906.
This species was described from the larva of a
single specimen and the larval skin is apparently
lost. There is a male in the collection labeled
“Trinidad W. I./F. W. Urich Collector/B 12-8 /
Type No. 9986 U.S.N.M./See Slide No. 361/
Wyeomyia autocratica D. & K. Type.” The ter-
minalia are on one slide, the pupal skin on the
other. This series can be considered holotypic
although the portion originally described is lost.
Wyeomyia bahama Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 138. 1906.
Fifteen of the original 16 specimens are in the
collection, all labeled, “Tarpon Bay, Bahamas,
7-7-03/T. H. Coffin Coll. No. 21.” One only, a
female, bears the label, “Type No. 9990
U.S.N.M.” and we consider this the holotype.
Dendromyia (Eunicemyta) bicornis Root, in Dyar,
Mosquitoes of the Americas: 50. 1928.
There is no statement concerning the type
material of this species in the original description,
but the male and larva were described and they
were from Venezuela. There is one specimen only
labeled as type and this male bears the labels,
“Ocumare Ven., July 6, 1927. No. 108/108.1/
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. V IPA
Type No. 44162 U.S.N.M.” The terminalia are
mounted on a slide, but no larval or pupal skins
have been found. We consider this male the holo-
type.
Wyeomyta bromeliarum Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 138. 1906.
This was described from larvae that the au-
thors had previously determined and figured as
W. assulepta Theob. The collection contains a
larval and a pupal skin in poor condition mounted
on a slide labeled, “Wyeomyia bromeliarum D. &
K. Type, Trinidad W. I., F. W. Urich Collector.”
All that is left of the adult reared from this larva
are two legs on a point. We select the larval skin
as lectotype, with which are associated the pupal
skin and the small portion of the adult.
Wyeomyia cacodela Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 265. 1909.
The two male and one female syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male bearing the labels, “195/A. H. Jennings
Collector/Type No. 12183 U.S.N.M./Wyeomyia
cacodela D. & K. Type.” This was reared from a
larva collected at Gorgona, Canal Zone, in
flower cups of Heliconia, February 7, 1908. The
terminalia have not been mounted.
Wyeomyia (W.) camptocomma Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 12: 120. 1924.
This species was described from five males and
ten females from Barranquilla, Colombia. These
are in the collection and we select as lectotype
the male bearing the labels, “1903/Barranquilla,
Colomb./L. H. Dunn Coll. 1923/Type No.
US.N.M.” The terminalia are mounted
on slide no. 1903.
Sabethes canfieldi Dyar and Knab, Jour. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 207. 1907.
Of the 23 original specimens from Lion Hill,
Canal Zone, Panama, 18 have been found in the
collection, all females. Only one bears a type
label and this we consider the holotype.
Wyeomyta chalcocephala Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soe. Washington 19: 140. 1906.
Only three of the seven original specimens
have been found in the collection. One only, a
male, bears a type label, and this we consider the
holotype. The labels are, “Cacao Trece Aguas/
122
Alta V. Paz, Guatemala/Schwarz & Barber Coll/
2/See Slide No. 352/Type No. 10,002 U.S.N.M.”
The terminalia are mounted on slide No. 352.
Wyeomyia chresta Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Misc. Coll. 52: 263. 1909.
The two syntypes, female and male, of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male, bearing the labels, ‘“Tabernilla, Canal
Zone, Panama/216.3/Collected by August
Busck/Type No. 12135 U.S.N.M./See slide No.
439 /chresta.”’ The terminalia are on slide no. 489
and the larval head capsule on another slide.
Wyeomyia circumcincta Dyar and Knab, Jour.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 210. 1907.
The two syntype males of this species are in
the collection, each bearing the labels, “191/
Tabernilla, Canal Zone, Panama/Colleeted by
August Busck/Type No. 10857 U.S N.M.” We
select as lectotype the cne ai-o bearing tie label
“Wyeomyta circumcincta D. & Ix. Type.”
Wyeomyia clasoleuca Dyar and Knab, Proc.
U.S. Nat. Mus. 35: 68. 1908.
The two female syntypes of this species are in
the collection, both bearing the labels, ‘“‘Caldera
Isl., Porto Bello Bay/A. H. Jennings Collector/
Type No. 11990 U.S.N.M.” We select as lecto-
type the one besring the determination label.
Wyeomyia codiocampa Dyar and Knab, Jour.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 209. 1907.
Nine of the 11 original specimens are in the
collection. One of each sex bears the label, “Type
No. 10853 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the
male, bearing in addition the labels, “461 /Taber-
nilla, Canal Zone, Panama/Collected by August
Busck/See slide No. 362.” The slide bears the
terminalia.
Wyeomyia coenonus Howard, Dyar, and Knab,
Mosquitoes of North and Central America
and the West Indies 2: pl. 6, fig. 38. 1913;
3: 153. 1915.
The first appearance of this name is in associ-
ation with a figure of the male terminalia, fol-
lowed by the written description of the female
and male in 1915. The data for the species in this
latter publication are, ‘“Tabernilla, Canal Zone,
April 14, 1909 and Upper Pequini River, March
27, 1909”, both collected by A. H. Jennings. The
collection contains two females and one male,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
each bearing Jennings’ collection number 552
and the label, “Type No. 12705 U.S.N.M.” We
select the male as lectotype. The number is 552.3,
the terminalia are on slide no. 523, labeled as
type. No larval skin has been found. The speci-
men was reared. from Calathea at Tabernilla,
April 14, 1909. ;
Dendromyia (Melanolepis) complosa Dyar, Mos-
quitoes of the Americas: 74. 1°28.
The female, male, and lai\e <f this species
were described from Panama and Venezuela.
There are three females and one male from San
Juan de Pequini, Panama, collected by D. P.
Curry, none labeled as type, but presumably all
syntypes. We select as lectotype the male, with
terminalia mounted on slide no. 2285.
Wyeomyia conchita Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 264. 1909.
This species was described from 14 specimens
collected at San Antonio de los Banos, Cuba, by
J. H. Pazos. There are 20 specimens bearing
Pazos numbers but only one, a female, bears the
type label. Since it is impossible to determine
which are the syntypes in this series, we select
as lectotype the female (no. 397) which bears the
type label.
Wyeomyia drapetes Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Misc. Coll. 52: 264. 1909.
The one female and two male syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male bearing the labels, “Trinidad, W. I./
F. W. Urich Collector/Type No. 12181
U.S.N.M./Sce Slide No. 366/drapetes.” The
terminalia are mounted on slide no. 366.
Wyeomyia dymodora Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 69. 1908.
Dyar and Knab (1909, p. 266) fixed the lecto-
type of this species by describing one of the two
syntypes as a new spccies (hapla). This lectotype,
with abdomen missing, is labeled, ‘157/A. H.
Jennings Collector/Type No. 11991 U.S.N.M./
Wyeomyia dymodora D. & K. Type.” It was
reared from a larva collected at Fort San Felipe,
Porto Bello, January 21, 1908.
Wyeomyia eloisa Howard, Dyar, and Knab,
Mosquitoes of North and Central America
and the West Indies 2: pl, 6, fig. 36. 1913;
3: 121. 1915. 2
Aprit 1957
This name first appeared in association with a
figure of the male terminalia, followed by the
written descriptions of the female, male, and
larva two years later. Three Panama localities
are given in the later description. There are 50
specimens bearing the data given in the written
description. Only one of these is labeled as type,
but this is a female, and since the name first ap-
peared in connection with a figure of the male we
select as lectotype a male bearing the labels,
“476 /See Slide No. 505/Miraflores, C. Z., Pan./
Feb. 8. 09/A. H. Jennings Coll./Wyeomyza
eloisa HDK.” The terminalia are mounted on
slide no. 505.
Wyeomyia fauna Dyar and Shannon, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 7: 12. 1919.
The two male and one female syntypes of this
species all bear the labels, ““Bas Obispo, C. Z.,
Pan. Aug., 1913/J. Zetek Coll./Type No. 21999
U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the male bear-
ing the additional labels, “1114/Wyeomyia fauna
D. & K. Type.” The terminalia are mounted on
slide no. 1114.
Dendromyia (Decamyia) felicia Dyar and Nunez
Tovar, Notas Sobre Nuevos Dipteros
Hematofagos de Venezuela, Maracay: 3.
1927.
This species was described from an unstated
number of both sexes from four localities in
Venezuela. There are a large number of speci-
mens in the collection bearing data agreeing with
those originally given, but only two males and a
female are marked as types. All are labeled, “Tio
Julian VII.8.1927/M. Numiez Tovar Coll./Type
No. U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype
the male bearing the additional label ‘‘elephant’s
ear.”
Wyeomyia galoa Dyar and Knab, Proce. Biol. Soc.
Washington 19: 140. 1906.
Two of the three original specimens are in the
collection. Only one of these bears a type label
and this we consider the holotype. This female is
labeled, ‘‘Cacao Trece Aguas/Alta V. Paz,
Guatemala,/Schwarz & Barber Coll./3 on Heli-
conica bracts/ Type No. 10,001 U.S.N.M.”
Wyeomyta (W.) gaudians Dyar and Nunez Tovar,
Notas Sobre Nuevos Dipteros Hematofagos
de Venezuela, Maracay: 5. 1927.
This species was described from four females
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. V
123
and one male collected at Mariara, Carabobo,
Venezuela, July 1927. There are no specimens in
the collection labeled as types although there are
many from the type locality collected in July.
Many in the collection bear small red labels, but
some of these were collected later than July.
There are three females with small blue labels
that bear original data, and a male mounted on a
slide. We select as lectotype this male, bearing the
label in Dyar’s hand, “Wyeomyia gaudians D. &
NT. Bromelias. Carabobo Ven. July 14, 1927.
M. Nunez Tovar.” A small red label is also glued
to this slide.
Wyeomyta glaucocephala Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 140. 1906.
There are a number of specimens in the collec-
tion bearing original data and it is impossible to
determine which are from the type series of W.
ochrura and which belong to glaucocephala. One
female, with head missing bears the original type
number of glaucocephala and this we consider the
holotype. The labels are, “113/St. Domingo.
W. 1. Aug./Aug. Busck Collector/Type No. 9999
US.N.M.”
Wyeomyia guatemala Dyar and Knab, Proce.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 139. 1906.
This species was described from two specimens
although there are three in the collection bearing
the original data. One only, a female, bears the
type label (No. 9994) and this we consider the
holotype. It was collected by Barber and Schwarz
at Cacao Trece Aguas, Alta V. Paz, Guatemala,
April 17.
Wyeomyia hemisagnosta Dyar and Knab, Jour.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 230. 1906.
This was described from larvae collected at
Sonsonate, Salvador and Port Limon, Costa Rica.
The only original specimen found in the collection
is a larval skin labeled ““Miamyta hemisagnosta
(D. & K.) Type 9984. Sonsonate, Salvador, Aug.
30, 1905 Knab 330pi.” We select this slide-
mounted skin as lectotype.
Wyeomyia (W.) incana Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens.
10: 189. 1922.
This species was described from, “Types, male
and female, No. 25759 U. 8. Nat. Mus.; Mar-
garita, Canal Zone, Panama, August 12, 1922
(J.B. Shropshire).”’ There is one specimen of each
sex so labeled in the collection. We select the male
124
as lectotype, with terminalia mounted on slide
MO ila
Wyeomyia labesba Howard, Dyar, and Knab,
Mosquitoes of North and Central America
and the West Indies 2: pl. 89, fig. 282. 1913;
3: 106. 1915.
This name first appeared in association with a
figure of the larval head and last two abdominal
segments. The written description of the female
and larva appeared in the next volume, with the
data, Ancon, Canal Zone, December 24, 1908,
and Tabernilla, Canal Zone, February 4, 1909.
These are numbers 463 and 471 respectively of
Jenning’s notes and the collection contains three
females bearing those numbers and labeled as
types. There are also two larval skins but only
one of these (no. 471.1) is associated with an
adult “type.’’ We select this larval skin as lecto-
type, the female reared from it also being lecto-
typic.
Wyeomyia macrotus Dyar and Knab, Jour. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 212. 1907.
Two of the three syntypes are in the collection,
each bearing the label, “Type No. 10862
U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the female,
also bearing the labels, ‘104.1/Collected by
August Busck/Panama/Wyeomyia macrotus D. &
K. Type.” The remaining fragments of the larval
and pupal skins of this specimen have been
mounted on a slide. The larva was collected in a
bromeliad on the Boqueran River, May 23, 1907.
Wyeomyia mataea Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8.
Nat. Mus. 35: 70. 1908.
The two female syntypes of this species are in
the collection. We select as lectotype the one
labeled, ‘“‘Sonsonate, Salvador /Fredk Knab Col-
lector/Type No. 11994 U.S.N.M./Wyeomyia
matea [sic] D. & K. Type.”
W yeomyia megalodora Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 35: 69. 1908.
This was described from two specimens, but
there are four in the collection bearing identical
data and only one labeled as type, so it 1s impos-
sible to fix the second syntype. We select as
lectotype the female labeled, ‘‘Sonsonate, Sal-
vador/Fredk Knab Collector/Type No. 11993
US.N.M./Wyeomyia megalodora D. & K. Type.”
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
Dendromyia (Calladimyia) melanoides Root, in
Dyar, Mosquitoes of the Americas: 79. 1928.
The male, female, and larva of this species
was described from two localities in Brazil. There
are three males and two females in the collection
labeled, ““Magé, Brazil, May 26, 1925,” one of
them bearing the label, “Type No. 44165
US.N.M.” The Rio de Janeiro specimens have
not been found. We select as lectotype the male
numbered 90-2 with the terminalia and pupal
skin mounted on a slide.
Wyeomyia minor Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 138. 1906.
Four of the original seven specimens have been
found in the collection. One only, a female, bears
the type label (No. 9992) and this we consider
the holotype. It was collected by August Busck
at Baracoa, Cuba, September 1901.
Wyeomyta modalma Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10:
97. 1922.
This species was described from five females.
These are in the collection with type labels, there
being four from Paja, not three as originally
stated. We select as lectotype the one bearing
the labels, “Gatun, C. Z. Pan./Dec. 10/J. B.
Shropshire Coll. 1921/V-15/Type No. 25256
US.N.M./Wyeomyia modalma Dyar Type.”
Wyeomyia mystes Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 12: 92.
1924.
The two pinned syntypes of this species are in
the collection. We select as lectotype the male,
bearing the labels, “Type No. ——— U.S.N.M./
Rio de Janeiro, Braz. Aug. 1922. F. L. Soper/
Slide 36.VII.28b.”” The terminalia are mounted
on the slide.
Wyeomyia ochrura Dyar and Knab, Jour. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 229. 1906.
This species was described in the larval stage
only, from specimens collected in San Domingo
by Busck, Trinidad by Urich, and Dominica by
Campbell. Two specimens only bear type labels.
These, a male and a female bear the labels, “St.
Domingo, W. I. Aug./Aug. Busck Collector /Type
No. 9987 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the
larval skin No. 113.1 on the same slide with its
pupal skin and with the larval and pupal skin of
the other “type” (no. 113.2). The adult from this
AprRiIL 1957
lectotype larva is fragmentary but the termi-
nalia are mounted on slide no. 365. The larval
and pupal skins, pinned male and mounted
terminalia are all lectotypic.
Wyeomyta onidus Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 261. 1909.
The two female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male, bearing the labels, “‘238.6/Type No.
12054 U.S.N.M./See Slide No. 356 /onidus.”” The
larvae from which the syntypes were reared were
collected in the flower cups of Heliconia at Taber-
nilla, Canal Zone, March 12, 1908, by A. H. Jen-
nings. The larval skin is mounted on another
slide.
Wyeomyta pandora Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 261. 1909.
The three female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection and we select as lecto-
type the male, bearmg the labels, ‘37/A. H.
Jennings Collector/Type No. 12132 U.S.N.M./
See Slide No. 441/pandora.” The larva from
which this was reared was collected at Corozal,
Panama, November 29, 1907. The terminalia are
mounted on slide no. 441.
Wyeomyta pantoia Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 262. 1909.
The four female and two male syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male bearing the labels, “‘238/Type No.
12055 U.S.N.M./See Slide No. 442/pantoia.” This
was reared from a larva collected in flower cups of
Heliconia at Tabernilla, Canal Zone, March 12,
1908 by A. H. Jennings. The terminalia are on
slide no. 442.
Phoniomyia philophone Dyar and Knab, Jour.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 209. 1907.
Fifteen of the original 20 specimens of this
species have been found in the collection, one
female only bearing a type label, and this we
consider the holotype.
Wyeomyia prolepidis Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 7: 1. 1919.
The five female syntypes of this species are in
the collection. We select as lectotype the one
bearing the labels, “Culebra, C. Z., Pan./L. H.
Dunn C-97/Type No. 21779 U.S.N.M./Wyeo-
myia prolepidis D. & K. Type.”
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. V
125
Dinomyia proviolans Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7:
117. 1919.
This was described from three males from two
collections in Panama. These are in the collection,
and we select as lectotype the one labeled, ‘‘Porto
Bello, Pan. March 11, August Busck/1139/Type
No. 22006 U.S.N.M./Dinomyia proviolans Dyar
Type.” The terminalia are on slide no. 1139.
Wyeomyia pseudopecten Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 139, 1906.
This species was described from eight speci-
mens collected in Trinidad by August Busck and
F. W. Urich. There are twelve specimens that
bear proper data in the collection, but only one
bears a type label, and this we consider the holo-
type. This male, with terminalia intact, bears
the labels, ‘381/Trinidad, W. I. Jun./Aug. Busck
Collector/Type No. 9997 U.S.N.M.”
Phoniomyia scotinomus Dyar and Knab, Jour.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 209. 1907.
Two of the original three specimens are in the
collection, each bearing the label, “Type No.
10855 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the male,
bearing additional labels, ‘103.1/Panama/col-
lected by August Busck/See Slide No. 438/
Phoniomyia scotinomus D. & K. Type.”’ The
type locality is the Boqueron River; the termi-
nalia are on slide no. 438, and the pupal skin and
head of larval skin are on another slide.
Aedes smith Coquillett, Can. Ent. 23: 260. 1901.
Four of the five original specimens are in the
collection. Only one bears a type label and this
male we consider the holotype. It bears the
labels, “Bred from larvae found Mch. and Apr. in
leaves of pitcher plant at Lahaway, Ocean Co.,
N. J. First pupa obtained Apr. 14, first adult ten
days later J. B. Smith/Type No. 5799 U.S.N.M./
Aedes smithu Coquillett.”
Wyeomyia sororcula Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 139. 1906.
The 53 original specimens from St. Domingo,
are in the collection. Only one is labeled as type,
and we consider this to be the holotype. This
female bears the labels, “S. Frnesco Mts., 8.
Domingo. W. I. September 05/Aug. Busck
Collector /Type No. 9996 U.S.N.M.”
Wyeomyia symmachus Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 52: 262. 1909.
126
The two syntype females of this species are in
the collection, bearing the labels, ““3826/Type No.
12056 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the one
labeled by Dyar, “Wyeomyia symmachus D. &
K. Type.” The larvae from which these speci-
mens were reared were collected in bamboo traps
at Tabernilla, Canal Zone, May 23, 1908, by A.
H. Jennings.
Wyeomyia telestica Dyar and Knab, Jour. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 230. 1906.
This species was originally described from the
larva only. The collection contains an adult male
bearing the labels, “Trinidad, W. I./F. W. Urich
Collector/B 12-8/Type No. 9985 U.S.N.M./See
Slide No. 360/Wyeomyra telestica D. & K. Type.”
Associated with this is a pupal skin but the larval
skin is apparently lost. The type catalogue states,
“1. Type of adult. Described from larva.’’ We
may assume that this adult was reared from the
type larva, possibly the only larva before the
authors, and it may be justifiably considered as
holotypic.
Wyeomyta vanduzeet Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 138. 1906.
The 12 syntypes of this species are in the col-
lection. We select as lectotype the male specimen
labeled, ‘‘356.5/See Slide No. 349/Type No.
9988 U.S.N.M.” This was reared from bromeliads
at Estero, Florida.
Wyeomyia violescens Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 138. 1906.
Seven of the eight original specimens from
Cayamas, Cuba, are in the collection. One only, a
female, bears the type label (No. 9991) and this
we consider the holotype. It was collected in a
home, June 8, by E. A. Schwarz.
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Wyeomyia agnostipes Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Wyeomyia argyrtes Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Wyeomyia antoinetta Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Wyeomyia aphobema Dyar, 1918.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, No. 4
Wyeomyia argyrura Dyar and Knab, 1908.
Wyeomyia baria Dyar and Knab, 1908.
Wyeomyia cara Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Wyeomyia caracula Dyar and Nunez-Tovar, 1927.
Wyeomyia celaenocephala Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Wyeomyia (W.) charmion Dyar, 1928.
Phoniomyia chrysomus Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Wyeomyia (Menolepis) culebrae Dyar, 1923.
Wyeomyia espartana Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Wyeomyia ewethes Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Dendromyia (Melanolepis) favor Dyar and Nufez-
Tovar, 1928.
Wyeomyia (Techniciomyia) florestan Dyar, 1925.
Wyeomyia fratercula Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Wyeomyia (W.) gausapata Dyar and Nufez Tovar,
1927.
Wyeomyia gynaecopus Dyar and Knab, 1908.
Wyeomyia hapla Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Wyeomyia haynei Dodge, 1947.
Prosopolepis hemisiris Dyar and Shannon, 1925.
Phoniomyia hirsuta Hill and Hill, 1946.
Wyeomyia homothe Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Wyeomyia hosautus Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Wyeomyta intonca Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Prosopolepis jocosa Dyar and Knab, 1908.
Wyeomyta leucopisthepus Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Wyeomyia melanocephala Dyar and Knab, 1906.
Wyeomyia melanopus Dyar, 1919.
Sabethinus moerbista Dyar and Knab, 1919.
Miamyia (Shropshirea) pampithes Dyar and Nunez
Tovar, 1928.
Wyeomyia panamana Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Miamyia petrocchiae Shannon and Del Ponte, 1928.
Wyeomyia phroso Howard, Dyar, and Knab, 1915.
Wyeomyia rolonca Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Wyeomyia roloncetta Dyar, 1919.
Sabethoides serratoria Dyar and Nufiez Tovar,
1927.
Phoniomyia simmsi Dyar and Knab, 1908.
Wyeomyia (Shropshirea) ypsipola Dyar, 1922.
LITERATURE CITED
Bouart, R. M., and Farner, D.S. New culicine
mosquitoes from the Philippine Islands
(Diptera, Culicidae). Proc. Biol. Sec. Wash-
ington 57: 69-74. 1944.
Dyar, H.G., and Knas, F. Descriptions of some
new species and a new genus of American mos-
guitoes. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 52: 253-266.
1909.
Strong, ALAN. Notes on the genus Trichoprosopon
(Diptera, Culicidae). Rev. de Ent. 15: 335-841.
1944.
Entia non sunt multiplicanda praeter necessitatem.—— WILLIAM OF OccAM,
14th century
APRIL 1957
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 15
127
HERPETOLOGY .—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, 15:
The herpetofauna of Somerset County, Md. Cuiypr F. Reep, Baltimore, Md.
(Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received November 13, 1956)
Somerset County, Md., hes on the Del-
marva Peninsula, bounded on the east (in
part) and south by the Pocomoke Swamp
and River, on the west by the Chesapeake
Bay, and on the north by Wicomico County.
A large portion of the county, especially the
western, is marshy. The more inland por-
tions toward the Pocomoke River are
swampy. Between these two wet areas is the
dry sandy portion. Therefore, the habitats,
although they are all coastal soils, are either
predominantly wet or predominantly dry.
Both Conant’s Checklist of the amphibians
and reptiles of the Del-Mar-Va Peninsula
and McCauley’s Reptiles of Maryland and
the District of Columbia, both published in
1945, give very few records for any species
of amphibians or reptiles from Somerset
County. Along with Carroll and Caroline
Counties in Maryland, this is one of the
most poorly collected-in counties in the
State. It is difficult to say whether their
representation is due to inadequate collect-
ing or species paucity. The counties to the
north and east of Somerset, namely Wico-
mico and Worcester, are very well repre-
sented in species of herpetofauna. From the
author’s collecting in this county, it would
appear that inadequate collections have
been made. The author has been collecting
in this county since 1938, mainly in the area
about Waterloo Farm, at the Headwaters of
Monie Creek, on the property of Philip
Wolle of Princess Anne.
The published records for the amphibians
and reptiles of Somerset County are quite
meager. McCauley (1.c., 1945) lists five rep-
tiles from the county: Heterodon p. platy-
rhinos, Coluber c. constrictor, Lampropeltis q.
getulus, Natrix s. sipedon and Malaclemys
centrata concentrica. Conant (l.c., 1945) lists
five species of amphibians and reptiles from
this county: Pseudacris nigrita triseriata,
Hyla c. crucifer, Rana clamitans, Rana
pipiens and Coluber c. constrictor.
Collections by the author and Philip
Wolle indicate that there are at least 25
reptiles in the county. The records given
herein may be considered as new to the
county for al] those species not mentioned
above and additional records for all other
species.
1. Scaphiopus holbrooki holbrooki (Harlan).
North of Pocomoke City, July 9, 1956, Reed 1126.
2. Bufo woodhouser fowleri Hinckley. North
of Pocomoke City, July 9, 1956, Reed 1127-1128.
3. Hyla versicolor versicolor LeConte. North-
east of Pocomoke City, July 9, 1956, Reed 1165-
1166.
4. Hyla cructfer crucifer Wied. Conant, 1945.
5. Pseudacris nigrita triseriata (Weid). Conant,
1945.
6. Rana clamitans Latreille. 5 miles Southeast
of Princess Anne, July 12, 1953, Reed 285;
Conant, 1945.
7. Rana catesbeiana Shaw. Waterloo Farm,
Philip Wolle; just north of Pocomoke City,
July 9, 1956, Reed.
8. Rana pipiens Schreber. Swamp near Monie
Bay, July 25, 1954, Reed 951.
9. Ambystoma tigrinum tigrinuwm (Green)
4 miles west of Princess Anne, Philip Wolle.
10. Plethodon cinereus cinereus (Green). Woods
near Monie Creek, summer, 1938, Reed.
11. Sceloporus undulatus hyacinthinus (Green):
Fence swift. Waterloo Farm, headwaters of
Monie Creek, Philip Wolle; September 1941,
Reed.
12. Heterodon platyrhinos platyrhinos Latreille:
Hog-nosed snake. Waterloo Farm, on Monie
Creek, Philip Wolle; McCauley, 1945, Map 13
indicates Crisfield and Dames Quarter.
13. Opheodrys aestivus (Linnaeus): Rough
green snake. Waterloo Farm, Philip Wolle
(18-24 inches long).
14. Coluber c. constrictor Linnaeus: Black
racer. Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek, Philip
Wolle (48 inches long); McCauley, 1945; Conant,
1945.
15. Elaphe guttata (Linnaeus): Corn snake.
Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek, Philip Wolle.
16. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linnaeus) :
King snake. Westover, McCauley, 1945; Water-
loo Farm, Philip Wolle (both varieties seen with
white or yellow bands, 47 inches long).
128
17. Natrix sipedon stpedon (Linnaeus): Com-
mon water snake. McCauley, 1945; Waterloo
Farm on Monie Creek, Philip Wolle.
18. Thamnophis sauritus sauritus (Linnaeus):
Ribbon snake. McCauley, 1945, along the
Pocomoke River in the southeastern part of
the county.
19. Thamnophis sirtalis sirtalis (Linnaeus):
Garter snake. Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek,
Philip Wolle (4 specimens caught).
20. Ancistrodon contortrix mokeson (Daudin):
Copperhead. Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek,
Philip Wolle, 3 authentic specimens seen, head
of one preserved.
21. Sternotherus
odoratus Latreille: Musk
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 4
turtle. Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek, Philip
Wolle.
22. Chelydra serpentina serpentina (Linnaeus):
Snapping turtle. Waterloo Farm on Monie
Creek, Philip Wolle.
23. Terrapene carolina carolina (Linnaeus):
Common box turtle. Waterloo Farm on Monie
Creek, Philip Wolle.
24. Chrysemys picta picta (Schneider): Painted
turtle. Waterloo Farm on Monie Creek, Philip
Wolle.
25. Malaclemys terrapin terrapin (Schoepf):
Diamondback terrapin. Crisfield, Reed 1039-1040;
many seen by Philip Wolle at Crisfield; McCauley
1945, cites Crisfield (McCauley T46) and Deal’s
Island (McCauley T45).
POROSITY DETECTION IN PLATED COATINGS
Pores and other flaws seriously impair the
quality of industrially produced electroplated
coatings, diminishing their effectiveness as pro-
tective coatings for metals. Until now it has been
difficult to estimate the relative merits of elec-
trodeposits since no method of determining the
gravity of defects was available. Recently, how-
ever, the National Bureau of Standards has
developed a non-destructive procedure for as-
certaining both the size and position of pores.
The method involves photographing an electro-
plated specimen exposed to radiation.
In earlier research, a technique applicable to
plated coatings that have been removed from
the basis metal was developed by the Bureau.?
However, the likelihood of stripped-coating
porosity differing from adherent-coating porosity
led to further investigation of the problem. The
present work was carried out for the American
Electroplaters’ Society by F. Ogburn of the
Bureau staff and Margaret Hilkert of the Soci-
ety’s research fellowship at the Bureau.
1The nature, cause and effect of porosity in
electrodeposits, II. Radiographic detection of
porosity in electrodeposits, by F. OGBpurn and
M. Hivxkert, Ann. Tech. Proc. Amer. Electro-
platers’ Soc.: 256. 1956.
2 The nature, cause, and effect of the porosity in
electrodeposits, by F. OGBuRN and A. BENDERLY,
Plating 41: 168. 1954.
In determining the location and size of pores,
the specimen, a flat sheet of plated metal a few
thousandths of an inch thick, is placed on a
photographie film with the coating against the
film emulsion. The assembly is held in a card-
board cassette, and the basis-metal side of the
specimen is exposed to X-rays or radiation from a
radioactive material. To insure good contrast,
the X-radiation used must be soft. This require-
ment of low-energy X-rays limits the thickness
of the basis material to several thousandths of
an inch, since thicker metal absorbs too much of
the X-ray beam and requires too long an ex-
posure time. Radioactive iron, nickel, or cobalt
held against the plated specimen in a cassette
are also adequate sources of radiation.
After a suitable exposure time the film is
removed and developed, satisfactory radiographs
result from a 38- or 4-min exposure to an X-ray
machine, and from a 24-hr exposure to luce of
radioactivity. Wherever a pore existed in the
coating, a black spot appears on the developed
film. A fine-grain industrial X-ray film gives the
most readable radiograph.
This radiographic method detects pits, voids,
and inclusions in the coating to the order of
0.001 in. in diameter. Discontinuities in the
basis metal may also be determined by radio-
graphing the metal before plating.
AprIL 1957
FIRE DETECTION IN AIRCRAFT ENGINE SPACES
FIRE DETECTION IN AIRCRAFT ENGINE SPACES
When fire breaks out in an aircraft engine
space, It must be detected and quenched within
seconds to avoid serious damage or possible loss
of life. To provide design specifications for reli-
able, fast-acting fire detectors, the National
Bureau of Standards has been studying flame
characteristics that might be applied to aircraft
fire detection systems. Results of this work indi-
cate that reliability could be greatly increased by
a system that would not respond unless several
intrinsic properties of a flame were all present at
the same time. These properties are (1) charac-
teristic rate of increase of radiant flux, (2) suffi-
cient level of radiant flux in the required spectral
region, and (3) characteristic frequency of flicker.
The investigation was undertaken for the Wright
Air Development Center by W. F. Roeser and
C. S. McCamy of the Bureau’s fire protection
laboratory.
Too often in the past, frequent false alarms
have undermined the airman’s confidence in his
fire detector, causing him to hesitate or neglect
to take action when an alarm sounded. In some
instances fires were not detected or were detected
too late. Flight experience and fire tests under
simulated flight conditions have clearly indicated
that to be effective, a fire detector must invari-
ably respond if, and only if, there is a fire and it
must do so as quickly as possible.
Detectors are required to discriminate between
fires and other phenomena under the most ad-
verse environmental conditions, including tem-
peratures from —65° to over 500°F, wind speeds
over 500 mph, rain, hail, fog, salt spray, dust,
oil, grease, fungus, fumes, vibration, and extreme
pressure changes. A detector designed to respond
to the radiant energy from flames for example,
must discriminate between flames and sunlight,
lightning, gun-fire, or beacons. The detector
must survive a fire with flame temperatures over
2000°F so that it can indicate that the fire is out
and be ready to detect another fire a short time
later. The aircraft designer demands that detec-
tors have the least possible size and weight.
A survey of existing or proposed systems re-
vealed a number of ingenious applications of
various physical principles. Radiant energy detec-
tors seemed the most promising because a single
detector can monitor a large space. However, for
development of improved designs, more funda-
mental data were needed on the characteristics of
flames involved in aircraft engine fires. Therefore,
a study was undertaken at the National Bureau
of Standards of the radiation and flicker of flames.
FLAME SPECTRA
The more important flammable materials
found in aircraft engine spaces include such
liquid hydrocarbons as engine fuel, lubricating
oil, and hydraulic fluid. In a typical engine fire
involving these flammable liquids, oxygen diffuses
into the flames from the surrounding atmosphere,
producing a ‘‘diffusion flame” which emits essen-
tially the same continuous spectrum for each of
the burning liquid hydrocarbons. Experiments
were performed which showed that various air-
craft fuels premixed with air before burning pro-
duced nearly identical spectra except for the lead
lines in the spectra of leaded fuels. As a result of
these spectrometric studies it was concluded that
for the design of radiant energy detectors the
same spectral region would be suitable for all
fuels likely to be involved.
RADIATION MEASUREMENTS
The radiant intensities of the flames of various
fuels were measured in five wavelength intervals
from 0.24 micron in the ultraviolet to 2.5 microns
in the infrared. To measure the fluctuating radi-
ant intensity in all parts of the spectrum simul-
taneously, photoelectric detectors were used with
suitable filters and the output signals were re-
corded on a multichannel recording oscillograph.
A radiation-pyrometer detector with appropriate
filters measured the radiance of flames in several
infrared regions extending to 9.5 microns.
The investigation showed that flames of the
type likely to occur in engine spaces emit energy
throughout the spectrum but emit far more in the
near infrared than in any other wave-length
region. Some parts of the spectrum were found to
be unsuitable for use in fire detection. The strong
absorption of radiant energy by oil, grease, and
soot in the visible and ultraviolet parts of the
spectrum would prevent reliable detection of
energy of those wavelengths. The visible part of
the spectrum is also considered undesirable be-
cause of the high intensity of sunlight and sky-
light in that region. The most suitable part of
the spectrum for fire detection therefore appears
to be the near infrared.
130
The characteristics of various window materi-
als were considered with respect to ambient con-
ditions and their effects on discrimination. Of the
materials capable of withstanding the ambient
conditions expected, fused quartz appears to be
the most satisfactory since it transmits well in
the infrared out to about 3.8 microns. Moreover,
it transmits a somewhat larger percentage of the
energy from flames than from a hot metal back-
ground having the same radiance as a flame, thus
providing a measure of discrimination between
these sources.
INCREASE IN RADIATION
Although the engine radiance may approach
that of a flame, the engine takes a much longer
time to heat up than the fuel vapors take to
burst into flame. Measurements show that the
flames to be expected in accidental fires in engine
spaces reach full intensity about a quarter of a
second after ignition, while the engine takes over
a minute to warm up. This difference in rate of
increase of radiation provides another distin-
guishing feature for detection purposes.
FLICKER MEASUREMENTS
A high level of radiant flux or a rapid rate of
rise could be caused by events other than fires.
One of the recognized attributes of flames is their
natural tendency to flicker—to produce a fluctu-
ating radiant intensity. This effect occurs simul-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 4
taneously in all parts of the spectrum studied.
The nature of flicker was observed with high-
speed motion pictures and electronic wave anal-
ysis of the output of photoelectric detectors.
The motion picture measurements indicate
that variation in projected flame area rather than
variation in radiance accounts for a large part of
the flicker of flames. Electronic wave analysis
provided flicker amplitude distribution curves
for the various flames studied. In many cases,
these curves have a sharp maximum at some
frequency between 3 and 15 cps. The ratio of the
rms flicker amplitude to the average radiant
intensity for various flames ranges from about
0.1 to about 0.4 for burning liquids. These results
indicate that flicker provides another valuable
distinguishing feature for detector design. Since
moving engine parts or other periodic phenomena
might cause fluctuations in the radiant flux,
flicker was not recommended for use alone as a
fire detector, but rather in combination with the.
characteristic rate of increase of radiant flux and
sufficient radiant intensity in the right spectral
region.
For further technical details, see A five-band
recording spectroradiometer, by C. S. McCamy,
Journ. Res. NBS 56 (5). May 1956 (RP 2678);
Principles of fire detection in aircraft engine spaces,
by W. F. Rorspr and C. 8. McCamy (may be pur-
chased from the Office of Technical Services, De-
partment of Commerce, Wasington 25, D. C.,
price, $3).
re ——_§_§_
GENETICS IN THE SERVICE OF MAN
With recent developments in genetics, science
now actually is creating new species of plants. It
has not yet succeeded in creating a new species of
animal, although this is theoretically possible by
the same methods. The fact remains, however,
that walls in nature have been broken down
which a few years ago were considered impreg-
nable except through very long natural processes.
This revolutionary advance is described by Dr.
Bentley Glass, professor of biology at The Johns
Hopkins University, in the most recent Annual
Report of the Smithsonian Institution.
“For a long time now,” Dr. Glass says, “‘man-
kind has substituted for the selection of nature
his own artificial selection of whatever chance
mutations appeared in his domestic animals and
cultivated plants and which seemed to him to be
desirable. It is thus that all the progress in plant
and animal breeding has been made, from the day
the first animal was tamed and the first seed
planted to the beginning of our own century.
What geneticists are now enabled to do is merely
to speed up this process a thousandfold and to
control and direct it more effectively.”
Actually, he says, the first man-made species
was created by a Russian geneticist, G. D. Kar-
pechenko, nearly 30 years ago. Karpechenko
crossed two different genera of plants, cabbage
and radish. The hybrid, as was to be expected,
was completely sterile. He then succeeded, by
techniques then in their infancy, in doubling the
chromosomes (strings or bundles of hereditary
units, or genes, such as are carried in the nuclei
of every plant and animal cell). As a result he
obtained in the next generation a perfectly fertile
form which he named Raphanobrassica. This
could be roughly translated as “rabbage.”’
Aprit 1957 RIVER BASINS
The new plant species, as was also to be ex-
pected, was worthless. It combined the prickly,
inedible leaves of the radish with the miserable
root system of the cabbage. But this was only a
beginning. The doubling of chromosomes now
ean be accomplished almost at will by means of
the drug colchichine, extracted from the Euro-
pean crocus and long used as a remedy for gout.
Thus geneticists can experiment with all sorts of
crosses between species and even genera and
some of these may be expected to be quite valu-
able.
“There is,’ Dr. Glass says, “no difficulty in
controlling the amount of genetic intermixture
by performing, on the one hand, the desired
crosses, and on the other by isolating and other-
wise preventing intermixture, just as man in the
past has controlled the interbreeding between
different breeds of dogs or cats.” Still, he stresses,
the planned breeding of man still is far in the
future, if it ever can be achieved.
“The basis of effective eugenics,” he says,
“must include not only an understanding of
evolutionary processes and the power to control
them; it must include also a far wider knowledge
of human genetics than now exists, and the ulti-
mate consideration by society of many questions
of human values.” There are difficulties in the
way, he emphasizes, which are likely to be over-
looked. It has been suggested, for example, that
it would be possible to eliminate hemophilia, the
bleeding disease so common in European royalty,
which is passed on in the female line but mani-
fests itself only in the male line.
It is possible that by controlled matings the
incidence of this and other hereditary maladies
could be greatly reduced. The fact remains that
ARCHEOLOGY
131
new mutations which result in the tragic malady
of hemophilia occur at the rate of about 1 in
50,000 individuals per generation; “that is,’’ he
says, “In a population of 50,000 persons 1 person
has a gene for hemophilia which was not inherited
from either parent, but instead arose by mutation
from a corresponding gene for normal blood
clotting. Hence, unless one could somehow pre-
vent mutation to it from occurring, no measures
can be successful in eradicating an undesirable
gene from the population. At best, its frequency
can be reduced to the level of the rate of mutation
to it.”” Hence the lowest limit of hemophilia is set
by mutation at 1 in 50,000 males.
Mutations, both good and bad, can be pro-
duced by ionizing radiation and by chemicals,
Dr. Glass points out. These, however, are alto-
gether too potent to be used on a human popula-
tion. Only one change in 500 to 1,000 improves
fitness to live in a given environment. The rest
are bad. The majority will be so-called recessives
which may remain hidden in the germ plasm for
generations—all the time accumulating to a level
when some of them will be brought together in
mating and show up in some of the offspring.
This might well be disastrous, he stresses, if
the present population of the world were broken
up into small units—such as might result from
another major war. The present trend, with ad-
vances in transportation and communication,
seems to be toward a unification of races and
peoples, a condition in which the inherited reces-
sives have a greatly reduced chance of coming to
the surface. In restricted populations, probably
with considerable inbreeding, this chance would
be greatly increased.
OO
RIVER BASINS
Evidence suggesting human occupation in the
Upper Hell’s Canyon region on the Snake River
over a period in excess of a thousand years was
obtained during the recent field season by arche-
ologists of a River Basins Survey party from the
Smithsonian Institution, working in areas to be
flooded by the Brownlee and Hell’s Canyon reser-
volrs.
Under the direction of Dr. Warren W. Cald-
well and George L. Coale, the party, supported by
funds provided by the Idaho Power Co., made an
interesting series of excavations in rock shelters,
ARCHEOLOGY
refuse deposits, and village areas. Most of the
material recovered came from four habitational
sites, two on the Oregon side of the Snake at
Robinette and two on the Idaho side at Big Bar.
The majority of the artifacts found indicate that
these sites date from the late prehistoric period
and the early period of European contact, but at
two of them there were items coming from much
earlier horizons. The general picture, according to
Smithsonian archeologists, is that of an early
expansion of Great Basin cultural features into
the Northwest and their later replacement by a
132
more dynamic cultural pattern working up-
stream form Mid-Columbia centers.
The artifacts collected during the digging show
that the people had a basically hunting-gathering
type of economy. They include large numbers of
projectile points, knife blades, scrapers, and other
stone tools. The implements were found in associ-
ation with quantities of deer and elk bones, indi-
cating marked dependence on the hunting of
large game animals. The presence of milling
stones shows that there was some utilization of
the many plant foods available in the area.
Implements associated with fishing are for the
most part lacking, but the abundance of fresh-
water mussel shells in kitchen middens suggests
that aquatic food had a place in their diet.
At an open camp site on Big Bar several house-
pit depressions were still evident and one of them
was excavated. A saucer-shaped floor measuring
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 4
approximately 25 feet in diameter, with a depth
of about one foot near the center, was uncovered.
The depression probably served as the base for a
light, possibly brush, superstructure. There was
no evidence of a more substantial, permanent-
type dwelling. Copper strips found slightly above
the floor level are a good indication that type of
structure was still in use at a time when European
trade goods were beginning to filter into the
region.
When the first Europeans arrived the area was
inhabited by a band of the Shoshoni known as
the “Mountain Sheep Eaters.” They were a
seasonally nomadic group of Indians who sub-
sisted mainly by hunting and gathering activ-
ities. They were last known to visit the region
regularly in the 1880’s, and their survivors now
live mostly on reservations in Idaho and Oregon.
SSE ——E
SOLAR CORONA
The corona—faint, tenuous envelope of the
sun which extends outward for about 2 million
miles from the star’s surface and has a tempera-
ture of at least a million degrees centigrade—
holds the key to many mysteries of solar phe-
nomena. This is the conclusion of Sir Harold
Spencer Jones, former Astronomer Royal of
Great Britain, in the most recent annual report
of the Smithsonian Institution. Especially is this
true of the radio wavelength radiations from the
sun at irregular intervals which cannot be ac-
counted for by the known temperature of the
solar surface. The ionosphere, or electrified layer
of the earth’s upper atmosphere from which
radio waves are bounced back to earth, is cre-
ated by radiations from the sun close to the
X-ray wavelength. The astronomer explains:
Theoretical investigations have led to the con-
clusion that the observed degree of ionization
[stripping of outer electrons off atmospheric
atoms] in the E-layer of the ionosphere requires
radiation whose intensity is of the order of 100,000
times that of a black body of a temperature
6,000° K. [that of the sun’s visible surface]. This
high intensity of radiation...is readily ac-
counted for by the high temperature of the corona.
There has been much speculation about the
mechanism by which the high temperature of the
corona is maintained. One theory attributes it to
the infall of interstellar dust, the kinetic energy
of the dust particle being distributed as heat
throughout the coronal matter. Another view is
that it is produced by magnetic processes, associ-
ated with magnetic fields on the sun and the emis-
sion of high-speed particles, the corona possibly
being heated by electric currents flowing through
it. A third suggestion is that sound waves are
generated by the turbulent motion of gases in the
sun’s atmosphere and that as these waves move
outward into more tenuous regions they develop
into shock waves, which produce the high tempera-
ture of the corona....
The increase in effective temperature from
centimeter to meter wavelengths that is required
to account for the observed intensities of radiation
on radio wavelengths from-a quiet sun, can be
explained on the assumption that the centimeter
waves originate in the level just above the visible
surface of the sun, while the meter waves [required
for ionospheric ionization] originate at a much
greater height, where the temperature is much
higher. If these latter waves were generated near
the surface of the sun they would be absorbed an
would be unable to escape into space.
— rr
At the tottom of all cosmic order lies the order of mathematics, the law that
turce tuo ts always four— P. Carus
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Phvlosophical Society of Washington «~.....-....5-<0-.+seseeseesses: CuEsteR H. Paes
Anthropological Society of Washington...............-.-.-0..se0000- Frank M. SETzLER
rp orIcaldsocieuy, Of WaSbINGtOM 5.1. secs. sci ccd cis ccs eiere simine ose HERBERT FRIEDMANN
WHemicslioociety Of Washington |. 2 .6.ceee.s cee secs comeenedecsie es Cuarues R. NabsER
Entomological Society of Washington.................-...-eeees Cart F. W. MuESEBECK
eine Ale Gre O2TAphiC SOCLOLY:.<-:.1<.<..2:6 + o:ereic.erein sie sleve ssi eiene.e eieiers @osis.an, eis ALEXANDER WETMORE
eM ore ag SOCIeGyTOL WaShINetON aaa. <n oe ea ceed cis cialcleeres syesessnaeiects Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FRepDsRICK O. CoE
Malesniipiagltis Oricall SOCIOL Y= = cero eta eds eater sioreiaiasele vate «susie aicieieces uP oe U.S. Grant, III
Pua CUES OCIELY, Ob WaShinetOnic. to5<5 6st + aeeysieave iscrad eeer eters Carrou E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furppo GRAVATT
Washington NOUIC UVa Ole ED LINEEIS peri ccee mercer scien = eee rates hae Hersert G. Dorsey
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ Arnoup H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers........ Howarp S. Bran
Helminthological Society of Washington..................e0eeees Donatp B. McMuuLen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHak. J. Petczar, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........................- Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Doveuas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorce A. Horrie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. Herpert C. VacHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research. .W1LLiam T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. FEF, N. FReNKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CHaRLEs S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
Page
Martuematics.—A note on values of a quadratic form. M.Marcus.. 97
PuystoLocy.—On the quantum efficiency of scotopic and photopic vision.
Ris@paRrk JONMSi 2). cach neineete eee aise ee 100
PuysioLtocy.—The electrogram of the turtle heart in situ and after
isolations POLAND Vin INARDONER ean cee ene eran 109
ZooLocy.—The new planktonic foraminiferal genus Tinophodella, and an
emendment of Globigerinita Bronnimann. ALFRED R. LOEBLICH,
Jr.; and HIRGEN) PAPPAW .0),.6.. 0.05 by asada se os ee 112
EnToMoLocy.—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States Na-
tional Museum, V: The Sabethini (Diptera, Culicidae). ALAN
STONE and KENNETH 1; KNIGHT: .:....:..1........ eee eee 117
HrRPETOLOGY.—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, 15: The herpetofauna of Somerset County, Md. CiypDE
FF RBD 2). RE Sk, hae eet ele! a ee a 127
—
| DAW?
VOLUME 47 May 1957 NUMBER 5
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
|
|
|
|
Published Monthly by the
VASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuestar H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EXSTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the firat
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. iinor these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The’ Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReupER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D.C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year...................-.-.------ $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22 incl. (21 numbers per vol.). .. 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
MonoararH No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’”’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................++--+--+- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
Single volumes!unbound)s27) 00020 ase Seeree secre cree cic ne ae aceeee eee 2.00
Single numbers)i)..7 2). o vaeeece oe oe omere seyret Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
' Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47
May 1957
No. 5
PHYSIOLOGY —The quantum character of light and its implications on visual
thresholds.1\ ERNEST BAuMGaARDT, Laboratoire de Physiologie Générale, Paris,
France. (Communicated by A. M. Stone.)
It is indeed a great honor for me to have
the opportunity to appear before such a dis-
tinguished gathering in the delightful sur-
roundings of this lovely city. I am very
erateful to the Washington Academy of
Sciences for the invitation extended to me,
and wish to take this occasion to offer my
sincere thanks.
The retina——The quantum character of
radiant energy absorption by matter was
recognized by Einstein in 1905; however, the
implications for the field of vision of this
important fact were recognized only much
later. I want first to sketch very rapidly a
picture of the retina, a highly schematic
cross section of which is shown in Fig. 1.
The sketch on the top shows receptor cells
that are called rods and cones. The cones
and the rods are all related to synapses which
then link up to these bipolar cells. The bi-
polar cells are linked by other synapses to
the ganglion cells, and the axones of the
ganglion cells are the fibers that we call the
optic nerve. In fact, there are other cells of
a horizontal nature whose ramifications ex-
tend over something of the order of a milli-
meter; and there are the so-called amacrine
cells whose ramifications don’t spread quite
so widely, but widely enough to form very
complicated connections. So there may be
one ganglion cell connected to a single cone,
or several cones connected to one single
ganglion cell, or several rods connected with
one or several cones to a single ganglion cell.
This very, very complicated tissue, which
is actually an extension of the brain, is only
1 Paper presented before the Washington
Academy of Sciences on May 17, 1956, as a part of a
Symposium on Quantum Relationships in Vision.
0.2 or 0.3 mm thick, and we know very little
about its function. This is only to give you
an idea of the extreme complication of the
beginning of the external visual process. The
visibility of a test stimulus depends on its
spectral composition. The dark adapted
eye shows a sensitivity curve which is prac-
tically that of the sensitive pigment of the
rods, the visual purple or rhodopsin. This
pigment seems to be the only one the pres-
ence of which in the human eye cannot be
denied. The only rod-free region of the
retina is a spot 50’ wide called the fovea.
The measurement by minutes and degrees
of arc is used so that we are not obliged to
convert everything into millimeters. By so
doing, we can ignore distances between the
object used for visual test and the eye.
Everywhere outside of the fovea, cones and
rods are mingled more or less randomly.
The highest visual sensitivity occurs in the
periphery of the dark adapted retina.
Rods and cones.—We all learned that rods
are generally considered to be much more
sensitive than cones; however, Baumgardt
has shown, in 1949, that the individual sen-
sitivity of foveal cones is of the same order
as that of the rods. In 1954, Arden and
Weale confirmed these findings in a more
precise manner. The way this kind of experi-
ment is done is as follows:
One chooses a test color and two retinal
locations outside and inside the fovea. Since
the foveal diameter is only about 50’, one
cannot use stimulus sizes larger than this. I
used stimulus sizes up to 45’ and I was not
able, when doing this type of experiment, to
use smaller ones than 5’. Thus, the parame-
ter, the variable of my experiment, was the
133
& 41?
JOURNAL OF THE
Fie. 1.—The layers of the retina (simplified
schematic sketch): 1, Pigment epithelium; 2,
cones and rods; 38, outer limiting membrane; 4,
5, nuclei and axones of cones and rods; 6, 7, bipolar
cells (a), horizontal cells (6), amacrine cells (c);
8, ganglion cells; 9, ganglion axones, i.e., optic
nerve fibers, 10, inner limiting membrane.
size of the test field, varying from 5’ to 45’.
I used two retinal locations, one within the
fovia and the other 15° outside of the fovea.
Then I measured the threshold by the varia-
tion of the intensity of light necessary to
yield a light sensation in 50 percent of the
stimulus presentations. For instance, when
presenting a flash of a given intensity 20
times, 50 percent probability of seeing
means that the observer, ten times out of
twenty, has seen the stimulus. Then, of
course, the other 10 times he didn’t see any-
thing. Now, establishing the threshold in
this manner for stimulus presentations inside
the fovea and outside the fovea, it is possible
to calculate the threshold quotient, the
numerator being the foveal threshold and
the denominator the extra-foveal threshold.
The quotient obtained for test diameters of
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 47, NO. 5
about 45’ is 130. When using test spot di-
ameters less than 45’, this quotient turns out
to be smaller. It decreases more and more as
smaller and smaller spots are used, until
finally a diameter of 5’ yields a quotient of
only 8. And now, when extrapolating these
curves roughly, we find that for very small
diameters, this quotient seems to be of the
order of one; of the order of one doesn’t mean
one, but it may be 0.5 or 2; anyhow, it is a
small number (Fig. 2). What does that
mean? Let us agree that whenever we find
that the outer part of the retina, where the
rods are the more important units, is more
sensitive than the fovea, the reason can not
be the intrinsic properties of rods and cones,
but it is due to the collaboration of receptors
that we stimulate simultaneously. Now we
know that the neural connexions are very
different in the periphery of the retina from
what they are in the center. We know that
in the peripheral retina many rods are
150
100
vo 5S 1
IS’ 20' 25’ 30° 35° 40° 45°
Fig. 2—X axis: Diameter of test spots. Y
axis: Foveal threshold as a multiple of extrafoveal
threshold. For small test spots, foveal and extra-
foveal thresholds tend toward values of the same
order.
May 1957
linked together with one ganglion cell. This
collaboration is largely lacking between the
cones in the fovea and that is why rods ap-
pear to be much more sensitive than cones,
when in fact they are not. When taking in
account the volumes of cones and rods, we
may state that the sensitivity of their pig-
ments is nearly identical. This is an impor-
tant point.
Light and quanta—In 1942, Hecht,
Shlaer, and Pirenne determined the smallest
light energy necessary to elicit a sensation.
They used extra-foveal test spots of 10’
diameter and light of wavelength of 507
millimicrons applied in brief flashes. Meas-
uring the liminal light energy reaching the
cornea and taking into account the energy
losses of transmission through the cornea
and absorption by the light receptors, as well
as the pigment epithelium, they found that
the necessary radiant energy absorbed by the
rod receptors equals roughly 5 to 14 quanta.
They proved also that the fluctuations of
the sensitivity of the eye at the absolute
threshold are due to the quantic and random
nature of light. It is a known fact that in an
extremely feeble light source, the intensity
of which may be controlled with the highest
accuracy, there do not exist a constant num-
ber of quanta. Thus, in a given flash of 6
quanta mean intensity, there may be 5
quanta, or 8, or even as few as 3. One can
calculate the probability that a given num-
ber of quanta will be absorbed in the re-
ceptors during a flash of given mean inten-
sity. It turns out that the probability that
there will be one quantum absorbed or two
quanta absorbed, and so on, can be calcu-
lated by resorting to the Poisson distribu-
tion, or what is sometimes referred to as the
law of small numbers.
Hecht, Shlaer, and Pirenne, in their re-
searches, presented observers with flashes
of light. Varying the test brightness ran-
domly for each separate presentation, yields
a variation in the frequency with which the
stimulus is seen. By this method, they ob-
tained frequency of seeing curves of the type
shown in the next slide. This is not an origi-
nal graph, but it interprets very well the sort
of thing that Hecht, Shlaer, and Pirenne did.
If we consider a randomly occurring event
BAUMGARDT: QUANTUM CHARACTER OF LIGHT
0 05 10 15 20
Fie. 3.—Poisson curves. X axis: Multiples of
threshold, i.e., 50 percent positive responses
yielding value of the independent variable (for
instance number of light quanta). Y axis: Pro-
portion of positive responses. n: number of alea-
tory independent events (for instance, number of
absorbed light quanta) to be absorbed in order to
yield a positive response. With increasing n, the
slope of the response curve increases. Thus, the
slope of the latter is a measure of the number n.
and we know only that the number of these
events necessary to elicit a response is a small
one, then we may calculate the probability
that for a given mean number of events the
response will occur. Thus, in probability of
seeing functions, for instance, if 5 quanta are
necessary for a light sensation and I previde
a mean stimulation of 5 quanta, then some-
times 4 will be absorbed, sometimes 5, some-
times more and sometimes not at all. When
less than 5 quanta are absorbed, the observer
will not see the stimulus; when 5 or more
than 5 quanta are absorbed, he will see it.
Such Poisson curves are shown in Fig. 3.
One of these curves is a plot of n, which
means that only 1 random event is neces-
sary for the elicitation of a response. Here
are also curves for n 2, n 3, n 4, and n 15.
One notices that the slopes of these curves
become steeper as the number 7 increases.
In an experiment such as that performed by
Hecht, Shlaer, and Pirenne, they compared
their experimental curves with Poisson
curves such as I am showing you, and they
found that the slope of the experimental
curve varied between n’s of 5 and 7. There
were three observers; for one of them the n
was 5; for the other, 6; and for a third it was
136
7. They used a test spot whose diameter was
10’. In this case, the retinal image covers
about 500 rods. The number of quanta nec-
essary to elicit a light sensation being of the
order of 5, 6 or 7, it becomes clear that visual
excitation in this case did not require that 2
quanta be absorbed in the same rod. The
probability of 2 quanta out of 5, 6, or 7 being
absorbed by the same rod would have been
very, very small in view of the fact that
some 500 rods were concerned. Now that is
a very important fact! It means that when
one rod absorbs one quantum, something
happens; and what happens? Very probably
‘a local potential arises in the retina and sev-
eral of these local potentials will yield a light
sensation by a complex process about which
we do not have entire and complete knowl-
edge, but the beginning of which we know
from a large number of experiments in
electrophysiology. This important result
closed Hecht’s investigations on the quan-
tum relationships in visual threshold.
The studies in vitro by Schneider, Good-
eve, and Lythgoe showed, in 1939, that the
quantum yield in the bleaching of visual
purple, the light-sensitive pigment of the
rods called rhodopsin, is independent of the
wavelengths of stimulation over a wide part
of the spectrum, and that it is probably
unity, which means that no secondary reac-
tion will lead to further rhodopsin molecules
being bleached as the result of the initial
absorption of one quantum. One quantum
will bleach one molecule of rhodopsin.
The two-quantum theory.—In 1944, Van der
Velden published a paper on the probabilis-
tic theory of threshold vision. He showed
that n, which is the number of quanta ab-
sorbed to reach the threshold level, must be
two. In this case, and this case only, the
index which characterizes the area effect for
red light and for large extra-foveal stimuli
can be shown to be equal to 0.5. The basic
type of experiment employed here is the fol-
lowing one: Using a given wavelength of
light, a given duration time, and a given
retinal projection (location of the stimulus),
the variation of the diameter of the test spot
is the only parameter. When the diameter of
the test spot increases, its retinal image in-
creases likewise. One measures the threshold
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 5, |
brightness; i.e., the mean brightness of the
test spot, that produces 50 percent of positive
responses, and then one may plot a function »
of threshold intensity versus diameter. In
the peripheral retina this type of experiment
always produces the following results: In
deep red light, the relation A°> X I =))
const. called square root law is found to hold
where A is the area and I the intensity of the
hight (flux per unit area). One finds that this
relation holds for all test spots subtending
angles of more than 6’ approximatively. In
any light other than deep red, this relation
holds only for tests or test spots subtending
angles of more than one degree. When test-
ing near the fovea, this value decreases and |
is, for example, only about 20’ at 7° out of |
the fovea.
This is one type of area effect observed.
Since 1947, Baumgardt has treated the same
subject from essentially a physiological
point of view. He emphasizes that n cannot
be equal to 1. The absorption of one single |
quantum cannot determine a light sensation
because if it did there could not be any area
effect. The sensitivity would not depend on
the diameter of the test spot, whether it is
big or small. If one single quantum were |
sufficient to elicit a sensation, there could not |
be any law relating one size of test spot to |
another. So we know that n must be greater |
than 1. By one kind of experiment, we find
n equal to 2; by another, we find n equal to
4, or 5, 6, 7, or sometimes even a little bit |
more. For test stimuli smaller than those to |
which the square root law applies, a full |
integration law applies. This means that for |
very small test diameters, the law becomes
A X I = const. and this is true for red hght |
everywhere outside of the fovea and for |
test spot diameters of less than 6’. It is also |
true for any hight other than deep red hight |
for test spot diameters smaller than about |
1°, except very near the fovea where these
values change somewhat because the neural |
structure of the retina is changing rapidly in |
that region.
In a region of about 15° to 20° outside the
fovea, which is called by Polyak the ‘near
Periphery’’, where most of the measures of |
this sort have been done, rods and cones |
form clusters of about 100 units, the number
May 1957 BAUMGARDT:
of cones being about 139 the number of rods.
Every cluster is linked through the bipolar
cells to a little ganghon cell whose ram-
ification spreads over about 4’ diameter. If
we make the very reasonable assumption
that every local potential provoked in the
receptor by quantum absorption cannot
reach any ganglion cell except that to which
its cluster is linked, then the full integration
law means that when there are a certain
number of light quanta absorbed in such a
unit, this will yield a constant response
whatever the spot in which they are actually
absorbed. If this is a quasi-independent unit,
this means it is a unit where ramifications of
one ganglion cell allow neural responses to
collect. Now, if say 5 of those local responses
are necessary, it doesn’t matter where inside
this spot the 5 nervous responses arise. Local
responses arise to form propagated action
potentials. Experiment shows in fact that
whenever the diameter of a red test spot is
raised over 4’ or 6’ which is just approxi-
mately the diameter of a little ganglion cell’s
ramifications, the threshold energy begins
to increase and that means that the number
of quanta to be absorbed at the threshold
of vision increases. This happens because
now only a part of the light quanta necessary
to elicit a propagated action potential and,
by the way, threshold light sensation, can
be absorbed in a given quasi-independent
unit.
Call n the number of quanta the absorp-
tion of which in quasi-independent units is
required at the threshold of vision. Call the
number of stimulated quasi-independent
units /, and call g the number of quanta ab-
sorbed in this stimulated area. Then com-
pute the probability for n quanta or more
to be absorbed. The statistical calculation?
for which no hypothesis whatever nor any
parameters are used, yields the following
function: A°->-I = const., the area A being
_ proportional to the number k of units com-
posing it. What about the number n? Any
visual experiment done with the condition
that the test size used corresponds to more
than one quasi-independent unit, yields the
square root law (as I showed you before)
A°° X I = const. with a very good approxi-
2 See Appendix.
QUANTUM CHARACTER
OF LIGHT 137
mation—even an excellent approximation!
This yields so high an accuracy and has
been tested by so many investigators, that
there can be no possible doubt. Thus, the
number of quanta to be absorbed in one unit
to yield a light sensation, must be equal to 2.
There always exists this apparent contra-
diction—this discrepancy with respect to
response curves—and I will come back to
this point.
With peripheral test stimuli of any colour
other than red, Graham and Margaria, as
well as Baumgardt, observed the constancy
of test energy—that means the full integra-
tion law—for areas whose diameter does not
exceed about 1°. This means that the re-
sponding quasi-independent units must
spread over about 1°. But does such a unit
exist? It does indeed. It is a giant ganglion
cell described by Polyak who assigned to it
a mean ramification diameter of about 70’.
It is the same type of unit the spikes of
which have been reported by Granit in the
cat’s retina, as shown by Rushton in 1949.
We know that it covers about 10,000 to
20,000 rods and about 200 to 300 little
ganglion cells in the retina of man. For test
areas larger than 1°, the square root law
applies, as was shown by Graham and Mar-
garia for test diameters up to 3°, and by
Baumgardt for test diameters up to 8°. Thus,
it is highly probable that 2 quanta absorbed
in any quasi-independent unit yield a nerve
impulse or a volley of impulses reaching the
visual cortex. Since the rods are practically
insensitive to extreme red light of wave-
length higher than 670 millimicrons, the
absorption of that quanta takes place in the
red receptors. Owing to the neural organiza-
tion of these latter, the absorption of the 2
quanta must take place inside a given clus-
ter. This cluster has about 100 units, 3 of
which approximately, are extra-foveal
cones, and the nerve impulse is limited to
the small ganglion cell associated with this
cluster. On the other hand, for a neural net-
work of rods incorporating about 200
clusters associated with the ramifications of
a single giant ganglion cell, the full integra-
tion law holds for test spots of 1° diameter
for all but extreme red radiations.
Improved quantic theory.—I cannot discuss
138
here the important effects related to duration
of stimulation. Let me just mention briefly
that the absorption of light quanta must
take place during a definite time interval for
the greatest efficiency. If the duration of the
stimulus is more than some critical interval
which depends upon retinal location, test
colour and spot size, then the threshold
energy increases. Quantum considerations
enable us to predict certain time effects in a
manner similar to the one that I have demon-
strated relative to area effects. There re-
mains one major problem—one space law
and one time law of threshold vision point
towards n = 2, whereas nearly all the re-
sponse curves yield values of n of the order
of 4 or 5 or so. This dilemma is only an ap-
parent one as was shown in 1952 by Baum-
gardt.
Anyone who has measured visual thresh-
olds knows that there are very great indi-
vidual fluctuations. One may note variations
of n from 4 to 7 within the same observer,
and there are marked differences between
the mean n’s obtained by different observ-
ers. There is much evidence for the view
that such variability is not of a retinal, but
instead, of cortical origin, because an un-
trained observer yields higher values than
he does later when he has been trained. This
must mean that psychological conditions
similar to attention, feeling and so on affect
the threshold. So I am assuming that the
two-quanta hypothesis applies strictly to
the retina, but that possibly more than one
pair of quantum absorptions may be neces-
sary for a perception. We must prove in this
case that the theoretical area- and time-laws
would be the same as in the case of a rigorous
two-quanta hypothesis.
We know that the area effects, or the time
effects as well, all argue for n = 2, but on the
other hand, we derive from experiments 7’s
which are larger than 2—say 5, for instance.
Let us make the assumption that to yield a
sensation there must be absorbed 2 quanta
by a quasi-independent unit, but that this
must happen twice or three times. Project-
ing stimulus test spots which cover, say, 10
quasi-independent units, 2 quanta absorbed
in one of them give rise to a propagated
nerve potential. But, we may suppose that
this does not necessarily elicit a light sensa-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
tion and that possibly another nerve poten-
tial must arise by the absorption of 2 other
quanta in the same or another of these units,
and, maybe, even by a third pair of quanta.
Therefore, it may be that 2, 3, or 4 action
potential are necessary to elicit a light sen-
sation; but when we make this assumption,
we must prove not that it is true—for we
cannot prove that—but we must prove that
it is compatible with the facts. Well, to do
this, we need only to prove mathematically
that such a scheme would yield the same
area law as that obtained when assuming the
absorption of only 2 quanta.
40
yf gy 10 40 100
Fic. 4.—k: Number of quasi-independent units
stimulated. g: Number of quanta to be absorbed
in order to yield a 50 percent probability for
threshold excitation. I under the assumption
that three quanta (the first and the second forming
one pair and the second and the third another
pair) or four quanta forming two pairs are to be
absorbed in order to yield a cortical threshold
response. III under the assumption that one pair
is sufficient. II and IV the square root law A®-> x
I = const (Piper’s law). The latter, i.e., the ob-
served figures are practically indistinguishable
from the calculated figures I and III, especially
with increasing k, that is, with larger stimuli.
I did this calculation and I found that this
is really with a very good approximation
of the case (lig. 4). I calculated such a law
for the case where not 2 quanta, but 2 pairs
of quanta are to be absorbed (or 3 quanta
during a time interval such that the first
and the second, as well as the second and the
third are to be considered as pairs), and you
see that the curves it yields are practically
identical to those of the square root curve.
Here, the greatest difference that we may
note is less than one tenth of a logarithmic
unit, and that is the case for k = 4, or, in
other words, for a very small test light.
When the test spot is much larger then, you
May 1957
see, the curves become identical. This means
that from our experiments we cannot decide uf
we are concerned with one double quantum ab-
sorption or with several double quantum
absorptions; and so it has been proved that
there is no contradiction between the quantic
explanation of the square root law on the one
hand, and the quantic explanation on the fre-
quency of seeing curve on the other. This is an
important point because it gave rise for
years and years to discussions that were
sometimes quite violent. We may state that
it is difficult not to ascribe this square root
area law or this square root time law to the
existence of a retinal mechanism implying
the spatially and temporally limited coinci-
dence of two chance events. It is hard to
believe that these events do not invoke neu-
ral potentials caused by the absorption of
light quanta. On the other hand, we know
that a threshold response generally does not
require the absorption of much more than
about 4 or 5 quanta. We must conclude that
the 2-quantum theory applies correctly to
the retina and that the foregoing hypothesis
allows for the variability of liminal quan-
tum absorption number n; and thus, experz-
ments on the quantum theory of threshold
vision are consistent.
Adaptation problems.—Van der Velden
and Bouman have published a number of
papers concerning the results of contrast con-
tours of very different types which were dis-
cussed from the point of view of the 2 quanta
theory. One of the most important features
of their results is the following: The quantum
number n increases with increasing back-
ground brightness. When the eye is adapted
to a certain luminous level and we select a
spot on the background and at this spot add
a certain known brightness, and then ask
the observer to say if he has or has not de-
tected the increment, the n obtained in this
manner increases with increasing back-
ground brightness and seems to reach a
constant value of about 20 at low photopic
brightness levels. This must mean that the
quantum demand increases so that now 20
quanta must be absorbed instead of 2, in
order to yield a propagated nerve impulse or
a volley of such impulses. At these levels the
probability of absorbing a quantum is the
same as it is at threshold and the bleaching
BAUMGARDT: QUANTUM CHARACTER OF LIGHT 139
of rhodopsin is practically nonexistant and
may be neglected. One would like to inter-
pret this fact by means of a neural inhibition
effect probably located in the retina. I shall
come back to this point.
The question arises as to whether the
quantum theory of vision can account for the
mechanism of dark adaptation. The first
suggestions concerning an improvement of
Hecht’s photochemical theory which as-
sumes that dark adaptation is entirely due
to the accumulation of visual purple in the
rods, seem to have been made by Lythgoe
in 1940. He suggested that a part of light
adaptation might be due to the reduction of
retinal summation. In 1943, De Vries
pointed out that because of the inevitable
fluctuation around the mean number of
quantum absorbed in a given time and in a
given area of the retina, the differential
threshold for brightness must necessarily
increase as intensity level is raised, even if
the amount of photo-sensitive substance in
the retina remains constant. In 1948, Rose
published a paper that related the sensitivity
performance of the human eye to an absolute
scale. The author considered that the limits
of precision of every visual process are de-
termined partly by fluctuations of different
order, especially physiological processes.
His treatment of the differential threshold
shows clearly that one cannot reasonably im-
agine theories of vision which dispose arbi-
trarily of excitation thresholds of different reti-
nalreceptors and of photochemical reactions. Dr.
Jones will probably review in detail this very
interesting work. Rose’s discussion covers
the adaptation range between absolute
threshold and 2,000 trolands. This means
normal light at room level. He proved that
for this very, very large range, the variation
of concentration of the photosensitive pig-
ment must be less than a factor 10, whereas
the variation of the sensitivity of the retina
is a very large figure of the order of ten
thousands. Thus, the bleaching of rhodopsin
cannot account for the extraordinary sensi-
tivity of vision in this large range.
In 1948, Baumgardt showed that when
adapted to a brightness of 1/1,000 ml, or
about 1,000 times the threshold of bright-
ness, the differential intensity threshold is
about 100 times the absolute threshold.
140
fe)
Si60
x
=
2
Gl20
a
<
>
fe} 5)
“B80 3
a z£
ws J
a iS
rd
ae :
fe) a
a fe}
°
SO 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 J
TEMPORAL DEGREES NASAL
Fic. 5—The points are Rushton’s figures of
rhodopsin density measured in the living human
eye. The curve represents Wsterberg’s figures of
rod density in a horizontal meridian of the human
retina.
However, calculations show that this back-
eround brightness corresponds to the ab-
sorption of less than 1 quantum per rod per
second; thus it appears that rhodopsin con-
centration is practically constant even up to
photopic levels, for every rod contains about
20,000,000 molecules of rhodopsin. Even if
during light adaptation there were no regen-
eration of rhodopsin at all, there would be
less than 50 percent loss of sensitivity after
5 minutes adaptation to a brightness of
about 30 ml, which represents normal room
lighting levels whereas the loss really ob-
served is more than 99.99 per cent. Rhodop-
sin concentration cannot control the sensi-
tivity of the eye up to moderate photopic
levels. How then do we explain that the
area effect is a function of the adaptation
state of the eye, for it is as has been proved
by a large number of scientists, such as
Bouman, then Doeschatte, Baumgardt, Ar-
den and Weale, and Pirenne? For the time
being only the assumption that dark adap-
tation is essentially a neural phenomenon
seems to provide an adequate interpretation
of the experimental results. Since 1952,
Rushton has published several papers on the
measure of rhodopsin concentration in the
living eye. Unfortunately, time is too short
to allow a description of his ingenious appa-
ratus and the details of his work.
Fig. 5 shows rhodopsin density that he
measured along the horizontal meridian of
the human retina. There appears to be an
exact parallelism between the rod density
as measured by QOsterberg, and the rhodop-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 5
sin density as measured by Rushton. Fig. 6
shows the time course of regeneration in the
retina of man. Time is plotted along the X
axis from the beginning of dark adaptation,
and the Y axis shows the percentage regen-
eration of rhodopsin lost by foregoing light
adaptation. In fact, this slide shows that
after 7 minutes dark adaptation following
an intense light adaptation period, rhodop-
sin is already regenerated to 50 percent,
whereas the rod threshold reached is very,
very far from having this level in so short a
time.
Conciusion—Let me now sum up very
rapidly by giving some brief general conclu-
sions about what we know in this field. The
supporters of a classical photochemical
theory of vision, for instance, Mote, Rio-
pelle, and Meyer, 1950, state that the proc-
ess of dark adaptation is entirely due to the
accumulation of rhodopsin in the rods. This
assumption being incompatible with the fact
that in the scotopic range the rhodopsin
concentration remains practically constant,
George Wald suggested in 1954 that very
small variations of rhodopsin concentration
may provoke important sensitivity varia-
tions, as a result of the laminar structure of
100; nes
50
O pemees L
0) 25 30 mins
Fic. 6.—X axis: Time in minutes after offset of
a light adapting stimulus. Y axis: Percent of re-
generated rhodopsin as measured by Rushton in
the dark-adapting human eye. Seven minutes after
onset of dark-adaptation, 50 percent of the rho-
dopsin decomposed by light adaptation are re-
generated. Thus, the threshold should have fallen
to twice the final dark adapted level, if rhodopsin
density alone is concerned. But, in fact, the
measured threshold at 7 minutes after offset of
the adapting stimulus is many hundred times
greater than the final value.
5 1OlaS
May 1957
the rods. His really very ingenious hypothe-
sis has however been proved to be inconsist-
ent with the experiments and he aban-
doned it. The supporters of a neural photo-
chemical theory object that even improved,
photochemical theories are unable to explain
the area effect, receptor field size variations
during dark adaptation and meta-contrast.
I cannot explain in detail this very interest-
ing effect, but IKuffler’s work on neural
responses of the intact cat’s retina has dem-
onstrated the neural character of this effect,
studied especially by Fry, Piéron, and by
Fry and Alpern. The purely photochemical
theories, say supporters of neuro-photo-
chemical theory, cannot explain why con-
trast threshold decreases during several
minutes of strong light adaptation as shown
by Baker in 1949. (Fig. 7.) When we adapt
ourselves to intense light, we should think,
according to the exclusively photochemical
theory of light adaptation, that our threshold
would increase immediately—but it does not.
It decreases first for 3’ and then increases.
One would think that the first part of the
curve is due to a neural effect and the second
part due to bleaching of a photosensitive
pigment, as shown in Fig. 7. The supporters
of a neural, photochemical theory also invoke
the fact that very slow adaptation is ob-
served for other sense organs—the ear, for
instance, where no photochemical nor any
comparable process can take place, and
where slow neural processes seem to be the
only explanation for the time being. None
of the supporters of the neural, photochemi-
cal theory has so far proposed a complete
numerical scheme because our knowledge of
nervous processes in the retina is very in-
complete. The synthesis of their suggestions,
which takes into account quantum relations
—the authors quoted as being Lythgoe, De
Vries, Ségal, Rose, Baumgardt, Van der
Velden, Pirenne, Aguilar, Bouman and ten
Doeschatte, Rushton, Piéron, and Weale—
yields a picture of the light adaptation
processes measured by increment thresholds
that seems to follow a pattern, the essential
features I shall resume. Let me point out
clearly that this is a research program rather
than anything else. Its only goal can be to
show that it would be prudent to try to un-
derstand light adaptation not only from the
BAUMGARDT: QUANTUM CHARACTER OF LIGHT
141
point of view of the photo-sensitive relations,
but to take into account effects due to the
underlying nervous structure and related to
quantum effects. This very, very rough
picture should give only an indication of the
paths which might be used to seek out new
facts—not new theories. Of theories there are
enough.
§000 photons
Al
Log Threshold
a 200 400 600 800 1000
Fic. 7.—Howard D. Baker’s figures for differen-
tial threshold variation as a function of time of
exposure to an adapting field: ———-. Possible
explanation of this time curve by simultaneous
action of photochemical decomposition:
and of decreasing nervous inhibition 1.e., decreas-
ing glare: — — — -
4a— seconds
The increased noise in the visual system
contributed by quantic fluctuation is depend-
ent on the number N, the number of ab-
sorbed quanta. The amount of noise will
always be proportional to the square root of
this number; thus, if 1,000,000 quanta are
absorbed in a given time in a given area,
there will be a mean fluctuation of about
1,000. There will always be such a fluctua-
tion, which must necessarily increase the
differential threshold because the brain can-
not follow this fluctuation—otherwise a
stable impression would be impossible—and
so there must be nervous mechanism that
regulate this perception. After this effect
has been set up—and it is set up at low-
est levels—adaptation begins. A nervous
inhibition decreases the cadency of action
potentials delivered by the ganglion cells,
and decreases the size of the quasi-indepen-
dent units. During this stage quantic fluc-
tuation continues to act, as well as at later
stages, and pupil contraction appears which
also is a barrier to limit the number of light
quanta entering the eye. At mean photopic
levels, or even higher, photochemical bleach-
ing begins and becomes important at the
142 JOURNAL OF THE
level of 1,000 to 10,000 trolands. At such
levels the bleaching of the photosensitive
pigment remains the last and the most eff-
cient barrier against extreme physiological
light intensities, which otherwise might pro-
voke too intense a neural activity and thus
cause injury.
APPENDIX
CALCULATION OF PROBABILITY OF QUANTA
ABSORPTION AS A FUNCTION OF THE NUMBER
OF QUASI-INDFPENDENT UNITS AND TOTAL
NUMBER OF QUANTA ABSORBED.
n minimum number of quanta to be ab-
sorbed in receptors to reach threshold.
N average number of quanta absorbed in
receptors during a flash.
q number of quanta absorbed in receptors
during a given flash.
q <n the flash is not seen
q 2 n the flash is seen
probability for g quanta to be absorbed
during a given flash, V being the mean
number of absorbed quanta.
Pwiq
ee vq probability for a flash to be seen.
qaen
k number of stimulated quasi-independent
units.
k!
Goa number of combinations allowing for
i only 0 or 1 quantums out of q quanta
being absorbed in each of k quasi-inde-
pendent units.
kK? number of possible combinations.
k!
Pyg=l= @—a probability for 2 or more
quanta to be absorbed in
at least one unity
Pig
200 800
= 22 = 52
at threshold: 2 a 9 a A = 102 | = 202
xa || X<2
k!
Be —— B= 10) 00) 1201 —m10)|40,—=720
EXD ES S25 SS SRB IL Sem
Prq| 0.5| 0.599 | 0.618 | 0.626 | 0.629
The probability of seeing Px,q is shown to be
nearly constant if k > 2 and J proportional to
Vk.
This means that the area A—which is propor-
tional to the number k& of stimulated quasi-
independent units it contains—is related to the
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
threshold flash intensity J by the formula A°* x
I = const.
This is the so called Piper’s law which is effee-
tively observed in all experiments. Thus, the
quanta hypothesis succeeds to predict a law
whose existence has never been explained before;
and to do so, it does not use any arbitrary or de-
rived parameter.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
{If not otherwise specified,
in English.]
AcuiLar, M., and Yunra, J. Journ. Anal. Real.
Soc. Exp. Fisica y Quimica, ser. A: Fisica,
49: 281. 1953. (In Spanish; English summary.)
AupERN, Matuew. Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 48:
648. 1953.
ArpEN, G. B., and Weatez, R. A. Journ. Physiol.
125: 417. 1954.
Baker, Howarp, D.
172. 1949.
BaumearptT, E. L. M.
269. 1948.
Rev. Opt Théor.
1949. (In French.)
Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 148: 786. 1949.
(In French.)
Naturw. 39: 388. 1952. (In German.)
Ann. Psych. 58 (2): 431. 1958. (In French.)
——— and Sraar, J. Ann. Psych. 54: (43-44):
54. 1947.
Bouman, M. A. Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 40: 825.
1950.
—— and TEN DorscHATTE.
126: 222. 1953.
——— and VELDEN, H. A. VAN DER.
Soc. Amer. 38: 570. 1948.
GrauaM, C., and MareGarta, R. Amer. Journ.
Physiol. 113: 299, 1935.
Hecut, §8., SHLAER, S., and PIRENNE,
Journ. Gen. Physiol. 25: 819, 1942.
Lyrucor, R. J. Brit. Journ. Ophthalm. 24: 21.
1940.
More, F. A., Rioprute, A. J., and Meyer.
Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 40: 584. 1950.
Pirron, H. Journ. Psychol. 32: 1. 1953. (In
French.)
Prrenne, M. H. Brit. Med. Bull. 9: 61. 1953.
——— and Denton, E. J. Nature 170: 1039. 1952.
Ross, ALBERT. Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 38: 196.
1948.
Rusuton, W. A. H. Nature 164: 7438. 1949.
Journ. Physiol. 117: 47. 1952.
——— CampBELL, Haains, and BRINDLEY. Op-
tica 1: 183. 1955.
SCHNEIDER, GOODEVE, and LYTHGOE.
Soc. 170: 102, 1939.
Veupen, H. A. vAN per. Physica 11: 179. 1944.
(In Dutch; English summary.)
Vries, Hu. pg. Physica 10: 553. 1948.
Experimenta 4: 205. 1948. In German;
English summary.)
Wap, GrorGe. Science 119: 887.
listed papers are
Journ. Opt. Soc. Amer. 39:
Journ. Gen. Physiol]. 31:
et Instr. 28: 453, 661.
Ophthalmologica
Journ. Opt.
M. H.
Proc. Roy.
1954.
May 1957
FAUST: MONTMORILLONITE VARIETY GALAPEKTITE
143
GEOLOGY .—A< study of the montmorillonite variety galapektite,| GEorGE T. Faust,
U.S. Geological Survey.
(Received March 29, 1957)
HISTORICAL
Clay mineralogy is unfortunately beset
with a multitude of names, many ill-defined,
others misapplied and some assigned to one
or more of the well-established clay mineral
species. Galapektite is one of the names
that has been applied to two different
mineral species. It is the purpose of this
paper to review the previous usage, add
some new data on analyzed material from
the type locality, and recommend discon-
tinuance of the name by relegating it to
the synonomy.
Breithaupt (1832) introduced the name
“Galapektit” with the following descrip-
tion?:
Species: Galapektit—Breithaupt. Resembles
heavy cream; so called halloysite.* Compact
masses with a conchoidal fracture, and com-
monly with cracks. Greasy feel. Luster waxy, be-
coming shining in the streak. Streak white. Color
white in blue and green shades. Transparent on
thin edges becoming more so, after being placed
in water.
H = 214 to 234, sometimes soft.
G = 2.128 (from Angleur).
G = 2.142 (from Bannat—with native copper).
Breithaupt was accordingly completely
aware that two different clay minerals were
present at Angleur in Belgium, the one
halloysite, the other the mineral he called
galapektite.
Le Chatelier (1887) examined a series of
clay minerals by means of a_ technique
hitherto unusued in the identification of
clays, namely, thermal analysis. The sample
of clay mineral from Angleur studied by Le
Chatelier is definitely identified as halloy-
site by the chemical analysis in Table 1
(Number 1) and his dehydration study.
Le Chatelier did not call this clay by the
name galapektite but considered that he
studied halloysite.
1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S.
Geological Survey.
2 A free translation is included here because
Breithaupt’s book is not generally available.
* Under the name of halloysite, from the same
locality, Angleur near Littich (Liége), I have
found two remarkably different minerals.”
Dana (1892) states that galapektite is
the halloysite of Angleur and quotes the
analysis of Le Chatelier. There is a misprint
in his description where the spelling galapec-
tite is used.
Hintze (1897) follows Breithaupt and
draws attention to the observation of two
different clay minerals at Angleur.
Brendler (1912) refers to galapektite
as white-greenish white to gray-white masses
from Belgium.
Ross and Kerr (1934) in their study of
halloysite and allophane investigated gala-
pektite. They examined specimens of hal-
loysite from the type locality Angleur,
Liége Province, Belgium, and also galapek-
tite from Angleur. They identified galapek-
tite as montmorillonite on the basis of
optical examination and noted that ‘X-ray
diffraction patterns of galapektite also
agree with patterns of the type montmorill-
mite’.
Strunz (1941) stated that galapektite is
probably identical with halloysite.
TaBLe 1.—CuHrEmMICAL ANALYSIS OF HALLOYSITE
AND MONTMORILLONITE VARIETY GALAPEKTITE
FROM ANGLEUR, 2 Km SourHwest or LiInGE
(Ltrricu), Bretagium, AND or A MonrMmoriL-
LONITE FROM MISSISSIPPI
Mineral Halloysite Galapektite |Montmorillonite
Constituent Analysis *1 Analysis *% 2 Analysis *3
SiOs 46.3 50.86 50.39
AleO3 | 39.5 18.76 17.37
Fe20; = 2.07 2.84
FeO _— n.d. Trace
MgO — 3.48 4.56
CaO = 1.76 1.29
Na.0 |_ — 10.37} 46
K.0 { _ 04
H.0- {14.3} n.d. 13.31
H.0* 22.34 10.11
TiOz = Trace —_
Total 100.1% 99.64% 100.37
Analyst Henri Le Cha- Jobn G. Fair- | R. E. Stevens
telier child
Notes H20 below
250°C = 8.5%
144 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ross and Hendricks (1945) published an
analysis of the galapektite from Angleur,
Belgium and computed its formula to be
Ke) OAT
fl
[Mg.sg Fe 13+ Alj.ss] [Siz.sg Al.i2] O10 (OH)
Hey (1950) comments that galapektite
is a “synonym of halloysite, but some
specimens are montmorillonite.”’
In summary it seems that Breithaupt
(1832) was clearly aware that two different
minerals occurred at Angleur, one halloysite,
the other he named galapektite. Le Chatelier
(1887) studied and reported on the halloy-
site from Angleur and in his work makes no
mention of galapektite. Ross and Kerr
(1934) and Ross and Hendricks (1945)
found both halloysite and galapektite in
specimens from the type locality. It was
apparently Dana (1892) who confused the
nomenclature by correlating Le Chatelier’s
halloysite with the name galapektite of
Breithaupt. Dana also used two spellings
for the locality, Angleur and Anglar, and the
latter, which is erroneous, has unfortunately
crept into the literature of clay mineralogy.
378
169
Differential temperature
150
VOL. 47, NO. 5
My colleague Clarence 8. Ross turned over
to me some of the material used for the
chemical analysis and suggested that J
study it by DTA and X-ray methods.
DESCRIPTION AND CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Galapektite. Locality, Angleur, Liége
Province, Belgium. Sample prepared by C.
S. Ross for analysis. Color pinkish buff
(Ridgway). U. 8. Nat. Mus. no, 4777.
Analysis 2 in Table 1.
Montmorillonite. Locality, Husband farm,
Lemon, Smith County, Miss. Sample pre-
pared by C. 8. Ross for analysis. Dense,
translucent material, olive-buff (Ridgway)
in color. Bentonite. Analysis 3, in Table 1.
These two montmorillonites are nearly
identical in chemical composition and
typical of montmorillonite. Their formulas
further express their similarity:
Galapektite Ca
[Mg 29 Wenn Al; ss] [Si3.s8 Al 49] Oro (OH):
Montmorillonite “2 0.14
ij
[Mg 1 Fe.ig?* Aly aa] [Si3.s6 Al aa] Oro (OH):
568 641
Mio
Fig. 1.—Differential thermal analysis curves for galapektite C-768, and montmorillonite from Lemon,
Miss., C-35. The temperature on the left of the diagram is about 25°C, the temperature at the termination
of the curves, on the right, is about 1000°C.
May 1957
FAUST: MONTMORILLONITE VARIETY GALAPEKTITE 145
TABLE 2.—OBSERVATIONS ON THE THERMAL ANALYSIS CURVES! OF GALAPEKTITE AND
MoNTMORILLONITE
Temperature of Troughs and Peaks °C
Int diat . Weight of
Mineral Record no. Low temperature (eniparntire High temperature | Locality sample used
| (grams)
| a | |
Endothermic | ee Endothermic | Endothermic
| = “
=o | | GY; | By roc | q Q«
Galapek- C-768 | 169 222 3S 532 | 689 882 Angleur, near | 0.4231
tite | | Liege, Bel-
| | | gium
Montmoril- | C-35 | 150 201 | Present) 568 | 641 | 836 | 1005 | Lemon,Smith | 0.4774
lonite | | County,
Miss.
1 These curves were obtained with a resistance of 600 ohms in the galvanometer circuit.
DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS
The differential thermal analyses were
made in a modified form of the Alexander,
Hendricks, and Nelson (1939) apparatus.
The samples were heated at the rate of 12°C
per minute. The records were obtained as
photographs.
The DTA curves of galapektite and a
typical montmorillonite are given in Fig. 1
and the data are summarized in Table 2.
The close similarity of the two curves is
apparent and galapektite is thus a member
of the montmorillonite group.
X-RAY STUDIES
The X-ray data were obtained from
powder patterns and from a diffractometer
record. The results are given in Table 3.
The spindle for the powder patterns (pre-
pared by R. C. Erd U.S.G.S.) were made
with ethyl cellulose. Filtered iron radiation
was used in preparing the X-ray powder
photographs. The diffractometer pattern
(prepared by John C. Hathaway, U.S.G.S.)
was made with filtered copper radiation.
The patterns were indexed by the method
of Brindley (1951). The 6 parameter was
calculated from the 06 reflection. The data
are given in Table 3. The agreement be-
tween the calculated and observed values for
the d spacings is satisfactory. A faint line
at 3.36A composed of spots is attributed to
quartz. ;
A sample of galapektite was soaked in
ethylene glycol and a diffractometer pattern
prepared. The 001 reflection was registered
as a practically symmetrical peak at 17.0A.
The other OOl spacings observed were
dooce = 8.50, doos = 5.60, doos = B.A,
The values of doo; calculated from these data
are 17.0, 16.80 and 16.85A_ respectively.
The presence of this integral sequence of
basal reflections indicates that there is no
interlayering in the structure.
A powder pattern of galapektite that had
been fired in the DTA furnace (C-768)
showed a number of broad and diffuse lines
which correspond with the pattern of spinel
(MgAl,0,). According to the studies of
Bradley and Grim (1951), this is the phase
that would be expected to develop in the
sample.
CONCLUSION
The DTA and X-ray studies described in
this paper show clearly that galapektite is a
member of the montmorillonite group. It is
comparable to the montmorillonite from
TaBLE 3.—X-RAY PowpER-DIFFRACTION Data
FOR GALAPEKTITE (FE/MN; \ = 1.937A)
|
Indices d(A) I ee Notes
~001 15.1 Vs =
~003 5.0 m
11,02 4.48 | vs | 4.49
~004 Bal) |) tt — diffuse
~005 3.01 m —
13,20 2.56 | s 2.59 very broad
15, 24,31 1.696) w 1.698
06,33 1.498} s 1.498 | assumed
26,40 1.288] w 1.297 | broad
17,35,42 1.246] vw | 1.246
146 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Lemon, Smith County, Miss. and is a
typical dioctahedral montmorillonite. Since
there is nothing unusual about this mineral
to warrant the continued use of the name
galapektite, it is proposed here to relegate
the name galapektite to the synonomy and
to call it and minerals nearly identical with
it, montmorillonite.
REFERENCES
ALEXANDER, Lyte T., Henpricks, STERLING B.,
and Nreuson, R. ANprEw. Minerals present in
sowl colloids: Part II, Estimation in some rep-
resentative soils. Soil Sci. 48: 273-279. 1939.
Bravuiey, WiLuiamM F., and Grim, Raten 2B.
High temperature thermal effects of clay and
related materials. Amer. Min. 88: 182-201.
1951.
BreirHaupt, Avausr. Vollsténdige Characteristik
des Mineral-Systems: Dritte sehr bereicherte
Auflage: 99. Dresden and Leipzig, 1832.
BRENDLER, WourcGana. Mineralien-Sammlungen;
ein Hand und Hilfsbuch ftir anlage und ins-
tandhaltung mineralogischer Sammlungen 2:
699 pp. Leipzig. 1912.
VOL. 47, No. 5
BRINDLEY, GEORGE W., editor. X-ray identifica-
tion and crystal structures of clay minerals:
chapter 4 and 12. Mineralogical Society of
Great Britain, London, 1951.
Dana, Epwin 8. A system of mineralogy: ed. 6.
New York, 1892.
Hey, Max H. An index of mineral species and
varieties arranged chemically: 609 pp. British
Museum (Natural History), London, 1950.
Hintze, Cari. Handbuch der Mineralogie; Band
II, Silicate und Titanite. Leipzig, 1897.
Le CHarevier, Henri. De laction de la chaleur
sur les argiles. Bull. Soc. France. Min. 10: 204—
211. 1887.
———. Uber die Konstitution der Thone. Zeitschr.
fiir Phys. Chem. 1: 396-402, 1887.
Ross, CLARENCE 8., and Henpricks, STERLING
B. Minerals of the Montmorillonite Group. U.
S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 205-B: 26, 31, 34,
42. 1945.
Ross, CLARENCE 8., and Kerr, Paut F. Halloy-
site and Allophane. U. S. Geol. Surv. Prof.
Pap. 185-g: 186. 1934.
Srrunz, Hueco. Mineralogische
Leipzig, 1941.
Tabellen: 240.
_—_——_—SSESE ETE
GEOLOGY .—The relation between lattice parameters and composition for mont-
morillonite-group minerals GrorGEe T. Faust, U. 8. Geological Survey.
(Received March 29, 1957)
The existence of a relationship between
the lattice parameters and composition of
the montmorillonite group minerals was
sought by Brindley and MacEwan (1951)
(in Brindley, 1951). They confined their
study to the layer parameters a and b, and
5 b
in particular to b since a = a/3? and de-
veloped equations for calculating b from the
composition of a montmorillonite when
expressed in the formula for one half the
content of a unit cell. Brindley and Mac-
Ewan (1953) reconsidered their equations of
1951 and presented more precise relation-
ships. These were discussed again by
Brindley (1955), and he gives the following
formulas for calculating the lattice param-
eter b:
For dioctahedral minerals
b = 8.90 + 0.06z + 0.09q + 0.18r +
0.27s
1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S.
Geological Survey.
For trioctahedral minerals
b = 9.18 + 0.06% — 0.12p — 0.06g +
0.06s
where
a = number of Al for Si substitutions in
tetrahedral positions
p = number of Al atoms in octahedral
positions
q = number of Fe*t atoms in octahedral
positions
r = number of Meg atoms in octahedral
position
s = number of Fe?+ atoms in octahedral
positions and
p+q+rc+t_s = 2 for dioctahedral
positions
p+q4+?7r+ s = 38 for trioctahedral
positions
I have published X-ray powder data for
some analyzed members, of unusual com-
position, of the montmorillonite group and
it is of interest to see how the observed
values of the parameter b compare with
May 1957
those calculated from the formulas of
Brindley and MacEwan. These minerals
are griffthite from Griffith Park, Los
Angeles, Calif. (Faust 1955); iron saponite
from Cathkin, County Lanarkshire, Scot-
land (Faust 1955); stevensite from Spring-
field, Union County, N. J. (Faust and
Murata 1953), which are classified as triocta-
hedral montmorillonite and the variety,
galapektite, a dioctahedral montmorillonite
(see preceding paper).
The computed values of the parameter 0
and the observed values for these minerals
of the montmorillonite family are given in
Table 1 along with the data for tale and
pyrophyllite as given by Brindley and Mac-
Ewan (1953).
Brindley (1955) has pointed out that the
dioctahedral montmorillonites have a value
of doe less than 1.52A whereas the tri-
octahedral members have a des value
FAUST: MONTMORILLONITE-GROUP MINERALS
147
greater than this. The data given in Table 1
for the observed and calculated value of b
correspond very well.
REFERENCES
BRINDLEY, GEORGE W., editor. X-ray identifica-
tion and crystal structures of clay minerals:
345 pp. Mineralogical Society of Great
Britain, London, 1951.
——— Structural mineralogy of clays. In “Clays
and Clay Technology.’’ Proc. First Nat.
Conf. on Clays and Clay Technology, Cali-
fornia Div. Mines Dept. Bull 169: 33-48. 1955.
BrinDLEY, GEORGE W., and MacEwan, Dougias
M. C. Structural Aspects of the Mineralogy of
Clays and Related Silicates. In ‘‘Ceramics—A
Symposium,’’ edited by A. T. Green and
Gerald H. Stewart, British Ceramic Society,
Stoke-on-Trent, pp. 15-59. 1953.
Faust, GrorGe T. Thermal Analysis and X-ray
Studies of Griffithite. Journ. Washington
Acad. Sei. 45: 66-70. 1955.
Faust, Grorce T., and Murata, K. J. Stevensite,
redefined as a member of the montmorillonite
group. Amer. Min., vol. 38, pp. 973-987. 1953.
TaBLE 1.— MEASURED AND CALCULATED VALUES OF THE 6 PARAMETER FOR SOME
MontTMORILLONITE-GROUP MINERALS
Dioctahedral dos b (obs) (cated)
Pyrophyllite [Als][Sis] O10(0H)» 1.484 | 8.90 | 8.90
(060)
Galapektite [Mg.9Fe.11!TAly sel{Si.¢sAl.121010(OH)2-S*-17 1.498 9.01 9.01
Trioctahedral
Tale [Mgs][Sis]O10(OH)> 1.515 | 9.10 | 9.18
(060)
: : Ca Mg
Stevensite [Mgo.ssMn_.o2Fe!! 92][Sis]O10(OH): <a oe 1.526 | 9.16 | 9.18
Saponite [Mgp.2sFett 2Fet 45][Sis.19Alo,r5Fe™T,o10:0(OH)2-S*-20 1.543 9.26 9.22
(Iron)
Griffithite [Mei sFe?o,s2Fe?y «Alo. oil (Sis. 9Alo,e1]010(OH)2-<*-25, Na-11 1.541 9.25 9.23
The newest ts but the oldest made visible to owr senses —THOREAU.
148 JOURNAL
ECONOMY IN THE PLANNING OF
One of the typical problems confronting both
the experimental scientist and research worker
in industry is that of evaluating the joint effects
of several different factors on a given material or
process. Other things being equal, the smaller
the number of factors the fewer the difficulties
encountered. Because of possible complex inter-
actions among the various factors, however, the
difficulties become formidable for even a rela-
tively moderate number of factors. Problems of
this kind have often had to be dismissed as too
difficult, although occasional brilliant results were
achieved by scientists gifted with unusual insight
or sound judgment gained through long experi-
ence. The recent growth of the subject of experi-
ment design has occurred in response to the need
for more systematic and reliable methods, a need
created by the growing scope and complexity of
scientific and industrial activity.
The first broad classes of experiment designs,
made possible by advances in statistical theory,
were devised to fit the special problems of agricul-
tural research. Somewhat later, efforts were made
to adapt these experimental procedures for use
in physical science, engineering, and industry.
At the National Bureau of Standards the study
of these problems forms a major part of the
research program of the NBS Statistical Engi-
neering Laboratory. The latest results obtained
by the Laboratory, in research supported partly
by the Chemical Corps, Department of the
Army, should lead to material savings in time
and effort for experimenters faced with multi-
factor problems. These results, which relate to
an important class of experiment designs, are
described and catalogued in the NBS publication
Fractional factorial experiment designs for factors
at two levels.)
One way to approach a multifactor problem
is to make measurements with all factors except
one fixed, and afterward to repeat this process for
each of the factors. Conclusions are then drawn
concerning the effect which each factor has on the
measurements. When the various factors are
interdependent, however, the ‘‘one factor at a
1 Fractional factorial experiment designs for
factors at two levels. Nat. Bur. Standards Applied
Math. Ser. 48 (in press). Available from Super-
intendent of Documents, U.S. Government Print-
ing Office, Washington 25, D. C.
OF THE WASHINGTON
~
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 47, No. 5
EXPERIMENTS
time” procedure may lead to erroneous results.
R. A. Fisher? has shown that the most efficient
way to conduct multifactor experiments is to
make measurements at all possible combinations
of the factors involved.
Nevertheless, even for a relatively small num-
ber of factors, the number of possible experi-
mental combinations may more than tax the
available facilities. Also, in many situations it
is not practical to plan an entire experimental
program in advance, but rather to conduct a few
smaller experiments which serve as a guide to
future work. Or, more generally, it may be that
not all of the information or precision which a
complete set of experiments could give is needed
for the purpose in hand.
Several statisticians, notably Finney and
Kempthorne,’ have recently considered the prob-
lem of planning multi-factor experiments that
require measuring only a fraction of the total
number of possible combinations. The experiment
designs that have resulted are known as “Frac-
tional Factorial” designs. These not only save
experimental effort, but they also make the
analysis relatively straightforward.
The result of the Bureau’s studies along these
lines has been to make the theory of fractional
designs more immediately accessible to the
working scientist. The new publication, prepared
by the Statistical Engineering Laboratory,! cata-
logues experiment designs in which the number of
factors range from 7 to 16, with all factors allowed
two different conditions. For problems with these
general characteristics, the experimenter can
choose from among procedures requiring only
1, 14, %, Me, 332, 4, 428, Or 1456 or all
possible experimental combinations.
An industrial chemical process, for example,
may depend on the commercial grade of the
principal reactant, the source from which the
reactant is obtained, the amount and concentra-
tion of acid used, and the pressure, temperature,
and time of reaction. Suppose it is desired to
study the effects on the characteristics of the
2 The design of experiments, by R. A. FISHER.
Edinburgh, 1949.
3’ The fractional replication of factorial arrange-
ments, by D. J. Finney. Ann. Eugenics 12:
291, 1945. A simple approach to confounding and
fractional replication in factorial experiments, by O.
‘KempruorNe. Biometrika 34: 255, 1947.
May 1957
final product when these seven factors are varied;
and assume that it is sufficient to consider only
two alternatives in connection with each factor,
so that there are two commercial grades of
reactant, two concentrations of acid, and so
forth. Since there are seven factors and each may
exist in two different conditions, there are 27 or
128 possible experimental combinations. A ‘‘com-
plete factorial design” would prescribe the making
of all 128 of these experiments.
However, it may not be practical to perform
all of the experiments. Possibly, also, one may not
need all the information such a complete factorial
procedure could provide. It is at this point that
assistance may be obtained from the experiment
designs described in the Bureau’s publication.
Dusamemmee
F
aio ELLE] Pe Tt Edt to
Benn Ban ee
BESSHe ft
Fig. 1.—Fractional factorial experiment plan
designed by NBS scientists, requiring only 64 of
the 128 possible measurements.
In the example given, let the letters A, B, C,
D, E, F, G stand for the seven factors, and let
the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the two alternative
conditions in which each of the factors may exist.
Then the 128 possible experimental combinations
are represented by the 128 cells of Figure 1. The
shaded squares represent those experimental
combinations to be investigated if the experi-
menter wishes to measure only half of the possible
128 combinations. In the same way, Figs. 2 and 3
illustrate plans requiring only 36 and 16 measure-
ments, respectively, instead of the full set of 128.
Naturally, the more measurements taken, the
greater the resulting information and the greater
ECONOMY IN PLANNING EXPERIMENTS
Fic. 2.—Fractional factorial experiment plan
designed by NBS scientists, requiring only 382 of
the 128 possible measurements.
the precision. The experimental plan calling for
1¢ of the possible combinations can only be used
for evaluating the broad effects of each of the
seven factors. The 14-plan, in addition, allows the
interdependence of some of the factors to be
determined. The latter plan could be of use, for
example, when there is independent information
indicating that the interaction between certain of
the factors is negligible. The 14-plan (Figure 1),
on the other hand, not only provides information
on the broad effects of each of the seven factors,
but also permits evaluation of the interdepend-
ence among all of those factors. The only price
paid for this information is a loss in precision. In
many cases, especially in industrial experiments,
this loss is more than compensated for by the
saving in time and expense.
Fie. 3.—Fractional factorial experiment plan
designed by NBS scientists, requiring only 16 out
of 128 possible measurements.
150 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ENTOMOLOGY The stridulations of some crickets in the Dominican Republic. .
H. A. Auuarp, Arlington, Va.
VoL. 47, No. 5
(Received April 5, 1957)
While residing in the Dominican Re-
public from November 3, 1945, to February
7, 1946, and again from September 10, 1947,
to January 29, 1948, for the purpose of
collecting insects and plant material for
the Smithsonian Institution, I was always
much impressed with the insect sounds
around me. There were many new and
distinctive cricket notes, but there was
rarely any great din of blending insect
music such as one hears in August around
Washington, D. C., when large colonies of
snowy tree crickets, Oecanthus niveus De-
Geer, and the true katydids, Pterophylla
camellifolia Fabricuis, become musical.
In the Dominican Republic when the
warm and humid evening arrives, scattered
chirping and tinkling notes issue from the
shrubs and trees here and there. Some of
these are clear, incisive little points of high-
pitched sound; others are powerful, pene-
trating, buzzing, almost ringing noises,
continuous and even very disconcerting to
many people because of the incessant din.
In the capital city, Ciudad Trujillo, the
large brown cricket Anurogryllus muticus
(DeGeer) is very common and noisy through-
out the winter. As soon as night came on and
lights appeared, these ubiquitous crickets
began their activities out-of-doors in the
yard and even within the wide-open houses,
for there are no screened windows or doors
in the typical Spanish houses.
The song of the males of this cricket, here,
is a continuous ringing z-z-z-z-z-z of tre-
mendous volume and penetration which
practically fills a room with veritable din.
The song is quite like that of our common
cone-head, Neoconocephalus robustus crepi-
tans (Scudder) of the eastern United States.
After being accustomed to hear the trilling
notes, definitely musical in tonality, of our
American individuals of this species, I was
1 The writer is indebted to Dr. Ashley B. Gur-
ney of the Entomology Research Branch of the
United States Department of Agriculture for all
identifications.
somewhat nonplussed to hear this tropical
cricket singing continuously, with all the
characteristics of a cone-headed katydid,
and with no tonality in its stridulation. I
kept a close eye on this common, ubiquitous
species, and one evening I thought I heard
weak fluttering notes produced by a female
of the species perched on a jutting coral
rock entering into the construction of the
outer wall of the house or portico. I very
carefully studied this cricket, for 1t was not
very wary, and sure enough this female also
had musical inclinations. Spreading the
elytra slightly it expanded the long mem-
branous underwings and set them in rapid
vibration, thus producing a weak fluttering
sound. These sounds were probably never
consciously heard by ordinary untrained
ears. A life-long association with the musical
habits of Orthoptera made it consciously
audible to me at once.
My first acquaintance with Anurogryllus
muticus was early in June 1941 at Clarendon,
Va., across the Potomac River from Wash-
ington, where I had located a large colony
in a pine grove here. The crickets of this
colonly appeared to be more or less arboreal
and were always seen on the trunks of the
pines from one foot to eight feet above the
ground. Their stridulation, which I described
in a paper “Some Musical Orthoptera at
Clarendon, Virginia,” Can. Ent. 48: 356—
358, 1916, was nothing like that of individu-
als of this species stridulating in the Domini-
ean Republic. The Virginia crickets, it is
true, stridulated with a continuous “song,”
but it was a high-pitched trill with a definite
tonality, and at first lead me to believe it was
the trilling of a tree cricket, Oecanthus
nigricornis or O. nigricornis quadripunctatus.
Why many of our crickets and katydids
stridulate so differently in different regions
of their range has never been satisfactorily
explained, although such variations of be-
havior have been more than once observed.
Weak musical impulses by the females have
been given some attention, and it is known
May 1957
that the females of many species, perhaps
generally, produce weak, almost inaudible
sex calls, for the males in the vicinity appear
to be exceedingly sensitive and alert to
these. I have heard the females of various
species of katydids make their distinctive
clicks, and have noted males flying toward
their position at once. This notifying click
or snap of the females, rather than the in-
cessant chirping and buzzing of the males,
appears to be the most distinctive call-note
functioning to bring the sexes together. I
have never seen the females particularly
interested in the ceaseless noisy demonstra-
tions of the males, but often I have seen the
males flying in from all directions when a
female of the species delivered her weak,
alluring wing-clicks.
On the night of December 10, 1945, at
Ciudad Trujillo, I ran down an intermittent,
high-pitched tinkling chirp localized in the
fohage of an Ixora bush (/xora coccinea
L.). This cricket proved to be a species of
Orocharis, probably O. similis, as tentatively
identified, owing to insufficient knowledge of
West Indian species.
In the garden near by on this same evening
I heard high-pitched, intermittent chirping
notes reminding me somewhat of our com-
mon black field crickets of the States,
Gryllus assimilis Burmeister. I traced these
notes to the inside concrete walls of a large,
empty, unused lily pond, and captured
several males here. These proved to be odd
little crickets of the genus Amphiacusta.
The species cannot at present be definitely
named, and these specimens may be new
to entomological science. The crickets of
this genus must be much more extensively
collected and studied throughout the West
Indies before they can be identified or
named with any certainty, according to
Dr. Ashley B. Gurney.
A dainty tree cricket, a species of Oecan-
thus, was captured in some weeds near the
American Embassy one December night.
As soon as darkness came on its high-
pitched, clear, tinkling chirp was always
to be heard. These crickets were not localized
in colonies but advertised their presence only
as occasional ‘“‘singers” here and_ there.
When the evening temperatures were high,
around 75°-79°F., the cricket chirped with
ALLARD: STRIDULATIONS OF CRICKETS 151
TaBLeE 1.—TEMPERATURE AND CHIRPING ATES
Date 1947 Time | ete | Chirps per Humidity
p.m. Outside, F. minute
Oct. 19 10:15 2 18 —
22 9:30 73° 20 88%
24 TOO. | 72° 18 _
27 11:30 ilict 20 —
31 10:00 ithe | 20 _
Nov. 1 9:40 (fli 22 90%
3 9:30 wom 20 Breeze from N.
4 10:00 lo 20 Wind cool N.
8 9:00 Wonoe 19 Cool N. wind
9 | 8:15 il 18
9 10:00 70° silent
10 9:30 | 70° 18
i0 | 10:30 | 69° 18
15 9:45 74° 20
(another)
16 10:45 66° 16 Very cool, first
(cool, dry) night for sheet
on bed all
night.
24 10:30 | 70° 18
25 10:30 68° silent
Dec. 8 10:40 (Ale 16
Balter AG [beck ||. coreiel eee ea) ete enol merc es
66 68 69 70 71 72 73.50 74 75 77
} |
16 | silent’ 18 Fie 20 18 20 | 20 207) |)22
| 18 | 18 | 18 | 19 | | 20
| 18 16 | 20
a clear, incisive tonality, but always with a
very leisurely delivery. If the temperature
fell to near 65°-68°, its chirps became more
prolonged and uncertain, with a more pro-
nounced tremulous character. It was in-
teresting to note that even though the
mean temperatures around Ciudad Trujillo
are always high, around 79°-80°F., with the
average minima around 70°-71°F., an es-
pecially cool evening with temperatures
around 65° was relatively cold to these
crickets as it was to human beings long
adjusted to these temperature levels.
Table 1 presents the observed rates of
chirps per minute in relation to different
temperature of an Oecanthus niveus identi-
fied as such by Dr. A. B. Gurney, until
further studies could be made.
It is interesting to note that our snowy
tree crickets—Oecanthus niveus, based on
the observations of A. E. Dolbear (‘‘The
Cricket as a Thermometer.’ Amer. Nat.
31: 790-791, 1897), chirp at a much
faster rate than this Dominican species
resembling O. niveus as determined by the
usual morphological characters. As a matter
152
of fact, our northern Oecanthus niveus at a
temperature of 70°F. chirped at a rate of
120 times per minute, and even at 60° the
rate was 80 times per minute. On the basis
of their chirping there is some question
whether the West Indian crickets are Oecan-
thus niveus, although this species may also
occur here. If so its temperature relations
in this tropical climate have undergone a
most remarkable change, with a drop of
chirping rate of 120 at 70°F. to complete
indisposition to chirp at this temperature,
or at least to deliver not more than 18 chirps
per minute. Even at 77° the highest tem-
peratures of the chirping rates observed in
the Dominican Republic, the chirps were
only 22 times per minute.
It is at once obvious that the formula
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 5
Tt = # 100 : 40
for our race of Oecanthus niveus will not
apply at all to this tropical species. As
derived from this formula, if our crickets
were chirping at the rate of 100 times per
minute, the air temperature should be 50 +
100 — 40
4
observed in the Dominican Republic is
Oecanthus niveus, its physiology has under-
gone a remarkable change with respect to
its temperature sensitivity. On the basis of
its stridulations this Oecanthus may prove
to be an entirely different species rather
than a greatly modified tropical race of the
common snowy tree cricket O¢canthus
niveus. Dr. A. B. Gurney is at present en-
gaged in a critical study of this species.
devised by Dolbear
= 65°F. If the tropical cricket
—
MEMBER HONORS
FRANK W. Rernuart, chief of the Plastics
Section at the National Bureau of Standards,
has been awarded the Department of Com-
merce Silver Medal for Meritorious Service.
The award recognized his ‘“‘major contribu-
tions to the science and technology of plas-
tics, and for highly distinguished author-
ship’’ Mr. Reinhart, a nationally known
authority in the field of plastics, directs the
Bureau’s diverse research, development, and
testing program on plastics, plastic coatings,
and adhesives. Among the recent develop-
ments of this program are plastic springs
which have a higher strength-to-weight than
most metal springs, improved transparent
eyeshields for the military, and a shatter and
craze resistant plastic for use in combat
aircraft.
Auan T. WATERMAN, director of the
National Science Foundation, has received
the first annual Captain Robert Dexter Con-
rad award of the Office of Naval Research.
The award has been established to recognize
outstanding technical and scientific achieve-
ments in research and development for the
Navy. It is named for Captain Conrad, who,
as first head of the Planning Division of
ONR, was the primary architect of the
Navy’s basic research program. The citation,
signed by the Secretary of the Navy, reads
as follows: ‘‘For your outstanding contribu-
tion to the organization and long-range scien-
tific objectives of scientific research adminis-
tration in the Navy. For your vision and
leadership in the successful establishment of
new concepts and programs in Naval Science.
For your personal and exemplary dedication
to the building of a solid foundation for the
role of the Office of Naval Research in the
modern Navy, thereby creating a permanent
benefit to the National Defense.”
Ray P. TEEue has been elected an Affilate
Member of the Institute of Traffic Engineers,
being the only person so honored during
1957. ‘‘An affiliate, at the time of admission,
shall be a person who, by scientific achieve-
ment or practical experience, has attamed a
position in his special field qualifying him to
cooperate with traffic engineers in the ad-
vancement of engineering knowledge and
practice.”
JosepH Kaptan has been elected to mem-
bership in the National Academy of Sciences.
May 1957
HOFFMAN: CNEMIDOPHORUS SEXLINEATUS 351
HERPETOLOGY .—4A new subspecies of the tetid lizard Cnemidophorus sexlineatus
(Linnaeus) from eastern United States. RicHarD L. Horrman, Blacksburg, Va.
(Received March 25, 1957)
Thirteen years ago, in 1944, I published
a short note concerning the occurrence of
Cnemidophorus sexlineatus in western Vir-
ginia, mentioning that the parietal plates of
the specimens examined were divided into
several smaller scales. Somewhat later I
studied series of racerunners from various
places along the Atlantic Coast, and ob-
served a geographic trend in number of
parietals, increasing from south to north and
reaching a culmination in Maryland and
Virginia, whence came specimens having as
many as 11 scales in the parietal group.
These findings appeared in 1950, in a brief
paper which sought to minimize the sig-
nificance of this variation by endeavoring to
explain it in terms of an uninterrupted
geographic gradient.
The presentation of my data was made
upon a purely latitudinal basis, and involved
only the average parietal counts grouped
according to the states from which material
had been seen. Such an interpretation made
no allowance for the evaluation of local
populations or any correlation of variability
with physiography, and was subsequently
challenged (in litt.) by Hobart Smith and
M. B. Mittleman. I have accordingly
adopted a somewhat different arrangement
of the data, from which it appears, as sug-
gested by my two colleagues, that a taxo-
nomically recognizable population of the race-
runner occurs in Virginia and Maryland, and
may be distinguished from the bulk of the
sexlineatus population by two characters
capable of expression in quantative terms.
The character of the parietals, although
of unquestionable value, is difficult to treat
with precision. In many cases it is almost
impossible to say whether a scale is part of
the original parietal or merely one of the
normal small adjacent plates, and probably
no two persons would make the counts in
exactly the same way. There is, however, a
fortunate correlation in the number of
femoral pores, a feature which lends itself
well to objective presentation. Reduction in
the number of pores is coincident with the
fission of the parietals to the extent of being
quite useful for diagnostic purposes.
For the present study I have examined a
total of 200 specimens from all parts of the
range of the species. An effort was made to
utilize all of the readily available material
from Virginia and Maryland, with several
large series from other areas along the
Atlantic coast and representative samples
of variable size from midwestern localities.
The majority of the specimens seen are in
the collection of the U.S. National Museum
(USNM) and were made available through
the characteristic kindness of Dr. Doris M.
Cochran. I am further grateful to M.
Graham Netting for the opportunity of
studying material in the Carnegie Museum
(CM); to Dr. Albert Schwartz for the loan
of the racerunners of the Charleston Museum
(CHM); to James A. Fowler for access to
specimens in his private collection (JAF);
and to John B. Funderberg for providing a
valuable series of specimens from eastern
North Carolina.
The population inhabiting central North
Carolina, Virginia, and southern Maryland
may be recognized, with reference to the
reduced femoral pore series, by the name—
Cnemidophorus sexlineatus oligoporus, n. subsp.
Type specimens.—Holotype, USNM. no.
135232, adult male, collected at Griffith, 6 miles
east of Clifton Forge, Alleghany County, Va.,
on May 30, 1953. Allotype, USNM no. 135233,
adult female, with same data. Paratypes are in-
dicated in the list of specimens examined.
Diagnosis—A race of Cnemidophorus sex-
lineatus characterized by a tendency of the
parietal plates to divide into a number of small
scales, usually 5 or more, and by a corresponding
reduction in number of femoral pores, 30 or less
in 85 percent of 50 specimens referred to this
subspecies on the basis of parietal count and/or
geographic provenance, as opposed to 31 or more
in 81 percent of 78 specimens of sexlineatus.
Range.—From the vicinity of Baltimore, Md.,
154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 5
\
\
\
N
\“
1o,
o.%,
S525 252
Fig. 1.—Distribution of the subspecies of Cnemidophorus sexlineatus in southeastern United States;
known or suspected range shown by diagonal shading; symbols representing localities from which speci-
mens were studied. C. s. serlineatus indicated by solid spots and left-to-right shading; C. s. oligoporus
by solid triangles and right-to-left shading; intermediate samples by X symbols in the cross-hatched
area.
OE EE
May 1957
south to extreme southeastern Virginia, thence
southwest in the Piedmont to Laurens County,
S. C. Intergradation with C. s. sexlineatus takes
place throughout most of the Coastal Plain in
North Carolina and along the Fall Line in South
Carolina. In Virginia, C. s. oligoporus penetrates
into the Ridge and Valley Province along the
valleys of the James and Roanoke Rivers.
Intergradation—The status of certain samples
has been determined, somewhat empirically, by
the following principle: considering the interval
between 30 and 31 femoral pores as the break
which gives the best separation of specimens on
the basis of their geographic provenance, any
series of five or more individuals in which the
percentage of segregation was more nearly equal
than the ratio 70:30 has been regarded as repre-
senting an intergrade population. Such data,
fitted to a map, provide a fairly accurate delinea-
tion of the distribution of this variable. Table 1
presents selected instances of different popula-
tions sampled. When single specimens, or small
series only, were available, they were determined
on the basis of pores, parietal count, place of
origin, or a combination of all three.
TABLE 1.—PERCENTAGE SEPARATION OF SPECI-
MENS FROM VARIOUS LOCALITIES ON THE BASIS
or 30 or Less vs. 31 oR More FEMORAL PORES
Locality and number of specimens Bee aies
Southern Maryland (18)............. 72
Caroline) Countiy, Va. @))...-----..-- 75
WestermeVargimia (8)),2-.....5...--.- 100
Centralavareinian@)po. 44-56-55. 455 5- 100
New Kent County, Va. (14)......... 92
Eastern North Carolina (26)......... 59
Piedmont South Carolina (5)........ 80
Eastern South Carolina (14)......... 72
Gwinnett County, Ga. (4)........... 75
Brevard County, Fla. (10)........... 90
Moric, 1KeW7S: (ID). os eeccnccscss55008 80
Central Mississippi (8).............. 88
CentralMlennessee (oc... 5.04550. 72
MESS OUIa (7) eae ee occ ea eee 86
It is important to observe that there is no
evidently consistent continuation of either in-
crease or decrease of femoral pore count in either
direction away from the area of intergradation,
resulting in a fairly abrupt break between the two
subspecies. C. s. oligoporus is apparently a product
of terminal raciation, and occupies a rather small
area In comparison to the total range of the
species.
HOFFMAN: CNEMIDOPHORUS SEXLINEATUS 155
The actual extent of the intermediate popula-
tion is probably not much different from that as
presently known and mapped, although much
can yet be done in the way of refinement by
analysis of local series from the central parts of
North and South Carolina. Of particular value
would be a study of the racerunners of western
South Carolina and adjacent northwest Georgia,
to substantiate or discredit my somewhat tenta-
tive allocation of three specimens from Laurens
County, South Carolina, to oligoporus. Numerous
small series from counties on and adjacent to the
Fall Line in South Carolina appear to be C. s.
sexlineatus, with a tendency toward intergrades
with oligoporus. A small series from northern
Georgia (Gwinnett County) is typical of sexlinea-
tus in every respect.
The racerunners in the vicinity of Charleston,
S. C., which may be considered topotypical
sexlineatus, appear to be at the edge of the inter-
grade area, and somewhat affected by a reduction
in pore counts. Thus, of 14 specimens from
Charleston and adjoining counties, 4 (28 percent)
have less than 31 pores and only 10 (72 percent)
are referable to serlineatus as here diagnosed.
However, the frequency distribution of the avail-
able data is skewed sufficiently to the high side to
indicate that additional counts would probably
create a higher percentage of separation than is
now apparent. At the same time, there are
enough lower figures from the Charleston region
to justify relegation of Merrem’s name fallax
(based on a specimen with 30 pores) to the
synonymy of sealineatus.
SPECIMENS EXAMINED
Cnemidophorus sexlineatus oligoporus (63) :
Maryuanp. Ann Arundel County: Priest’s
Bridge, USNM 1; Davidsonville, USNM 1. Cal-
vert County: Cove Point, JAF 4; Chesapeake
Beach USNM 2; locality not known, USNM 1.
Prince Georges County: Beltsville, USNM 2. St.
Marys County: Point Lookout, USNM 6; Piney
Point, USNM 2.
District or CotumsiA: Terra Cotta, USNM 2,
JA
Virermnta. Albemarle County: Charlottesville,
USNM 3. Alleghany County: Clifton Forge and
vicinity, USNM 6 (paratypes); Covington, US-
NM 1 (paratype). Botetourt County: Eagle Rock,
USNM 1 (paratype). Caroline County: Chiles-
burg, USNM 4. Elizabeth City County: Hampton,
USNM 1. Gloucester County: Gloucester Point,
USNM 1. Henry County: Spencer, CM 2. Nelson
County: Midway Mills, CM 1 (paratype). New
Kent County: Lanexa, CM 13. Roanoke County:
156
Roanoke, USNM 1. Westmoreland County: near
Hague, USNM 1.
Norra Carouina. Durham County: Durham,
USNM 3. Warren County: USNM 1.
SourH Carouina. Laurens County, USNM 3.
Intergrades, oligoporus X sexlineatus (35):
VirGintA. Nansemond County: Suffolk,
USNM 1.
Nortru Carouina: Brunswick Co.: 5 miles
north of Southport, USNM 2. Dare County: Hat-
teras Island, USNM 3. Lenoir County: Kinston,
USNM 17. Pitt County: Greenville, USNM 11.
Sours Caro.uina. Darlington County: Darling-
ton, CHM 2.
Specimens regarded as typical of C. s. sexline-
atus have been examined from the following
counties in South Carolina: Barnwell, Berkeley,
Calhoun, Charleston, Greenwood, Horry, Jasper,
Kershaw, Lexington, MeCormick, Saluda, and
Sumter, with a total of 25 specimens.
To determine whether the characters of oligo-
porus recur at other parts of the species’ range,
samples were checked as indicated from the
following States: Georgia (4), Florida (27), Mis-
sissippi (12), Tennessee (3); Louisiana (5), Ken-
tucky (2), Missouri (8), Kansas (10), Nebraska
(2), and Wisconsin (2). In the majority of these
specimens there is little or no overlap in parietal
or femoral pore counts upon those diagnostic of
the northeastern subspecies. However, one other
geographically variable character was discovered,
the degree of separation of the 3rd supraocular
from the adjacent frontoparietal by a row of
small intercalary scales. In C. s. oligoporus, there
are normally two or three such scales between
the 3rd supraocular and the frontoparietal, so
that those two plates are nearly or entirely
separated from each other. In the Midwest,
however, they are either completely in contact,
or separated only for a very short distance by a
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 5
single intercalary scale. Unfortunately, the dis-
tribution of this interesting character does not
coincide with that of the parietal and pore
formulas, as it was found that Floridian race-
runners were identical with those from Maryland
in this respect, and presumably the transition
into the western form takes place in Georgia or
Alabama. It is, nonetheless, indicative of the
various adaptive necessities imposed upon the
species during its occupancy of the damper,
forested habitat of the Atlantic Coastal region.
One is tempted to speculate that the reduction of
the femoral pore series reflects slightly shorter
legs, perhaps influenced by residence in semi-
wooded areas where open ground was quite lim-
ited and the necessity for long sprints to shelter
less frequent or imperative.
In western Virginia, oligoporus is not uncom-
mon in its favorite habitats: railroad embank-
ments, sandy river floodplains, and open shale
barrens. These three conditions are combined at
the type locality, and a dozen or more lizards can
easily be seen during a short walk along the
railway. The structural similarity of the montane
population to that of lowland Virginia and Mary-
land confirms my earlier surmise that its members
are migrants, rather than relicts. The valleys of
the James and Roanoke Rivers offer fairly level
avenues of access into the Alleghanies, and the
extensive shale barrens of central western Vir-
ginia provide abundant habitat for lizards with a
preference for open, semiarid areas.
REFERENCES
Horrman, Ricuarp L. Notes on Cnemidophorus
sexlineatus in Virginia. Proc. Biol. Soc.
Washington 57: 124-125. 1944.
———. A geographic variation gradient in Cnemi-
dophorus. Herpetologica 7: 149. 1950.
The annihilation of matter 1s unthinkable for the same reason that the crea-
tion of matter 1s unthinkable, the reason namely that nothing cannot be an
object of thought——H. SrpEencrrR.
May 1957
NAIR AND GURUMANT: A NEW SHIPWORM 157
ZOOLOGY .—Teredo (Nototeredo) nambudalaiensis, a new shipworm from the
Madras coast of India... N. BALAKRISHNAN Narr and O. N. Gurumanl, Ala-
gappa College, South India. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received February 19, 1957)
While engaged in a study of the teredine
fauna of the South Indian coast, 19 species
of shipworms belonging to the genera Teredo
and Bankia were collected, identified, and
described (/—4). Of these, 13 were found to
be new to science. Roonwal (5) recorded the
occurrence of the genus Bactronophorus from
the Sunderbans in the 24 Pargana Districts
in Bengal.
This communication deals with one more
new shipworm, Teredo (Nototeredo) nambu-
dalaiensis, of which several shells and pal-
lets were collected from a huge log of wood
(timber undetermined) washed ashore at
Nambudalai (Ramnad District), East Coast,
during the monsoon times in January 1956.
Measurements.—Shell length 6.5 mm, shell
height 7 mm, pallet length 12 mm, stalk 6 mm,
blade 6 mm, diameter of the blade 2 mm.
Characters—Shell of moderate size. The
anterior lobe, anterior median lobe, and a part
of the middle median lobe with an olive-green
hue; the rest of the shell white. The anterior lobe
with a fairly deep sinus at its anterior margin
covered with a thin callus reflected over the
exterior. The rest of the anterior part is marked
by fairly strong riblike dental ridges numbering
not less than 66. These ridges are more closely
approximated at the anterior callus than at their
junction with the median part where the spaces
that separate them are more than twice the
width of the dental ridges. The dental ridges are
slightly wider at the umbone than at the ventral
margins. These ridges bear numerous minute,
closely spaced denticles on their outer dorsal
margin, which give them a serrated appearance.
The angle formed at the junction of the anterior
part with the anterior median part at its ventral
margin is obtuse. The anterior and posterior
portions of the median lobe are convex, while the
middle median portion is slightly concave. The
‘Contribution from the Research Section,
Zoology Department, Alagappa College, Karai-
kudi, South India.
anterior median is narrower than the posterior
median and marked by closely crowded dental
ridges numbering not less than 82. These ridges
bear strong closely crowded tubercles and the
ridges are separated by deeply impressed lines.
In the type specimen many of the tubercles
toward the umbonal side are worn out. The
middle and posterior median parts are marked by
the enfeebled extensions of the dental ridges of the
anterior area. The posterior portion forms a
moderately large auricle marked by incremental
lines.
y
Fic. 1.—Shell of Teredo (Nototeredo) nam-
budalatensis, n. sp.: Left, outer view; right, inner
view.
The interior is pearly white. The umbones
form a strong knob from the inner under side of
which the sickle shaped and fairly broad blade
curves across, about two-thirds the inside of the
shell toward the ventral knob, which is quite
strong in this form. The junction of the anterior
lobe with the median is in the form of a threadlike
ridge, and the posterior portion extends over the
median on the inside as a narrow shelf.
The pallet is elongated and cricket-bat shaped.
It is not cupped distally. The blade is flat and its
external surface is slightly convex showing
longitudinal groove distally for about half the
length of the blade. The stalk insensibly merges
with the blade and extends as a tumid ridge to
the tip of the blade on its inner aspect.
Remarks.—Of the three genera Teredo, Bankia,
and Bactronophorus, which constitute the family
Teredinidae, the present form belongs to the
genus Teredo Linnaeus (1758), since the pallets
158 JOURNAL
are paddle shaped. The genus includes about 12
subgenera. The form before us comes under the
subgenus Nototeredo by virtue of the following
features: The posterior part of the shell is so
attached to the posterior median part as to form
a decided shelf projecting inward. Further, the
pallet is elongated and flattened, with no cupping
at the extremities, appearing somewhat like a
cricket bat. This subgenus was established in
1923 by Bartsch (6) on the basis of the form
Teredo (Nototeredo) edax Hedley.
Fie. 2.—Pallet of Teredo (Nototeredo) nam-
budalaiensis, n. sp.: Left, inner view; right, outer
view.
A comparative study of the characters of the
two species included under this subgenus sug-
gests that the present form does not belong to
either of them. However, it shows some resem-
blance to Teredo (Nototeredo) edax Hedley in
having an elongated cricket-bat shaped pallet
which is not cupped distally, but differs from it
in the nature of the stalk, which is almost as long
OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES vou. 47, NO. 5
as the blade. Further, T’eredo (Nototeredo) edax is
reported as having “curious growth corregations
covering most of the outer surface and the tips
of the inner surface” (7). Moreover, a detailed
study of both the pallet and the shell shows that
the form before us is one hitherto undescribed
and hence to be treated as a species new to
science, Teredo (Nototeredo) nambudalaien-
sis, defined as follows:
Teredo with a distinctly paddle-shaped pallet
with an elongated blade, not cupped distally,
which is a little concave on its inner surface and
convex on its outer aspect and marked by a
longitudinal gooove extending for less than half
of the blade at its distal aspect, with a stalk
which is almost the legth of the blade, cylindrical
and tapering, merging insensibly with matrix of
the blade and extending to the tip of the latter as
a tumid ridge on the inner surface.
A shell whose height is slightly more than its
length, with a moderately well developed auricle,
which forms a narrow shelf projecting into the
median portions and having a sickle shaped and
broad blade extending for about two-thirds the
distance from the umbone to the ventral knob.
The type will be deposited in the Zoological Sur-
vey of India, Calcutta.
Acknowledgment.—Thanks are due to T. Sri
Ganesh for the illustrations.
REFERENCES
(1) Narr, N. BALAKRISHNAN.. Rec. Indian Mus.
52 (pts. 2 to 4): 387. 1954.
(2) ———. Rec. Indian Mus. 58 (pts. 1 and 2).
(In press.)
(3) ———. Journ. Madras Univ. 25 (1): 109.
1955.
(4) ——— and Gurumant, O. N. Curr. Sci. 25:
361. 1956.
(5) Roonwat, M. L. Proe. Zool. Soc. Bengal
7 (2): 91. 1954.
(6) Bartscu, PAUL.
ton 36: 95 1923.
(7) IrepaLe, Tom, Jonnson, R. A., and McNauILn,
F.A. Maritime Service Board of New South
Wales: 1-148. 1932.
Proc. Biol. Soc. Washing-
In framing hypotheses we must see that they agree with facts; in other re-
spects they may be as anconcewable (not self-contradictory) as any fairy tale.
—M. M. P. Mutr.
May 1957
PETTIBONE: NORTH AMERICAN ORBINIIDAE
159
ZOOLOGY —North American genera of the family Orbiniidae (Annelida: Poly-
chaeta), with descriptions of new species.! Marian H. Prrripone, University of
New Hampshire. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received March 22, 1957)
The study of several series of specimens
belonging to the Orbiniidae has indicated
the need to modify the definitions of some
of the genera of this family. Since the mono-
graphic work of Eisig (1914) on the syste-
matics and morphology of the Ariciidae
(= Orbiniidae), the family name and general
systematics used in that revision have
been followed by most workers. Some genera
have been added to the family, however.
The following revision includes those genera
that were represented by material available
for study in the United States National
Museum. Three new species of orbiniids
are described from the east coast of North
America and one from the west coast.
A new subgenus is proposed and new names
are given for two species. The types are
deposited in the United States National
Museum.
FAMILY ORBINIIDAE
Type genus: Orbinia Quatrefages, 1866 =
Aricia Savigny, 1822, preoccupied.
Prostomium oval, truncate or conical, without
appendages. First 1 or 2 segments achaetous,
without appendages (these segments may be
biannulate, thus buccal segment may appear 1- to
4-ringed). Parapodia biramous, supported by
acicula. Body divided into two regions. Anterior
thoracic region bearing dorsolateral notopodia
with crenulate capillary notosetae; more or less
developed postsetal notopodial lobes (dorsal cirri
of Hisig); lateral neuropodia with crenulate
capillary setae, crotchets, pseudocrotchets, tran-
sitional setae (subuluncini), or spines; and more
or less developed postsetal lobes with or without
podal papillae. Abdominal region with parapodia
shifted dorsally, noto- and neuropodial lobes
elongate, ligulate, both noto- and neurosetae
crenulate capillaries; notopodia sometimes with
additional shorter forked setae with inner part of
fork somewhat. frayed (perhaps these are broken
1 This study was aided by a grant from the
National Science Foundation (NSF-G 2012).
crenulate capillaries; at least they do not appear
to be as regular in structure as in the polychaete
families where true forked setae are found).
Paired simple (rarely branched) ligulate ciliated
branchiae dorsal to notopodia on all segments of
body except some anterior ones. Anal cirri 2 or 4.
Proboscis an eversible, unarmed, soft sac, slightly
lobulate or voluminous, branched. Burrow in
sand or mud. Bottom-deposit feeders.
Genus Orbinia Quatrefages, 1866
Aricia Savigny, 1822, preoce.; type (by mono-
typy): A. sertulata Savigny, 1822.
Orbinia Quatrefages, 1866; type (by
designation): O. sertulata (Savigny) =
cuviert? Audouin and Edwards, 1833.
original
Aricia
Diagnosis —Prostomium conical. Achaetous
buceal segment 1-ringed. Postsetal neuropodial
lobes of thoracic segments fimbriated—with ver-
tical row of 4-7 or more papillae; sometimes
papillae continued subpodally on some segments.
Remarks.—In the original description by Sa-
vigny of Aricia sertulata from La Rochelle,
France, the anterior end was described as having
two pairs of very small antennae on the sides of
the small conical prostomium and eyes slightly
distinct. When in 1883 Audouin and Edwards
added two more species of Aricia, A. cuvierti and
A. latreillii, and established the family Ariciidae,
the prostomium was described as being without
antennae and without eyes. As more species have
been found and added to the family, none with
prostomial antennae have been described. It has
generally been considered that the type specimen
of Savigny must have been defective. In 1866
Quatrefages proposed the generic name Orbinia
for Savigny’s species which he credited with
having 5 antennae (4 antennae in Savigny’s de-
scription); he used Aricia in the sense of Audouin
and Edwards for species without antennae, as
A. cuviertti and A. latreillai. According to the
present rules of nomenclature, he should have
done the opposite. Subsequent workers have used
Aricia in the sense of Audouin and Edwards.
Except for the differences in the prostomium,
there is remarkable agreement in the descriptions
of A. sertulata and A. cuvierti; both came origi-
160
nally from the western coast of France. Hisig, in
his monograph, referred A. sertulata questionably
to A. cuvierit. Since there is no way of examining
Savigny’s type, it seems best to assume that the
type specimen was defective anteriorly, to main-
tain sertulata as the type of both Aricia and
Orbinia and to synonymize A. cuviertt with it.
The other choice would be to assign Aricia and
Orbinia to the list of indeterminate genera and
give a new name to the genus containing cuvierti
and similar species. Since the description of
sertulata is adequate in other respects, it would
seem best to retain it.
Subgenus Orbinia
Diagnosis.—Without spikelike or lanceolate
spines on any posterior thoracic neuropodia.
Subgenus Phylo Kinberg, 1866
Type (by monotypy): P. felix Kinberg, 1866;
see Hartman, 1949, p. 25].
Diagnosis.—With large spikelike or lanceolate
spines on some posterior thoracic neuropodia.
Genus Scoloplos Blainville, 1828
Type (by monotypy): Scoloplos armiger (O. F.
Miller, 1776).
Diagnosis.—Prostomium conical. Achaetous
buceal segment 1-ringed. Thoracic neuropodia
with postsetal lobes not fimbriated, with 0-3
podal papillae; sometimes with subpodal or
ventral papillae on some segments.
Subgenus Scoloplos
Labotas Kinberg, 1866; type (by monotypy): L.
novae-hollandiae Kinberg, 1866.
Branchethus Chamberlin, 1919; type (by mono-
typy): B. latum Chamberlin, 1919.
Haploscoloplos Monro, 1933; type (by original
designation): Scoloplos cylindrifer Ehlers, 1904.
Diagnosis—Postsetal lobes of thoracic neuro-
podia with papilla in middle of lobe, with or
without 1 or 2 additional papillae in lower part.
Remarks.—The typical subgenus, as here de-
fined, includes species referred to Haploscoloplos
Monro (1933, p. 261), which was established to
include those species which differ from Scoloplos
in having the thoracic neuropodia provided only
with setae ending in capillary tips, without
crotchets. In some cases this character is difficult
to observe; the crotchets may be easily missed,
occurring in some thoracic neuropodia and not in
others. Until it can be established how much the
abrasive action of certain substrata has to do
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 5
with the formation of certain types of crotchets
from capillaries, the character does not seem to
be a good one. S. (S.) latus (Chamberlin, 1919),
the type species of Branchethus Chamberlin, 1919,
p. 357, differs from most other species of Scoloplos,
which usually have simple branchiae, by having
the branchiae with up to 9 branches; this is of
specific but not of generic significance. Branche-
thus was referred to Scoloplos by Fauvel (1982,
p. 167). Labotas Kinberg was referred to Scoloplos
by Augener (1922, p. 40).
Subgenus Leodamus Kinberg, 1866
Type (by monotypy): L. verax Kinberg, 1866;
see Hartman, 1949, p. 104.
Diagnosis —Thoracic neuropodia with post-
setal lobes low, rounded, without papillae.
Remarks.—S. (L.) johnsont (Moore, 1909, p.
260), which was described under Aricia, referred
to Scoloplos by Hisig (1914, p. 403) and to
Orbinia by Hartman (1944, p. 258), does not have
the thoracic neuropodia fimbriated as in Orbinia,
although it has subpodal ventral or stomach
papillae more commonly found in species of
Orbinia.
Genus Naineris Blainville, 1828
Naidonereits Malmgren, 1867.
Nainereis Mesnil and Caullery, 1898.
Type (by monotypy): Naineris quadricuspida
(Fabricius, 1780).
Diagnosis.—Prostomium oval or truncate, loaf-
shaped. Thoracic neuropodia with 0-3 postsetal
papillae.
Remarks.—Theodisca Fr. Miller, 1858, has
been referred to Naineris by Hisig (1914, p. 498);
the description and figures of the type species,
T. aurantiaca Fr. Miiller, seem insufficient to
determine just where among the orbinids it
belongs.
Subgenus Naineris
Diagnosis—Thoracic neuropodia with single
postsetal papilla in middle of lobe, with or without
1-2 additional papillae in lower part. Achaetous
buccal segment 1- to 4-ringed.
Polynaineris, n. subgen.
Anthostoma Schmarda, 1861, preoce.; type: A.
ramosum Schmarda, 1861 (see below), = Naz-
neris laevigata (Grube).
Lacydes Kinberg, 1866, preoce.; type (by mono-
typy): L. havaicus Kinberg, 1866, = Naineris
laevigata (Grube).
May 1957
Type: Naineris laevigata (Grube, 1855).
Diagnosis —Thoracic neuropodia without post-
setal papilla in middle of lobe, with postsetal lobe
rounded or diagonally truncate, upper part some-
times elongate, papilla-like. Achaetous buccal
segment 1-ringed.
Remarks —Anthostoma Schmarda, 1861, pre-
oce., included A. hexaphyllum from Cape of Good
Hope and A. ramosum from Jamaica. I am
selecting the latter species as the type. Both
species have been referred to Naineris laevigata
Grube, 1855); see Hisig, 1914, p. 450. The
0.35mm.
S
Ss 10
C i i
PETTIBONE: NORTH AMERICAN ORBINIIDAE 161
subgenus Polynaineris includes most of the
species that have been referred to Naineris.
Orbinia (Orbinia) swani, n. sp.
Bigs last
The species is based on a single specimen,
incomplete posteriorly (U.S.N.M. no. 28296),
collected at York Beach, Maine, by Emery Swan
and Nathan Riser, July 12, 1953. It is named for
Dr. Swan, one of the collectors.
Descripiion—Length 41 mm for 58 setigers,
greatest width 2 mm. Body widest in thoracic
—s
reel
Th ICs
i]
—
1O pL
d
.
SS \
~\\
=
Ba E
A z
NK S
b 2p
Fig. 1.—Orbinia swan, n. sp.: a, Dorsal view anterior end; b, left thoracic setiger 5, posterior view;
c, left thoracic setiger 26, anterior view; d, left setiger 55 (abdominal 24), posterior view; e, thoracic
neuropodial crotchet from setiger 5; f, same, from setiger 26. (All parapodia drawn to same scale.)
162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
region, tapering abruptly anteriorly and gradually
posteriorly. Thoracic region flattened dorsoven-
trally, abdominal region strongly convex ven-
trally, flattened dorsally. Large intersegmental
middorsal glandular areas beginning between
setigers 6 and 7. Prostomium (Fig. 1,a) acutely
conical, somewhat wrinkled, longer than wide.
Achaetous buccal segment obscurely biannulate,
narrower and slightly longer than the following;
large mouth with lateral lips formed by buccal
segment; lower lip formed by ventral part of first
and part of second setigers. Proboscis not ex-
tended. Branchiae beginning on setiger 5, short
anteriorly, becoming elongate, ligulate, densely
ciliated up to near the narrower distal tip;
branchiae longer than parapodial lobes on ab-
dominal region. Thoracic setigers 31. Thoracic
notopodia dorsolateral (Fig. 1,b,c) with digiti-
form postsetal lobe and radiating bundle of
crenulate capillary setae. Thoracic neuropodia
lateral, forming an oval transverse cushion, with
several transverse rows of crotchets (4 or 5 rows)
and 2 groups of crenulate capillary setae, an
upper and a lower group; crotchets (Fig. 1,e,f)
golden-yellow, gently curved, smooth or with
faint spinous rows, with tips bluntly rounded or
conical; neuropodial postsetal lobes fimbriated,
with 3-6 postsetal papillae im more anterior
segments (none on first setiger), becoming more
numerous in more posterior thoracic segments
(up to 18 crowded papillae where best developed).
Subpodal ventral papillae on setigers 19-40 (last
13 thoracic, first 9 abdominal), few at first (1 on
setigers 19, 20), becoming more numerous and
forming crowded ventral papillae in continuous
line with 18 postsetal neuropodial papillae on
setiger 28; ventral papillae decreasing markedly
in number on abdominal setiger 4 (6 papillae),
then decreasing to 2, then 1 and disappearing
after ninth abdominal. Notopodia of abdominal
region (Fig. 1,d) similar to those of thoracic
region but notosetae more faintly crenulate,
sometimes short and forked (broken crenulate
capillaries?) ; without interramal cirri; with imter-
ramal ciliated lateral organ at base of notopodia.
Abdominal neuropodia unequally bilobed, inner
lobe shorter, rounded, outer lobe longer, digiti-
form, with small bundle of crenulate capillaries.
Anterior abdominal segments (some 7 transitional
ones) with subpodal lateral papillae corresponding
in position to postsetal neuropodial papillae of the
thoracic segments, decreasing in number from
A
7 papillae on first abdominal to single one on
VOL. 47, NO. 5
eighth and remaining abdominal segments (at
least to end of incomplete specimen).
Remarks.—Orbinia swani lacks special lanceo-
late spines in the posterior thoracic neuropodia
and thus differs from the species belonging to the
subgenus Phylo. It differs from O. sertulata
(Savigny) and O. latreillii (Audouin and
Edwards) in lacking interramal cirri on the
abdominal segments and from O. ornata (Verrill)
in having subpodal papillae or ventral cirri on the
abdominal segments. Orbinia swan (thoracic
setigers 31; subpodal ventral papillae on 22 seg-
ments) is close to and intermediate between O.
armandi (McIntosh) from the Atlantic, off the
Shetlands (thoracic setigers 19; long, villous
subpodal ventral papillae on 6 segments) and O.
bioreti (Fauvel) from Madagascar (thoracic seti-
gers 34-39; subpodal ventral papillae on about
25 segments).
Scoloplos (Scoloplos) pugettensis, n. name
Scoloplos elongata Johnson, 1901, p. 412, pl. 10,
figs. 105-110. Not S. elongatus Quatrefages, 1866.
Haploscoloplos elongata Hartman, 1948, p. 30.—
Hartman and Reish, 1950, p. 26.—Berkeley and
Berkeley, 1952, p. 97, fig. 200; 1956a, p. 242.
Diagnosis—Length up to 195 mm, width up
to 3 mm, segments up to 300. Thoracic setigers
about 20 (19-22). Thoracic neuropodia with
conical postsetal papilla and all neurosetae ending
in capillary tips. Branchiae beginning on about
setiger 16 (15-18). Abdominal segments without
interramal cirri or subpodal papillae or ventral
cirri but with entire, elongate, sometimes undu-
late subpodal flanges.
Remarks.—S. pugettensis differs from S. acme-
ceps Chamberlin by having all the thoracic
neurosetae ending in capillary tips; in S. acmeceps,
there are several rows of crotchets in addition to
the capillaries.
Material examined—Numerous — specimens
from Washington and Puget Sounds, Washington,
low water to 12 fathoms, mud, gravelly-sand.
Distribution.—Arctic Alaska to California. Low
water to 30 fathoms.
Scoloplos (Scoloplos) dayi, n. name
Orbinia dubia Day, 1955, p. 409, fig. 1, a-d. Not
Scoloplos dubia Tebble, 1955.
Remarks.—Orbinia dubia Day, 1955 (issued in
October) has thoracic neuropodia with only 1-3
podal papillae, thus not fimbriated as in Orbimia,
although there are stomach papillae as in many
May 1957 PETTIBONE: NORTH
species of Orbinia. According to the revision pro-
posed herein, the species should be referred to
Scoloplos. Unfortunately Scoloplos dubia is pre-
occupied by Tebble (1955, p. 123, issued in
August). I have therefore given the name Scolo-
plos dayi to Day’s species from South Africa.
Scoloplos (Scoloplos) riseri, n. sp.
Fig. 2, a-d
The species is known from a single specimen,
incomplete posteriorly, collected in the Woods
Hole region, Massachusetts, August 8, 1950,
exact locality unknown (U.S.N.M. no. 28295).
Tt is named for Dr. Nathan Riser.
Description —Length 25 mm for 100 segments,
greatest width 1.5 mm. Body sublinear, tapering
rather abruptly anteriorly and gradually pos-
teriorly. Thoracic region flattened dorsoventrally,
abdominal region strongly convex ventrally,
flattened dorsally. Prostomium (Fig. 2,a) acutely
conical, longer than wide, sometimes wrinkled,
0.35 mm.
U
O.f{5 mm.
d
AMERICAN ORBINIIDAE 163
appearing 2- to 3-ringed, with pair of minute
deep-set eyespots laterally near base of prost-
omium. Achaetous buccal segment narrower and
about same length as the following; buccal seg-
ment and part of first setiger involved in mouth.
Proboscis not extended. Branchiae beginning on
setiger 10, short at first, becoming long, ligulate,
densely ciliated up to near distal tip. Thoracic
setigers 19. Thoracic notopodia (Fig. 2,b) with
digitiform postsetal lobe and radiating bundle of
crenulate capillaries. Thoracic neuropodia form-
ing an oval cushion-like lobe with several trans-
verse rows of shorter crotchets and posterior row
of longer crenulate capillaries; crotchets (Fig. 2,d)
straight or slightly curved, with tips blunt to
conical, appearing hooded at certain angles, with
transverse spinous rows. Short, rounded postsetal
neuropodial lobe with single conical papilla on
first 11 setigers, 2 or 3 postsetal papillae on rest of
thoracic setigers. Abdominal setigers (Fig. 2,c)
with notopodial postsetal lobe longer than in
a ee
le
Fig. 2.—Scoloplos riseri, n. sp.: a, Lateral view anterior end; 6, right thoracic parapodium from
setiger 6, posterior view; c, right parapodium from setiger 30 (tenth abdominal), posterior view; d,
thoracic neuropodial crotchet. (Both parapodia drawn to same scale.)
164 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
those of thoracic region, ligulate, with bundle of
faintly crenulate capillaries and some shorter
forked notosetae (broken crenulate capillaries?).
Neuropodia with two subequal, short, digitiform
lobes and small bundle of faintly crenulate capil-
laries. An interramal cirrus on last 2 thoracic
setigers and continuing on about 70 abdominal
segments. Subpodal papillae on setigers 14-24
(last 6 thoracic, first 5 abdominal): setigers 14-16
with single lateral papilla; setiger 17 with 2
lateral and 2 ventral papillae on each side;
setiger 18 with 2 lateral and 4 ventral papillae;
setigers 19-21 with 7-9 papillae forming continu-
ous row nearly reaching midventral line; setigers
22-24 with 3 subpodal lateral papillae; 2 wide
conical subpodal papillae on rest of abdominal
segments (Fig. 2,c), corresponding in position to
entire subpodal flange found in some species of
Scoloplos.
Remarks.—sS. riseri differs from most of the
other species of Scoloplos by having subpodal
ventral papillae on some anterior segments; these
are found more commonly in species of Orbinia.
However the postsetal neuropodial lobes are not
fimbriated as in Orbinia, there being only 1-3
postsetal papillae. Also the anterior abdominal
segments are provided with interramal cirri.
S. riseri is close to S. dayi from South Africa. The
two species differ in the following:
Scoloplos dayi Scoloplos riser
Subpodal ventral Present on seti- Present on _ setigers
papillae gers 15-32, up to 14-24, up to 9ina row
20 in a row on on each side.
each side.
Abdominal sub- Entire subpodal Two subpodal papillae
podal region flange after se- or slashed subpodal
tiger 32. flange after setiger 24.
Scoloplos (Scoloplos) schmitti, n. sp.
Fig. 3, a-h
The species is represented by 21 specimens,
incomplete posteriorly, taken from four Albatross
stations from the deep Atlantic off the east coast
of North America in 1883-1885. The types (U.S.
N.M. nos. 28298 and 3178) were taken from
37° 12’ N., 74° 20’ W., 788 fms., blue mud,
Albatross Station 2018, 1883. The species is named
for Dr. Waldo Schmitt of the United States
National Museum, whose encouragement and
help have aided so many zoologists.
Description —Length 20 mm for 5C setigers
(none complete), greatest width 2 mm. Body
widest in thoracic region, tapering rather abruptly
VOL. 47, No. 5
anteriorly and gradually posteriorly. Thoracic
region flattened dorsoventrally ; abdominal region
convex ventrally, flattened dorsally. Prostomium
(Fig. 3,a) subtriangular, bluntly conical, about
as wide as long. Achaetous buccal segment
slightly longer than the following; buccal segment
and first setigerous segment involved in mouth
(Fig. 3,b). Proboscis only partially extended,
appearing as a lobulated sac. Branchiae beginning
on setiger 9 (8-10), flattened, triangular, tapering
to slender tips, becoming longer in more posterior
segments. Thoracic setigers 13-14. First three
setigers (Fig. 3,b,c) differ markedly from rest of
thoracic setigers; notopodia with small conical
postsetal lobe and radiating bundle of long
crenulate capillary setae; neuropodia forming
oval cushion-like lobe, without postsetal papillae,
with 3 kinds of setae: (1) 2 rows of smooth, stout,
reddish amber-colored spines with tips straight
or curved, pointed and hooded, the hood frayed
in various ways (Fig. 3,f,¢); (2) anterior row of
short crotchets (not as stout as the spines), with
tips blunt, frayed hood, and transverse spinous
rows (Fig. 3,h); (3) a small group of crenulate
capillaries at upper part of neuropodial bundle.
Rest of thoracic setigers (Fig. 3,b,d) with digiti-
form postsetal notopodial lobe; neuropodia with
conical postsetal lobe, with several rows of cren-
ulate capillary neurosetae (sometimes a few short
hooded crotchets on setiger 4). Abdominal seg-
ments (Fig. 3,e) with bilobed neuropodium; inner
lobe short, rounded; outer lobe longer, digitiform,
with small bundle of long, faintly crenulate capil-
laries. A low entire subpodal lobe. No ventral
cirri, subpodal papillae or interramal cirri. Large
middorsal brownish glandular area beginning be-
tween setigers 9-10; brown pigment sometimes
extending laterally forming characteristic trans-
verse brown bands.
Remarks.—S. schnutti differs from other species
of Scoloplos by having the first three thoracic
neuropodia differing markedly from the following,
provided with stout spines of a special type.
Material examined.—Albatross station 2207,
39° 35’ N.,71° 31’ W., 1,061 fathoms, green mud,
1884; station 2234, 39° 09’ N., 72° 03’ W., 810
fathoms, green mud, 1884; station 2531, 40° 42’
N., 66° 33’ W., 852 fathoms, grey mud, 1885.
Distribution.—North Atlantic, deep water off
east coast North America (off Massachusetts to
off New York). 788 to 1,061 fathoms.
May 1957
Naineris (Naineris) berkeleyorum, n. sp.
Fig. 4, a-f
Nainereis quadricuspida? Berkeley and Berkeley,
1956b. p. 44, fig. 5; not Fabricius, 1780.
The type (U.S.N.M. no. 28297) is a complete
specimen collected on Smith Island in the Strait
of Juan de Fuca, Washington, August 1, 1940.
——)
12.50
PETTIBONE: NORTH AMERICAN ORBINIIDAE 165
The specimens reported by Mr. and Mrs. Cyril
Berkeley (1956) from False Bay, San Juan
Island, as doubtfully N. quadricuspida, certainly
belong to this species which is here named for
them.
Description —Length 180 mm, greatest width
3 mm, segments about 3850. Body widest in
thoracie region which tapers gradually anteriorly
Fie. 3.—Scoloplos schmittt, n. sp.: a, Dorsal view anterior end; b, lateral view anterior end: c, left
parapodium from setiger 3, anterior view; d, right parapodium from setiger 12, posterior view; e, left
parapodium from setiger 15 (first abdominal), posterior. view; f, g, neuropodial spines from setiger 2;
h, short crotchet from setiger 2. (All parapodia drawn to same scale.) :
166 JOURNAL OF THE
and is flattened dorsoventrally; abdominal region
long, convex ventrally, flattened dorsally. Pro-
stomium (Fig. 4,a) truncate, loaf-shaped, wider
than long. Achaetous buccal segment about same
length as the following. Branchiae beginning on
setiger 5, short anteriorly, becoming elongate,
ligulate, densely ciliated up to near narrower
distal tips; branchiae longer than parapodial lobes
on abdominal region. Thoracic setigers 26 (26-27,
Berkeley). Thoracic notopodia (Fig. 4,b,c) dorso-
lateral, with digitiform postsetal lobe and radiat-
ing bundle of crenulate capillary setae. Thoracic
neuropodia lateral, forming oval transverse cush-
ion, with several transverse rows of crotchets
(6 or 7 or so rows) and posterior row of longer
0.35mm.
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 5
crenulate capillary setae; crotchets (Fig. 4,e,f)
reddish bronzy, straight or curved, with trans-
verse denticled rows, with tip entire or slightly
incised (appears hooded at certain angles). No
transitional setae (subuluncini). First 6 thoracic
setigers with single conical postsetal papilla near
middle of lobe (Fig. 4,b); rest of thoracic setigers
with additional postsetal papilla near lower part
of lobe (Fig. 4,¢). Abdominal region with notopo-
dia similar to those of thoracic region (Fig. 4,d),
but notosetae more faintly crenulate; also some
shorter forked setae (broken crenulate capil-
laries?). Neuropodium bilobed; inner lobe low,
rounded; outer lobe short, digitiform; small
bundle of faintly crenulate capillaries; single,
we
; e Gr fv
YY
a Wa
d
f .
€ | |
)
WW. a E
ro)
G
= @ 4 “S
— (5 iS
b SS C iE)
Fic. 4.—Naineris berkeleyorum, n. sp.: a, Dorsal view anterior end; b, right thoracic parapodium
from setiger 4, posterior view; c, same, from setiger 18; d, right parapodium from setiger 40 (abdominal
setiger 14), posterior view; e, thoracic neuropodial crotchet; f, tips of same, frontal view. (All parapodia
drawn to same scale.)
May 1957 PETTIBONE: NORTH
slightly projecting amber-colored, curved acicu-
lum with blunt or slightly notched tip. Subpodal
papilla on first few abdominal setigers (5 or so)
corresponding in position to lower postsetal
papilla of thoracic setigers. Posterior end cylin-
drieal, ending in +lobed anal segment; lobes
dorsal, lateral and ventral, with 4 short slender
anal cirri alternating with them. Proboscis par-
tially extended in type, appearing as simple
lobulated sac. Color (in alcohol) pale yellowish.
Remarks.—N aineris berkeleyorum resembles N.
quadricuspida. It differs in the following:
Naineris quadri- Naineris berkeleyorum
cuspida
Prostomium Globular Loaf-shaped
Number of tho- 26-27
racic setigers
Thoracic postsetal
neuropodial
lobe
About 13 (11-17)
Single median Single median postsetal
postsetal papilla papilla on first 6
on all thoracic setigers; 2 papillae on
setigers. rest of -thoracie se-
tigers.
Subpodal papilla None Single one present on
few anterior abdomi-
nal setigers (5 or so).
Distribution—West coast North America
(Strait of Juan de Fuca and San Juan Archipel-
ago, Wash.). Low water.
REFERENCES
AUGENER, H. Revision der australischen Poly-
chaeten-Typen von Kinberg. Ark. Zool. Stock-
holm 14 (8): 42 pp., 10 figs. 1922.
BERKELEY, E., and BERKELEY, C. Canadian
Pacific Fauna. 9. Annelida. 9b (2) Polychaeta
Sedentaria. Fish. Research Board Canada:
139 pp., 292 figs. 1952.
. On a collection of polychaetous annelids
from northern Banks Island, from the south
Beaufort Sea, and from northwest Alaska;
together with some new records from the east
coast of Canada. Journ. Fish. Res. Board
Canada 18 (2): 233-246. 1956a.
AMERICAN ORBINIIDAE
167
——. Notes on Polychaeta from the east coast of
Vancowver Island and from adjacent waters,
with a description of a new species of Aricidea.
Journ. Fish. Res. Board Canada 13 (4): 541-
546, 6 figs. 1956b.
CHAMBERLIN, R. V. The Annelida Polychaeta.
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 48: 514 pp., 80 pls.
1919.
Day, J. H. The Polychaeta of South Africa. Part 3.
Sedentary species from Cape shores and estu-
aries. Journ. Linn. Soc. London 42 (287) : 407-
452, 8 figs. 1955.
Erste, H. Zur Systematik, Anatomie und Mor-
phologie der Ariciiden nebst Bettragen zur
generallen Systematik. Mitt. Zool. Stat.
Neapel 21: 153-600, pls. 10-27, 23 text-figs.
1914.
Fauveu, P. Annelida Polychaeta of the Indian
Museum, Calcutta. Mem. Indian Mus. 12: 262
pp., 9 pls., 40 figs. 1932.
Hartman, O. Polychaetous annelids from Cali-
fornia including the descriptions of two new
genera and nine new species. Allan Hancock
Pac. Exped. 10: 239-290, pls. 19-26. 1944.
——.. The polychaetous annelids of Alaska. Pac.
Sci. 2 (1): 58 pp., 12 figs., 2 maps. 1948.
. The marine annelids erected by Kinberg
with notes on some other types in the Swedish
State Museum. Ark. Zool. Stockholm 42A (1):
137 pp., 18 pls. 1949.
Hartman, O., and Retsu, D. J. The marine
annelids of Oregon. Oregon State Monogr.
Studies Zool., no. 6: 64 pp., 5 pls. 1950.
Jounson, H. P. The Polychaeta of the Puget Sound
region. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 29 (18):
381-487, 19 pls. 1901.
Monro, C. C. A. On a collection of Polychaeta from
Dry Tortugas, Florida. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 10, 12: 244-269, 12 figs. 1933.
Moors, J. P. Polychaetous annelids from Mon-
terey Bay and San Diego, California. Proc.
Acad. Sci. Philadelphia 61: 235-295, pls. 7-9.
1909.
TrepsLe, N. The polychaete fauna of the Gold
Coast. Bull. Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist. Zool. 3 (2):
59-148, 30 figs. 1955.
Definition is the end and epilogue of science. It is not the beginning of our
knowing, but only of our teaching—T. CAMPANELLA (1590).
168
HABITS OF
Lady hornbills are trusting wives, and gentle-
men hornbills are the most unbelievably faithful
husbands.
Hornbills are birds, the size of small turkeys
with enormous beaks, usually found in pairs in
the forests of East Africa. A comprehensive report
on the behavior of these grotesque birds in the
Mpanga Research Forest, near Entebbe, Uganda,
by Dr. Lawrence Kilham, of Bethesda, Md., has
recently been published by the Smithsonian
Institution. The account is a classic of
bird-watching.
Hornbills are perhaps best known from the
curious instinctive behavior of the female. Be-
fore laying her annual quota of two eggs she
walls herself with mud, collected by the male,
into a hole near the top of some high jungle tree.
There one of the eggs—apparently seldom both—
is hatched and the chick reared. The female con-
tinues this voluntary imprisonment for two
months or more. There is always a small aperture
in the wall. Through this the foraging male
passes food to his imprisoned mate, once an hour
or less. Food consists mostly of fruits. Sometimes
he brings her what apparently are playthings to
relieve the monotony of hatching and chick-
rearing.
Hornbills mate for life and apparently their
conjugal life is a model of high morality for the
whole animal kingdom. Walled into the tree-
holes, the females obviously are helpless to
protect themselves against any infidelity, and,
sad to say, there are vampire female hornbills
in the jungle whose only thought is to steal some
imprisoned lady’s spouse. In the case observed
by Dr. Kilham, however, the male preserved his
virtue to the end.
By November 8 [he records], the female was
walled in, and a more serious attempt at inter-
ference was now made by a foreign female. . . . She
was following the male and lighted in the next
tree when he lighted above his nest hole. On
November 23 the same course of events took place,
except that the male was less tolerant. He fed his
own mate, then drove the intruder away. A week
later I saw her fly in close behind the male and
light 25 feet from the nest hole. The male gave his
mate a piece of bark followed by some fruit, and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 5
HORNBILLS
then bounced from one branch to another toward
the foreign female.
The poor fellow was falling, falling, but the
female within the nest screamed a number of
times. I wondered whether the interloper could
seduce the male, but from subsequent observations
it seemed unlikely that she would. The male re-
turned again to the nest hole, and a few minutes
later was in the upper part of the tree knocking
about on dead branches until he dislodged a piece
of bark. He clamped his bili on the bark until it
was largely fragmented. Then he moved toward
the foreign female. If he presented the bark [a
cherished play object among hornbills] one would
suppose that she had some attraction for him. After
a moment, however, he changed his direction,
flew down to the big limb below, bent over the nest
hole, and gave the token to his mate, accompanied
by a feeding chuckle. Subsequently he returned
to perch quietly within eight feet of the intruding
female. At 7.30 a.m. the two of them flew away
together. As the nesting season progressed, he
became less tolerant of her intrusions.... On
February 3 I again watched her fly in behind the
male and alight on the nest tree, making con-
siderable noise. The male stopped feeding his
mate, swooped at the interloper and drove her
down toward the ground. However, when he flew
away, she followed a short distance behind.
The vampire was hard to discourage. A few
days later she was observed at the entrance to the
nest, trying to break the wall with her beak.
Probably there was a sex murder case in the
making. But “after five minutes the male arrived
and... drove the foreign female to another tree,
flying at her so hard that he knocked leaves from
intervening branches. He returned to his nest
with a small stick held like a cigar. His mate,
who had remained silent, now began her wailing
screeches. ... The intruding female, persistent as
usual... had followed the male back to the nest
tree. In a few minutes he flew at her again, flying
faster than hornbills usually do as he chased her
from one tree to another.” But his ordeal of
bachelorhood was nearly over. Five days later
mother and young emerged from the nest. ‘““The
pair of hornbills were perched side by side on
their nest tree. Not long after I heard a great
flutter of wings. I looked back to see both mem-
bers of the pair pursuing a foreign female... .
When the parents later came to our garden, she
did not follow.”
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Bivorapnicalisociety Of Washington: — cic. cee os cece esis s oasis coe CHESTER H. PaGE
mnihropological society of Washington... 5.0... -..<..-+ccs+eses sous Frank M. SETzLER
Eralarrcalsociety,Of Washington. ca. l eryoseisiaccesce ss) aeiarsleaeis < HERBERT FRIEDMANN
whemicalasociety, Of Washington). .c).2..0s\al-(2< oeisclelels esvereis oie svesee CHARLES R. NaESER
Entomological Society of Washington.......................000s Cart F. W. MursEBECK
RieirOn slaGeorraphiGi SOClELYia. 25s secs.nis bois,< «24,2 5:alsyeisaiare oiere orsiesarecs ALEXANDER WETMORE
Gealarieal’Society of Washington. ...2- 2... <0c science asec nccce cieeae Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................05. FREDERICK O. Cor
Polumoiastlistorical SOC by. .cjccc.< ee 6 cis eisic cisions tharein s wleiasaiel sisyeleidiars aie een U.S. Grant, III
Rauamecal society of Washington. «5 .1.s.cis< clei eeis visrereis oslo sie asiviaajeie's'e ere Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters. ..........20000- G. Furprpo Gravatr
WAShmeton Society Of HNgiINEeLrss.... acc. acs ccc cis eects vee s code nces Herpert G. Dorszy
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ Arno.p H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers........ Howarp S. Bran
Helminthological Society of Washington...... Mare elejeltalareorereteretiat Donatp B, McMuLuen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... Mica. J. Petczar, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fiorp W. Houg#
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.............eeeeeceee0es Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............ ...Doueias E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorae A. Horrie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals......... sateyeisveleiere Hersert C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..W1Lu1am T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CHARLES S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
PHysIoLoGy.—The quantum character of light and its implications on
visual thresholds. ERNEST BAUMGARDT.....................0-.
GroLocy.—A study of the montmorillonite variety galapektite. GEORGE
AD. FAUSD). 5,2 sspshayetotte ogs eres irate eee ie hanes ee
GroLocy.—The relation between lattice parameters and composition for
montmorillonite-group minerals. GrorcEe T. Faust.............
Entromo.toecy.—tThe stridulations of some crickets in the Dominican Re-
public. -HcA. ATHARD 6 cig 8 eee ess Ge eee
HERPETOLOGY.—A new subspecies of the ted lizard Cnemidophorus sex-
lineatus (Linnaeus) from eastern United States. RicHarp L.
FROREMAN 653.05 Pt et lade ts aco ae tds Geeta aie OO
ZooLtocy.—Teredo (Nototeredo) nambudalaiensis, a new shipworm from
the Madras coast of India. N. BALAKRISHNAN Narr AND O. N.
GoURUMAINT 203) 0 NE ho oa dues alte atte fe acne Le
ZooLocy.—North American genera of the family Orbiniidae (Annelida
Polychaeta), with descriptions of new species. Martian H. Prrtt-
Page
133
143
146
150
153
157
< ~
-YOLUME 47 June.1957 NUMBER 6
JOURNAL
OF THE
|
fe SHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
,,
)) a
Published Monthly by the
\WASHINGTON ANG VAUD) eM Ya OvE. 9S C.1 EiN ¢ E'S
( MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BamMrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProcEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReHpeER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year...............2200+eeeeeeees $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22° incl. (21 numbers per vol.) . soo © wall) 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the Journat (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monoarapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................:020000 $7.50
PRocEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...................2.--.0-05- $25.00
Single volumes, UNDOUN GE s:6k2 sees ac tse yelo dee aria aioe hee Ree eee 2.00
Single LUM DOTS so eee ear ea ne ea Pies, on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D. ;
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
JUNE 1957
No. 6
PHYSICS.—\Weteorological factors affecting spread of radioactivity from nuclear
bombs.! LestmR Macuta, U. 8. Weather Bureau. (Communicated by Chester
H. Page.)
The fission products from a nuclear ex-
plosion are harmless until brought into
man’s environment or food. The dispersal
from test site takes place largely through
atmospheric transport. The problem, how-
ever, 1S more than the application of the
winds to carry the particulate debris;
turbulent diffusion and precipitation, for
example, also play important roles.
In treating the entire radioactive fallout
spectrum, it is convenient to divide the
particulate fallout into three categories;
first, that which deposits out in the first day,
or less. This is designated as local fallout
since in this short time the horizontal dis-
placement cannot have been very great.
The second class is deposited between about
1 day and a few months. For lack of a better
word, it will be termed intermediate fallout.
Finally, the fallout delivered beyond a few
months is called delayed fallout. Because
the particles are injected into the strato-
sphere and found over much of the globe, it
is also referred to as ‘‘world-wide strato-
spheric fallout.”
It is the purpose of this discussion to
point out the meteorological considerations
which account for atmospheric transport of
all types of debris. Remarks on local and
intermediate ranges will be brief, while
those pertaining to delayed fallout, will be
more extensive.
LOCAL FALLOUT
The particles of local fallout settle mainly
because of their weight. Given their size,
1 Presented at the Washington Academy of
Sciences Fall Symposium, Washington, D. C.,
November 15, 1956.
169
AUG 39 1687
shape, and specific gravity, it is possible to
predict the fall velocity.
However, even in the absence of exact
information on their characteristics, it is
possible to produce useful results as to where
and when particles will reach the ground.
This is because the relative time of fall as a
function of altitude, the important element,
is insensitive to the particle’s physical
properties.
There are at least two other processes
which produce a downward flux of particles
in the atmosphere. First, vertical mixing
acting upon a cloud of particles at upper
altitudes will transfer some of these to lower
altitudes. The magnitude of usual tropo-
spheric vertical eddy speeds is thought to be
of the order of a few tenths to a few miles per
hour. It is likely that particles which have
settling speeds of a tenth to a hundreth of
the eddy velocity will have their vertical
component of motion controlled mainly by
atmospheric turbulence. Those with fall
velocities equal to or greater than a few miles
per hour will descend mainly because of
gravitational settling. The gravitational
effect for a spherical particle of specific
gravity of 2.5 takes over between about 50
and 80 microns in diameter. Most particles
in the heavy local fallout descend at rates
corresponding to sizes over 50 microns in
diameter.
A second means of downward transfer of
the particles occurs by precipitation. Inso-
far as possible, nuclear tests by the United
States are conducted in the absence of
naturally-occurring precipitation. However,
in the Pacific Proving Grounds, it is likely
that the huge amount of moisture entrained
170
by the rising fireball condenses upon cooling
and that some downward transfer of the
particles results from scavenging of falling
precipitation.
The horizontal motion of the falling
particles results primarily from the action
of winds which are observed by conventional
wind measuring equipment. The procedures
for utilizing winds for the determination of
fallout areas are entirely straight-forward.
The falling particle is transported horizon-
tally by the wind in a layer depending upon
its stay in the layer before settling to the
next lower one. The summation of the hor-
izontal displacements ends with the ground
deposition of the particle.
In addition to transport by the usually
observed winds, there is a certain amount of
lateral dispersion because of horizontal
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 6
turbulence in the atmosphere. Experience
suggests that im most cases, the spread of
falling particles by the average winds so
greatly exceed the spread due to small-
scale turbulence that the diffusive spread is
usually ignored.
In the prediction of local fallout radiation
gamma intensities from the ground, it is
necessary to know not only the winds and
physical characteristics of the falling par-
ticles, but also the amount of radioactivity
as a function of particle size and altitude.
This latter information is essentially non-
meteorological and will not be dealt with at
this time. An example of the final result of
the application of meteorological winds to a
model of radioactivity as a function of
particle size and altitude is presented in the
first few figures.
EUREKA
ee
Imr/hr ot H+12
Ye
TONOPAH
GOLDFIELD
CEATTY;
~ |
N.T.S.
Imr/hr at H#l2 0-7
ELY
x
aie
4\5
I
'
i
CRYSTAL SPRINGS |
HAND COMPUTATION
(SHOT-TIME WINDS )
0 10 2 30 40 50 60
(a dE tj
STATUTE MILES
Fre. 1.
JUNE 1957
The first figure shows the actual and pre-
dicted isolines of gamma activity in milli-
roentgens per hour referred to twelve hours.
The light dashes are the observed field and
were derived from ground monitoring along
various roads around the Nevada Test Site.
The heavy lines are the predicted fallout
pattern using a Weather Bureau model of
cloud radioactivity. On this picture, the
winds measured near the explosion place
and time the bomb went off, which were
mainly from south to north, were assumed
to carry particles at all later times and
places. It is evident that this prediction fails
to reflect the bending of the pattern to the
east in northern Nevada. This static wind
picture is the kind used in most fallout fore-
casts. The next figure (2) contains a computed
fallout pattern, as the heavy lines, which
includes the best estimate of the change of
-
EUREKA
a
7
r
/
CUR’
7
TONOPAH
GOLOFIELD
GROUND ZERO
|
N.T.S.
|
1
!
1
1
MACHTA: SPREAD OF RADIOACTIVITY
Imr/hr at H+12
ELY
\
\
RANT
|
\
)
the wind in time and in space. It is evident
that incorporation of the changing winds
provides a better verification. These cal-
culated fallout patterns are typical of most
eases which have been attempted using
meteorological data.
INTERMEDIATE FALLOUT
After most of the particles whose size are
large enough to have a significant fall
velocity have been removed from the atmos-
phere, the remaining particles are part of
either the intermediate or delayed fallout.
For weapons which have been fired at the
Nevada Test Site, the intermediate fallout
originates in the troposphere since the nu-
clear cloud tops rarely penetrated the
tropopause. However, for high-yield detona-
tions, the intermediate fallout may origi-
nate either from tropospheric or stratospheric
3
5
x
Zs
3
Qa
o
ee
a2
i)
NEV.
UTAH
CRYSTAL SPRINGS
HAND COMPUTATION
(TIME AND SPACE ANALYSIS OF WINDS)
fe) 10 20 30 40 50 60
STATUTE MILES
IME, A
72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 47, NO. 6
= = = — ol wwe To = - =
Po ; oT rs »
Ge _
S %
vei ps,
A wed a
eh - is
? aw ie
5 fie 2 C.
in # rd a A] :
et Fy ee gin =
wv Ry Pe ze OPOSPHERIC CLO
3 7: Oe IAA . $ =, LE as = |
aos TRADE WIND CLOUD * 3 aT ij
m ; AR >
at |b. ua Sk
ee | Siac - |
! = a
7
¥
\
S|
= TS LY AT —=s he L a
{ .
.
#
YO
=( Yr
7¥ 41
ie 2 SS! t
eS
y i ne
a= :
/ SONVER CENCE
3
1, rr 0 aT
Fig. 3.
material, and, at the moment, it is not
possible to say with confidence which source
contributes the larger fraction.
It is characteristic of the motions in the
atmosphere that air masses are carried
zonally, that is, around circles of latitudes,
much more rapidly than in the north-south
direction. This is true both in the tropo-
sphere and stratosphere. The result of this
meteorological fact is the predominance of
intermediate fallout in the same latitude
band as the test locations. In Fig. 3, the
30-day cumulative fallout from CASTLE
BRAVO is shown as a series of isolines on the
lower part of the figure. The upper portion
of the figure shows as the shaded area the
regions of the globe which, from meteor-
ological considerations, were expected to
have fallout in the first week or so. It is
evident that the band of highest fallout
circles the earth in the tropics of the northern
hemisphere with only occasional north-
south excursions.
The removal of intermediate range par-
ticles from the atmosphere during dry
weather is assisted by vertical eddies near
the earth’s surface and by interception by
obstacles. However, it is likely that an
important fraction is removed by precipita-
tion scavenging. It has been found, for ex-
ample, following most of our Nevada test
operations, that on days with rain, there is
10 times more radioactivity deposited on the
ground than on days with no rain. The
particles are probably large enough so that
scavenging by inertial effects are still
important as will be shown later. That is,
the small radioactive particles, because of
their inertia cannot escape from the path of
the falling raindrop.
The budgeting of the fraction of radio-
activity deposited in the intermediate range
as well as that in the delayed fallout is quite
uncertain. Careful analysis of the world-wide
fallout network of the U. S. Atomic Energy
Commission after the tvy and CASTLE test
JUNE 1957
series suggests that between 1 and 5 per-
eent of the fission products which were
formed fell out between about 1 and 30 days
after each test operation. The same num-
bers for the intermediate fallout from the
Nevada tests amounts to perhaps 25 per-
eent. In the latter case, the amount of the
close-in fallout is known quite exactly and,
since there is no delayed fallout, we can add
the local and intermediate fallout together
to obtain the total. The result shows that
something of the order of 65 percent of the
radioactivity is still unaccounted for in the
Nevada tests. It is possible that the local
fallout, in this case, has been underesti-
mated but this is unlikely. The more
reasonable explanation is given in terms of
our inability to accurately measure the true
removal of particles from the atmosphere
with simple devices. The estimate just
mentioned is based on the measurement of
fallout on gummed films exposed horizon-
tally. Even if gummed papers are 100 per-
cent efficient (and they are believed to be
about 70 percent efficient for gross fission
products now under discussion), it fails to
detect radioactive particles removed by
vertical surfaces. The Naval Research
Laboratory in Washington, D. C., has re-
ported an amount of radioactivity on a
vertically exposed piece of cheesecloth equal
to that deposited on the ground for the same
time interval and area. Other experiments
confirm the fact that the particles in the
intermediate range are collected by other
than horizontally exposed face-up surfaces.
The question which is still unanswered,
however, is how much more is removed than
that observed by the gummed film network.
Thus, the cumulative contribution of the
intermediate fallout and the delayed fallout
over that portion of the world lying in the
belt surrounding the nuclear proving grounds
is still somewhat questionable. When soil
samples are collected, say over the U. &.,
which have integrated all fallout since the
atomic age, questions may be raised con-
cerning the apportionment of the fallout.
Although, on the average, the bulk of the
radioactivity in the intermediate range lies
in a belt surrounding the latitude of the test
site, there can be anomalous situations
which will spread the debris over a very
MACHTA: SPREAD OF RADIOACTIVITY
173
large north-south range or carry the entire
nuclear cloud in fact to a new and distant
latitude for zonal transport there.
DELAYED FALLOUT
Since the particulate debris which is lo-
cated in the troposphere can be shown to be
removed within a matter of weeks or months
even from delayed fallout, it follows that
delayed fallout must be stored somewhere.
Aircraft sampling and balloon flights have
clearly established that the stratosphere is
the storage region for delayed fallout. It can
also be deduced that, since the particles take
longer than a few months to fall out of the
atmosphere, their size must be exceedingly
small and it would be estimated that they
are no larger than 1 micron and probably
well below 0.1 micron in diameter. However,
despite this apparent smallness in size, we
have no positive proof, at this point, that
gravitational settling does not contribute to
the transfer of radioactive particles from the
stratosphere into the troposphere, and, in
fact, there is the slightest suggestion that
gravitational settling may even be impor-
tant.
It is perhaps worthwhile at this point to
review the questions which can be asked of
the meterorologist with respect to delayed
fallout. First, how fast is the particulate
debris leaving the stratosphere, and second,
where will it come out.
In order to make a prediction of contami-
nation, it is essential to know the source of the
pollutants. It is not known from the high
altitude measurements exactly where the
debris is located in the stratosphere. The
next figure (4) shows some of the reasoning
in trying to determine even the initial vertical
distribution. To the left, we see a drawing of
a nuclear cloud with the familiar stem and
mushroom. In this hypothetical high-yield
explosion, the entire mushroom has been
placed in the stratosphere above the tropo-
pause. To the right, we see, as the dashed
line, the profile of the visible part of the
mushroom. If one assumes that extreme
turbulence exists in this cloud so that it is
thoroughly mixed, then at every point the
amount of radioactivity per gram of air is
constant. Since the mass of air per unit
volume or air density decreases with height,
174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 6
+ VISIBLE
\ CLOUD
SS
v
\
fhe
LJ
uJ
Le
= 50,000
|
=[=
o
Ld
==
SFC
VOLUME CONCENTRATION
Fre. 4.—Schematic vertical distributions of small particles in nuclear cloud.
there would be more radioactivity near the activity is distributed according to profile B.
bottom of the cloud as illustrated by the The geographical locale for the debris is
adjacent solid line. On the other hand, it can less uncertain. In Fig. 5, a vertical cross
be argued that the small particles remain section from pole to pole is shown with the
with the fireball and that the fireball be- approximate latitudes of high-yield ex-
comes the torroidal ring present with most, plosions indicated at the upper border. As
if not all, nuclear explosions. If this is previously noted, the stratosphere is the
the case, then it is possible that the radio- reservoir for the small particles of the de-
100,000 100,000
|
uJ
uJ
LL
2
~ 50,000 50,000
|
=
= TROPOSPHERE
x=
(ee ZONE
SFC SFC
NORTH POLE EQUATOR SOUTH POLE
WHE Ws
JUNE 1957
MACHTA:
FEET,
100,000
SPREAD OF RADIOACTIVITY
20°S
FEET
150,000
10°S
100,000
90° 60° 30° o° 30° 60° 90°
WINTER SUMMER 50,000
GOLDIE
2
PALMER
a
were eS
<e ik Ne eS.
e ee aN
A Pa CH oS
5 A 2h Lef OR
A SO ‘
aS. x
/ Le) A »
U- 8 ~ yy \ Es
/ eS \ ox DN
{ E => )
\ (s SY
\ y 4) CS
iN Zyl “yf
~ fr 2G
eee eee
WULF Ves ve
— eae
FEET — — — —
150,000, -— ~ aie
Se ee a ee ee
100,000 a FS
SS —— SS SS SSS Ee —
50,000 Ze
90°N 60° 90°S
3
SUMMER
30 6
WINTER
KELLOGG AND SCHILLING
Fic.
layed fallout. It is seen that the height of the
bottom of the stratosphere, the tropopause,
varies with latitude. It shows daily and
seasonal variations in altitude at the same
place.
The stratosphere differs from the tropo-
sphere in two important aspects. First and
foremost, whereas the temperature de-
6.
creases on the average of 6.5° C. per kilom-
eter in the troposphere, there is either no
temperature change with height or even, as
in the tropics, an increase of temperature
with height in the stratosphere. Second, the
stratosphere is practically cloudless. The
first difference means that there is very
little vertical turbulence in the stratosphere
176
compared with the troposphere, so that
vertical turbulent mixing is much slower.
The absence of clouds means that the re-
moval of debris cannot be aided by falling
precipitation elements.
The absence of mixing in the vertical
coordinate does not preclude horizontal
diffusion, and, in fact, Parr’s principle would
suggest that horizontal mixing might be
greater on account of the lack of vertical
mixing. However, except for the spread of
dust from Krakatao, the volcanic eruption of
1883, there is little or no evidence for either
fast or slow horizontal mixing. Unfortu-
nately, the optical detection of the Krakatao
dust is not quantitative in the sense that it is
possible to assign concentrations to the
spread of the dust. There is reason to believe
that the equatorial ring of the lower strato-
sphere may prevent exchange of air between
the hemispheres just as is the case for the
lower troposphere. In the troposphere, it
is the convergence of air into the Inter-
tropical Convergence Zone, as shown in
Fig. 5, which prevents exchange. In the
lower stratosphere, it is the steadiness of the
east to west wind which would suggest little
or no north-south exchange. This point is of
some consequence. It may mean that the
hemisphere with the atomic tests can obtain
a disproportionate share of delayed fallout.
On the other hand, the measurement of de-
layed fallout in the southern hemisphere
means that some stratospheric debris must
have entered the southern hemisphere.
Conceivably, the path of the debris may be
through the northern hemisphere tropo-
pause and then to the southern hemisphere
via the upper troposphere.
Since the vertical diffusion is very slow in
the stratosphere and the north-south mixing
also possibly slow, the meridional circula-
tions may become important instruments for
the transfer of the debris. In the next figure
(6) are four published models of meridional
circulations in the lower stratosphere. The
models of Wulf, Goldie, and the lower part of
Palmer display a cell which calls for smking
motion in the equatorial area, risimg motion
over the poles and appropriate north-south
motions to complete the cells. The Palmer
model suggests that above 80,000 feet in the
Tropics, there is a reversal to rising motion.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
Kellogg and Schilling indicate that the main
north-south drift will be from the summer
toward the winter hemisphere. It should be
remembered that the magnitude of the air
motions associated with arrows on _ this
figure are exceedingly small compared to the
west-east air motions; centimeters per
second or less compared to meters or tens of
meters per second. It is evident that transfer
processes within the stratosphere have not
yet been resolved.
There is nothing unique about the
problem of mixing across the tropopause.
It is probable that the tropopause is the
separation between fast and slow vertical
mixing, but in itself represents no unusual
barrier. In addition to air exchange through
the tropopause, there are other possibilities
for escape from the stratosphere. As was
evident from many of the figures, the tropo-
pause is believed to have a break in the
temporate latitudes and the air exchange
may occur here without any crossing of a
tropopause. Secondly, in the course of
everyday weather the tropopause disap-
pears and reforms at different altitudes so
that exchange of tropospheric and _ strato-
spheric can take place again without crossing
the tropopause. Finally, in the polar areas the
tropopause is often very indistinct and this
combined with the expected sinking motion
over cold sources suggests the possibility
that the polar areas may be a region of
transport from stratosphere to troposphere.
In theory, it is possible to predict the
removal of the radioactive debris from the
stratosphere given these non-weather data:
the particle size, shape, and specific gravities
to determine the extent of gravitational
settling and the distribution of radioactivity
in space. In practice, not only are the non-
weather data unavailable, but the meteoro-
logical ingredients to effect the transport
are not sufficiently well known.
Dr. W. F. Libby has presented an analysis
which permits one to bypass all of these
problems. He does not specify anything
but the total amount of radioactivity avail-
able for delayed fallout and the amount
which has been deposited during these first
few years of the thermonuclear age. Libby
computes the fraction of the stratospheric
burden deposited each year, finds it to be
JUNE 1957
roughly 10 percent per year, and assumes
that this fraction can be extrapolated into
the future. This assumption yields an ex-
ponential decrease in the amount removed
each year.
Libby’s approach is very appealing in
that it is now possible to obtain an answer
to the first question: How fast is the radio-
active debris being removed from the strato-
sphere? At the moment, there is no alterna-
tive to Libby’s analysis, although one may
argue for changes in details.
Two elements enter into the calculation
of 10 percent removal per year. These are:
the quantity in the stratosphere at the be-
ginning of a given time interval and the
amount removed from the atmosphere
during the interval. Criticism will be limited
to estimates of the annual deposition from
delayed fallout.
The question of the removal of radioactive
debris and, in particular, strontium-90, from
the atmosphere is important to answer not
only for the problem of stratospheric storage
time but also for assessing the present
strontium-90 level on earth.
All groups studying strontium-90 fallout,
the most important part of delayed fallout,
agree on two points: first, that most of it
comes down in precipitation and second,
that the strontium-90 is probably soluble
in water. The Canadians and British state
that about 85 percent comes down in rain.
Libby has pointed out that Antofagasta in
Chile, a location with essentially no pre-
cipitation, has a lower strontium-90 soil
content by a factor of perhaps 50 than any
other place on earth that has been sampled.
To understand how one computes the
total strontium-90 deposition per year, it is
necessary to review the sampling devices,
especially in the light of the importance of
precipitation. First, is the soil itself. Use of
the soil as a method of integrating the world-
wide delayed fallout has the following short-
comings:
1. The soil contains fallout from all times;
it is a cumulative rather than a differential
sampling device. However, successive sam-
pling from the same locale may overcome
this difficulty.
2. The leeching of strontium-90 is as-
sumed to be small. The upper several inches
MACHTA: SPREAD OF RADIOACTIVITY
177
are supposed to contain all that has fallen
out.
3. There are water losses due to runoff
during moderate and heavy rains or melting
of snow packs.
4. Removal by impaction on vertical
surfaces is not included except by plowing
under of crops.
5. Sampling over the oceans and other
water bodies is impossible. This is serious
only if spray, wave action or some other
ocean phenomena causes a systematic bias
of the results compared with land.
6. Radiochemical analysis is difficult so
that only limited numbers of geographical
areas have been sampled.
The second most reliable technique is
collection of precipitation samples by an
open pot or funnel. These devices collect dry
fallout as well as raindrops. It is evident that
the pot or funnel is a differential sampler,
suffers no leeching or runoff losses, could be
used over oceans, and the radiochemical
analysis is simpler than for soil. On the
other hand, it is of uncertain efficiency for
dry fallout and still provides no measure of
interception on vertical surfaces. In the
past, unfortunately, there has been a lack of
observing points. Until recently, routine
analysis of strontium-90 rainwater samples
has been limited to one or two places.
On the other hand, there has been an
extensive gummed film network. But the
gummed film also suffers from a series of
shortcomings.
1. With the small lip surrounding the film,
the water running off the paper may be
considerable. In fact, in a study by the Ar-
mour Research Foundation, the paper was
found to be only about 10 percent efficient
for a rainfall of 0.1 inch in one hour, for
soluble substances.
2. During dry weather, the gummed film
was found to develop an electrostatic charge
at relative humidites below 45 percent. The
result was a difference in collection efficiency
by a factor of 6 between high and low
humidities.
It is evident that the gummed film also
may not have many of the difficulties as-
signed to the soil samples. At the few places
where comparisons were possible, the
gummed film does produce numbers which
178
appear to be consistent with the pot method,
using an over-all collection efficiency of
about 40 percent for strontium-90.
It has been the purpose of this review of
collection methods to enumerate the lkely
sources of error in determining the total
amount of fallout strontium-90 per year.
It is evident that large random errors are
likely and that there are errors whose mag-
nitude and sign cannot even be estimated.
But of these uncertainties whose sense can
be determined, it is the present view that
Libby’s original estimate of 10 percent is
too low. For example, Libby assumes no
impaction on vertical surfaces, no runoff or
leeching losses for his soil samples, and a 70
percent rather than 40 percent efficiency
for the gummed film. It is, therefore, con-
cluded that more than 10 percent comes
down per year. Dr. Libby’s more recent
talks reflect this possibility. It would be
highly desirable to ascertain whether the
calculated removal of 10 percent per year
very seriously underestimates the true
deposition, since long residence in the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
stratosphere permits harmless decay and
increases the likelihood of diffusive dilution.
Aside from the question of the actual
deposition during the years following ther-
monuclear tests, there are also problems
concerning the propriety of extrapolating
the fractional removal of the stratospheric
debris into the future. It is implied that the
removal process is by diffusion and that the
initial distribution is not such that the first
year or two would yield anomolous results.
With time, it will become evident whether
the 10 per cent is constant. Already, how-
ever, there are data suggesting irregularities
in the stratospheric removal. During 1955,
according to the New York Operations
Office, a large fraction of the strontium-90
fallout occurred in only 3 or 4 months in
New York City rather than being spread
evenly over the year. Lest one conclude
that this is a seasonal affair, 1t may be
noted that it did not take place in the same
months of 1954 or in 1956.
It is concluded that Libby’s approach to
the determination of the rate of removal
PERCENTAGE SCAVENGED
I | 10
PARTICLE DIAMETER (1)
Jane, To
JUNE 1957
from the stratosphere is the best available
but that it would be no surprise to find the
percentage stratospheric removal to be
far greater than 10 percent and to vary
from year to year.
RAINFALL
Before concluding it may be worthwhile
to evaluate more carefully how rainfall
removes the delayed strontium-90 from the
atmosphere in view of the fact that it is
attached to such small particles. For
particles whose diameters exceed a few
microns, it has been demonstrated that
inertia and interception by falling rain are
reasonably efficient scrubbing agents but
that for particles less than micron, this
type of collection has an efficiency of zero.
Stanley Greenfield of the Rand Corporation
has analyzed another mechanism of precipi-
tation scavenging of submicron particles.
This is an agglomeration process whereby
the agitation of the small particle results in
a probability of impact on the water element.
Thescavenging efficiency is shown in the final
figure (7) as the ordinate with the particle
size as the abscissa. It is seen that to the
right, with large particles, the efficiency is
high as is the case for particles smaller than
0.1 micron, although for different reasons.
In between, there is a “window” in which the
removal by rain may be expected to be low.
It is presumed that the delayed fallout is
associated with particles below 0.1 micron,
and therefore readily scavenged.
The delayed fallout, according to this
hypothesis, should be removed by rain from
the atmosphere largely at the level of the
water cloud since the falling raindrop may
not have enough time to allow agglomera-
tion. However, actual comparison between
strontium-90 content of rain and in the air
MACHTA: SPREAD OF RADIOACTIVITY
179
92)
uggests that a very thick layer of air must
ve
gests that by a mechanism, still not under-
stood, even the falling droplet is capable
of scavenging the particles of delayed fallout.
To this, one may add yet another bit of
evidence which fails to fit into a simple
picture. Although Antofagasta with its dry
weather apparently contains practically no
strontium-90, the correlation between rain-
fall and strontium-90 fallout is poor either
when one considers the total amount of rain
or the number of days with rain. Thus,
Paris, a wet place, shows only half as much
strontium-90 in the soil as does Damascus,
Syria, a dry region.
It is hoped that further research on rain-
fall in relation to strontium-90 content will
explain the numerous discrepancies that
appear to be present.
CONCLUSION
Although, in principle, it is possible to
plan a procedure for predicting the removal
rate of delayed fallout from the stratosphere,
in practice it is necessary to rely on the
limited observations available to make the
most reasonable estimate. It is recognized,
however, that because the actual details
are being omitted, the chance that serious
errors are present becomes greater.
It is felt that stratospheric sampling holds
a key to a more rational interpretation of
the storage time. The distribution in time
and space in the stratosphere may allow
the meteorologist, with even his meagre
information, to predict the desired quanti-
ties more reliably than at present.
As a final word, it might be added that
the meteorologist stands to share in the
knowledge which will be collected in the
solution of the strontium-90 fallout problem.
When a fact appears to be opposed to a whole train of deductions, it in-
variably proves to be capable of bearing some other interpretation.—SHER-
Lock HOLMES.
180
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
PHYSICS.—Global distribution of radioactivity from nuclear detonations, with special
reference to strontium”. Mmrrit Eisenpub, New York Operations Office,
Atomic Energy Commission. (Communicated by Chester H. Page.)
The properties that make strontium’? the
most hazardous of the nuclides formed in the
fission process are its long half-life (28 years)
and its chemical similarity to calcium. Be-
cause of its resemblance to calcium, Sr°°
may be assimilated by biological processes.
If ingested by humans in food or water, the
strontium will deposit, like calcium, in the
skeleton.
Investigation of the potential hazard from
contamination of soils and the biological
food chains by Sr*° began very early in the
United States atomic-energy program. The
first studies, associated with the wartime
weapons development program, were theo-
retical and were designed to identify the
principal parameters which influence the
long range effects of nuclear detonations.
It was clear from the start that studies of
radioactive fallout, and of the ultimate fate
of Sr*° in particular, would require the ap-
plication of knowledge from a wide assort-
ment of the physical and biological sciences.
The initial theoretical studies provided a
valuable basis for the experimental approach
to the problem which became possible with
the programs of weapons testing which began
in 1948 and have continued intermittently
to the present time.
The Sr studies have increased in scope
and complexity, and the over-all program
has for some years been global in extent,
involving physical, chemical, and biological
investigations on land, in the oceans and in
the air. Known as Project Sunshine, and
directed at a full understanding of the
physical and biological behavior of the
Sr produced in nuclear detonations, these
studies are concerned with an unprecedented
variety of scientific questions. From the
standpoint of its vast geographical dimen-
sions and the variety of scientific mecha-
nisms involved in the investigation, Project
Sunshine rivals the most comprehensive
scientific studies ever undertaken.
1 Presented at the Washington Academy of
Sciences Fall Symposium, Washington, D. C., on
November 15, 1956.
The factors that influence the behavior of
Sr begin in the complex physics and
chemistry of the fireball and the mushroom
shaped cloud which forms after a nuclear
detonation. The height of the burst above
ground, the nature of the terrain and the
particle size of the soil and debris sucked into
the fireball, all influence the fallout pattern.
When the particles descend to the earth’s
surface, they leave the domain of the
meteorologist and become involved in the
physics, chemistry and biology of the soil.
How soluble is the Sr®° in fallout? Does it
leach from the soil? At what rate is it in-
corporated into plants and how can this rate
be expressed quantitatively as a function of
type of soil and type of plant? These are a
few of the questions that have been studied
in tracing the Sr® into the first of the
biological links in the food chain between
soil and man. The answers to these and
many more questions have been obtained by
many investigators working in many labo-
ratories throughout the country.
From its formation in a nuclear detona-
tion, until it is metabolized by man, the
path of a Sr°° atom is long and tortuous.
Understanding of its route has come from
studies which know none of the bounds of
any one of the conventional scientific
disciplines. The phenomenology of Sr in
fallout can only be described in the com-
bined languages of all the principal combined
sciences, geophysics, physical chemistry,
biophysics, and biological chemistry.
In this discussion an effort will be made to
present the state of knowledge in such a
way as to emphasize only those portions of
the overall Project Sunshine studies that
are concerned directly with an estimation of
the human hazard from Sr®. In so doing,
many interesting and important scientific
questions will be deliberately by-passed.
Where a_ pertinent question cannot be
answered because of insufficient knowledge,
the most conservative possible assumptions
will be made thereby tending to yield results
which define the upper limit of the potential
hazard.
JUNE 1957
Libby (1) (2), has recently reported on
the many ramifications of Project Sunshine.
He has called attention to the physical and
biological concepts which serve as the basis
for the approach taken in the Sunshine
studies and has presented a thorough evalu-
ation of many of the data.
WORLDWIDE DEPOSITION OF FALLOUT
The basic procedure for documenting the
global fallout of radioactivity is by means of
a network of monitoring stations which have
been operated in the United States and
abroad since 1951. Until recently this net-
work consisted of 88 stations located in 46
countries and territories. During the past
few months the network has been aug-
mented by a number of stations sponsored
by various additional governments in co-
operation with the U. 8. Atomic Energy
Commission. The data from this monitoring
network have been periodically summarized
(12) (13) (4).
The monitoring technique is a simple one
which consists of exposing a one square foot
cellulose ester film covered with an adhesive.
The radioactivity in fallout is largely in
particulate form and the dust is collected by
impaction against the adhesive surface. The
coating is insoluble and retains its adhesive
properties when wet, so that in rain the
radioactive dust particles are retained by
the collection surface. These films are ex-
posed in duplicate for 24 hours, after which
the film is mailed to a central processing
facility at the AEC Health and Safety
Laboratory in New York. Most of the
stations are located at meteorological ob-
servatories where the collection routine can
be easily fitted into the schedule of obser-
vations and duties.
From 1951 until the latter part of 1955, the
period covered by this report, it was a
relatively simple matter to determine the
age of the mixed fission products collected
daily by the monitoring network. At any
given time the fallout was known to have
originated from the most recent test series.
Prior to 1954, the fallout from the detona-
tions would diminish rapidly and would
ordinarily be undetectable before the next
series of tests started. This was because the
yields from detonations were relatively low,
EISENBUD: DISTRIBUTION OF RADIOACTIVITY
181
and the bulk of the debris was distributed
below the tropopause, where fallout is
greatly hastened by precipitation and other
factors.
The ease with which the age of the radio-
active debris could be determined made it a
simple matter to estimate the fraction of the
total radioactivity that was due to Sr, by
using the curves of relative isotopic abun-
dance of fission products developed by
Hunter and Ballou (8).
The detonation of devices having yields
equivalent to megatons of TNT produces
clouds of radioactive debris which pierce the
tropopause and become distributed in the
stratosphere. From this relatively stable
region of the earth’s atmosphere, the
particles descend slowly, and fallout to the
earth’s surface occurs over a period of time
which is measured in years rather than
weeks or months. The traces of relatively
old debris from high-yield devices become
mixed with the debris of subsequent detona-
tions. This being the case, neither the decay
characteristics of a sample nor the relative
abundance of the long-lived isotopes can be
predicted from theory.
Late in 1955, it became apparent that it
was increasingly difficult to predict the
Sr” of fallout from theory, because of the
mixing of debris from more than one test
series. The method of estimating Sr*® was
therefore changed. At the present time in-
creasing reliance is placed on direct radio-
chemical analyses of the contents of pots
which collect the fallout continuously for
one month. The gummed films will con-
tinue to be used as the basic collection device
because its simplicity makes it possible to
obtain data from a great number of stations.
Unfortunately films cannot be analyzed
directly for Sr®°, and it has therefore been
necessary to devise other means of de-
termining the ratio of Sr®*° to total fission
product activity.
Calibration of these gummed films against
cylindrical pots indicates that the technique
has an efficiency of about 63 percent for col-
lection of mixed fission products. The sac-
rifice in collection efficiency is justified by
the ease with which the samples can be col-
lected, transported and analyzed.
The pair of gummed films present a sam-
182
pling area of 2 square feet per station. Thus,
the total area sampled by the network is 176
square feet which is only 3 X 10~“ of the
area of the earth. One must therefore in-
quire as to the adequacy of the coverage
provided by the sampling network and the
possibility that areas of the world may exist
in which the Sr deposition is very much
higher than the values observed at sampling
stations located hundreds of miles apart.
Table 1 provides a regional summary of
the cumulative fallout of Sr*° reported for
the collection stations. Stations in the im-
mediate vicinity of the test sites in Nevada
and the Marshall Islands are excluded be-
cause, as expected, the fallout patterns in
these regions is less regular than elsewhere
and the data are therefore not applicable to
a discussion of global fallout phenomena.
TasBLE 1.—REGIONAL SUMMARY OF SR”?
DEPOSITION AS OF SEPTEMBER 1, 1955
Place | Soe Range mc/mi? sey
Europe and the 6 4.0-5.9 5.0
Middle East
UNG ROR, pos 8 od 018 40-3 i 3.0-6.7 5.4
Japan and it 4.5-11 7.0
southeast Asia
Australia and 4 3.3-5.6 4.8
New Zealand
Latin America.... 12 2.9-8.3 5.4
Canada and 13 3.0-6.9 pall
Alaska
United States..... 22 3.4-13 7.8
Table 1 reveals a high degree of uni-
formity in the cumulative deposition of
Sr°°, The mean of the means of the seven
geographical areas is 5.8 mc/mi’ and the
range of values for the 75 stations included
in the table is 2.9-13 mc/mi?. Only two
stations in the United States (Boiseand Mem-
phis) and none of the overseas stations
have values greater than twice the mean of
the area means. The uniformity of the depo-
sitions suggest it is unlikely that Sr®° exists
in any part of the world (excluding regions
near testing sites) in amounts greatly in
excess of the upper values reported in the
table.
Previously, Libby (2) has called attention
to a band of relatively high fallout in the
Northern Hemisphere. This band, which
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
Libby attributes to the relatively rapid
fallout of trophospheric debris in the
latitudes of the detonations, is not as marked
in the worldwide pattern of the gummed film
network, although the values for the United |
States, Japan, and southeast Asia are noted
to be about 50 percent higher than elsewhere.
In general, the values reported here for the
Southern Hemisphere are higher than those
reported by Libby, but the differences are
of little significance in the ultimate estimates
of the potential human hazard.
In October 1955, 17 samples of soils were
collected in the United States at places
where the adhesive films had been in use
since 1951. This study, which has been
previously reported (4) indicated that the
measured values of strontium in soil were on
the average of 1.6 times the estimates based
on film collections. It was noted that this
relationship did not hold for sampling loca-
tions situated near the Nevada test site and
it was tentatively concluded that the relative
enrichment of Sr in the soils at a distance
from the test site was due to the fractiona-
tion of Sr*° in the early development of the
radioactive cloud. Perhaps the reason is due
instead to peculiarities of the desert soils of
that region.
More recent analyses of soils at a number
of overseas locations have not indicated a
clear cut relationship between the estimates
of fallout derived from soil analyses and
from adhesive films. In Figure 1 are given
the results of soil analyses from various
parts of the world, as reported by the
University of Chicago (5). The data are
plotted against the estimated values of
Sr’ based on predictions from the adhesive
film network. In general the estimated values
are somewhat higher than the measured
values. The reason for this is not under-
stood. The obvious possibility that the
Sr% is leaching from the soil seems unlikely
in view of other data which indicate con-
clusively that the bulk of strontium*? in
undisturbed soil is retained in the upper two
inches and vertical leaching may therefore
be said to be negligible. The possibility that
the debris is washed horizontally cannot be
disregarded although this possibility seems
to be ruled out by other evidence that the
debris tends to remain fixed at the site of
JUNE 1957
EISENBUD
: DISTRIBUTION OF RADIOACTIVITY 183
I= 77
Gace
PTF Ss Po DEP OST TOA
POVEPAREL | WITH ZBTIMAZTES
a
Pooper
(200 Soe eee ee
BEEGE oveveveseesoessotrstets
N Bneoeoe SSR 8 SESE Oe
8 ADEM TT daromme Tr
4 se Coo
cS
9
¢
>
~
N
' S08 Po ee oe
~ PoP WETUINGTON 1 arzzscier tT TTT
Y Poo Pot ooo
E PE eet eter a
~ FEES C Pepe eee pk tt Ir
CS PEE EEE EERE EEE PAL GIERST tH
$ 2H ho Lo ALGIERS| ERS
oi EERE te
5 2e5288 08 Sueme 670107.) @eSem "aly See
a SSE See PASE
Loh HASU)
SG Coty
[|
Pes WELLINGTON TTT
| | PTT Tt i tes Baeea
Seen! Sgt LIRZZ pa
SS
PUTT rtry
— --. Sr9° Nefmet ESTIATED FROM AOMESIVE FUMES
Fig. 1. Adhesive film estimates of Sr*° depositions compared with estimates from soil analysis
original deposition. The recovery of Sr%°
from soils is an exceedingly difficult chemical
procedure and it is possible that incomplete
recovery of the isotope may in part explain
the discrepancy noted.
Although the number of sampling loca-
tions are relatively few in relation to the
total surface of the earth, and although no
data are available for the large »cean masses,
the uniformity of the cumuiative depo-
sition of Sr°° makes it possible to estimate
the total Sr°° deposition over the surface of
the earth. The integrated total, based on the
adhesive film measurcinents, at the 2nd of
September 1955 is estimeted to have been
one million curies, with an average depo-
sition of 5 me/mi?.
ESTIMATE OF STRATOSPHERIC RESERVE
OF SR*”?
A complicating factor in the Sr®° studies is
that megaton devices inject substantial
amounts of fission products into the strato-
sphere from which depletion occurs at a
relatively slow rate. Evaluation of the
potential hazard from the radiostrontium
produced up to any given time requires
that we consider not only the Sr already
deposited on the earth’s surface, but also
that which remains in stratospheric storage
and will be deposited at some future time.
Libby has postulated (1) that the strato-
spheric reservoir is depleted exponentially,
with 50 percent being removed every 7
years. More recent data indicate that this
estimate may be slightly high, but the true
halftime of deposition is certainly greater
than 4 years.
The stratospheric residence time of the
bulk of the debris is certainly short in rela-
tion to the radiological half-life of Sr°. If
the debris were to be stored in the upper air
for a period as long or longer than the half-
life of Sr®° (28 years) the potential hazard
would be significantly less because radio-
active decay would eliminate appreciable
amounts of Sr*° before deposition to the
earth’s surface takes place. However, since
the mean residence time in the stratosphere
can be taken to be much less than 28 years,
184
only a small fraction of the Sr®° will decay
before being deposited on the earth’s sur-
face. One can therefore estimate the ulti-
mate deposition of Sr*° by assuming that
this nuclide is uniformly mixed in the strato-
sphere and that the total amount now
stored in the stratosophere will be deposited
uniformly on the earth’s surface. Whether
this deposition will be complete in 5 years
or 10 is of minor importance in estimating
the potential hazard to be expected.
It is possible to sample the stratospheric
dust burden and a number of measurements
have been reported by British and United
States investigators (6). Both groups have
collected samples of dust by filtermg air,
using aircraft up to about 45,000 feet. In
addition, the United States has flown
constant level balloons up to 100,000 feet,
and has collected dust samples by elec-
trostatic precipitation as well as by filtering
The data obtained in these studies
air.
indicate that the stratospheric Sr is
present in approximately the expected
amounts but there are at the present time
insufficient data to permit reliable estima-
tion of the total stratospheric reservoir of
Sr%”,
A better estimate of the stratospheric
reserve can be obtained at present from
material balance studies. The amount of
Sr” produced in detonations to date can be
estimated with some certainty. Estimates of
the amounts of Sr®° that are deposited in the
intense fallout in the vicinity of a detonation
are available from extensive investigations
conducted during the test programs in
Nevada and in the Pacific. The total stron-
tium produced in a detonation, less the Sr°°
which falls out in the immediate vicinity of
the detonation, gives the total inventory
of Sr% that is available for subsequent
deposition at places remote from the site of
detonation.
Based on this approach, it 1s estimated
that the present stratospheric inventory of
Sr®? from detonations to the present time is
about three times the total amount that has
already been deposited outside of the United
States. In the United States, Sr°° from the
Nevada tests was a significant fraction of the
Sr” fallout at the end of 1955, so that the
proportionate increase will be less in the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
future from the more uniform deposition of
stratospheric debris.
The probable average level of worldwide
contamination by Sr®°, when all of the Sr%°
produced to date has been deposited, may
be approximated as about 20) millicuries per
square mile, by adding 15 mc/mi? to the
average deposition of 5 me/mi’ at the end of
1955. This estimate, based on data from the
adhesive film network is in good agreement
with Libby’s recent (2) estimate of 15-17
mc/mi’.
THE HUMAN SIGNIFICANCE OF STRONTIUM
LEVELS IN SOIL
The deposition of Sr®°° in soil must be re-
lated to assimilation by biological processes
and to absorption by man. The presence of
this isotope in soil is significant only because
it is potentially available for assimilation by
plants, animals, and ultimately man.
To define the potential risk from a given
distribution of Sr°*° on the surface of the
earth requires that the distribution be
quantitatively related to the skeletal burden
of Sr°° of a human population in dietary
equilibrium with the soil from which their
nourishment is derived. This equilibrium is
already established for a variety of trace
elements normally present in the earth’s
crust. Some of these, like potassium and
radium are radioactive and this is reflected
by the presence of these substances in the
human body. For example, the upper foot
of soil in the United States contains, on the
average, about 1,000 millicuries of radium
per square mile. The average adult skeleton
in this country contains about 10~* ye of
radium which is derived from assimilation of
this trace element from foods and water.
Thus, the value of 10~* ue of radium repre-
sents the amount deposited in the skeletons
of the populations whose mineral metabolism
is in equilibrium with the soil minerals.
The freshly deposited Sr*® takes a rela-
tively long time to complete the biological
route to bone. At the present time the
skeletons of all but very young children were
formed prior to the introduction of Sr°° to
the soil. Moreover, bone being formed at the
present time utilizes calcium which left the
soil in months gone by. The fact that cattle
may be fed on hay many months old and the
JUNE 1957
hold-up of human foods in the commercial
distribution system, are but two of many
factors which would lead one to expect the
human Sr°° burden to lag in time behind
the potential value which might ultimately
be expected from a given soil concentration.
The human skeleton cannot be expected to
respond quickly to the gradual accretion of
Sr°° by soil. Equilibrium can be expected to
be achieved over a period of years but not
over a period of months.
In the United States as in a number of
other parts of the world where the popula-
tion derives much of its caletum from dairy
products, analyses of milk for Sr*° provides
a method of estimating the levels of human
absorption which may be expected in the
future.
Recent studies by Comar (9) have shown
that when radiostrontium is incorporated
into milk there is no appreciable biological
differentiation between calcium and stront-
ium when the milk is fed either to exper-
imental animals or to humans. One may
therefore assume that when a skeleton is
formed by calcium from dairy products, the
skeleton will contain the same Sr*°-Ca ratio
that was present in the food. This is apt to
be a conservative assumption, other investi-
gations having demonstrated that biological
differentiation may take place whereby the
specific activity of the calcium in the diet
may be as much as 219 times greater than
the specific activity of the calcium deposited
in the skeleton. If the assumption that no
differentiation takes place is not valid, the
error will be on the safe side since all of the
experimental evidence indicates that when
differential absorption does occur it is in
favor of calcium.
Milk from the metropolitan New York
milkshed has been sampled regularly since
early 1954. In 1956 the sampling program
was expanded to include other milksheds in
the United States and abroad. The Sr°°
content of the New York milk is presented
graphically in Fig. 2 and Table 2 gives the
average value for all sampling locations
during the first half of 1956.
As Sr°° is not a natural constituent of the
earth’s crust, it follows that the presence of
this isotope in biological materials is due
to fallout from the detonation of nuclear
EISENBUD: DISTRIBUTION OF RADIOACTIVITY
185
TABLE 2.—Sr”® In MitK—JAan.—JUNE 1956
(All values in wuec Sr°/gm Ca)
State | yy ai-| Man- ae
Month |. y. | Cob Son, dan; tah Japan| Eng;
Miss. Wis. Dak. Oreg. a
jon | 28 = 3.0) gl 2 loa aa
Feb. PAO) |) == B58) 8.1) — — | 4.6
March BQ) | Boe} |) Bah) Wal. = |) Bo |) 40
April Bos) || Ost \\ Bott! Gell Se) 8.0) |)
May OS | 29 | 9.81 10. 16.4 |) | a6
June Ball || Bah Big! 8.7, 5.0 | — —
Average | 2.5 | 5.6 | 3.3 3524] Dat) || Boll 143.0)
devices during the past few years. In-
sufficient time has elapsed to reveal whether
or not the concentration of Sr®° in milk bears
a linear relationship to the accumulating
Sr°° in soil. The value of between 2 and 3
micromicrocuries Sr*°/gram of calcium,
representing the average range of values
reported from mid-1955 to mid-1956, can be
explained in two ways, both of which in-
volve contamination of the cattle feed. This
contamination may occur by way of the
soil, in which case the Sr®° is incorporated
metabolically into the feed, or the contami-
nation may exist as freshly deposited fission
products on the surface of the plant.
If the contamination in milk results
primarily from the latter factor, it would be
expected that a cessation of nuclear detona-
tions would be reflected by a diminution of
the Sr°’ content in the coming years as the
stratospheric inventory of Sr°® becomes
depleted and the fallout onto the surfaces of
the feed becomes correspondingly less. On
the other hand, if the contamination of milk
is due primarily to the Sr®° incorporated
metabolically from the soil, the concentra-
tion in milk would be expected to increase in
proportion to the Sr*? in soil. The maximum
concentration in milk would be reached after
the stratospheric reservoir has been de-
posited in the soils.
It will be noted from Fig. 2 that a steep
rise occurred in the metropolitan New York
milk supply in early September 1956. It is
not now known whether this rise is due to the
relatively heavy fresh fall-out from foreign
detonations conducted last summer or to an
increase in the amount of Sr°° incorporated
metabolically from the increasing amounts
186
of Sr*° in the soil. If the former hypothesis is
valid, the milk concentration can be ex-
pected to diminish in succeeding weeks. If
the increase is sustained, it is presumably a
reflection of the increasing amount of Sr®° in
soil. As a basis for comparison with the soil
values, the curve of cumulative Sr®° in the
New York area is superimposed on the milk
curve. It will be noted that since 1954 the
cumulative fallout of Sr®° is increasing
steadily with time, but even if one accepts
the recent increase in the Sr content of
milk, the latter is at a much slower rate.
The deposition of Sr°° in the soils of the
metropolitan New York milkshed in the
early fall of 1955 is estimated to have been
6.5 me/mi?. The expected maximum in this
area is thus 21.5 mc/mi? when the strato-
spheric inventory of Sr°° is deposited. This
is an increase by a factor of 3.3. In the
summer of 1955 the milk in this area aver-
aged 2.5 wuc/gm Calcium. If we assume that
the milk concentrations will increase in pro-
portion to the soil content of Sr, the
maximum value that can be attained in
metropolitan New York milk of the future,
from detonations to date, is about 8.3
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 6
upe Sr°°/egm Calcium. It should be again
noted that this is a conservative assumption
which ignores the possibility that much of
the Sr® in milk may be ingested by the cows
as fresh fallout on the surface of plants. If
we further assume that no differentiation
between strontium and calcium will occur in
the process of converting milk to human
bone, 8 uye Sr%°/gm of skeletal caletum
becomes the upper limit of the foreseeable
strontium burden in the population of this
area from detonations which have already
occurred. A factor of 3 should be ample
to define the upper limit of hazard elsewhere
in the United States where, as in North
Dakota, the Sr®° uptake is proportionately
higher than in metropolitan New York. On
this basis, 25 wuc Sr*’/gm Calcium is the
highest foreseeable skeletal burden in the
United States. This estimate is likely to be
reduced as new information about the up-
take of Sr*® eliminates some of the un-
certainties which have prompted the use of
highly conservative assumptions. Although
this estimate is higher than Libby’s re-
cently estimated upper value of 10 nuc/gm
Ca, the agreement is excellent considering
4
HA
BP ast
Vv r F
uo 1 y + H
° Ee ees
= 5 f DCI
< - aC Ie
5 —- aoe
a q a oa eS i Da
Ee ot Sal ! e
3 rela ! : a) a eetA i faim =A S
> IBS OEBaEs Aer FA: E Gl :
5 fff ae af RSME w
DEBE ieee dl et bs| a I | { | Hi =
ro Geeeee i aa Eft al [apis ro IE a ma
an nea a SESEEaao IDET =
wl MESSE Eo ae E: Bi@le i atl HES EEEn | i =
3 ESE r Eee 2 gS Ge eel eee eeeeoee 4
5 H Nm eate SSeS! SE ie ae i aa | a EH teal rat i 3
Bam ADORE RS ee Seas 5 BE il Hal T } 3
4 1 SeeE CUES eee ERE et = | oI | IE
£ 200OE ee ee ee SSSOESHo BEI Ti | i z
i Baa ea RAaeS2BE =| 2) earjoma | y {or | i a
° - t 1 ‘lat ee Sen mene moooa el 1 | calf | eal q ry
S 1 a as ES SEE ra leh at a is pee BB a
= ‘ ! i i { i i i i { I
UNNU AN 001 DE | UN OCT|NOVDEC pele UNIJULY}AUG SEPJOCT|
} | ! : ! | i i |
Fig. 2.—Sr%® in milk of New York, N. Y.
JUNE 1957
the fact that the two estimates are based on
different approaches and that both are
deliberately conservative.
The data from the worldwide fallout
collection network indicate that the fallout
is distributed throughout the portion of the
world that has been sampled in a remarkably
uniform manner. If the potential strontium
hazard in an agricultural area anywhere is
greater than in those areas in the United
States for which the milk data in Table 2
serve as indices, the reason is likely to be
found in the soil chemistry of the region or
the dietary habits of the people.
There is good evidence that the uptake of
Sr*° is markedly influenced by the amount
of calcium available to growing plants. For
any given amount of Sr*’ in soil, the uptake
into plants will vary inversely. with the
available calcium present in the soil. Plants
growing on soils which are depleted in
calcium assimilate more Sr*? than other-
wise.
The manner in which differences in the
dietary habits of populations influence the
Sr*° uptake requires further study. Leafy
vegetables can be expected to have a higher
ratio of Sr°° to calcium because of direct
deposition on the surface of the leaves. For
example, in a crop of snapbeans grown in
Maryland in the summer of 1956, the leaves
assayed 78 puuc Sr*°/gm Ca whereas the
beans assayed only 2.2 uuc Sr°°/gm Ca. As it
is doubtful that any differentiation between
strontium and calcium occurs metabolically
within the plant, the difference is presumed
to be due to the distribution of fresh fallout
on the leaves.
Two methods are available for quickly
screening populations to determine if any
unusual factor or combination of factors is
contributing to a higher Sr*? uptake. Al-
though the sampling of human bones is of
limited value in assessing the Sr®° burden
which may be expected when an equilibrium
is reached, the method is satisfactory for
comparing populations at any given time.
Kulp and Eckelmann (10) have recently
completed several hundred analyses of
human bones from various countries of the
world and find little difference between one
area and another except that United States
values, on the average, are higher than those
EISENBUD: DISTRIBUTION OF RADIOACTIVITY
187
which they found elsewhere in the world.
They report an average of 0.35 micromicro-
eurles Sr? per gram of caletum in bones of
Eastern United States’ children at a time
when the milk assayed almost 10 times as
high.
Another screening method which appears
promising is the analysis of pooled urine
samples. Only a few data are available but
it is known that Sr°° is detectable in the
urine of individuals in Eastern United
States. The level in early summer of 1956
was about 1 to 2 disintegrations per minute
per liter. In a population in which the
dietary intake of Sr°° is relatively uniform,
the Sr*° excretion can perhaps be used as a
measure of the Sr*? intake. Additional data
should be obtained for other parts of the
United States and for other countries as
well.
THE HAZARD OF STRONTIUM”? IN BONE
The above reasoning suggests that a
maximum of 25 micromicrocuries of Sr%° per
gram of calcium is foreseeable in human
bones perhaps a decade hence when bio-
logical equilibrium is reached with the Sr°?
produced up to the present time. This
figure is arrived at by making the deliber-
ately conservative assumption that the
presently observed values of Sr®° in milk
represent the equilibrium values between
milk and soil, and that henceforth the milk
concentration of Sr®® will bear a_ linear
relationship to the deposition of Sr®° in soil.
It is further assumed that the human body
does not differentiate between strontium
and calcium and that the specific activity of
skeletal calcium will therefore be equal to
the specific activity of milk calcium. The
value of 25 puc Sr*°/gm Ca may overesti-
mate the true value by a factor of 10.
25 puc Sr°/gm Ca, allowing for simul-
taneous decay of the isotope in both the soil
and bone, will deliver a dose of 2.3 rep to the
skeleton over a lifetime of 70 years. This
compares to a normal range of skeletal
irradiation of 7 to 30 reps due to K*, C",
cosmic rays, terrestrial gamma _ radiation,
and natural radium. The maximum fore-
seeable value of 25 uuec Sr*°/gm Ca when
integrated over the life span, is thus equiv-
188
alent to 7.6 to 33 percent of the dose from
natural sources of skeletal radiation.
The variability of the skeletal dose due to
natural radioactivity is largely due to dif-
ferences in the body radium content, which
has been shown to vary from one geo-
graphical region to another. For example, it
is reported (11) that in Illinois the skeletal
dose from radium alone varies between 6.7
and 67 millireps per year (0.47 to 4.7 reps
in 70 years). The gamma ray dose received
externally from terrestrial sources is like-
wise quite variable depending on the kinds
of rocks in the vicinity.
If we take 30 reps in 70 years as the upper
limit of skeletal irradiation from natural
radioactivity in the United States, the
skeletal burden from Sr°° from detonations
to date could reach peak values as high as
330 micromicrocuries per gram of calcium
before the maximum skeletal dose from
natural radioactivity would be doubled.
The National Committee on Radiation
Protection recommends one microcurie of
Sr®? as the maximum permissible continuous
burden for occupational exposure. It is
generally accepted that for public exposure
an additional safety factor of 10 is advis-
able, and on this basis 1/10 of a microcurie
of Sr? would be the maximum permissible
body burden for public exposure. This is
equivalent to 100 micromicrocuries of Sr°°
per gram of skeletal calcium. The conserva-
tism of this value is illustrated by the fact
that the dose delivered to the skeleton by a
constant deposit of 100 micromicrocuries
Sr*? per gram of calcium is 20 reps in 70
years which is somewhat less than the upper
limit of dose delivered by natural sources
alone. The recommended maximum value
of 100 puc/gm Ca, being intended for con-
tinuous exposure is not directly applicable
to an evaluation of the potential risk from
detonations to date. The natural radio-
active decay of Sr°° will reduce to about 0.5
the dose delivered in the lifetime of in-
dividuals who, from birth, begin to ac-
cumulate skeletal calcium initially con-
taining 25 puc/gm.
SUMMARY
The worldwide distribution of the Sr°°
produced in weapons tests up to the present
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 6
time can be expected to rise to approx-
imately 20 millicuries per square mile in the
latter part of the next decade. Because of
the chemical resemblance of strontium to
calcium, Sr*? tends to be assimilated by
plants, ultimately finding its way into foods
and man, where the maximum foreseeable
deposition in humans will produce a radi-
ation dose to the skeleton that will be about
2.3 reps in a lifetime of 70 years. This esti-
mate is based on conservative assumptions,
and in all probability the actual dose will be
considerably less, possibly as low as 0.23
rep. The dose in the United States from
natural radioactivity, to which humans
have always been exposed, ranges from 7 to
30 reps in 70 years. The highest estimate of
the skeletal dose that can be foreseen from
devices detonated to date is thus 7 percent
of the upper values of the dose delivered by
natural radioactivity and may prove to be
as little as 0.7 percent.
REFERENCES
(1) Linpy, W. F. Radioactive strontium fallout.
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sei. 42 (6): 365-390.
June 1956.
(2) ——— Current research findings on radio-
active fallout. Paper presented before the
American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science, Washington, D. C.,
Friday, October 12, 1956.
(83) Hunrer, H. F., and Batuovu, N. BH. Nu-
cleonics 9, C-2. 1951.
(4) Erspnpup, M., and Haruery, Joun H. Radio-
active fallout through September 1955.
Science 124 (3215): 251-255. Aug. 10, 1956.
(5) Marrei, E. A. Project Sunshine Bull. No.
12. University of Chicago, The Enrico
Fermi Institute for Nuclear Studies. Aug.
1, 1956.
Srewart, N. G., Crooxs, R. N., and
Fisuer, EK. M. R. The radiological dose to
persons in the U.K. due to debris from nu-
clear test explosions. AERE HP/R. 1701,
1955. Rev. version, AERE HP/R.2017,
1956.
(9) Comar, C. Personal
October 1956.
(10) Kur, J. L., and Eckpumann, W. R. Personal
communication November 1956.
(11) Pathologic effects of atomic radiation. Nat.
Acad. Sei. Publ. 452. 1956.
(12) Ersenpup, M., and Hartuey, Joun H. Radio-
active dust from nuclear detonations. Science
117 (3033): 141-147. Feb. 13, 1953.
3) ————— Radioactive fallout in the United
States. Science 121 (3150) : 677-680. May 13,
1955.
(6
wm
communication of
JUNE 1957
DUNNING: RADIATIONS FROM NUCLEAR DETONATION
189
PHYSICS —/mmediate radiations from a nuclear detonation. GORDON DUNNING,
United States Atomic Energy Commission. (Communicated by Chester H.
Page.)
I. THE FIREBALL AND THERMAL RADIATION
At the time of a nuclear detonation the
temperature inside the fireball rises to several
million degrees. The temperature decreases
markedly within a small fraction of a
second, yet even some of the relatively
small devices fired at the Nevada Test Site
have produced sufficient light to be seen
over 400 miles away. About one-third of the
total energy of an air burst is represented by
this thermal radiation.
The size of the fireball created by the
nuclear detonation depends upon the yield
(energy) of the burst; indeed, it is a good
index of magnitude of the detonation. A
20-kiloton burst (20,000 tons TNT equiv-
alent) will create a fireball of about 600 feet
in radius. This value may be scaled to other
size detonations by the relationship
Le ae a
RO \Wo
Where: RO = maximum radius of refer-
ence burst
WO = yield of reference burst
R = maximum radius of new
burst
W = yield of new burst
For example, a 10-megaton burst probably
would produce a fireball over 7,000 feet in
radius, or more than 2!4 miles across.
The surface of the fireball exhibits char-
acteristic two temperature pulses after a
detonation. The initial temperature of
10,000° (K) or so will drop to about 2,000°
(KX), rise again to perhaps 8,000° (KX) and
then drop off continuously with time. The
time between these events becomes greater
with increasing yields of bursts. The ex-
planation is somewhat complex but a simpli-
fied description follows. The nuclear detona-
tion creates pressures in the order of millions
of pounds per square inch. The resultant
shock front originally coincides with the
1 Presented at the Washington Academy of
Sciences Fall Symposium, Washington, D. C.,
November 15, 1956.
surface of the fireball, but for the time that
the temperature drops during the first pulse,
the shock front advances more rapidly than
the fireball surface, creating a zone of cooler
air. The visible (and infrared) radiations
travel outward from the fireball through
this zone with the velocity of light and with
a relatively small attenuation. However,
owing to the high initial temperature of the
fireball about 70 percent of the radiations
in the first pulse is in the ultraviolet region.
This radiation is strongly absorbed by the
nitrogen or oxygen ions, converting them
into an excited state, from which they
quickly revert to a lower level by re-emission.
However, these re-emissions are in random
directions so that although the radiation is
traveling with the speed of light, the for-
ward speed is relatively small. As the fireball
continues to expand and cool the proportion
of the thermal energy appearing in the
longer wave length region at the surface of
the fireball increases. These are much less
attenuated than the ultraviolet radiations,
accounting for the rise in apparent lumi-
nosity. The luminosity eventually drops off,
of course, owing to the continued expanding
and cooling.
Only about 1 percent of the total thermal
energy appears in the first pulse This, to-
gether with the fact that most of this energy
is in the ultraviolet region which is highly
attenuated, means that the first pulse con-
tributes in only a minor degree to the pro-
duction of burns.
Perhaps surprisingly, the temperatures of
the fireball surfaces are not greatly different
for various yields of bursts, but the dura-
tions of the temperature pulses are a function
of the size of the detonation. The time to the
peak of the second maximum is proportional
to the square root of the yield of the burst.
Thus for a 20-kiloton detonation this time
is about 0.14 second, while for a 10-megaton
burst the time will be about 3.2 seconds.
The degree of burns produced depends not
only upon the total energy per unit area re-
ceived but also somewhat upon the duration
190
of delivery of this energy, 1.e., the longer the
delivery time the greater the total energy
required to produce a burn. This may not be
a major effect, however, since the increase
in total energy required to produce a given
degree of burn is less than a factor of 2,
between a 1 kiloton versus a 10-megaton
burst. (A factor of 10,000 difference in
yield.) There is another consequence, how-
ever, of the rate of delivery of the thermal
energy that may be of much greater im-
portance. The rate of delivery for a given
total thermal energy is relatively fast for
lower yield bursts, but it is appreciably
slower for higher yield detonations, thus
suggesting the possibility of effective evasive
action for the larger bursts.
The total thermal energy reaching a given
point is a function of (a) yield, (b) distance
from burst, and (c) state of the atmosphere.
The effect of varying yields has been dis-
cussed except for one factor. For a given size
burst, the thermal effects of a surface shot
will be significantly less than for an air burst,
i.e., the distances from the burst to the point
where skin burns are produced may be less
by some 40 percent. This is because a portion
of the thermal energy is absorbed by the
earth and also the thermal radiation reach-
ing a target will have to travel through the
air near the earth’s surface which produces a
greater attenuation.
If attenuation is neglected, the energy re-
ceived per unit area drops off as the square
of the distance. For example, the energy per
unit area at 4 miles is one-fourth that at 2
miles.
The influence of the state of the atmos-
phere is more complex. Different wave-
lengths will be scattered by different
amounts owing to the presence of particles in
the air. However, a generalized estimate
may be made in terms of “visibility,”
which is defined as the horizontal distance at
which a large dark object can be seen
against the sky in day-light. For example, on
a very clear day the visibility may be
about 15-30 miles and for a day with a light
haze about 3-6 miles. It might first appear
that the amount of thermal energy received
at a distance would be strongly a function of
the degree of visibility. However, it 1s now
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
thought that for distances that are bout
one-half or less of any given visibility range
(except for very hazy days), that the
amount of thermal radiation received does
not depend greatly on the visibility. This
may be explained as follows: For a clear day
most of the thermal radiation received is
that directly transmitted with little contri-
bution from the scatter radiation. For con-
ditions where moderate numbers of particles
are present in the air, the loss in direct trans-
mission is largely compensated by the in-
creased scattered radiation. Of course, dense
fog or smoke can very materially decrease
the intensity of the thermal radiation—per-
haps by a factor as great as 10.
The thermal radiation falling on a target
may be in part absorbed, reflected, or trans-
mitted. Dark material will, of course, absorb
more of the thermal radiation, but if a sub-
stance chars in the early stages of the
exposure, it too may become a good ab-
sorber. In the case of clothing this absorbed
heat may be transferred to the skin and
produce contact burns. Any opaque object
will eliminate the direct thermal radiation
and thus produce the shadow effect that was
obvious in many instances in Japan, both
for effects on materials and on the production
of the so-called ‘‘flash burns’ on the skin.
Since the transmission of heat by con-
duction through the skin is relatively slow
the absorbed energy is principally confined
to shallow depths of the skin. The type of
burn thus produced does not differ sig-
nificantly from the more usual kind, in
terms of treatment or general bodily effects.
For example, they are categorized in the
same three general classes of first, second,
and third degree burns. They may represent
a major contributory factor to casualties in
the event of an atomic attack. For example,
in the Japanese bombing it has been esti-
mated that 20 to 30 percent of the fatal
casualties were due to flash burns.
The above discussion indicates the dif-
ficulty in making generalized estimates of
the severity of burns from different yield
detonations under varying conditions. How-
ever, Table 1 represents one set of estimates
based on the assumptions of an air burst on
a clear day.
JUNE 1957 DUNNING:
TaBLE 1—AppRoXIMATE Distances (MILES)
FROM AN AtR Burst ON A CuEaR Day
to ProptcrE THE DEGREES OF SKIN BURNS
SHOWN
Degree Burns
Yield (kilotons)
1st 2d 3d
|
20 2.4 LG Mp wee
200 6.4 4.4 3.8
1,000 12 9 8
5,000 25 18 15
20,000 44 32 | 28
Il. NUCLEAR RADIATIONS
The nuclear radiations of principal interest
at the time of a detonation are gamma rays
and neutrons. Most of the gamma rays re-
sulting from the actual fission process are
absorbed by the bomb materials. However,
there are three other processes that result in
the production of other gamma rays.
One, a large portion of the neutrons are
captured by nonfissionable nuclei, converting
them to a high energy state. Almost at once
these nuclei revert to a lower energy state,
emitting gamma rays as they do so. Second,
the fast neutrons may collide with nuclei
and transfer some of their energy. The now
excited nuclei will return to their normal
state by the emission of gamma rays. Many
reactions of these two types occur before the
bomb material is completely blown apart
and therefore the resultant gamma rays are
strongly absorbed. One notable exception is
the absorption of the neutrons by nitrogen
in the air, producing high energy gamma
rays.
The third source of gamma rays is the
radioactive decay of the fission products
themselves which emit gamma rays. The
activity of these fission products decays very
rapidly at times immediately following a
detonation, yet for a short time the activity
is so relatively great that the gamma rays
make a significant contribution to the total
flux. Of course, the fission products are
radioactive isotopes of varying half lives so
that the decay is spread out over many
years. Therefore, a time limit of one minute
after detonation is chosen to distinguish be-
tween the instantaneous and delayed gamma
rays. This is perhaps not so arbitrary as it
may first appear. The fireball (containing
RADIATIONS FROM NUCLEAR DETONATION
191
most of the activity) rises with an average
rate of ascent for the first minute, of about
250 feet per second. Thus, at the end of one
minute the distance between the fireball and
ground would result in a major attenuation
of the gamma rays.
The instantaneous gamma exposure ex-
perienced from a nuclear detonation depends
upon the distance (inverse square law) and
the attenuation factors (generally the more
dense is the air the greater is the attenu-
ation). From past tests it is possible to con-
struct curves of gamma exposures versus
distances for a given yield shot, and then
to scale to other yields. However, especially
with higher yield detonations, this scaling
factor changes more rapidly than does the
ratio of yields. For example, going from a | to
a 10-megaton air burst (a factor of 10), the
scaling factor increases by about 35. This
is because following the passage of the shock
front there is a region of increased and sus-
tained low air density where there is ap-
preciably less attenuation of the gamma
rays. A surface burst might be expected to
produce a somewhat smaller gamma ex-
posure at a given distance than an air burst.
However, the possible reduction is not
nearly so great as described for attenuation
of thermal rays.
Table 2 presents estimates of the gamma
exposures that might result from different
yield air bursts.
At the time of the nuclear detonation
neutrons are also emitted. These neutrally
charged particles travel at less than the
speed of light yet essentially all of them are
received within a second after the burst.
These neutrons have energies (speeds)
covering a wide range but are relatively high
as they leave the point of detonation. They
TaBLeE 2.—ApprROXIMATE DisraNncres (MILEs)
FROM AN Air Burst To PRoDUCE THE GAMMA
EXPposuRES SHOWN
Gamma Exposures (Roentgens)
Yield (kilotons )
30 300 1,000
20 1.1 0.8 0.65
200 1.6 1.2 1.0
1,000 2.1 1.6 1.4
5,000 2.6 Pol 1.8
20,000 BD 2.6 2.3
192 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
undergo collisions with nuclei of oxygen and
nitrogen in the air and are thus slowed
down. As their energies decrease into the
thermal regions the probability of capture
becomes greater and they are thus removed
from the flux. Whereas, the total number of
neutrons received from a detonation be-
comes less at greater distances, the energy
spectrum remains fairly constant for ap-
preciable distances, i.e., there is a reduction
in energies in the higher region due to
collisions with the air nuclei but at the same
time the low speed neutrons are lost from
the flux by capture.
The amount of gamma radiation received
at a given distance can be scaled for other
fission yields (within certain ranges), but the
neutron flux depends greatly on the char-
acteristics of the nuclear device. The
materials that make up the device influence
the extent of capture of fission neutrons.
Also, thermonuclear reactions create sig-
nificantly more neutrons per energy yield
than does the fission process. Any single
set of values of neutron flux versus distance
would necessarily be only generalized.
The most meaningful expression of neu-
tron exposure would be in terms of biological
damage. It has been found that for a given
unit of energy absorbed in the body, neu-
trons produce a greater biological damage
than do gamma rays. The amount of this
relative effectiveness depends upon the
energy of the neutrons as well as the criterion
of bodily damage selected, but for gen-
eralized whole-body effectiveness it is
thought that 1.7 is a reasonable representa-
tive value for neutrons from a_ nuclear
detonation. To place gamma and neutron
radiation on a common basis in terms of bi-
ological damage, the unit of REM (Roent-
gen Equivalent Man) is used.
TaBLe 3.—APpPROXIMATE Disrances (MILES)
FROM AN Arr Burst TO PRODUCE THE
Neutron ExposurESs SHOWN
Gamma Exposures (REM)
Yield (kilotons)
30 300 1,000
20 1.0 0.75 0.63
200 12 1.0 0.9
1,000 1.4 1.2 Ikea
5,000 1.6 1.4 1.3
20, 000 1.8 1.6 1.5
VOL. 47, NO. 6
TaBLE 4.—AppPROXIMATE DrsTANcE (MILEs)
FROM AN AtrR Burst tro Propuce THE ToTaL
Nuc.tear (Gamma Pius Neurrons) Exposures
SHOWN
Total Nuclear Exposures (REM)
Yield (kilotons)
30 300 1,000
20 1.2 0.81 0.65
200 1.7 1.2 1.1
1,000 2.1 1.6 1.4
5,000 2.6 2.0 1.8
20, 000 3.3 2.5 22,
Table 3 shows approximate neutron
doses versus distances for varying yield
bursts. Comparing Tables 2 and 3 it may be
seen that for yields around 20 kilotons, the
radiation exposures from gamma rays and
neutrons are about equal but as the yields
increase the doses from gamma rays sub-
stantially exceed those from the neutrons.
The total radiation dose received from the
instantaneous nuclear radiations is the sum
of the contribution from gamma rays and
neutrons. Table 4 shows the approximate
total nuclear radiation exposures versus
distances from varying yield bursts. The
30-rem value was selected to represent
an exposure that probably would produce no
detectable damage to individuals so ex-
posed; 300 rems might produce a small
percentage of deaths; and 1000 rems would
almost certainly cause death for all exposed
individuals.
Table 4 indicates two important features
of the doses from instantaneous nuclear
radiations. One, a relatively small vari-
ation in distance from a nuclear detonation
can make a very significant difference in the
radiation dose received. For example, the
ratio of distances from a burst where
essentially little biological damage is in-
curred to where all exposed personnel
might receive lethal doses is less than a
factor of two. Secondly, the biological
damage from the thermal radiation and of
the blast wave probably would not only be
equal or greater than that from nuclear
radiation within the areas where the latter
might be effective, but the thermal and
blast effects extend to much greater dis-
tances. For example, at a distance of 34%
miles the total radiation exposure from even
a 20-megaton burst would be unimportant,
JUNE 1957
yet the thermal exposure would be great
enough to completely char any exposed skin
and to ignite normal clothing, and the blast
wave would undoubtedly destroy even rein-
forced concrete buildings.
WI. PROTECTIVE MEASURES
The most obvious method of protection
from thermal and nuclear radiations is the
use of shielding materials. In the prevention
of flash burns, a preferred type of clothing
would be a two layer garment loosely
draped, with the outer one being lght
colored. Opaque nonflammable materials be-
tween the observer and the burst would
essentially eliminate the possibility of flash
burns. In regions of relatively high thermal
flux, however, the scattered thermal rays
may constitute an additional hazard re-
quiring allround protection.
This scattering effect is also true for
gamma rays. Theoretically, it is not possible
to reduce a gamma flux to zero, since these
rays are exponentially absorbed, but of
course it is possible to attenuate them
to very low values. The energy spectra of
the instantaneous gammas covers a wide
range so that a single attenuation value can-
not be strictly applied. However, in general
the attenuation is roughly proportional to
the density of the material. About eight
inches of concrete or 12 inches of earth will
reduce the gamma flux to 50 percent. An ad-
ditional thickness of like amount would re-
duce the gamma radiation to 25 percent, etc.
The attenuation of neutrons is somewhat
more complex. The fast neutrons require a
material such as iron or barium for inelastic
scattering which slows down the neutrons
into moderate range. These must be further
slowed by elements of low atomic weight,
and finally captured. Water is one suitable
material for these reactions. However, most
neutron capture results in unstable nuclei
which then emit gamma rays which must be
attenuated. Concrete and damp earth are
two materials that have reasonably good
characteristics for both neutron and gamma
attenuation.
There has been some consideration given
to the feasibility of evasive action to reduce
the instantaneous nuclear radiation dose.
Whereas, the neutron exposure is received
almost at once, the gamma dose is delivered
DUNNING: RADIATIONS FROM NUCLEAR DETONATION 193
TaBLE 5—Datra on DELIVERY OF THERMAL
ENERGY AND ARRIVAL OF BLast WAVE FROM
AN Arr Burst
Beproximate
ime to g
4 Approximate
. : Deliver : :
i : Distance* ‘ Time of Arrival
Yield (kilotons) Giles) One-Third of Gi THES \WENO
Soar (seconds)
(seconds)
20 1.4 0.17 5.2
200 3.8 0.54 15
1,000 8 12 32
5,000 15 Pall 60
20, 000 28 5.4 116
* Distances selected represent areas of proba-
ble third-degree burns if the skin is exposed to the
total thermal radiation. Roughly one-third of this
total thermal energy would be expected to pro-
duce only first degree burns.
at a slower rate especially for the higher
yield burst. This is due to the events de-
scribed before of the region of low air density
following in the wake of the blast wave,
where there is appreciably less attenuation
of the gamma rays. However, an exami-
nation of Table 4 will indicate that instan-
taneous gamma plus neutron doses are
effective only within 3 miles for even a 20-
megaton burst. As suggested before, at this
range the thermal radiation would be so
great that even if one is sheltered from the
flash effects, the scattered thermal radiation
and hot gases would undoubtedly be lethal
and the blast wave (which would arrive in a
fraction of a second) would probably de-
molish reinforced concrete buildings.
The rate of delivery of thermal radiation
is likewise less for larger yield bursts. Since
the thermal energy per unit area required to
produce a first degree burn is roughly one-
third that for a third degree burn, one way to
evaluate the feasibility of evasive action is to
estimate the time required to deliver one-
third of that amount of thermal] energy re-
quired to produce a third degree burn. Using
those distances where degree burns might be
experienced from different yield weapons if
one 1s fully exposed, Table 5 was prepared.
It may be seen that for the larger yield
bursts there may be sufficient time for an
effective evasive action. Of course, at lesser
ranges for a given burst the total thermal
energy will be greater, and one-third of this
value would be expected to produce more
194
serious skin damage than first-degree burns.
The above evaluation is possible and desir-
able for planning purposes. However, in the
event of an enemy attack such a deliberate
and dispassionate analysis would not be
possible even if the size and position of the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 6
burst were known. Despite the qualifica-
tions made above concerning the effective-
ness of evasive action, if an actual detona-
tion were to occur, the best course of action
would be to move first and calculate after-
wards.
Ee
FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION OF HUMAN BRAIN
There is a mirror of one’s past in one’s brain.
Under certain circumstances a person may be
possessed of two consciousnesses—one of the
immediate surroundings and circumstances, and
one of the surroundings and circumstances of
something subconsciously remembered. The
phenomenon amounts to a “doubling of con-
sciousness.’”’ One state of awareness is just as
vivid as the other. The two are not likely to
be confused.
This condition is reported by Dr. Wilder
Penfield, director of the Montreal Neurological
Institute, in a paper published in the most recent
annual report of the Smithsonian Institution.
The condition arises unpredictably, Dr. Penfield
reports, when the cerebral cortex that covers one
of the temporal lobes of the brain is stimulated
with a gentle electrical current applied through
a wire needle during surgical operations. Such
surgery on the cortex lying just above one ear is
performed under local anesthesia for a certain
type of epilepsy. The patient remains conscious
and free from pain throughout because of local
anesthesia. Here are some instances reported by
Dr. Penfield:
A young woman heard music when a certain
point in the superior surface of the temporal
cortex was stimulated. She said she heard an
orchestra playing a song. The same song was
forced into her consciousness over and over again
by restimulation at the same spot....She was
quite sure each time that someone had turned on a
gramophone in the operating room.
A South African who was being operated upon
cried out in great surprise that he heard his cousins
talking, and he explained that he seemed to be
there laughing with them although he knew he was
really in the operating room in Montreal.
There were many other examples of hearing
music but always the patient heard a singing
voice, a piano, an organ, or an orchestra, and
sometimes he seemed to be present 1n the room or
in church where he had heard it. What he heard
and experienced was a single occasion recalled to
him with a vividness that was much greater than
anything he could summon voluntarily by effort
of his will.
If the individual was asked later to recall the
song he might be able to sing it, but he might not
be able to recall the circumstances of any one
previous hearing. His later memory of the song
was a generalization. On the other hand, the elec-
trode had reproduced for him one single previous
experience when he had heard the music and it
awakened in him the emotion which that particu-
lar occasion had originally aroused in him.
Dr. Penfield advances a possible explanation
of the phenomenon. The cortex of the superior
and lateral surfaces of the lobe is an area to
which no function has been ascribed previously.
Another part of this lobe, however, is concerned
with hearing, but not with sound recollection or
interpretation.
Apparently every sensory experience—sight,
sound, taste, smell, touch, and the like-—is
carried by the appropriate nerves to a specific
part of the cortex. There it is coordinated with
other sensory impressions to make up a total
pattern of experience. Now, the temporal lobe
observations indicate, this pattern, or appropri-
ate parts of it, is laid down or recorded in the
cells of the cortex as though in a sound moving
picture. It remains there forever, although it
may pass completely out of conscious memory.
The path over the nerves, however, is perma-
nently impressed in the cortex.
Now, Dr. Penfield holds, the cortex itself—
supposedly the seat of intelligence in man and
higher animals in whom it is enormously devel-
oped—is not primarily responsible for the
existence of consciousness. This is a function of
the higher circuits in the ‘fold brain,” the brain
stem. In it lie the coordinating circuits of the so-
called centrencephalic system—which is thor-
oughly developed in lower animals. Before there
is awareness the patterns of nerve conduction in
the cortex must be relayed to this old brain.
Actually large parts of the cortex can be cut away
without seriously disturbing consciousness, but
this disappears very quickly when the brain
stem, with its centrencephalic system, is injured
or diseased.
JUNE 1957
In some way electrical stimulation of the
temporal cortex reactivates one of the per-
manently recorded experience patterns and the
nerve pathways leading to the “‘o'd brain” act as
a mirror, a reflection of the former experience.
Thus the doubled consciousness results.
Similar experiences have never been produced
by stimulating other cortical areas. The function
of photograph gallery is confined to the temporal
area.
“Tt may be assumed then,” says Dr. Penfield,
“that in this area of cortex each successive
conscious experience is laid down in a relatively
SEMINOLE LEGENDS
195
permanent pattern of nerve-cell connections and
records all those things of which a man is con-
scious at any given time. It is as though the cortex
contained a continuous strip of cinemato-
graphic film, a strip that includes the waking
record from childhood onward. ... Presumably
these patterns are no more than pathways of
permanent facilitation through preexisting con-
nections of many branching nerve cells. When the
electrode is applied the current seems to follow
again this pathway, slowly, steadily, while all
other neighboring pathways are somehow closed.”’
SEMINOLE LEGENDS
Still relatively primitive, the Seminole of the
Florida Everglades predict hurricanes as much as
a month in advance. They have their own version
of the great Flood of Noah and an even more
curious creation legend in which the story of Cain
and Abe! is mixed incongruously with the Christian
tradition. Punishment for crime is usually in the
form of whipping administered by a relative. For
murder the penalty can be death at the hands of
the family of the offender, if it is inflicted within
5 days. Otherwise the slayer gets a respite until
the next “Corn Dance,’ which may be several
months away.
These are among the beliefs and customs of the
Seminole related by Dr. Frances Densmore, late
research associate of the Bureau of American
Ethnology, in a publication on the music of these
people recently issued by the Smithsonian In-
stitution.
Ability of the Indians to predict disastrous
storms far in advance puzzles weathermen. For
instance, Dr. Densmore relates, the great
hurricane in the fall of 1926, one of the worst ever
to hit the area, was known to the Indians at
least 4 days in advance. They were so certain of
it that they persuaded the Indian agent to move
all his charges to a safe place, and thus they were
entirely prepared for the catastrophe. In the
neighborhood of Miami the same storm was
predicted 30 days in advance. “How know?”’ the
prophet was asked. ‘‘Moon tell me,” he replied.
The flood legend, as recorded by Dr. Densmore,
is as follows:
The earth was all covered with water, but be-
fore this happened a man made a big houseboat
and many people stayed in it. After a while a bass
dived down and brought up earthin his mouth .. .
the man made that earth into a ball.
The beaver cut the ball in two with his tail.
The man threw half toward the north and half
toward the south. The beaver made them into big
countries. The one towards the south was made
into Cuba. The man said: ‘‘Everybody stay inside
4 days and then the land will be dry.’’ After 2
days the ivorybill wanted to get out and it got out.
The buzzard wanted to get out too. These two
came out. These birds still keep away from people.
The dogs stayed with the people, as they do now,
and the people stayed in the big houseboat 4
days. After 4 days the man let them all out. By
that time a big country was dry and it was a good
country.
More intriguing is the Cain and Abel story,
doubtless an interpretation of early missionary
accounts. The older brother was a tiller of the
soil, the younger a shephered. ‘‘Cain’’ slays
“Abel” but afterward becomes strangely identi-
fied with the Christ figure, the villains being
Spaniards.
196
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 6
ENTOMOLOGY Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States National
Museum: VI, Miscellaneous genera, addenda, and summary.! ALAN STONE,
Entomology Research Division, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, and Kmn-
NETH L. Knieut, Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, Department of the Navy.?
(Received March 22, 1957)
This is the final paper of this series, and
after dealing with the genera not treated in
the first five parts, we offer a few additions
and corrections, and a tabulation of the
genera and species treated.
The introductory remarks in the first
paper of this series, particularly those on
early, possibly questionable holotypes, also
apply to this one. Following our treatment
of nominal taxa in each genus, we list those
in the collection based on unique specimens
or for which holotypes were clearly desig-
nated.
Genus Aedomyia Theobald
Aedeomyia catasticta Knab, Ent. News 20: 387.
1909.
Three female and four male syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lecto-
type a female labeled “Thru Miss Ludlow /Samal,
Bataan, P. I./Type No. 12,627 U.'S.N.M./Aedeo-
myta catasticta Knab.”’
Genus Ayurakitia Thurman
Ayurakitia griffitht Thurman, 1954. Holotype.
Genus Culiseta Felt
Theobaldia alaskaensis Ludlow, Can. Ent. 38: 326.
1906.
The five female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection under two different
type numbers (3359 and 27807). We select as
lectotype the male bearing the labels “Ft. Egbert,
Eagle, Alaska, 2 June 06/Type No. 3359 US.
N.M./Theobaldia alaskaensis Ludlow.” The ter-
minalia are mounted on slide no. 222.
1 Warlier papers of this series appeared in this
JouRNAL 45; 282-289. 1955; 46: 2138-228, 276-280.
1956; 47: 42-59, 117-126. 1957.
2 Studies upon which this paper is based were
conducted under an exchange of funds from the
Office of Naval Research (Biological Science
Division) to the Smithsonian Institution. The
opinions or assertions contained here are the
private ones of the writers and are not to be con-
strued as official or reflecting the views of the Navy
Department or Naval Service at large.
Culiseta dugest Dyar and Knab, Proce. Biol. Soc.
Washington 19: 134. 1906.
The five syntype females of this species are in
the collection. We select as lectotype one bearing
the labels ‘Guanajuato, Mex. 20 Jan 05/A.
Duges Coll./Type No. 9962 U.S.N.M./Culiseta
dugesit D & K. Type.”
Culex dyari Coquillett, Journ. New York Ent.
Soe. 10: 192. 1902.
The three female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection, all bearing the labels
“Center Harbor, N. H./Collection Dr. H. G.
Dyar/Type No. 6700 U.S.N.M.” We select as
lectotype the male, with terminalia unmounted.
Culiseta maccrackenae Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 134. 1906.
The one male and four female syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male, labeled “L. S. Jr. U. Lot 30, Sub.
3/Stan.U.Cal. 23 Jun 1903/Type No. 9961
US.N.M./Theobaldia annulata Meig. California
I. McC. Col.” The terminalia are mounted on
slide no. 221.
Culex melanurus Coquillett, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 10: 193. 1902.
This species was described from two females
and two males. There are seven specimens in the
collection from the type locality collected by
Dyar but none of them bears a type label. Two
specimens bear Coquillett’s determination label
and these, at least, are probably syntypic. We
select as lectotype the male of these two, bearing
the labels “Iss. VIII.2 20/Center Harbor,
N. H./Collection Dr. H. G. Dyar/See Slide No.
20/melanurus.’”’ The terminalia are on slide no. 20.
Culicella (C.) parodites Dyar, Mosquitoes of the
Americas: 244. 1928.
The three male and one female syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male, labeled ‘“‘Saxesville, Wis. V1I.23.09/B. K.
JUNE 1957
Miller Coll./Shde 735/Type U.S.N.M.” The
slide bears the terminalia.
Culiseta siberiensis Ludlow, Ins. Inse. Mens. 7:
151. 1919 [1920].
This species was described from 24 females
collected in three localities in Siberia. Twenty-
three of these are in the collection, and nine bear
type labels. It is not possible to tell the type
locality of any of these bearing the red type labels,
since they are either unlabeled or have all three
localities on the label. We select as lectotype a
female labeled “Type No. 27808 U.S.N.M./Culr-
seta siberiensis Ludl. Mostovoi, Selenga, Verkhne
Udinsk, Siberia Type (1).”
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Culex inornatus Williston, 1893.
Culiseta (Culicella) nipponica LaCasse and Yama-
guti, 1950.
Genus Deinocerites Theobald
Dinomimetes epitedeus Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 120. 1907.
The two female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection, all bearing the labels
“Port Limon, C. R./Type No. 10291 U.S.N.M.”
We select as lectotype the male, bearing the
additional labels, ‘“No. 344a See F. Knab’s
Entom. Notes/See Slide No. 286.’’ The terminalia
are on the slide.
Deinocerites cancer var. melanophylum Dyar and
Knab, Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 15: 200,
1907.
The nine syntypes of this species are in the
collection, each bearing the label “Type No.
10865 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype a male,
with the additional labels ‘‘213/Colon, Panama/
Collected by August Busck/Deinocerites melano-
philum [sic] D. & K. Type.”
Deinocerites pseudes Dyar and Knab, Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 260. 1909.
The nine syntypes of this species are in the
collection, each bearing the label ‘Type No.
12053 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype a female,
bearing the additional labels ‘“378/Ancon, Canal
Zone, Panama/A. H. Jennings Collector.”
Dinanamesus spanius Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Mise. Coll. 52: 259. 1909.
The two syntypes of this species are in the
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES, VI
Sey
collection. We select as lectotype the female,
bearing the labels ““69/A. H. Jennings Collector/
Type No. 12052 U.'S.N.M./Dinanamesus spanius
D. & K. Type.” Data for Jennings number 69 are,
“Corazal, Panama, Dee. 11, 1907, from crab
hole.”
Deinocerites tetraspathus Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Mise. Coll. 52: 260. 1909.
The two syntype females are in the collection.
We select as lectotype the one bearing the labels
“Bluefields, Nicaragua/Type No. 12109 USS.
N.M./See Slide No. 472.” The terminalia are
mounted on the slide.
Deinocerites troglodytus Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 52: 260. 1909.
Eighteen of the original 20 specimens of this
species are in the collection. Only one bears a type
label, and this we consider the holotype. The
labels on this female specimen are ‘Trinidad,
W. I. June/Aug. Buseck Collector/Type No.
12128 U.S.N.M.”
Deinocerites monospathus Dyar, 1925. Holotype,
unique.
Genus Ficalbia Theobald
Ludlowia minima Theobald, Can. Ent. 39: 413.
1907.
The syntype pair of this species are in the
collection. We select as lectotype the female,
bearing the labels, “Type No. 27800 U.S.N.M./
Ludlowia minima Ludlow. Cudarangan, Minda-
nao, P. I. January. Type C.8.L./Slhide 56.II1.1.”
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Aedes clavirostris Stone and Bohart, 1944.
Ficalbia flavens King and Hoogstraal, 1946.
Oreillia luzonensis Ludlow, 1905.
Ficalbia modesta King and Hoogstraal, 1946.
Genus Heizmannia Ludlow
Heizmannia scintillans Ludlow, 1905. Holotype,
unique.
Genus Hodgesia Theobald
Hodgesia ampyx Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8: 176.
1920.
The two syntype females of this species are in
the collection. Both are in poor condition, but we
select as lectotype the better one of the two. It
198
bears the labels “Acc. No. 18399 Coll. of Agr.
Univ. P. I./Type No. 23716 U.S.N.M./Hodgesia.
ampyx Dyar. Type.”
Hodgesia niveocaputis Ludlow, Psyche 18: 130.
1911.
The five syntype females of this species are in
the collection, each bearing the label “Type No.
27798 US.N.M.” One only bears additional
labels, and this we select as lectotype. The labels
are “Wing slide/Hodgesia niveocephala [sic] Ludl.
Fort Pikit, Mindanao, P. I. Type.” The slide is in
the collection.
Genus Mansonia Blanchard
Taeniorhynchus aureosquammatus Ludlow, Can.
Ent. 4: 234. 1909.
The collection contains five specimens labeled
by Ludlow either as Taenvorhynchus aureosquam-
matus or Oculeomyia ? aureosquammosa, as well as
a number of others with no labels. Only one bears
a type label (unnumbered) and we select this as
lectotype. This female bears the label ‘“Oculeo-
myia ? aureosquammosa |sic] n. sp., Parang,
Nov. 1908.”
Mansonia chrysogona Knab, Ent. News 20: 386.
1909.
The two female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection. We select as lectotype
the male, labeled ‘‘Parang, Mindanao 31. May
66/See Slide No. 488/Type No. 12,626 US.
N.M.” The terminalia are on the slide.
Taeniorhynchus coticula Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 101. 1907.
The two syntype females of this species are in
the collection bearing the labels “USDA No.
10417/Bocas d Toro, Pan. 25 Sept. 03/P. Oster-
hout Collector/Type No. 10281 U.S.N.M.” We
select as lectotype the better of these, bearing
Dyar’s determination label.
Mansonia (Coquillettidia) diaeretus Dyar, Ins.
Insc. Mens. 8: 181. 1920.
The two syntype females of this species are in
the collection, each bearing the label, “Type No.
23721 US.N.M.” We select the better of these as
leetotype, bearing the labels ‘Los Banos, P. I.
5. 1I1.1918/Taeniorhynchus diaeretus Dyar Type.”
Mansonia humeralis Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 4: 65. 1916.
This species was described from females and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 6
eggs. The collection contains two original females
but only one bears a type label and this we con-
sider the holotype. The labels are “H.W.B.Moore
See letter Feb. 8, 1916/M. titillans egg cluster in
tube/Type No. 20366 U.S.N.M./Mansonia hu-
meralis D. & K. Type.”
Taeniorhynchus nigricans Coquillett, Proc. Ent.
Soc. Washington 6: 166. 1904.
The two syntype females of this species are in
the collection, each bearing the labels ‘‘Panama
Apr. 18, 04/J. W. Ross/Type No. 7948 US.
N.M.” We select as lectotype the better of the
two, bearing Coquillett’s determination label.
Taenitorhynchus pagei Ludlow, in Theobald, Mon-
ograph of the Culicidae 5: 618. 1910.
The two female and one male syntypes of this
species are in the collection. Two bear an un-
numbered type label only. The third, a female,
bears the additional label ‘“T’aeniorhynchus paget,
Parang, Mindanao, P. I. Oct. Page.”’ The original
material of aureosquammatus and pager are largely
unlabeled and mixed, but we think that this
specimen can be justifiably selected as lectotype
of pager.
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Taeniorhynchus flaveolus Coquillett, 1906.
Mansonia hypocindyna Dyar, 1918.
Mansonia indubitans Dyar and Shannon, 1925.
Mansonia (Mansonioides) marquesensis Dyar,
1925 (terminalia only).
Culex ochropus Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Bancroftia persephassa Dyar and Knab, 1909.
Genus Orthopodomyia Theobald
Mansonia fascipes Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soe.
Washington 7: 182. 1905.
The collection contains two females bearing
the labels “No. 338b See F. Knab’s Entom.
notes/R. Aranjuez, Puntarenas, C. R./Cotype
No. 8296 U.S.N.M.’’ A third is the same except
that the number is 338d. There are other speci-
mens of the same series not labeled as type, so it
is impossible to say which is the fourth syntype.
We select as lectotype the female bearing the
label in Coquillett’s hand “Mansonia terrens
Walk.”’
Orthopodomyia (O.) nipponica LaCasse and Yam-
aguti, Mosquito Fauna of Japan and Korea
TI: 264. 1948.
JUNE 1957
The syntypes of this species consisted of two
females and one male reared from a single larval
collection. One of each sex were said to have been
sent to the Museum. The collection contains two
of each sex bearing identical data but from the
eare in labeling it is quite evident which were the
two syntypes. We select the female of these two as
lectotype. The only label is “Orthopodomyia
nipponica LaCasse and Yamaguti. Female,
Kyoto, Honshu, 17 November 1948. 207th
MS.D.”
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Orthopodomyia alba Baker, 1936.
Orthopodomyia californica Bohart, 1950.
Mansonia phyllozoa Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Culex signifer Coquillett, 1896.
Genus Toxorhynchites Theobald
Toxorhynchites argenteotarsis Ludlow, Can. Ent.
38: 367. 1906.
Four of the five female syntypes of this species
are in the collection. A fifth specimen bears an
unnumbered type label and Ludlow’s determina-
tion and type label, but it is from Corregidor and
is therefore not one of the original specimens. Of
the other four, one bears a red type label with no
number, two bear type no. 10254, and one type
no. 27784. The one without a number carries a
type label in Ludlow’s hand. Type no. 27784
bears no data so that only three bear original
data, and we select as lectotype the one labeled
by Ludlow “TYoxorhynchites argenteotarsis Ludl.
Margosatubig, Mindanao, P. I. June & July
1906. Type C.S.L./Type No. ——U.S.N.M.”
Worcesteria grata Banks, Philippine Journ. Sci. 1:
780. 1906.
The original description of this species states,
“Types & of and 2. No. 6071 in Entomological
Collection, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.
There are 18 cotypes in the collection.”” We can
assume that Banks was using ‘“‘cotype” in the
sense of “‘paratype’’, so that there were a pair of
syntypes selected from the others to represent
the species. All the material in the Bureau of
Science Collection was destroyed so that these
two “types” are lost. The National Museum
collection has two males and one female of the
series no. 6071 cotypes. We feel that since these
are of the original series and are therefore syn-
typic, sce no holotype was originally selected,
and since these are probably the only original
specimens in existence, we can legitimately select
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES, VI
199
one of the males as lectotype. The labels on this
specimen are “Acc. No. 6071 Lot. co-type Govt.
Lab. Coll./Type No. 10255 U.S.N.M./Worces-
teria grata Banks.”
Megarhinus guadeloupensis Dyar and Knab,
Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 48: 254. 1906.
The two original specimens, a male and a
female, are in the collection. Only one bears a
type label and this female we consider the holo-
type. It bears the labels “79.1/Guadeloupe, W. I.
July/Aug. Busck Collector/Type No. 9956 U.S.
N.M./Megarhinus guadeloupensis D. & K.”
Megarhinus haatiensis Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 48: 253. 1906.
The original female and three males of this
species are in the collection, all labeled ‘“S.
Fresco Mts. S Domingo W. I. Sept. 05/Aug.
Busck Collector.” Only one bears a type label
and this female we consider the holotype. It bears
the additional labels “134.1/Type No. 9955 U.S.
N.M./Megarhinus haitiensis D. & K.”
Megarhinus moctezeuma Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 48: 251. 1906.
Of the original 16 males and 2 females of this
species, two males are missing. Only one specimen
bears a type label so this we consider the holotype.
It bears the labels ‘““No. 3380 See F. Knab’s En-
tom. notes/R. Aranjuez, Puntarenas, C. R./Type
No. 9953 U.S.N.M./Megarhinus moctezuma D. &
K”
Megarhinus rutila Coquillett, Can. Ent. 28: 44.
1896.
The original material was said to consist of
three males and five females from North Carolina
and Georgiana, Florida. In the collection are two
specimens from Georgiana, Florida, and seven
labeled only “Fla.’’ and none from North Caro-
lina. One specimen bears a type label and this we
select as lectotype. This male bears the labels
“Fla/Type No. 903 U.S.N.M./Megarhinus ru-
tilus Coq.”
Megarhinus septentrionalis Dyar and Knab,
Smithsonian Mise. Coll. 48: 249. 1906.
One only of the 24 original specimens bears a
type label, and this we consider the holotype.
The labels on this male are, ““Woodstock, Va. iss
24 Aug. 04/F. C. Pratt Collector/Type No. 9952
US.N.M./Megarhinus septentrionalis D. & K.”
200
Megarhinus superbus Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 48: 255. 1906.
We consider the holotype to be the single
specimen bearing a type label. This male bears
the labels “Trinidad, W. I./F. W. Urich Collec-
tor/16-9/Tyvpe No. 9957 /Megarhinus superbus D.
«& K.” The terminalia are mounted on a slide.
Megarhinus trinidadensis Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 48: 252. 1906.
One only of the five original specimens bears
a type label and this female we consider the
holotype. It bears the labels ‘‘Trinidad, W. I./F.
W. Urich Collector/B3.2/Type No. 9954 US.
N.M./Megarhinus trinidadensis D. & K.”
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Megarhinus gigantulus Dyar and Shannon, 1925.
Megarhinus hypoptes Knab, 1907.
Megarlainus tris Knab, 1913.
Megarhinus lewaldit Ludlow, 1904.
Megarhinus nepenthis Dyar and Shannon, 1925.
Genus Uranotaenia Lynch Arribdlzaga
Uranotaenia calosomata Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 200. 1907.
The five syntypes, two females and three
males, of this species are in the collection, three
with type labels, two without. We select as lecto-
type a male bearing the labels “23.8/Tabernilla,
Canal Zone, Panama/collected by August Busck/
Type No. 10866 U.S.N.M.” A portion of the
larval skin of this specimen is mounted on a slide.
Uranotaenia clara Dyar and Shannon, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 13: 68. 1925.
The syntype pair of this species is in the col-
lection. We select as lectotype the male, bearing
the labels “2150/Type No. 28103 U.S.N.M./
Ludlow Barracks, Mindanao, P. I.” The ter-
minalia are on slide no. 2150.
Uranotaenia coatzacoalcos Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 14: 186. 1906.
This species was described from the larva only,
collected at Santa Lucrecia, Mexico. The only
original material found consists of two larval head
capsules and fragments of the rest of the skins.
The material is so inadequate that there is no
point in selecting a lectotype.
Uranotaenia cooki Root, Journ. Parasitol. 23: 98.
1937.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 6
Root selected one of each sex from a series of
five specimens to be types of this species. These
were supposedly deposited in the National Mu-
seum collection. All that we find in the collection
is a slide labeled “Uranotaenia cooki Root (type)
Port-au-Prince, Haiti, Feb. 11, 1932, Dr. S. S.
Cook/Type No. 50375 U.S.N.M.” This contains
the fore leg, portion of another tarsus, and the
terminalia. It is quite certain that this is the
specimen figured by Root. We select this slide as
lectotype.
Uranotaenia caeruleocephala var. lateralis Ludlow,
Can. Ent. 37: 385. 1905.
The four syntype females of this species are in
the collection bearing either numbered or un-
numbered type labels. We select as lectotype one
bearing the labels “Type No. 27786 U.S.N.M./
Uranotaenra caeruleocephala Theob. var. lateralis
Lud. Cottabato, Mindanao, P. I. June. Type
CS.L.”
Uranotaenia ludlowae Dyar and Shannon, Ins.
Insc. Mens. 13: 68. 1925.
Twenty of the original 22 syntype females of
this species are in the collection. We select as
lectotype one bearing the labels ‘““Type No. 28077
US.N.M./Ludlow Barracks, Mindanao.”
Uranotaenia urania Shannon and Del Ponte,
Rev. Inst. Bact. 5: 83. 1928.
The syntype pair of this species is in the col-
lection. We select as lectotype the male, bearing
the labels ‘Resistencia, Chaco 20.2.27/2355/
Uranotaenia urania S. & D.P.” The terminalia
are mounted on slide no. 2355.
Holotypes, designated or unique:
Uranotaenia barnest Belkin, 1953.
Uranotaenia basalis Howard, Dyar, and Knab,
1913.
Uranotaenia briseis Dyar, 1925.
Uranotaenia capitis Shannon and Del Ponte,
1928.
Uranotaenia civinskw Belkin, 1953.
Uranotaenia pulcherrima var. elnora Paterson
and Shannon, 1927.
Uranotaenia fimbriata King and Hoogstraal 1947.
Uranotaenia hystera Dyar and Knab, 1913.
Uranotaenia incognita Galindo, Blanton, and
Peyton, 1954.
Uranotaenia innotata Dyar and Shannon, 1925.
Uranotaenia nanseica Bohart and Ingram, 1946.
JUNE 1957
Uranotaenia neotibialis King and Hoogstraal,
1947.
Uranotaenia orthodoxa Dyar, 1921.
Uranotaenia paludosa Galindo, Blanton, and
Peyton, 1954.
Pseudouranotaenia parangeneis Ludlow, 1909.
Uranotaenia setosa King and Hoogstraal, 1947.
Uranotaenia sexauert Belkin, 1953.
Uranotaenia solomonis Belkin, 1953.
Uranotaenia stonei Bohart and Ingram, 1946.
Uranotaenia subtibioclada King and Hoogstraal,
1947.
Uranotaenia syntheta Dyar and Shannon, 1924.
Uranotaenia telmatophila Galindo, Blanton, and
Peyton, 1954.
Uranotaenia tibioclada King and Hoogstraal,
1947.
Uranotaenia trapidoi Galindo, Blanton, and Pey-
ton, 1954.
Pseudouranotaenia triangulata Ludlow, 1908.
Uranotaenia typhlosomata Dyar and Knab, 1907.
Uranotaenia wysockw Belkin, 1953.
Genus Zeugnomyia Leicester
Holotypes:
Zeugnomyia aguilari Baisas and Feliciano, 1953.
Zeugnomyia fajardoi Baisas and Feliciano, 1953.
Zeugnomyia lawtoni Baisas, 1946.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS, PARTS I TO V
In the first five parts of this series a few
species were omitted for one reason or
another, and a few errors were made and
since discovered. We deal with these at the
present time.
Aedes diantaeus Howard, Dyar, and Knab.
The name was first validated in vol. 2, fig. 167,
of ““Mosquitoes of North and Central America
and the West Indies,” 1913, not vol. 4, 1917, as
given in Part II.
Aedes draconarius Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10:
194, 1922.
This species was described from two females
and four males, one pair being in the U.S. Na-
tional Museum, and the rest returned to the
Museum of Natural History in Paris. According
to Dr. Séguy, the Paris Museum has two females,
one labeled as type by Dyar, the other a “‘cotype”’
without type label. Since only one female was
returned to Paris by Dyar it is probable that the
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES, VI
201
“cotype” was not actually seen by Dyar. There
are then three syntypes in existence, consisting
of a pair of specimens in the U. 8. National
Museum entered in the type catalogue by Dyar
under type No. 25765, and a female in the Paris
Museum. We select as lectotype the female of the
two syntypes in the U. 8. National Museum. It
bears the labels ‘St. Laurent du Maroni, Guyane
fr. Dr. E. Brimont 1909, Institut Pasteur/Type
No. 25765 U.S.N.M.”
Aedes euiris Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10: 193. 1922.
The three female syntypes of this species were
distributed between the Paris Museum (2) and
the U. S. National Museum, one of the former
being labeled “cotype.” Dr. Séguy informs us
that the one labeled “‘cotype” by Dyar is in the
Paris Museum, the second specimen not being
found. We select as lectotype the female in the
U.S. National Museum labeled ‘Colombia Dr.
F. A. Miller/Type No. 25763 U.S.N.M./Aedes
ewiris Dyar Type.”
Anopheles neivat Howard, Dyar, and Knab.
J ’
This name was first validated in vol. 2, pl. 41,
fig. 8, and fig. 461, of ‘““Mosquitoes of North and
Central America and the West Indies,” 1913, not
vol. 4, 1917, as stated in Part III.
Aedes palustris var. pricei Dyar.
This was incorrectly placed alphabetically in
Part II, p. 223. It should have come after Culex
pretans on. p. 224.
Aedes (Soperia) pseudodominicii Komp, Proc.
Ent. Soc. Washington 38: 75. 1936.
The type of this species was to have been
placed in the U.S. National Museum Collection
but it has not been found and is probably lost.
Aedes (Howardina) stenet Thompson, 1956.
The holotype of this species has been placed
in the collection since the publication of Part IT.
SUMMARY
In a series of six papers we have treated
the type material of 910 named _ specific,
subspecific, or varietal taxa of mosquitoes
in 27 genera. Of these there are 875 taxa for
which either a holotype or a lectotype is in
the U. S. National Museum collection.
202
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 6
The following alphabetical list of genera Heizmannia: <ycc) 3) ee- eee VI
shows the part or parts of the series of Hodgesia Jcrayage se erke eee tae VI
rege ic : TMA tUS ss ise, ac pace eee eee V
papers in which each was treated. Malaya V
Gone ark Miemsoma. eG Rape aibb oes 2000e42 << VI
: Orthopodomyia-.4.54..00 eee VI
AEE OMVaa eyed nee oc tere nome VI Phoniomyia. <<. -c.cs.00 eee Vv
INECESH ase ae ena ae II, VI Psorophora. .:...:<-+:: 1000s eee I
Anopheles tite, entrees soe Laval Goethae tn en Vv
Rane Se a ee Topomyia. | hi V
On Pet ee tian SaEmer ray emi cay Moxorhynchites: +...) --ee eee VI
HORN GH ER eat G He cen ener sh a make ging Satate e III ‘ via
Cai oe Oe eke See, PCRs IV Trichoprosopon......... ‘Ln See V
Gulia bes oe Veta aly lie gis ane Goa VI Tripteroides............-..6...0..0.. Mi
TOA eee ce ee eee VI Uranotaenia ES alola-p o'g'0.0-0'9 6 0-0.016 VI
Fitcalbia tc oc wut iiay bec annie Mey VI Wyeomyia........ 0.0.2.0. eee VY
Haemagogus US Uae poe oak ch oe REAR cei cle Re URIC iL Zeugnomyle Wotton Pelee euientc (eifeliehistleRatteiteNismeie me Meaeat tents VI
——
CRYSTAL CHEMISTRY OF TOOTH AND BONE MINERAL
Using the techniques of chemical crystallog-
raphy, scientists at the National Bureau of
Standards are developing new information on the
nature of calcified tissue. The Bureau’s dental
research laboratory has synthesized pure single
crystals of hydroxyapatite'—the prototype of the
main mineral constituent in teeth and bone.
Both the synthetic and naturally occurring
apatites have been analyzed by X-ray diffraction
and infrared absorption spectroscopy.? Results
of the study may lead to a better understanding
of the function of calcified tissue in the body and
eventually perhaps to new methods of treating
diseased teeth and bone.
The current investigations are being conducted
by A. S. Posner, research associate, American
Dental Association; A. F. Diorio, a guest worker
from the Walter Reed Army Medical Center; and
A. Perloff of the Bureau staff. The NBS con-
stitution and microstructure laboratory is assist-
ing in the work, and the National Institutes of
Health and the Army Medical Center have
cooperated on specific projects.
APATITE MINERALS
The apatites are the most abundant of the
phosphate minerals. The name “apatite”? was
derived from the Greek word meaning ‘“‘to
1 For further technical details, see Preparation
of pure hydroxyapatite crystals, by A. PERLOFF and
A. S. Posner, Science 48: 383. 1956.
2 Infrared study of the carbonate in bone, teeth,
and fracolite, by A. 8. Posner and G. DurcxK-
AERTS, Experientia 10: 424. 1954.
deceive” since the mineral was often confused
with others like aquamarine or amethyst. Pure
hydroxyapatite is a chemical rarity having the
formula Cayo(POx) «(OH)». However, the mineral
known as hydroxyapatite always contains a
certain portion of fluoride ions (F-) replacing
the hydroxyl ions (OH).
Previous analyses had shown that tooth min-
eral is some form of hydroxyapatite mixed with
other phases. Thus the study of the calcified
tissue in teeth ties in with that of the apatite
family of minerals. Besides providing a better
understanding of the structure and function of
dental enamel, the data developed should be
useful in a number of other fields including
mineralogy, crystallography, basic chemistry,
and physics.
The crystallographic studies at the Bureau
indicate that the major constituent of tooth
mineral may be a calcium-deficient hydroxy-
apatite’. Chemical analyses of sound human teeth
show they contain less than 10 calcium atoms for
every 6 atoms of phosphorus. In other words,
there is not enough calcium to provide the
10Ca/6P ratio found in perfect hydroxyapatite.
However, X-ray and index of refraction studies of
teeth definitely indicate the presence of apatite.
The evidence taken together suggests the pres-
ence in teeth of defect apatites in which some of
the calcium ions are missing from certain struc-
3 Apatites deficient in divalent cations, by A. 8S.
Posner and A. Preruorr, Journ Research Nat.
Bur. Stand. 58: 279. 1957. RP 2761.
JuNE 1957
tural positions and electrical neutrality is
achieved by the inclusion of hydrogen ions in the
proper amount somewhere in the structure. This
concept may lead to an explanation for the dif-
ferences in reactivity (i.e., solubility, hardness,
caries resistance, etc.) of one tooth as compared
to another.
SYNTHESIS OF PURE HYDROXYAPATITE
In order to obtain basic information on the
purer forms of the apatite minerals, a standard
pure apatite was synthesized at the Bureau in a
hydrothermal bomb. The crystals were examined
by X-ray diffraction, infrared spectroscopy, and
other techniques. The synthesis procedure in-
yolves hydrolyzing monetite (CaHPO,) to
hydroxyapatite in a closed system. The materials
—0.1 gram of monetite and 10 ml of water
—are placed in a platinum-lined hydrothermal
bomb and subjected to a temperature of 300°C
for 10 days. During this time the system had an
internal pressure of about 1250 psi due to the
vapor pressure of the saturated steam. Crystals
were formed ranging up to 0.3 mm in length with
negligible quantities of impurities. It should
eventually be possible to produce even larger
erystals which can be used as standard reference
samples in X-ray diffraction studies of all apatite
minerals.
DEFECT APATITES
By controlling the pH at which the apatite is
precipitated it is possible to produce calcium-
deficient or “defect”? hydroxyapatite. A number
of compounds of this sort were produced ranging
from the calcium-phosphorus ratio of pure
hydroxyapatite (10Ca/6P) to a low Ca/P ratio
of 8.2/6.0. In general the Ca/P ratio of apatitic
calcified tissue (bone, teeth, etc.) lies below the
value expected of pure hydroxyapatite.
Since a structure from which cations are re-
moved has an excess of negative charges, it was
postulated that the proper number of hydrogen
ions enter the hydroxyapatite structure, not
directly in calcium positions, but as hydrogen
bonds between orthophosphate oxygens. Recent
infrared absorption studies show that pure
hydroxyapatite does not contain such hydrogen
bonding while synthetic defect apatites and cal-
cified tissue do.
Some of the chemical properties of these defect
apatites are different from those of pure hydroxy-
apatite. An example directly applicable to bio-
NOTES AND NEWS 2038
chemistry is the solubility. The Bureau in co-
operation with NIH has demonstrated that when
the synthetic low-calcium apatites react with
caletum acetate, the solubility in weak lactic
acid is reduced by about 35 percent.4 Studies
with rat molar teeth yielded similar results. This
may provide a mechanism whereby chemical
treatment may produce a more stable tooth
structure.
CARBONATE
The carbonate found in tooth and bone
mineral is of the order of 3 percent carbon dioxide
by weight, but its function in calcified tissue re-
mains uncertain. Also, its exact crystallographic
placement in the tooth structure has been de-
bated. For example, is the carbonate substituted
in the apatite crystal, or admixed or adsorbed as
a separate phase? In order to investigate this
problem, a number of techniques were employed
at the Bureau including X-ray diffraction, in-
frared absorption spectroscopy, electron micros-
copy, and preferential solubility studies. It was
concluded that carbonate occurs as admixed or
adsorbed calcite (CaCO3) or magnesite (MgCOs).
Since the particles are not detected by X-ray
diffraction or electron microscopy, it is suggested
that the carbonate particles are too small to be
seen by these techniques.
SMALL PARTICLE SIZE
Small crystal size is a striking feature of the
chemically precipitated basic calcium phos-
phates, precipitation being the mechanism by
which bone is produced in the blood serum.
Dentin and enamel mineral and synthetically
precipitated apatites have average crystal
diameters in the range below 1000A and may
be studied by the line broadening methods of
X-ray diffraction.
These studies indicate an average crystalline
diameter ranging from 150 to 300A for bone,
dentin, and the precipitated apatites. Particle
size distribution curves obtained from line
broadening experiments show that steam-auto-
claved bone contains crystals ranging from 50 to
1000A in diameter with about 80 percent ap-
pearing in the 800A region.
4 Effect of calcium treatment on solubility and
calcium uptake of synthetic hydroxyapatite and rat
molar enamel, by R. C. Lixins, A. S. Posner, and
A. C. SrEERE, paper presented at meeting of In-
ternational Association for Dental Research,
Atlantic City, N. J., March 1957.
204
These measurements are biologically sig-
nificant since they confirm the large specific
surface apparent in the apatite of calcified tissue
and underline the importance of surface re-
actions in the functioning of bone and teeth. If
indeed the apatite in teeth and bones are defect
apatites, the properties of the biological apatites
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 6
will change with increasing exposure to ions that
can fill the defects. Cooperative studies between
NIH and NBS are in progress on the application
of the defect apatite theory to explain aging in
bone and teeth mineral and the general function
of apatite in these systems.
ee
SOLAR FURNACE
A solar furnace that generates temperatures
two-thirds as hot as the surface of the sun has re-
cently been acquired by the National Bureau of
Standards as a new research facility in the high-
temperature field. Bureau scientists are now using
the furnace to produce temperatures up to
3500°C to’ melt refractory materials in a con-
trolled environment free of contaminating agents.
Investigations at high temperatures carried out
with the aid of the solar furnace should result in
better temperature-resistant materials to with-
stand the extreme conditions found in atomic
reactors, aircraft engines, and guided missiles.
New or improved refractories—that is, ma-
terials that can withstand very high temper-
atures for long periods of time—are continually
being developed by industry, and new applica-
tions are being found for these products. Con-
sequently, knowledge of the properties of these
materials—melting points, strength at high
temperatures, ete.—is urgently needed. Inves-
tigations in this field should supply valuable en-
gineering information to the user of refractories.
High-temperature tungsten are or carbon resistor
furnaces have commonly been employed in the
past for such studies, but with the disadvantage
that the crucibles, electrodes, or resistors con-
taminate the reaction and give false indications.
However, in a solar furnace, the material itself
can be its own crucible, with consequent freedom
from contamination.
The Bureau’s solar furnace was converted
from a surplus Army searchlight with a 5-foot
diameter parabolic mirror. It collects the sun’s
rays and focuses them into an intensely hot spot
only one-fourth inch in diameter. Heating occurs
only at this small spot, and the experiment is
‘arried out here. This area can be isolated by
closed glass tubing, which can be evacuated or
filled with gas of the experimenter’s choice.
The glass enclosure is not affected by the sun’s
rays since the image of the sun is unfocused
where the light passes through the enclosure
and no local heating of the glass results.
The curved mirror faces a flat mirror, about 8
feet square, which is directed at the sun and re-
flects the light into the solar furnace. This large,
flat mirror, called a heliostat, is attached to a
search ight mount so that it can be turned to
follow the sun through the sky as the earth turns
on its axis. An assembly of photocells with
appropriate electronic equipment controls the
heliostat driving mechanism in response to the
sun’s apparent motion.
Besides study of the properties of refractory
materials, the solar furnace can be used in the
“zone refining’ of oxides of zirconium, thorium,
or uranium to produce extremely pure samples of
those compounds. By means of the solar furnace
it might even be possible to grow single crystals
of these and similar materials for laboratory
studies.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Bivosophieal Society of Washington ..........2......eeeecsences ees CuesterR H. Pace
Avuhropolorical Society of Washington ..........:.0..2.......00-+.0- FRANK M. SETzLeR
Baalerical society of Washington)... .oi.ase<sve.maccnnese we ce eas HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Mbemicalusociety of Washington. .....00.6. 06. cneeccdssemeciseeceee vs CuHarLEs R. NabSER
Entomological Society of Washington.......................0085 Caru F. W. MurseBEeck
METHIOHAIE GCOPTADDIC SOCIOL. 2-5..06 «nee iesindle sie oo hg sie eseiers dies auais ALEXANDER WETMORE
Georuzcalsociety, of Washington... «oc soci ecs. oSecmeeaee ves ceeeen ss Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. CoE
Marah MBEATSHOLICAl | SOGIELY,-.- a.) -.2:e- ait oo chesevleis Etaeietere weet fee sshas sis Aavoberere U.S. Grant, IIT
Ear ee ME SOCIeby Ol Washington. 5. sce sce <airiste cos v1 claves etalon a eiA Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Fuippo GRAvaTr
Washinton society of Engineers: .......2.25 50.0. cscee nies scenes ees Herpert G. Dorsry
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ ARNOLD H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers........ Howarp S. Bran
Helminthological Society of Washington..................2.0005- Donatp B. McMuLLen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicwHasru J. Petezar, Jr.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Emgineers.......................5 Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dove tas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorce A. Horrie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VacHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..Witt1am T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society....................-. CHARLES S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
Puysics.—Meteorological factors affecting spread of radioactivity from
nuclear\bombs. IumsTer MACHTA, .. 2... 020..22. 0.9) ee
Puysics.—Global distribution of radioactivity from nuclear detonations,
with special reference to strontium®. Merrit EIsENBUD....... ie
Puysics.—Immediate radiations from a nuclear detonation. GoRDON
DUNNING se oie eae 0
EntomoLoGy.—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States Na-
tional Museum: VI, Miscellaneous genera, addenda, and summary.
ALAN Stone and Kennetu L. KNIGHT..................-...--.
Notes and News sii. secant Oe ear 194-195, 202-204
yrawes
7OLUME 47 July 1957 NUMBER 7
JOURNAL
OT METELID,
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
is
(ft ree
cequeereeceeecre
VAN Hs Nan \
/ ,
Published Monthly by the
meso HITNGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CoesterR H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EXSTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JourNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Kditor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; ine editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscreption ates) for the JOuRNAL:—ber Year, «6 ere ee eee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _—
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monocrars No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS..................020000: $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.........................000- $25.00
Single! volumes; unbound! 2.8..0. 39h chon ces. ductus satis ee eee 2.00
Single mumbersye ic) ih ease rset sass ers Gy sucteeater Wale u eae eenucy ea ues alpen Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
DAC:
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47 JuLy 1957 No. 7
THE ROLE OF THE CIVIL ENGINEER
(By our deeds they shall know us)
HE CIVIL ENGINEER has had a place in the civilization of this world ever since
the first crude shelter was built in bygone centuries to provide protection
against the elements and his foes. He has progressed far since the days of his first
hut, for now he has a place of first importance in the planning, design, erection, and
operation of atomic-energy facilities and devices. Our supersonic aircraft would be
unable to take off and land if it were not for the civil engineer and the precise meth-
ods he uses in the design and construction of airfields. Projected missiles require his
services in the preparation of their launching bases. By his water-supply works he
has quenched the thirst of thousands and supplied industry with their most im-
portant commodity.
The past is prologue. What does the future hold for the civil engineer? We know
the civil engineer has and will continue to have a great and vital role in the future
of the world, for he has had unusual and thorough preparation for his profession;
he has the basic integrity needed for work with his fellow-men; he performs real
service to all humanity; he is dedicated to his profession.
The National Capital Section of the American Society of Civil Engineers, in an
effort to describe to the members of the Washington Academy of Sciences some of
the various activities of civil engineers, requested a number of their members to
write about their chosen field of endeavors. The articles that follow depict only a
few of the facets into which the field of civil engineering is divided.
205
OCT 16 1957
206 JOURNAL OF
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 7
Civil-Engineering Research
By G. E. Burnett, Bureau of Reclamation, Denver, Colo.
Civil engineering is not always recognized
as being one of the more imaginative of the
scientific professions. Therefore, to some it
may come as a surprise that much can be
said about civil-engineering research. The
fact is that good civil engineering demands
a high degree of resourcefulness and imagi-
nation, and civil engineers the world over
are deeply engrossed with research. They
are acutely aware of the need for finding
better ways of doing things.
Economy with safety is the civil engi-
neer’s byword. His structures must not fail,
yet he is compelled to gain in economy and
so must continually seek bolder designs, re-
duction in costs in construction materials,
and development of more efficient methods
of construction. He can not take undue
risks in the prototype; thus, laboratory and
field research has become a principal tool
in gaining these objectives.
Research is performed in all phases of
civil engineering—in buildings, bridges, rail-
roads, highways, dams—in planning, de-
signing, construction, operating, and main-
taining—in all sorts of construction
materials. The field is much too broad for
complete coverage here. Typical, however,
is the research conducted by the Bureau of
Reclamation, a civil-engineering organiza-
tion that for 55 years has been building
irrigation and multipurpose water projects
in the West.
Much diversity will be found in Reclama-
tion research, because much diversity exists
in its structures. Dams, large and small,
earth and concrete, low head and high head.
Canals, lined and unlined. Canal structures,
diversion works, checks, drops, turnouts,
siphons. Hydroelectric plants, pumping
plants, gravity and pressure pipelines, elec-
tric transmission lines, substations, bridges,
railroad and highway relocations, Govern-
ment camps and towns. Individual struc-
tures must be planned and built for com-
petency, serviceability, and safety under
widely varying conditions of foundation,
topography, climate, and operating condi-
tions. With all, the Bureau is under the
constant stimulus of developing project
facilities as economically as possible and
within the water users’ ability to repay the
costs of construction, as required by Recla-
mation law.
Reclamation research is a coordinated
endeavor in design studies and analysis, in
laboratory tests and investigations, and in
field observations and surveys. The analyti-
cal approach includes application of special
mathematical techniques coupled with con-
ventional design procedures. Laboratory re-
search is essential to the determination of
the properties and the best methods for the
use of construction materials, in analyzing
and predicting structural behavior, and in
determining operating characteristics. Field
research is applied when the limitations of
the laboratory are exceeded and extends the
knowledge of functions of structures and
leads to improved and more economical
operation of completed works.
Bureau research activity is particularly
identified with the work and accomplish-
ments of the Bureau’s central engineering
laboratories under the direction of the As-
sistant Commissioner and Chief Engineer
in Denver. The laboratories have made
major contributions in virtually every phase
of Reclamation engineering advancement.
In the fields of hydraulic research, in struc-
tural testing, and in investigations of con-
struction materials, laboratory effort has
increased the flexibility and scope of design
and construction methods. Laboratory re-
search has not only developed new ap-
proaches and solutions to engineering prob-
lems, but has been instrumental in achieving
major economies. The engineering labora-
tories are regarded as indispensable aids in
the planning, designing, building, and oper-
ation of reclamation works.
Hydraulic laboratory research embraces a
wide variety of specialized problems. Hy-
draulic structures such as dams, spillways,
outlet works, stilling basins, canal chutes
and siphons, conduits, and hydraulic ma-
JULY 1957
chinery and appurtenances are studied in
working models for adequacy of perform-
ance and for determination of forces acting
on them and their prototypes. Such model
tests have led the way to great improve-
ments in hydraulic operating characteris-
ties, safety in operation, and economies of
design. The solution of specific problems
has also yielded a wide range of hydraulic
data and experience of value in the solution
of future problems.
Hydraulic research techniques have
played an important part in modifying de-
signs and altering flow conditions to obtain
desired discharge capacities for hydraulic
structures. Ways of minimizing the destruc-
tive effects of cavitation and subsequent
costly repairs to structures and equipment
have been developed. Studies pertaining to
the control and release of water from con-
duits under high pressure have resulted in
more economical, improved, and cavitation-
free gate and valve designs. Reduction in
the size of water passages has made econo-
mies possible in many structures when
laboratory studies pointed out practical de-
sign modifications. Dimensions of spillways
have been decreased in many instances, and
the operation of these features has been
improved. Recent comprehensive studies of
stilling basins and appurtenant facilities
have extended the knowledge of dissipating
the energy of falling water and will un-
doubtedly enrich the art of hydraulic engi-
neering. Favorable progress has been made
in river channel stabilization and the con-
trol of sediment at canal headworks at
diversion dams.
The hydraulic laboratory has extended
its usefulness by the application of elec-
tronic analogs to solve various problems,
including the control of surges in pipeline
irigation distribution systems. Such appli-
cation has been valuable also in salinity
studies.
A primary requisite to sound design and
construction is structural research con-
ducted for the accurate measurement of
stresses, strain, deflection, creep, and other
physical effects developed in structures in
use. Tests on models of girders, columns,
frames, gates, and other structures or struc-
BURNETT: CIVIL-ENGINEERING RESEARCH 207
tural parts are invaluable adjuncts to safe
and economical designs. Structural research
has also been applied profitably to the study
of foundations and characteristics of ma-
terials, particularly in the correlation of
mineralogical and physical properties of
rock.
In concrete technology, noteworthy prog-
ress has been made in the solution of the
cracking problem that results from reaction
of the alkalies in cement with certain aggre-
gates, in the use of pozzolanic materials to
improve concrete and reduce cement con-
tent, in the introduction of air entrainment
in conerete to improve workability and du-
rability, and in the successful use of lean
concrete. Laboratory research on concrete
materials has contributed to the develop-
ment of different types of portland cement,
each having special properties needed for
particular purposes; e.g., one that will re-
sist the disruptive attack of sulfates in soil
or water. From such researches have come
also basic criteria for control of mixing,
transporting, and placing of concrete, and
for the proportioning of materials in con-
crete for adequate quality and workability.
Notable progress has also been made in the
analyses of thermal properties of concrete,
in the measurement of volume change, and
in the studies of durability, permeability,
strength, elasticity, creep, and other prop-
erties of concrete.
Major economies resulting from such
concrete research have been demonstrated.
Since the establishment of the Bureau
laboratories in 1930, it is conservatively
estimated that an average of one-tenth
barrel of cement has been saved in each of
some 50 million cubic yards of concrete
placed in Bureau structures, representing a
savings of perhaps 10 million dollars. The
development of inexpensive pozzolans for
use In concrete has resulted in an improved
concrete for a number of large dams and in
additional savings in cement. The addition
of fly ash as a pozzolan to the concrete of
Hungry Horse and Canyon Ferry Dams,
two large dams built in Montana a few
years ago, alone reduced the cost of con-
struction by several million dollars. With-
out an ample background of laboratory
208 JOURNAL OF
research and the attending proof of design
quality, the use of fly ash could hardly have
been ventured in such important structures.
Perhaps no area of civil-engineering re-
search has seen a greater expansion in recent
years than has soil mechanics. Great prog-
ress has been made in methods of evaluating
shear, compaction, and permeability prop-
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 7
earth linings for canals received its major
impetus through laboratory investigations,
as did the jetting and vibrating method of
compacting cohesionless soils for backfill.
Better exploration and testing techniques
have led to more economical foundation de-
signs for a variety of structures. A labora-
tory-developed atomic radiation device now
Fic. 1.—Testing of products destined for installation on Bureau projects is an important activity of
the engineering laboratories. Here, laboratory engineers discuss the procedures to be followed in testing
this 66-inch diameter reinforced concrete pipe under the 5-million pound universal testing machine.
erties of soils. Procedures have been devel-
oped for chemical and microscopic examina-
tions. Soils research and its effect on the
extension of knowledge of soil behavior
have been important factors in the develop-
ment of improvements in the design and
construction of earth dams and other earth
embankments. The introduction of rela-
tively inexpensive heavy-type compacted
gives promise in measuring soil density and
moisture content in situ and in measuring
reservoir sediment density.
Research engineers have contributed to
the knowledge and application of other ma-
terials, including paints and coatings of
many types, bituminous materials, rubber
waterstops, and metals. Bentonites and
other clay minerals have been studied for
JuLy 1957
their usefulness for construction applica-
tions as in canal lining. Tests designed to
evaluate protective coatings and their abil-
ity to prevent corrosion have been valuable
aids to the utilization of new materials and
to the more effective use of standard ma-
terials.
Of concern to the civil engineer working
on irrigation problems is the matter of
Fic. 2.—An engineer and his aid in the earth-materials
BURNETT: CIVIL-ENGINEERING RESEARCH 209
ology and the effect of herbicides on aquatic
and land-type weeds. Laboratory research-
ers in cooperation with physiologists of the
Bureau of Plant Industry developed an in-
expensive aromatic solvent weed killer that
is now widely used to control aquatic weeds
in irrigation canals.
Research is also of importance in the field
where new developments can be observed
laboratory are shown here carrying out tests
to develop jetting and vibrating methods for consolidating cohesionless soils around concrete pipe.
weed control, especially aquatic weeds that
clog canals. Through its weed control re-
search program, the Bureau has made
rapid strides in determining the effective-
ness and economy of weed killers. Studies
of growth habits of weeds have been helpful
to developing better ways of killing them.
Recently laboratory research has utilized
radioactive isotopes to study plant physi-
under actual operating conditions. A variety
of field programs has been carried out as a
jot endeavor of project offices, design
engineers, and the Denver laboratories. This
flexible, closely cooperative effort has led to
improved structure performance and _ to
furtherance of the economies indicated in
laboratory research.
Such coordinated research is typified by
210
the development of lower-cost linings for
irrigation canals and laterals. Prefabricated
asphalt, buried asphaltic membrane, and
heavy-type compacted earth linings, among
other materials, have been successfully in-
troduced, following intensive laboratory
investigation and field study. Marked im-
provement in construction techniques and
reduction of costs of canal lining construc-
tion have resulted.
A water measurement refinement and
standardization program, under way for
several years, has added to the knowledge
of performance of measuring devices and
promises improved operations on irrigation
projects.
With the cooperation of other agencies,
the major problem of control of reservoir
evaporation is under intensive study in the
laboratory and in the field. Monomolecular
layers of some organic compounds appear to
have considerable potential usefulness in
controlling evaporation from open reser-
voirs. In evaporation pans, a monomolecu-
lar film reduced evaporation losses as much
as 64 percent—which may have far-reaching
implications especially in the water-scarce
West.
Drainage of irrigable lands has been an
important research item in the field, par-
ticularly in recent years. Improvement of
techniques of analyzing the physics and
chemistry of soils has made possible great
strides in drainage practices and appraisal
of drainage possibilities. Reclaiming of
numerous areas on which alkaline and saline
conditions prevail and adoption of measures
to prevent excessive alkalinity and salinity
in soils have followed from drainage inves-
tigations. The possibilities of electrorecla-
mation of alkaline soils is currently under
close study.
In other directions, field research has
been important in the study of electrical
methods for inhibiting corrosion of buried
and submerged metalwork, in gathering
data on the effect of ice pressure on struc-
tures, in the measurement of seepage from
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 7
canals, and in the stabilization of expansive
soils by electrochemical techniques.
Thus, research is seen to be a productive
and important factor in Reclamation’s de-
sign and construction programs. It has
given impetus to development of new engi-
neering applications, introduction of new
materials, and to amplification and strength-
ening of existing procedures. It has also con-
tributed to major economies in design and
construction.
Research is properly a cooperative enter-
prise, and so cooperation with technical
societies, other Government agencies, in-
dustry, colleges and universities, and the
public in general is an important and valua-
ble phase of our research endeavor. The
results of Bureau investigations are fully
disclosed through a variety of laboratory
reports, engineering monographs, specialist
manuals, and other writings. Hundreds of
papers summarizing the findings of our re-
search have been published in the journals
of the major technical societies both in this
country and abroad. The names of many of
our engineers appear on the rosters of these
societies, and the Bureau is well represented
in important technical committee assign-
ments and officerships.
We in the Bureau expect that research
will continue to have considerable influence
on our activities for the future. Water must
now be conveyed and distributed in .in-
creasingly larger quantities and over great
distances and difficult terrain. Certain proj-
ect developments may embrace new trans-
basin diversions of river waters. In general,
the easier-to-build projects have been con-
structed. Those in the future will inevitably
become increasingly difficult. There is no
doubt that the Bureau’s research engineers
will be faced with many challenging prob-
lems in the years ahead. Other civil engi-
neering organizations must find themselves
in a similar situation, and they also will be
looking to research for the answers. Civil
engineering research is indeed an active and
growing part of the scientific world.
Juny 1957
MCDONALD: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN HYDRAULICS PAIL
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Hydraulics
By C. C. McDonald (American Society of Civil Engineers)
Now there was no water for the congregation; and they assembled together against
Moses and Aaron. And the people contended with Moses, and said, ‘‘Would that we had
died when our brethren died before the Lord. Why have you brought the assembly of
the Lord into this wilderness, that weshould die here, both we and our cattle?” « « « Then
Moses and Aaron went from the assembly * « * and the Lord said to Moses, ‘‘Take the
rod, and assemble the congregation, you and Aaron your brother, and tell the rock before
their eyes to yield its water, so you shall give drink to the congregation and their cattle.
”
+ x x And Moses lifted up his hand and struck the rock with his rod twice; and water
came forth abundantly, and the congregation drank, and their cattle. (Numbers 20:
2-10)
Water is a necessity of life, and its availa-
bility has profoundly influenced man’s
activities throughout the centuries. The
struggle for water has indeed been an im-
portant part of man’s struggle for existence.
The earliest known civilizations developed
in areas of favorable climate and abundant
water supplies. Man could not live and
prosper in arid areas until he achieved the
necessary skills to dig wells or otherwise
provide a water supply. In his efforts to
provide for his needs and to put water to
greater service, man has developed a con-
siderable amount of technical knowledge
about water and its movement, and great
skill in its control and use. In our times,
many branches of science and engineering
participate in this knowledge and contrib-
ute to the development of water supplies
for man’s convenience and pleasure.
In a sense, the story of the development
of technical knowledge is the story of the
progress of mankind, for no less than law
and government has technology been a
mark of the civilized world. One might
claim with some validity that the level of
development of engineering works for the
use of water for domestic, irrigation, and
transportation purposes has been a measure
of the development of civilization. Whether
this will continue to be evident in the future,
with the great scientific advances that have
been made during this generation, is impos-
sible to forecast. Needs for water, however,
are very personal and immediate, and the
science dealing with its availability and con-
trol will continue to play an important role in
the welfare of mankind. The hydraulic en-
gineer has a key role in the process of water
utilization, because it 1s he who translates
scientific knowledge into practical works for
the service of man.
Among the earlest known hydraulic
works of substantial magnitude were the
irrigation and drainage systems in the val-
ley of the Nile River in Egypt, the con-
struction of which is attributed to Menes,
the semilegendary founder of the First
Dynasty (about 3200 B. C.). These works
mark the beginning of a brilliant period of
engineering activity which included erection
of the pyramids. In his ‘Civil Engineering
Through the Ages” (Trans. A.S.C.E., vol.
CT, 1958, p. 1) C. J. Merdenger states that
the significant aspect of Egyptian engineer-
ing is that here for the first time is evidence
of man building to a plan, instead of hap-
hazardly, and using mathematics to ensure
the results desired. This contribution may
be shght compared to the works of modern
civil engineering, but it is gigantic when
compared to the works of primitive man.
Archaeologists have discovered evidence of
water supply works of other early civiliza-
tions, notably the Minoan in the Aegean
which probably flourished between 2000
and 1000 B. C., although our knowledge of
their works is far from complete.
Later civilizations, the history of which is
better documented, made important con-
tributions to the science of hydraulics. The
Greek philosophers who attained eminence
during a period of several centuries begin-
ning about the sixth century B. C. devel-
oped important theoretical concepts that
were later put to practical use. For example,
212
Archimedes (287-212 B. C.), Greek philoso-
pher of Syracuse, developed the funda-
mentals of hydrostatics. Water systems
were developed for several cities during this
era. Tyre and other Phoenician cities had
elaborate dug wells and stone aqueducts.
Many Greek cities were supplied with water
from distant sources by means of aque-
ducts, and the populace was served by
beautiful spring houses, fountains, pools,
and public baths.
The construction of elaborate and exten-
sive aqueducts was brought to a peak by
the Romans during the period 300 B. C. to
A. D. 300, Rome built its first water-supply
aqueduct about 310 B. C., an underground
stone conduit 11 miles long. This was fol-
lowed 130 years later by a second, built to
divert water from the river Anio, a tribu-
tary of the Tiber, 40 miles from Rome. This
was followed by others, a total of 14. One
of them was 60 miles long, was constructed
on an appropriate gradient, and crossed
valleys on 7 miles of stone arches. Cut
stone, brick, and cement were used in their
construction. The water system of Rome, a
city of perhaps a million people, was indeed
a marvel of engineering accomplishment for
that day. Copper and lead pipes were uti-
lized to distribute water to the many public
fountains, storage tanks, and public baths,
as well as to the homes of the wealthy.
Frontinus, a water supervisor of Rome,
wrote extensively about the water system,
described the orifice flow-measuring devices,
and mapped the distribution network.
Following the fall of the Roman Empire,
nearly 1,000 years elapsed before water
systems were developed that were com-
parable to those of the Romans. By the
year 1500 progress was being made in
Western Europe in the development of
water systems and of some hydraulic ma-
chinery. Hand pumps were used to some
extent, and water wheels were becoming
commonplace. Arab cities of the East and
a few cities in Holland and in Germany by
this time were using windmills for pumping
water. In 1582 Peter Maurice installed on
London Bridge a pump driven by water
wheels to lift water from the Thames River
to the wooden pipe that carried water
through the streets of London. Many Euro-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 7 J}
pean cities followed with similar systems.
In 1619 a lead-lined wooden aqueduct was
built to supplement the water supply for
London, and a few years later an aqueduct
was constructed to improve the water sup-
ply of Paris. A small aqueduct was built in
the United States in 1642 to bring water to
Boston from nearby springs.
Modern water systems during the past |
100 to 150 years have far surpassed those of
Rome during the peak of the Roman Em-
pire. The extensive water supply system for |
New York City was begun in 1842 with the
completion of the first Croton aqueduct, |
followed 50 years later by the second. In |
1914 New York completed its extensive |
Catskill aqueduct, and its fourth, the great |
Delaware River Aqueduct (completely un- |
derground), is now being completed and —
extended. Such progress has been possible |
because of technological developments in |
many fields of endeavor, but the greatest
credit is due the hydraulic engineer, both |
ancient and modern.
Thus, in the development of water sup- |
plies for cities, the hydraulic engineer, by |
whatever name he may have been known
in his day, has made important contribu- |
tions. Hydraulics is involved in the design |
of dams and storage reservoirs, outlet |
works, spillways, conduits, distribution sys-
tems, and hydraulic machinery. The hy-
draulic engineer has not been alone in the |
development of water distribution systems. !
He has been a partner with engineers of
other skills in the design of all features of
these systems. Nor, indeed, has the con-
tribution of the hydraulic engineer been
limited to water-supply problems.
The origin of the science of hydraulics is
of great antiquity, a science that has devel-
oped through the accumulated experience
and thought of several thousands of years.
The elaborate water systems of the Romans
showed they possessed some knowledge of
the properties of water when at rest and
when in motion in pipes and open channels,
but we have no record that this knowledge
was based on _ well-defined quantitative
laws. A treatise by Stevinus about 1585
appears to follow that of Archimedes. In
this treatise the method of obtaining the
pressure in a liquid on the sides and base of
JuLy 1957 MCDONALD: THE CIVIL
a vessel was first demonstrated. Galileo, in
1612, discussed the hydrostatic principles
involved in the flotation of bodies in water.
Shortly afterward Torricelli made impor-
tant investigations of the behavior of a
vertical jet issuing from an orifice. Since
that time numerous investigators have been
deducing, by experimental observation and
theoretical reasoning, the laws governing
various manners of motion of liquids and
applying them to the development of the
science of hydraulics—Mariotte, Bernoulli,
D’Alembert, Poiseuille, and Darcey in
France; Rankine, Froude, Osborne, and
Reynolds in England; Eytelwein, Weisback,
and Kutter in Germany; Venturi in Italy;
Francis, Hamilton Smith, Hazen, and a
host of less famous others in America.
The special problems involved in deter-
mining the availability and occurrence of
water have given rise to the closely allied
science of hydrology, which is concerned
with the laws related to the movement of
water through the cycle from atmosphere,
to precipitation upon the earth, to move-
ment over or through the earth’s surface,
until it returns to the atmosphere through
transpiration by vegetation or evaporation
from land or water surfaces. The hydraulic
engineer is concerned with only a portion of
the hydrologic cycle, but his skills and
knowledge are required in the field of hy-
drology, as are those of the meteorologist,
the geologist, the climatologist, and others.
The hydraulic engineer is engaged, for in-
stance, in the measurement of streamflow,
the determination of the movement of
ground water through the soils and rocks,
and in the transport of sediment by flowing
water. The development of water supplies
from wells or surface streams and the man-
agement of water projects therefore involve
the hydraulic engineer to an important
degree.
The development of irrigation has pro-
gressed during the past half century to an
extent never before approached. One-fourth
of the world’s population not only lives on
irrigated land but is almost exclusively fed
and clothed by the products of the land.
Man’s existence in great numbers in arid
lands, such as our own arid West, requires
the practice of irrigation. In this country
ENGINEER IN HYDRAULICS
213
irrigation has been accomplished princi-
pally by diverting water from streams and
rivers through canals and ditches to the
land, although great strides have been made
in the development of supplemental irriga-
tion by sprinkling. The design of efficient
and economical irrigation systems demands
combined attention of highly skilled and
experienced specialists, including the hy-
draulic engineer, the agronomist, the hy-
drologist, and others. Appreciation of the
needs for careful design has come about
through early experience with unsuccessful
projects that resulted in financial ruin and
human suffermg. The practice of irrigation
has brought about the specialized field of
irrigation engineering, which combines the
elements of the sciences specifically related
to the problems of irrigation.
Floods have played an important role in
the history of the human race. Because of
the attractiveness of alluvial flood plains
for agriculture and the proximity of the life-
giving water of the rivers, man has often
preferred to live in the river valleys. The
convenience of water transportation has
enhanced the attractiveness of river banks
as places of abode. Occasionally the river
which formed the rich flood plains and sup-
plies its moisture returns to claim its own,
with resulting destruction of life and prop-
erty. In the case of the Yellow River, often
called ‘“‘China’s Sorrow,’’ occupants of the
flood plain are periodically subjected to
floods that bring death to thousands and
loss of property and misery to millions.
In the United States and in other highly
developed countries, great effort has been
expended to reduce the effects of flooding.
In this work, as in all problems involving
moving water, the hydraulic engineer has
made a contribution to human welfare.
Efforts to control Mississippi River floods
during the past 100 years have brought
about extensive systems of levees, flood-
ways, and upstream storage reservoirs that
enable some 2,500,000 people to live in
comparative security in the river valley.
As an illustration of the magnitude of and
current trends in the construction of flood
control works in the United States, the
Federal Government during the 80 years
prior to 1936 spent about $400,000,000,
214 JOURNAL OF
whereas during the 16 years between 1956
and 1952, appropriations directly related to
flood control totaled about $3,500,000,000.
The hydraulic engineer has participated
in many other ways toward the develop-
ment of the physical aspects of our modern
civilization, but it is beyond the scope of
this discussion to elaborate further. The
hydraulic turbines that drive the generators
in the giant hydroelectric plants; the hy-
draulic pumps and long pipelines that trans-
port oil and gasoline for hundreds of miles;
the navigation canals, locks, and hydraulic
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 7
dredges that facilitate water transportation,
the sewer systems, water treatment plants,
and storm drains of modern cities—all have
required the use of hydraulics in their de-
sign.
The role of the civil engineer in hydraulics
is therefore an important one, with many
ramifications and interrelations with other
engineering and scientific skills. Hydraulic
problems have given rise to the recognized
engineering specialty of hydraulic engineer-
ing. The hydraulic engineer is indeed a
product of our civilization and at the same
time a contributor to its development.
SSS
INTERSTELLAR MATTER
The vast distances between the stars—light
from the star closest to the sun takes more than
four years to reach the earth—are not entirely
empty. In interstellar space there are enormous
invisible clouds composed of gases and ‘‘grains,”’
whose nature is completely unknown, out of
which eventually new stars are born. Locating
and defining these clouds and determining what
they are made of remain some of the most pressing
problems of modern astronomy, says Dr. Lyman
Spitzer, Jr., of Princeton University, in a report
in ‘New Horizons in Astronomy,’ recently
published by the Smithsonian Institution, sup-
ported in part by the National Science Founda-
tion.
At best, it is pomted out, interstellar matter is
very finely dispersed. Space presumably is
emptier than the finest vacuum ever achieved on
earth. Even so, the total amount of matter in
interstellar space is enormous, and these in-
visible clouds are the mothers of stars and star
systems.
Two or three new techniques now promise for
the first time to yield some information on the
nature and distribution of this ‘‘mother stuff”
of creation. Presumably it contains all the
known elements. One method is the determi-
nation of minute color differences between stars,
known to be of the same intrinsic type and
luminosity, owing to the amount of matter
through which the light passes. This will indicate
directions in which the interstellar material is
most abundant.
Another possibility, Dr. Spitzer’s report points
out, is determination of the nature of interstellar
material by measuring much fainter differences in
the spectra of light emitted by stars than has been
possible in the past. Atoms of the various ele-
ments through which light passes absorb certain
wave lengths. This is true for atoms of calcium,
iron, and titanium, believed to be quite notable
constituents of the clouds.
Probably the most prominent element of all is
hydrogen. Under certain conditions, present in
interstellar space, this gas emits specific radio
waves. By means of the now rapidly developing
science of radio astronomy it should be possible to
determine the density of hydrogen in various
parts of the heavens.
The nature of the “grains,” out of which the
stars are eventually formed, still defines the
ingenuity of astronomers.
“We know,” says Dr. Spitzer, ‘approximately
the conditions under which atoms in interstellar
space gather together to form solid particles.
However, the nature of these particles is com-
pletely unknown. The detailed structure of the
grains, the forces holding them together, and, in
fact, all except the grossest properties of these
small solid particles are completely uncertain.
“The interactions of grains with atoms, including
the rate at which the grains grow and are de-
stroyed and the various selective ways in which
they interact with different types of elements,
are of particular interest astronomically.”’
The central problem, Dr. Spitzer points out, is
that of the evolution of these grain clouds. From
interstellar matter, perhaps equally dispersed, the
vast interstar clouds form in periods of a billion
years or more. Then, through unknown processes,
the extremely tenuous clouds themselves in some
way must condense to form the enormously hot,
solid bodies of stars, sometimes with families of
planets around them.
Something may be learned, he points out,
about the “weather” of space—the origin of the
turbulent movements in the gas clouds which
presumably are necessary for condensation, the
effects of radiation which they both emit and
absorb, and the effects of cosmic rays passing
through them.
,
JuLy 1957 BYRNS:
THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN IRRIGATION
bo
—
Or
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Irrigation
By F. E. Byrns (Bureau of Reclamation)
Irrigation, defined in the simplest terms
as ‘the controlled application of water to
arable lands to supply crop requirements
not satisfied by rainfall,’ presents a major
challenge to the civil engineering profession.
This has been true for many centuries, al-
though in the complexity of today’s living,
irrigation, not only in the United States but
throughout all the world, no longer stands
alone but is one of several major considera-
tions which must be taken into account in
multiple-purpose planning in the field of
water resource conservation.
Thousands of years ago the development of
civilization was begun almost simultane-
ously in several areas of the Near and Mid-
dle East. And the history of irrigation
began with the history of man. In fact,
some authorities claim that irrigation con-
stituted the basis for civilization.
The climate in that part of the world was
probably more humid then than now, but
it was still too arid for the production of
crops without supplemental water. As a
result, civilization first developed in the
valleys of the great rivers—the Nile, in
Egypt; the Tigris and Euphrates, in what
is now Iraq; and the mighty Indus and its
tributaries, in West Pakistan.
Evidence exists that Nile River water
was conveyed to adjoining arable lands as
early as 5000 B. C., and prehistoric refer-
ences indicate that King Menes, of the Ist
Egyptian Dynasty, built a masonry dam
across the Nile, near Memphis to divert
water for irrigation, more than 3,000 years
before the time of Christ.
Archeological excavations have revealed
that irrigation was well developed in the
Tigris and Euphrates Valleys in Babylon,
and along the Indus River, during the same
period. Hammurabi, a great king who con-
solidated the first Babylonian Empire,
about 2100 B. C., to include the whole of
Mesopotamia, is famous for a code of laws
compiled during his reign and bearing his
name. Included in the Code of Hammurabi
are provisions dealing with the operation
and maintenance of irrigation works, one of
which, for example, reads: “If anyone opens
his irrigation ditches to let in water, is care-
less and floods the field of his neighbor, he
shall measure out grain to the latter in pro-
portion to the yield of the neighboring
field.”
Although irrigation practices during those
ancient eras were mostly of a primitive na-
ture, explorations and records show that
considerable skill and ingenuity were exer-
cised in constructing irrigation works. The
dam constructed across the Nile during the
reign of Menes is an example.
A great number of ancient irrigation de-
velopments were to a certain extent multi-
purpose in character, such as the Shahpour
barrage, built probably in the third century
A. D., across the Jkaroun, in Iran, where
the 30-foot drop was used to operate water
wheels to provide power for grinding meal,
and another substantial masonry barrage
built at Esfhan, Ivan, in the sixteenth cen-
tury A. D., which in addition to serving as
a diversion structure also supported a road-
way which was an important link in the
overland communication system of the
country. Many such structures are still in
use in the Near East today.
At the time of the Spanish conquests in
the western hemisphere, extensive and well-
built irrigation systems existed, antedating
the earliest traditions of the peoples using
them. Traces of such works are found not
only in South and Central America, but also
in southern Arizona, New Mexico, and Cali-
fornia.
The modern era of irrigation in the United
States is usually dated from the settlement
of the Mormons near Salt Lake City in
1847. During the balance of the nineteenth
century, many irrigation projects were de-
veloped throughout the West, principally as
private or cooperative enterprises, organ-
ized under State laws. Most of the projects
were relatively small but some included
areas of many thousands of acres. Many of
the smaller projects were planned and built
by the water users, without engineering as-
sistance. Civil engineers in private practice
216 JOURNAL OF
and supervised construction of
many of the larger projects. All, however,
were the simpler, easier to design and con-
struct, single-purpose irrigation projects.
After the passage of the Reclamation Act
in 1902, the United States Bureau of Rec-
lamation began developing new projects of
considerable size and increasing complexity.
For many years, the Bureau’s organization
was almost exclusively an organization of
civil engineers, whose functions included all
phases of investigations and surveys, plan-
ning, designing structures and other fea-
tures, construction, and operation and
maintenance of extensive irrigation works.
These activities encompass practically all
branches or divisions of civil engineering,
including topographical and geodetic sur-
veying, geology, hydrology, hydraulics, and
the design and construction of storage and
diversion dams, with spillways and outlet
works, scouring sluices, fish ladders, and
logways, power plants, pumping plants,
tunnels, flumes, and siphons, canals and
laterals, pipelines, canal structures, such as
headgates, turnouts, spillways, checks,
drops, and chutes, water measurement
weirs or boxes, roads, bridges, housing, 1n-
cluding water supply and sewage disposal
systems, and many other structures and
features, of both major and minor impor-
tance. On some lands, drainage systems
must be provided to prevent or relieve
waterlogged conditions.
With the exhaustion of the ‘‘easy”’ project
possibilities which were based upon the
gravity distribution of natural streamflows
or diversions from single-purpose storage,
our engineers advanced to the multiple-
purpose project involving storage and dis-
tribution of irrigation water through grav-
ity and pumping systems, coupled with the
development of hydroelectric power, flood
control, provision of municipal water sup-
plies, assistance to navigation, and other
supplemental benefits to recreation and to
fish and wildlife conservation.
To handle these multiple-purpose devel-
opments, other engineering professions, par-
ticularly mechanical and electrical, have be-
come participants in the broad field of
reclamation.
The civil engineers of the United States
Bureau of Reclamation have conceived and
planned
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VoL. 47, NO. 7
carried to fruition projects which were be-
yond imagination only a few decades ago.
Highlights of their activities include Hoover
Dam of the Boulder Canyon Project, the
highest dam in the world, which created a
reservoir of 31-million acre-feet capacity,
the world’s largest artificial body of water;
Grand Coulee Dam, the world’s mightiest
concrete structure, containing more than
10 million cubic yards of conerete, and with
a spillway twice as high as Niagara; and
the Alva B. Adams Tunnel, punched
through the Continental Divide to divert
water from the Pacific Ocean watershed to
the Atlantic Ocean watershed.
In October 1955 a special committee of
eminent members of the American Society
of Civil Engineers, after three years of de-
liberations, and consideration of more than
200 modern achievements of civil engineer-
ing, with the concurrence of the Society’s
Board of Direction, designated the “Seven
Modern Civil Engineering Wonders of the
United States.’”’ Criteria set by the special
committee included service to the well-be-
ing of people and communities, pioneering
effort in design and construction, unique-
ness, beauty, size, and, in some instances,
extent to which a project has been copied
successfully.
A significant feature of this selection is
that two of the seven ‘‘wonders” were the
Hoover Dam in Arizona-Nevada, and the
Grand Coulee Dam and Columbia River
Basin Project, Washington. A third of the
seven wonders was the Colorado River
Aqueduct, a related water-resource devel-
opment project designed and constructed
by the same engineering organization.
We have progressed a long way from the
simple diversion of natural streamflow onto
adjoining acres of arable land. But the chal-
lenge of the past is also a challenge of the
future. We now realize that the ultimate
objective of any water development scheme
is the permanent improvement of social and
economic conditions in a particular area.
Major water development schemes should
be based on comprehensive general plans
for the final, optimum utilization of all
water and land resources within the river
basins under consideration.
And this challenge of the future is not
confined to any one country—it is world
‘
Jury 1957
wide. Every night, one-half of the world’s
people go to bed hungry—every morning
there are 80,000 new mouths to feed, the
excess of births over deaths during the pre-
ceeding 24 hours. And while these mouths
ery out for food, there still remain millions
of acres of fertile land that are now sterile
for lack of fresh water, which is wasting un-
used to the sea, that could help to feed a
hungry world.
To meet the demands of the world’s
steadily increasing population for more and
more food for existence alone, and then for
the production of more hydroelectric power,
BYRNS: THE CIVIL ENGINEER
IN IRRIGATION PANTS
and for other developments to provide a
better standard of living throughout the
world, we will eventually need to put every
last drop of water to work, through concep-
tion, planning, design, construction, and
finally operation and maintenance of ever
larger and more complicated irrigation and
multiple-purpose projects.
To meet this challenge, we will need to
draw upon nearly all branches of science.
But in the future, as in the past, the leading
role must be assumed by the civil engineer-
ing profession.
SS
RADIO STARS
‘
The hundreds of invisible ‘radio stars’”—
points in the sky from which our radio telescopes
receive signals but where our optical telescopes
usually can reveal nothing—in many cases are
probably enormous, highly turbulent masses of
gas whose atoms have been highly ionized, or
stripped of their outer electrons. This is the con-
clusion of Drs. B. F. Burke and Merle A. Tuve,
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, based
on study of the one known feature possessed in
common by the handful of radio sources which are
also visible to the optical telescope. The report
has recently been published in a symposium on
“New Horizons in Astronomy” by the Smith-
sonian Institution.
It is highly probable, however, that various
conditions may result in producing a “radio
star.” It appears certain that the necessary
highly turbulent gas can be produced in a variety
of ways. In our own galaxy, cataclysms such as
the birth of a supernova (an explosion in which a
star attains millions of times its ordinary bright-
ness for a brief time and then fades to near in-
visibility) are known means of producing a
turbulent medium capable of strong radio
emission. Many discrete radio sources may
possibly be remnants of supernovae. Many of
them may also represent an entirely new class of
objects. One of the best known of the visible radio
sources is the Crab Nebula, now known to be the
remnant of the historically recorded appearance
of a supernova.
Burke and Tuve say that there are also radio
signals from objects outside the Milky Way
galaxy, millions of light years distant. Some of
these signals are as strong as those known to
origmate within our own galaxy. They must
require an origin even more violent than that of a
supernova, the report says. In one case, the
source in Cygnus, they are known to result from
the collision, still in progress, of two galaxies,
ageregations of hundreds of billions of stars em-
bedded in gas and dust. It is possible that some
other extragalactic radio sources are due to the
same cause but, the Carnegie astronomers say,
there are some galaxies from which signals are
received which apparently do not fit this picture.
As there are at least two different populations
of radio sources, they say, it is important to dis-
tinguish between them and to establish, if
possible, a distance scale. The only reliable
method at present seems to be the identification
of the radio source with some visible object, but
as time goes on this must prove increasingly
difficult. Even now it is known that if a pair of
galaxies were colliding as violently as those in
the Cygnus source (the one positively identified),
but were ten times farther away from the earth,
we would have little hope of observing it visually
in our telescopes.
Similarly, many galactic objects, conspicuous
in the radio region, are undoubtedly so obscured
by dust that optical observation will be difficult.
A distance scale for radio sources would certainly
bring to light interesting new problems. Distribu-
tion in space of extragalactic radio sources may
provide a clue to important cosmological prob-
lems, since it is probable that many observable
sources are situated at great distances, approach-
ing the limits of the visible universe.
There now is a wide discrepancy, they point
out, in the opinions astronomers hold about the
distribution of radio stars. This difference is due
largely to different methods of observation. A
survey carried out at Cambridge University in
England, for instance, indicates the existence of a
very great number of faint sources, whose number
apparently increases with distance. A survey by
Australian observers, on the other hand, indicates
that radio sources are about equally distributed
in every direction throughout space.
218
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 7
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Soil Mechanics
By Edward S. Barber (University of Maryland)
Soil mechanics, which encompasses the
physics, chemistry, and even biology of ag-
eregations of particles as applied to civil
engineering, is beginning to be called soil
engineering. The core of soil mechanics is a
study of the strength and volume change of
soil under various water conditions applied
to the design and construction of airports,
dams, tunnels, highways, and foundations
for bridges and buildings. It also includes
studies of soil shrinkage caused by trees,
the drainage of water by electric currents,
and the chemical stabilization of invasion
beaches.
EXPLORATION
Since civil-engineering structures rest on
or in the earth, the natural state of soil is
of prime importance to the soil engineer.
Even if the soil is to be disturbed for an
embankment, the method of excavation and
selection of materials must be planned. The
basic method of exploration is by sampling
from holes drilled or dug in the ground. It
is necessary to locate such holes economi-
cally and to project the data obtained from
sampling to indicate the conditions between
the holes. Geologic information is used for
this purpose. Particularly in the field of ex-
ploration, there is a mutual interest between
geologists and soil engineers. Near Wash-
ington it is often possible to estimate the
depth to firm red clay from geologic maps,
and when this layer is found in borings as-
surance is given that there are no soft river
deposits below.
The soil engineer also employs geophysi-
cal methods of exploration: particularly
seismic, in which vibragraphs measure the
time of refraction of impulses from a charge
of dynamite; and resistivity, in which the
subsurface conditions are inferred from
characteristics of an electric field applied
at the surface of the ground. Seismic meth-
ods were used to outline rock foundations
at the Carderock Model Testing Basin. Re-
sistivity was used to outline the buried silt
between runways at the Washington Na-
tional Airport, and has been widely used to
locate gravel for construction.
Results of agricultural soil surveys are
also used to correlate data on an areal basis,
particularly for highway location and pre-
liminary design. Aerial photographs, which
are now generally available, can similarly
be used; for instance, sand and gravel are
indicated by lack of surface drainage. In
military operations, air photos may be the
only source of soil information to determine
trafficability of inaccessible terrain. Several
organizations are working on the develop-
ment of engineering soil maps based on data
from all these sources. It is not always pos-
sible to locate roads where the best condi-
tions exist. Thus it is said that, due to right-
of-way costs, new road locations in New York
are evident on a geologic map—they will
follow the marshy ground and river flood
plains.
Old maps are often valuable in showing
previous conditions which may have been
obliterated by natural or artificial filling.
This is particularly true around Washing-
ton where a large part of the park areas
were reclaimed from the river. However,
higher areas are also involved. For instance,
buried marshy deposits at the proposed site
of the General Accounting Office were found
by careful exploration although imadequate
preliminary borings were confined to the
upper layer of gravelly fill. A map, showing
even the intermittent streams between
Florida Avenue and the District Line,
which was prepared by the Coast and Geo-
detic Survey 70 years ago, is still in print.
Others are available at the Library of Con-
eress. However, it is always necessary to be
cautious in the use of these old maps—in
one case, where present and old contours
agreed, borings showed that the original
clay had been removed (for brickmaking)
and replaced with rubbish fill.
While field loading tests are sometimes
made and the observation of completed
structures 1s necessary for the corroboration
of designs, questionable soils are evaluated
JuLy 1957 BARBER:
by laboratory tests made on undisturbed
samples. It is not possible to obtain com-
pletely undisturbed samples since the
stresses are changed by any method of
reaching the point of sampling. However,
much effort and care are employed to ob-
tain samples in their natural condition,
since their properties reflect the history of
formation and cannot be artificially repro-
duced. Leached marine deposits are often
extremely sensitive to disturbance.
The basic structural tests determine the
permeability, volume change with load or
moisture variation, and the shearing
strength corresponding to various depths
and opportunites for drainage.
FOUNDATIONS
The shear test is used to determine the
size and depth of footings required to carry
a given load, as for a building or bridge.
For bridges over water the depth of footing
is also controlled by possible scouring away
of material during flood flows. Although in-
spections after flood always showed mud
over the footings of the Pennsylvania Rail-
road Bridge crossing the Anacostia River, a
pier was lost during a flood which removed
the mud and took gravel from under the
footings. Since the mud was replaced by
the subsiding floodflow, the necessity of
measuring scour during a flood was demon-
strated. Piles of wood, steel or concrete may
be driven to carry the load to greater depths.
Much study is given to their bearing capac-
ity since the more apparent dynamic resist-
ance to driving may be quite different from
the resistance to static load.
The weight of fill on soft approaches to
bridges tends to push the abutments to-
gether. It was necessary to cut one foot off
of the bascule span of the Eleventh Street
Bridge over the Anacostia River before soil
engineers were available to warn against the
probability of such movement.
Approach fills over soft ground also cause
abutments to settle due to squeezing the
water from the subsoil. Such a condition
made necessary the underpinning of the
north abutment of the new Fourteenth
Street Highway Bridge over the Potomac
River. There was no soil engineer on the
job to warn of this because it was not
THE CIVIL ENGINEER
IN SOIL MECHANICS 219
recognized that such a problem existed.
Settlement of a nearby structure was not
recognized because it was used for a bench
mark and bench marks are not supposed to
settle. On the basis of consolidation theory
and volume change tests, the future settle-
ment of the abutment could have been
predicted. The pattern is similar tothe contin-
uing settlement of the Washington Monu-
ment caused by densification of a deep silt
layer. Similar predictions were used to ad-
just new foundations to the old shell in
reconstructing the White House.
The soil engineer has a problem of revis-
ing sometimes faulty older methods, with-
out relying too much on untried methods
which may be impractical even though
theoretically correct.
Injection of chemicals has been required
to stop settlement of foundations on sand
subject to vibration. Vibrating compactors
have been developed to densify such sands,
including one that will sink itself as much
as 100 feet into loose sand and compact the
same as it is withdrawn.
WALLS AND TUNNELS
An old theory of earth pressures was
widely used to calculate pressures on walls
because it gave answers without having to
consider the type or rigidity of support. Soil
mechanics now recognizes the importance
of the support and thereby explains the dif-
ferent pressures on retaining walls, trench
sheetings, culverts and tunnels. Owing to
stratification and jointing, rock formations
are often an aggregation of large pieces and
its properties can be studied by an exten-
sion of soil mechanics. Soil engineers were
employed to evaluate the rock to be pene-
trated by a new Washington Aqueduct as
well as predicting the lateral and uplift
pressures on various underpasses. The soft
sediments in the buried Susquehanna River
channel were carefully tested to evaluate
the possibilities of a tunnel as an alternate
to the Chesapeake Bay Bridge.
SLOPES AND DRAINAGE
While landslides are particularly a prob-
lem in mountainous areas, they can be a
problem wherever too steep a cut is made in
220
the soil. Failures of cut slopes are usually
caused by water. A typical condition around
Washington is sliding in clay overlaid by
gravel which supplhes the water. Such slopes
ean be stabilized by drilling almost hori-
zoutal holes from the face to intercept the
water; a hydrauger has been developed for
this purpose. Stability of a housing develop-
ment in Anacostia was improved by drain-
age of groundwater. A critical slope on the
Ohio Turnpike was drained at considerable
cost to give even a minimum assurance of
future stability.
Vertical sand drains are used in soft
foundations to aid the escape of water
squeezed from the soil under fill construc-
tion. Many miles of such drains made pos-
sible the construction of the New Jersey
Turnpike through the Jersey Meadows
which could not previously carry a man
without displacement. To control the rate
of loading the foundation, displacement and
internal water pressures are measured con-
tinuously. Thin seams of undrained mate-
rial can cause instability. After a failure at
Fort Peek Dam, caused by layers of clay
missed in samples from borings, a camera
was developed to take a continuous picture
of the side of bore holes.
Drains are also used under dams for a
different purpose. Uncontrolled seepage has
caused many failures by progressive erosion
or piping from a downstream outlet. By
constructing drains under the downstream
slope, seepage is carried safely away while
the soil is held in place by filters of properly
graded sand. This principle of sand filters
has been applied to subsoil drains for high-
ways and airports to prevent failure of the
drains from infiltration of soil into the coarse
stone backfill previously used. (The archi-
tectural profession has not generally applied
this principle.) A layer of sand under mac-
adam bases for pavement has prevented
failure caused by upward intrusion of soil
softened by water infiltration. More re-
cently granular bases are being placed
under concrete pavements to prevent trucks
from pumping the subgrade soil up through
the joints, cracks, and from beneath the
pavement edges.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 7
HIGHWAYS AND AIRPORTS
Not many years ago, new fills were con-
sidered unsafe for bearing and were left to
cure for several years. While a neighboring
city waited ten years in vain for a fill of
river silt to become stable, the runways of
the Washington National Airport were
placed on selected sand and gravel pumped
from the Potomac River.
By placing soil in layers, adjusting the
moisture to the optimum and thoroughly
compacting with the proper roller, fills can
be made better than most natural soil and
can be used immediately. New fills have
been used to build dams over 300 feet high,
as bases for smooth super-highways, and to
support building floors and even entire
housing developments. The extension of the
Navy Building in Arlington is on such a
fill. While fills can now be made satisfac-
torily, this does not make uncontrolled fills
satisfactory, as attested by the cracking in
ground floors of many local buildings. The
practice of building codes to assign an
arbitrary low bearing capacity to fills is
poor—a fill may be worthless or it may
provide excellent support. Soil Mechanics
affords a means for its evaluation.
While compaction is basic to stabilization
of all granular materials, the upper layers of
pavements require closely controlled grada-
tion or special stabilization treatment.
Lacking sufficient coarse material, cement
and soil may be mixed to make a good base
course (despite the fact that concrete speci-
fications require that aggregate be free from
soil). Stiff bituminous materials may also
be used to stabilize certain natural sands.
In searching for a cheap method of stabiliz-
ing soils for low cost road surfaces, many
methods and materials have been tried—
such as lime and molasses in India, burn-
ing in Austraha, electric fusion in Russia,
paper manufacturing wastes in the North-
west, pine rosins in the Southeast, lime in
Texas, and lime and fly ash in the Eastern
United States. The Armed Forces, interested
in expediency rather than cost, are experi-
menting with all these, plus many others,
including plastics. Some of the newer meth-
ods are being used to improve the ancient
processes of making building walls of earth.
JuLy 1957
Because of the great activity of clay and
the high strength available when moisture
is limited, it may be possible for small
amounts of admixture to have a remarkable
effect on a clay soil. To study the how and
why, considerable basic research is being
done on clay minerals by means of x-ray
analysis, differential thermal analysis, de-
termination of surface area and base ex-
change investigations. Electron microscopy
shows the clay minerals to be erystalline
flakes, tubes or lathes contrasted to other
soil components, such as: amorphous iron
oxides, silica, lime or organic matter; frag-
mented shells or coral; porous pumice or
diatoms; flaky mica; and sand or gravel in
various stages of rounding.
The failure of many earth roads immedi-
ately after improvement with a bitumious
wearing surface led to specifications requir-
ing less clay in base courses than in surface
courses. Much study is being given to the
accumulation of water under pavements. In
arid regions the only green grass is often
alongside the pavement.
Drainage is essential to prevent weaken-
ing by the quick-sand effect when water is
forced upward, either from underground
pressure or the rapid application of surface
loads. In some cases, water is forced up
through the pavement as solar heat reaches
through the pavement and expands en-
trapped air. In other cases, discharge from
subdrains is found to be controlled by tem-
perature so that they may drain in dry
weather and fail to discharge after a rain.
FROST
In the Northern States, pavement foun-
dations are designed against frost effects.
During freezing, water tends to accumulate
in lenses of ice, causing heaves; when this
ice thaws in the spring, the load carrying
capacity of the pavement is greatly re-
duced. Where this is an annual occurrence,
soil engineers have learned to take care of
it by selection of materials and drainage.
States where deep frost is only occasional,
sometimes suffer most damage due to lack
of preparedness.
In the far North, where the ground is
permanently frozen, special construction is
required to prevent melting of permafrost
BARBER: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN SOIL MECHANICS 221
due to removing the natural insulation, or
from heat supplied by structures.
Cold storage rooms next to the ground
can cause frost heave; heating cables placed
in the ground may be used instead of an
excessive thickness of insulation.
WETTING AND DRYING
When clays dry, they shrink, and when
rewetted, they rebound or swell. Thus foun-
dations on clay must be placed several feet
below the ground surface. When there is an
intense dry season, this depth may be as
much as 10 feet. A church floor built on dry
clay in Texas was lifted 12 inches as the
clay absorbed water during the rainy sea-
son. Many shallow footings around Wash-
ington have been subject to such movement.
When drying is accelerated by growing
trees, the solution may be simply to remove
the trees. Basement heating plants also
cause drying. It has been found necessary
to separate brick kilns from clay subsoil. In
testing the durability of stabilized soils, al-
ternate wetting and drying is often more
destructive than freezing and thawing.
CLOSING
The soil engineer uses information from
many nonengineering fields: particularly
capillary moisture data from agricultural
soil physics, clay technology from ceramics,
sand stability from foundry practice, sedi-
mentary petrography and groundwater data
from geology. Conversely, data from soil
engineering occasionally serves others, such
as helping sedimentologists estimate the
rate of consolidation of silt in Lake Mead or
indicating the required size for grinding
commercial fertilizer components to pre-
vent segregation. Soil engineer ng is begin-
ning to be applied to the mobility of con-
struction and transportation equipment. It
has much in common with the new science
of snow and ice mechanics and is closely re-
lated to the fields of soil conservation and
the maintenance of shores and harbors.
Soil engineering as an applied science is
relatively young, and is still developing,
particularly in the realm of field observa-
tion. While much theory is available, soil
engineering is the art of applying science to
actual soil situations.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 7
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Highways
James O. Granum (Automotive Safety Foundation)
The greatest engineering program in his-
tory—new construction of 40,000 miles of
modern freeways throughout the United
States—is bringing the civil engineer to new
peaks of prominence in civilization. More
than ever before, civil engineers trained in
highway research, planning, construction
and operation have great responsibilities to
meet in shaping the face of the nation.
New Federal legislation calls for a 13-
year building program on the National Sys-
tem of Interstate and Defense Highways
costing $27 billion. The legislation also is
sparking expanded state and local highway
construction. All together, it is estimated
that some $9 billion annually for many
years, will be spent on the nation’s high-
ways, roads and streets. Furthermore, this
precedent encourages a world-wide step-up
in highway development.
Today the civil engineer specializing in
highways has the most challenging oppor-
tunities of the entire profession. Motor
vehicle transportation in the Unites States
has doubled in the past decade; is expected
to double again by 1975. Economic growth
of the nation and, perhaps, even peace in
the world, depends on motor vehicles and
the highways which serve them. New pat-
terns of living, new forms of industrial and
business operations, new development of
agriculture and natural resources—all are
made possible by flexible, speedy, efficient,
individualized motor transport.
But this surging growth of vehicle use has
multiplied new and old problems on a gran-
diose scale. Importantly among these prob-
lems are city congestion and suburban
erowth. One of the gravest is that each year
some 40,000 deaths and more than 1,350,000
Injuries occur on the nation’s 3,300,000
miles of roads and streets. Cost of these
accidents is estimated at $4.5 billion an-
nually. Decisions and actions by highway
engineers directly affect the lives and wel-
fare of all citizens.
New concepts of highway planning and
design are being developed by civil engi-
neers everywhere. No longer is the highway
engineer content with a transit or a slump
cone. Now his tools include aerial photog-
raphy, electronic computers, complex labo-
ratory and field research methods and
testing devices, new statistical procedures,
visual aids and a host of other modern
techniques.
Those tools help to get the facts about
how highways are used—when and where
people and goods are going and how; num-
bers, types, weights and speeds of vehicles
and costs and benefits of various highway
locations and designs. Geologic and _ soils
studies, materials research and new meth-
ods of construction and maintenance pro-
duce better roads for the users.
RESEARCH
Basic research is more vital to highway
development than ever before. As in all
branches of engineering and science, high-
way location, design, construction and main-
tenance depend on research. Experience and
judgment are major elements—but these
are only names for accumulated observation
of fact from which certain conclusions may
be drawn, i.e—research, albeit somewhat
less formalized than usually thought of in
that connection.
Highway engineers, increasingly aided by
disciplines of mathematics, physics, eco-
nomics, sociology, and others, rely more and
more on detailed studies about the demand
for highway service. It seems axiomatic that
the purposes for which highways are built
and maintained should dictate their location
and character. Too often in the past, the
engineer’s facts, knowledge and judgment
were insufficient to combat ill-advised politi-
cal decisions, or were inadequate to lead to
the soundest conclusions—especially in the
face of continual demands to do more with
less.
Now, 50 years of experience with motor
vehicles give background and trends which
can be projected with reasonable certaimty
to afford a basis for location and design.
|
|
|
|
|
Juny 1957
Highway engineers have pioneered the re-
search jobs required. Among them are:
Trafic volume—location and time
Trafic characteristics—speed, size, driver be-
havior
Highway capacity—ability to carry traffic
Origin and destination—travel desires
Safety—causes and cures of highway accidents
Urban planning—inter-relations affecting
transportation
Economic analysis—cost vs. benefits
Research activities continue to be accel-
erated in a wide variety of investigations of
soils, materials and methods of construction,
design of structures, pavements, grading
and drainage, maintenance, traffic opera-
tions, and administration.
Research is carried out by universities and
colleges, public highway building agencies,
private organizations, material and equip-
ment suppliers, and builders. The Highway
Research Board, a division of the National
Research Council of the National Academy
of Sciences, helps to initiate and coordinate
all such research on a national basis.
PLANNING AND DESIGN
The planning and design of highways,
roads, and streets gives widespread oppor-
tunities to the civil engineer to achieve the
ultimate goal of his training—the fine bal-
ance needed to meet the demands for service
at the lowest annual cost.
Here the engineer’s knowledge of highway
maintenance and construction problems and
costs must be related to driver behavior,
operational characteristics of his designs
and the economic and social benefits of his
product. The tremendous complexities of
modern transportation, and the infinite vari-
ety of human reactions toward development
and use of highways, place great responsi-
bilities on the planning and design engineer.
One example demonstrates the scope of his
problem.
The Congress Street Superhighway in
Chicago cost $100 million for 8 miles. It
involved moving 13,000 people and 450
commercial and industrial firms and razing
buildings of up to 12 stories. The new facility
will carry more than 100,000 vehicles daily—
without traffic signals and at speeds of 50
GRANUM: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN HIGHWAYS
bo
9
23
miles per hour. It will tremendously enhance
property values in its corridor, and beyond.
It will cut accidents to a fourth of those on
the former route. It will change the character
of the city and living patterns of people, as
it becomes interconnected with a growing
network of similar highways. Balanced
against those benefits, the actual cost of the
highway and its maintenance will be not
more than a half cent per vehicle-mile—only
a sixth of that required for a “low-cost”
farm road.
The engineering required for all types of
highway improvement calls for many re-
lated engineering assignments. Mapping,
reconnaissance, route location, preparation
of surveys and plans and estimates of cost,
together with alternate route studies, eco-
nomic analyses and determination of priori-
ties and programs, involve the highest
of civil engineering skills. And Herbert
Hoover’s basic engineering question, ‘“‘Not
what to build, but whether to build at all,”
guides the initial decisions.
Aerial photographs, topographic maps of
the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey and
special maps and surveys by the highway
agencies themselves provide the basis for
location studies. Through the science of
photogrammetry, it becomes possible to
locate new facilities within quite accurate
limits. Then, by means of new electronic
computers, survey computations and_bal-
ancing of earthwork for various profiles and
lines can be done quickly and easily. On-site
inspections and studies finally must confirm
initial studies and develop details of design.
The civil engineer who specializes in
structural design finds the widest variety
of opportunities in highway work. His ability
is challenged not only by great bridges like
the San Francisco Bay Bridge; the $100 mil-
lion Mackinae Straits span linking the two
peninsulas of Michigan; the 24-mile Lake
Pontchartrain bridge near New Orleans; and
the 12-lane, double-deck, $220-million Nar-
rows Bridge to be built joming Brooklyn
and Staten Island, but by hundreds of
thousands of lesser spans. Today, increas-
ingly complicated freeways demand thou-
sands of new structures and spaghetti-like
interchanges for channeling traffic over,
under, around and through modern facilities.
224
Some urban freeways are almost continuous
lengths of multi-level structures. Tunnels
through mountains and buildings are not
uncommon. The toughest problems, how-
ever, lie ahead as engineers tackle the job
of pushing through whole cities with super-
highways.
CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND
OPERATION
Action is the hallmark of the civil engineer
—the builder. The construction phases of
highway engineering are the visible evi-
dences of accomplishment which attract the
active mind to create new methods—to do
better work in less time at lower costs.
Translation of paper plans to concrete,
macadam and_ steel—on_ rock, shifting
ground, over vast reaches of land and
water, through cities, mountains and desert
—stirs the imagination and ability of all
men.
The civil engineer controls this vast de-
velopment of highways. He lays out the
work on the ground, he inspects the produc-
tion, he checks soil conditions, materials and
methods and meets the unexpected with
on-the-spot decisions.
Increasingly, material and equipment pro-
ducers use civil engineers to study their
products in action, to develop new and im-
proved materials and machines, to devise
new uses and to aid engineers and builders
in their problems of design, construction,
and maintenance.
Contractors, too, are finding it profitable
to use more civil engineers in their con-
struction operations. Through the engineers’
knowledge of fundamental principles and
their basic training, better management of
work often is secured, improved cooperation
is possible and superior work is done.
Engineers are responsible for nearly $2 bil-
lion worth of maintenance work carried out
annually on the road and street systems of
the nation. This generally is done by forces
under direct supervision of the engineer who
can exercise his talents for management and
ingenuity to the freest extent in maintenance
work. Although seemingly prosaic, the im-
portance of keeping highways, roads, streets
and bridges in safe operating condition for
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 7
all kinds of weather and traffic is a major
function of highway departments. Floods
often do terrific damage, snow and ice clog
the arteries of transportation, and emergen-
cies (like landslides and their prevention)
demand the best organization, efficiency,
plans, equipment and knowledge of the en-
gineer. Keeping the roads open may mean
life instead of death for many people, as well
as confidence that ‘‘business-as-usual”’ can
be maintained under all conditions.
Operation of highways for ease and safety
of travel is another major field for civil en-
gineers. Traffic control, regulation, routing
and protection are acknowledged as basic
engineering problems which recognize, more
than some other phases of highway work,
the human element in drivers’ use of high-
way facilities.
People must be guided to where they want
to go; speeds must be regulated in keeping
with highway design and drivers’ abilities.
Safe operation requires protective devices
such as signals, stop signs and lane markings.
Smooth, fast flow of traffic can be aided by
schemes such as channeling vehicles on one-
way streets. The best ways of doing these
things are determined by engineers special-
izing in traffic engineering. In carrying out
their objectives, they work in cooperation
with designers, police, psychologists and
others.
EDUCATION
In the face of expanding highway needs
and programs, the supply of civil engineers
specializing in highways has continued to
decline, resulting in great demands for their
services.
This puts emphasis on making best use of
trained engineers and providing them with
all modern aids to increase productivity.
Technicians, as in the medical profession,
are replacing engineers in many routine
ways, and electronic machines and other
methods save time and talent. But there
remains great and continuing need for
training of technicians and for undergradu-
ate and postgraduate civil-engineering edu-
cation, with more emphasis on highway
fundamentals. Thus one of the major roles
for the civil engineer is teaching.
JuLy 1957 GRANUM: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN HIGHWAYS PLAS)
Today, universities and colleges offer brains to study, plan, construct, maintain
many opportunities for engineering educa-
tors. Civil engineering courses are being
increased in scope, with numerous highway
and allied subjects offered. Graduate studies
are being expanded, with special institutes
of transportation engineering gaining promi-
nence. Cooperative research, as well as
instruction, is growing. At the same time,
highway departments and educational insti-
tutions are expanding in-service training
programs and short courses—all of which
call for the knowledge and guidance of the
highway engineer.
OPPORTUNITIES
The civil engineer in highways actually
has been thrust into a dual role—he also
wears the hat of a transportation specialist,
a responsibility with dynamic facets and
unlimited opportunities on a world-wide
scale.
All agencies of government everywhere—
Federal, state, county, city and regional
bodies—are calling for the best engineering
and operate what has become—with the
exception of education—the largest single
function of government.
To accomplish such a tremendous task
involves the civil engineer in many allied
functions. Teaching and research are basic.
Private consulting engineers do much
specialized planning, design and supervision.
Material and equipment manufacturers and
builders require engineering services on an
increasing scale.
All this requires the highest degree of
administrative skill in coordinating the de-
velopment of billions of dollars worth of
transportation facilities. This brings major
financing, accounting, personnel, and public-
relations problems into close relation with
the engineering problems. So the civil engi-
neer’s role in highways has expanded also
into the field of big business administration.
Through the teamwork of the civil-engi-
neering profession, the greatest job in history
will be carried out for the benefit of man for
generations to come.
Advances in knowledge are not commonly made without the previous exer-
cise of some boldness and licence in guessing —W. WHEWELL
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 7
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Structures
By John G. Shope (National Lumber Manufacturing Association)
Before attempting to describe the role of
the civil engineer in structures it would be
well to define the term ‘“‘structure.’’ Accord-
ing to Webster, a structure is ‘‘something
constructed or built as a building, a dam, a
bridge.”’ This definition is very broad and
reflects the wide range of activities required
by the civil engineer in the design and de-
velopment of such constructions.
Reference to the civil engineer in this dis-
cussion is intended to include the structural
engineer for the reason that structural en-
gineering is generally considered a branch of
civil engineering. The Structural Division is
one of the departments of the American So-
ciety of Civil Engineers.
Generally speaking, the design of a struc-
ture is controlled by the requirements for use
and space, structural adequacy and esthetics
in those instances where the latter is a
factor. Many structures such as radio trans-
mitting towers are essentially problems of
structural design where esthetics are of little
little concern and wherein the major work
in design is performed by the civil engineer.
Other structures such as churches require
thorough knowledge of the need and arrange-
ment of space and a fine sense of esthetics,
and in these structures the major role is
carried out by the architect with the assist-
ance of the civil engineer. The large volume
of work in structures lies in the construction
of buildings wherein the civil engineer works
as part of a team with the architect in coop-
eration with those other branches of design
concerned with mechanical and _ electrical
equipment.
The role of the civil engineer in structures
is concerned primarily with structural ade-
quacy and this is an important factor in all
types of structures. Structural adequacy
means that a bridge is strong enough to
carry the traffic for which it was designed.
It means that a tower will not blow over
when exposed to high winds. It means that
a building will not collapse and endanger the
lives of the occupants. The structures just
mentioned do not stand up because of some
unknown reason. They stand up because the
anticipated load requirements were carefully
analyzed and the structural elements de-
signed to withstand these loads. This work
is the responsibility of the civil engineer. In
some cases the courts have held engineers
financially responsible for structural failures
due to errors in design.
The correct structural design must be
economical if the civil engineer is to justify
his position in the design of a structure.
This means that the construction material
selected must be used to its fullest advantage
consistent with the arrangement of space
required in the structure.
All structures require some form of foun-
dation which must be designed to meet local
soil conditions. It is needless to say that a
building without adequate foundations can-
not be expected to remain stable when the
anticipated loads are applied. It is the job of
the civil engineer to design foundations so
that they will be adequate.
The bearing value of soil depends on the
type of material and may vary all the way
from 1! tons per square foot for soft clay
to 100 tons per square foot for bed rock. Be-
fore foundation design can be started the
type of soil must be investigated, sometimes
through borings and sometimes by test pits.
The results will determine the type of foun-
dation to be used.
Where hard soil is easily reached spread
footings of plain or reinforced concrete are
the customary method. Where such condi-
tion does not prevail piles of concrete, steel
or wood are driven to bed rock or to such
depth that the friction between the soil and
the pile will develop the required load.
Spread footings and piles represent the bulk
of foundation work but other types inelud-
ing caissons and floating mats are installed
under unusually bad conditions.
Obviously, the height of a structure and
the loads to be applied to it have great
bearing on the foundation design. Founda-
tions for one-story buildings on reasonably
good soil do not present much of a problem
but foundations for tall office buildings in
the central areas of cities are usually major
works of engineering. Buildings of fifty or
more stories with several basements and
JuLy 1957
sub-basements to be fitted in between sub-
way tunnels, sewage, water, gas and electric
lines represent puzzles which are bound to
confuse the layman and which only the best
informed civil engineer can solve.
The loads which structures must be able
to withstand fall into two broad categories,
the dead load of materials in the structure
and the live loads applied to the structure
both internally and externally. Dead loads
are not difficult to determine since that is a
matter of adding up the weights of the ma-
terials in the structure or any of its parts.
Live loads, on the other hand, must be an-
ticipated over the life of the structure. For
bridges the movement of vehicles creates
live load. For buildings the installation of
equipment, merchandise, furniture, vehicles,
and other contents and the occupancy by
people all create live loads. Wind and some-
times earthquake represent external live
loads which must be provided for. It is the
job of the civil engieer to make certain that
all of the loads which can reasonably be ex-
pected to come on the structure will be rec-
ognized in the design.
In designing a structure the civil engineer
does not start from scratch in matters relat-
ing to design procedures, loads and working
stresses for materials. He makes use of design
procedures and of codes and standards which
have been developed by technical commit-
tees of national organizations over many
years. These committees include broad rep-
resentation by civil engineers. The standards
they develop reflect the results of laboratory
testing, the running of full-scale tests in the
field as well as recording the behavior of
many buildings and structures.
The recurrence of earthquakes in Cali-
fornia has resulted in detailed study of the
behavior of structures under such conditions.
Design procedures have been developed to
the end that modern structures can be built
to withstand such forces. This has produced
great reduction in loss of life and damage to
property. It represents an outstanding con-
tribution to safer buildings on the part of
the civil engineering profession.
The forces produced by vehicles moving
across bridges has received much study by
engineering committees of railroads and by
similar committees representing highway de-
partments. As the result standardized
SHOPE: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN STRUCTURES
227
methods for recognizing the effects of mov-
ing loads are used and contribute to simpli-
fication of design procedures.
For buildings many studies have been
made to determine the magnitude of live
loads which should be anticipated on floors
due to contents and people. These are set
forth in building codes and serve as the basis
for design for structural adequacy of the
various floors and supporting members. Such
loads range all of the way from forty pounds
per square foot for residence buildings up to
600 pounds per square foot for foundries.
The effect of wind on buildings and other
structures likewise has received much study
and here also design requirements are set
forth in building codes. The civil engineer
must recognize the increase in wind pres-
sure with the increase in height of the build-
ing and also the fact that the vacuum created
on the leeward side of a roof may be more
intense than the pressure on the windward
side. Some years ago a suspension bridge in
the state of Washington collapsed during a
wind storm and it was later determined that
collapse was due to harmonic motion induced
by the wind. This phenomenon resulted in
considerable study directed toward more
lateral stability for such structures.
Structural building materials of all types
must be used within the safe limits, or the
working stresses assigned to them. The as-
signment of working stresses for any mate-
rial is a complicated procedure which in-
volves much laboratory testing followed by
careful analysis of the results by competent
engineers. Following this, factors of judg-
ment (or factors of safety) are introduced
and the allowable working stress assigned.
Obviously, working stresses can be assigned
only on the assumption that there will be
some control of the quality of the building
material. To assure this quality control some
form of identification is required by the con-
sumer. Also, there must be reasonable as-
surance that the material will continue to
perform satisfactorily over the anticipated
life of the structure. Working stresses for all
structural materials are set forth in building
codes and other standards for structures not
covered by codes. These serve the civil en-
gineer in executing his design.
The discussion up to this point has been
devoted to matters relating to the design of
228
structures. Of necessity it has been very
brief and in no way is intended to imply
that problems of design are equally brief or
easy. On the contrary, many of them are
very complicated, each requiring the serv-
ices of a substantial staff of engineers. Any
one of these design problems could be the
subject of a detailed technical paper. Many
such papers have been printed and those
who are interested may find them printed
in Civil Engineering, monthly journal of the
American Society of Civil Engineers and
still more details in the Journal of the Struc-
tural Division of ASCE.
Those who have seen a surveyor waving
his arms at the site of a bridge or building
know that the engineer’s work does not end
on the drafting board. There are many who
think that it has just begun. For one thing
the structure must be placed in the right
location and at the proper elevation and this
is one of the early jobs of the man with the
transit or level. As the work progresses he
also provides direction in tbe location of
main supporting structural members. All
field erection work must be within close tol-
erances, otherwise prefabricated assemblies
prepared in a shop many miles distant
would not go together or fit in with other
parts of the building.
The erection of a structure involves many
engineering problems relating to safety. The
public can be excluded from hazard by con-
struction of a fence or other barrier but
workmen at the site are constantly exposed
to hazards of many types. Excavations must
be shored to prevent caveins. Hoisting de-
vices must be strong enough to carry an-
ticipated loads. Temporary field connections
of the various structural elements must be
adequate and lateral bracing installed where
needed. Lifting a trussed member into place
may result in reversal of stress to the end
that a member designed for tension would
be placed in compression. This means that
the truss must be designed to withstand
erection stresses as well as those which will
be induced through use of the truss after it
1s in permanent place in the structure.
The various instances of collapse of
formwork under freshly poured concrete
frequently with the loss of one or more
workmen demonstrate the need for careful
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 7
engineering analysis of such formwork be-
fore the load is applied. When new concrete
starts to move there is not much that can
be done except to get out of the way, if that
is possible. One common error in formwork
is to overload the vertical members by not
installing enough lateral bracing. This brac-
ing serves to reduce the ratio of unsupported
length to thickness and thus increases the
load carrying capacity of the post. Because
of the potential hazard, all formwork of any
consequence should be inspected by a civil
engineer before concrete is placed. Such in-
spection could eliminate substantial loss to
the builder or owner.
Administration of construction at the site
is usually the prerogative of the civil en-
gineer. A schedule must be established and
maintained to the end that the job will be
finished on time and penalties assessed by
the owner due to delay in completion
avoided. Most of the work on any structure
today is handled on the basis of subcon-
tracting. One of the principal jobs of ad-
ministration is to locate responsible sub-
contractors who will show up on the job
when needed and do good work for a fair
price. That 1s a very simple statement and
it is not intended to lightly pass over one of
the principal causes for headache by any
civil engineer trying to administer a con-
struction project.
Obviously, the main objective of the en-
gineer in charge of building any structure is
to complete the job within the bid price and
in conformance with the specifications. This
means close attention to all phases of the
work and on large projects the organizing
and directing of a competent staff. This
particular talent is gained only through ex-
perience and the engineer who has it is al-
ways in demand.
It is very seldom that a structure of any
consequence is designed or built without the
services of a civil engineer somewhere along
the line. His work may not be readily ap-
parent to the general public but it is there.
Perhaps his greatest contribution lies in the
fact that the structure whether building or
bridge is a safe one and his greatest recogni-
tion les in the fact that the public is ready
and willing to use it without questioning its
safety.
JuLy 1957
WALTHER: THE DUAL ROLE OF ENGINEERING MECHANICS 229
The Dual Role of Engineering Mechanics
By Carl H. Walther (George Washington University)
Mechanics is the analytical tool used by
the engineer whenever he deals with the ac-
tion of forces on bodies. Since the engineer
is concerned primarily with physical reality,
it is not surprising to find that much of his
work requires an understanding of principles
of mechanics. I have heard one of my uni-
versity colleagues, a penetrating observer
with a gift for trenchant expression, say
that all the equipment any engineer needs
is a mastery of Newton’s laws of motion.
(The word mastery is, of course, italicized
in his statement.) Whether one agrees with
this gross oversimplification, it does serve to
point up the near-universal role played by
mechanics in engineering analysis and de-
sign. It may help in our attempt to under-
stand the work of engineers, to give some
consideration to engineering mechanics, its
nature, and its uses.
Of course, not all engineers find them-
selves absorbed in the study of mechanical
phenomena. Some work with the laws of
electric and magnetic circuits and _ fields,
others with those of thermodynamics and
heat transfer, still others in fields of chem-
istry. Nevertheless, some branch of me-
chanics is the primary interest of so many
engineers, employed in such diverse lines of
endeavor, that the scientific discipline
called ‘‘engineermg mechanics” has come
to be recognized as a separate technical di-
vision of engineering. Before proceeding
further, it would be best to define the terms
we use.
DEFINITIONS AND DISTINCTIONS
Webster defines mechanics as ‘“‘that sci-
ence, or branch of applied mathematics,
which treats of the action of forces on
bodies.” It should be clear that, in the sense
in which we use the term, it has no neces-
sary connection with manual skill or ma-
chinery. Except for this limitation, the
definition admits an extraordinarily broad
class of phenomena to consideration, rang-
ing from planetary motion to the spin of the
electron. Furthermore, the approach of
mechanics to a given phenomenon may be
based on the laws of motion formulated by
Isaac Newton, in which case it is called
“classical”? or ‘Newtonian’? mechanics, or
it may make use of Albert Eimstein’s con-
cept of relativity and be referred to as “‘rel-
ativistic”’ mechanics.
Engineering mechanics consists of those
topics of Newtonian mechanics which have
technical applications. It is considered to in-
clude the study of the equilibrium and mo-
tion of rigid and deformable bodies and
systems of particles, the elasticity and
plasticity of solids, and the equilibrium and
flow of ideal and viscous fluids. The study of
the mechanical properties of materials and
of applicable mathematical and experimental
methods of analysis are also included, be-
cause of their intimate relation to the cen-
tral subject.
It would be a mistake to conclude, from
the definition just given, that engineering
mechanics is merely a minor branch of the
rather descriptive classical mechanics studied
in undergraduate courses in physics. Al-
though the range of problems studied is
limited to those of technical interest, the de-
tail and depth of penetration are, in com-
parison, enormously developed. This is
natural, in view of the engineer’s need for
exact information. His purpose is to con-
trol natural phenomena, which implies the
necessity for detailed prediction. The dif-
ference in point of view is considerable. To
take an example, it is not enough for the
structural designer to understand that his
structure stands because all of its forces are
balanced against each other in a complex of
systems in stable equilibrium. He needs also
to know the magnitude and kind of force in
every member; furthermore, he must be able
to specify precise dimensions for each mem-
ber, weld, or rivet group to insure that it
shall resist that force safely and
nomically.
e€co-
230
ENGINEERING MECHANICS,
PRINCE
SERVITOR AND
Engineering mechanics exhibits a curious
dichotomy in its functions and purposes. If
I might borrow a theatrical figure of speech,
I would say that the science plays a dual
role of servitor and prince on the stage of
engineering endeavor. Engineering mechan-
ics, in one or another of its branches, is the
very foundation of many engineering disci-
plines. Some, for example, structural, en-
gineering, machine design, or hydraulic
engineering, consist of little else than sophis-
ticated applications of mechanics. It forms
an essential structural element of others,
such as aeronautical engineering or founda-
tion engineering. The principles, applica-
tions, analogies, and techniques developed
in engineering mechanics are in constant use
by practitioners of these other disciplines.
Needs arising in specialized fields of engi-
neering are continual stimuli to research in
the more basic field. Indeed, more often
than not, the attack on a new problem in
engineering mechanics is precipitated by
recognition of the existence of an unsolved
problem in one of the specialized fields.
There is, thus, a constant flow of ideas in
two directions—of needs, conveyed to the
basic field, and of results satisfying those
needs, transmitted to the fields of applica-
tion. In this sense the role of engineering
mechanics is the analogue of that of servant.
On the other hand, the investigator in en-
gineering mechanics possesses a_ truly
princely freedom. The science deals with
fundamental principles of great generality;
at the same time its expansion has related
these principles to many specialized engi-
neering disciplines and_ specialized areas
within its own field. In consequence the op-
portunities for investigation are almost
without limit. The rising of a bubble or the
settling of a particle of sediment may claim
attention. The flow of air past an airfoil and
the forces exerted by the wind on a structure
are related problems of daily practical in-
terest. The rational proportioning of a
member of a bridge, the behavior of the
subsoil under a foundation, and the effect of
stress on the knitting of a fractured bone all
possess an element of common interest to the
student of engineering mechanics.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 47, NO. 7
In addition, engineering mechanics pos-
sesses a closely-knit core of fundamental
principles common to all of its branches.
This, and the analytical and rather mathe-
matical nature of the subject permits the
investigator to move from field to field and
produces fruitful analogies between fields
and with other sciences. The experimentalist
finds room for his talents; experimental ap-
proaches to problems in all areas of engineer-
ing mechanics have been highly successful
and there exists a well-developed literature
devoted exclusively to experimental analysis.
It appears that we have here a scientific
discipline which is at the same time prince
and servitor: by turns theoretical, experi-
mental, and _ resolutely practical. This
duality of role must color any attempt to
convey a useful understanding of engi-
neering mechanics and its relation to other
branches of engineering. It dictates the plan
of organization of the remainder of this pa-
per, in which it is proposed to direct atten-
tion to the two questions: First, how is
mechanics (or engineering mechanics, if you
like) used in other engineering disciplines?
Second, what types of problems are of in-
terest to investigators in the science of en-
gineering mechanics?
USES OF ENGINEERING MECHANICS
Engineering mechanics has been pictured
as a supporting science, as a sort of servitor
of more specialized engineering disciplines
which use its principles and techniques to
further their own ends. To list these would
be simply to list all those branches of our di-
versified and always-expanding engineering
technology which deal with the equilibrium
or motion of solid objects, of liquids, or of
gases. It would obviously serve no useful
purpose to attempt it here. Nevertheless,
merely defining (as above) the criterion for
inclusion in the listing emphasizes the
breadth of the concerns of engineering me-
chanics. The way in which one of these spe-
cialized engineering disciplines makes use of
principles and techniques of mechanics in
routine design work will be taken up later,
after first considering an analogy which il-
lustrates still another fundamental relation
between mechanics and other sciences.
JuLy 1957
AN ILLUSTRATIVE ANALOGY
The connection between mechanics and
other engineering disciplines, which do not
deal directly with the motions of solid bodies
or of fluids, may perhaps not be so clear. A
brief consideration of the performance of the
loudspeaker of the currently very popular
high-fidelity system for the home reproduc-
tion of recorded sound will illustrate the re-
lation by analogy that often exists between
mechanics and other apparently unrelated
sciences. In the common ‘bass reflex’’
speaker system found in many “‘hi-fi’” in-
stallations, the speaker cone is housed and
mounted in an opening in the front of the
box-like cabinet, and by its vibratory mo-
tion produces the sound waves which reach
the listener’s ear. The paper cone of the
speaker is set in motion by alternating elec-
tric currents originating, ’way back in the
phonograph, from the motion of the stylus
in the record groove. Sound waves, which
is to say pressure waves in the air, are also
given off from the back of the cone; these
reach the outer air through a second opening
in the front of the cabinet. The mass of air
in the enclosure and vent possesses the
properties of mass and elasticity, or ‘“‘spring-
iness.”’ It is desirable, for greatest listening
enjoyment, that the sound emitted by the
back of the speaker reinforce the sound com-
ing from its front, without being adversely
modified by the enclosure. There are other
desiderata, but this brief and drastically
simplified statement is enough to identify
the problem situation as one of electro-
acoustics. The specific problem that be-
devils the designer is how to determine the
necessary relation among the variables of
speaker characteristics, enclosure size, and
the proportions of the openings transmitting
sound. It is not a simple one.
Let us now consider another problem: the
motion of a weight suspended at the lower
end of a coil spring. We imagine that the
spring is attached at its upper end to some
device which moves up and down har-
monically; this device might be the hand of
the observer. Common experience enables us
to forecast the result: the weight will be set
in motion vertically. It will bob up and down
im a manner dependent on its mass, on the
WALTHER: THE DUAL ROLE OF ENGINEERING MECHANICS 231
b)
“springiness”’ of the spring, and on the
characteristics of the disturbing motion im-
posed on the system. This is obviously a
problem in mechanics, a rather simple one,
as it turns out.
The two apparently quite different prob-
lems just stated, one of electroacoustics and
the other of mechanics, are in fact connected
in an essential way: the differential equations
describing the phenomena are formally
similar. In plain language this means that
when we make use of the abstract repre-
sentation of mathematics to describe each
phenomenon, the descriptions that we write
down are identical in their form, differing
only in non-essentials, such as the use of the
symbol (say) g in the one case wherever we
used 2 in the other, or z in place of v. The
implications of this observation are far-
reaching; if we can solve one problem we
have in effect solved the other. All that is
necessary is the substitution of the appro-
priate quantities represented by the sym-
bols in the ‘‘difficult”? problem for those in
the “‘simple” problem, and the ‘difficult’
problem is solved!
This is what we call a mechanical analogy.
There are many analogies, between prob-
lems in different scientific fields and be-
tween problems in different fields of the
same science. They are usually based on a
mathematical similarity, as in this case, and
are, of course, diligently sought because of
their great usefulness in clarifying relation-
ships or solving problems. The example il-
lustrates the way in which mechanics is
often related to other scientific fields which
might not otherwise appear to have any
connection with it.
AN ENGINEERING APPLICATION
We have considered some of the ways in
which engineering mechanics contributes to
other areas of engineering, through the de-
velopment of new techniques, through re-
search, or by analogies. No less important
is the use of its basic principles and estab-
lished techniques in routine engineering
work. This is probably the aspect of the sub-
ject which is most familiar to the practicing
engineer, but I feel that it deserves elabora-
tion here because it is perhaps less familiar
to the reader versed in pure science.
232
As has been said, engineering mechanics
stands as the very foundation of many en-
gineering disciplines. Skill in the application
of its principles is an essential qualification
of every man who practices in these fields.
This is a truism, and accounts for the in-
tensive training in mechanics that is re-
quired of engineering students. What may
not be so obvious to the non-engineer is the
extent to which mechanics 1s used in ordinary
engineering projects.
Again, in the interest of concreteness, I
have selected an example in the hope that
it may most clearly illustrate the way in
which mechanics is commonly applied. While
it is not necessarily typical of engineering
problems in other fields, the design of a
bridge across a river is suitable for my pur-
poses because the problem is essentially
static (and hence easily observed) and be-
cause the successive stages of its solution
may be readily isolated and identified. This
is a problem in the field of structural engi-
neering. Stripped of its elements of econom-
ics, political science, and esthetics it becomes
an apt example of the use of principles of
engineering mechanics.
Like most design problems, this involves
four essential elements or stages, as follows:
(a) The determination of the general shape and
form of the structure.
(b) The determination of the loading that will
probably be imposed on it.
(c) The analysis, leading to evaluation of the
internal resisting forces which are required
to withstand the applied loading.
(d) The proportioning of members, connec-
tions, and details to insure safe and effi-
cient performance of the structure’s func-
tion.
The first of these relates so many factors
that a satisfactory solution requires the
exercise of the highest order of engineering
skill and judgment. Although there may be
little necessity for intricately detailed cal-
culations at this stage, here occurs the blend-
ing of art and science, of appearance, econ-
omy, and function that determines the
overall suitability of the final product. It
is principles, rather than techniques of me-
chanics and other appropriate sciences which
are of greatest utility in this stage.
The determination of the probable applied
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 7
forces, the loading, on the structure may call
for the application of only the most ele-
mentary mechanical principles, or 1t may in-
volve complex problems in fluid mechanics
and dynamics. The evaluation of the aero-
dynamic forces on a flexible suspension
bridge, for example, requires consideration
of the interaction of a damped elastic system
with its fluid environment. Regardless of its
degree of technical difficulty, however, this
stage clearly involves the use of principles
of engineering mechanics.
The third and fourth essential stages in
the design considered here are both repetitive
applications of the principles of static equi-
librium. The third, which is pure analysis,
consists of the consideration of first the en-
tire structure, and then each of its members
as an isolated body subjected to forces. The
external and internal forces necessary to in-
sure equilibrium are determined by this
process. In the fourth stage the members,
connections, and details are assigned their
final dimensions. The mechanical proper-
ties of the materials to be used enter here,
as well as the sometimes conflicting require-
ments of safety and economy. The method
used is essentially one of comparison of the
strength of the material with the stress im-
posed on it, as determined by application of
principles of the elasticity or plasticity of
solid bodies.
It will be noted that, although other
factors sometimes assume primary impor-
tance and a staggering amount of detail
makes it easy to lose sight of essentials,
every stage of this design requires direct ap-
plication of principles or techniques of en-
gineering mechanics. Other fields of engi-
neering design or analysis make similar use
of the same or closely related principles and
techniques, in approximately the same logi-
cal order, to solve their special problems.
The example considered here is representa-
tive and demonstrates the extent to which
engineering mechanics contributes to many
engineering undertakings.
PROBLEMS OF ENGINEERING MECHANICS
The preceding description may serve to
clarify the role of engineering mechanics in
routine engineering work, but it fails to
answer the equally interesting questions:
Juty 1957
what topics are the concern of engineering
mechanics, or otherwise stated, what specific
problems are investigated in the field of en-
gineering mechanics?
An indication of the general topics with
which engineering mechanics is concerned
may be obtained from a study of the organi-
zation of the Technical Division on Engi-
neering Mechanics of the American Society
of Civil Engineers, which is representative
of groups working in that field. There are
seven technical committees of the Division,
in addition to the usual executive committee,
namely:
Elasticity
Experimental Analysis and Analogues
Fluid Dynamics
Mathematical Methods
Mechanical Properties of Materials
Plasticity Related to Design
Structural Dynamics
While this scheme of organization or subdi-
vision is admittedly somewhat arbitrary,
(others, slightly different, are in use by tech-
nical divisions of other societies) it will
serve for our purposes of classification.
Current publications give another indica-
tion of topies of interest to investigators in
the field of engineering mechanics. The four
most recent issues of the Journal of this
Technical Division, taken as a sample, con-
tain 19 papers.! All seven of the subdivisions
listed in the paragraph just above are repre-
sented, with not less than two nor more than
four titles assignable to each. Exact classi-
fication of some of the titles is difficult ; some
of the papers cut across boundaries between
subdivisions. Other engineering societies, in
the United States and elsewhere, regularly
issue publications devoted to engineering
mechanics or to one of its subdivisions. The
Proceedings of the International Con-
eresses of Applied Mechanics are volumi-
nous, and papers on various topics of engi-
neering mechanics also appear in the journals
of nonengineering societies. In addition, the
bulletins and other occasional publications
of universities and Federal Government
agencies contain a high proportion of titles
relating to engineering mechanics. The
1 Journ. Eng. Mech. Div., EM 1-2-3-4, Pro-
ceedings, ASCE 82.
WALTHER: THE DUAL ROLE OF ENGINEERING MECHANICS 233
over-all distribution of titles among the
various subdivisions of the subject is roughly
the same as above. One can, therefore, con-
clude that all subdivisions are sufficiently
vital, from the standpoint of productivity
at least.
The greatest number of titles in the four
issues of the Journal sampled refer to elas-
ticity and fluid dynamics, closely followed
by plasticity, structural dynamics, and me-
chanical properties of materials. Such a
superficial approach as the mere counting of
titles is likely to be misleading, since it fails
to take account of such factors as relative
age of subdivisions (which tends to affect
the number of investigators who have be-
come interested in each) and extent of fiman-
cial support of research (which, likewise,
tends to affect the number of workers). To
that extent the method is subject to criti-
cism. In this case it coincides roughly with
my own admittedly subjective valuation,
which assesses the subdivisions of fluid dy-
namics, plasticity, and structural dynamics
as those of greatest vitality. Actually, it is
difficult to distinguish among the subdi-
visions on the arbitrary basis adopted, be-
cause of the intimate relation to elasticity
to structural dynamics and of mathematical
and experimental analysis to all three.
Adopting the different viewpoint that
classifies problems as static or dynamic and
linear or nonlinear, respectively, one would
conclude that the areas of greatest activity
are those involving dynamic and nonlinear
problems. In fluid mechanics attention is
focused on phenomena of flow around im-
mersed objects and through open channels
and pipe entrances. Current investigation
bears on steady nonuniform flow, that. is,
flow in which conditions vary from point to
point but are independent of time in a given
region. Unsteady flow, in which conditions
are not time-independent, presents formida-
ble difficulties in all but the simplest cases
and has not yet yielded many solutions. A
vital field in solid mechanics is the investi-
gation of dynamic effects, including vibra-
tion, impulsive forces, and impact, and the
response of materials and structural elements
to them. Considerable progress is also being
made in the nonlinear problems of elastic-
plastic behavior of materials and the design
234
of structural elements to function in that
nonlinear range where Hooke’s law no
longer applies. Elastic and plastic instability
of members subject to forces tending to pro-
duce buckling is another essentially non-
linear problem receiving attention.
Prediction is a risky business, and I shall
leave it to others who are presumably more
competent at it. Nevertheless, two develop-
ments have yielded such significant results
that no great element of risk is involved in
forecasting their future extension and pro-
ductivity. The first is the general attack on
nonlinear problems. This is of interest be-
cause it represents a genuine advancement
of a frontier of knowledge. Nonlinear prob-
lems are inherently more difficult than linear
ones, since their mathematical presentation
is of a higher order of complexity. At the
same time, many natural phenomena are
nonlinear and solutions which assume them
to be linear have been less than satisfactory
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 7
because they do violence to the facts. A few
successful solutions, which are already in
process, may be expected to point the way
to others. A whole new field of problems is
opening up as a result.
A second significant development is the
use of a rational combination of theoretical
analysis and experiment to solve problems
which do not yield to either of the above
methods applied singly. This approach has
proven itself, notably in the field of fluid me-
chanics, whereby that science has proved so
much more fruitful than either classical hy-
drodynamies or empirical hydraulics which
preceded it. It is being applied increasingly
in the fields of structural dynamics, elas-
ticity, and plasticity. The procedures are al-
ready well established; the future is for ex-
pansion and for extensions of the analytical
methods to other fields. The success already
demonstrated leaves no room for doubt of
the analytical potential of this approach.
A theory is a supposition we hope to be true; a hypothesis 1s a supposition
which we expect to be useful.—G. J. STONEY.
Juny 1957
GALE: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN APPLIED ECONOMICS
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Applied Economies
By Samuel H. Gale (American Society of Civil Engineers)
Economics, by generalized definition, is
the science of management of means and re-
sources to increase productiveness and avoid
waste. Civil engineering has exactly the
same general purpose. Each civil-engieer-
ing project involves the consumption of re-
sources in labor and materials to produce
goods and services for use in filling existing
or imminent needs. Elimination of waste
from the process and increase in production
effectiveness to the maximum will produce
the greatest value of the undertaking. This
goal can be reached only by proper applica-
tion of economic principles. Accordingly,
economics is the complement of civil engi-
neering in planning, constructing, and oper-
ating civil-engineering works for the greatest
benefit to our economy.
All well-planned and efficiently executed
civil-engineering works demonstrate the ap-
plication of fundamental economic princi-
ples. Economic considerations are involved
in each phase of project accomplishment
from inception to and including operation.
Among the more important of these consid-
erations in the general order of their applica-
tion are: (a) Establishing the extent of need
for the project; (b) comparison of alterna-
tives; (c) fixing the optimum scope and scale
of development; and (d) determining the de-
gree of economic justification. Each step is
not exclusive in the phase of its application
since all are largely interrelated. The final re-
sult is reached by a process of initial approxi-
mation, adjustment, and refinement of detail
as the ultimate solution 1s approached.
ESTABLISHMENT OF NEEDS
The nature, location, and magnitude of
unsatisfied needs or demands which can be
met within the physical limits of develop-
ment of a proposed engineering project are
listed and analyzed to establish a sound basis
for the undertaking. Needs or demands must
exist or be reasonably prospective in suffi-
cient magnitude to utilize and so give value
to the products and services to be provided.
Without a demand for its use, a product is
valueless. Normally civil-engineering works
are proposed to supply a specific need or
group of needs. However, it would be short-
sighted and wasteful to omit consideration
of all other needs which might also be met
in whole or in part by the proposed works
through additions, modifications, or altera-
tions of physical composition and function
to achieve the optimum value of production
capabilities. Accordingly, such additional
needs or demands as may be met in con-
junction with the primary purpose of the
undertaking are appraised and classified by
relative importance. Further consideration
is then directed to the satisfaction of the
more important needs which can be served
in order to assure the most rewarding re-
turns from the enterprise.
COMPARISON OF ALTERNATIVES
All available means of meeting established
needs should be carefully examined and com-
pared in order to make certain that the pro-
posed works are the most economical means
of supplying the demands. Other opportuni-
ties for supplying any or all of the estab-
lished needs may exist and should be com-
pared with the proposed undertaking. For
example, secondary sewage treatment to
solve a pollution problem might be found
more expensive than the construction of a
small reservoir for low-flow regulation and
adequate dilution. Possibilities for meeting
needs by means other than the construction
of physical works may exist and if so should
be considered. Legal zoning against occupa-
tion of a frequently flooded area might avoid
the necessity of constructing levees or other
physical flood-protection works. By such
comparisons with feasible alternatives, the
proposed project is tested to prove whether
it will have greater efficiency in meeting es-
tablished needs than any available alter-
native.
Alternatives are compared by measuring
the influences of each on the availability of
goods and services. Such influences relate to
the goods and services consumed in placing
and maintaining each item of improvement
in effect (costs) and the goods and services
236 JOURNAL OF
each will produce (benefits). Cost estimation
is in the primary field of civil engineering
and needs no elaboration here except for
‘aution that all costs both direct and asso-
ciated must be taken into account. Associ-
ated costs include such losses as may occur
from elimination of existing economic values.
For example, loss of agricultural production
on land within the flowage of a reservoir
may result not only in the loss of value of
the production as reflected in the direct land
cost but also in additional loss from de-
preciation of the value of existing enter-
prises established for processing the agricul-
tural products. Benefits may include both
tangible and intangible values. Tangible
benefits are those products of goods and
services for which a market value can be es-
tablished. Intangible benefits, while none-
the-less real, are not susceptible of pricing.
An example of the latter is the improvement
of public health and welfare. Both benefits
and costs can be established most accurately
by comparison of the availability of goods
and services under conditions with and with-
out the undertaking.
The process of comparing alternatives be-
gins with the elimination of the obviously
infeasible from the complete array. In less
obvious cases, physical and engineering
factors reflected in the comparative costs
often provide the basis for elimination.
Rough estimates of cost and approximations
of the principal benefits will further suffice
for conclusive determinations of inferior al-
ternatives. As greater refinements become
necessary to define relative value, more de-
tailed estimates of cost based on field data
of corresponding accuracy and more com-
plete estimates of benefits taking into ac-
count both tangible and intangible effects,
are required. Concurrent with the necessity
for increasing detail of analysis, considera-
tion is given to the optimum scale and scope
of the alternatives to make sure that the
definitive comparison is made at the most
effective level of their potentialities. The fun-
damental basis for comparison and choice
from two alternatives is their respective
benefit-cost ratios. Since the benefit-cost
ratios reflect only the finite monetary
values their comparison must be supple-
mented by comparison of the respective in-
tangible values. Benefit-cost ratios are di-
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 7
rectly comparable but intangible effects are
qualitative and not necessarily expressible in
common terms. The indications of the finite
comparison must be modified by Judgment
of the respective intangible values in arriving
at the final choice.
OPTIMUM SCOPE AND SCALE
The most desirable extent of an undertak-
ing, from the standpoint of the users of the
goods and services it could provide, is that
which will satisfy completely all existing
and prospective needs. However, from the
standpoint of efficiency in the use of goods
and services, this maximum scale of develop-
ment is seldom if ever practicable for eco-
nomic reasons. A determination of the op-
timum scale and scope of the project must
be made by a series of adjustments of in-
creasing refinement. A reasonable starting
point is that extent of development which
will provide for the satisfaction of the more
important needs and also meet needs of
lesser priority within the limit of physical
capability. This extent is then adjusted
downward by practical increments to the
point where the excess of benefits over costs
is the maximum.
Incremental adjustments apply to varia-
tions in the scope of the undertaking to omit
separable provisions for less important needs;
and, variations in the scale of the separable
elements of the undertaking which are re-
quired to meet the more important needs.
The smallest increments to be considered in
successive adjustments and analyses are
those for which there is a practical choice as
to their inclusion or omission. Practical im-
crements vary with the considerations in-
volved. In a reservoir project, for example,
small variations in height of dam can be
analyzed by comparing the incremental
costs with the value of the corresponding in-
crement of storage. Sometimes entire seg-
ments of an improvement which add to the
degree of service, such as entire generating
unit in a power plant, may constitute the
smallest increment to be considered as to
the advisability of its inclusion or omission.
In an undertaking designed to meet several
objectives, the smallest increment for prac-
tical analysis may consist of all separable
features for one of the purposes.
The scope of an undertaking refers to the
JULY 1957
number of purposes it can serve, that is, the
number or types of established needs which
can be met in whole or in part. If only a
single purpose is involved the scope is auto-
matically fixed although the extent to which
an undertaking can serve that purpose de-
pends on its scale. The scale of an under-
taking refers to its established capability to
meet the needs for which it is intended. Both
scope and scale may be fixed at the point of
optimum efficiency by incremental analysis.
For the more simple case of a single purpose
undertaking the optimum scale of improve-
ment is found at the point where the ratio
of incremental benefits to incremental costs
is unity and no additional increment is capa-
ble of providing additional benefits equal to
its costs. When an undertaking is proposed
to serve several purposes without separable
provisions for each purpose a series of in-
cremental adjustments between purposes
must be analyzed for each increment. of
project scale. By this means the most ef-
fective balance between purposes is assured
at each incremental stage of the analysis
made to fix optimum scale.
Application of sound procedures of eco-
nomic analysis to the design and test of a
proposed undertaking should also be made
to insure that each component of the proj-
ect represents a more effective means of
accomplishing its intended purpose at less
cost than any practicable alternative which
it would preclude from development or use.
Moreover, the scope and scale of the
planned works will have been established
at the point of maximum return with respect
to the costs involved. Accordingly, the en-
tire plan comprised of properly sized com-
ponents will provide for the most effective
and economical use of goods and services re-
quired in its construction im comparison
with the goods and services it can produce
to meet established needs. But the degree
of justification for the undertaking must
still be determined.
ECONOMIC JUSTIFICATION
At this point the designs and estimates of
cost will have been finalized according to
standard practices in detail commensurate
with the standard of precision appropriate
to the purpose. All benefits creditable to the
undertaking in its established scale and
scope will have been identified. The degree
GALE: THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN APPLIED ECONOMICS
Se
231
of economic justification is then established
by comparison of the benefits with the
economic cost of providing them, taking
into consideration the ratio of monetary
benefits to total costs on a mathematical
basis, and, by applying sound judgment,
weighting that ratio by the qualitative in-
fluence of the pertinent intangible benefits.
Obviously, if the benefits of an undertaking,
so adjusted to optimum efficiency in the
consumption and production of goods and
services, exceed the total costs by a reason-
able margin, the justification for its con-
struction is established and its success is
fully assured.
THE CIVIL ENGINEER’S ROLE
It is evident from the foregoing that the
role of the civil engineer in the application of
economics is dominant in his field. Each step
of project formulation and refinement
couples the application of economic prin-
ciples with the application of engineering
principles. In examining the economic needs
to be served, knowledge of the engineering
ability to serve them is required. The com-
parison of alternatives exercises all the en-
gineering skill and all the judgment of eco-
nomic factors possessed by the analyst. The
optimum scope and scale of the proposed
improvement can be determined only by a
combination of knowledge of cost factors
and of production factors as affected by
incremental changes. And finally, the ap-
praisal of over-all justification for an under-
taking again requires the coupling of engi-
neering knowledge of cost and performance
with understanding and judgment of eco-
nomic returns.
In recent years increasingly complex and
extensive projects and the higher costs of
labor, equipment and materials have in-
tensified the need for careful and thorough
planning in order to make certain that the
proposed improvements would constitute
the best use of available resources and pro-
vide returns commensurate with the costs.
Accordingly, the civil engineer is called upon
more and more for his contribution of knowl-
edge and judgment to the proper design of
projects and accurate estimates of their
value for the development and utilization of
those resources. His engineering - skill,
knowledge, and appreciation of economic
principles, and his vision guided by con-
servative practicability, enable the civil en-
gineer to be particularly well fitted for his
increasingly important role in planning and
accomplishing projects to meet the needs of
our expanding economy.
238
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, NO. 7
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Power
By Harrison G. Roby (Consulting Engineer)
In looking over the various fields of en-
deavor in which the civil engineer is engaged,
it will be recognized that power gives him
an opportunity to use an unusually wide
range of technical engineering knowledge.
This is particularly true in regard to hydro-
power. Thermal power calls more for the
contributions that can be made by the me-
chanical and electrical engineers, although
there is need also for the civil engineer to
take part in the several phases of such a
project. His duties include the survey work
involved in the layout of the steam plant,
the design of intakes and passages for con-
densing water and design of the power-plant
structure. In the case of coal-burning sta-
tions, he plans and supervises construction
of railroad access lines or barge unloading
facilities, coal storage areas and recovery ar-
rangements. Structural design of trans-
former and switching stations and also the
survey and design of transmission towers
and lines, are a part of his field.
In development of water power, the posi-
tion of the civil engineer is reversed, and he
assumes the major part of the engineering
duties with necessary and useful contribu-
tions from the mechanical and electrical en-
gineers. The engineering features that must
be taken into consideration in planning a
hydro project are never quite the same as at
other projects, and the civil engineer must
have at his command knowledge of a wide
and diversified list of engineering subjects.
This diversity of natural conditions results
in the requirement that each project shall
be a made-to-order tailored job, and the
possibility of reproducing a prior develop-
ment at a second site is entirely absent.
The first step in the study of a hydro-
project is a reconnaissance of the river basin
in the area proposed for the dam site. The
purpose of a reconnaissance is not to deter-
mine the economic feasibility of a project,
but to ascertain whether it is probable that
a more thorough study will show that it is
economically sound. Therefore, the pre-
liminary field work and office study should
be limited to the amount necessary to arrive
at the answer as to the probable results of a
more complete investigation.
The reconnaissance should include cross
sections of the valley at possible damsites,
and a geological investigation of founda-
tion conditions. The quality of the founda-
tions and the practical height of proposed
dam will determine the type of dam that
would be built, the choice resting between
concrete, earth fill or rock fill. A search
should then be made to locate a source of
supply of the material of which it is pro-
posed to build the dam.
A flow line should be run out and an ap-
proximate area-capacity curve obtained
which will indicate the amount of storage
available, the land that must be acquired
for reservoir purposes, and necessary re-
locations of railroads, highways, dwellings
and villages.
Since the dependable power at a hydro
project is a function of head times regulated
flow, the preliminary investigation requires
a knowledge of expected stream-flow at the
damsite. For many years the U. 8. Geo-
logical Survey has kept a daily record of
flow of practically all streams in the United
States that have power potentialities. If no
stream-gaging station is located at the
proposed damsite, the flows at that site can
be roughly obtained by multiplying the
records by a constant based on relative
drainage areas at the nearest gaging station
and at the damsite.
If this preliminary investigation 1s favor-
able, the next step is the “survey” stage,
which is carried to the degree of thorough-
ness necessary to determine the ‘‘benefit-cost
ratio”’ or the economic feasibility of the
project. Borings are made at the damsite,
and the costs of the different types of dams
that can be constructed at the site are com-
puted and compared. A mass curve is de-
veloped which shows the period of critical
low flows, and with information as to reser-
voir capacity secured by aerial photography,
a study is made of the available storage to
JuLy 1957 ROBY:
secure the highest average flow that can be
obtained during this critical period. As the
reservoir is drawn down and the operating
head is reduced, the flow will be correspond-
ingly increased to give a constant power out-
put. This value multiplied by the reciprocal
of the load factor desired from this station
by the system determines the plant installa-
tion.
A layout of dam, power plant, and spill-
Way is made, and a cost estimate prepared.
This estimate includes also the purchase and
clearing of reservoir lands, the cost of reloca-
tions and the control of river-flow during
construction. To the fixed charges on the
original cost is added the annual cost of
operation and maintenance to find the total
annual cost of the hydro power.
The economic feasibility is then deter-
mined by comparing this cost with the cost
of equivalent steam power in the region,
which is used as a yard-stick, since it is
always possible to supply an area with power
from a thermal plant. In certain areas the
yardstick will become the cost of atomic
power, but within the United States with
relative abundance of coal, oil, and natural
gas, this time lies in the distant future.
Probably the most important function of
the civil engineer engaged in water power
practice is the design of hydraulic structures.
Concrete dams must meet this criterion: the
weight of the concrete and the width of the
base shall be sufficient to resist the water
pressure which tends to cause overturning or
shding. Earth fill and rock fill dams must be
provided with an impervious core of com-
pacted clay material, with drainage of the
downstream sections and with riprap on the
upstream face to prevent erosion by wave
action.
To prevent erosion of the foundation
material at the toe of the spillway section,
the engineer must provide a stilling-basin
to absorb the kinetic energy of the water
discharged through the gates, or a flip-
bucket to throw the water a sufficient dis-
tance downstream so that erosion will not
endanger the structure.
Flood gates must be designed with suffi-
cient discharge capacity to pass the largest
possible flood. They are usually one of two
types: either vertical lift gates with rollers,
THE CIVIL ENGINEER IN
POWER 239
or sector gates with a cylindrical face and
frames carrying the thrust of the water back
to pins anchored in concrete piers.
The power house structure, with intake,
racks, gates and water passages becomes an
integral part of the dam in the case of rela-
tively low-head developments. At higher
head projects, the intake is built into the
dam structure and penstocks lead the water
to the power house which is entirely inde-
pendent and has no function in regard to
the stability of the dam.
In the construction of the dam it 1s neces-
sary that the engineer work out a method for
control of the river flow at the damsite.
There are two methods of stream diversion
and cofferdam construction. At a site on a
river which is relatively wide, a portion of the
river bed is unwatered by building out from
one bank cribs or cells which divert the water
away from this area to the area on the op-
posite side of the stream. Sections of the
dam built in the unwatered area are left
low, and in the second stage of construction,
the first cofferdam is removed and a coffer-
dam is built from the opposite shore, di-
verting the water through these low sections.
After the dam is built to full height in the
second cofferdam area, the low sections in the
first area are successively blocked off and
built up.
In canyons this method of water control
is not feasible. The procedure used in narrow
river channels is to drive a tunnel around the
site, large enough to take the maximum
flow anticipated during the construction of
the dam. After this is accomplished, coffer
dams are placed entirely across the river,
upstream and downstream of the dam axis,
and the area then unwatered. After the dam
is completed, the tunnel is blocked off with
a concrete plug.
The civil engineer engaged in hydro de-
velopment must be acquainted with the
needs of the power market that the project
is being built to serve. There are two types of
water power projects each of which has
quite a different function in supplying power
to the area: run-of-river plants and storage
developments. Run-of-river projects are
those of relatively low head and big flow,
which have no storage capacity and must use
the flow approximately at the rate at which
240
it comes to the plant. Their main value is
the contribution of energy to the system
and the saving of fuel at steam stations.
During floods, the rise of tailwater level
cuts down the plant capacity and in some
cases reduces the output to zero.
Storage projects, as the name implies,
have the ability to store streamflow in the
reservoir above the dam and to develop
power as needed by the system. The partic-
ular value of these developments is capac-
ity; the capability of supplying kilowatts
during the peak of the system load. These
projects usually have relatively high dams
and are often economically justified at
sites with small or medium drainage areas.
They are low load-factor plants, operating a
relatively few hours per day, per week, or per
year.
In selecting the proper hydraulic equip-
ment for a hydro plant, the civil engineer
must be familiar with the different types of
water turbines. For relatively low heads, up
to about 100 feet, the propeller type is used.
One hundred feet is the maximum head for
which this type has been used in the United
States although European practice permits
use at somewhat higher heads. The speed of
a propeller runner, in R. P. M., is greater
than that of the other types, thus cutting
down the number of poles and reducing the
cost of the direct-connected generator. It is
also capable of passing more water. There are
two kinds of propeller turbines: fixed blade
and adjustable blade or Kaplin design. For
plants with relatively few units the ad-
justable blade model is particularly adapted,
since by changing the pitch of the blades for
changes in load it can maintain a very high
efficiency even for very light loads. In a
plant with a large number of units, the fixed
blade type is used as it is lower in cost. As
the load changes the number of units in
operation can be increased or decreased,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 7
keeping each unit at the load point at which
it is most efficient. Most run-of-river installa-
tions use propeller turbines.
At projects with heads ranging from 100 to
about 800 feet, the I'rancis type is used. By
far the largest number of water wheels in
use in the United States is of this type. Its
efficiency at best gate is high, 93% to 94%.
At part gate it is more efficient than the fixed
propeller type, but not as efficient as the
adjustable blade propeller unit. It can be
cast In one piece up to about sixteen feet in
diameter. The largest single piece unit of
this type is installed at Grand Coulee and is
rated at 150,000 horse power. A few Francis
units of larger diameter have been built in
segments which were assembled and held
in place by bolts or by shrinking on an outer
band.
The type used for very high heads is the
impulse wheel. Water discharged at a high
velocity from a nozzle impinges on buckets
attached to the periphery of a dise which is
mounted on a horizontal shaft to which the
generator is also attached. This type is not as
efficient as the other ones but it is rugged and
cheap.
During the last half century, the civil
engineer has encountered ever-increasingly
larger and more difficult problems in the
development of power. With the tremendous
increase in demand for electric energy the
size of units has been magnified, the number
of units per station has greatly increased,
with the result that thermal stations of over
1,000,000 kilowatts capacity and hydro
plants ranging from 1,500,000 to 2,000,000
kilowatts in capacity are becoming common.
As the better sites are being preempted, the
civil engineer is finding it necessary to
develop sites that formerly would not have
been considered suitable, and he has shown
commendable ingenuity in meeting these
conditions. :
JuLy 1957
WHITMORE AND THOMPSON: SURVEYING AND MAPPING
241
The Role of the Civil Engineer in Surveying and Mapping
George D. Whitmore and Morris M. Thompson (U. S. Geological Survey)
Today’s science of surveying and mapping
has assumed a scope and significance that
George Washington could scarcely have
imagined when he traversed the Virginia
countryside with compass and Jacob’s
staff. In Washington’s day, there were two
kinds of engineers—the military engineer,
who was concerned mainly with the con-
struction of fortifications and engines of war,
and the civil engineer, who was concerned
principally with developing the best routes
for roads, bridges, canals, aqueducts, and
other transportation facilities. The develop-
ment of these route locations resulted pri-
marily from surveying and mapping activi-
ties; thus, the term “civil engineer,” prior
to the industrial revolution, may be con-
sidered as practically synonymous with
“Surveyor and mapper.”’
As the modern industrial era developed,
the separate field of mechanical engineering
came into being, to be followed later by
many other specialized fields, like chemical,
electrical, and aeronautical engineering,
which make up the vast complex of present-
day engineering activities. In the meantime,
there has developed within the older field of
civil engineering itself, a steadily expanding
array of specialized activities, so that the
American Society of Civil Engineers today
has 13 separate divisions, whose diversity of
interest may be exemplified by citing the
names of three: structural, hydraulic, and
surveying and mapping.
The professional challenge in the field of
surveying and mapping has grown greatly
with the ever-increasing demand for more
and better surveys and maps, produced in
less and less time. Modern techniques of
surveying and mapping have advanced so
rapidly, especially in the last 10 to 20 years,
that there is scarcely a link in the chain of
mapmaking procedures that has not under-
gone some recent change. Unless he is satis-
fied to be left hopelessly behind, the engineer
in surveying and mapping today must be
familiar not only with classical surveying
methods, but with such modern scientific
disciplines as photogrammetry, electronic
measuring techniques, and data-processing
systems. Articles on surveying and mapping
subjects, appearing in technical journals all
over the world, bear an increasing weight of
advanced mathematical content, imvolving
concepts far beyond the ken of the surveyor
of 20 years ago.
SOME MODERN SURVEYING AND
MAPPING TECHNIQUES
The factor that has had greatest effect in
modifying traditional surveying and map-
ping procedures is the application of photo-
grammetry, the science of making reliable
measurements by the use of photography.
With the aid of precise aerial photographs
and ingenious stereoscopic map-plotting
instruments, many surveying and map-
making operations have been transferred
from the site of the survey to air-conditioned
offices in far-off cities. This is not to say that
fieldwork and classical surveying procedures
have been eliminated. On the contrary, there
is more field surveying than ever because there
is so much more mapping being done. For
a long time to come, fieldwork will be neces-
sary for geodetic control surveys, for map-
ping areas not suitable for photogrammetric
mapping, and for the surveys and investi-
gations that are required to complete the
photogrammetrically compiled original map
drawings.
Much of the laborious aspect of old-time
fieldwork has, however, been eliminated.
With the aid of helicopters (Fig. 1), it is now
possible to occupy survey stations that could
be occupied only after days of climbing, or
perhaps not at all, in the old days. No longer
is it necessary to sketch contours in the field
and to obtain a multitude of rod readings in
order to control this sketching. The 3-dimen-
sional optical model of the terrain which is
viewed by the operator of a stereoscopic
plotting instrument presents, in effect, an
infinite number of rod readings and the
contours can be drawn accurately and
speedily. (See Fig. 2.)
242
SE
Fra. 1.—The “toadstools” would have been difficult to use for control stations without the heli-
copter. (Courtesy U.S. Geological Survey.)
The science of photogrammetry has at its
disposal a great variety of elaborate plotting
instruments such as the stereoplanigraph
(Fig. 3). The engineer directing mapping
operations must not only be well-versed in
the optical and mechanical principles of these
instruments, but he must also be able to plan
in detail the entire sequence of operations
for each particular mapping project.
In addition to the quantitative aspect of
photogrammetry, as represented by the
techniques for measuring heights and dis-
tances, there is the qualitative aspect
known as ‘“‘photointerpretation.”? What is
represented by an image of a certain size,
shape and density on a photograph? What is
the significance of certain patterns of light
and shade? These questions le within the
domain of the photointerpreter. The science
of photointerpretation must, of course, be
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, No. 7
mastered by the mapmaker if he is to trans-
fer information properly from the photo-
graph to the map.
Electronic science has also had an impor-
tant effect on surveying and mapping
techniques, especially as applied to the meas-
urement of distances in the field. A number
of electronic systems—Shoran, Loran, Lorac,
Hiran, P. P. I., Decca, and Raydist—have
been applied with varying degrees of success
to this problem. One of the most promising
developments is the geodimeter, a system in
which a modulated light beam is directed
from one survey station to a reflector set up
at a second station, with the distance be-
tween the two stations being determined as a
function of the phase difference between the
emitted beam and the reflected beam, and
the precise value of the velocity of light.
Distances up to 20 miles have been measured
Jury 1957
Fig. 2.—Principle of the multiplex. The optical
model formed by a pair of projected photographs
is converted to a topographic map by means of the
tracing table, a device for measuring and drawing
details of the terrain. The photographs used in the
multiplex projectors are printed on glass slides,
called diapositives. A red filter is used in one pro-
jector, a blue-green one in the other; the observer
wears corresponding spectacles to obtain the 3-D
effect. (Courtesy U. S. Geological Survey.)
in this way with an accuracy good enough
for geodetic triangulation lines.
Another electronic development, the radar
altimeter, measures variations in the height
of terrain by emitting a radar beam from an
airplane traveling at a constant pressure
altitude. The beam bounces off the ground
back to the airborne radar equipment. The
terrain clearance (height of the airplane
above the ground) is a function of the elapsed
time; the ground elevation is determined
from the altitude of the airplane and the
terrain clearance. (See Fig. 4.)
These electronic applications are, as one
might suspect, rather complicated in execu-
WHITMORE AND THOMPSON:
SURVEYING AND MAPPING 243
tion and have been presented here in ex-
tremely simplified form.
MAJOR SURVEYING AND MAPPING
PROJECTS
Some idea of the magnitude and signifi-
eance of the task confronting engineers
responsible for major surveying and mapping
projects can be gleaned by examining only a
few of the larger undertakings.
Topographic Map and Geodetic Survey of
the United States——With the continuing
industrial and economic development of our
country, the exigencies of national defense,
and the increasing appreciation and use of
maps by the public, the production of the
atlas of topographic quadrangle maps must
be vigorously pursued until the entire area of
the United States and its Territories has been
covered. This tremendous program of com-
plete and adequate topographic mapping of
the entire country (which could be com-
pleted within 15 to 20 years if current pro-
duction rates can be maintained) is being
carried out under the direction of the U. 8.
Geological Survey. The prerequisite geodetic
control surveys are executed by the U. 8.
Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Inter-American Geodetic Survey —An out-
standing example of international coopera-
tion among nations is the work of the Inter-
American Geodetic Survey, which functions
as an organization of the U.S. Army, Carib-
bean. The IAGS maintains headquarters in
the Canal Zone, with project offices in each of
the 18 Pan-American nations represented in
the enterprise. Although staffed by officers of
the Corp of Engineers, most of the IAGS
employees are civilians including many civil
engineers. The principal aims of the organi-
zation are to establish a common geodetic
datum for Central and South America, to
connect this datum with the North American
geodetic datum, and to assist the participat-
ing nations in mapping their own countries.
The IAGS, established in 1946, has made
substantial progress toward the accomplish-
ment of these objectives.
Worldwide geodetic datum.—Modern activ-
ities of both peace and war require more
exact data regarding the shape and size of
the geoid, which in turn requires the deter-
244
mination of the optimum worldwide geodetic
datum. Thus we find many of the leading
nations of the world, in addition to those of
the Western Hemisphere, cooperating in a
gigantic effort to connect the geodetic
surveys of all countries within each con-
tinent, and also to connect all continents
with each other, often by means of long
geodetic distances measured electronically.
These activities are under the leadership of
engineers in the geodetic unit of the U.S.
Army Map Service and similar organiza-
tions in other countries.
Antarctica. mapping.—Although some
mapping has been done in the past on the
fringes of Antarctica, there still remains the
imposing task of mapping the entire con-
tinent. Because of the interests of several
countries in the Antarctic, mapping activi-
ties in that area have far-flung international
ramifications, as well as formidable technical
difficulties. A renewed impetus has lately
been given to this challenging enterprise by
the program of the International Geo-
physical Year. At the time of this writing,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Fic. 3.—Stereoplanigraph. This complex, but highly efficient, plotting instrument is used in making
VoL. 47, No. 7
expeditions representing several nations are
in the Antarctic, obtaining photographs and
other data needed for further mapping of
that frozen continent.
Wartime mapping—Under emergency
conditions, the entire capacity of the map-
ping profession, public and private, can
quickly be transferred to war needs. During
World War II, the surveying and mapping
facilities of such diverse organizations as The
Geological Survey, the Army Map Service,
the Tennessee Valley Authority, the Coast
and Geodetic Survey, and a number of
commercial firms, were enlisted in a co-
ordinated mapping effort of mammoth
proportions. The maps produced were
counted in the millions. Thousands upon
thousands of aerial photographs, many over
enemy territory, were procured by military
aviation for mapping purposes.
World aeronautical charts—World War II
also brought a requirement for a worldwide
series of aeronautical charts, with the result
that the U. 8. Air Force now has a large
mapping and charting establishment at
accurate topographic maps from aerial photographs. (Courtesy Zeiss Aerotopograph.)
JuLyY 1957 WHITMORE
St. Louis, known as the Aeronautical Chart
and Information Center (ACIC).
Hydrographic charts —Large organizations
are also required to produce and maintain
the hydrographic charts required for the
Navy and Merchant Marine. For these
activities, the U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey maintains an extensive hydrographic
survey organization for producing and re-
yising charts of U. 8. waters, while the
Hydrographic Office of the Navy has a
similar organization for corresponding work
in foreign waters.
Private-practice
organizations —The na-
ture of modern surveying and mapping
AIRCRAFT FLYING AT CONSTANT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
RADAR BEAM MEASURES
tt DISTANCE TO GROUND
Fig. 4—Radar altimetry. The terrain clearance
under the aircraft is recorded on a moving tape.
Since the constant pressure altitude deviates from
constant height above sea level, the profile record
must be adjusted by reference to points of known
elevation along the flight track. (Courtesy Photo-
graphie Survey Corp., Ltd.)
AND THOMPSON:
SURVEYING AND MAPPING 245
procedures, requiring large investments in
costly instruments and other specialized
equipment, has led to the formation of a
number of private-practice firms, employing
large numbers of engineers and technicians.
Their principal services are the supplying
of aerial photography and related products,
together with engineering surveys of routes
and project sites for industry and local public
works agencies.
ROLE OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
While skilled technicians can carry out
many of the day-to-day jobs in the chain of
operations of surveying and mapping, engi-
neers, and preferably civil engineers, are
needed to play the key roles of leadership,
planning, direction, and research. Their job
in surveying and mapping is to see the big
picture, to fit the parts together, to keep up
with what is going on in other fields of science
and engineering and to know when to apply
it, to take the lead in developing new equip-
ment and techniques, to know what is
needed and how to get it done, and to im-
part needed know-how to technical speci-
alists.
Civil engineers can well be proud of their
high level of accomplishment in surveying
and mapping in the past, and they have
every reason to expect that they will con-
tinue to be the leaders in the future.
246
STRUCTURE
The detection of radio signals with a wave-
length of 21 cm (about 7 inches) has opened a new
era in the study of the structure of the Milky
Way system, with its hundred billion stars, and of
thousands of similar galaxies in space. The
signals are emitted by atoms of hydrogen and
show that tenuous hydrogen clouds fill much of
the space between the stars. This research has
already clarified the spiral structure of our own
galaxy, as Dr. Bart J. Bok, of the Harvard
College Observatory, describes in a_ report
recently published by the Smithsonian In-
stitution. Work on external galaxies has barely
started.
The 21-cm waves may be regarded as a kind of
invisible light that obeys essentially the same
rules as visible, ultraviolet, and infrared light, and
passes easily through obscuring material. The
wavelength is slightly lengthened when the radi-
ation comes from an object moving away from
the observer, and slightly shortened when it
comes from an object moving toward the ob-
server; these changes are measured and used to
determine the speeds of the atoms. The direction
from which the waves come reveals the structure
of our galaxy, and the speeds of the atoms reveal
its rotation.
Looking outward mto space, one observes a
vast number of great star aggregations similar to
the Milky Way galaxy. The stars, in general, are
arranged in the form of a coiled spiral like a watch
spring. Our own galaxy has long been assumed to
have the same form, but this has been difficult
to observe with ordinary light. The spiral strue-
ture was verified some years ago by Dutch
astronomers at the University of Leiden, who
used the radio telescope to observe the 21-cm
line. From Holland it is possible to survey the 21-
em emissions only from the Northern Hemi-
sphere. Dr. Bok reports that a preliminary survey
of the Southern Hemisphere has now been
completed and shows about the same picture.
When viewed from within, the structure of the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 47, NO. 7
OF GALAXIES
galaxy is much more complicated than it would
seem if observed from outside. The first obser-
vations made by the Dutch astronomers showed
that the Milky Way galaxy has three spiral arms,
in one of which the solar system is imbedded.
The comparisons to a watch spring are now
seen to be ‘only very rough first approximations.”
The principal spiral features are branched and
shredded. It is evident, furthermore, that not all
the spiral features lie in the same plane. The
complexity of galactic structure is being made
more apparent by the preliminary results of
Southern Hemisphere studies, made chiefly by
radio astronomers in Australia.
The rotation of the galaxy, and the different
rotations of various star groups within it, are
well-known problems that are made even more
complicated by the 2l-em observations. It has
generally been assumed in the past that the stars
of our vast system are moving in approximately
circular orbits. The new observations cast doubt
on this simple assumption.
Research on the external galaxies by means of
the 21-cm line is still in its infancy. Australian
observers have detected this radiation from the
large and small Clouds of Magellan in the
Southern Hemisphere. These are not parts of the
Milky Way system, but galaxies, our nearest
neighbors in space. Astronomers are already
learning much about the dynamics of the Magel-
lanic Clouds. Their rotation is well established,
and good estimates of their masses can be made
from the rotational velocities. Efforts now are
directed toward detecting 21-cm radiation from
the great galaxy in Andromeda, one of the
nearest of the external galaxies, and comparable
in size to the Milky Way system. The 21-cm
signals from some more distant galaxies indicate
considerable speeds of recession—as great as
7,000 kilometers a second. These recessions con-
firm the photographic observations of the speeds
of distant galaxies that constitute the evidence
for the “expanding universe.”
EE —————
SOLAR HEATING SYSTEMS
The giant planets of the solar system—Jupiter,
Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune—have their own
internal heating systems. Though they are far
from the sun, the amount of solar heat they re-
ceive is enough to maintain a temperature of
225° below zero on Jupiter, and somewhat lower
temperatures on the others. There is growing
evidence that the sun is not the only source of
heat these planets have, according to Dr. Gerard
P. Kuiper, of Yerkes Observatory, in a Smith-
sonian Institution report on ‘‘New Horizons in
Astronomy” recently issued. The vast ‘“‘weather”’
phenomena observed on these planets cannot be
caused by solar heat alone, but may be explained
by some form of internal heat, perhaps resulting
from the concentration of mass toward the center
JULY 1957
of the still contracting planets, Dr. Kuiper points
out in outlining still unsolved problems in solar
system astronomy.
In the atmosphere of Saturn, for example,
clouds as large as the entire earth can be detected
about once a decade. They are apparently due to
major eruptions from the planet’s interior, Dr.
Kuiper says. Because different zones of the very
thick atmosphere rotate at different speeds, the
clouds soon stretch out into belts parallel to the
Equator. Similar cloud formations are observed,
somewhat oftener, on Jupiter. They vary in
color—brick red, chocolate brown, blue, amber,
white.
Adequate explanations of these cloud phe-
nomena. Dr. Kuiper states, and the clues they
give to the history of the earth might go far
toward solving other pressing problems of the
sun’s 9-planet family. It now seems apparent, he
says, that at least as far as Jupiter and Saturn
are concerned, the planets “do not have a sun-
induced meteorology, as do terrestrial planets,
but one governed largely by released internal
heat,’ and meteorologists have already pointed
out that internal heating is more efficient than
the sun’s heat in “stirring” a planet’s atmos-
phere. “Do these occasional bursts (as evidenced
by the clouds) come from the deep interior?” he
asks. ‘Then how do they get through the mantle
of solid hydrogen (hydrogen gas compressed into
a solid by the tremendous weight of the overlying
atmosphere) which usually is assumed to sur-
round the denser core?”
There is still no adequate explanation, he
says, for the gigantic Red Spot that has appeared
and disappeared at intervals in the high at-
RESEARCH ON
VIRUSES 247
mosphere of Jupiter, and was seen as long ago as
1859. There is a possibility that the Red Spot may
be a cloud cap over a floating island in the Jovian
atmosphere. Of great interest is the recent detec-
tion of radio bursts coming at regular intervals
from Jupiter, which appear to emanate from a
whitish cloud. “The atmospheric clouds on
Jupiter and Saturn,” Dr. Kuiper says, “are
almost certainly atmospheric condensation
products, as is true for most of the clouds and
haze on Mars. Occasionally Mars has yellow dust
clouds also, while the nature of the cloud cover
on Venus is still in doubt. Saturn has a general
haze cover which forms the bottom of the visible
atmosphere. It usually is divided into a number
of distinct belts parallel to the Equator, of slightly
different reflectivity and, sometimes, color.”
The moons of the planets present quite distinct
problems. One of the largest is Titan, brightest of
the satellites of Saturn. It is orange in color and
has an atmosphere of methane or marsh gas.
Another of Saturn’s moons, Triton, is yellow. It
probably has an atmosphere, but of unknown
composition. Some of the other satellites, includ-
ing the bodies making up Saturn’s rings, probably
are cosmic masses of ice.
The rings of Saturn are unique and we still do
not know, Dr. Kuiper says, why similar rings
do exist around Uranus and Neptune, which
presumably originated under similar circum-
stances. It can be understood, he says, why
Jupiter has no such rings. The high density of Io,
one of Jupiter’s four satellites discovered by
Galileo, indicates that the surroundings of the
giant planet were too hot for the development of
snow rings when the satellite was formed.
—_—_— SEE
RESEARCH ON VIRUSES
Filterable viruses, the extremely minute
particles which are the agents of some of the
most dreaded human, animal, and plant diseases,
now completely bridge the dimensional gap be-
tween the living and nonliving worlds. They are
subject to extremely drastic mutations, or genetic
changes, in nature, and these are accompanied
by major changes in the diseases they cause. Thus
all are dangerous. One which apparently causes
no disease at all suddenly may change into a
strain that is virulent or lethal. These findings are
reported by Dr. Wendell M. Stanley, director of
the virus laboratory of the University of Cal-
ifornia, the chemist who first obtained a virus in
erystal form, im a paper published in a recent
annual report of the Smithsonian Institution.
With the electron microscope, which makes
these particles visible for the first time, Dr.
Stanley says, the boundary between the animate
and the nonanimate essentially disappears. The
instrument makes visible objects with diameters
of about 300 millimicrons or greater. It has
rendered visible particles of viruses down to
diameters of only 10 millimicrons, smaller than
some of the largest organic molecules of the
chemist. Between 10 and 300 millimicrons, Dr.
Stanley points out, “is the range of the unknown
void between the organisms of the biologist and
the molecules of the chemist.”” This is the range
of sizes that has now been filled in by the viruses.
Perhaps the most significant of recent dis-
coveries concerning viruses, he points out, is the
mutational ability and the accompanying change
in disease manifestation; so that “if a host con-
248
tains a virus, even though a very mild or latent
virus, the possibility of formation of a very
virulent or even lethal virus strain always
exists.”’ Although such mutations are well demon-
strated in nature, it has been impossible to pro-
duce them by directed chemical changes in their
structure. For example, the amino acids con-
stituting the virus proteins can be changed
radically. Dr. Stanley’s own studies have con-
cerned chiefly the first-discovered and_ best-
known of the ‘“organisms’”—that which causes
the tobacco mosaic disease. Great numbers of
amino acids, the building blocks of proteins, can
be removed or added without any demonstrable
effect on the infectivity. Eventual discovery of
what actually takes place in the mutations, he
points out, will be of very great significance. —
Solution of the virus problems “undoubtedly
earries the key to the nature of life itself, and
possibly the key to the cancer problem.” Dr,
Stanley continues:
Despite their small size the viruses represent a
potential source of information which may be far
more important for mankind than the atom bomb
or nuclear energy. If we can discover the secrets
carried within the virus structures we will have
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 7
gone a long way toward making the world a better
place in which to live.
It may appear amazing that nature selected
the border-line between the living and the non-
living worlds to house secrets of such great im-
portance, yet sober reflection will reveal the wis-
dom, if not the necessity, for this course of action.
Real properties of matter are but reflections of
the degree of organization within, or the structure
of, matter. The viruses, bridging the gap between
organisms and molecules, have just that degree of
chemical structure which is necessary to provide
for expression of certain necessary properties, part
of which lie in the world generally regarded as
nonliving.
Certainly some viruses are single molecules and
the nature of the chemical structure characteristic
of such virus molecules is a challenging problem
for the chemist. Some viruses seem to consist of
many molecules interacting in some special man-
ner, and elucidation of this interaction also repre-
sents a challenging problem.
As yet there appears to be no clear line of divi-
sion, and it is still possible to agree with Aristotle’s
suggestion of more than 2,000 years ago that
nature has made such a gradual transition from
the living to the nonliving world that the boundary
between the two is doubtful and perhaps non-
existent.
a
CRUSTACEAN METAMORPHOSIS
The worms, the insects, the spiders, and the
crustaceans had a remote common ancestor
somewhere on life’s far frontiers more than a half
billion years ago. Of this ancestor of earth’s most
abundant animals, presumably a more wormlike
than buglike creature, no trace remains. This is
deduced by Dr. R. E. Snodgrass, Smithsonian
Institution collaborator, in a paper on crustacean
metamorphosis recently published. By worms he
refers to the so-called ‘‘annelids,’’ segmented
creatures such as earthworms and a host of other
less-known forms.
There is...ample evidence from a study of
modern forms [he says] to indicate that the early
progenitors of the arthropods were closely related
to the progenitors of the annelid worms, and that
these two groups of annulate animals had a com-
mon ancestor. The fundamental characters pre-
served in the annelid-arthropod organization are:
an elongate segmented body, an alimentary canal
extending through the length of the body [and
various other highly technical features]. We may
therefore visualize the primitive annulated animal
as a very simple, wormlike creature having these
features. ... From this primitive segmented worm
the annelids have been directly evolved with little
addition other than the development of segmental
groups of lateral bristles, ... the so-called para-
podia, that serve for swimming and burrowing.
By a different type of specialization for loco-
motion, members of another branch from the
ancestral stock developed ventrolateral lobelike
outgrowths of the body segments, and thus became
walking animals. These primitive legs eventually
evolved into the jointed appendages of modern
arthropods.
There are extant, he points out, animals that
seem quite close to the stage at which the an-
cestors of the joint-legged animals had only
lobelike outgrowths from the segments. These
are the onychophorans, represented by the
wormlike Peripatus of tropical America and
Africia. There are several fossils of such creatures
found in rocks which were formed prior to the
Cambrian period in geological history, about a
half billion years ago, when the earliest traces of
higher animals are found. The extant onycho-
phorans, Dr. Snodgrass points out, are probably
direct descendants of the early lobe-legged
creatures and structurally have not progressed
much beyond them. In some of their probable
contemporaries, however, structural changes in
the rest of the body allowed the legs to become
longer, slenderer, and finally jointed for more
efficient locomotion.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Saensophical Society of Washington . . 2.0... 00... cess ee lew ene neces CHESTER H. PaGE
Anthropolorical Society of Washington ...............5....ecee seers FranK M. SETZLER
Pealestenlisociety of Washington... 2.2.2. ...660 5.0.0.0 eee ec ee nantes HERBERT FRIEDMANN
MmucwHeeoociety: Of Washington . 2... 6. cnc. cence eee we setsiedcee ls CHARLES R. NabsER
Entomological Society of Washington.........................-- Cart F. W. MurseBeck
BirstrantGeortaphic Society ........csse cece cess sonido nese we se etes ALEXANDER WETMORE
eolerical Society of Washington........2.5.... e002 eee ence eee Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. Con
READ IAMEISLOLICAL SOCICLY << ..i5se0 se aausie cic oso oie e weg eas tae Des sales sees U.S. Grant, III
BRPMe BOOGIE Y Of WaShingtOn... sates. nee sis simcisie oct eeies este ste ee Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furppo GRAVATT
Wesmin=ton society of Bngineers..........2. 600000. sierscecereses eee Herrsert G. Dorsty
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers....... Arnoup H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp 8. BEAN
Helminthological Society of Washington..................-...--- Donaup B. McMutien
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHaru J. Petezar, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fiorp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovauas EH. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorcs A. HortLe
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. Hersert C. VacHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..W1Lu1am T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F, N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CHARLES 8. GILMAN
CONTENTS
Page
Foreword: Uhe'role of the civil engineer.=.-......... eee 205 -
Civil-engineering research. G. WH) BURNETT. ..-........ 4550 eeeeee 206
The role of the civil engineer in hydraulics. C. C. McDonaLp....... 211
The role of the civil engineer in irrigation. F. BH. Byrns.............. 215
The role of the civil engineer in soil mechanics. Epwarp S. BARBER... 218
The role of the civil engineer in highways. Jamus O. GRANUM........ 222
The role of the civil engineer in structures. JOHN G. SHOPH........... 226
The dual role of engineering mechanics. Cart H. WALTHER.......... 229
The role of the civil engineer in applied economics. Samunnt H. Gaup.. 235
The role of the civil engineer in power. Harrison G. Rosy. Spo ul BRS)
The role of the civil engineer in surveying and mapping. Guenee D.
Wuirmore and Morris M. THoMPSoN.....................---- 241
INiotestyandwNe ws stare decccer actew 6 ene uetcicue ee eae 214, 217, 246-248
"OLUME 47 August 1957 NUMBER 8
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
, (is ns Ay
Ti NOV 22 1957 )
(eereceeecceecet
a
Published Monthly by the
MA SHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Coester H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BAMFORD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the ProcEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. ReHpER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year................--++22 ee econ $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the Journau (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monoerapu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................--sseeee: $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..................... eee $25.00
Single‘ volumes; unbound. 3.554 5.ccecie ces we one Ln ee eee 2.00
Singleinumbers’: 5 j.acceseici ern tee emer cake ee eee eee tere ree -Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and
ad geet to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieve, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specutr, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
GENERAL SCIENCE.
Aueust 1957
No. 8
Cultural implications of scientific research.! R. KE. Greson,
Applied Physics Laboratory, The Johns Hopkins University.
As members of an Academy composed of
representatives elected from the various
branches of science, we are all interested in
the part our organization can play effectively
in the modern world. Our problems differ
from those of the regular scientific society
whose members are all practitioners or are
deeply interested in a particular branch of
science. Common professional interests and
exchange of information and views on sub-
jects of timely interest in a special area of
scientific research form a substantial basis
for a vigorous corporate life in a scientific
society. As specialized interests grow in
scope, the number and variety of the
scientific societies are constantly increasing.
Societies such as the Chemical Society or
the Physical Society find it necessary to add
divisions devoted to specialized branches of
their subjects. The formation of independent
specialized societies is no rare event. All
this is symbolic of the depth to which re-
search is penetrating into new regions. The
findings, nomenclature, and even the lan-
guage require more and more background for
intelligent comprehension. Thus significant
discussions of an advancing field become
more and more limited to specialists, and
become less and less comprehensible to the
worker in another field.
However, the process of specialization is
not so fragmenting as it may seem. The
same methods of thought, the same stand-
ards of values, and of conduct, the same
criteria of truth, are held by all good
research workers no matter how diverse
may be their fields of interest and the
nomenclature used to describe the results.
‘ Address of the Retiring President, Wash-
ington Academy of Sciences, February 21, 1957.
Furthermore, new discoveries, facts, or
theories do not remain strange or incom-
prehensible for long. The well-educated
scientist can extend his background of
knowledge and patterns of thought sufh-
ciently to take an intelligent interest in new
knowledge in fields other than his own. The
student readily assimilates new facts and
theories after they have undergone a few
years preliminary digestion, and what was
strange and difficult to one generation
becomes commonplace to the next.
In introducing the late Sir John Lennard-
Jones for an honorary degree at Oxford, the
Public Orator concluded, ‘Science is split
into departments only to prove its unity in
the end.” This thought has always been in
the minds of natural philosophers even when
appearances were much against it.
The more facts we learn and the more
penetrating our understanding becomes, the
more does the evidence against the concept
of the unity of nature disappear. In fact, the
feeling that all nature cannot be compre-
hended by a single pattern of thought seems
to be associated with the earlier and explor-
atory stages of any particular science. For
example, at the begining of the century,
chemical forces, the forces holding atoms
together in molecules, were well known from
a phenomenological point of view; but all
evidence tended to show that they were quite
different from the forces which the physicist
studied and handled. The advent of quan-
tum mechanics showed the identity of
chemical and physical forces (to use a vague
expression), and nowadays it is almost
taken for granted that, basically, the phe-
nomena of physics and those of chemistry
may be described by the same set of funda-
249
NOV 5
1QG7
250
mental terms. So also 25 years ago, there
were many who held that a ‘“‘vital principle
or force’ gave rise to a fundamental dis-
tinction between the phenomena of biology
and those of chemistry and physics. Today,
I think that far-sighted biologists believe
that an extension of the theories of physics
and chemistry will ultimately embrace the
facts and generalizations of the various
biological sciences.
These examples are chosen from many
that could illustrate the same point. They
in no way constitute an argument, but I feel
intuitively that a belief in the unity of
nature is at least too good a working
hypothesis to give up until we are forced to
do so. Whatever the future may bring forth,
one thing is certain, the more we have learned
about the different branches of science
through specialized studies, the more we
have found that all rest on a common set of
fundamental principles. Integration at fun-
damental levels has followed from differen-
tiation in the observational and fact finding
studies in diverse fields of science. The life
and work of Lennard-Jones himself is an
excellent example of the welding of fragments
of science into an elegant structure.
These considerations give a basis for
thinking that an Academy of heterogeneous
membership has certain peculiar functions
in a world of rapidly advancing science and
technology with its attendant specialization.
These functions lie in two areas, the first
being concerned with ways and means of
emphasizing the unity of science itself, of
fostering the inspiration that comes from
the transfer of ideas from one field to
another, and of directing attention to com-
mon fundamental principles. The second
area is a cultural one. The pursuit of science
is an intellectual activity and as such has
made important contributions to our culture
in the broadest sense of the word. The
cultural implications of scientific research
are not as widely appreciated as its material
products, especially in nonscientific circles.
There is a real need for wider dissemination
of these ideas which can add to the general
field of human thought and at the same time
increase the feeling of kinship which should
exist among all who are sincerely interested
in advancing culture.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 8
I should like here to develop this subject,
first by reviewing the common ground which
underlies all scientific research regardless of
the particular field of application; second by
pointing out lines along which scientific
research has contributed to our general |
culture; and third by suggesting a few ways
in which an Academy can take advantage of
its heterogeneous membership to _ foster |
activities of value in the development of an
integrated picture of science and strengthen
our liaison with other cultural activities.
THE NATURE OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH
Two distinct periods, differing markedly
from each other, may be recognized in the
history of science. The first period extends
from the earliest times to the renaissance and
was characterized by outbursts of brilliant
activity and fertility localized in space and
time. In this period the progress of science
followed the same fluctuating spasmodic
course as that of other intellectual activities,
music, literature, and the fine arts. Human
authority and the power of the great mind
played a dominant role; however, progress
was unstable, one generation frequently
reversing the trends set by a previous one.
In the words of George Santayana, “The
first period of Science was brilliant but
ineffective.”
The second period in the history of science,
the period of modern scientific research,
began about 300 years ago in the age as-
sociated with names such as Bacon, Galileo,
Newton, and Descartes. Over a short span
of years a great change took place, a change
most evident by its results. Science started
to expand at an ever-increasing rate; an era
of steady monotonic progress began. It has
continued for 300 years and shows no signs
of leveling off, let alone declining. The
impact of scientific research is now felt
strongly in all fields of technology. Modern
scientific research has not been localized in
any one country but has spread to all parts
of the world where the education and wealth
of the inhabitants will support it. The ever-
expanding scope and fertility of modern
scientific research and the absence of violent
fluctuations in the growth of scientific
knowledge give ample justification for
thinking that the age of Newton saw the
introduction of something radically new into
Aveust 1957 GIBSON:
natural philosophical enquiry. Let us at-
tempt to isolate this ingredient which
accounts for the steady growth in the power
of scientific research as contrasted with the
fitful progress of science during the first
period.
A fundamental requirement in the new era
of science was described aptly by Bacon in
Novum organum: ‘Men, on their side, must
force themselves for a while to lay their
notions by and begin to familiarize them-
selves with facts.’ The establishment of facts
is a most important and laborious aspect of
scientific research. It must be approached
experimentally with extreme objectivity and
even skepticism. It requires that the in-
vestigator, in asking questions of nature,
take nothing for granted, least of all the
evidence of his own unaided senses. These
latter must be disciplined and fortified with
instruments. Not only must the observations
leading to facts be carefully made, but the
conditions under which the observations are
made must be controlled and defined or
described with extreme care. Finally, human
authority, tradition, prejudice, or personal
feeling must be eliminated from considera-
tion by the investigator who wishes to
establish a new fact.
However, no matter how careful a worker
may be in controlling his experiments and
refining his observations, he must be pro-
vided with a criterion of general acceptance
against which to check the validity of a fact.
In scientific research, this criterion is pro-
vided by reproducibility; that is, a fact or
experience is valid when it is independent of
the observer, when it can be reproduced by
anyone who takes the trouble to repeat the
observation or experiment under the proper
conditions. (Note the democratic nature of
this criterion.)
Now this criterion of reproducibility has
far-reaching consequences. It requires that
the observer of a new fact describe the
conditions and results of his observations in
such a way that any other experimenter can
perform the same experiment and obtain the
same result. Results are valid scientifically
only when they can be communicated to any
serious and intelligent listener in such a way
as to convey to him a meaning which is
exactly that imtended by the author, a
CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS OF
RESEARCH 251
quantitative description of experience which
that listener can verify independently. This
generally means that the results must be
quantitative and expressible in exact terms;
nowadays this means mathematical terms.
However, as C. N. Hinshelwood? of Oxford
reminds us:
Science is not the mere collection of facts,
which are infinitely numerous and mostly unin-
teresting, but the attempt of the human mind to
order these facts into satisfying patterns....
The imposition of design on nature is in fact an
act of artistic creation on the part of the man of
science, though it is subject to a discipline more
exacting than that of poetry or painting.
The methods of scientific research must be
broadened, therefore, to include not only
the exploration of natural phenomena, the
isolation of communicable facts, the con-
firmation of facts by the criterion of repro-
ducibility, but also the construction of
patterns into which valid facts may be fitted
with satisfying consistency. The s¢mpler
the pattern and the more facts 1t accommo-
dates, the more satisfying does it become.
The word “satisfying” is repeated here
because it properly has an esthetic connota-
tion. It must be emphasized, however, the
patterns of which we speak must, like the
facts themselves, be communicable un-
ambiguously from one worker to another. The
great contribution of Newton was not the
observation that apples fall, but the fitting
of this fact quantitatively into the same
pattern that describes the motion of the
planets in their orbits and the expression of
this pattern by a general formula that
conveyed an exact meaning.
This attempt to fit ‘‘facts” into satisfying
patterns with the help of the cohesive bond
of a system of logic is important practically
from three points of view. In the first place,
it facilitates comprehension. An established
pattern is an excellent aid to memory; we
carry around a great deal of knowledge
merely by remembering the pattern and not
overburdening ourselves with isolated facts.
In the second place, a pattern gives us a
basis for understanding by bringing out
relationships among isolated facts or events.
We understand new experiences when we
2 HINSHELWOoD, C.N. The structure of physical
chemistry. Oxford, 1951.
JOURNAL OF
can express them in terms of experiences
already familiar to us.
In the third place, a satisfying pattern
always suggests extensions of itself and,
thereby gives a sound and fertile foundation
for the prediction of new facts or events. In
short, a satisfying pattern (or theory)
enables us to mobilize knowledge for im-
mediate use, not only in the domain of pure
science, but also in the domain of applied
science.
We see that four activities play important
roles in modern scientific research, namely:
(a) exploration, observation, and descrip-
tion, (b) establishment of facts by experi-
ment and by the criterion of reproducibility,
(c) communication in exact and quantitative
terms, and (d) construction of patterns of
facts—the making of theories. However, a
moment’s reflection shows that not one of
these characteristics by itself may be con-
sidered as belonging uniquely to scientific
research. Haploration, observation, and de-
scription are old and common activities of
mankind pursued for pleasure, profit, or
sheer restlessness as well as for scientific
research. The experimental approach to the
acquisition of knowledge is practiced by
every healthy infant. Empirical methods of
acquiring facts have long been the stock im
trade of the practitioners of the useful arts,
the farmers, the smiths, and the medical
men. Reproducibility as a criterion for the
validation of experience is an elementary
step in the learning process of all humans
and animals. The coincidence of the stories
of several witnesses has long been the meas-
ure of the validity of evidence in courts of
law. Thus even the high place given to
reproducibility in modern research does not
imply that it is a property unique to science.
The construction of refined patterns express-
ing human thought and experience has been
practiced by creative artists from time im-
memorial. Common sense is nothing more
than the application of patterns of experience
which every rational human being weaves
day by day to form part of the mental
equipment with which to guide his actions
throughout life. Quantitative communication
of facts and ideas has long been found to be
an essential practice by the merchant, the
banker, the artisan, and the engineer.
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 8
The something the differentiates modern
scientific research from the speculations of
the Greeks or the empiricism of the Arabs is
to be found, not in isolated methods or
activities, but in the application of a com-
plete system. It is in the balanced interplay of
the four activities I have mentioned in an
integrated system that the something, or the
characteristic, unique to modern scientific
research is to be found. It is a system whose
operation has given it the power for steady
and accelerating progress.
By way of introduction to an illustration
of this system, let me say what I mean by
the word system. I would define a system as
an integrated assembly of interacting ele-
ments designed to carry out cooperatively
certain predetermined functions. These ele-
ments may be electrical, electronic or
mechanical components, living cells, institu-
tions, or even human activities. For example,
we may be given a box full of radio tubes,
resistors, condensors, transformers, loud
speakers, wire, etc., such as is provided by
a Heathkit. This, however, will not receive
electromagnetic waves at one end and turn
out beautiful music at the other-the elements
must be brought together into a working,
energized system. This we may do with
proper attention to matching the compo-
nents to each other and connecting up the
circuits in the proper way, after which the
elements will all interact and cooperate to
give the results we want. In any system, the
nature of the elements themselves, their
matching with each other, and the direct
and feedback links (communications) joining
them are of equal importance. Fig. 1 gives in
block diagram form a system of human
activities interacting in a series of circuits to
produce the results characteristic of scientific
research. Starting from the observation of
phenomena or events, the results of explora-
tion and description, we proceed to establish
facts by careful experiment and to confirm
them by communicating them to others for
independent verification. This chain is
shown by diagonal red and green arrows.
Simultaneously, a very important circuit
involving the upper three red blocks is
activated. This circuit represents what
Claude Bernard, the French physiologist,
called the ‘interplay of experimental theory
Aveust 1957
and experimental practice.’”’ From the
observation and careful study of phenomena
or events, facts are obtained which may then
be fitted together in an experimental pattern,
Le.. a working hypothesis. If the facts fit
well into a generalization, the latter im-
mediately suggests new subjects for observa-
tion or new experiments from which come
new facts and so the activity in the circuit
builds up, and with it, confidence in_ the
validity of the facts and the consistency of the
theory. On the other hand, if the facts do
not fit into a recognized pattern, one must
first make a further study of their validity
to ensure that they have not been vitiated
by some error; and errors may arise in very
subtle ways. At the same time, it may be
necessary to reexamine the pattern or
theory and, if necessary, modify it to accom-
modate the new facts. The process is a cyclic
one and only when the facts and the expert-
mental theory fit together, can we be content
with either. The product of this circuit is a
satisfying pattern or general theory (lowest
red box) which enables us to understand the
phenomena or events in the field of study,
OBSERVATION OF
PHENOMENA
HYPOTHETICAL
PATTERNS
CONSTRUCTION OF
SATISFYING PATTERNS
(THEORIES
STP IUR RETRY f
11
=
COMPREHENSION
UNDERSTANDING
PREDICTION
GIBSON: CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS OF
ESTABLISHMENT OF
EXPERIMENTAL FACTS
RESEARCH 203
whieh comprehends all the facts, links them
with facts from other fields and enables us
to predict verifiable new phenomena or
events. It represents the major theories or
patterns which accommodate large bodies of
facts such as the Laws of Thermodynamics,
the Laws of Motion, the Theory of Rela-
tivity, the Quantum Theory, Maxwell’s
Electromagnetic Equations, the Mendelian
Laws, ete.
The green arrows represent the circuit in
which facts and theories are subjected to
scrutiny and verification by others. It is also
the circuit in which new minds with fresh
experiences can extend valid facts and
amplify consistent theories.
The diagram brings out two very im-
portant feedback circuits. In order to extend
and integrate the patterns and to assay their
consistency over wide ranges of facts, it has
been found necessary to seek for facts in
every region susceptible to precise observa-
tion. The new substances, instruments, and
techniques—we may even include concepts—
discovered and developed in the course of
one series of researches may be used to
DEVELOPMENT OF
NEW TECHNIQUES
AND INSTRUMENTS
INDEPENDENT
VERIFICATION
RED
BLUE
Yj GREEN
YELLOW
Fic. 1.—Regenerative circuits in scientific research.
254 JOURNAL OF THE
explore into new regions for more facts.
The build-up in the circuit due to this
positive feedback has been most spectacular;
indeed the history of natural philosophy is
marked by milestones, each indicating the
discovery of a new device or technique which
opened up to human experience regions that
were hitherto inaccessible. These devices
were means to an end, but the end would
never have been achieved without the means.
Telescopes, microscopes, X-rays, radio-
activity, cyclotrons, chemical analysis, elec-
tronics, highspeed computing machines,
have all been means of opening up new
continents for valid experiences.
The red arrow leading into the top box
(observations of phenomena and events) also
indicates a positive feedback, the auto-
catalytic effect of understanding. A satis-
factory theory or pattern of facts broadens
and deepens understanding, pointing the
way to new fruitful fields where facts of
significance, interest and potential for
application are likely to be discovered. It
helps research men to make more intelli-
gently the most important decision of all,
namely the choice of problems in which to
invest years of their lives. With the aid of
new instruments, techniques and methods,
both experimental and theoretical, these
decisions may be implemented and_ the
investigators may pursue their researches
into new and more complex fields with in-
creasing facility and confidence.
There are regions of interest in science
where it is not possible to make precise
observations or accumulate facts under
completely controlled conditions. In such
cases the system works in a deductive mode
through the feedback from “satisfying
patterns” to observation. In cosmogony or
petrogenesis for example, it 1s not practical
to build up a theory of the origin of the
universe or of rocks from reproducible facts
obtained from direct observation of the
processes concerned. However, starting
from a comprehensive pattern of facts from
physics and chemistry and certain assump-
tions, it is possible to draw a theoretical
picture of the origin of the universe or rocks
in sufficient detail that certain critical con-
sequences which are susceptible to observa-
tion may be deduced. Facts extracted from
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 8
observations may then be compared with
those deduced from theory. The history of |
the sciences I have mentioned shows clearly
that as our satisfying patterns grow in depth
and breadth, the deductions drawn lead
to more and more pertinent and refined
observations and our confidence in them
grows accordingly. This circuit has found
wide application in attacks on complicated
problems or those dealing with past or future
events. Its power depends on the existence of
broadly based established patterns of facts,
a condition which is sometimes not fully
appreciated in attempts to apply “‘scientific
methods” in new or complicated fields.
There is no loop in the diagram where
negative feedback exists. Those who are
familiar with electronics, automatic control,
or the theory of chemical equilibrium, will
recognize at once that this is a condition for
rapid, nay even explosive, build-up of
activity in the system. Indeed, we may
reasonably conclude that there is built into
scientific research itself, a mechanism that
can produce a continually accelerating expan-
sion, a mechanism that has the power of
breaking down the barriers that at any
given time prevent exploration into partic-
ular regions of nature, a mechanism that
makes undefinable the limitations imposed
on the system.
If we look more closely into what goes on
in the operation of the system we find that a
predominating fraction of the effort is con-
sumed in processes of refinement, in the
struggle against dirt and noise. Dirt, or
matter in the wrong place, I take as symbolic
of contamination of inanimate origin; noise,
I take as in physics and engineering, to
symbolize random, irrelevant or meaningless
information. These refining processes occur
at every stage, facts must be refined from
dirt and noise; confusion, prejudice, ir-
relevance, must. be winnowed out of our
hypotheses; communications must be freed
from the noise of uncertanty of language so
that the exact signals may be detected;
finally the ultimate patterns of facts, the
theories, must be freed from all contamina-
tions from the human mind.
In passing, I might remark that these
refining processes are often tiresome and
prosaic. They require the focussing of
|
}
I
|
|
Aveust 1957
imagination, ingenuity, tireless industry, and
meticulous care on apparently restricted
problems such as the purification of an ele-
ment or compound, or the establishment of
a measurement to another decimal place.
This is the price of facts. However, this
price often buys much more than refinement
of fact or measurement. It has bought
essential bridgeheads to new continents of
systematic knowledge. In 1871 Clerk Max-
well wrote:
But the history of science shows that even
during the phase of her progress in which she
devotes herself to improving the accuracy of the
numerical measurements of quantities with which
she has long been familiar, she is preparing the
materials for the subjugation of new regions,
which would have remained unknown if she had
been contented with the rough methods of the
early pioneers... .
He illustrated this statement by citing the
far reaching consequences of the accurate
and systematic measurements of the earth’s
magnetic field made by the professional and
amateur observers associated with the
Magnetic Union organized by Gauss and
Weber—an example of “experiments in
concert” as Bacon put it, or “team research”
as it is called today. The increase in the
accuracy and completeness of magnetic
observations made and reduced by this
small army of collaborators opened up fields
of research hardly suspected to exist in the
light of knowledge gained by cruder methods
and less complete surveys. The studies of
cosmic rays give a modern example of
refinement and extension of observation with
the opening up of brand new areas of
research.
The efforts of many chemists during the
nineteenth century to determine atomic
weights with greater and greater accuracy
is an example par excellence of the far reach-
ing consequences of the attempts to refine
measurements. In a literal sense this was a
struggle against dirt. The purification of
the elements and all chemicals combining
with them, the exactness of the analyses
and the final reference back to the standard
element were operations typical of the
lengths to which this struggle must go. I
need hardly remind you that these efforts
gave us much more than some exact atomic
GIBSON: CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS OF RESEARCH 255
weights. They gave us a large segment of
the experimental science of gravimetric anal-
ysis. They led directly to the concept of a fam-
ily relationship among the elements, to the
detection of isotopes (you will remember that
the value of 1.008 for the atomic weight of
hydrogen led to the search for deuterium),
to the concept of a common origin and set of
building blocks for all atoms; in short, it led
toa large fraction of present day quantitative
knowledge of the atom. In biochemistry
today, we are witnessing the start of a highly
productive payoff for the work invested by
countless men and women in isolating, puri-
fying, and studying many of the complex mol-
ecules occurring in nature.
In the past decade a multimillion-dollar
technology has grown out of the relentless
urge of research investigators to refine their
materials; I refer to the manufacture and use
of transistors, where elements such as
germanium and silicon must be purified to
less than one part of impurity in 100 million
in order that the requisite properties may be
realized.
Efforts to refine hypotheses and theories
are just as important to the progress of
scientific research as those devoted to
purification or measurement.
The Atomic Hypothesis of Dalton is an
excellent example of the bad results that
may follow if a theory is not refined with
great care. The doctrine that all atoms of
the same element were identical and that
atoms were indivisible and indestructible
were all irrelevant to the core of Dalton’s
theory, namely, a mass quantum theory of
chemical reactions. Yet many tempers and
much sleep were lost by estimable scientists
before these irrelevant ideas were discarded.
It is interesting to note that in 1831, Faraday
published a paper in which he discussed the
nature of the atom in terms of a very refined
mixture of hypothesis and experiment. His
picture of the atom as a whole is satisfying
even today.
Turning next to noise, confusion, and
general contamination of human origin, I
should like to quote from Roger Bacon:
The four stumbling blocks to truth: the in-
fluence of fragile or unworthy authority, custom,
the imperfections of undisciplined senses, the
concealment of ignorance by ostentation of seem-
ing wisdom.
JOURNAL OF THE
Three of these stumbling blocks obviously
are the results of impurities of thought and
communication introduced by human
agencies.
When uncontaminated by human failings,
scientific research is essentially a very
democratic activity. It recognizes neither
the authority of the dominant personality
nor that of the brilliant intellect, although
it acknowledges the contributions of both.
The motto of the Royal Society of London,
nullius in verba which, freely translated,
means ‘‘we don’t take anybody’s word for
it,” expresses a very fundamental attitude
in scientific communications. Many types of
mind must bring their pecular attributes
and experience to bear on a difficult problem
before all the facts are validated and fitted
into a satisfactory pattern. This cannot be
done if tradition and personal authority
confuse the issue by spurious weighting of
evidence. The validity of facts and the
sufficiency of theories must be evaluated
without reference to their sponsorship; the
valid facts discovered by the young student
can overthrow the theory of an authority.
Towards the end of his life, Newton was told
of some astronomical observations (later
proved invalid) that contradicted the
Newtonian system. He replied, “It may be
so, there is no arguing against facts and
experiment.”
Communications, open discussion and pub-
lications, furnish invaluable means for re-
fining observations, experimental facts and
theories from the taint of the human per-
sonality. Few investigators are mentally
equipped to exploit or to view critically all
facets of a subject, but having solved a prob-
lem relating to one or more facets of a sub-
ject, and published his results, an investi-
gator brings other facets to the attention of
colleagues of different mental attributes and
experience raising new and fertile problems
in their minds.
It is not too fanciful to look upon com-
munications, that 1s to say verbal discussion
and written publications, as the life blood of
scientific research. In flowing through the
system, this life blood vitalizes and purifies
it, vitalizing it by bringing food for imagina-
tion from one element to another, and puri-
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, NO. 8
fying it by progressive elimination of dirt —
and noise. The vigor and the standards of —
scientific research in any country or in any —
age depend, therefore, on the free flow of
this vital stream. From many quarters we
hear today that ‘“‘there is a shortage of basic
research in this country”? which I presume
means that our research either lacks vitality
or excellence in standard. It might be well to
scrutinize our communications system to see
if anything is wrong there. I think it will be
found that our publications are copious and
a large proportion of the work excellent, but
publication is ceasing to be a channel in the
communications flow back and forth but
rather a broadcast station with a transmitter
at one end and few if any tuned receivers at
the other. In short, papers are not read by
many, partly because reading is becoming
somewhat of a lost art, partly because many
papers give the impression of not being
written to be read, partly because people
haven’t the time, but chiefly because of the
sheer mass of articles which fill our numerous
journals. I think this absence of feedback is
a phenomenon worthy of the attention of
those who wish to keep research strong in
quality and quantity, and avoid the evils of
indigestion. Even when papers are read be-
fore scientific meetings, little if any critical
discussion ensues; indeed when such occurs
it is often regarded as “poor taste.”’ I don’t
know whether vigorous discussion of a sub-
ject is the source or the product of the en-
thusiasm of its propnents, but I do feel it is
very diagnostic of the subject’s vitality.
From the foregoing discussion, we can
summarize several important characteristics
of scientific research.
1. Scientific research is a system in which a
number of commonplace human activities
act and interact cooperatively to produce the
end result. The system has the power of
indefinite expansion; the barriers beyond
which it cannot expand are still undefined.
Refinement of facts, concepts. hypotheses,
communications and theories from all con-
tamination either inanimate or human is an
essential process not only in establishing the
soundness of results but also in keeping
research vigorous and fertile.
3. Scientific research is a very democratic ac-
tivity in which many minds cooperate to give
sound results. Exact communications are its
life blood,
wo
AvueGust 1957
Observations of the transient material
world lead to facts of permanent value. The
significance of facts, however, lies in the con-
sistent and satisfying patterns into which
they are woven. The design transcends the
substance.
CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS
In opening a discussion of the cultural
implications of scientific research it might
be well for me to define what I understand
by culture. Depending on their natural en-
vironment, human societies have spent vary-
ing amounts of time and effort in the struggle
for food, shelter from the elements, and pro-
tection from enemies. However, even in most
primitive societies or in societies beset by a
relentless struggle for existence, a certain
amount of time and effort has been allotted
to making provision for physical, mental,
esthetic, and spiritual comfort—I use the
term comfort to mean relief from distresses,
perplexities, and conflicts. The depth ana
breadth of the culture that a society develops
depend on (a) the amount of time and effort
it can afford from the struggle for existence
to spend on the enhancement of its physical,
intellectual, esthetic and spiritual comfort,
and (b) on the balance it achieves among the
physical, intellectual, esthetic and spiritual
components. These factors are reflected in
two commonly accepted definitions of the
word culture. The first defines a culture as
“the concepts, habits, skills, arts, imstru-
ments, institutions, etc., of a given people
at a given period.’”’ The second meaning de-
notes the processes which promote the train-
ing and refining of the mind, the emotions,
manners, taste, etc., and the result of this,
namely refinement of thought, emotion,
manners, and taste.
Taking the word in the sense of the first
definition, the rapidly growing contributions
of scientific research to the culture of many
countries of the world in the mid-twentieth
century hardly require emphasis. Tradition-
ally, the useful arts and the fine arts have
provided us with the skills, the tools, the
instruments, the materials and the designs
of all that enriches our lives and promotes
our welfare and comfort. Wedded to the use-
ful arts, scientific research has produced
modern technology. The understanding
GIBSON: CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS OF
RESEARCH 257
which is the product of scientific research has
become the catalyst responsible for the enor-
mous progress of technology with its enor-
mous capacity to devise and produce the
new things that constitute the material side
of present day living. It is interesting to note
that during 1956, at the Union Carbide and
Carbon Corporation approximately one-
third of the total sales and one-half of the
net income came from new products and
processes not available 15 years ago. It is
only within the past 30 years that the results
of scientific research have really had a big
impact on the art of medicine. This impact
is now producing a revolution in the healing
arts, and I thik the real contributions of
scientific research in this area are still to be
made.
The progress of technology is also extend-
ing the scope and enjoyment of the fine arts.
Those of you who heard Mr. Evans at the
last meeting of the Academy will agree with
me that photography, especially color pho-
tography, offers almost unbounded possibili-
ties for the presentation of objects, subjects,
ideas or abstractions in graphic form. Ad-
vances in the arts of recording, transmission
and reproduction of music with high fidelity
have brought the best in music to an ever
widening audience—with noteworthy in-
crease in appreciators of good music and
general refinement of taste. The cultural po-
tentialities of television are too obvious to
require emphasis. Perhaps the greatest im-
plication of scientific research in this mate-
rial field is the promise it holds that through
technology civilized societies will be able to
take more and more effort away from the
daily struggle for food, shelter, and safety
and devote it to the fulfillment of their in-
tellectual and spiritual aspirations.
Scientific research is, however, a cultural
activity in its own right and its contribu-
tions to the refinement of thought, customs,
and values extend into nonmaterial realms.
I have attempted to show you that a study
of its methods and standards furnishes a
transparent example of the kinds of effort
that must be expended in the achievement of
refinement of knowledge, thought and judg-
ment and of the enormous payoffs in the
opening up of new vistas of knowledge that
accrue from the investment of this effort.
258
Let us look briefly at some of the implica-
tions of this study, starting in the field of
education.
A liberal education of the youth is the
foundation of sound cultural civilization, its
objective bemg to cultivate qualities of
mind, to nourish and exercise those faculties
and powers of judgment that are required
for leadership in disciplined intellectual ac-
tivity. I suggest that this objective requires
that the following characteristics be culti-
rated in the growing mind.
1. The capacity for clear and fluent communica-
tion with other people, with the outside
world and with oneself. This means the cul-
tivation of powers of accurate observation,
description, speech, reading and writing.
2. The capacity for acquiring and retaining a
varied store of knowledge and experience, to
build up a well-stocked mental inventory.
3. Habits of discipline and continued critical
analysis to distinguish valid from irrelevant
experience, to build up a standard of values.
4. The capacity to build acquired knowledge
and experience into consistent patterns of
thought, the power to use the patterns as
basis for understanding and judgment.
5. Cultivation of imagination, to extend pat-
terns of thought through association of
ideas, to predict consequences of real or
hypothetical actions, and to project estab-
lished understanding into new realms of new
experience.
. The cultivation of courage to act on these
predictions.
lor)
Armed with such mental equipment, a
man can rise to intellectual eminence in any
walk of life. The considerations I have ad-
vanced in describing the system of activities
that make up scientific research suggest
strongly that a properly oriented study of
any one of the mature sciences such as chem-
istry, physics or biology, its history and
methodology, can go far in promoting the
erowth and exercise of the mental faculties
I have summarized. In other words, ‘“‘prop-
erly oriented” science courses can make a
big contribution to a liberal education for
those who do not intend to follow courses in
science as well as for those who do. The term
“properly oriented” has been repeated ad-
visedly because I feel that the full contribu-
tion of science courses to liberal education
cannot be realized by those now given. To
my mind a properly oriented course would
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 8
give the student a firm grasp of the discipline
and methods of scientific research, apprecia-
tion of the power of these methods in all
realms of thought through historical ex-
amples, a clear idea of the importance of
removal of dirt and noise in assembling the
facts and making the patterns that form his
criteria of consistency in making judgments
and finally enough knowledge of the content
of the science to provide vistas for his im-
agination. Such courses might well be ex-
tended over at least two years of the under-
graduate curriculum, possibly starting in the
last year of high school, The benefits to be
gained are twofold. In the first place, stu-
dents who do not intend to follow careers in
science would have a chance to get a lasting
appreciation of the methods and standards
of scientific research and an appreciation of
its contributions to epistemology. In the
second place, such courses combined with
other studies such as languages and litera-
ture would form the liberal education needed
by those who are to specialize in a particular
branch of science, giving them a chance to
combine their liberal education with the fun-
damentals of their professional traiming.
Valuable as such courses may be, I must
emphasize that there is no substitute for re-
search study in an enlightened graduate
school for the student who really wishes to
understand the real nature of and acquire
the discipline of scientific research. It is to
be regretted that so few men fitted tempera-
mentally for careers in administration or
public affairs are encouraged to take ad-
vanced degrees in science as a foundation
for their life’s work.
REFINEMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS
Communications play a very important
part in all our cultural life. In literature,
painting, sculpture, music, the artist 1s con-
cerned with searching for fundamental
truths, either concrete or abstract, and ex-
pressing them in a form that conveys the
meaning perceived by the artist to sophisti-
cated observers. The imagination and insight
of the artist enables him to see the signifi-
cance in certain scenes, events, or other hu-
man experiences and his craftsmanship
enables him to express these ideas in a form
that holds the attention of the observer and
Aveust 1957 GIBSON:
arouses in his mind a vision similar to that
sensed by the artist. The actual ideas con-
jured up in the mind of the observer may
differ somewhat from those of the artist or
of another observer depending on the back-
ground of experience each brings to the work
of art. The scientist with imagination sees
the significant facts in certain phenomena
and weaves the facts into satisfying patterns
that he can communicate to others. The
resemblance is obvious, but there is one
great point of difference, the artist uses his
form and pattern to convey ideas qualita-
tively to his audience, the scientist must
convey his ideas, facts and patterns quante-
tatively so that his audience, regardless of
background, understands exactly what he
means. The scientist must think like an art-
ist and talk like a bookkeeper. Hence, the
artist is free to deal with any subject no
matter how complicated; the scientist, how-
ever, because of the requirement of exact-
ness in communications, has, up to the
present, had to deal only with very simple
subjects. We have seen, however, that this
limitation need not be permanent.
However, the requirement for quantitative
communication in scientific research 1s
worth all that it costs and more. It has been
responsible for preserving the integrity of
science from one generation to another and
for enabling men in all countries and in all
ages to add their contributions to a steadily
growing structure of systematic knowledge.
Surely the realization of the invaluable part
that exact communications have played in the
advancement of science should commend its
introduction into many other phases of our
culture. However, there seems to be no de-
crease in the amount of time, energy, and
emotion dissipated by misunderstandings
generated by inexact communications in our
daily lives. Modern propaganda seems to be
a noise amplifier designed to transmit any-
thing but an exact signal. The discriminating
power of the human mind to detect true sig-
nals in the noise seems to be declining.
DYNAMIC IMPLICATIONS
The dynamic implications of scientific re-
search have considerable cultural interest.
We have seen that scientific research as a
system has the capability of advancing sci-
CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS OF RESEARCH 259
ence at an ever accelerating rate, and even
today this expansion is bordering on the
explosive. Indeed, so rapid is this expansion
that it is almost meaningless to speak of
science as if, any any given time, it had a
definite value or even a bounded entity. Re-
alization of this fact should make us very
wary of generalizations that purport to state
what Science (with a capital 8) can or can-
not do. Recently I read this statement of an
eminent scientist: ‘Among the failures, one
must also include science. In fact, its failure
to realize and fulfill its social function is
probably the most unfortunate of them all.”’
This is comparable to charging a boy of nine
with failure because he has not shown the
maturity and achievement of a man of forty.
Fifty years ago chemistry was considered
to be afairly well-advanced science, but it had
little to contribute to the understanding of
the functions of the human body or the cure
of disease, even though the subject had been
of interest to many chemists for decades.
Had chemistry failed? I hardly think so; it
had not grown up enough. A continuation of
research in the fundamentals of chemistry
and biochemistry, following lines established
even fifty years ago, has changed this situa-
tion to a point where medical men are turn-
ing more and more to chemistry for an
understanding of their problems and _ for
materials to alleviate or cure human ills.
In 1890 it was affirmed dogmatically, on
the ‘“‘authority of science,” that atoms were
indivisible. “Science had failed to split the
atom.’ Yet researches then under way led
inevitably to techniques for dividing atoms
and liberating incredible stores of energy in
the process.
Judgments, prophesies, and authoritative
statements become extremely hazardous
when we are dealing with a subject whose
future scope and potentialities are so far be-
yond our comprehension. We can make defi-
nite statements about what is known in
science, we may make judgments in limited
areas on the basis of consistency with reason-
ably well established patterns of facts; but
beyond that the wise man speaks only with
care. Nobody has realized this more than
Michael Faraday, who suggested that there
are many times when the scientist suspends
judgment altogether and many times when
260
he would do well to exercise proportionate
judgment rather than absolute judgment.
Faraday invented the term proportionate
judgment to indicate the answer that a man
gives to a question when, after careful study
of the circumstances, he cannot give a defi-
nite answer in the affirmative or negative but
finds that the weight of evidence leans to one
side rather than the other. A proportionate
judgment given in terms of the probability
that a particular conclusion is right can be
extremely valuable in decisions concerning
future courses to take. An absolute judgment
under such conditions can be disastrous. The
cultural implications arising from the dy-
namie nature of scientific research have a far
reaching effect in determining the integra-
tion of science into the larger body of our
culture.
AUTHORITY
Scientific research differs markedly from
many other cultural activities in the attitude
shown to personal authority. In literature,
for example, the brillant critic or the per-
suasive lecturer delivers opinions which meet
wide acceptance not because they have been
proved to be consistent or of great intrinsic
worth but because they are clothed with the
authority of the deliverer. Arbiters of taste
and fashion have exerted great influence in
all ages, on the basis of the personal and
intellectual force of the arbiter. In science,
on the other hand, the acceptance of a
statement of fact or theory depends on its
fulfilling a rigorous set of standards and its
falling into place in the body of systematic
knowledge. Acceptance does not depend on
the personal authority of him who enunci-
ated the fact or theory.
The Laws of Newton would have been
accepted whoever formulated them. This,
however, does not in any way diminish our
debt to the man whose brilliant insight first
drew them to our attention. Looked at in
this way scientific research is a thoroughly
democratic effort. It derives its strength, its
soundness, its standards and its progress
from the cooperative efforts of multitudes of
investigators through a double integration
over space and time. The brilliant mind and
the dominant personality point out new and
fertile regions or weave the results of many
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 8
into an inspired pattern; but only after their
work, as well as that of the humblest gradu- —
ate, goes through the mill of debate and
criticism as it is made part of the heritage of
systematic knowledge.
It is very difficult to make clear and un-
ambiguous statements on the subject of
authority, since the word has many implica-
tions and the listener is apt to understand it
in terms of whatever meaning is uppermost
in his mind. In the more complicated situa-
tions and subjects, authority has an impor-
tant part to play. These are generally situa-
tions where the data cannot be given in
terms of a simple set of communicable facts,
where intuition and judgment based on ex-
perience are of the essence in formulating an
enlightened decision. These situations are
still the rule rather than the exception.
In the fine arts and the useful arts, the
training, capacity, and experience of the ex-
pert places him in a position where his opin-
ion on a subject in his field deserves great
respect. The musician, the painter, the phy-
sician or the surgeon can cultivate intuition
and judgment that clothe them with author-
ity and give to their respective opinions on a
piece of music, a painting, or a rare disease,
a weight in excess of that of the imexperi-
enced person. Worthy authority can lead to
refinement of thought and taste or confidence
in action; “‘fragile or unworthy authority”
‘an lead to the opposite results. How to
distinguish between them?
In problems of human relations, which is
an even more complicated subject, worthy
authority has an important and essential
part to play. To preserve their integrity and
general welfare, all societies have vested au-
thority in a small group, even one individual
whose authority is respected and obeyed.
The methods for choosing those to whom
such authority is delegated and the concen-
tration of authority without abuse of power
have been problems that have plagued man-
kind since before the dawn of history. In
organizations whose existence depends on
the focussing of the efforts of a number of
individuals on a given objective, authority
as represented by one responsible individual
has been found to be essential. Here again
the problems and subjects are complex, the
necessity for concerted action is great and
|
Aveust 1957 GIBSON:
time is of the essence. In any society or or-
ganization, the scientist recognizes consti-
tuted authority in the same way as any
other thinking person.
The deemphasis of personal authority im
scientific research is, therefore, a rather
unique phenomenon and is, I think, a con-
sequence of the requirement for exact com-
munications. This not only confines our
attention to relatively simple subjects, but
also ensures that in consideration of these
subjects all data are expressed in terms that
permit only objective argument.
It might be well to gather together the
thoughts set forth in the preceding pages.
As a cultural activity, scientific research has
led to the refinement of thought, customs,
and values by providing a powerful instru-
ment in mental education and enrichment of
our cultural heritage by diverting excess so-
cial energies away from the ‘‘easy pleasures”’
and from “‘easy authority” into constructive
channels of thought and action; into regions
where objective criteria of consistency may
be set up. It has liberated a large section of
thought from the hypnotizing impacts of the
intellectual exuberance of genius and from
the forensic dominance of the brilliant per-
sonality. By placing human communications
on an exact basis in certain areas of intel-
lectual effort, it has safeguarded our cumula-
tive tradition and demonstrated the clarity-
ing power of the democratic processes of free
criticism and debate.
FUNCTIONS OF AN
MODERN
ACADEMY
WORLD
IN THE
Let me return now to the third topic I
promised in the introduction, namely, the
suggestions of ways in which an Academy
can take advantage of its varied member-
ship to foster the integration of science and
strengthen our relations with other cultural
activities.
The strength of the Academy lies in hay-
ing an active membership, and I am con-
vineed that ordinary meetings similar to
those held by numerous scientific societies
are not adequate means for inspiring activity
in our membership. Meetings built around
famous speakers who can develop clearly
their specialized subjects for the edification
of those in other fields are apt to produce
CULTURAL IMPLICATIONS
OF RESEARCH 261
passivity rather than activity on the part of
the members. There is no better way of in-
ducing widespread activities in a group than
the establishment of a number of committees
to deal with subjects of live interest. Com-
munications flow readily among committee
members and from one committee to an-
other. In recent years the Academy has had
several active committees dealing with prob-
lems in science education especially in high
schools. Although dealing with limited as-
pects of the subject of education, these com-
mittees have shown how much _ vitality
interested groups can bring to an organiza-
tion. They have been most successful in
achieving their objectives and have put the
Academy in the forefront of certain com-
munity movements for the improvement of
science teaching in high schools.
I think there are three important areas of
adult interest in which this example could
be followed and a committee structure set
up. In the first area committees or working
groups could be established to explore and
report on regions of pure and applied re-
search involving several branches of science.
For example, one such committee could prof-
itably consider “automatic control.’ This
subject would bring together neurologists,
physiologists, physicists, mathematicians,
electronic and electromechanical engineers,
and psychologists, all of whom have deep
but varied interest in it. The function of the
group would be to arrange for small discus-
sions of the subject with a view to present-
ing a report to the Academy as a whole,
arranging for a symposium on the subject or
publishing a review in the journal. | have no
doubt that such groups could stimulate
thinking and cross fertilization of ideas as
well as helping the Academy as a whole keep
abreast of a field of interdisciplinary in-
terests.
In the second area committees or working
groups could be set up to explore and
strengthen relations with other groups inter-
ested in cultural pursuits such as literature,
music, the fine arts, the social sciences or
even the Cosmos Club itself. This area is
much less well defined than the first 1 men-
tioned and I think that quick progress
should not be expected. You will recall that
the Columbia Historical Society is one of the
262 JOURNAL OF
oldest societies affliated with the Academy,
but the communications between the two
are so attenuated that it has been difficult
to get a vice-president of the Academy from
that Society. An important part of that
committee would be to develop an apprecia-
tion of the cultural implications of science
among its correspondents. This is a delicate
task but I think it could be approached
through research and group discussion on
the history of science—where the motives,
methods, decisions and consequences attend-
ant on past actions may be studied with
great interest and profit. The great classics
of science also furnish rich material for
studies and reports in this area. If a working
group could bring to scientists and musicians
alike an evening of the charm and grandeur
of Helmholtz’s ‘““On the Sensations of Tone”’
it would earn undying gratitude from both
groups.
The third area is concerned with educa-
tion. I have attempted to show you that
properly oriented courses in one or more of
the sciences have a great contribution to
make to the liberal education of those who
do and those who do not intend to follow
careers in science or engineering. There is a
job for heterogeneous groups of scientists to
do in working out how such courses might
be ‘properly oriented’’ to realize their maxi-
mum effectiveness, report to the Academy
as a whole, and then establish a line of com-
munication with colleges and high schools.
Time has permitted only a sketchy discus-
sion of these proposals and no attempt has
been made to cover all the possibilities. The
important point I wish to leave with you is
that the Academy can make most effective
contributions toward the advancement and
appreciation of scientific research in an age
of specialization if it mobilizes its resources
and organizes its communications along
lines which have proved to be so effective in
research itself.
CONCLUSION
There are four attributes which may be
considered as unique to man and are not
shared by any other forms of animal or plant
life. These are:
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 8
1. The capacity for conceptual thought, i.e. the |
ability to think of and deal with ideas apart ©
from material objects or events.
2. The faculty of true speech, i.e. the ability to
express thoughts and ideas with no limits on
the refinement or exactness of expression
that may be achieved.
3. The ability to devise and use tools.
4. The urge to seek for origins, causes or pat-
terns that involve man but that are beyond
the physical phenomena and forces that make
up his environment.
I think that the analysis we have made
shows how scientific research cultivates and
uses these uniquely human faculties to an
extremely high degree. This in itself is a
direct contribution to the culture of man-
kind.
In this address I have attempted to show
in some detail how scientific research is
really the cooperative activity of men awake,
living and working in a world together. In
the course of our discussion, we have fol-
lowed the consequences of dreaming under
control of the object (or objective) in the
imaginative and systematic application of
the interplay of experimental theory and
experimental practice. We have gone one
step further and suggested that, as the pur-
suit of science goes forward, the human agent
and the object recede into subordination to
the pattern, the design, the logos or Word.
This has the far reaching implication that
scientific research is really not part of the
arrogant humanism that is causing so much
concern to our moral philosophers today.
Far from subscribing to the belief in the self
sufficiency of man to supply all that is
needed for his intellectual and_ spiritual
health, scientific research calls for a deep
humility on the part of its followers, a hu-
mility inspired by the vastness of the un-
known compared with the known, a humil-
ity born of the realization that only through
dependence on his fellow men of all lands
and ages can he ever advance even a step
into this unknown. However, it holds out
the hope that as generation succeeds genera-
tion, mankind can gradually weave from
facts the pattern of creation, a pattern which
transcends the substance that reveals it to
us, a pattern which reflects the authority
from which it ultimately derives.
Aveust 1957
TAUSSKY: DETERMINANTAL INEQUALITY OF ROBERTSON. I
263
MATHEMATICS.—<A _ determinantal inequality of H. P. Robertson, 1.1 OuGa
Taussky, National Bureau of Standards.
(Received April 9, 1957)
The following theorem was proved by
H. P. Robertson [7], who actually was only
interested in a weaker statement. The
theorem concerns a positive definite hermi-
tian matrix H = A + 7B where A and B are
real. It is easy to see that A itself is sym-
metric and positive definite and that B is
skew symmetric. The question is: How
arbitrary are A and B?
THEOREM 1: The matrix H = A + iBis
| positive definite if and only if the ergenval-
ues of tA“ B are real and <1.
Proof: Robertson drew attention only to
the fact that det A > det B. However, his
own proof which is repeated here, in dif-
ferent notation, exhibits the stronger result.
Since 7B is also hermitian, it is known [2]
that there exists a nonsingular matrix 7
such that
where the \’s are the roots of
dems@wAl — 75) = 0.
These roots are known to be real. Since A is
symmetric and B skew symmetric, it follows
that also
det (AA + 7B) = 0.
Hence the \’s appear in pais of numbers
+); or are zero. By the law of inertia, the
hermitian matrix
(ies |
T(A + 71B)T’ = | : |
[ oe
1 The preparation of this paper was supported
(in part) by the Office of Naval Research.
> The present address of the author is California
Institute of Technology.
has only positive eigenvalues. Since with
each 1 + \; also 1 — X; is an eigenvalue we
have |\;| < 1. Conversely, the condition
|A; | < 1 ensures that A + 7B is positive
definite.
In what follows, other relations between
the matrices H, A, B will be discussed.
THEOREM 2: If the matrix H = A + 7B 18
positive definite then
det H < det A
with equality if and only of B = 0.
Proof: We use again the method of proof
employed in Theorem 1. It is clear that
det T(A + 1B)T" < det TAT’
since det T(A + iB)T’ is either IL Oe
II(1 —,?) with | A; | < 1, while det TAT’ =
1. Since det 77” > O, it follows that
det (A + 7B) < det A
unless all }; = 0 in which case equality
occurs. If, however, all 4; = 0, then AB,
being similar to a diagonal matrix, must be
the zero matrix. This implies that B is the
zero matrix since A is nonsingular.
Remark: It can further be shown that all
the elementary symmetric functions (apart
from the first one) of the eigenvalues of
A + 7B are less than the corresponding
elementary symmetric functions of A. This
can be computed with little difficulty, e.g.,
after transforming A + 7B by an orthogonal
similarity which transforms B to canonical
TOPMOST bom ey aie aw winere ray a—
(fe)
minors can then be determined easily.
THEOREM 3: Let a1, a2,°-°:, Q» be the
eigenvalues of A where ay > a. = --: and
or the element 0. The principal
Bi, Bo, °°: , Bn be the eigenvalues of 1B where
i ce [Oy 2a 2257, Magn. Cy = (ye Ihe
050,
Proof: The eigenvalues of A are all pos-
itive and the eigenvalues 8; are of the form
+m,, —m:2, --- with a zero eigenvalue in
264 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
addition in case n is odd. Let my > mo. =
- > m,. > O and assume that all other
eigenvalues of B are negative or zero. It is
sufficient to prove that
a: > Bi, Gea as SOS HP
The following theorem of H. Weyl
(3, p. 445] is used: Let Hy , Hy. be hermitian
n X nmatrices with eigenvalues \i = 2x 2 -+°°,
ONG py 2 fia es
Hy. have the RCN V1
Then
, respectively. Let Hy +
Sy
NS = [0G Ze
BiG oP San le
Apply this theorem to our matrices A and
1B and use the fact that A + 7B is positive
definite. The k smallest eigenvalues of 7B are
—m, < —m. < -:: < — m,. Hence we
obtain for7 = n+ 1—1,71 = 1,2 Deel
the inequalities
Vi4+j-1
?
a; —™M;
0) pe 2, ieee
Remark: K. Fan suggested the following
3 Actually, Weyl proves this inequality only for
the nonnegative eigenvalues. However, by adding
sufficiently large scalar matrices the general case
can be reduced to Weyl’s.
vou. 47, No. 8
generalizations of theorem 1 which are ob-
tainable by the same proof.
Let H, be a positive definite hermitian
matrix, and let H». be a hermitian matrix.
Then H, + H21s positive definite if and only
if the eigenvalues of H,"H, (which are
necessarily real) are all > —l.
This theorem can again be reformulated
in the following form:
Let K, be a positive definite hermitian
matrix and K». a matrix (with complex ele-
ments) such that Ay. is hermitian. Then
KK, is positive definite, if and only if all
eigenvalues of K» are real and >0. This can
be obtained from the theorem above if we
replace H», by the hermitian matrix
KG (Kae
Alternative and further developments were
suggested by A. J. Hoffman, M. Marcus, and
I. Reiner.
REFERENCES
[1] Ropertson, H. P. An indeterminacy relation
for several observables and its classical inter-
pretation. Phys. Rev. 9: 794-801. 1934.
[2] vAN DER WABRDEN, B. L. Moderne Algebra IT.
Berlin, 1931.
[3] Wryt, H. Das asymptotische Verteilungs-
gesetz der KHigenwerte linearer partveller
Differentialgleichungen. Math. Ann. 71: 441-
479. 1912.
MATHEMATICS.—A determinantal inequality of H. P. Robertson, IT. Marvin
Marcus,! University of British Columbia and National Bureau of Standards.
(Communicated by O. Taussky.)
(Received April 9, 1957)
Introduction and notation.—The results in
this note are a continuation of those in the
previous paper |Taussky; 7].
We use the following notation throughout
unless otherwise indicated: A and B are
positive definite Hermitian (p.d.H.) n-
square complex matrices. The eigenvalues of
an arbitrary matrix X will be denoted by
\,(X) and if these are real then \;(X) <
Nj41(X) is assumed. We use dX] to denote
the determinant of XY. If A is p.d.H. then
A‘? will denote the p.d.H. determination
of the square root of A. The 7‘ elementary
1This work was completed while the author
was a National Research Council—National Bureau
of Standards postdoctoral associate.
symmetric function of the eigenvalues of
X is H,(X). Let w, denote a typical ordered
sequence of integers satisfying 1 < 7, <
> <1, <n; by Xw, we mean the principal
submatrix of X with row and column in-
dices w,. We list for later reference the
standard results:
(i) A is p.d.H. with the same eigenvalues as
A;
(ii) if H = A — A is of dimension n = 2s
then -d[Hi]) <-> 0! if %s) ismoddiand
d|H| > 0 if s is even. If n is odd
then d[H] = 0;
Gil) if ay, --- , %, kh Sn, formyantortho-
normal (o.n.) set then
Qo = d{{ (Aa; z LBP ST ont] = Qi
Aveust 1957
where Q; is the least product obtain-
able using & of the eigenvalues of A
as factors, and Q» is the largest such
product.
Results. We prove first the following
Theorem 1.
@/[A + BP
> dinf[A
(1)
— BP + 4d'/[AB].
and equality occurs in (1) tf and only if
| (2)
BEA. ASB = ef
| for a constant c > 2
Proof. From the identity
@ +p? = ( —p? + 4¢
we compute that
d'"(A + BP = d'"[Ald’"W + AB]
[A]
II (1 + 4(AcB))2"
[1 = a,(A “B))
= #7414]
Ne n
+ 4);(A“B)] je
By means of the Hélder mequality we have
d'"(A aL By > d’"(A] a (1 cos De (AlmelS))) ae
j=1
i x ph
71
= d'"[Ald""I — A “BY
alg 4q™ "A Bld’[A]
Seine = Bip Ad: cA Bi
Equality in the above inequality can occur
if and only if
( — X;(AB))? = 4h X,(AB)
for 7 = 1,--:, n and h a non-negative
constant. Thus
MG == Tal) = Ae S020)
where H is the p.d.H. matrix A71W?BA~2.
We conclude then that
MARCUS: DETERMINANTAL INEQUALITY OF ROBERTSON. II
(I = H) = Ahd.
Expanding and simplifying yields (2).
Corollary 1.
(3) d[A + B) = |d[A — B]| + 2"d'[AB].
For the case B = A this generalizes and
connects Robertson’s inequality with theo-
rem IT in [/].
Corollary 2. Jf 1 < r < n then
(EY) a7 OS oil EA — A) = 0:
(b) af r = 2s for s odd then
EA —A) > 2"E,(A) —E,(A + A);
(c) af r = 2s for s even then
EA —A) < EA + A) —27E,(A).
Proof. (a) is immediate. Consider (b).
Then
d\(A —A)w,| = —|d[(A — A)a,] |
= —|d[Aw, — Aw] |
> —d[Aw, + Aw,| + 2’d[Aw,]
by Corollary 1. Hence
pA = A) = di = A) el
> 2° Yi dlAw] — Di dl(A + A)o,]
Or
SGA) = TEC Se A),
Part (c) is proved in a similar way.
Theorem 2. Let 1 < k < n. Then
k k
(a) [J n,(4 + 4) = 2° TJ a,(4);
(b) if A — A is nonsingular and k = 2s
then
k
Wir + 4) > I Nee (An = Ay)
7—1
k
+ 4] a7/"(4).
j=1
(c) if A — A isnonsingular and k = 28+
1 then
Lie ad a LL) SEC SW)
266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
s k
10, Neuen A TS A) + 4 II Ne CAD)
j=1 g=1
Proof.
(a) Let 21,---, a be an on. set of
eigenvectors of A + A correspond-
ing respectively to \3(4 + A),
,\.(A + A). Then by Theorem
1, G) and (11) we have
k
IT. (A + A)
d\((A sale A) a; , £ Di, j=1,-+-+,k
al(Aa:, 2;) + (Az; , z;)]
od" |(Ax;, 2) | [(Aa;, 2,)]
IV
k
2" TT a3?(4)a3?(A)
j=
-
I
we
\j(A).
(b) Since A — A is non-singular 1 = 2m
and the eigenvalues are +
Nain Cat Ag IL ooh ape
Let 21, --°, 2%. correspond to
An(A 5 Nn—sr1(A == A)
ma TA race
and %s.41,°°:, X correspond to
= Aa AN), oe,
Ne aerenlVAl 7a A)
respectively where the vectors
Y1, °°: , vt are on. eigenvectors of
A —A. Then
i6t Ne al(A i A)
71
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 8
= d"(((A — A)z;, 2;)]
= d""|(Az; , x) — (Az, , x]
< d'"[(Aa; 5 v;) + (Az; ; x;)|
= 4d (Az, 2,)\d Acre
< d'*(((A =P A)a; ry x;)|
k
— 4 JT n7/*(A)aj*(4)
j=l
k
< ID. yt oa (A +
2
A) 42 bes Gey
j=1
The proof of (c) is done in a similar way.
By direct methods resembling those of H.
Wielandt [2] and G. Pélya [3] we derive
from (a) above that af f 7s such a function
that f(e"!, e°, e'*) is increasing in each
t; , convex and symmetric, then
flan, Ge) Seyi(Gie eee)
where a, > ++: > a, and By >
are respectively the eigenvalues of A and
(Ay == 7472), Wer omitpathe straight-for-
ward proof.
REFERENCES
{1] Taussky, O. A determinantal inequality of H. P.
Robertson, I. Journ. Washington Aead. Sci.
47: 263-264. 1957.
[2] Potya, G. Remark on Weyl’s note: Inequalities
between the two kinds of eigenvalues of a
linear transformation. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci.
36; 49-51. 1950.
[3] WreLanpt?, H. An extremum property of sums of
eigenvalues. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 1.6: 106-
110. 1955.
I do not know what I may appear to the world; but to myself I seem to have
been only like a boy playing on the seashore, and diverting myself in now and
then finding a smoother pebble or a prettier shell than ordinary, while the great
ocean of truth lay all undiscovered before me.—Isaac NEWTON
Aveust 1957 SHALOWITZ: A.
HISTORY OF SCIENCE.W—Alexander Dallas Bache
D. BACHE—PIONEER
SCIENTIST 267
pioneer American scientist.
A. L. SHatowrrz, United States Coast and Geodetic Survey.
(Received June 18, 1957)
The year 1957 marks the sesquicentennial
of the signing into law by President Thomas
Jefferson of the Organic Act of February 10,
1807, creating what is today known as the
Coast and Geodetic Survey. In commemo-
rating this historic event, which set in motion
the machinery for surveying and charting
our coastal regions in aid of foreign and do-
mestic commerce, it is fitting that we re-
member the name of Alexander Dallas
Bache who directed the work of the Survey
for nearly a quarter of a century during its
difficult, formative period.
Bache, a great grandson of Benjamin
Franklin, was born in Philadelphia in 1806
during a challenging period in the history of
our country. Although we had already passed
what John Fiske has termed ‘‘the critical
period in American history,” grave political
problems still faced the young nation. It was
a period of growth coupled with uncertainty,
and whether we were to remain strong and
indivisible was not to be determined until
several decades later. It was important that
wise leaders emerge to direct the political
future of the country; it was equally impor-
tant that men of vision and strong person-
ality emerge to guide the scientific thought
of the Nation. Alexander Dallas Bache was
one of those who met that challenge.
TRAINING AND BACKGROUND
During his lifetime Bache held many re-
sponsibilities, any one of which might have
been considered the successful culmination
of a hife’s work and ambition. As a West
Point cadet, he distinguished himself by his
scholastic excellence, graduating at the head
of his class at the age of 19. At 22 he was
named to the faculty of the University of
Pennsylvania as professor of natural philos-
ophy and chemistry. In addition to his eight
years at the University, his service to Amer-
ican education included the presidency of
two of our foremost schools—Girard College
and the Central High School of Philadelphia;
the general superintendency of a city school
system; and the publication of a monu-
mental work on European education result-
ing from two years of intensive study abroad.
Bache’s interests were varied. As early as
1830 he had set up a small magnetic observ-
atory in the yard of his home, and there, for
the first time in this country, determined
accurately the periods of the daily variations
of the magnetic needle. By another series of
observations he developed a relationship be-
tween the variations in the direction of the
magnetic force and the appearance of the
aurora borealis. He was responsible for es-
tablishing a magnetic observatory on the
grounds of Girard College in 1840, the first
such observatory in North America. And
from the minute survey of the track of a
tornado, he established the fact that the
effects of the storm were due to an ascend-
ing and progressive column of air by which
all objects were drawn inward, without any
whirling motion at or near the ground as had
been supposed.
His association with the Franklin Institute
gave his research a practical turn. He was
made principal director of a committee of
the Institute investigating the causes of
bursting steam boilers which had been tak-
ing heavy toll of human hfe and property.
He studied the comparative corrosion of
metals by salt water and ascertained by ex-
periment the value of water as a moving
power.
SUPERINTENDENCY OF THE COAST SURVEY
The crowning achievement of Bache’s ca-
reer came on December 12, 18438, when
President Tyler named him to the superin-
tendency of the Coast Survey, upon the
death of Ferdinand Hassler. It is this period
of his life that is significant in this sesqui-
centennial of the Survey. His selection to this
important scientific and technical post had
the concurrence of all the principal scientific
and literary institutions of the country and
of many in Europe. It was said that no such
weight of commendation was ever brought
268
at any time in support of a candidate for
office on purely intellectual grounds.
Bache attained preeminence while serving
as head of the Survey. He possessed by na-
ture those qualities most conducive to suc-
cess in the management of widely extended
public interests. An orderly and _ scientific
mind, combined with administrative ability
of a high order, enabled him to cope success-
fully with the many organizational problems
that faced his administration and to govern
and guide the diverse elements of the vast
undertaking with tact and skill. In this char-
acteristic he was almost the antithesis of his
predecessor, which perhaps accounts for
Hassler’s administrative difficulties and of
Bache’s success. Hassler had no patience
with Congressional investigations that ques-
tioned his management. Bache’s conciliatory
and magnanimous nature, on the other hand,
won for him the respect and cooperation of
those with whom or under whom he had to
work. No better example of this could be
had than the letter which Secretary of the
Treasury Spencer wrote to Bache at the time
of his resignation from the cabinet, only five
months after Bache had been named super-
intendent of the Survey in opposition to
Spencer’s wishes.
I am unwilling to leave this Department with-
out communicating to you the great pleasure I
have derived from the intercourse which has sub-
sisted between us since your appointment as
Superintendent of the Coast Survey; and my
convictions of the great service you have already
rendered the country in the arrangements made
for carrying on that work....My thorough
knowledge of all your difficulties, plans and im-
provements, derived from the intimate communi-
cations that have been maintained between us,
justify me in saying, that in my opinion the work
could not be entrusted to more capable and
judicious hands than yours... .
But Bache too had his difficulties. More
than once he was sorely beset by committees
of Congress—remindful of those that
plagued Hassler—demanding to be furnished
a date when the operations of the Survey
would ‘‘cease and determine.”’ Public senti-
ment, and more especially the sentiment of
Congress, apparently had not yet sufficiently
developed to consider with equanimity the
indefinite continuation of the organization.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 8
Bache weathered many attacks on the
floor of Congress, some of which bordered on
the grotesque. For example, one of the
charges against the Coast Survey was that
making astronomical observations for lati-
tude, longitude, and azimuth at various field
stations violated the provisions of the Act of
1832 against the establishment of a national
observatory by the Coast Survey. Or, the
charge that the Superintendent is not always
in the field. To this, one of his supporters
replied:
The Superintendent, sir, is not always in the
field, it is true. He cannot always be in the field,
but he is in the field for eight months in the year,
conducting and superintending the observations—
always, when in the field, making astronomical
and geodetic observations himself....But he
cannot be in all the points of the survey at once.
It is an interesting fact that from 1844 to
1860, with two exceptions, all of Bache’s
annual reports to the Secretary of the Treas-
ury were dated from places away from
Washington.
Congressional uneasiness was allayed with
the report of the ‘““Committee of Twenty,”
appointed in 1857 by the American Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science, to ex-
amine into the character and progress of the
Coast Survey. The committee, consisting of
the leading scientists and educators, was
highly laudatory of the management, prog-
ress, and outstanding achievements of the
Survey. Two of the twelve findings hold
special significance for the Bache adminis-
tration:
5. This work has conferred many valuable
benefits upon science, indirectly and incidentally,
in the invention of instruments, in the improve-
ment of methods of observation or computation,
in the development which it has given to special
subjects of interesting inquiry, and in the stimulus
which it has furnished to the scientific talent of
the country, especially in the field of astronomical
observation and investigation.
6. A careful study of the progress made from
year to year, especially since the enlargement of
the scale of operations under the present Superin-
tendent, affords ample evidence that the work has
been expeditiously prosecuted, and that the
amount accomplished up to the present date is
materially greater than has ever been accom-
plished in any other country in the same length
of time and with the same means.
ALEXANDER DALLAS BAcHE
JOURNAL OF THE
How well Bache had succeeded in over-
coming misunderstanding and opposition is
told by Joseph Henry, one of his contempo-
raries:
When Professor Bache took charge of the
Survey, it was still almost in its incipient stage,
subjected to misapprehension, assailed by unjust
prejudice, and liable, during any session of Con-
gress, to be suspended or abolished. When he
died, it had conquered prejudice, silenced oppo-
sition, and become established on a firm founda-
tion as one of the permanent bureaus of the
executive Government.
In original concept, the plan for the Sur-
vey of the Coast was Hassler’s, but Bache
gave it form and direction. When Hassler
died, only the foundation had been laid; the
building of the superstructure fell to his suc-
cessor. Bache adapted Hassler’s plan to an
expanding and developing America. The 10-
year period following Bache’s appointment
saw more land added to the United States
than in any other decade of American his-
tory. (Texas and the whole Pacific region
were added during his tenure.)
Early in his administration, Bache saw
that by working north and south from New
York as a center, as Hassler had done, there
would be a limit put on progress. His first
major move therefore was to divide the At-
lantic and Gulf coasts into nine sections, in
each of which the essential operations were
to be performed simultaneously by separate
parties. This arrangement had both practical
and political advantages. It permitted the
production of charts of important southern
harbors, in advance of the tedious process of
surveying the long stretches of intervening
coastline, and thus opened these ports to
commerce. But of even greater benefit at the
time was the support it gained from these
States in Congress who hitherto had diff-
culty in relating the operations of the Sur-
vey to their particular needs. Before the
close of the forties, parties worked in every
State along the two coasts, and the first
geodetic party set out with struments on
the long journey to the Pacific coast.
CONTRIBUTIONS TO AMERICAN SCIENCE
Under Bache’s careful guidance and sym-
pathetic understanding, the Coast Survey
not only kept pace with the progress of art
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and science but also made many notable and |
original contributions in the fields of practi-
eal astronomy, hydrography, and cartog-
raphy. The whole intellectual resources of '
the country were made tributary to its use-
fulness, and Bache enlisted, either as officers
of the Survey or as temporary assistants for
some special assignment, such men as Agas-
siz, Mitchell, Walker, Peirce, Bond, and
Gould—all in the forefront of scientific
thought. From the Army and Navy he re-
cruited the ablest officers. These not only
attained distinction in the Coast Survey, but —
distinguished themselves later as military
and naval officers. Among them were Hum-
phreys, Stevens, Hunt, Johnston, and Hill of
the Army, and Porter, Davis, Rodgers, Al-
den, Craven, and Luce of the Navy. Even
the man who was later to become one of the
world’s most renowned etchers, James Mc-
Neill Whistler, put in an apprenticeship as a
draftsman during this period, and, although
his association with the Bureau was on the
hectic side and shortlived, his biographer has |
said of his training in the Coast Survey that
it was “in the hardest and most perfect
school of etching in the world” and was
“memorable for the technical instruction he
received.”
Bache’s outlook was so broad, and his
interest so universal, that any aspect of the
work of the Survey received his enthusiastic
encouragement and support.
The Horrebow-Talcott method of latitude
determination with the zenith telescope re-
ceived great impetus toward worldwide use
through its adoption and refinement by
Professor Bache. The accuracy of the results
obtained was superior to that of every other
field method and compared favorably with
the results obtained with the largest observ-
atory instruments. It became so intimately
identified with the work of the Survey, that
it was known abroad as the Coast Survey
method. Professor Gould, the noted astrono-
mer, has said: ‘“T'o Bache we owe the recog-
nition and adoption of this transcendent
method, and to him also those refinements
of process and improvements of apparatus,
by which alone its accuracy is rendered
possible.”
Within a few months after Morse flashed
his first telegraphic message over the wires
voL. 47, No. 8
Aveust 1957 SHALOWITZ: A. D.
between Baltimore and Washington, Bache
~ began experiments for an application of the
telegraph to longitude determinations. The
method was put into successful operation
during the latter part of 1846, and time sig-
nals were exchanged between Washington
~ and Philadelphia. Among the earliest results
was the discovery that the time required for
the transmission of electric signals was ap-
preciable, and therefore measurable.
For fixing the longitude of the United
States with respect to Greenwich, the Coast
Survey, during the years 1849 to 1855, in-
stituted expeditions to exchange chronome-
ters between Cambridge, Mass., and Liver-
pool, England; and upon the completion of
the first transatlantic cable in 1866, a proj-
ect was organized to make use of the cable
to measure the difference in longitude be-
- tween the two continents. The actual use of
the cable for this purpose did not occur until
aiter Bache’s death, but he had made all the
preliminary arrangements and had sponsored
the idea from the beginning.
The adoption and perfection of these
methods of determining latitude and longi-
- tude placed this country well in the forefront
_ of astronomic achievement, and it was freely
stated at the time that geographical values
_of the positions of the principal astronomic
stations of the Coast Survey were deter-
mined with greater accuracy than the values
known for any European observatory.
Bache perfected a base-measuring appara-
tus that was a combination of brass and iron
bars, designed to be self-compensating for
changes due to temperature variations. The
actual length of the combination thus re-
- mained invariable, and gave results of al-
most unbelievable accuracy. In 10 days
’ Bache personally measured the 7-mile Bodie
Island Base on the coast of North Carolina,
with a probable error of less than 0.1 inch
and a total uncertainty of 1 inch.
Not only were astronomy and geodesy
gainers of these new methods and researches,
but other sciences were similarly promoted
and their advancement stimulated. The
range of the Survey was made to cover al-
most the whole range of the physical sci-
ences. Bache’s determination that the maps
and charts of the Coast Survey should be
carried to every man’s door having an inter-
BACHE—PIONEER
SCIENTIST 271
est In commerce, Navigation, geography, or
science is an Indication of his broad vision of
the scope and purpose of the Survey.
Many studies in oceanography were un-
dertaken. Special attention was given to an
investigation of the Gulf Stream and its
structure and laws detected for the first
time. By 1860, 14 sections of the stream had
been surveyed, 300 positions occupied, and
3,600 observations of temperature made.
Louis Agassiz, the great naturalist, was
twice sent to Florida to study the coral reefs,
their method of formation, and the laws
which promote and restrict their growth.
Tides and currents also received much
attention, leading to the adoption of new
methods and instruments. A self-registering
tide gauge was designed to record automat-
ically the rise and fall of the tide. This gave
the first strong impetus to the systematic
study of tidal phenomena in the United
States, with the result that the first pub-
lished tables of tidal predictions were
brought out by the Survey in 1855. The
character of the ocean currents along our
coasts was determined, and their causes
elicited.
Hydrographic operations were extended
and our coastal charts became fringed with
soundings. The first surveys of the impor-
tant Georges Bank, 200 miles from the shores
of Cape Cod, were begun by Stellwagen; and
James Alden began his surveys along the
Pacific coast, followmg the discovery of gold
in California. A new way to carry on deep-
sea sounding and to bring up samples of the
ocean bottom was also developed.
In keeping with his early interest in geo-
magnetism, Bache furthered this activity
while head of the Coast Survey. A limited
number of observations had been made in
connection with land surveys prior to his
assuming the superintendency, but he was
quick to recognize the practical importance
of the work in connection with navigation.
His interest, however, did not stop there,
and it is to his credit that he went beyond
the immediate pressing needs and began the
scientific attack on the problems of the mag-
netic survey of the United States. By 1855,
it was possible to prepare lines of equal mag-
netic declination for all the coastal areas.
In nautical charting and related fields,
studies were made of map projections, an
electrotype process was experimented with
for reproducing the original engraved copper
plates, and toward the end of Bache’s ad-
ministration, an attempt was made to print
charts in color. As an adjunct to the chart,
Bache inaugurated the compilation of coast
pilots, or sailing directions, as official Gov-
ernment publications. In 1857, George Da-
vidson completed his first edition of the
Directory of the Pacific Coast, forerunner to
his monumental Pacific Coast Pilot of 1889.
Nor were history and geography over-
looked. Bache fostered several studies of the
history of the early discoveries and explora-
tions along both the Atlantic and Pacific
coasts, notably those of Kohl, and in 1856
he wrote at length upon the difficulty of de-
ciding upon the correct form of geographic
place names, especially on the West coast.
In short, as Superintendent of the Coast
Survey, Bache was able to give full scope to
his rich scientific background and to his ex-
traordinary administrative talents in chart-
ing the course of the Survey for many years
ahead. No finer tribute, in this respect, could
be paid him than what was said by Benjamin
Peirce, foremost American mathematician of
his time, on his succession to the superin-
tendency of the Coast Survey upon the
death of Bache in 1867:
This important service originated with Hassler;
but it received its efficient organization from
Bache... . It is only necessary to conscientiously
and faithfully to follow in his footsteps, imitate
his example, and develop his plans in the adminis-
tration of the Survey. To describe what the
Superintendent should do is simply to describe
what Bache actually performed....I have
before me the inspiration and example of my
friend Bache. It is his organization. I have only
to administer as he showed the way.
IN RETROSPECT
Those of us in the Coast Survey who are
privileged to look back upon the first century
and a half of the Survey’s existence can sub-
scribe fully to the sentiments so beautifully
expressed by Professor Peirce. Were Bache
to return to his old post today he would
doubtless be amazed by some of the methods
and equipment now in use—geodimeters for
measuring baselines by means of light waves,
electronic instruments for determining the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 47, No. 8
survey vessel’s position at sea by means of -
electromagnetic waves, echo-sounding in-
struments for obtaining water depths from
sound waves, and photogrammetric equip- ‘|
ment and stereoplotting instruments for
mapping the land areas from aerial photo-
graphs—nevertheless, it was he who set the
pattern for the Survey, and it was his readi-
ness to investigate and adopt new methods
in the early stages of applied science in this
country that provided the inspiration to
those who followed him.
In the 23 years of his administration the
Coast Survey had grown from a small or-
ganization, confined in its operations to a
limited area of the Atlantic coast, to one of
nationwide activity and worldwide renown.
Bache’s interest in science transcended the
scope of the Survey under its statute of au-
thorization. He was concerned with Ameri-
can science generally and felt that ‘‘an
institution of science, supplementary to ex-
isting ones, is much needed in our country,
to guide public action in reference to scien-
tific matters.”’ He therefore became instru-
mental in the establishment of the Smith-
sonian Institution, of which he was a regent,
and in the founding of the National Academy
of Sciences, of which he was the first presi-
dent. Of his part in organizing the latter,
his biographer, Merle Odgers, says:
The Albany address of 1851 [as retiring presi-
dent of the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science] is a landmark in the history of
American scientific organization and of the estab-
lishment of the National Academy of Sciences.
In it he sketched the development of national
scientific organizations and envisaged a more
general or world union of such organizations when
“modern facilities of communication. . . shall have
brought Berlin and New York as near as were
Berlin and Paris at the close of the last century.”
Although the Academy did not become a
reality until March 3, 1863, when President
Lincoln approved the bill incorporating it,
Bache worked indefatigably toward its for-
mation, and Arnold Guyot credits him with
being its founder.
Alexander Dallas Bache emerges as one of
the great pioneer personalities of nmeteenth
century America. Science and education
have been enriched by his impact on them.
His life has become an inseparable part of
the history of America.
Aveust 1957
O’KEEFE: TRADITION AND CONCEPTIVE SELECTION
273
~GENETICS.—Tradition and conceptive selection. Joan A. O’Keere, Washington,
D.C.
(Received April 17, 1957)
From a biological standpoint, the loss of
life from birth through the reproductive
years is very small, at least in Western
civilization. In the United States, out of 100
live births, 75 will live to age 45. It follows
that the processes of natural selection and
the survival of the fittest have very little to
work with from birth to death. The survival
of an infant to maturity is practically guar-
anteed regardless of his bodily constitution
or his physical or mental strength. Conse-
quently there is little biological advantage in
these qualities, and little reason to expect
the human race to advance in these direc-
tions.
The forces of selection are, however, still
vigorously at work in the prenatal period,
especially at conception. The annual loss of
life due to contraceptives in the United
States can perhaps be estimated by com-
paring the present birth rate of 25 per thou-
sand with the birth rate of 35 per thousand
which existed in England in the middle of
the nineteenth century (there are no con-
temporary United States figures, but from
the population changes between censuses it
was at least as large). The difference of 10
per thousand per year represents 1,700,000
lives per year. This figure is almost as great
as the total of all causes of death combined;
and it is about four times as great as the
total annual loss of life from birth to age 45.
It is thus more than 10 times as efficient as
a source of selection than any cause of death
whatever.
We might call this selection conceptive
selection and contrast 1t with natural selec-
tion (by death) and with sexual selection,
which is the process by which some creatures
gain a biological advantage over others
through greater efficiency in obtaining a
mate. If we regard the germ cells as indi-
viduals, it is, of course, a form of natural
selection.
Conceptive selection favors, obviously,
any variation, biochemical or physical, of
the human reproductive cells which would
permit them to escape the various traps
and poisons which are provided for them. It
is imaginable that over the course of the past
50 years there has been some tendency for
resistant strains to appear, not easily slaugh-
tered by the more usual agents, just as we
have witnessed the appearance of penicillin-
resistant strains of bacteria, or DDT-resist-
ant flies. It would appear, however, to be a
losing game; the microscopic spermatozoon
is pitted against the great modern chemical
laboratories.
Conceptive selection may work in another
way, however, offermg more prospects of
long-term success. This is through the par-
ents. If there should turn up any inheritable
character which would predispose parents to
refuse to employ any contraceptive means
whatever, then evidently this character
would be strongly favored by conceptive
selection. It used to be suggested that sheer
stupidity was such a factor; and that in
consequence the human race was threatened
with engulfment by legions of the feeble-
minded. Of late, some doubt has arisen
whether all or most feeble-mindedness is in-
herited in the strict biological sense. Cretin-
ism, for example, was widely regarded as
hereditary, until about 1900, when it was
found to be an iodine-deficiency disease.
Probably there are few hereditary mental
traits which influence conceptive selection.
On the other hand, there is another sense
in which we receive mental traits from our
parents which may very well influence con-
ceptive selection, namely, the transmittal of
cultural patterns. The most obvious example
is language; most of us speak the language
of our parents not because of biological
heredity but because of family training.
However, it is almost as certain that the
child of English-speaking parents will speak
English as it is that the child of blue-eyed
parents will be blue-eyed. Let us give the
name of tradition to this method of passing
on characteristics. It 1s nearly the same as
the thing defined as tradition in Russell
Turk’s book Prospects for Conservatives.
The power of tradition to pass on a pre-
274 JOURNAL OF
cise pattern is not so great as the power of
heredity. The modern Hindu religion re-
tains Vedic hymns written 3,500 years ago,
including the Sanskrit language of that
time, with its elaborate system of nouns
with eight cases and three numbers, and
verbs with three numbers, five moods, two
voices, and ten tenses. This is remarkable,
but not so remarkable as the preservation of
the genetic pattern of the horseshoe crab
since the Paleozoic. Nevertheless the stabil-
ity of tradition is sufficient to make it a
strong factor in the survival of a human
strain over a period of several thousand
years.
The effect of conceptive selection in each
generation is surprisingly strong. Analysis of
the 1950 census figures shows that it is not
a bad representation of the data to say that
one-fourth of all couples have no children;
one-fourth have | child; one-fourth have 2
children; and one-fourth have 3 or more,
averaging, say, 5. Then from 8 couples we
have 8 children, but the distribution of the
8 children over the families is entirely differ-
ent from the distribution of the parents. U.
S. Children’s Bureau statistics as of 1940
showed that half of the children are sup-
ported by less than one-sixth of the families.
It is very well known that large families
tend to differ systematically from small
families. They tend to be more rural, more
religious, poorer, less educated than the
small families. In Louisiana, they are more
often French-speaking than the average.
All these differences represent influences
tending to preserve the traditional attitudes.
This fact undoubtedly is at least partially
the cause of the differences in family size;
but that is not the point here. The point
here is that differences in family size tend to
reinforce the traditional attitudes; they tend
to make the population more religious, more
rural, and less educated. They also tend,
obviously, to raise the size of families, so
that the low average size of families is only
maintained by recruitment from large fam-
ilies, just as cities are maintained by recruit-
ment from the countryside.
It is possible that in our time we are wit-
nessing the emergence of family strains with
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 8
traditions which are resistant to contracep-
tion. In view of what has just been said
about conceptive selection, 1t would be logi-
cal to expect this. In addition, there are |
several lines of positive evidence.
First, there is the unexplained rise of the
American birth rate, beginning during the |
Depression and continuing through the war |
and postwar years. This was originally at-
tributed to economic causes, then to the |
war; but now it is seen that there is some
deeper cause. There has been a similar, but |
smaller rise in European birth rates. The in-—
crease in fertility in both continents has,
however, been even larger than the increase
in the birth rate; at the lowest point of the
birth rate, during the Depression, it was
often pointed out that the rate was being
kept up by the fact that there was a surplus
of persons of reproductive age left over from |
a period of higher birth rate. Hence a mere
constancy of the birth rate would have |
meant a rising fertility; a rising birth rate |
has meant a very considerable change. This |
points to a shift in the average attitude to-
ward large families. The shift is not due to
any propaganda effort; in fact the organs of |
opinion sometimes seem to be deliberately
trying to stem the tide.
Second, there is the strengthening of or-
ganized religion, both Catholic and Protes-
tant, manifesting itself both in increased
church membership and increased church- |
building. For the first time in United States
history, the majority of citizens belong to
some church. This is one of the most often
remarked phenomena of our time; and it is
well known that it is not due to any par-
ticular evangelism.
These signs point to a revival of tradi-
tional feeling. It is hard to associate any of
them with any new intellectual develop-
ments which were not present, say, in the
1920’s. There is a strong suggestion that
each is due to the influence of conceptive |
selection. The human race seems to be mov- |
ing, in a pseudo-evolution, toward a set of |
traditions capable of protecting the species
against the ingenious inventions of indi-
viduals.
Aveust 1957 IMLAY: EARLY
CRETACEOUS
AMMONITES 275
PALEONTOLOGY .— New genera of Early Cretaceous ammonites from California
and Oregon. RauPu W. Imtay,! U.S. Geological Survey.
(Received May 3, 1957)
Studies of Early Cretaceous (Valanginian-
Hauterivian) ammonites from the West
eoast of the United States have demon-
strated that some of the ammonites belong
to new genera. These are validated herein
in order that their names may be used in the
near future in stratigraphic papers now
being prepared by geologists of the U.S.
Geological Survey and of the Oregon De-
partment of Geology and Mineral Resources.
Family BERRIASELLIDAE Spath
Subfamily NeocomiTinakE Spath
Hannaites Imlay, n. gen.
Hannaites is characterized by fairly tight
coiling of whorls of small to medium size; a
compressed, subquadrate whorl section; a trun-
cated venter; a vertical umbilical wall; flexuous
ribs that tend to fade out on the lower parts of
the flanks; strong forwardly arched ribs on the
venter; backwardly inclined umbilical tubercles;
spirally elongated ventral tubercles at the ven-
_ tral shoulder; a body chamber that tends to
| retract from the remainder of the shell; many
shallow constrictions; appreciable variation in
__ the strength of ribs and tubercles; and a fairly
SS oe Oe
: D a
_ short, narrow, slightly asymmetrical first lateral
lobe. The type species is Neocomites riddlensis
Anderson (1938, p. 167, pl. 30, figs. 1-4).
Hannaites greatly resembles Leopoldia (Baum-
berger, 1906, pp. 28-47) in lateral view but
differs by having a flatter venter, sharply defined
ventral shoulders, continuous strong ribbing
_ across the venter, considerable variation in the
strength of its ornamentation, the presence of
constrictions in adults, and the tendency of its
‘ body chamber to become scaphitoid. Also, the
suture line appears to have a much narrower
first lateral lobe than that of Leopoldia.
Hannaites is named in honor of G. Dallas
- Hanna, of the California Academy of Sciences.
Hannaites has to date been found only in
Oregon in beds of early to middle Hauterivian
age.
1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S.
Geological Survey.
Family OLcosTEPHANIDAE Haug
Subfamily PoLtyprycurTinakE Spath
Wellsia Imlay, n. gen.
Wellsia bears many resemblances to the genus
Neocraspedites (Spath, 1923, p. 17) based on
Craspedites semilaevis V. Koenen (1902, p. 80,
pl. 5, figs. 8-10). It differs by its ribs being arched
forward more strongly on the venter and some-
what reduced in strength along the mid-ventral
line, by its umbilical swellings disappearing at
an earlier growth stage, by its venter being more
narrowly rounded, and by its umbilicus being
slightly smaller. The type species is designated
as Dichotomites oregonensis Anderson (1938, p.
159, pl. 30, fig. 5). The genus likewise includes
Lyticoceras packardi Anderson (1938, p. 164, pl.
31, figs. 2-5).
It is named in honor of Francis G. Wells, of
the U. 8. Geological Survey, in recognition of
his important contributions to the geologic
knowledge of Oregon and California.
Wellsia has been found only in Oregon in beds
of early Hauterivian age directly overlying beds
containing the pelecypod Aucella crassicollis
Keyserling and the ammonites Olcostephanus,
Sarasinella, and Thurmanniceras.
Hertleinia Imlay, n. gen.
This genus has a moderately compressed shell,
subquadrate whorl section, and a moderately
arched venter. The umbilicus widens during
growth from fairly narrow to fairly wide. The
umbilical wall is low and vertical. The ornamen-
tation consists of strong primary ribs that curve
backward on the umbilical wall, curve forward
on the lower two-fifths of the flanks and then
divide into two weaker secondary ribs that con-
tinue the forward inclination of the primary
ribs. One, or both, secondary ribs of each pair
bifurcate between the middle and the upper
third of the flanks. A few ribs begin freely near
the middle of the flanks. The ribs continue across
the venter without diminution in strength and
with a gentle forward arching. Many shallow
constrictions occur on each whorl. The suture
276
line is characterized by having long, rather slen- |
der lobes.
Neocraspedites aguila Anderson, 1988, p. 156,
pl. 25, figs. 1-8, pl. 68, fig. 4) is designated as
the type species. The genus, also, includes N.
rectoris Anderson (1988, p. 157, pl. 23, fig. 2) and
N. signalis Anderson (1938, p. 157, pl. 26, fig. 1).
The genus is named in honor of Leo G. Hert-
lein, of the California Academy of Sciences.
Hertleinia is distinguished from Neocraspedites
in which its species were placed by Anderson
(1938, p. 156, 157) by its shell bemg much more
evolute in the adult, by its ribs persisting on the
middle of the flanks, and by its ribs arching for-
ward much less strongly on the venter. Hertleinia
differs from Craspedodiscus Spath (1924, p. 77)
by becoming more evolute during growth, by
its venter remaining moderately broad in the
adult instead of becoming narrow, by retaining
ribbing on its flanks in the adult, and by the
ribs being much less strongly arched on venter.
Hertleinia has been found only in California
associated with species of Hoplocrioceras a few
hundred feet above beds containing Simbirskites
of middle Hauterivian age and many hundreds
of feet below an occurrence of the Barremian
ammonite Pulchellia. Its age is considered to be
only slightly younger than that of Simbirskites
and, therefore, late Hauterivian.
Subfamily SrMBIRSKITINAE Spath
Hollisites Imlay, n. gen.
This genus has a stout to fairly stout shell,
moderately evolute coiling, regular bifurcating
ribs on its inner whorls, virgatoid ribs on its
outer whorls, and a suture line characterized by
a fairly wide first lateral lobe. H. lucasi Imlay,
n. sp. is designated as the type species.
Immature specimens of /Tollisites have peri-
sphinctoid ribbing similar to that on small speci-
mens of the genus Speetoniceras (Spath, 1924,
p. 76) from England (Danford, 1906, pl. 12, fig.
3) and Russia (M. Pavlow, 1886, pl. 1, figs. 4, 5;
A. Pavlow, 1891, pl. 15(8), figs. 8a-c; pl. 18 (11),
figs. 12, 14), differmg mainly by losing their
lateral tubercles at a very small size. Adult speci-
mens of /follisites differ from the adults of
Speetoniceras (M. Pavlow, 1886, pl. 1, fig. 1, p. 2,
figs. la, b; A. Pavlow, 1891, pl. 18(11), fig. 13a;
Karakasch, 1907, pl. 13, fig. 4a) by being more
involute, by acquiring weaker, denser, virgatoid
ribbing, and by lacking tubercles at the points
of rib fureation. The branching of the ribs at
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 8
various heights above and below the middle of
the flanks is in striking contrast to the regular
bifurcation of the ribs on adults of Speetoniceras.
Among Eurasian species Hollisites probably
includes ‘‘Simbirskites’”’ auerbachi Hichwald
(1868, p. 1092, pl. 34, figs. 9ce-d; Karakash,
1907, p. 180, pl. 18, figs. la, b, 5a, b, pl. 24,
figs. 30, 31) from the Crimea and ‘‘Perisphinctes”’
koenent Neumayr and Uhlig (1881, p. 18, pl. 21,
figs. 1, la) from Germany.
Hollisites is named in honor of Hollis M. Dole,
State geologist of Oregon.
Le es
\
if \
i \
| Waa ;
\ /
eat ee
|
X
Fic. 1.—Whorl section of Hollisites lucasi
Imlay, n. sp., near adoral end of holotype at diam-
eter of 170 mm. X14.
Hollisites has been found in Oregon associated
with the ammonite Simbirskites of middle
Hauterivian age. In California it occurs with, or
slightly below, Hertleinia aguila (Anderson) of
late Hauterivian age. The large fragment named
Polyptychites hesperius Anderson (19388, p. 154,
pl. 24, figs. 1, 2) probably belongs to Hollisites
and was found at the same locality as Simbir-
skites broadi Anderson (1988, p.155, pl. 22, figs.
2, 3). Judged from these occurrences, Hollisites
is of middle to late Hauterivian age.
Hollisites lucasi Imlay, n. gen.
The holotype is entirely septate, and the body
chamber is unknown. At the beginning of the
outermost whorl of the holotype the whorl sec-
tion is ovate and as wide as high. At the adoral
end the whorl is a little wider than high. The
outer whorl embraces about half of the preceding
whorl. The flanks are gently convex and the
venter is evenly rounded. The umbilicus is mod-
erate in width and fairly shallow. The umbilical
wall is vertical, fairly low, and rounds abruptly
into the flanks.
The ribbing on a small specimen and on the
inner whorls of a paratype is perisphinctoid. The
Aveust 1957 IMLAY: EARLY
primary ribs curve backward on the umbilical
wall, incline forward on the flanks, and bifurcate
regularly at the middle of the flanks. The second-
ary ribs incline forward more strongly than the
primary ribs and arch forward gently on the
yenter. The furcation points are swollen but not
tuberculate. Toward the adoral end the ribbing
tends to become flexuous and at two places is
virgatomous. Constrictions are common.
Fre. 2.—Suture lines of Hollisites lucasi Imlay,
n.sp., drawn from holotype near adoral end. 1s.
The ribbmg on the outer whorl of the para-
type, just mentioned, and on the holotype is
mostly virgatomous. The primary ribs bifurcate
at about two-fifths of the height of the flank and
then the posterior rib of each pair of secondary
ribs bifurcates again at about three-fifths of the
height of the flanks. The secondary ribs are ap-
preciably weaker than the primary ribs, are
inclined forward more strongly on the flanks,
and arch forward gently on the venter. Eight
constrictions occur on half a whorl. Toward the
adoral end of the holotype more of the second-
ary ribs bifurcate above the middle of the flank
and some secondary ribs arise freely near the
middle of the flanks.
The holotype at a diameter of 170 mm has a
whorl] height of 67 mm, a whorl thickness of 69
mm, and an umbilical width of 58 mm.
The suture line greatly resembles that of
Hertieinia aguila (Anderson) (1938, pl. 25, fig. 2,
pl. 68, fig. 4) in general plan. It differs mainly
by having a broader first lateral lobe.
H. lucasi Imlay, n. sp. greatly resembles
“Simbirskites” auerbachi Eichwald (Karakasch,
1907, p. 130, pl. 13, figs. la, b, 5a, b) from the
Crimea in plan of ribbing and in suture line. It
differs by having more virgatomous ribs and a
somewhat broader venter. Its rib pattern is
similar to that of ‘Perisphincctes” koeneni
Neumayr and Uhlig (1881, p. 18, pl. 21, figs. 1,
CRETACEOUS AMMONITES 277
la) from Germany, but it differs by having much
stouter whorls and broader sutural lobes.
Hollisites lucast Imlay, n. sp. is named for
Larry Lucas of Agness, Oregon, who collected
the holotype specimen on the south side of the
Rogue River 1/4 miles below Agness, Curry
County, Oregon. Its age is probably middle
Hauterivian because from the same general loca-
tion have been found specimens of Hannaites
riddlensis (Anderson), Simbirskites?, and Hoplo-
crioceras. The paratypes were obtained at USGS
Mes. loc. 1092 in association with, or just lelow,
Hertleinia aguila (Anderson) which is considered
to be of late Hauterivian age.
Holotype: U.S.N.M. 129045; paratypes: US.
N.M. 129044. The paratypes were collected at
US.G.S. Mes. loc. 1092, which is about half a
mile northeast of the buildings at the Wilcox
Ranch, Tehama County, Calif. Stratigraphically
they occur about 200 feet above the top of the
sandy beds containing Aucella crassicollis Keys-
erling.
REFERENCES
AnpERSON, F. M. Lower Cretaceous deposits in
California and Oregon. Geol. Soc. America
Spec. Pap. 16, 339 pp., 84 pls., 3 figs. 1988.
BAUMBERGER, HERNst. Fauna der wunteren Kreide
in Westschweizerischen Jura. Schweizer.
paleont. Ges. Abh. 30-36, 33 pls. 1903-1910.
Danrorp, C. G. Notes on the Speeton ammonites.
Proc. Yorkshire Geol. Soc., N.s., 16: 101-114,
pls. 10-14. 1906.
EricHwaup, Epouarp. Lethaea Rossica ou Paléon-
tologie de la Russie: 1304 pp., 40 pls. 1868.
Karakascu, N. 1. Le Crétacé inférieur de la Crimée
et sa faune. Trav. Soc. Imp. Nat. St. Péters-
bourg, Sect. Géol. Min., 32, livr. 5: 482 pp., 28
pls. 1907.
KOENEN, A. von. Die Ammoniten des norddeutschen
Neocom (Valanginien, Hauterivien, Barremien
und Aptien). Abh. preuss. geol. Landesanst.,
N.F., 84: 451 pp., 55 pls. 1902.
Neumayer, M., and Unuie, V. Ueber Ammonitiden
aus den Hilsbildungen Norddeutschlands. Pa-
leontographica 27 (3-6): 129-203, pls. 15-57.
1881.
Pavuiow, A. P. Le Crétacé inférieur de la Russie et
sa faune. Nouv. Mém. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscow
16: 87 pp., 8 pls. 1901.
Pavitow, Mariz. Les ammonites du groupe Ol-
costephanus versicolor. Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat.
Moscow 62 (3) : 27-42, pls. 1, 2. 1886.
Spatu, L. F. On some ammonites from New Zealand,
Appendix to Trechmann, The Jurassic of New
Zealand. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London 79:
286-312. 1923.
———. On the ammonites of the Speeton Clay and
the subdivisions of the Neocomian. Geol. Mag.
61: 73-89. 1924.
278
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 8
EXPERIMENTAL STANDARD FREQUENCY BROADCAST ON 60 KILOCYCLES
An experimental 60-ke standard frequency
broadcast, begun July 1, 1956, at the Boulder
(Colo.) Laboratories of the National Bureau of
Standards, is opening up several interesting ap-
plications, some of which are already in use.
A. H. Morgan, chief of the Radio Broadcast
Service Section of the NBS Radio Standards
Laboratory, is supervising the experiment.
The Bureau has been broadcasting standard
frequencies since 1923, when radio was in its
infancy and very few people owned radio re-
ceivers. Through the years higher power and
more frequencies have been added until at pres-
ent the NBS standard frequency broadcasts are
on six high frequencies (2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, and
25 Mc) at WWYV, Beltsville, Md.; and on three
(5, 10, and 15 Mc) at WWVH, Maui, Territory
of Hawaii. Up to 10 kilowatts are radiated on
some of the frequencies. Specialized radio re-
ceivers for these broadcasts have been commer-
cially available for many years.
Measurements by the Boulder Laboratories
and others have revealed that the regular stand-
ard broadcasts at high frequency (HF) are sub-
ject to changes in frequency as they travel away
from the transmitting antenna. These changes
are caused by disturbances in the propagation
medium, and the errors introduced may at times
amount to +3 parts in 10’. This is sufficient to
make these HF broadcasts unsuitable for many
applications, e.g., rapid assessment of drift in the
manufacture of high-precision quartz resonators,
intercomparison of frequency standards, and
accurate time measurement or synchronization
of events at two or more locations which may
be separated by thousands of miles. Two tech-
niques are now available for precise frequency
calibration, but both have limitations. One such
technique, employing time comparisons, requires
expensive terminal apparatus and a measure-
ment time that extends over 1 to 10 days or even
longer. The other makes use of a ground wave
near the transmitter. This introduces an error
in propagation of less than 1 part in 10", but is
useful only to a few miles from the transmitter.
At greater distances the skywave contributes,
and calibrations are not adequate for the ever
increasing precision required by an expanding
science and technology.
To meet this urgent situation, W. D. George,
acting chief, Radio Standards Laboratory, ini-
tiated a plan to begin the experimental broad-
casts at several low or very low frequencies. The
60-ke frequency is being put into use first under
the call sign, KK2X ET.
The principal reason for studying standard
frequency broadcasts at frequencies below about
100 ke/s is to determine a practical method
whereby the radio propagation errors are mini-
mized and users may accomplish high-accuracy
frequency comparisons in a shorter measurement
time. Users also need a better time or phase
reference to precisely measure the time between
events which happen in relatively short inter-
vals, for example, in measuring the velocity of
rapidly moving waves or objects.
TABLE 1.—CoMPARISONS OF 60-KC EXPERIMENTAL
Broapcast STATION KK2XEI
(values given are parts in 109)
x Vv
Je NBS | Nee ree WWV
Jan. 1957 Standard |ments made Hagann ae ‘ as received
at Boulder | at Cruft V9) GS HE) es Comm
Dab ceived at | Laboratory
Boulder
1
2 —0.3 —1.4 +1.0 +2.
3 +0.2 —2.1 +1.5 +2.2
4 +0.3 —2.3 +1.7 +0.7
5
6
7 +0.7 +2.3
8 —0.1 +1.5
9 —0.3 = Oi0 U1 +1.4 +0.4
10 +0.3 2.1
11 +0.5 —2.4 2.3 —0.9
12
13
14 0 —1.8 +2.0 +1.0
15 +0.1 —1.4 +2.1 +1.6
16 0 lel +2.2 +1.1
17 +0.1 —0.8 +2.4 +2.6
18 0 bao) +2.0 +2.8
19
20 3
21 +0.3 —1.4 +2.7 +2.6
Vea at | LO. | 1.7
23 +0.4 —0.3 +2.4 +2.4
24 +0.5 —0.9 +2.4 +2.9
25 +0.1 —1.8 +2.0
26
27
28 —0.3 —2.4 +1.4
29 +0.1 —1.9 +1.8
30 —0.2 —2.9 +1.4 +1.7
31 —=()),77 —2.4 +1.4 +1.2
Feb. 1 0 =2).6 +15 +1.7
Aveust 1957
Several investigators, among them Prof. J. A.
Pierce at Harvard University, have shown that
for frequencies below 100 ke/s and for distances
of 5000 km and greater it requires only about
10 minutes to compare local frequenices with
standard frequency transmissions to within 1
part in 10°. This is an improvement of more than
100 over what can be obtained at HF. Professor
Pierce has carefully determined that a high-
accuracy standard frequency service can be
given for all the world on a single very low fre-
quency from a single high-power transmitting
station.t
The experimental broadcast on 60 ke, al-
though on low power, has already presented
several intriguing possibilities. With the cooper-
1 Intercontinental Frequency Comparison by
VLF Radio Transmission (Proc. IRE, Special
VLF issue to be published in 1957).
DOUBLE STARS 279
ation of Professor Pierce, it has been possible
to compare the NBS primary frequency stand-
ard, broadcast on 60 ke, with the British stand-
ard which is broadcast on 16 ke and 60 ke, to
an accuracy of comparison which is better than
two parts in one billion. This has been done
almost continuously since the broadcasts began
last July. Results for the month of January 1957
are shown in Table 1. Regular measurements on
the 60 ke broadcasts are now being made by
several organizations in the eastern United
States.
The most challenging project will be an at-
tempt to compare the Boulder Laboratories’
atomic-frequency standard which is much more
stable than 1 part in 10° with those in England
and elsewhere. This will be undertaken as soon
as possible. It is estimated that an accuracy of
comparison of better than one part in one billion
can be attained.
oo —
DOUBLE STARS
Twin stars with lifetimes o° only 100,000
years; stars with enormous diameters but with
masses only one-tenth or two-tenths of that of the
sun attention is called to such celestial ob-
jects by Dr. Otto Struve, University of Cali-
fornia astronomer, in a discussion of the ob-
served phenomena of double stars. A large pro-
portion of known stars are double, and their
behavior poses some of the most difficult problems
in astronomy.
A report by Dr. Struve on double-star research
and its future trends has recently been issued by
the Astrophysical Observatory of the Smith-
sonian Institution.
These stars revolve around each other. They
must have had a common origin, and presumably
each pair separated out of an original cloud of
rapidly revolving gas. A slowly turning cloud
would condense into a single star, according to
present orthodox theories. If the revolution were
sufficiently rapid, the cloud would split into two
or more parts, and each component would con-
dense into a star. These ‘twins’ may differ
greatly in diameter and mass.
Each member of a pair is subject to the gravi-
tational pull of the other and Dr. Struve points
out that if they are close enough together, gas
may stream continually from one to the other.
One of the most interesting of such stars is Beta
Lyrae, a member of the northern constellation
which contains the bright star Vega. The two
stars that make up Beta Lyrae are, astronomi-
cally speaking, very close together.
Recent observations, Dr. Struve says in the
Smithsonian report, indicate that each of the
component stars of Beta Lyrae is pulling streams
of matter from the other. Parts of the streams are
lost into space, and can later furnish raw material
for new celestial bodies. The astronomer cal-
culates, from the changing motion of the stars
about each other, that Beta Lyrae must be losing
about 50 billion trillion grams of matter a second.
The total mass of the two stars is about a thous-
and billion trillion trillion grams. If we take into
account the rate at which the stars are shedding
into space, we find that the life expectancy of
Beta Lyrae is only about 100,000 years—much
less than the time that man has lived on earth.
This particular double star may be unique.
However, there are many other pairs that are
putting out less notable streams of gas, and we
often find that one of the pair is a large subgiant
star.
Observations of two unusual binaries, one in
Orion and one in Sagittarius, indicate that in
both cases the larger star of the pair, hundreds of
times the size of the sun, actually weighs only
280
from one-tenth to two-tenths as much as the sun.
Dr. Struve points out that a peculiar feature of
these double-star systems is the large number of
them that contain Wolf-Rayet stars, of ex-
tremely high temperature and enigmatic spectra.
In some cases the mutual gravitational effect
of the two members of a binary merely causes
them to exchange matter with each other. No
mass is therefore lost by the system as a whole.
But often, the author says, ‘‘we must assume
that once a stream of gas is generated in a binary
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 47, No. 8
it is somehow expelled from the entire system
and this expulsion means eventual disappearance |
of both members.”’
All luminous stars are losing mass through
radiation. The sun, for example, loses thousands
of tonsa second—an insignificant amount that can
make no difference whatsoever for billions of
years, so far as life on earth is concerned. No
nearby star is near enough to the sun to pull
mass out of it, and the solar lifetime will not be
ended prematurely by any such process.
SSS
LANGUAGE OF THE GUAYMI
“How did you dream?” a Guaymt-speaking
Indian asks his neighbor. That’s the way he says
“Good morning.”
“T did not have any,” replies the neighbor.
That is the equivalent for “I am well.”
This customary way of greeting, long since
firmly incorporated in the language, is deeply
rooted in the basic concepts of life of the Valente
Indians of Panama, according to the first vo-
rabulary and grammar of the Guaymi language
recently published by the Smithsonian Institu-
tion’s Bureau of American Ethnology. It was
written by Dr. Ephraim 8. Alphonse, for many
years a Wesleyan Methodist minister among these
Indians.
The Guaymi language is spoken by several
groups in western Panama. It was one of the
basic tongues of the Caribbean area. This
linguistic curiosity, Dr. Alphonse explains, is
based on the extreme fear of dreams among these
people. When a person has an evil dream he feels
sure he will die, unless powerful magic is ex-
erted. The psychological effect is so strong, in
fact, that the victim often does die despite
anything that can be done for him. The term in
the language for “bad dream” is “death struck
him.”
The only way to escape the effects of such a
dream, Dr. Alphonse says, is believed to be
through the mediation of a powerful medicine
man, the Sukya, who has influence to exercise the
evil spirit. To him the dream is retold by a friend
of the stricken victim. Careful analysis of the
dream may enable the Sukya to find a weed,
plant, or bark that will be effective against the
particular evil spirit responsible.
After he has been paid an appropriate fee, the
Sukya proclaims a “wake,” or “ngwote,” for the
dreamer’s hut. Among the articles the medicine
man has received as part of his fee are some
cocoa beans. These are sanctified by the Sukya
when he blows on them. They are parched,
ground, and made into a drink. For five nights
and five days neighbors and relatives gather at
the hut of the dreamer and drink this mixture,
diluted until it is shghtly more colored than water.
None must sleep. The evil spirit is thus kept
away, giving the soul of the sick person, pre-
sumably taken away from him in the dream, a
chance to come back to him and so enable him
to recover. He sometimes does. The wake is an
elaborate affair. Crosses of balsa wood are put up
on either side of the main roads leading to the
hut. A kind of vine is set up as an arch under
which the evil spirit must pass. In the middle of
the arch is a noose, which presumably will catch
the demon as he comes for his victim. Into the
eyes of all the guests a magic preparation made
by the medicine man is dropped. In the hut are
crosses. Balsa sticks are carved to represent
human heads and faces, and made hideous with
charcoal marks.
The person who has had the dream is put in-
side a fence built around a raised platform. Two
crosses are placed on each side of this platform.
The fence is made of wild canes, of which the evil
spirits reputedly are afraid. During the ceremony
there is heavy smoke caused by the burning of
wood termite nests, a stink vine, and pepper.
These, burning together, fumigate the evil spirit.
The victim of the bad dream must abstain
from certain foods, from any contact with certain
persons, and from eating anything cooked on the
fire with which these banned people cook. Con-
sequently two fires are built in the same hut—
one for the victim and one for the rest of the
household. The persons prohibited from contact
are not enemies. They may be members of the
man’s own family. It is fatal for the patient to
have contact with anybody who has ever been
bitten by a snake.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington . ..............s0. eee e ees ce eens CuESTER H. PaGE
Anthropological Society of Washington..........................005, FRANK M. S5TzLer
Brolorient! Society of Washington’. ............2-- see ee eee c eee noes HERBERT FRIEDMANN
emer soOciety:, Of WASHINZEON. o.5 5a: oc) secs ies iis sys eieieisier cieiesenesie CHARLES R. NAESER
Entomological Society of Washington.......................008- Car. F. W. MuEsEBECK
pane ttlGeOlTaAphic SOCIELY.. 6.6.5 ec ee winies ociec vvisis cic clow ce eishaineiese’ ALEXANDER WETMORE
ceolerical Society of Washington ss... )5- 62. c cence cee ee eee. Epwin T. McKnicxut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. Cor
Mieipern DiAwETiSGOLICall SOCIELY.= = <2 <6 oc.c cideiieve ores) <rave viv sic ois oitieisieratie'e: ohernvese U.S. Grant, III
BATHE TE SOCIELY. Of WASDINGbODs <.25. 5. 0 sc1s8e syasisicie site cee owe ecieeicere isles Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furppo GRAVATT
Washington Society, Of HNginee4rs.<.....6 <6 55 ccc eee vice c eos cee nae Herpert G. Dorsry
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers....... ARNOLD H. Scottr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers........Howarp S. Bran
Helminthological Society of Washington.................eeeeeee Donatp B. McMuLLen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... Micuagu J. Petczar, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................55- Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovuatas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorcs A. HorrTLe
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals...... aeteeevnuraaeicens Hersert C. VacHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..W1LL1am T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................2+ Cares S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL ScIENCE.—Cultural implications of scientific research. R. E.
GIBSON s thee ek eae Oa eee a a 249
Matuematics.—A determinantal inequality of H. P. Robertson, I.
OLGA, TAUSSKY ).. #24 Jesels cc os itd. oe ee 263
Matuematics.—A determinantal inequality of H. P. Robertson, II.
MaRvIN Marcus. 000.00. cede i 4 ee ee 264
History oF Scipncr.—Alexander Dallas Bache—pioneer American
scientist: (A: (ESWALOWITZ .... 05.00.42. ohh 26 2. 4 ee 267
GENETICS.—Tradition and conceptive selection. JoHN A. O’KmEFE.... 273
PaLEONTOLOGY.—New genera of Early Cretaceous ammonites from
Califormia andt@regon. RALPH W. IMiAY:.. >)... 2.72 seeaeeeeee 275
Notes and Newsiaae.o. oS5. bao) oe as alias ee 278-280
OLUME 47 September 1957 NUMBER 9
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
PASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CoesteR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate EHdttors: RoNALD BaMFrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL E'sTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; tne editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JourR-
NAL or the ProcEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..................020ceeeees $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, inc]. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ .00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)...,..... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourNaAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monoerarpu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.................0.-00000. $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.......................20000 $25.00
Singlevolumes unbound) 3520 ds: sonar oe cates ace iaeciae ace eee 2.00
Sinigle smu MO SLs: 5 6:3 ees sac eee shesah ws ee ve Meat ee tees Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLere, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of Auguat 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47 SEPTEMBER 1957 No. 9
PHYSICS.—The elasticity of rubber. LAWRENCE A. Woop, National Bureau of
Standards.
(Received April 22, 1957)
INTRODUCTION Rubbers, natural and synthetic, are
unique in their high extensibility and forcible
quick retraction. These two properties, in
suitable quantitative terms serve as the
modern definition of a rubber—independent
of any mention of chemical structure.
In Fig. 1 the upper curve represents a
typical stress-strain relation obtained with
natural rubber (57). The lower curve repre-
sents values of the stress-temperature
intercept at 0° IX, which will be discussed
later. The upper curve is far from the lin-
earity expressed by Hooke’s Law. We note
while the first careful experimental investi- three regions—the first. of decreasing slope,
gator of the thermoelastic properties of the second of almost constant slope, and
rubber (24) was J. P. Joule, better known the third of very rapidly Increasing slope.
for the mechanical equivalent of heat. Natural rubber can become semicrystalline
Boltzmann (13) and Kohlrausch (26) also 2 stretching. Measurements of crystallinity
each devoted considerable attention to the PY @ variety of methods show no evidence
time-dependent elastic effects in rubber, of crystals in the first Pee as the second
while W. C. Réntgen (41 ) investigated Tegion crystallization increases with time;
Poisson’s ratio in rubber 20 vears before he and in the third region the degree of crys-
discovered X-rays. > tallmity may be as high as 30-40 percent
2 and varies little with time.
Fig. 2 shows the same data (57) as Fig. 1
The properties of rubber have been re-
garded in former times as sufficiently novel to
call for research activities on the part of a
number of scientists better known for their
work in other fields. Joseph Priestley,
discoverer of oxygen, gave it its name (36).
Electrician Michael Faraday first measured
its chemical composition (15). The first to
treat the thermodynamics of elastic de-
formation and to predict temperature and
energy changes on the stretching of rubber
was none other than Lord Kelvin (25),
In the present century the diversity of
facts and theories to be considered in natural : 2 s
philosophy has forced such compartmentali- With the vertical ordinate or stress scale
zation in science that I suspect that few ©XPanded tenfold. This shows the ‘frst two
members of the Philosophical Society have "eg!ons and a portion: of; the vaind! :
ventured very far in considering the nature Our present conception (30) of ery stalline
and origins of the elasticity of rubber. In eglons in a rubber is that the long chain
any case, I should like to outline our present molecules are parallel and alined in those
state of knowledge, gained almost entirely Tegions and randomly oriented in the amor-
in the past 20 years. Reference should be Phous regions. Rubberlike elasticity is
made to several books (1-6) for details Possible only in the amorphous regions.
Which can not be included in the present The upturn in the stress-strain curve repre-
paper. sents the stiffening effect of the crystalline
1 Address of the Retiring President, Philo- Tegions in guy amorphous matrix. To avoid
sophical Society of Washington, January 13, 1956. the complexities associated with a two-
281
282 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 9!
2500
TEMPERATURE 25° C
2000
1500 eee x ORIGINAL —
OO AC ED THREE MONTHS
1000
500
STRESS - POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
STRESS TEMPERATURE
INTERCEPT.
-/000
-/500
- 2000
725005
100 200 500 600 700 800
300 400
ELONGATION - PER CENT
Fic. 1.—Stress-strain relation and stress-temperature intercepts at constant elongation.
Natural rubber. Data in Reference 51.
250
TEMPERATURE 25°C
200
=2%--x-- ORIGINAL
—o—o— AGED THREE MONTHS
'
|
150
ax
-
~
i)
Ss
a
is}
i)
STRESS - POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
STRESS TEhdPERATURE
INTERCEPTS
-/00
-/50:
0
100 200 300 400 500
ELONGATION - PER CENT
Fie. 2.—Stress-strain relation and stress-temperature intercepts at constant elongation.
Ordinate range one-tenth that of Fig. 1. Natural rubber. Data in Reference 51
SEPTEMBER 1957
phase system we shall concern ourselves
hereafter only with effects obtained in the
absence of crystallinity and consequently
shall consider only the first region of the
stress-strain curve.
VISCOELASTIC BEHAVIOR
The relation between stress and strain in
rubber is quite time-dependent. The curves
already shown were obtained after the stress
had been applied for several hours. Fig. 3
shows the stress-strain relations when the
specimen is stretched at a constant speed
of about 200 percent per minute and then
allowed to retract at the same rate. A second
extension curve, begun 3 minutes after
completion of the first, falls considerably
below the first curve, but the second re-
traction curve is almost identical with the
first. The specimen in this case was GR-S—a
nonerystallizing copolymer of butadiene and
styrene. If the length is held fixed (at 100
percent elongation, for example), the stress
is found to decrease with time—rapidly at
first and then more and more slowly. If
the load is held fixed the length increases
rapidly at first and then more and more
slowly. The first condition is called stress
relaxation; the second is called creep. If
the length is held fixed at some point on the
retraction curve, one finds an increase of
stress with time, or correspondingly a
decrease of length with time if the load is
held fixed after partial retraction. The
curve shown by the dashed line is that
obtained after several hours of stress re-
laxation at each elongation. It is inter-
mediate between the first extension and the
retraction curves and is comparable with
the curves shown in Figs. 1 and 2 for natural
rubber. There is relatively little ‘“‘set’’—
namely extension remaining after release of
load. Almost all this set disappears in time,
as will be seen later, and the discussion will
be restricted to rubbers which are suff-
ciently well-vulcanized to show little signifi-
cant flow or permanent deformation.
The area under the extension curve
represents the work done in deforming the
rubber and the area under the retraction
curve represents the external work done by
the rubber in retracting. The difference
WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER 283
7s
50
- POUNDS PER SQUARE /WCH
STRESS
200 250
° $0 aa
100 150
ELONCATION - PERCENT
Fre. 3.—Stress-strain relation for extension and
retraction at the rate of about 200 percent per
minute. There was an interval of about 3 minutes
between the two cycles. The dashed line shows
stress value after about 2 hours of relaxation at
fixed elongation. GR-S synthetic rubber. Data in
Reference 42.
between these areas—the area between
the curves—represents the irrecoverable
energy loss on completing a cycle—in exact
analogy with the hysteresis losses in mag-
netic materials. The loss shown by GR-S
synthetic rubber is much larger than is
obtained with natural rubber under the
same conditions in the absence of erystalli-
zation. The loss manifests itself in heat of
course and causes GR-S tires to develop
higher temperatures than natural rubber
tires In operation.
The loss shown by GR-I or Butyl rubber
(commonly used in inner tubes) is normally
much greater than that shown by GR-S
synthetic rubber, particularly if the cycle
is traversed rapidly. Dropped from a height
of 6 feet a natural rubber ball is deformed
in a period of the order of milliseconds and
rebounds giving back about 80 percent of
its original energy; about 20 percent is
lost in hysteresis. A Butyl rubber ball
dropped under the same conditions gives
back about 8 percent of its original energy;
about 92 percent is lost in hysteresis.
Creep, stress relaxation, set, and related
effects are examples of viscoelastic phe-
nomena in general. Extensive studies of
creep have been made by Leaderman
284
(4, 28, 29) and extensive research on stress
relaxation has been conducted by Tobolsky
(44, 45). Ferry (16) has applied dynamic
methods in this field.
Fig. 4 shows unpublished experimental
data obtained by H. Leaderman on the
creep of a pure-gum vulcanizate of natural
rubber in shear at different temperatures.
The shear strain was observed from 5 sec.
to 5 min. after the application of a constant
shear stress of 10.67 psi. At —60° C the
strain was too small to be measured for
times less than 0.5 min. Progressive in-
creases with temperature and time can be
noted in Fig. 4 up to —40° C. At 0° and
50° C little change with time can be noted
on the scale of coordinates shown. How-
ever, the strain at 50° is seen to be less than
thatrat Om.C:
All the data shown in Fig. 4 can be repre-
sented in the form of a single sigmoid curve
by two successive operations on the co-
ordinates, as follows: (1) plotting as ordi-
nate a quantity equal to the shear strain
multiplied by a factor of T/298 where T
is the temperature of observation in °K
and 298° Kk (=25° C) is a reference tempera-
ture and (2) displacing the curves along
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 9
the log-time axis until the new ordinate
values coincide. The first operation is
based on the conclusions of the statistical
theory of an equilibrium modulus of rubber
elasticity (5) to be discussed in more detail
in a later section. The second operation is
based on a principle of equivalence of time-
scale and temperature change which has
been extensively investigated (4, 16, 28,
44, 45). The shape of the curves in Fig. 4
is such that, after these operations, coinci-
dence of the overlapping portions of the
curves is indeed obtained, and the amount
of shift necessary for coincidence of the
ordinate values agrees very well with general
relations found applicable to all polymers
(16, 45).
A single curve is obtained rising in sigmoid
fashion from a strain too small to be ob-
served at short times to a shear strain
corresponding to a modulus of the order of
107 dynes/em? at long times. The curve
may be regarded as representing the be-
havior of the rubber over a very wide range
of times at a single reference temperature.
The behavior at other temperatures may
be obtained by a mere shift of the log-time
scale. General confirmation is given to this
CREEP CURVES, HEVEA GUM STOCK
SHEAR STRESS 10.67 PSI
0.20
woo: 8 —p—=9=90-QR=N=8
ee ae 5
pcan i 9-0-0586
oo
SHEAR
STRAIN
0.10
0.05
0.01 0.1
TIME, MINS.
Fic. 4.—Shear creep at various temperatures. Natural rubber. Unpublished data of Leaderman.
| SEPTEMBER
|
j
1957
ELONGATION, PERCENT
| 10
WOOD: BLASTICITY
100
OF RUBBER 285
1,000 10,000
TIME, MINUTES
Fie. 5.—Creep at 25°C. Stress about 3 kg/em? (2kg/cem? for GR-I). A. Neoprene. B. Natural
rubber. C. GR-I (Butyl) rubber. D. GR-S. Data in Reference 31
conception by studies of the dynamic
modulus for sinusoidal stresses of varying
frequency (1/6). By extending into the
megacycle range at 25° C, these studies can
give information about the behavior in the
range of microseconds, whereas inertial
effects prevent direct creep observations on
specimens of ordinary size at times shorter
than the order of milliseconds.
The sigmoid creep curve for 25° C derived
from Fig. 4 indicates that a strip of rubber,
in the absence of inertial effects, would
first deform perceptibly in a time of the
order of hundredths of a microsecond.
Other work involving the observation of
strains smaller by several orders of magni-
tude has shown that the effective modulus
for shorter times is of the order of 10"
dynes/cm?. Between about 0.01 microsecond
and 10 microseconds the creep curve indi-
cates that the deformation would rise to
correspond to a modulus of the order of
107 dynes/cm?. The most rapid rise occurs
for times of the order of a few microseconds.
The slope then shows a steady decrease
until the time is of the order of one second,
at which point its value is about 2 percent
per decade. All the data beyond this time
could be represented by a line of constant
slope of approximately the same value.
Entirely analogous results are obtained
from stress-relaxation experiments (44,
45).
Fig. 5 shows experimental observations of
Martin, Roth, and Stiehler (37) covering
four decades of the creep curve at 25° C
beginning at one minute. In this case the
specimens were subjected to simple ex-
tension at a fixed stress. As far as can be
seen the relation of elongation to log time is
linear over this range in agreement with
the representation of the data of Fig. 4
from one second to 5 minutes. Martin,
Roth, and Stiehler (37) give the creep of a
natural rubber compound vulcanized to
approximately the same Young’s modulus
(13.8 kg/cm?) as the vulcanizate used by
Leaderman in Fig. 4 as averaging 2 percent
per decade, in agreement with the figure
noted for Leaderman’s data. The decrease
of slope of the creep curve, evident over the
range from microseconds to about one second,
apparently does not continue over the next
six decades of log time.
The maximum time shown in Fig. 5 is
about one week, and it is not feasible to
extend the observations appreciably farther
on the logarithmic time scale at 25° C
because of the likelihood of irreversible
chemical changes due to aging of the rubber.
Likewise degradation and flow (31, 42, 51)
and nonrecoverable stress relaxation (10, 11)
occur in most elastomers within a few hours
if observations are made at temperatures
above 50° C. Thus it is not feasible to ex-
tend. the effective time-scale by observa-
286
tions at temperatures higher than 50° C.
Consequently, with the exception of some
specially purified silicone rubbers ‘‘cross-
linked by radiation” (14), we know of no
instances where experimenters have been
successful in obtaining conditions such that
no change of deformation with time could
be observed.
A model system possessing a single re-
tardation time would give a sigmoid creep
curve reaching 99 percent of its final value
0.66 decade beyond its point of maximum
slope. It has already been noted that the
experimental creep curve continues its
observable rise for at least 12 decades be-
yond its point of maximum slope. The
conclusion is that each rubber listed in
Fig. 5 must be represented as a system with
a very wide distribution of retardation
times, extending up to at least a week.
Recovery curves at 25° C (3/) demon-
strate that recovery is essentially complete
and that the synthetic rubber Neoprene,
which showed the greatest slope in its creep
curve and had the largest temporary set
also recovered most rapidly and its recovery
in 10,000 minutes was as complete as that
of the others.
The recovery curves demonstrate that a
once-stretched rubber is still undergoing
changes a week after the stress was removed.
The importance of previous mechanical
history was also brought out by experiments
of Martin, Roth, and Stiehler (37) yielding
creep curves under a stress of 2 kg/cm?
measured (1) after no prestressing, (2)
after prestressing for 1440 min. at 4 kg/cm?
with no time for recovery, and (8) after
prestressing for 1440 min. at 4 kg/cm’
followed by 5 min. of recovery at zero stress.
It was found that the effects of the 5-minute
interval of recovery disappear after about
an hour but that the effects of the one-day
prestressing are still evident after a week.
FORM OF STRESS-STRAIN RELATION
Suppose that the stress is maintained
constant and the strain measured after a
fixed period of creep—1,000 min. for example.
Fig. 6 shows the results which would be
obtained with three different rubber vul-
canizates. The ordinate is the stress F
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
(force divided by undeformed cross section)
and the abscissa L the ratio of stretched to
unstretched length. A short section of the
compression curve, where L is less than
unity, is shown. The value of Young’s
modulus MV, or slope at L = 1, is 10, 15, or
20 kg/cm? respectively for each of the three
curves. This covers about the range of |
values encountered for rubber vulcanizates
contaiming no fillers—the only ones to be
considered here.
The first significant fact to be noted in this
connection is that the course of the curve is
dependent only on the modulus. The modu-
lus varies with the nature of the rubber,
the extent of vulcanization, and the time
of creep, but the stress-strain relation does
not depend on what particular combination
of these factors leads to a given modulus.
This means that the curves given are appli-
cable for example to any period of creep;
of course all points must be taken after the
same fixed time. It should be pointed out
that the stress-strain curves observed when
the stress and strain are varied simul-
taneously (as in normal tensile testing) do
not fulfill this condition.
The second significant fact to be noted is
the apparent similarity of shape of the
curves. This is demonstrated by plotting
the ratio of stress to modulus, ’/M, against
L. The three curves of Fig. 6 all coalesce to
a single general function having unit slope
at L = 1.
An empirical function representing the
observed values of F/M satisfactorily over
the range of interest has been found to be:
F/M = (L2—L~) exp A(L-L) (1)
where A is a constant (3/7). A plot of this
function including the compression region
is shown by the full line in Fig. 7. The con-
stant A has been taken as 0.38. The relation
predicted by the statistical theory to be
discussed later is shown by the dashed line
for comparison. Of course no significance is
to be attached to the portion of the empirical
curve near the origin. The directly observed
values of F/M are found to lie on the full
line for values of L between 0.5 and about 3.
The data of Martin, Roth, and Stiehler
(31) offer the best experimental verification
SEPTEMBER 1957
WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER 287
1s Tir v| ae me ly TRE Wy, dese
F
kg/cm2
10 ;|—
Di
ie)
-4 | | | Seer |
0.5 1.0 ES) 2.0 2.5 3.0
1
ths
Fig. 6.—Stress-strain relations for rubbers with modulus values of 10, 15, and 20 kg/em:?.
“© 0.5 1.0
\(C-2)exp 0.38(L-L')
1.5 2.0 2.5
(L
Fic. 7.—Empirical function for relation between stress-modulus ratio /’/M and extension
ratio L. Dashed line shows function predicted by statistical theory.
of this statement in the region of extension,
while the data of Treloar (47) offer the most
extensive verification in the compression
region between L = 0.5 and L = 1. The
observations are better represented by the
dashed curve of the statistical theory only
for values of L less than 0.5. The success of
the single empirical function in representing
both compression and extension is a very
significant accomplishment.
A more logical and more sensitive method
of testing the validity of the empirical
F/M function is shown in Fig. 8. The form
of the function is such that a plot of the
quantities shown as ordinates should yield a
straight line with a slope corresponding to
the constant A (taken as0.38 in Fig. 7) and an
intercept corresponding to the modulus V.
The data (31) shown here are for GR-I
(Butyl) rubber specimens. Table 1 shows
288
values of the slopes of these and similar
lines for pure-gum vuleanizates of natural
rubber and the three common synthetic
rubbers.
Accepting the validity of the empirical
F/M function one can then compile a
table of values of F/M for each percent
elongation between 0 and 200; from a single
observation of stress and strain the table
can be used to evaluate WM. M is the most
logical quantity to use in characterizing the
kind of rubber, the state of vulcanization,
and the creep behavior. If desired the table
can be used a second time to determine
the value of F at any elongation. The utility
of such a table in practical work is obvious.
THERMODYNAMICS:
ENTROPY AND ENERGY
The retractive force in a stretched metal
can be traced back to interatomic forces
and potential energy associated with a
displacement of atoms. The expansive force
of a compressed gas, on the other hand, is
not primarily due to any interatomic forces
or potential energies, but is associated
with the kinetic energy of the thermal
motion of the gas particles. Work done on
the gas is converted to thermal energy of
the particles and may be partially recovered
as the gas is allowed to expand again. In
this case changes in entropy must be con-
sidered and the effect of temperature is
highly — significant. Correspondingly the
pressure of the gas increases quite rapidly
with increasing temperature, while the re-
tractive force in a stretched metal generally
decreases rather slowly with increasing
temperature.
One can determine whether the retractive
force in stretched rubber is primarily due to
interatomic forces (as in the metal) or to
entropy changes (as in the gas) from an
examination of stress-temperature relations
(32). Thermodynamic considerations can be
applied to derive quantitative relations
involving “equilibrium” (1.e., time-inde-
pendent) values of the stress. We shall follow
the thermodynamic treatment and symbols
of Flory (3) in this section.
The change in internal energy dH in a
process is the sum of the heat energy added
TdS, where dS is the entropy change and 7
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
TaBLE 1.—VaALUES FOR “A”? InN EQuaTion 1
. 1
ace Minutes Time of creep in minutes
1 10 100 1000
Natural 20 0.35 | 0.36 | 0.36 | 0.37
22 .85 .36 .36 7
25 39 36 .36 37
30 .36 37 .36 50x
40 .36 37 oo OF
60 .36 87 ROM 387
80 .36 .36 .O7 OF
100 .36 BOs .38 .08
120 .36 87 38 08
240 36 87 BOY) 38
GR-S 20 .33 .33 34 .36
25 34 04 .89 aol
30 34 84 .80 38
40 85 .30 .36 38
60 Ast5) .36 .36 .38
80 .35 37 37 .38
100 .36 37 37 38
120 .36 Ol 387 .38
160 .36 37 387 .38
240 36 37 37 .38
GR-I 20 .32 nO 34 .36
22 .33 .34 .36 OF
25 34 .36 37 .38
30 .36 37 .38 39
40 TOM .38 38 .389
60 .38 .38 39 40
80 .39 -40 -40 .40
100 .39 -40 .40 41
160 .40 -40 41 -40
240 .40 -41 Al 42
Neoprene 20 .38 .38 .38 39
40 .38 .08 .89 .40
90 .38 .39 39 .40
the absolute temperature, plus the work
done on the system by the external pressure,
namely —PdV and by the retractive force,
namely fdL.
dH = TdS —PdV + fdL (2)
where f is the force and dL the distance
through which the force acts.
The Gibbs free-energy F and the Helm-
holtz energy function A are defined as
follows:
fh PV = TS A py, (3a, b)
The change in free energy dF in a process
can be obtained by differentiation of Eq.
(3a) to give
dF = VaP — SaT + fal.
(4)
VOL. 47, No. 9
SEPTEMBER 1957
log FE/(L-1)
o9
O O05 10
ence 31.
It can be seen that
OF <
ile aii (5)
and
OF i :
+l. Ca 6)
Utihzing the well-known property of a
double partial derivative that the order of
differentiation is immaterial one finds that
of = =|. @
The quantity on the right is significant in
calculations but not directly observable. The
quantity on the left is readily measured.
Solving Equation (2) for the force one
finds:
aS aH
Renate en
WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER
289
15 20 25
(2-W/L
Fig. 8.—Plot for determining validity of empirical function and evaluating the constant A and the
modulus W. GR-I (Butyl) rubber vulcanized 20, 30, 60, and 240 minutes. 100 min. creep. Data in Refer-
since the quantity P ov] is negligible.
OL 'r,p
Finally,
a at | za)
Spal iiss fia gui lo
This means that if the force f measured
at constant length and pressure is plotted
against the temperature 7’, then the slope
of the tangent to the curve at any point will
give mo and the intercept (at 0° Kk)
OL Tee
of the tangent will give on :
OL |r,p
Plots of this sort are frequently made
(7, 8), and are usually found to be practi-
cally linear. The entropy component of the
force —T 38 is often found to be con-
OL \r,p
siderably larger than the energy component
0H
aL
gible in general.
| but the latter is by no means negli-
WIP
290
This analysis of the components at con-
stant pressure, while perfectly valid, does
not possess as much significance as it would
if it had not been found (20, 21) that there
is a volume increase on stretching rubber,
amounting to hundredths of a percent at an
elongation of 100 percent under constant
pressure. This volume increase is responsible
for significant parts of the internal energy
and entropy changes. Consequently if at-
tention is to be centered on configurational
aspects, the analysis should be made at
constant volume, not at constant pressure.
In this case, it is found convenient to
perform on the Helmholtz energy function
A the same operations just performed on
the Gibbs free energy F. It will be re-
membered that A is # — 7S and so
dA = dE — TdS — SdT
dAy— eed Vaasa ln wale
(10)
(11)
The partial derivatives of A at constant
volume are again f and —S and on cross
differentiation we get
(13)
This is identical in form with Equation
(9) previously obtained at constant pressure.
It calls for maintaining the volume constant
by the application of external pressure as the
force-temperature relation is investigated.
This would be an experimental condition
quite difficult to maintain accurately, al-
though consideration has been given to
attempting it.
The same result can be obtained under
much simpler experimental conditions if
one makes use of the following approxi-
mation:
| aie =|
OIG Nave OSE Nape
where a is the ratio of stretched to un-
stretched length, the lengths being measured
at the same temperature. This approxima-
tion may be derived by an extended analysis
(14)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(3) which will not be repeated here. Finally
then
Loe ab
spre a v |
The force required to maintain a constant
elongation, (a — 1), is relatively easy to
measure as a function of temperature at |
constant pressure.
Typical schematic force-temperature plots |
of the types just described are shown in |
Fig. 9, where the resolution of the force |
into energy and entropy components at |
constant pressure and at constant volume |
can be noted. If the force-temperature plot
is not linear the lines shown can be taken to
represent the tangents to the curve at point
D. If the force is taken as that acting on unit
area of original cross section the ordinate
in Fig. 9 can also represent the stress.
From experimental studies of the type
illustrated in Fig. 9 one obtains data similar
to that shown in the lower curves of Figs.
1 and 2, which give values of the stress:
temperature intercept for natural rubber
which has been maintained at constant
elongation for several hours (4/7). This
period is long enough to insure that the
stress 1s changing only very slowly with
time. However, the true ‘equilibrium’
values required in the thermodynamic
analysis are not experimentally accessible,
since the stress relaxation of natural rubber
at 25° C, like the creep, is normally not less
than the order of 2 percent per decade of
time, as discussed in the section on visco-
elastic behavior. Some observers have re-
duced the rate of stress relaxation at 25°
C by a previous relaxation at the maximum
elongation followed by a recovery period
(22) or by a previous swelling of the rubber
(18, 20). It is not clear to what extent these
procedures may alter the system under
investigation.
The intercept of the stress-temperature
relation represents, as has just been shown,
OL
the stress. The negative values at high
elongations are due to crystallization, which
of course is responsible for large changes in
internal energy with stretching. Crystalliza-
: OE
the internal energy component —— of
WY
VOL. 47, No. 9}
SEPTEMBER 1957 WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER 291
I 1.5 —D--7----- -
i
F CONSTANT LENGTH
kg /cm2 |
_7 28 |
dL TP
LOE |
|
os al
| A Ba EL ay ee eg ee OL TV
:
0.5 “\. CONSTANT ELONGATION Ee
ol T,P
a
~ —— — — — — —_— — — —— ——— — — 4- B-4--—-—- Oley
eee :
) —a~—-—-1t----
0 100 200 ox 300
il
Fic. 9.—Stress-temperature relations. Resolution of stress into entropy and
energy components.
100
ORD-45 GR-S
90
Jo°c
© SPECIMEN NO IS
& SPECIMEN NO. 9S
70 D SPECIMEN NO.
p |
= 9
= 59} T = —p—:- -
w 9
x
Sd 40 | 7 =
8 |
&
w
Q 36 t = — — — — ——}-——
g |
3
Q 20 } _
’
|
2 g
10 =
& = Y
5
ELONGATION - PER CENT
Fie. 10.—Stress-strain relation and stress-temperature intercepts for GR-S. Data in
Reference 42.
tion by favoring the alinement of molecules
in the direction of stretching would be ex-
pected to decrease the total force and lead
to negative values of the intercept. The
positive values which are obtained at low
elongations have not received an explanation
in molecular terms, but are quite small in
comparison with the total stress. The total
stress is consequently to be regarded as
consisting essentially of the entropy com-
ponent alone in the case of natural rubber
in the absence of crystallization.
A similar type of representation of the
results (42) obtained with GR-S synthetic
rubber is given in Fig. 10. The constant-
elongation intercept is always negative
here, becoming zero at the zero elongation.
Thus the observed stress is consistently
292
less than that component arising from the
entropy alone. The intercept at constant
length also shown here differs from that at
constant elongation because of the energy
changes associated with the change of
volume, as already demonstrated in the
thermodynamic analysis.
Similar data for the evaluation of internal
energy changes do not appear to be available
for Butyl rubber and Neoprene.
STATISTICAL CALCULATION OF ENTROPY
The conclusion that the retractive force
in stretched rubber is chiefly associated
with entropy changes stimulated the de-
velopment of calculations based on the
detailed molecular structure of rubber
(5, 48). These calculations and related
background are commonly called the statisti-
cal theory of rubber elasticity (because they
are based on statistics and probability
considerations) or alternatively the kinetic
theory of rubber elasticity (because they
relate to the thermal motions of molecular
segments and are analogous to similar
calculations in the kinetic theory of gases).
A typical rubber molecule consists of a
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 9
long flexible chain of 10,000 to 100,000
atoms. For simplicity, numbering the atoms |
in the chain from | to n and neglecting
atoms not in the chain, let us maintain a
fixed angle between bonds joining adjacent
atoms and no other preferred orientation.
Atom A; may lie anywhere on a circle
formed by rotating the molecule about A,
A» as axis; atom A, is correspondingly on a
circle formed by rotation about A» Ags as
axis, and so on with the other atoms. The
calculation of the most probable value of
A, A,, the distance between ends, is of
course one of the well-known ‘random
flight”? problems of statistics.
For visualization Treloar (5) has con-
structed a model of this sort by bending a
wire to make 1,000 equal segments with
angles of 109° between each segment.
A random choice of one of 6 positions for
A3, Ag, As, etc. on the circles just mentioned
was made by a throw of a die. A photograph
of the wire is shown in Fig. 11.
This of course represents only one of many
possible configurations. Since there are
1,000 choices among 6 possibilities the
number of configurations is 61°, which is
Ay AD
> &
O25 $C
z a ees
Fic. 11.—1000-link chain with random orientation of links. Described
on page 42 of Reference 6.
SEPTEMBER 1957
1078. The end-to-end distance A; A, shown
turned out to be very close to the most
probable end-to-end distance calculated
from statistics. The actual typical rubber
molecule would have a minimum of about
10,000 links rather than the 1,000 shown
here.
We shall not trace out any exact deriva-
tions here but it is easy to see that one can
ealeulate the probability of a given con-
figuration and of a given ensemble of con-
figurations. From this the entropy of the
undeformed rubber can be obtained by the
Boltzmann relation that the entropy is the
Boltzmann constant k times the logarithm
of the probability. A similar calculation can
be made for the entropy in the deformed
state. The difference in entropies multiplied
by the temperature gives the change in the
Helmholtz energy function A on stretching,
or at least that portion of it which arises
from entropy changes.
Three somewhat different approaches
have been used for these calculations of
change of A on deformation. If the dimen-
sions of a cube, initially of unit length on
each side, become )j, 2, and A3 on defor-
mation, the three approaches agree in
predicting that the entropy component of
the energy function change per unit volume
should have the form:
AA = —TAS
= (G/2) AP + rd” + AY — 3) (16)
They also agree in predicting proportionality
between the constant G and absolute tem-
perature but differ in the other factors
determining G.
The approach proposed by Kuhn (23, 27,
46) considers only a single molecule of
molecular weight 7, and assumes that the
deformations of the molecule parallel exactly
the deformations of the bulk rubber. This
approach yields
G = pRT/M, (17)
where p is the density and FR the gas constant.
The approach proposed by F. T. Wall
(46, 50) considers N chains and yields
G = NkT (18)
where /& is the Boltzmann gas constant.
WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER 293
The approach outlined by Flory and
Rehner (3, 19, 49) considers a network re-
solved into tetrahedra of average molecular
weight 1/7. between cross-links. The result is
the same as that given in Equation (17),
where J/. now has the significance just
mentioned.
If the specimen is subject to the type of
deformation known as pure shear \; = JL,
Ny = 1/L and As = 1, where L is the ratio
of stretched to unstretched length for one
dimension of the unit cube. When the de-
formation is simple shear (involving effec-
tively a translation and rotation in addition
to pure shear) the shear strain y is (L —
1/L) and the strain energy is the same as
for pure shear.
The strain energy per unit volume for
simple shear is thus from Equation (16):
W = \(G/2)¢22 = 1/2 — 2)
= (G/2)\ (= 17L)* (9)
W = (G/2)7 (20)
The shear stress o is then:
o = dW/dy = Gy (21)
Equation (21) predicts the validity of
Hooke’s Law for shear stress and strain and
states that the constant G is the shear
modulus.
If the specimen is subjected to simple
extension or compression \,; = L and dy =
As = LL. Here, from Equation (16),
W = (G/2)(2 + 2/L — 3) (22)
and the stress F is then
OY eee
i eS G(L ime) (23)
One notes that the slope of Equation (23)
at the origin is 3G; consequently Young’s
Modulus M is three times the shear modulus
G,—the relation valid for an incompressible
material.
UE = CU B\CG = 15-2) (24)
Experimental values of the entropy com-
ponents of stress can be obtained by sub-
tracting from an observed value of total
294
stress the component due to energy effects.
The methods of determining the latter
quantity are given in the preceding section.
Figs. 1 and 2 show observed values of total
stress (upper curves) and energy component
(lower curves) for a pure-gum vulcanizate
of natural rubber. Up to elongations (about
150 percent) where crystallization becomes
apparent in this rubber the energy com-
ponent is rather small compared with the
total stress; consequently in this instance
the total stress arises effectively from the
entropy component alone. In Fig. 7 the
values of entropy component of the stress-
modulus ratio (dashed line) calculated from
Equation (24) derived from the statistical
theory are compared with the observed
values represented by the empirical relation
(full line) given by Equation (1). It will be
seen that the discrepancy between the ob-
served values and the calculated values is
considerable; the calculated values are as
much as 50 percent larger than the observed
values at L = 3. This discrepancy has been
noted repeatedly in natural rubber (4, 8, 22,
31, 48, 47, 49), but no revised calculation of
the entropy component has been developed
which will explain the discrepancy. The
discrepancy appears also in Butyl rubber
(17) and in silicone rubber (14).
In the case of a pure-gum vulcanizate
of GR-S synthetic rubber (42) the dis-
crepancy is found to be much less. Here
the energy component is much larger, is
always negative, and its magnitude in-
creases markedly with elongation, as can
be seen in Fig. 10. When this quantity is
added to the observed stress to get an
experimental value of the entropy compo-
nent of the stress-modulus ratio, it is found
that the value calculated from statistical
theory seldom exceeds this experimental
value by more than 10 percent. It is difficult
to understand how GR-S should come nearer
to the ideal rubber in this respect and yet be
farther from it in most other respects.
The statistical theory, in addition to the
predictions regarding the functional form
of the stress-strain relation as just discussed,
calls for proportionality between the shear
modulus G and absolute temperature, Equa-
tions (17) and (18). This proportionality
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, No. 9
is normally found to be valid (7, 32, 42, 51).
When precise measurements are made at |
low elongations, curves which are concave
toward the temperature axis are observed
(8).
Finally the statistical theory in Equations
(17) and (18) predicts a definite value of the
shear modulus, which can be calculated if
one can determine WM, or N. The first at-
tempts (9, 17, 18) to verify the relationship
gave values of the calculated modulus
between one-third and one-half of those
which are observed. Very recent extensive
studies (34, 35) have given calculated values
as high as two-thirds of those observed.
In the calculation a correction must be
made for the effect of initial molecular
weight before cross linking. Network en-
tanglements, not considered in the measured
cross linkages, are usually considered re-
sponsible for the higher observed modulus.
On the other hand, in very recent work on
silicone rubber cross-linked by radiation
Bueche (/4) calculates a modulus about
twice that observed.
STRAIN ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS
We have just seen how a single strain
energy function can be used to predict
stress-strain relations under two different
types of deformation. Indeed if completely
known, it can predict these relations for any
arbitrary type of deformation whatever.
We can say then that the ultimate problem
of rubber elasticity is the derivation of the
strain energy function from molecular
considerations. We have seen the rather
limited success of the statistical calculation
of the entropy component.
There are certain general considerations
regarding the form of the strain energy
function which must apply whatever its
molecular origin. Work along these lines was
initiated by Mooney (33) and the ideas were
put into much more general and rational
form by Rivlin (37-40). For example, the
strain energy function must be expressible as
a linear combination of certain functions of
the deformation called strain imvariants.
The three simplest strain invariants are as
follows:
Ty = 2 + AP + A? (25)
| SEPTEMBER 1957
I> = AL A? BS d2? AS: =F A: AL
(26)
and
1 = AL oe ee (27)
Each must fulfill two conditions: first, it
must be symmetrical in \i, Av, and Az, be-
cause of the isotropy of the rubber before
stretching, and second, it must contain
only even powers of the \’s, since the stored
energy is unaltered by a change of sign of
two of the \’s, corresponding to a rotation
of the deformed rubber through 180°. It
ean be seen that each term in /; contains a
single \; in J, they appear in pairs and in 7;
they appear as the product of all three.
Higher strain invariants contain the fourth
and higher even powers of the ’s, but will
not be further considered here because of
their complexity.
If the volume is constant (as it is in rubber
to within some hundredths of a percent),
T;, the square of the volume of the deformed
unit cube, is equal to unity and /, becomes
the sum of the reciprocals of the squares
of the d’s.
For simple extension the relations have
already been mentioned
i = L, No = A3 = JL,
and consequently
a
and
TE 7 =
Mb, 2. 1G? (29)
The stress F for simple extension or com-
pression can be obtained by differentiation
of the strain energy function W.
_dW _ aWah
ma GU aW dl
ab, = Alle GHG
Tana, oe
I, does not appear since it is unity, as
already mentioned, and higher invariants
are being neglected.
2
i! SOC RSE has) ow
ah
ow e
977 as oy setae
+ 20° (L — £ ) oT,
WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER
295
If one wishes to put Equation (381) into a
form suitable for a convenient plot, he has
two choices suggested by the following two
modifications of the equation:
BY OW Ab = I5)
i Al oven sinanae, G2)
TWANG 3 WOR
CHANDY) 2 Gla sia)
ge (BR)
Lou ae 1 an
M al, M al.
If in accordance with the conclusion of
Mooney (33), the partial derivatives remain
constant as L is varied, a plot of
(F/M)/2(L — L) against L—
as suggested by Equation (32) will give a
straight line with intercept
(1/M)(@W/0I,) and slope (1/47)(@W/dl,).
The converse of this statement is not true:
if a straight line is obtained from a plot. of
the type mentioned it is not necessarily
true that the intercept Ci/M and _ slope
C,/M will be the quantities mentioned, since
the partial derivatives may each be functions
of L. Rivlin and Saunders (39) present
evidence to indicate that @W/dI, is sub-
stantially independent of /; and J», and
consequently independent of L. dW/ dl» is
independent of 7; but decreases with increase
of I. However the decrease is not more than
about ten percent over the range considered
here. A plot similar in form to that just
mentioned but not containing the factor M
has found extensive use (22, 39, 40, 43)
in the British literature.
If the plot just mentioned is not a straight
line the slope and intercept may be evaluated
over limited regions of approximate lin-
earity. Fig. 12 shows the empirical F'/M
function given in Equation (1) with A =
0.38, used in a plot differing only by a
constant factor from that suggested by
Equation (32). An approach to linearity is
seen for the intermediate values of LL.
Equation (33) suggests a plot of (F/M) /2-
(1—L*) against L to evaluate as intercept
C,/M and as slope (C;/M. This general
type of plot has been noted in only one
296
1,0
0.9
0.8
3F
M(L-I/L2)
0.7
“0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 9
0.7 0.8 0.3 10
RECIPROCAL OF EXTENSION RATIO, I7L
Fic. 12.—Plot of the empirical stress-strain relation of Eq. (1) in the form suggested by
Kq. (32). A taken as 0.38.
0.36
0.30
HE EN eg
2M(I-L3)
0.20
0.10
0 1.0
2.0 3.0 4.0
Fic. 13.—Plot of the empirical stress-strain relation of Eq. (1) in the form suggested by
Eq. (83). A taken as 0.38.
instance (1/2) (again without the factor
M), although this form appears to be much
more convenient and is more readily visu-
alized than that suggested by Equation
(32). The region of compression also is
represented in a more satisfactory fashion.
Fig. 13 demonstrates the same facts as
Fig. 12 somewhat more clearly by using the
empirical F/M function in the plot sug-
gested by Equation (33). This figure extends
into the region of compression. It shows
that in this region the statistical theory
represents the data adequately. In fact, for
values of L below 0.5 and only in this
region, it has already been pointed out that
the statistical theory represents the data
SEPTEMBER 1957
better than the empirical F/M _ function.
The deviations from the statistical theory
are apparent immediately above L = 1;
there is no region of approximate con-
formity at low values of extension.
For values of L between 1.5 and 3 a
straight line with smaller slope and a positive
intercept is noted, corresponding to the
approach to linearity noted in Fig. 12.
Both slope and intercept are varying in
the region from 1.0 to 1.5.
Crystallization effects (3, 39), lack of
reversibility (40), and the approach to the
limiting extension of a network (39, 40, 49)
have been invoked to explain the behavior
for values of L greater than 3. There has
been a tendency to ascribe the deviations
from linearity for L between 1.0 and 1.5
(i.e., for L~! between 0.7 and 1) to errors of
observation (22) but the deviations are
systematic and the line must form a smooth
junction with the values in the compression
region (Z less than 1), as shown in Fig. 13.
The entropy component of the strain
energy function predicted by the statistical
theory has been given in the preceding
section as Equation (16). This is now seen
to involve only the first strain invariant J,
and constants. It is the simplest possible
form the strain energy function could
assume. The statistical theory offers no
explanation of the term involving the second
strain invariant J, above L = 1.0, as shown
in Fig. 13. The defect, in the case of natural
rubber at least, is in the calculated entropy
and not in the internal energy term, as has
just been shown by the thermodynamic
analysis. The decrease of entropy with L
is less at larger values of L than would be
calculated from pure probability. In other
words, the system retains more disorder in
the arrangement of the molecular chains than
is expected. This is not too surprising. The
quantitative calculation of this additional
entropy from molecular considerations is
one of the most promising fields for further
work in the theory of rubber elasticity.
SUMMARY
Rubbers, natural and = synthetic, are
unique in being highly extensible and in
retracting forcibly and quickly to sub-
WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER
297
stantially their original dimensions when
released.
It has been found that the stress-strain
curves for extension and compression of most
of the simplest vuleanizates of natural
rubber and the three most important syn-
thetic rubbers are similar in shape. The
relationship is expressed by the equation
F/M = (LZ —L) exp A(L—L") where
F is the stress, L the ratio of stretched to
unstretched length, and M and A are con-
stants. The constant J/ depends on the
nature of the rubber, the extent of vul-
canization, and the time of creep. The
constant A has a value of about 0.38.
By a study of stress-temperature relations
it is found that the most important factor
in the retraction of stretched rubber is the
tendency of long chain flexible molecules to
return to a configuration which is statisti-
cally more probable than the one which
the stretching has forced them to assume.
Calculations of entropy changes arising
from stretching can be made from proba-
bility considerations, and a strain energy
function deduced from the entropy changes.
Stresses calculated from the strain energy
function agree with those observed in
compression but are greater than those
observed in extension by almost 50 percent
at L = 3.
A phenomenological approach shows that
the strain energy should be expressible as a
function of certain quantities called strain
invariants, calculable from the deformations.
The simplest behavior is found in the region
of compression (Z less than 1), where the
strain energy is merely the first invariant
times a constant calculable from the en-
tropy changes. For values of L between
1.5 and 3 a different constant and an added
term involving the second strain invariant
are required. The explanation of this be-
havior in molecular terms is one of the most.
important current problems of rubber
elasticity.
REFERENCES
(1) Aurrey, T. Mechanical behavior of high
polymers. Interscience Publishers, Inc.,
New York, 1948.
(2) Erricu, F. R. (editor) Rheology theory and
applications. Academic Press, New York,
1957.
298
(8) Fuory P. J. Principles of polymer chemistry.
Cornell University Press, Ithaca, N. Y.,
1953.
(4) LeaprerMan, H. Elastic and creep properties of
filamentous materials and other high
polymers. Textile Foundation, Washington
D. C., 1948.
(5) Tretoar, L. R. G. The physics of rubber
elasticity. Oxford University Press,
London, 1949
(6) Sruart, H. A. (editor), 4: Die physik der
Hochpolymeren: Theorie und Molekulare
Deutung Technologischer Eigenschaften von
Hochpolymeren Werkstoffen. Springer-
Verlag, Berlin, 1956
(7) AntHony, R. L., Casron, R. H., and Guru,
E. Equations of state for natural and syn-
thetic rubberlike materials. Journ Phys.
Chem. 46: 826. 1942. Rubber Chem. and
Tech. 16: 297. 1943.
(8) Baupwin, F. P., Ivory, J. E., and Anruony,
R. L. Experimental examination of the
statistical theory of rubber elasticity. Low
extension studies. Journ. App. Phys. 26:
750. 1955. Rubber Chem. and Tech. 29:
227. 1956.
(9) BARDWELL, J., and WINKLER, C. A. The for-
mation and structure of vulcanizates. India
Rubber World 118: 509. 1948. Can. Journ.
Res. B27: 116, 128, 139. 1949.
(10) Berry, J. P. The stress relaxation of sulfur
vulcanizates of natural rubber. Journ.
Polymer Sci. 21: 505. 1956.
(11) Berry, J. P., and Warson, E. F. Stress re-
laxation of peroxide and sulfur vulcanizates
of natural rubber. Journ. Polymer Sci. 18:
201. 1955. Rubber Chem. and Tech. 29:
398. 1956.
(12) BLackwe.u, R. F. Quantitative characteriza-
tion of cure. Trans. Inst. Rubber Ind. 28:
75. 1952. Rubber Chem. and Tech. 25: 430.
1952.
(13) Botrzmann, L. Zur Theorie der elastischen
Nachwirkung. Pogg Ann. Physik 7: 624.
1876. Wied Ann. Physik 5: 430. 1878.
(14) Burcue, A. M. An investigation of the theory
of rubber elasticity using irradiated poly-
dimethylsiloxanes. Journ. Polymer Sci. 19:
297. 1956.
(15) Farapay, M. On pure caoutchouc and the
substance by which it is accompanied in the
state of sap or juice. Quart. Journ. Sci. 21:
19. 1826.
———. Experimental Researches in Chemistry
and Physics: 174. Taylor and Francis, Lon-
don, 1859.
(16), Ferry, J. D. Structure and mechanical proper-
ties of plastics. Chapter 6 in Reference 6.
(17) Fuory, P. J. Effects of molecular structure on
physical properties of Butyl rubber. Ind
Eng. Chem. 38: 417. 1946. Rubber Chem.
(18) Fuory, P. J., Rassoun, N., and ScHAarrer,
M. C. Dependence of elastic properties o}
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 9
rubber on the degree of cross linking. Journ,
Polymer Sci. 4: 225. 1949.
(19) Fuory, P. J.. and Rewner, J., Jr. Statistical
theory of chain configuration and physical |
properties of high polymers. Journ. Chem.
Phys. 11: 512. 1943. Ann. New York Acad. ')
Sci. 44: 419. 1948.
(20) Grex, G. Elastic behavior of dry and swollen
rubbers. Trans. Faraday Soc. 42: 585. 1946. |
Rubber Chem. and Tech. 20: 442. 1947.
(21) Gr, G., Stern, J., and Trexoar, L. R. G. |
Volume changes in the stretching of vul- |
canized natural rubter. Trans. Faraday Soe. |
46: 1101. 1950. Rubber Chem. and Tech. |
24: 767. 1951.
(22) GuMBRELL, 8S. M., Muuuins, L., and Rrvuin,
R. 8. Departure of the elastic behavior of |
rubber in simple extension from the kinetic
theory. Trans. Faraday Soc. 49: 1495. 1953.
Rubber Chem. and Tech. 28: 24. 1955.
(23) James, H. M., and Gutn, E. Ind. Eng. Chem.
33: 624. 1941. Journ. Chem. Phys. 11: 455.
1943. Journ. Chem. Phys. 15: 669. 1947.
Journ Polymer Sci. 4: 153. 1949.
(24) JouLE, J. P. On some thermodynamic proper-
ties of solids. Phil. Trans. Roy Soc. (Lon-
don) A149: 91. 1859. Scientific Papers of
J. P. Joule: 413. Physical Society, London,
1884.
(25) Ketvin, Lorp (W. THomson). On the thermo-
elastic and thermo-magnetic properties of
matter. Quart. Journ. Math. 1: 5. 1855.
Mathematical and Physical Papers. 1:
309. Cambridge University Press, 1882.
(26) Kontrauscu, F. Hzxperimental-Untersuch-
ungen ber die Elastischen Nachwirkung
bet Torsion, Ausdehnung und Biegung.
Pogg. Ann Physik (6) 8: 337. 1876.
(27) Kuun, W. Kolloid Zeits. 68: 2. 1934. Journ.
Polymer Sci. 1: 380. 1946.
(28) LeapEeRMAN, H. Viscoelasticity phenomena in
amorphous high polymeric systems. Chapter
in Reference 2.
(29) LeapEeRMAN, H., Smiru, R. G., and Jongs,
R. W. Rheology of polyisobutylene. Journ
Polymer Sci. 14: 47. 1954.
(30) ManpELKERN, L. Crystallization of flexible
polymer molecules. Chem. Rev. 56: 903. 1956.
(31) Martin, G. M., Rorn, F. L., and StrEHLER,
R. D. Behavior of pure-gum rubber vul-
canizates in tension. Trans. Inst. Rubber
Ind. 32: 189. 1956.
(32) Mrypr, K. H., and Frrri, C. Elasticity of
rubber. Helv. Chim. Acta 18: 570. 1935.
Rubber Chem. and Tech. 8: 319. 1935.
(33) Mooney, M. A theory of large elastic deforma-
tion. Journ. Applied Phys. 11: 582. 1940.
(34) Moorg, C. G., and Watson, W. F. Determi-
nation of degree of crosslinking in natural
rubber vulcanizates. Journ. Polymer Sci. 19:
237. 1956.
(35) Muuuins, L. Determination of degree of
crosslinking in natural rubber vulcanizates.
Journ. Polymer Sci. 19: 225. 1956.
SEPTEMBER 1957 WOOD: ELASTICITY OF RUBBER 299
(86) Prresttey, J. Familiar introduction to the (45) TosBousky, A. V., and Cartstrr, E. Elasto-
theory and practice of perspective. London, viscous properties of polytsobutylene and
1770. other amorphous polymers from stress-re-
* (7) Rrvurx, R. S. Large elastic deformations. laxation studies. Journ. Polymer Sci. 19:
Chapter in Reference 2. 111. 1956. Journ. Appl. Phys. 27: 673. 1956.
(88) Rrvuinx, R. 8. Large elastic deformations of (46) Tretoar, L. R. G. The elasticity of a net-
isotropic materials. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. work of long-chain molecules. Trans. Fara-
London A240: 459, and 491. 1948. day Soc. 39: 36. 1943; 39: 241. 1943. Rubber
(89) Riviin, R. S., and Saunpgrs, D. W. Large Chem and Tech. 16: 746. 1943; 17: 296. 1944.
elastic deformations of isotropic materials (47) Tretoar, L. R. G. Stress-strain data for
VII. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London A243: vulcanized rubber under various types of
251. 1951. deformation. Trans. Faraday Soc. 40: 59.
(40) Rivurn, R. S., and Saunpvers, D. W. Free 1944. Rubber Chem. and Tech. 17: 813.
energy of deformation for vulcanized rubber. 1944.
Trans. Faraday Soc. 48: 200. 1952. (48) Tretoar, L. R. G. The thermodynamic study
(41) ROnteEN, W. C. Ueber das Verhaltnis der of rubberlike elasticity. Proc. Roy. Soe.
Quercontraction zur Langendilatation bet (London) B139: 506. 1952.
Kautschuk. Ann. Physik 159: 601. 1876. (49) Trevoar, L. R. G. Structure and mechanical
(42) Roru, F. L., and Woop, L. A. Some relations properties of rubberlike materials. Chapter
between stress, strain, and lemperature in a 5 in Reference 6.
pure-gum vulcanizate of GR-S synthetic (50) Watt, F. T. Statistical thermodynamics of
rubber. Journ. Appl. Phys. 15: 749. 1944. rubber. Journ. Chem. Phys. 10: 485. 1942;
Rubber Chem. and Tech. 18: 353. 1945. 11: 527. 1948. Rubber Chem. and Tech.
(43) THomas, A. G. Departures from the statistical 15: 806. 1942; 17: 392. 1944.
theory of rubber elasticity. Trans. Faraday (51) Woop, L. A., and Roru, F. L. Stress-tempera-
Soc. 51: 569. 1955. ture relations in a pure-gum vulcanizate of
(44) Topotsky, A. V. Stress relaxation studies of natural rubber. Journ. Appl. Phys. 15: 781.
viscoelastic properties of polymers. Chapter 1944. Rubber Chem. and Tech. 18: 367.
in Reference 2. 1945.
a
THE GRASSES OF WASHINGTON
A new publication has just appeared by which the grasses of this area may be identified.
This is Grasses of the Tidewater-Piedmont region of northern Virginia and Maryland by Mrs.
Elizabeth M. Gilman, published in Castanea 22 (1): 1-105, illus. 1957.
Mrs. Gilman, long a student of grasses, has prepared this as a contribution toward the
projected new Flora of the Washington-Baltimore Area. It is a manual with keys and
descriptions. This region contains 191 established species and varieties, besides a few waifs
and adventives. This small manual is a welcome replacement of the grass treatment in Hitch-
cock and Standley’s Flora of the District of Columbia and vicinity issued in 1919, long out of
print and now out of date. It was prepared with all the resources of the world-famous grass
herbarium of the U. 8. National Herbarium in the Smithsonian Institution and under the
guidance of Mrs. Agnes Chase, its honorary custodian.
Reprints, with weather-repellent covers, may be obtained for $1.00 from Dr. E. H.
Walker, Chairman of the Conference on District Flora, % Smithsonian Institution, Wash-
ington 25, D. C.
300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 9
CHEMISTRY .—Chemistry at high pressures and high temperatures.. H. Tracy
Haut, Brigham Young University, Provo, Utah. (Communicated by P. H.
Abelson.)
It is now possible to do experimental work
on a small scale at pressures of 3 million
pounds per square inch up to temperatures
of 5,000°C. This new pressure-temperature
field was opened by the author’s design of
an apparatus known as the ‘‘belt’’ while at
the General Electric Co. in January 1953.
It was in this apparatus that the author suc-
ceeded in making diamonds late in 1954.
Fig. 1 shows this new pressure-temperature
region in comparison to the region that was
accessible prior to this development.
The significance of the opening of this
hitherto unavailable experimental region
will now be discussed. The physical and
chemical changes that can be produced in a
system are qualitatively related to the “‘in-
tensity factor” (pressure, temperature, volts,
etc.) of the energy that is put in to the
system. Energy, of course, can be injected
in to systems in various forms. One of the
most important types of energies has been
heat energy. One cubic centimeter kilo
atmosphere is equivalent to 12.19° Kelvin.
It is now possible to expect to cause
changes in condensed systems by applica-
tion of pressure alone that are comparable
to those formerly brought about by applica-
tion of temperature alone.
In many respects pressure and tempera-
ture are diametric opposites, high pressure
being equivalent to low temperature. As
temperature is increased, solids transform to
liquids, which in turn become gases. Systems
then proceed to products of molecular dis-
sociation, and finally, at sufficiently high
temperatures, the atomic nuclei will be
separated from the electrons by electronic
dissociation. On the other hand, increasing
high pressures cause gaseous systems to be-
come liquids, which in turn transform to
solids. This is followed by collapse of elec-
1 Presented at the Symposium on High Pres-
sures, Carnegie Institution Geophysical Labora-
tory, June 12, 1957. The author wishes to express
his appreciation to the Carnegie Institution of
Washington and the National Science Foundation
for their financial support of the high-pressure
research program at Brigham Young University.
tronic shells and, at pressures of billions of
atmospheres, nuclear fusion.
The general effect of high pressure in
regard to reaction rates is one of reducing
the rate. Therefore, in order to have a
chemical reaction take place under high-
pressure conditions in a reasonable length
of time, it is almost always desirable to
operate at high temperature. A detailed
consideration of the thermodynamics and
reaction rates of systems has been given
elsewhere.”
The general problem of finding the region
in a pressure-temperature field where a reac-
tion will proceed at a measurable or useful
rate 1s one of constructing a free-energy-
equals-O line from the thermodynamics of
the system involved, coupled with the prob-
lem of determining a minimum-rate line as
a function of pressure and temperature. The
desired products will be made from the re-
actants in the region of overlap of these two
curves above the free-energy-equals-0 line.
Pressures now available are great enough
to influence strongly the external electronic
configuration of atoms. Since chemistry de-
pends on the characteristics of the external
electrons, the ordinary chemical behavior of
atoms can be drastically changed by the
application of high pressure. Indeed, it is
possible to force outermost electrons into
vacant inner shells. This pressure effect on
the external electrons is the most fascinating
aspect of high-pressure research for the
immediate future; for it should be possible
under high-pressure conditions to, in effect,
create a new periodic table, wherein the
ordinary chemical properties of the elements
could be so changed that we would not
recognize them.
Consider for a moment the periodic table
shown in Fig. 2. In discussing the electronic
structure of the various atoms, the terminol-
ogy ordinarily applied to the free atom will
2 Hau, H. Tracy. Proceedings of asymposium,
High temperature—a tool for the future: 161-166,
214-215. 1956. Published and distributed by Stan-
ford Research Institute, Menlo Park, Calif.
SEPTEMBER 1957
be used. This will give qualitatively correct
results.
In regard to the effect of high pressure on
the elements, our first question arises with
carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen, as we proceed
with increasing atomic numbers through the
periodic table. These elements contain un-
paired ‘‘p’’ electrons. Can pressure force the
‘p” electrons with parallel spins into opposi-
tion, thereby decreasing the magnetic prop-
erties of these atoms? A like situation exists
with respect to silicon, phosphorous, and
sulphur. I think the answer is yes.
The second type of question arises with
the element potassium, which has a vacant
3d shell. Should pressure force the 4s elec-
tron into this 3d orbital? This situation
continues through nickel. All the elements
underlined in Fig. 3 have empty “inner”
orbitals and hence possess the possibility
of forcing outer electrons at sufficiently
high pressure into the empty orbitals,
H
ie Be
Na Mg
ig Ga Se ah Vv Cr Mn Fe Co
Rb Sr x6 Zr Cb Mo Ma _ Ru_ Rh
Cs Ba ne), apa WieeKemaOS, Ir
Sie RaweeA Chachi bal U Np Pu Am
Ce IB xf) al Sri eue Gd ib,
Fie. 2.—Periodic chart of the elements. (Underlined elements
thereby changing the ordinary chemical
properties of these materials. The under-
lined elements represent two-thirds of the
periodic table. Again I think the answer is
yes.
The element cesium occupies a unique
and outstanding position in the periodic
table, in that there are 6s, 5d, and 4f orbi-
tals, which are very close together energy-
wise; and in that there is but one outermost
electron, which normally occupies the 6s
orbital. Application of pressure to cesium
metal offers the possibility of forcing this
electron into the 4f position, thereby making
the cesium a nonconductor. Additional
application of pressure offers the possibility
of pushing the electron into the 5d orbital,
HALL: CHEMISTRY AT HIGH PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES
301
PRESSURE — THOUSANDS OF ATMOSPHERES
fe) | 2 3 4 5 6
TEMPERATURE — THOUSANDS OF °C
Fra. 1.—Comparison of the old pressure tempera-
ture region with the new region now available.
He
Ne
Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
dimer A Came C Qa ine ON OD ee I Xe
Pr Aug Lgi lee eb Die ONmool si Rn
Cm
Dye ISO IP BRey Ys). EAL
have empty atomic orbitals.)
where the material would again become an
electrical conductor, the increasing energy
sequence of these orbitals being 6s, 4f, and
5d. Increasing pressure, injecting increasing
amounts of energy into the system, would
likely cause an electron to follow this energy
sequence.
Fig. 3 shows the change in electrical
resistance of cesium metal with increasing
pressure.* At 53,200 atmospheres the elec-
trical resistance increases very abruptly, as
though the material were tending to become
an electrical insulator. On increasing the
pressure very slightly, the electrical resist-
3 This phenomenon was first observed by P. W.
Bridgman. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci. 81:
165-251. 1952.
CESIUM RESISTANCE X 107 OHMS
20 0 60 80 100120 140 160
i “PRESS LOAD x 10°? LBS,
Fic. 3.—Cesium transition at 53,200 atmospheres.
ance abruptly decreases. Actually, there
is probably a distribution of electrons among
the various available energy positions. In-
vestigation of this phenomenon at low
temperatures might well establish the merits
of the foregoing conclusions.
A common statement to be found in
textbooks discussing nuclear phenomena is
that radioactivity is not influenced by
temperature or pressure. Of course, this
statement is true when ordinary pressures
and temperatures are involved. At pressures
of the order of 200,000 atmospheres and
above, however, it should be possible to
affect some of the innermost electrons within
atoms. It might well be possible that K
capture, the phenomenon in which an elec-
tron from the K shell falls into the nucleus,
should be effected at very high pressure
conditions. Dr. 8. 8. Kistler and his associ-
ates at the University of Utah are presently
studying this phenomenon.
In recent years man has plunged from a
thorough study of the properties associated
with the outermost part of atoms; 1e., the
electrons, to a study of the innermost part,
the nucleus. I have a hunch that there is an
“in between world” waiting to be produced
by application of extremely high pressures.
In this world the normal electronic system
would be displaced from its usual position
to positions closer to the nucleus.
Let us now turn from these general elec-
tronic effects to some specific problems where
high pressure might make a contribution.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
The field of geochemistry is ripe for ex-
ploitation with high-pressure, high-tempera-
ture techniques. This is true particularly in
regard to the nature of the interior of the
earth. Man’s direct access to the earth’s
interior is, of course, very limited, the
deepest excursions which he can personally
make being limited to depths of about 1
mile (tunnels this deep are to be found in a
South African gold mine). Oil wells have
been drilled to depths of 4 miles, and, of
course, instruments can be lowered to ob-
tain information as to the nature of the
earth at these depths.
Some very interesting thoughts on the
nature of the core of the earth have recently
been advanced by Dr. W. H. Ramsey.’ In
contrast to the usual view that the core is
iron nickel with a silicate flux floating on
top, Ramsey proposed that the core is com-
posed of olivine which has been converted
at the tremendous pressure of 1.4 million
atmospheres to a metallic substance of
density near 10. To support this theory
Ramsey has studied the relationships exist
ing among the planets in the solar system
and has pointed out that the two smallest
planets, Mars and Mercury, are not large
enough to develop a pressure of 1.4 million
atmospheres estimated necessary to support
a core. Metallic and nonmetallic forms of
elements are known in the laboratory. Gray
tin is nonmetallic with a density of 5.75 g
per ce. Application of pressure to gray tin
will form a metallic white variety with a
density of 7.28 g per cc. Arsenic has a yellow
low-pressure modification of density 2.0 and
a high-pressure metallic modification of
density 5.73. Phosphorus has a low-pressure
yellow form of density 1.82 and a high-
pressure black from of density 2.70. E.
Wigner and H. B. Huntington’ have calcu-
lated that hydrogen could be transformed
into a metallic form by application of pres-
sures over 250,000 atmospheres.
Other geological problems can be answered
by laboratory mineral synthesis at high
of mineral synthesis in addition to its
pressure and high temperature The field
geological implications, can, of course, have
4 Nature 168: 667. 1951.
5 Journ. Chem. Phys. 3: 764-770. 1935.
SEPTEMBER 1957 HALL:
industrial significance, as witness the recent
synthesis of diamond and of cubic boron
nitride. In the synthesis of minerals, it is
desirable to use a catalyst or mineralizer.
At high pressure and high temperature, all
the oxides and silicates seem to have reason-
able solubility in water. Therefore, water is
probably the most important of the mineral-
izers. However, there is a long list of ma-
terials that can be used, which includes
various salts, particularly those containing
nitrogen, florine, carbon dioxide, and hydro-
gen. In the high-pressure equipment that I
have used, it is possible to make the con-
taining vessel or capsule of tantulum, nickel
or other metal that readily passes hydrogen
when the container is hot. It is, therefore,
possible to allow for the continuous escape
of hydrogen from a reaction, with the at-
tendant decrease in volume.
Since high-pressure reactions are driven in
the direction of decreasing volume, it is
possible to almost always devise a scheme
for synthesizing a desired product at high
pressure and high temperature. For exam-
ple, consider the following reaction for the
synthesis of aluminum oxide:
CHEMISTRY AT HIGH PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES
303
diamond have the highest cohesive energy
densities of any known materials. Graphite,
however, is soft, whereas the diamond is the
hardest of all known substances. The reason
for this is that graphite does not fulfill the
second requirement of high 3-dimensional
bond symmetry. Carbides, nitrides, borides,
oxides, and sulphides of elements in the
neighborhood of carbon and silicon, together
with some of the heavy metals of the periodic
table, have high cohesive energy densities.
Some of these materials produced under
ordinary conditions do not have high bond
symmetry. Since high pressure tends to
force bonds into positions of highest 3-dimen-
sional symmetry, the application of high
pressure and high temperature to some of
these materials can result in the production
of hitherto unknown materials of very high
hardness. The recent synthesis of “‘borazon’’
by Dr. R. H. Wentorf, Jr., of the General
Electric Research Laboratory is an example
of this situation.
I think there are some excellent prospects
in the field of metallurgy for experimental
work at high pressure and high temperature.
It is well known that the calculated yield
2 AlCl, + 2¥Fe + 3H.O—AI,03-+ 2FeCl; + 3H, il
V = 305 cm?
Since high pressure tends to reduce ‘“‘open”’
structures to closer packed structures and
strives to arrange atoms in positions of
maximum three-dimensional symmetry, any
system not in cubic or hexagonal close pack-
ing is a worthy object of study at high
pressure and high temperature, for here the
possibility exists of producing a_ higher
density system.
The synthesis of hard materials might be
considered at this point. Hardness is a
property resulting from high bond density
and from high three-dimensional symmetry.
A measure of high bond density is the so-
called cohesive energy density. A measure of
cohesive energy density is the heat of
vaporization of a material per cubic centi-
meter. When such information is not available,
a relative measure of bond density can be
obtained by dividing the boiling point of a
substance by its molar volume. Graphite and
Var 3ivem?
strengths of many metals are 100 to 10,000
times greater than those measured. Yield
strength is a structure-sensitive property;
that is, the strength is dependent on the
existence of vacant sites, dislocations, small-
and large-angle boundaries, etc. The elim-
ination of vacant sites, ete., would result in
an improvement of the yield strength of
metals. This elimination would also result
in a volume decrease in the material; and
since the application of high pressure tends
to drive things in the direction of decreasing
volume, such application might prove benefi-
cial. There are undoubtedly activation bar-
riers opposing the removal of the above.
These barriers could be reduced by use of
high temperature and catalysts (fluxes); and
hence the necessary eliminations could be
carried out at a reasonable rate.
Most metallic materials are polycrystal-
304
line. This is another factor causing lower
than calculated yield strengths. Of course,
single crystals would have a smaller volume
than polycrystals, since the density of the
grain boundaries is about ten per cent less
than that of the grains. There is also a cer-
tain amount of free energy associated with
the grain boundaries. Application of high
pressures would favor the elimination of
grain boundaries and the growth of single
crystals from polycrystals.
The heat treatment of metals is an indis-
pensable process carried out in our modern
industrial economy. The formation of desir-
able properties in metals by heat treatment
is, in general, brought about by heating a
material, for example, steel, to a rather high
temperature, at which temperature certain
transformations take place. The material is
then quenched (rapidly cooled) to a lower
temperature. This quenching produces cer-
tain desirable structures in the material.
Temperature, then (for fixed composition),
has been the only variable the metallurgist
has had at his command. Certainly, pressure
could be introduced as a variable, and as an
example, the following sequence might be
followed in producing certain desired prop-
erties in a metal: (1) The metal is heated at
l atmosphere pressure to a certain tempera-
ture; (2) high pressure is now applied to the
metal; (3) the temperature is lowered; and
(4) the pressure is lowered. This sequence
of events could conceivably “lock-in” prop-
erties that could be obtained in no other
way.
High pressure could offer a new crystal-
lization technique. Normally, metals are
produced from the melt by cooling. Metals
could be crystallized from a melt by leaving
the temperature constant and increasing
the pressure. In multi-component systems,
this might produce some unusual results.
At the present time, the volume of ma-
terial that can be subjected to high pressure
and high temperature is rather small, prac-
tical size being not greater than a few cubic
centimeters. For commercial application,
this requires that the material made at high
pressure be quite valuable. Two categories
of material come to mind that fit this classifi-
cation: They are diamonds, or other mate-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
rials of comparable hardness, and drugs, or
other biological materials. It is quite possible
that some directed, tricky substitutions in
complicated molecules of biological im-
portance could be brought about by appli-
cation of pressure that could be achieved in
no other way.
The melting points of substances are pro-
foundly affected by pressures of the order
of 200,000 atmospheres. For example, note
the 600° lowering of the melting point re-
cently reported.® Of course, germanium is
an exception to the general rule that melting
point increases with increasing pressure.
The melting point of some refractory mate-
rials has been increased by well over 1,000°C.
by the application of extremely high pres-
sures. This fact makes it possible to work at
higher temperatures at high pressure than
would be possible at one atmosphere. As a
matter of fact, it is quite possible to work
with a “liquid” refractory under high
pressure conditions. A liquid can flow only
if it contains holes into which the molecules
can move. At 200,000 atmospheres, the
number of holes in a molten refractory can
be severely reduced, and the material will
be extremely viscous.
Work on the melting points of substances
at high pressure has considerable signifi-
cance, in that it should throw some light on
the old question as to the possible existence
of a critical point between liquid and solid
analogous to the critical point between a
gas and a liquid.
High pressure increases the electrical con-
ductivity of most metals by approximately
20 percent at 100,000 atmospheres. How-
ever, the conductivity of some metals is in-
creased by as much as 400 percent. This
phenomenon, of course, falls in line with the
fact that, in general, high pressure behaves
like low temperature. This raises the ques-
tion: Is superconductivity possible at suff-
ciently high pressure?
Certainly, many applications of high pres-
sure at low and high temperatures are to be
found in atomic and molecular theory, geol-
ogy, chemistry, physics and other scientific
disciplines.
6 Hatt, H. T. Journ. Phys. Chem. 59: 1144.
1955.
SEPTEMBER 1957 PURI:
OSTRACODE SUBFAMILY
CYTHERIDEIDINAE 305
PALEONTOLOGY —Votes on the ostracode subfamily Cytherideidinae Puri, 1952.
Harpans 8. Purt, Florida Geological Survey. (Communicated by Alfred R.
Loeblich, Jr.)
(Received April 9, 1957)
The subfamily Cytherideidinae was pro-
posed by Puri (1952, pp. 905-906) to include
Cytherideits Jones, 1857; Copytus Skogsberg,
1939; Pontocythere Dubovsky, 1939; Krithe
Brady, Crosskey and Robertson, 1874;
Cushmanidea Blake, 1933; Sahnia Puri,
1952; and Neocytherideis Puri, 1952. Cythe-
rideis Jones, 1857, was chosen as the type
genus for this subfamily (hence the name
Cytherideidinae) because of its widespread
and established usage, although it was
realized that the validity of this genus was
doubtful since it did not satisfy the require-
ments of the International Commission on
Zoologic Nomenclature. Jones (1856) first
published the name Cytherideis for two
species of Ostracoda from the Tertiary of
the Isle of Wight. Since Jones did not give
generic diagnosis, publication of this new
genus would be considered to be invalid
(Opinion 1, International Commission on
Zoologic Nomenclature) and the genus pre-
dated to Jones’s 1857 publication in which
he actually described it as new and gave
generic diagnosis. Cytheridezs thus was inter-
preted as described and figured by Jones in
1857. However, the International Commis-
sion on Zoologic Nomenclature rescinded
Opinion 1 (Hemming, 1950, pp. 78-80) and
this genus should once again date back to
1856. Since Sylvester-Bradley and Harding
(personal communication, February 1952)
planned to petition the International Com-
mission on Zoologic Nomenclature to use
plenary powers to validate this otherwise
invalid genus, Puri (1952) continued the
usage of this name. Later, Sylvester-Bradley
and Harding (1953) withdrew their applica-
tion and designated one of the two species
(Cytherideis unicornis) described by Jones in
1856 as the type species. This species actu-
ally belongs to Cypridea Bosquet, thus
Cytherideis Jones becomes a synonym of
Cypridea Bosquet and the subfamily Cythe-
rideidinae a synonym of the subfamily
Cyprideinae. This leaves nameless the taxo-
nomic unit intended to include “‘Cytherideis””’
and its allied group.
Consequently, the following nomenclature
is here proposed for the ‘‘Cytherideidinae”’ :
Order Ostracopa Latreille
Suborder Popocorpa Sars
Family CytHEeripa®& Baird
Subfamily Neocytherideidinae Puri, n.
name (= Cytherideisinae Puri, 1952;
Cytherideidinae (Puri) Sylvester-Brad-
ley and Harding, 1953). Type genus,
Neocytheridevs Puri, 1952. Type species,
N. elongatus Puri = Cytherideis subulata
fasciata Brady and Robertson, 1874.
Genus Sahnia Puri, 1952. Type species,
Cytherideis subulata Brady of Puri, 1952.
Genus Krithe Brady, Crosskey, and
Robertson, 1874. Type species, Ilyobates
pretexta Sars, 1865 (1866) = Cytherideis
bartonensis Jones, 1857.
Genus Copytus Skogsberg, 1939. Type
species, C. caligula Skogsberg.
Cytherideis of authors.
Hemicytherideis Ruggieri, 1952 (type
species, Cytheridea elongata Brady,
1868).
?Cushmanidea Blake, 1933 (type species,
Cytheridea seminuda Cushman, 1906).
Genus Pontocythere Dubovsky, 1939.
Type species, by monotypy P. tcher-
nijawskit Dubovsky, 1939.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Buake, C: H. Ostracoda, in Biological survey of
Mount Desert region, pt. 5: 229-241, fig. 40.
1933.
Brapvy, G. 8. A monograph of the Recent British
Ostracoda. Trans. Linn. Soc. 26: 353-495, pls.
23-41. 1868.
, Crosskey, W. E., and Roserrson, D.
Monograph of the post-Tertiary Entomostraca
of Scotland and parts of England and Ireland.
Palaeont. Soc. London Publ.: 1-274, pls. 1-16.
1874.
CusHMAN, JosEpH A. Marine Ostracoda of Vine-
yard Sound and adjacent waters. Proc. Boston
Soc. Nat. Hist. 32 (10): 359-385, pls. 27-38.
1906.
Dusovsky, N. F. Materials contributory to the
knowledge of the ostracod fauna of the Black Sea.
Trav. Station Biological Karadagh 5: 3-38.
1939.
Hemmina, F. (editor). The official record of Pro-
ceedings of the International Commission on
306
Zoological Nomenclature at their session held in
Paris in July 1948. Bull. Zool. Nomencl. 4:
1-760. 1950.
Jones, T. Rupert. Notes on the Entomostraca in
E. Forbes, On the Tertiary fluvio-marine forma-
tion of the Isle of Wight. Mem. Geol. Surv.
Great Britain: 157-158, pl. 7. 1856.
———. A monograph of the Tertiary Entomostraca
of England. Palaeontogr. Soc. London Publ.:
68 pp. 6 pls. 1857.
Miiurr, G. W. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von
Neapel. Monogr. 21, Ostracoda: 1-404, pls.
1-40. 1894.
——. Ostracoda, in ‘‘Des Tierreich’’ 31: 1-434, 92
pls.
Purt, Harpans 8. Ostracode genus Cytherideis and
its allies. Journ. Pal. 26 (6): 902-914, pl. 1380-
131, 14 text figs. 1952.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 9
Rueererr, Giuttano. Nota preliminare sugli
Ostracodi di alcune spiaggie Adriatiche: Note
Lab. Biologia Marine di Fano. Ann. Inst.
Zool. Univ. Bologna 1: 57-64, 1 text fig.
1952.
Sars, G. O. Oversigt af Norges marine Ostracoder.
Vidensk Selsk. Oslo (Christiania) Forh: 1-130.
1865 (1866).
SKkocsBerG, T. A new genus and species of marine
ostracods from south Georgia. Proc. California
Acad. Sci. 23: 514-525, 13 fig. 1939.
SYLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. Some ostracod geno-
types. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (11) 18: 192-199.
1947.
——— and Harpine, J. P. The nomenclature of the
ostracode genus Cytherideis. Journ. Pal. 27:
753-755. 1953.
PALEONTOLOGY .—Postscript notes on the ostracode subfamily Brachycythe-
rinae. HAaRBANS 8S. Puri, Florida Geological Survey. (Communicated by
Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr. )
(Received April 9, 1957)
The subfamily Brachycytherinae was
erected by Puri (1954, p. 248) to include
Brachycythere Alexander (1933, p. 204) and
Alatacythere Murray and Hussey (1942, pp.
169-171). Murray and Hussey (op. cit.)
designated Cythereis (Pterygocythereis?) alex-
andert Howe and Law (1936, pp. 42, 43) as
the type species of Alatacythere. Howe (1951,
p. 538) proposed a new name, wanz, for the
type species since it was found to be pre-
occupied by Cytherets alexandert Morrow
(1934, p. 203). Alatacythere as conceived by
Murray and Hussey (op. cit.) consisted of
two groups with radically different types of
hinges. The first group, typified by Cytherezs
alexanderi, has a trachyleberid-type hinge;
the second group, with species like Cypridina
alata Bosquet (1847, p. 369), has a Brachy-
cythere-type hinge. Since Murray and Hussey
also included species with Brachycythere-
type hingement under Alatacythere, Puri
(1954, p. 248) placed this genus under
Brachycytherinae. Because part of Cypri-
dina alata Bosquet of Murray and Hussey
was not conspecific with Bosquet’s species,
Hill (1954, p. 822) proposed a new specific
name Pterygocythere murrayi for its recep-
tion. Further, Hill (op. cit., pp. 819-820)
erected a new genus, Pterygocythere, with P.
murrayi as its type species and included
under it forms with a Brachycythere-type
hinge formerly included in Alatacythere.
The other group of species (with a trachyle-
berid hinge) originally included by Murray
and Hussey under Alatacythere, are now in-
cluded by Hill (1954) under Pterygocythereis
Blake. This procedure, if followed, would
make Alatacythere an invalid genus.
Taxonomically, Alatacythere is a valid
genus, but its use should be restricted to
only those species which show the hinge-
ment encountered in the type species, A.
avant. The hinge in the type species in the
right valve consists of an anterior rounded
tooth, a postjacent socket that connects
with the posterior crenulate tooth through
a deep furrow. This deep furrow is bound
dorsally and ventrally by parallel flanges.
Pterygocythereis on the other hand has both
the anterior and the posterior elements of
the hingement crenulate in the molt stages
only; the adult never shows any crenulations
of the teeth and the hingement basically is
of Trachyleberis-type.
As a practical solution to this confused
problem, two different subfamilies are pro-
vided to accommodate ‘‘winged”’ forms with
Brachycythere-type hinge structure and
“winged”? genera with trachyleberid hinge.
Alatacythere is redefined and restricted to
species which have the same hingement as
the type species.
SEPTEMBER 1957 PURI:
SYSTEMATIC TREATMENT
Order Ostracopa Latreille
Suborder Popocopa Sars
Family TRACHYLEBERIDAE Sylvester-Bradley
PTERYGOCYTHERINAE, Puri, n. subfam.
Type genus: Pterygocythereis Blake, 1933.
Carapace pellucid, fragile, broadly triangular,
with prominent ventrolateral wings. Hingement
essentially Trachyleberis-type, valve articulate
by means of terminal teeth, sockets, grooves and
flanges.
This subfamily comprises the following genera:
Pierygocythereis Blake and Alatacythere Murray
and Hussey.
Genus Pterygocythereis Blake, 1933
Fimbria Neviani, 1928, pp. 72, 86 (not Fimbria
Rosso, 1826).
Type species: Cythereis jonest Baird, 1850, p.
175, pl. 20, fig. 1.
Carapace pellucid, fragile, hyaline, subtri-
angular, alate, with two well-developed ventro-
lateral wings. Muscle scar pattern consists of a
vertical row of four scars and a U-shaped scar in
front of the vertical row. Hinge in the right valve
with a smooth anterior tooth, a postjacent socket
leading to a posterior smooth, triangular tooth
through a straight groove. This groove is bound
dorsally and ventrally with flanges. Hinge of the
left valve complementary. In the molt stages both
the anterior and the posterior elements of hinge-
ment are crenulate.
Range: Cretaceous to Recent.
Remarks: Fimbria Neviani, 1928, is an earlier
name for this group, but it is preoccupied and not
available. The sole species referred to Fimbria by
Neviani (Cythere fimbriata Mister) is syn-
onymous with Cythereis jonesi Baird, the type of
Pterygocythereis (Lienenklaus, 1894, p. 216;
Key, 1955, p. 129).
Genus Alatacythere Murray and Hussey,
1942 (emended)
Type species: Cythereis (Pterygocythereis?)
alexandert Howe and Law, 1936, pp. 42, 43, pl. 4,
fig. 23; pl. 5, fig. 5, (not Cythereis alexanderi
Morrow, 1934, p. 203, pl. 31, figs. 14a-c) =
Alatacythere iwani Howe (1951, p. 538) n. name.
Carapace pellucid, fragile, subtriangular, alate
with well-developed ventrolateral wings. Muscle
scar pattern in the type species consists of a
OSTRACODE SUBFAMILY BRACHYCYTHERINAE
307
group of three scars above a vertical row of four
scars; in front of the ventral scar there is another
scar. Hinge in the right valve with an anterior,
large, rounded tooth, a postjacent socket con-
necting with the posterior large crenulate tooth
through a straight groove. This groove is bound
both dorsally and ventrally by flanges that
parallel the grove
Range: Oligocene.
Family CyTHeripak Baird, 1850
Subfamily BracHYCYTHERINAE Puri,
1954 (emended)
Type genus: Brachycythere Alexander, 1933,
p. 204.
Carapace subquadrate to subovate, surface
smooth, pitted or reticulate, imflated ventrally
with a well-developed ala or a ventrolateral
wing. Hingement essentially crenulate, valves
articulate by means of terminal crenulate teeth,
sockets and median and/or dorsal and ventral
crenulate grooves and dorsal and ventral and/or
dorsal, median and ventral hinge-bars. Anterior
elements of the hingement in intermediate genera
are noncrenulate. Line of concrescence and inner
margin coincide.
This subfamily includes the following genera:
Brachycythere Alexander, Pterygocythere Hill, and
Diogmopteron Hill.
Genus Brachycythere Alexander, 1933
Type species: Cythere sphenoides Reuss, 1854,
p. 141, pl. 26, fig. 2.
Carapace large, subquadrate to subovate;
valves inequal (left larger than right). Anterior
end broadly and obliquely rounded; posterior end
narrower than the anterior and compressed.
Both dorsal and ventral margins arched. Surface
of the carapace smooth, pitted or reticulate.
Carapace inflated with a well-developed ala.
Hinge in the right valve with an anterior crenulate
tooth, a postjacent socket leading to the posterior
crenulate tooth, through a groove. This groove is
bound dorsally and ventrally by hinge-bars.
Hinge of left valve complementary. Muscle scar
pattern consists of a vertical row of four scars;
in front of this vertical row is another vertical
row of two scars; the upper one is heart-shaped;
anterior to the second vertical row, there is an-
other heart-shaped scar. Marginal areas are
broad, radial pore canals are numerous, and
closely spaced with a tendency to branch in the
308
anteroventral region. Line of concrescence and the
inner margin coincide.
Range: Cretaceous to Recent.
Genus Pterygocythere Hill, 1954
Type species: Cypridina alata Bosquet, 1847,
p. 369, pl. 4, figs. la-d.
Carapace large, subquadrate to subovate.
Anterior end compressed, broadly and obliquely
rounded; posterior end compressed and narrower
than the anterior. Dorsal margin arched; ventral
margin nearly straight. Surface of the carapace
smooth or spinose, carapace alate, with well-
developed ventrolateral wing. Hinge in the right
valve with a crenulate anterior tooth, a post-
jacent socket leading to the large, elongate,
crenulate, posterior tooth through a groove. This
groove is bound both dorsally and ventrally by
hinge-bars. Hinge of the left valve complemen-
tary. Marginal areas are broad, radial pore canals
numerous, irregular, closely spaced. Line of
conecrescence and inner margin coincide.
Range: Upper Cretaceous to Oligocene.
Remarks: This genus can be easily distinguished
from Brachycythere by its ventrolateral wing. It
could be separated from Pterygocytherevs, which
it resembles externally, by its Brachycythere-type
hinge. Pterygocythereis has a characteristic
Trachyleberis-type hinge.
Genus Diogmopteron Hill, 1954
Type species: Brachycythere liinenensis Triebel,
1941, pp. 383-385, pl. 8, figs. 77-80.
Carapace small to medium, subquadrate.
Anterior end broadly and obliquely round,
posterior end narrower and compressed. Dorsal
margin nearly straight; dorsal and ventral
margins converge posteriorly. Surface of the
carapace smooth or spinose. Carapace alate, with
a well-developed ventrolateral wing. Hinge in
the right valve with a smooth anterior tooth, a
postjacent socket leading toward the posterior
crenulate tooth through a groove. Both dorsally
and ventrally this groove is bound by hinge-bars.
Above the dorsal hinge-bar, there is another
groove which roughly parallels the dorsal hinge-
bar and is bounded dorsally by another hinge-bar.
Line of concrescence and inner margin coincide.
Muscle scar pattern consists of four scars ar-
ranged in the shape of an inverted “L”’.
Range: Upper Cretaceous.
Remarks: This monotypic genus is fundamen-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
tally a Brachycythere except for having two
grooves (dorsal and ventral) and three hinge-bars
(dorsal, median and ventral). Brachycythere
exhibits only one such groove and two hinge-bars.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
ALEXANDER, C. I. Shell structure of the genus
Cytheropteron, and species from the Cretaceous
of Texas. Journ. Pal. 7: 181-214, pls. 25-27.
1933.
Barrp, WiuuraM. The natural history of the British
Entomostraca. Proc. Roy. Soc. London 18:
i-vill, 1-365, 36 pls. (Ostracoda, pp. 138-182,
pls. 18-23). 1850.
BuakE, C. H. Ostracoda, in Biological survey of
Mount Desert region, pt. 5: 229-241, fig. 40.
1933.
Bosquet, J. Description des Entomostraces fossiles
de las Crave de Maestricht. Mem. Soc. Roy. Sci.
Liege 4: 353-378, pls. 1-4. 1847.
Hitt, Bernarp L. Reclassification of winged
Cythereis and winged Brachycythere. Journ.
Pal. 28: 804-826, pls. 97-100. 1954.
Howes, H. V. New name for genotype of Alata-
eythere (Ostracoda). Journ. Pal. 25: 538.
1951.
—. Handbook of ostracod taronomy. Louisiana
State Univ. Stud., Phys. Sci. Ser. 1: i-xviii,
1-386. 1955.
and Law, Joun. Lowisiana Vicksburg
Oligocene Ostracoda. Louisiana Geol. Surv. 7:
96 pp., 6 pls. 1936.
Kny, A. J. The microfauna of the Aquitanian-
Burdigalian of southwestern France. Pt. 4,
Ostracoda. Verh. Nederland Akad. Wetensch.,
Afd. Natuurkunde. Erst. Reeks, Decl. 21,
No. 2: 101-136, pls. 14-20, 1 table. Amster-
dam, 1955.
LIENENKLAUS, E. Monograph der Ostracoden des
nordwest-deuschen Tertiars. Zeitschr. deutsch
geol. Ges. 46: 158-268, pls. 13-18. 1894.
Morrow, A. L. Foraminifera and Ostracoda from
the Upper Cretaceous of Kansas. Journ. Pal. 8:
186-205. 1934.
Murray, G. E., Jr., and Hussry, K. M. Some
Tertiary Ostracoda of the genera Alatacythere
and Brachycythere. Journ. Pal. 16: 164-182,
pls. 27, 28. 1942.
Nevrani, A. Ostracodi fossili d’Italia. I. Val-
lebiaja (Calabriano). Mem. Pont. Acc. Nuovi
Lincei (2) 11: 1-118, 2 pls. 1928.
Purt, H.S. Contribution to the study of the Miocene
of the Florida Panhandle. Florida Geol. Survey
Bull. 36 (1953): 1-345 (Part IIlI—Ostracoda:
217-345, pls. 1-17, text figs. 1-14).
Reuss, A. E. Beitrdge zur characteristik der kreide-
schichten in den Ostalpen, Besonders in Go-
sauthale und am Wolfgangsee. Denkschr.
Acad. Wiss. Wien, math.-nat. Cl., 7: 1-156,
pls. 1-31. 1854.
TrieBEL, E. Zur Morphologie und Okologie der
fossilen Ostracoden. Senckenbergiana 23: 294—
400. 1941.
SEPTEMBER 1957 DRECHSLER: TWO
SPECIES OF CONIDIOBOLUS
309
MYCOLOGY.—Two medium-sized species of Conidiobolus occurring in Colorado.
CHARLES DRECHSLER, Crops Research Division, Agricultural Research Service,
United States Department of Agriculture.
The two readily culturable entomophtho-
raceous fungi herein described as new species
of Conidiobolus were obtained by canopying
Petri plates of maize-meal agar with moist
filter paper to which had been securely
affixed minute quantities (0.03 to 0.05 gram)
of decaying plant detritus kindly gathered
by W. J. Zaumeyer near Greeley, Colo., in
August 1956. Dried portions of Petri plate
cultures of the two fungi have been deposited
in the National Fungus Collection, Belts-
ville, Md.; although, unfortunately, the
morphological features distinguishing the
readily culturable members of the Ento-
mophthorales are for the most part not well
revealed in such desiccated material.
1. Conidiobolus denaeosporus sp. nov. Mycel-
jum paene omnino in materia alimentaria
immersum, parce in aerem assurgens, itaque
aliquid inconspicuum; hyphae steriles filiformes,
ramosae, rectae vel pravae, vulgo passae sed
interdum in pabulo validissimo dense intertextae,
plerumque 2.5-10 w crassae, mox septatae,
postea hic illic disjunctae vel inanitae, cellulae
eorum plerumque 25-250 yw longae, primo
incoloratae, in senio aliquanto sufflavae; primi-
formes fertiles hyphae singulatim ex cellulis
hypharum surgentes, simplices, in aerem saepe
15-50 » ad lucem protendentes, in parte aeria
erectae vel acclives, illic plerumque 4-7.5 wu
crassae, apice unum conidium ferentes; primi-
formia conidia violenter absilientia, saepius in
pulverem album visibilem accumulata, primo
incolorata, postea in senio aliquid subflava,
paulum perdurantia, globosa vel saepius turbinea,
apice late rotundata, deorsum in papillam 4-7.5
p latam et 2-6 uw altam abeuntia, ex toto 13-32 yu
longa, 6-21 yw crassa; graciles fertiles hyphae
singulatim ex primiformibus vel secundariis
conidiis surgentes, incoloratae, simplices, 35-65 u
longae, basi 1.5-3 uw latae, sursum Jeniter at-
tenuatae, apice circa 1 pw latae, ibi unum secun-
darium conidium ferentes; secundaria conidia in-
colorata, elongato-ellipsoidea, 10-18 yw longa,
6-10 pu lata.
Habitat in foliis Ulmi parvifoliae putrescen-
tibus prope Greeley, Colorado.
Mycelium almost wholly intramatrical, with
little or no aerial development, and thus rather
inconspicuous; vegetative hyphae filamentous,
branched, almost straight or variously crooked,
for the most part spreading out uniformly but in
highly nourishing morsels often closely inter-
woven, mostly 2.5 to 10 u wide, early divided by
cross-walls; the resulting hyphal segments mostly
25 to 250 uw long, often disjointing or becoming
separated by portions of emptied membrane,
always colorless when young but later sometimes
turning yellowish; primary condiophores arising
singly from submerged or prostrate hyphal seg-
ments, extending 15 to 50 uw into the air toward
the main source of light, in the aerial portion
erect or inclined, 4 to 7.5 uw wide, bearing a single
primary conidium; primary conidia springing
off forcibly, often accumulating in whitish de-
posits visible to the naked eye, relatively long-
lived, always colorless when young but when old
sometimes yellowish, globose or more often
turbinate with spherically rounded distal end and
somewhat obconical proximal end, measuring
6 to 21 w in greatest width and 13 to 32 uw in length
inclusive of a basal papilla 4 to 7.5 w wide and 2 to
6 uw high; slender conidiophores arising singly
from globose primary or elongated secondary
conidia, colorless, unbranched, 35 to 65 wu long,
1.5 to 3 pw wide at the base, tapering gradually
upward, about 1 » wide at the tip, there bearing
a single secondary conidium; secondary conidia
colorless, elongate-ellipsoidal, 10 to 18 yw long
and 6 to 10 uw wide.
Isolated from decaying leaves of Ulmus
parvifolia Jacq. collected near Greeley, Colorado.
The main hyphae at the margin of an actively
growing mycelium of Conidiobolus denaeosporus
commonly measure about 7 w in width and
usually terminate in a distal segment (Fig. 1, A)
125 to 250 uw long. As each distal segment pushes
forward at the tip it successively cuts off shorter
segments, mostly 25 to 100 u long, at its proximal
end. The hyphal segments thus delimited later
often undergo changes in shape through emission
of lateral branches. In Petri plate cultures of soft
agar containing finely divided maize-meal the
lateral branches may attain rather extensive
310
development, and are usually distinguished by
conspicuous irregularity of outward form (Fig.
1, B, C). Within and around the larger deposits
of maize-meal the branches may become closely
interwoven into irregular masses of prosenchyma.
When Conidiobolus denaeosporus is well nour-
ished it soon shows abundant asexual reproduc-
tion. The numerous phototropic conidiophores
(Fig. 1, D-I) then formed, as also the globose or
turbinate conidia (Fig. 1, J, a-w) springing off
from them, more closely resemble in shape and
dimensions the corresponding reproductive struc-
tures of C. rugosus Drechsler (1955) than those of
any other known congeneric form. As might be
inferred from the relative size of the basal papilla
the conidium commonly springs off with at least
moderate force; so that in many instances it falls
on unoccupied substratum beyond the limits of
the parent mycelium, and thus can readily
germinate vegetatively to form a subsidiary
mycelium. Accordingly in Petri plate cultures
receiving light mainly from one side the fungus
spreads more rapidly and disconnectedly toward
the source of illumination than in other directions,
Among the numerous globose or turbinate
conidia that are found strewn about thickly after
asexual reproduction has been proceeding for
several days, some scattered individuals are
nearly always found giving rise on broad photo-
tropic outgrowths to single conidia (Fig. 1, K—P)
which in their turn spring off forcibly. This
purely repetitional development begins early and
continues for weeks, though usually it proceeds
less abundantly than in related species. The emis-
sion from globose conidia of slender conidiophores
(Fig. 1, Q-S) bearing ellipsoidal secondary
conidia (Fig. 1, T, a-o) is not commonly observ-
able in cultures much under 10 days old. Once
initiated the latter type of sporulation usually
continues for several weeks, even if, for the most
part, only rather sparingly. All the globose or
turbinate conidia that so far have been observed
giving rise to elongated secondary conidia have
been of relatively small size. Should some of the
larger globose conidia participate in such sporula-
tion the resulting elongated secondary conidia
might be expected to exceed the dimen ions
given in the diagnosis.
Multiplicative reproduction by the formation
of microconidia extended plurally from globose
conidia has not hitherto been observed in the
several isolations of Conidiobolus denaeosporus.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, NO. 9
None of the isolations has shown any development
of chlamydospores. In all series of cultures the
several isolations have failed to show sexual re-
production, although cultures of C. rugosus on
the same medium that were inoculated at the
same time and kept at the same temperature
consistently formed zygospores in large numbers.
It seems probable that Conidiobolus denaeo-
sporus survives unfavorable periods mainly in its
globose or turbinate conidia, as these appear con-
siderably more durable than the homologous
spores of most congeneric species. In young cul-
tures they are commonly filled throughout with
protoplasm that is partly of homogeneous and
partly of granular texture (Fig. 1, J, a, f, lo, q,
t). After 60 days they usually show a conspicuous
vacuole (Fig. 1, J, b-e, h-k), but their protoplasm,
though of diminished volume, remains fully alive,
often in Petri plate cultures, despite the presence
of alien molds usually ruinous to the asexual
spores of some other members of the genus.
Similarly vacuolated living conidia (Fig. 1, J, p,
s) are usually still abundant in tube cultures 4
months old. When conidia from a nearly dried
maize-meal-agar culture 6 months old are
moistened a large proportion of them promptly
show unmistakably live protoplasm of lumpy
texture in a parietal layer surrounding a large
central vacuole (Fig. 1, J, u-w). The specific
epithet compounded of two words (énvauos,
omopos) meaning “Jong-lived” and “seed”,
respectively, is intended to signalize the rather
exceptional endurance of the conidia.
A yellowish coloration often noticeable in
vacuolated conidia from maize-meal-agar tube
Fig. 1.—Conidiobolus denaeosporus as found in
maize-meal-agar cultures; all parts drawn at a
uniform magnification with the aid of a camera
lucida; X 1000. A, Terminal portion of hypha at
forefront of a growing mycelium. B, C, Irregular
hyphal segments near center of a mycelium i in a
culture 10 days old. D, Distal portion of photo-
tropic conidiophore with conidium nearly ready to
be completely delimited; s, surface of substratum.
E-I, Phototropic conidiophores, each bearing a
fully delimited conidium; s, surface of substratum.
J, Detached globose conidia, a-w, from culture 4
days to 6 months old, showing usual variations in
size, shape, and internal structure. K-P, Globose
conidia, each with a stout phototropic outgrowth
bearing another globose conidium. Q-S, Globose
conidia that have each sent up a slender conidio-
phore bearing an elongated conidium. T, Fifteen
elongated conidia, a-o, showing usual variations
in size and shape. Wi, Indurated distal portion of a
conidiophore found in culture 6 months old.
311
OF CONIDIOBOLUS
SPECIES
TWO
DRECHSLER
SEPTEMBER 1957
age for explanation).
site p
.—(See oppo
1
Fie
312
cultures several months old may have some rela-
tion to the durable character of the spores. Similar
coloration permeates also the living segments of
vegetative hyphae and of abortive conidiophores
(Fig. 1, U) that are likewise present in the aging
cultures. Rather commonly the pronouncedly
vacuolated conidia are more rotund and wider
(Fig. 1, J, u-w) than newly formed conidia, some
of them exceeding 26 uw in diameter. As the in-
crease in diameter would seem to result from the
gradual enlargement of the vacuole, and takes
place long after all truly formative growth has
come to an end, it has been disregarded in the
statement on conidial dimensions given in the
diagnosis.
2. Conidiobolus inordinatus sp. nov. Mycelium
in materia alimentaria immersum, fere oculo nudo
non visibiliter in aerem crescens, et non conidiis
visibiliter tectum; hyphae steriles incoloratae,
filiformes, ramosae, nune paene rectae nunc
valde pravae, vulgo aliquid inordinatae, plerum-
que 2.5-10; latae, mox septatae, postea hie illic
disjunctae vel inanitae, cellulae viventes eorum
10-250 uw longae; primiformibus fertiles hyphae
aliquid rarae, incoloratae, simplices, ex cellulis
hypharum singulatim surgentes, in aerem saepius
20-60 ad lucem protendentes, in parte aecria
erectae vel acclives, hic 4-9 mw crassae, apice
unum primiforme conidium ferentes; primiformia
conidia violenter absilientia, parca, incolorata,
globosa vel obovoidea vel turbinea, apice late
rotundata, basi papilla 4-9 uw crassa et 3-6 uw alta
praedita, ex toto plerumque 15-82 uw longa et
12-25 w lata, nune hypham germinationis emit-
tentia nune aliud primiforme conidium ferentia
nunc in apice gracilis fertilis hyphae conidium
formae ellipsoideae gignentia; graciles fertiles
hyphae incoloratae, saepe prope apicem curvatae,
50-100 uw longae, basi circa 2.5 w latae, sursum
leniter attenuatae, apice 1-1.5 pw latae; conidia
formae ellipsoideae incolorata, 15-26 pw longa,
9-13 w lata; chlamydosporae in hyphis submersis
et procumbentibus copiose et festinanter ortae,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 9
saeplus inordinatae, plerumque intercalares vel
aliquid laterales, cylindratae vel globosae vel
elongato-ellipsoideae vel bisuleae vel aliquid
trifidae, incoloratae, saepius 20-386 w longae et
12-20 w latae, vulgo ex parte magna proto-
plasmatis globuliferi repletae.
Habitat in foliis Ribis putrescentibus prope
Greeley, Colorado.
Mycelium usually with little or no macroscop-
ically visible aerial growth and not overlaid with
conidial deposits visible to the naked eye;
vegetative hyphae filamentous, branched, nearly
straight or often crooked, often in disorderly
arrangement, mostly 2.5 to 10 uw wide, early
divided by cross-walls, the resulting segments
mostly 10 to 250 » long and in many instances
disjoining or becoming separated by portions of
empty membrane; primary condiophores color-
less, unbranched, extending 20 to 60 » into the air
toward the main source of light, 4 to 9 u wide in
the erect or inclined aerial portion, at the tip
bearing a single primary conidium; primary
conidia springing off forcibly, usually formed
sparingly, colorless, globose or obovoid or
turbinate, broadly rounded at the distal end,
mostly measuring 12 to 25 pw in greatest width
and 15 to 32 pw in total length inclusive of a
paraboloid basal papilla 4 to 9 u wide and 8 to 6
high, some germinating by putting out a germ
hypha, others producing another globose conid-
ium on a broad outgrowth, and still others giving
rise to a slender condidiophore bearing a conid-
ium of elongated type; slender conidiophores
colorless, often somewhat curved distally, 50 to
100 » long, about 2.5 uw wide at the base, tapering
gradually upward, 1 to 1.5 uw wide near the tip;
conidia of elongated type colorless, ellipsoidal,
often 15 to 26 » long and 9 to 13 w wide; chlam-
dospores formed on submerged and procumbent
hyphae, produced promptly and very copiously,
most often intercalary with 2 to 4 hyphal attach-
ments but sometimes lateral or laterally inter-
calary, globose or elongated-ellipsoidal or cyl-
Fic. 2.—Conidiobolus inordinatus as found in maize-meal agar cultures; all parts drawn with the aid
of a camera lucida at a uniform magnification; X 1000. A, Terminal portion of a main hypha at fore-
front of an actively growing mycelium. B, Relatively small segment of a lateral branch extended from
an intercalary segment of a main hypha. C, Distal portion of a lateral branch with a pronounced dis-
tention. D, Young phototropic conidiophore; s, surface of substratum. E, F, Two conidiophores almost
fully developed; s, surface of substratum. G, Detached globose conidia, a-z, showing usual variations
in size and shape. H, Globose conidium germinating by production of a vegetative germ hypha. I-K,
Globose conidia, each with a phototropic outgrowth on which another globose conidium is being formed.
L, M, Empty globose conidia, each with a phototropic outgrowth bearing a new globose conidium ready
to spring off. N, O, Empty globose conidia, each with a slender conidiophore bearing an elongated ellip-
soidal conidium. P-R, Detached elongated conidia showing usual variations in size and shape. S, Por-
tion of hypha with two chlamydospores, a and b, in a completed or nearly completed state.
313
OF CONIDIOBOLUS
SPECIES
TWO
DRECHSLEF
oT
EPTEMBER 19
S)
2 *215 ‘of
F508 A058
Fia. 2.—(See opposite page for explanation).
314
indrical or irregularly lobulated, colorless, 20 to
36 pw long, 12 to 20 u in greatest width, usually
filled in large part with strongly globuliferous
protoplasm.
Isolated from decaying leaves of Ribes sp.
collected near Greeley, Colorado.
In comparison with the other members of the
genus, Conidiobolus inordinatus may like C.
denaeosporus be considered a species of medium
dimensions. When its mycelium grows in a Petri
plate of maize-meal agar the hyphae at the
advancing margin maintain a width of approxi-
mately 7 u in elongating apically. As the terminal
segment, which often measures 175 to 250 uw in
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 9
length (Fig. 2, A), pushes forward at the tip it
cuts off proximally a succession of shorter
segments mostly between 25 and 125 w long.
From many of these shorter segments lateral
branches commonly 3 to 6 uw wide are extended
promiscuously. The intermingled ramifications,
in which are included cells differing greatly with
respect to size, shape (Fig. 2, B, C; Fig. 3, A) and
orientation, contribute to a characteristic dis-
orderly appearance signalized in the epithet
applied to the species.
In maize-meal agar cultures Conidiobolus
inordinatus produces phototropic conidiophores
(Fig. 2, D-F) for many weeks, though as a rule
Fic. 3.—Conidiobolus inordinatus as found in maize-meal-agar plate cultures; all parts drawn at a
uniform magnification with the aid of a camera lucida; X 1,000. A, Irregular segment formed in an ex-
tensive branch originating from an intercalary segment of a main hypha. B, Portion of hypha with two
chlamydospores, a and b. C. Chlamydospore with large vacuole, or reserve globule, as found in a culture
55 days old. D-V, Chlamydospores from a culture 8 days old, showing usual variation in size and shape.
SEPTEMBER 1957
only rather sparingly. Its conidia (Fig. 2, G, a-z)
never were found in such abundance as to be
visible collectively to the naked eye. Under a
microscope they commonly appear scattered
somewhat sparsely over the substratum. On
fresh unoccupied substratum the detached conid-
jum may germinate by putting forth a vegetative
germ hypha (Fig. 2, H). Often, however, on fresh
unoccupied substratum, and also very commonly
on substratum already overgrown by the fungus,
the detached conidium puts forth a broad photo-
tropic outgrowth (Fig. 2, I-K) on which another
globose conidium is formed (Fig. 2, L, M).
Cultures well over 10 days old usually show some
relatively small globose conidia that have ger-
minated by sending up a slender conidiophore
supporting an elongated conidium (Fig. 2, N, O).
As in related species the elongated ellipsoidal
conidia here (Fig. 2, P—R) becomes detached on
slight disturbance. They usually show more
pronounced curvature on one side than on the
other. Generally they reveal a somewhat oblique
basal hilum that is nearly in alignment with the
contour of the more strongly curved side. If the
larger globose conidia were to serve as parents
the elongated conidia then produced could be
expected to exceed the dimensions given in the
diagnosis.
The outstanding feature of Conidiobolus in-
ordinatus is its early and remarkably copious
production of chlamydospores (Fig. 2, 8; Fig. 3,
B-Y). Even in cultures only a few days old its
disorderly mycelium becomes so abundantly
septate and discontinuous that on casual examina-
tion the fungus would not ordinarily be taken for
a phycomycete. Local swellings representing
early stages in chlamydospore development can
often be recognized in hyphal segments only 2 to
3 millimeters from the forefront of a growing
mycelium. As protoplasmic materials are gathered
into the swellings the adjacent portions of hypha
are progressively evacuated of contents. Retain-
ing walls are laid down, one after another, at suc-
cessive stages of this evacuation. These later
appear as convex partitionsin theemptied portions
DRECHSLER: TWO SPECIES OF CONIDIOBOLUS
315
of tubular membrane, often 50 to 100 u in length,
between neighboring chlamydospores (Fig. 2, 8,
a, b; Fig. 3, B, a, b). Since in many instances
chlamydospores are produced in positions where
a hypha gives off 1 or 2 branches it often is sup-
plied from 3 (Fig. 3, C, E, F, H, J—L, Q) and
sometimes is supplied from 4 hyphal arms (Fig.
3, P). On attaining their definitive condition the
reproductive bodies with the more numerous
attachments are especially distinguished by ir-
regularity of shape. Promiscuous variations in
outward form are, however, by no means infre-
quent among mesially intercalary chlamydospores
with 2 hyphal attachments.
In most cultures of Conidiobolus inordinatus
the chlamydospores contain numerous globules
about 1 » wide (Fig. 3, B, a, b; D-V), although in
many instances the protoplasm near the hyphal
attachments is of homogeneous consistency. The
resemblance in texture of cellular contents
provides good reason to hold the species more
closely related to C. globuliferus Drechsler (1956)
than to any other congeneric form. Chlamydo-
spores in some old cultures show a single large
globule surrounded by a layer which, except for
a small quantity of granular material, appears of
homogeneous consistency (Fig. 3, C). As these
chlamydospores reveal no marked thickening of
the enveloping wall it seems unlikely that they
have undergone conversion into zygospores or
azygospores. Rather similar reorganization of
contents has been observed at times in the globose
and the elongated conidia of C. heterosporus
Drechsler (1953). The strongly vacuolated condi-
tion of aging conidia of C. denaeosporus may de-
note similar though less pronounced modification.
REFERENCES
DreEcHSLER, C. T'wo new species of Conidiobolus
occurring in leaf mold. Amer. Journ. Bot. 40:
104-115. 1953.
. Three new species of Conidiobolus isolated
from decaying plant detritus. Amer. Journ.
Bot. 42: 437-448. 1955.
——. Two new species of Conidiobolus. Amer.
Journ. Bot. 48: 778-786. 1956.
The history of a science ts the science itself.—GorETHE.
316 JOURNAL OF
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 9
MALACOLOGY .—The subgenus Halopsephus Rehder, with notes on the Western
Atlantic species of Turbo and the subfamily Bothropomatinae Thiele. RopErr
Rospertson, Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Harvard University. (Com-
municated by Harald A. Rehder.)
(Received June 21, 1957)
Study of the Caribbean turbinid genus
Halopsephus Rehder (1943) has led to the
conclusion that the single species—H.
pulchra Rehder—belongs in the genus Turbo,
with Halopsephus ranked as a subgenus.
This necessitates renaming the species, for
there is a prior Turbo pulcher. A growth
series was recently dredged off the eastern
coast of Great Abaco in the northeastern
Bahamas and this has made possible com-
parisons with other turbinids. Notes on the
four Recent Western Atlantic species of
Turbo now recognized are here included. The
conclusion is also reached that the subfamily
Bothropomatinae, based by Thiele (1924) on
a single specimen from the Red Sea, is
founded on a juvenile turbinid (possibly
Turbo) and is therefore invalid.
I wish to thank Dr. Harald A. Rehder,
United States National Museum, Washing-
ton, D. C. (U.S.N.M.), for much assistance,
for having authorized study of the radula of
the holotype of Halopsephus pulchra under
his care, and for allowing me to rename the
homonym resulting from the change in rank
of Halopsephus. The species is here renamed
Turbo (Halopsephus) haraldi, after Dr.
Rehder. Help was also received from Dr.
Myra Keen, Stanford University; Dr. K.
Oyama, Tokyo; Dr. W. P. Woodring, U. 8.
Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.,
and Drs. W. J. Clench and R. D. Turner,
Museum of Comparative Zoélogy, Harvard
University (M.C.Z.). A juvenile specimen of
Turbo castanea was examined at the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia
(A.N.S.P.).
Family TuRBINIDAE
Genus Turbo Linnaeus
Turbo Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 761. 1758.
Type species: Turbo petholatus Linnaeus, 1758
[Indo-Pacific], by subsequent selection, Mont-
fort, Conch. Syst. 2: 203. 1810.
Adult shell turbinate or trochoid, solid, na-
creous within; aperture circular. Operculum cal-
careous, paucispiral. Five pairs of radular later-
als; centrals varied (Troschell, 1878).
Subgenus Turbo, s.s.
Adult shell smooth, polished, imperforate;
operculum smooth and polished at the center,
granulose at the edges. Body of central tooth of
radula expanded posteriorly into supporting
wings; basal plate beneath this.
Turbo pittierr Dall (1912) from the Upper
Phocene (fide W. P. Woodring, in litt.) of Limén,
Costa Rica, may belong in this subgenus.
Subgenus Halopsephus Rehder
Halopsephus Rehder, Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 93:
191. 1943. Type species: Halopsephus pulchra
Rehder, 1943 [= Turbo (Halopsephus) haraldi
Robertson, 1957], by original designation.
Adult shell smooth, polished, imperforate;
convex outer surface of operculum sculptured
by one whorl of axial, retractively curved, rugose
riblets. Radula (Fig. 3) similar to Turbo, s.s.
Monotypic.
Turbo (Halopsephus) haraldi, n. name
Figs. 1-3
Halopsephus pulcher Rehder, Proc. U. 8S. Nat.
Mus. 93: 191, pl. 20, figs. 3, 10. 1943; (corrected to
pulchra) Poirier, An up-to-date systematic list
of 3200 seashells from Greenland to Texas, p.
26 (mimeogr.). 1954; non Turbo pulcher Dillwyn,
Catal. Shells 2: 855. 1817; non Turbo pulcher
Reeve, Conch. Systematica 2: 167. 1842.
Description.—Adult shell solid, broadly conical,
11 mm high, nearly smooth, imperforate. Early
nuclear whorls planate, white. Juvenile (3 whorls)
carmine, with two carinae at the periphery, the
upper one bearing short flattened spines; broadly
umbilicate, the umbilicus bordered by nodes
(Figs. 1-2). Lower carina enclosed in succeeding
whorls; upper (stellate) carina becoming obscure
in the third and fourth whorls. Umbilicus closed
by parietal callus at this stage. Adult (514
whorls) cinnamon-rufous to apricot orange,
spotted with white, palest at the base. Juvenile
operculum with a subcentral pit (Fig. 1), mi-
SEPTEMBER 1957
nutely granulate. Adult operculum as in sub-
generic description above.
Measurements —As follows:
Height Width
Holotype 11.2 mm 11.0 mm
Paratype 6.0 6.0
Types —Holotype, U:S.N MM. 5006388.
“Dredged off Lazaretto, Barbados, in shallow
water on rocky bottom by John B. Henderson,
Jr., while on the Smithsonian—University of
Iowa 1918 Expedition.”’ Paratype, U.S.N.M.
500639. “On the same trip off Payne’s Bay
Church, Barbados, in 50 fathoms on sandy and
stony bottom” (Rehder, 1948).
Other specimens examined.—Six specimens
(one alive) dredged in 3715 to 4115 fathoms
about 3 miles ENE. of North Point, Elbow
(Little Guana) Cay, off the eastern shore of
Great Abaco, Bahamas, on August 5, 1955, by
the writer (M.C.Z. 212954). One specimen (poor
condition) dredged about 1 mile ENE. of the
preceding station on the same day, in 50 fathoms
(M.C.Z. 212955). All these Bahamian specimens
are juvenile.
Fic. 1—Turbo (Halopsephus) haraldi Robert-
son. Juvenile (2.1 mm in width), apertural view.
Great Abaco, Bahamas (M.C.Z. 212954).
Range—The known range of this species,
previously known only from two specimens from
Barbados, is now extended nearly 1,500 miles, to
Great Abaco, northeastern Bahamas. Only nine
specimens in museums are known to the writer
at the present time. Undoubtedly more dredging
in the Caribbean sublittoral will bring to light
additional material at other localities.
ROBERTSON: THE SUBGENUS
HALOPSEPHUS REHDER 317
Ecology.—The bottom on which the specimens
were dredged near Great Abaco (3715 to 50
fathoms) is rocky, covered with calcareous algae,
sponges, bryozoa and tunicates. Since most of
these organisms are red the scarlet shell color
may be protective. The one live juvenile was
found in a red sponge.
Subgenus Taeniaturbo Woodring
Taeniaturbo Woodring, Mioec. Moll. Bowden,
Jamaica 2 Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ.
385: 7, 408. 1928. Type species: Turbo canalicu-
latus Hermann, 1781, by original designation.
Taenioturbo ‘Woodring’ of Rehder and Abbott.
Spirally ribbed; initial whorls red; obsolete
spiral sculpture on outer surface of operculum.
Turbo (Taeniaturbo) canaliculatus Hermann
TvrBo (canaliculatus) Hermann, Der Natur-
forscher 16: 52, pl. 2, figs. 1-2. 1781. No lo-
cality cited. Hedley & Pilsbry, Nautilus 26:
46. 1912.
Turbo spenglertanus Gmelin, Syst. Nat., ed. 13:
3595. 1791. ‘Oceano indico”’ [sic].
This is not the Turbo canaliculatus of either
Gmelin or Kiener.
Range.—Southern Florida, the Greater An-
tilles, Guadeloupe, possibly south to Bahia (Sal-
vador), Brasil.
Turbo (Taeniaturbo) filosus (Wood)
Trochus filosus Wood, Suppl. Index Testac.: 17,
pl. 5, Trochus, fig. 23. 1828. No locality cited.
Turbo cailletii Fischer and Bernardi, Journ.
Conchylhologie 5: 294, pl. 9, figs. 10, 11. 1857.
“Cotes de la Basse-Terre (Guadeloupe).
Recueilli sur la nasse d’un pécheur.”’
Range.—Southern Florida, the Bahamas,
Cuba, west to Yucatdin and Nicaragua (?), and
south to Guadeloupe.
Subgenus Marmarostoma Swainson
Marmarostoma Swainson, Zool. Illustr. (2) 1: pt.
3, pl. 14. 1829. Type species: Turbo chrysostomus
Linnaeus, 1758 [Indo-Pacific], by original desig-
nation.
Senectus ‘Humphreys’ Swainson, Treat. Malac.:
206, 213-215, 348. 1840. Type species: Turbo
chrysostomus, by subsequent selection, Herr-
mannsen, Indic. Gen. Malac. 2: 438. 1848.
Marmorostoma ‘Swainson’ of Gray and many sub-
sequent authors.
Shell spiny or nodulose; operculum smooth,
minutely granulated, or obliquely striate at the
edge. Radula as in Turbo, s.s.
318
U
[» ie >,
‘ "! ) “yy J
Aw (|
Fie. 2.—Same as Fig. 1. Apical view.
Turbo (Marmarostoma) castanea Gmelin
Turbo Castanea Gmelin, Syst. Nat., ed. 13: 3595.
1791. ‘“‘Habitat in mari, Americam australem
alluente.”’
Turbo crenulatus Gmelin, zbid. 1791. No locality
cited.
Lunatica granulata Roding, Mus. Bolten.: 102.
1798; non Turbo granulatus Gmelin, 1791.
Turbo mammillatus Donovan, Nat. Hist. Brit.
Shells 5: pl. 173. 1804. ‘‘Scilly rocks, at the west-
ern extremity of Cornwall” (England) ballast.
Turbo hippocastanum Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert.
7: 47. 1822. ‘“Mers de ]’Amérique australe.’’
Trochus (Turbo) quadriseriatus Anton, Verzeich-
niss Conch.: 59. 1839. No locality cited.
Turbo virens Philippi (ex Anton MS), Zeitschr.
Malak. 5: 99. 1848. No locality cited.
The specific name castanea was used by Gmelin
as a noun in apposition.
Range.—F lorida, the Bahamas, and the Greater
Antilles, north (probably sporadically) to North
Carolina, Bermuda (fossil); west to Campeche
and Yucatan, and south through the Lesser
Antilles to Trinidad and Margarita Island.
Turbo (Marmarostoma) squamiger Reeve, 1843,
is probably the Eastern Pacific analogue.
Lives on Thalassia testudinum in the Bahamas.
KEY TO THE RECENT WESTERN ATLANTIC SPECIES OF
TURBO, S.L., BASED ON ADULT SHELLS
1. Spirally nodulose; initial whorls not red.
castanea
Spirally ribbed or nearly smooth; initial whorls
red 2
2. Nearly smooth, reddish orange, mottled wit
white; operculum strongly sculptured ex-
teriorly with spiral riblets.......... haraldi
Spirally ribbed, brown or greenish; obsolete
spiral sculpture on outer surface of oper-
CCAUUNDR TNS «er Rem este tered et velees eir ee tan ner Rees A a 3
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 9
3. Imperforate; suture channeled; spiral ribs
subequal; up to 93 mm high... .canaliculatus
Umbilicate; flat subsutural area; spiral ribs
unequal; less than 30 mm high....... filosus
DISCUSSION
The similarity of Halopsephus to Turbo,
s.s., 1S striking; the main difference between
the two is that the outer surface of the
operculum of the latter is smooth, while in
the former it is ribbed when adult. Halop-
sephus is smaller than Turbo, s.s. For these
reasons Halopsephus is here reduced to the
rank of a subgenus of T'urbo.
When juvenile, Turbo (Halopsephus)
haraldi is very similar in shell form to ju-
venile Turbo (Marmarostoma) castanea. Pils-
bry and McGinty (1945) have illustrated the
latter from a shell dredged in 50 fathoms off
Palm Beach, Fla., which I have examined
(A.N.S.P. 181123). This specimen was ob-
tained dead, so the juvenile operculum is not
yet known. The chief difference between
juveniles of the two species is that 7.
haraldi is bright carmine, while 7’. castanea is
whitish.
Juvenile Halopsephus is also similar to
juvenile Taeniaturbo. Turbo canaliculatus
and 7. filosus are both carmine and are
initially stellate at the periphery, but differ
from 7. haraldi in the early development of
numerous strong spiral ribs, one of which
arises from the spinose carina. In 7. haraldi
the carina becomes obscure in the third and
fourth whorls. The juvenile of a Miocene
species from Bowden, Jamaica, referred by
Woodring (1928) to Taeniaturbo, is also
similar to 7. haraldt.
I(r,
0.1. mm.
Fie. 3.—Turbo (Halopsephus) haraldi Robert-
son [| = Halopsephus pulchra Rehder]. Radula of
holotype (U.S.N.M. 500638). Barbados.
SEPTEMBER 1957
An opercular pit lke that in juvenile
Halopsephus is frequent among young (and
some adult) turbinids. It can be seen in
several other species of Turbo and also in
the Caribbean Astraea (Lithopoma) caelata
(Gmelin), among others.
Not all species of Turbo have a nodulate
ridge bordering the juvenile umbilicus. One
that does not is Turbo stamineus Martyn
[= Turbo (Ninella) torquatus Gmelin, 1791},
illustrated by Kesteven (1901). The um-
bilicus persists in the adult in this Aus-
tralasian species.
Thiele (1924) has founded a subfamily of
the Turbinidae—the Bothropomatinae—on
a single specimen from J[osseir (Quseir),
Egypt, near the northern end of the Red
Sea. This he named Bothropoma isseli. The
characters of the shell suggest that it is
juvenile. There are strong spiral ridges, the
umbilicus is bordered by a nodulate ridge
and the operculum has a large central pit.
There are four pairs of radular laterals
(Thiele, 1924, 1929). This is probably a
young Turbo, despite the fact that all species
of Turbo and the related genus Astraea that
have so far been studied have five pairs of
radular laterals. Thiele’s specimen may have
been abnormal (whole longitudinal rows of
radular teeth are sometimes absent terato-
logically among gastropods), or perhaps the
radula as well as the shell of Bothropoma
shows Juvenile characters. The cusps of the
Halopsephus radula are much more strongly
serrate in the juvenile than in the adult, but
there are five pairs of laterals in the juvenile.
The cusps in Bothropoma are strongly serrate.
The central tooth, as figured by Thiele
(1924), has posterior supporting wings, simi-
lar to those in Turbo, s.s., Halopsephus, and
Marmarostoma. Thiele (1935) has subse-
quently reported Bothropoma trom Western
Australia as well as the Red Sea.
The Japanese turbinid Liotia pilula
Dunker, 1860, designated the type species
of a new genus—Neocollonia—by Kuroda &
Habe (1952, 1954), was placed by them in
the Bothropomatinae on the basis of what
is here considered insufficient evidence of
ROBERTSON: THE SUBGENUS
HALOPSEPHUS REHDER 319
close affinity with Bothropoma: merely that
the shell is spirally ribbed, has an umbilicus
bordered by a nodulate ridge, and that the
operculum has a central pit. The radula is
very simple; the cusps are not serrate as in
Bothropoma, and there are five rather than
four pairs of laterals. This species has since
been incorrectly transferred to the genus
Bothropoma by Kuroda (1956, spelled
Bathropoma).
An umbilicus bordered by a nodulate
ridge is here regarded as a primitive char-
acter among turbinids, for the following
reasons. In early ontogenetic stages most
turbinids show these features, and the
operculum usually has a central pit on the
outer surface. Furthermore, perforate shells
must necessarily have originally preceded
imperforate shells in the phylogenies of
asymmetrically coiled aspidobranchs (ar-
chaeogastropods), for these were undoubt-
edly derived from bellerophonts, which were
symmetrically coiled (isostrophic). Neo-
collonia is here regarded as a primitive (or
possibly neotenous) turbinid, as it shows
these primitive characters when adult and
has a very simple radula.
REFERENCES
Dati, W. H. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 59(2): 8.
1912.
Kesteven, H. L. Proce. Linn. Soc. New South
Wales 26: 715, pl. 35, figs. 1-3. 1901.
Kuropa, T. [in] Jllustr. Encyclopedia of the
Fauna of Japan, rev. ed., p. 1172, fig. 3336.
1956. [In Japanese.]
Kuropa, T., and Hasse, T. Check list and bibli-
ography of the Recent marine Mollusca of
Japan: 12, 71. 1952. [Neocollonia introduced as
a nomen nudum.|
. Venus 18: 87, 91, 94, figs. 3, 8a, 8b, 9.
1954. [Neocollonia validated. |
Pinsspry, H. A., and McGinty, T. L. Nautilus
59: 11, pl. 2, fig. 7. 1945.
Renper, H. A. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 93: 191,
192, pl. 20, figs. 3, 10. 1943.
TuHreLeE, J. Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berlin 11: 63, 71,
73, fig. 22. 1924.
. Handb. syst. Weichtierkunde 1: 66, fig. 46.
1929; 2: 1130. 1935.
TroscHEL, F.H. Gebiss der Schnecken 2: 203-208,
pl. 19. 1878.
WooprinGc, W. P. Mioc. Moll. Bowden, Jamaica
2 Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 385: 409-
410, pl. 32, fig. 10. 1928.
320 JOURNAL
OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 9
“TERRIBLE LIZARDS”
Dinosaurs were the dominant animals on earth
for approximately 1380 million years. Man and
his more or less humanlike forerunners have been
here, at the most, less than 2 million years, and
all human history covers a maximum of little
more than 10,000 years. The earliest mammallike
creatures date back hardly more than 150 million
years.
The story of this long supremacy of a race of
extinct reptiles, which first appeared 200 million
years ago and persisted to the dawn of the age of
mammals about 70 million years ago, is told by
Dr. David H. Dunkle, of the Smithsonian Insti-
tution’s Division of Vertebrate Paleontology, in
a 24-page illustrated booklet recently published
by the Institution.
These reptiles, whose nearest extant relatives
are the vastly different birds and crocodiles, in-
cluded the largest creatures ever to inhabit the
land. Some of them, however, were no bigger
than chickens. During their long tenure of exist-
ence they underwent fantastic variations. Many
walked upright on their hind legs. Some got about
on all four legs. Some developed heavy suits of
bony armor.
Most illustrations of restorations of these
great reptiles render them as rather awesome
creatures. Actually, Dr. Dunkle says, the ma-
jority were plant eaters and probably rather
peaceful. Some, however, became flesh eaters
and must have been terrifying.
The new booklet’s descriptions of the “terrible
lizards’ are based partly on the fossil material
in the U. 8. National Museum collection, one of
the best in the world. The reptiles are divided
into two major groups, distinguished by the
structure of the pelvic bones. That of one is
lizardlike, of the other birdlike. First were the
so-called Saurischia, which included all the flesh-
rating types and a few of the plant eaters. The
birdlike group appears somewhat later. They
were the Ornithischia, all of them plant eaters.
Among these the bone armor-plate was devel-
oped. Apparently it was needed for protection
against the flesh-eaters. Those without such
natural devices either escaped from their enemies
by speed and agility or found protection in tre-
mendous size and weight. Many of these were
amphibious, retreating to river and swamp
environments.
All the dinosaurs, Dr. Dunkle points out, pre-
sumably were stupid animals. This certainly is
true if brain size is directly related to intelligence.
The bony capsule enclosing the brain occupied a
very small portion of the skull. It has been postu-
lated that the dinosaurs’ diminutive brains may
have been a major cause of their extinction when
they came into competition with the more alert
primitive mammals.
“But,” says Dr. Dunkle, “the complete dis-
appearance and extinction have never been en-
tirely explained. However, throughout earth’s
history, great changes in its surface have taken
place, caused by the upheaval of mountains and
the enlargement of continents and by the destruc-
tive tearing down of these by the myriad factors
of erosion. Life must adapt itself to the conse-
quent variations in climate, food supply, and
other environmental conditions. When it cannot,
that life vanishes. Such, scientists suppose, was
the fate of the dinosaurs.”
Lack of brains, therefore, may have been a
relatively minor factor, considered over many
millenniums.
The ultimate origin of the dinosaurs is a moot
question, but, Dr. Dunkle points out, there was
a group of reptiles fairly abundant in the Triassic
period of geological history about 200 million
years ago. These were the thecodonts. They were
not themselves dinosaurs but had some of the
same skeletal characteristics of the earliest of
these reptiles.
Copies of Dr. Dunkle’s booklet, entitled “The
World of the Dinosaurs,” may be purchased for
50 cents from the Smithsonian Institution,
Washington 25, D. C.
—SSSS SS
I have been very careful to write nothing but what was the
product of faithful observation, and neither suffered myself to
be deceived by idle speculation, nor deceived others by obtruding
anything upon them but downright matter of fact—
THOMAS SYDENHAM (1624—1689)
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
nAesaphicall society) of Washington ~. 45.0 5csoseccie cose asain CHESTER H. Pace
Anthropological Society of Washington........ Seer eus STeaeiaricts Aes FRANK M. SETZLER
Evolerieal society of Washington. ...........662.2. cence sees eens HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Mrenresesociety, of Washington. ...s. cc. 6. cece se bees os va naeraien CHARLES R. NAESER
Entomological Society of Washington................... Leen oe Cari F. W. MursEBrecK
DOHA Qe OPTADHIC SOCLELY m5 foacccctiecid acm ama cine Sta ies emuelecea a ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geolopiesl Society of Washington..........5....6ce cece eee nec ee ens Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. Cor
Columbia Historical Society...... ee ee ree U.S. Grant, III
Priamicalasociety: Of Washington’ cccsccicicl- jcc scrsyscieielsis tiscali sieresia's dtieases Carrou E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furppo GRAVATT
Washineton society of Hngineers.....- 2.5.0. csec cece esses nneeeceees Hersert G. DorsEy
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers....... ARNOLD H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp 8S. BEAN
Helminthological Society of Washington.....................005. Donautp B. McMuuuen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHakL J. PELczaR, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovetas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Greorce A. Horrie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research. .W1LLiam T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CHARLES 8. GILMAN
CONTENTS
. Page
Puysics.—The elasticity of rubber. Lawrence A. Woop.......... 231
CHEMISTRY.—Chemistry at high pressures and high temperatures. H.
TRACYSHIAUIS 2.04 5h ears (Ree cee: i A 300
PALEONTOLOGY.—Notes on the ostracode subfamily Cytherideidinae Puri,
1952. HARBANS'S! PURI. 0.4 Secck eas. oo ee eee 305
PALEONTOLOGY.—Postscript notes on the ostracode subfamily Brachy-
cytherinae.) “EIARBANSIS] BURT.) 5 2. 2). te ee 306
MycoLtocy.—Two medium-sized species of Conidiobolus occurring in
Colorado. CHARLES IDRECHSLER......: 02/400.) oe 309
MatacoLtocy.—The subgenus Halopsephus Rehder, with notes on the
Western Atlantic species of Turbo and the subfamily Bothropo-
matinae Thiele. Rosprert RoBERTSON.................----++-+--- 316
Notes! and INews's <5 cca) tant. oak ek alae) ae 299, 320
S¥e-.75
be W223
‘OLUME 47 October 1957 NUMBER 10
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
mas HM INGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CuesterR H. Pacs, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BAaMrForpD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
ImMaNvueL EsterMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof .—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the PRockEDINGS should be sent to Harautp A. ReupER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subseription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year.....................--.---- $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 29, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InpDEXx TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS........................:- $7.50
IRROCEEDINGS aviolseel lan (899>19 ll) "complete sae enee eee eee $25.00
Single volumes;iunbound? 2.2 5.20.00 sas eee ee eer eee 2.00
Singlemumbersseeeseeee eee oer Acree eee omees ot eee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
Ee to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
OcroBER 1957
No. 10
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY .—Physiological effects of certain fungitoxic compounds on
fungus cells. Huea D. Sister aNp Norton L. MArsHAuu,? Department of
Botany, University of Maryland. (Communicated by Carroll E. Cox.)
(Received April 11, 1957)
There has been considerable interest in the
physiological effects of fungicides on fungus
cells. The ultimate aim of work of this kind
is to establish the site and nature of the re-
action between the fungicide and the com-
ponents of the fungus cell which accounts
for the inhibition of cell growth. While cer-
tain inhibitors probably affect a specific re-
action in the cell, others undoubtedly have a
more generalized effect, inactivating a cer-
tain type of chemical group in any phase of
metabolism in which such groups may occur.
The interaction of certain fungicides with
different types of enzymes was studied by
Owens (1953). In order to localize the prin-
cipal site or sites of action of inhibitors, it is
desirable to know which general phase of
metabolism of the cell is affected by the
compounds under study. A knowledge of
the general effects of various inhibitors on
fungus cells should also indicate whether
these compounds act in similar or different
manners in inhibiting cell growth.
The present study was conducted with
the purpose of determining which general
area of metabolism of fungus cells is affected
by certain types of fungitoxic chemicals.
The inhibitors were ziram (zine dimethyl-
1 Scientific publication A616, Contribution
2798, of the University of Maryland Agricultural
Experiment Station, Department of Botany. This
investigation was supported in part by research
grants C-2307 (C2) and (C3) Public Health Service,
National Institutes of Health.
2 Part of the data concerning ziram presented in
this paper was contained in a thesis submitted by
the junior author to the Faculty of the Graduate
School of the University of Marvland, May 1955,
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the
degree of doctor of philosophy.
sulfanilamide, sodium
antibiotic cycloheximide
dithiocarbamate) ,*
azide, and the
(Acti-dione).4
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Conidia of Fusarium rosewum Lk. were grown
on modified Tochinai’s medium and prepared for
manometric studies by the method described by
Sisler and Cox (1954). The medium for subse-
quent growth and manometric studies was com-
posed of glucose, 20 g; (NH4)2SO,, 2 ¢; KH2PO,,
5.4 @; KoHPO,, 2.5 g; MgSO;-7H,20, 0.5 g; dis-
tilled water to make 1,000 ml; pH 6.4.° The inor-
ganic components of this medium excluding the
ammonium sulfate will be referred to as the basal
medium. In the manometric studies, conidial sus-
pensions were prepared in the basal medium and
1 ml of a standardized suspension containing | mg
dry weight of conidia was added to each vessel.
Glucose or glucose and (NH4)2SO,4 were added
from the sidearms of the vessels at the initiation
of an experiment. The final liquid volume per
vessel excluding the KOH solution was 2 ml. In
order to increase the accuracy of the dry weight
determinations, growth experiments were con-
ducted with 16 ml aliquots of conidial suspen-
sions shaken in 50 ml erlenmeyer flasks. These
flasks were open to the atmosphere (cotton
plugged) and did not contain KOH, but other-
3 Prepared from the sodium salt which was sup-
plied through the courtesy of E. I. du Pont de
Nemours & Co., Inc., Wilmington, Del.
‘Reagent grade Acti-dione was furnished
through the courtesy of the Upjohn Co.,
Kalamazoo, Mich.
>This medium will support germination and
some subsequent mycelial growth of conidia of F.
roseum harvested from the modified Tochinai’s
medium. It has recently been determined, how-
ever, that biotin is required for maximum growth.
321
322
wise the conditions were identical with those used
in the manometric experiments.
Cells of Saccharomyces pastorianus Hansen were
grown in a medium composed of: glucose, 20 g;
(NH,4)S8O04, 3 g; KH»PO., 3 g; MgSO.-7H.0,
0.25 g; CaCh, 0.25 g; glycine, 1 g; thiamine HCl,
200 wg; biotin, 10 wg; niacin, 200 wg; inositol, 2
mg; pyridoxine HCl, 100 ug; folic acid 100 ue;
and the trace element supplement of Burkholder
(1943); distilled water 1,000 ml; pH 4.7. This
medium was used in studies with cycloheximide.
In studies with ziram the medium in which yeast
cells were grown and which also was used in the
respirometer did not contain the trace element
supplement and included 1 ¢ of sodium acetate
per liter in addition to the other components
listed for the medium used in cycloheximide
studies. The pH of this medium was 5.4. In
manometric studies, suspensions of yeasts were
prepared in a solution from which the glucose,
elycine, ammonium sulfate, and sodium acetate
were omitted and these components were added
from the sidearms of the vessels when desired.
The quantity of yeast used was 0.5 mg dry weight
per vessel in experiments with ziram and 0.3 mg
per vessel in experiments with cycloheximide.
Suspensions of ziram were prepared by the meth-
od deseribed by Sisler and Cox (1954) for making
suspensions of thiram. All growth and manometric
studies were conducted at 30°C.
For organic acid determinations, mycelium of
F.. roseum was grown in a solution of MgSO,4-7H2O
0.5 g; KH»PO,, 0.5 g; peptone, 5 g; glucose, 2.5
g; distilled water, 1,000 ml. The medium was
inoculated heavily with conidia and hyphal frag-
ments and the culture shaken for 18 hours at
room temperature. The mycelium was collected,
washed twice with distilled water, and pressed.
This fungus cake weighing approximately 25 g,
was divided in half and each portion was sus-
pended in 500 ml of basal medium with 0.01 M
glucose or 0.02 M pyruvate as a source of carbon.
The cultures were shaken for a period of three
hours at room temperature. Ziram was then
added to one of the cultures to give a final con-
centration of 153 p.p.m. The cultures were shaken
for an additional hour at which time the mycelium
was collected, washed and pressed as previously
described.
The fungus cakes were each placed in 50 ml of
ether plus 1 ml of IN H.SO, in ether, stirred
thoroughly and stored overnight at 4°C. The
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 10
fungus material and ether were then transferred
to a soxhlet apparatus and the extraction carried
on for 5 hours. The extracts were evaporated and
the residues were taken up in 1 ml of acetone.
Fifty ul of this acetone solution was spotted on
Whatman no. | filter paper in 5-microliter ali-
quots. The chromatograms were developed in the
first dimension with a solvent mixture of 70 parts
by volume n-butanol, 1 part formic acid and
sufficient water to saturate. The second dimension
solvent mixture was 70 parts by volume iso-
butanol, 15 parts formic acid, and 15 parts water.
Upon completion of the development, the papers
were hung in a ventilated cabinet until freed of
the swamping acid and then sprayed with a pH
7.3 indicator solution of 0.04 percent bromcresol
green in ethanol.
The organic acid components of the extracts
were tentatively identified by comparing their R¢
values with those of known acids. However, since
the presence of contaminating materials in the
extract may influence R¢ values, the identification
of each component was confirmed by chromato-
graphing a sample of extract to which a known
acid was added. If upon development, the re-
inforced extract still separated into the same
number of components, one of which was en-
larged, the identity of the acid was assumed to be
established.
Since the alpha-keto acids are relatively un-
stable, they were extracted and chromatographed
as hydrazones. The mycelium of F. rosewm,
prepared as previously described for ether extrac-
tion, was placed in 50 ml of a 0.75 per cent solu-
tion of 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine in 5N H»SOu,,
stirred thoroughly for 1 hour at room temperature
and allowed to stand over-night at 4°C. Fifty
ml of ethyl acetate was then added, the mixture
stirred and filtered through Whatman no. 41H
filter paper. The fungus material was extracted
with four 25 ml portions of ethyl acetate and
filtered. All filtrates were combined and the two
phases separated. The aqueous fraction was
washed with 20 ml of ethyl acetate and discarded.
The hydrazones were then purified by the pro-
cedure described by Cavallini, Frontali, and
Toschi (1949).
The purified hydrazones were applied to
Whatman no. 4 paper in a solution of 2 parts
ethanol, plus 3 parts 0.05 M phosphate buffer,
pH 7.2. The chromatograms were developed with
a solvent mixture consisting of 70 parts by volume
OcToBER 1957
jsobutanol, 15 parts water, 10 parts ethanol, and
1 part concentrated NH,OH. The spots were
identified by comparing their R; values with those
of known acids and by reinforcement of the
extract as previously described.
When it was desired to have a more accurate
quantitative comparison than could be achieved
simply by inspection, the hydrazones were eluted
and the quantities determined by the method of
Cavallini, Frontali, and Toschi (1949).
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Fusarium roseum was the organism used most
extensively in studies of the effects of inhibitors
on growth and oxygen uptake. The increase in
dry weight and the rate of oxygen uptake of
“resting”® and growing conidia of this fungus
during a 5-hour period in the absence of any in-
hibitor is illustrated in Fig. 1. The rapid increase
in dry weight of both resting and growing conidia
during the first hour is attributed largely to the
accumulation of inorganic salts and glucose. At
the end of 1 hour the dry weight and the rate of
oxygen uptake of resting conidia are essentially
identical with those of growing conidia. There-
after, the rate of oxygen uptake and dry weight of
conidia furnished with a source of nitrogen expand
rapidly. This is the pattern which would be
expected for growing cells. The rate of oxygen
uptake of resting conidia remained essentially
constant at the level reached during the first hour,
whereas their dry weight increased steadily during
the entire course of the experiments. The bulk
of the dry weight increase of resting conidia after
the first hour probably results from the accumu-
lation of fat. Accumulation of fat by these cells
under conditions of nitrogen starvation has been
reported (Sisler and Cox, 1954).
The respiratory quotient as determined by the
direct method (Umbreit, Burris, and Stauffer,
1949) for resting conidia was 1.11 for the first
hour and 1.25-1.35 during the following 4-hour
period; for growing conidia it was 1.06 for the
first hour and 1.13-1.16 during the following 4
hours.
Ziram.—A concentration of ziram (15 p.p.m.)
sufficient to prevent growth of conidia of F.
roseum also inhibited the respiration of resting
6 The term resting conidia is used to designate
those conidia in basal medium plus glucose (minus
nitrogen medium) and the term growing conidia is
used to designate conidia in basal medium plus
glucose and (NH,)2SO; (complete medium).
SISLER AND MARSHALL: FUNGITOXIC COMPOUNDS
323
280
—X— O, uptake - growing cells x
-x-- dry wt
Hours
Fic. 1.—The rate of oxygen uptake and dry-
weight changes of resting and growing conidia of
Fusarium roseum.
conidia (Figs. 2 and 3). Inhibition in the rate of
glucose oxidation of the resting conidia was
approximately 40 percent. Increasing the con-
centration of ziram to 30 p.p.m. resulted in
somewhat greater inhibition of oxygen uptake
but no further inhibition occurred with ziram at
150 p.p.m. Concentrations of ziram greater than
15 p.p.m. (i.e., 30 and 150 p.p.m.) did not increase
the degree of inhibition of oxygen uptake beyond
that obtained by 15 p.p.m. in the case of growing
conidia.
Anaerobic fermentation of glucose and the
oxidation of pyruvate by conidia of F. rosewm
were of the same order of sensitivity to ziram as
the oxidation of glucose.
In the case of S. pastorianus, concentrations of
ziram up to 40 p.p.m. affected only that portion
of respiration associated with new growth. The
respiration already established at the time ziram
was added was not depressed as it was in the case
of F. rosewm (Fig. 4).
Klopping (1951) reported that respiration of
the mycelium of Penicillium italicum and Asper-
gillus niger is less sensitive than spore germina-
tion to sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate
(NaDDC). However, it would be necessary to
compare the effect of this fungicide on the respira-
JOURNAL OF
2
70
| ppm ziram
15
60
o3
50
| 3
|
5 40 |
ro 15
<= | Ce
ae
£30 |
© | 150
= | 30
20
10
2 19) | 2 3 4 5
Hours
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 10
2 3
ppm ziram
0.3
fo}
20!
15
175
S
150
3
£/25
o
oy
ey
2100
o
2)
Ss
75
50
iso
15
(29)
O
oO | 2 3) 4 5
Hours
Fics. 2, 3.—The effect of various concentrations of ziram on the rate of oxygen consumption by
resting and growing conidia of Fusariwm roseum. Ziram was added at the time indicated by the arrow.
Fig. 2: Resting conidia, Fig. 3: Growing conidia.
tion and germination of spores of these fungi to
determine whether respiration of the spores is
affected at minimum growth-inhibiting concentra-
tions. Goksdyr (1955) found that the oxidation of
glucose by cells of jS. cereviseae is less sensitive
than growth to dithiocarbamyl compounds, and
McCallan, Miller, and Weed (1954) found lower
EDs values for ferbam’ for germination of spores
of Neurospora sitophila, Alternaria oleraceae, and
A. miger than for oxygen uptake, whereas a higher
EDs value for spore germination than for oxygen
uptake was obtained for Monilinia fructicola.
Thus it would appear that the species of fungus
used as a test organism may be an important
factor in determining whether a growth-in-
hibiting concentration of a dithiocarbamyl com-
pound will also inhibit respiration.
The inhibition of respiration of F. roseum by
ziram may not result from a direct effect of this
compound on enzymes involved in the oxidation
of glucose. The fact that an increase in ziram
beyond a certain concentration did not give a
corresponding increase in inhibition of glucose
oxidation would support this view. If the rate of
7 Ferric dimethyldithiocarbamate.
glucose oxidation were limited by the rate of
utilization of the ATP thus produced, then any
14 ziram
ppm
120 05
1
100
=
~N
* 80
@o
=x
o
a
> 60
3
o
~
=
[o)
a
fo)
20
Time - hours
Fic. 4.—The effect of various concentrations of
ziram on the rate of oxygen consumption by
growing cells of Saccharomyces pastorianus. Ziram
was added at the time indicated by the arrow;
end. = endogenous respiration.
OcTOBER 1957 SISLER AND MARSHALL:
inhibition of synthetic reactions utiizmg ATP,
would probably be reflected as an inhibition in
the rate of glucose oxidation. This type of effect
would account for the pattern of respiratory in-
hibition obtained when conidia of F. roseum are
treated with ziram. If the rate of glucose oxida-
tion were not normally limited by the rate of
eyeling of ATP or if alternate energy utilizing
reactions or ATPase were available to remove
ATP, growth might be inhibited without a de-
pression in the rate of oxygen uptake. This may
be the case with S. pastorianus where the oxy-
gen uptake is not depressed by ziram at growth-
inhibiting concentrations.
A study of organic acid metabolism in F.
roseum was made for the purpose of elucidating
the nature of the effect of ziram on the oxidation
of glucose and pyruvate. Chromatographs of
ether extracts from the mycelium of F. rosewm
incubated with pyruvate or glucose showed spots
corresponding in R¢. values to citric, malic, alpha-
ketoglutaric, succinic, and fumaric acids. The
principal consistent difference between the ex-
tracts from untreated cells and cells treated with
ziram was an excess of alpha ketoglutaric acid in
the ziram-treated samples (Figs. 5, 6). Citric acid
was usually deficient in the ziram-treated samples
in comparison with that found in untreated
samples. Pyruvic acid was apparently destroyed
by the extracting procedure. However, by ex-
tracting the keto-acids as hydrazones, the pres-
ence of pyruvic as well as alpha-ketoglutaric acid
could be demonstrated when either glucose or
pyruvate was used as substrate. When sufficiently
large samples of the extracts were chromato-
graphed, small spots corresponding in R¢. value
to oxaloacetic acid could also be detected. There
was two to 10 times as much alpha-ketoglutaric
acid in extracts from ziram-treated samples as in
untreated samples. Visual inspection of the
chromatograms indicated that pyruvic acid in
extracts from ziram-treated mycelium was only
slightly in excess of that in the untreated
mycelium.
Sijpesteyn and van der Kerk (1954) have shown
that several alpha-keto acids are antagonistic to
the fungitoxicity of NaDDC. The same authors
(1956) have reported the accumulation of pyruvic
acid in the medium in cultures of A. niger and P.
italicum treated with NaDDC. The accumulated
pyruvate apparently plays a role in offsetting
the toxic effect of the fungicide in the case of A.
FUNGITOXIC COMPOUNDS 325
niger but not in the case of P. atalicwm. They
suggested that the accumulation of pyruvic acid
may result from an inhibition of pyruvate
oxidase.
The mechanism by which ziram induces ac-
cumulation of alpha-ketoglutaric acid in the
mycelium of F’. rosewn has not been established.
Interference with —SH groups of the alpha-
ketoglutaric-oxidase system may be responsible
for the accumulation of this acid. This type of in-
hibition might be expected to cause a reduction in
the rate of respiration as was observed when
conidia of F. rosewm were treated with ziram.
Sijpestevn and van der Kerk (1956) have sug-
gested the possible interference of NaDDC with
alpha-lipoic acid or coenzyme A which are —SH.
components of the pyruvate oxidase system. These
—SH compounds also function in the alpha-
ketoglutaric oxidase system. Goks¢yr (1955) has
suggested the possibility of competition of di-
thiocarbamyl compounds with coenzyme A for
proteins of the cell.
An alternative explanation for the accumula-
tion of keto acids and one which is consistent
with the view that dithiocarbamyl compounds do
not affect or only indirect affect the systems in-
volved in the oxidation of glucose is that the ac-
cumulation represents that fraction of these acids
that would normally be utilized in amino acid
and other syntheses. If synthesis were stopped
while the oxidation of glucose and the formation
and oxidation of alpha-keto acids continued unin-
hibited or only partially inhibited, then the keto
acids normally utilized in synthesis would in all
probability accumulate.
Sulfanilamide.—Sulfanilamide has no effect on
the respiration of most microorganisms (Tatum
and Giese, 1945). These authors found that
oxidation of sucrose by resting conidia of Newro-
spora was unaffected even by saturated solutions
of this compound, whereas spore germination
was completely inhibited at much lower concen-
trations. Mycelial growth of Neurospora was
considerably more resistant to sulfanilamide than
was spore germination.
Sulfanilamide was the only inhibitor in the
present studies which clearly did not inhibit
glucose oxidation or dry weight increase of resting
conidia of F. rosewm at concentrations which in-
hibited growth and the increase in oxygen con-
sumption associated with growth (Table 1). The
actual inhibition of growth and the associated
326
oxygen consumption is probably much greater
than is indicated by the values for growing cells
in Table 1, since a portion of the oxygen con-
sumption and of the dry weight increase of grow-
ing cells probably corresponds to the sulfanil-
amide resistant fractions which occur in resting
cells. When corrections are made by subtracting
the values for oxygen consumption and dry weight
increase of resting conidia from the corresponding
values for similarly treated growing conidia, an
inhibition of 82 percent for the remaining oxygen
consumption and 87 percent for the remaining
dry weight increase are obtained when sulfanil-
amide is 10-3 M.
TaBLeE 1.—Hrrecr OF SULFANILAMIDE ON THE
Dry-WerIcut INCREASE AND ON THE OXYGEN
CONSUMPTION OF GROWING AND RESTING
ConmpDIA or FUSARIUM ROSEUM.!
Oxygen >
Molar cone as Percent | Percent
concen-| SUmed> | Welgnt inhibition inhibition
tration eers/i 2 yi of oxygen) of dry
of sulfa- cae ate aan consump-] weight in-
nilamide ais) eee tion crease
weight
Growing 0 849 PPA — —
conidia | 107° 835 2.21 Wee aul
10-3 633 1.83 25.4 19.4
10-8 480 1.27 43.5 44.0
Resting | 0 402 0.84 — —
conidia | 107 401 0.86 0.3 | +2.4
HOT 402 0.90 0.0 | +7.1
10-8 399 0.90 0.8 | +7.1
1 All values are from five hour experiments.
? Values for dry-weight increase were obtained
by determining the final dry weight and correcting
for the dry weight of the initial inoculum.
The effects of sulfanilamide appear to be
restricted to processes involved in the synthesis
of nitrogenous compounds. Synthetic processes
characteristic of resting cells such as fat synthesis
are apparently unaffected by this compound.
Cycloheximide.—Whiffen (1948, 1950) found
that cycloheximide is toxic to most phytopatho-
genic fungi and to certain yeasts but not to bac-
teria. S. pastorianus is very sensitive to cyclo-
heximide and is generally used as an organism
for the assay of this antibiotic.
Lower ED; values for cycloheximide were
reported by McCallan, Miller, and Weed (1954)
for spore germination than for oxygen uptake in
the case of spores of Neurospora sitophila, Myro-
thecium verrucaria, Alternaria oleraceae, and
Aspergillus niger. A lower ED5o value for oxygen
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 10 |]
uptake than for spore germination was found for
spores of Monilina fructicola. Under somewhat |
different conditions Walker and Smith (1952)
found that the respiration of spores of Myro- |
theciwm verrucaria is 4 times as sensitive to cyclo-
heximide as is spore germination and 10 times as
sensitive to this compound as is mycelial respira-
tion. Approximately ten percent of the respira-
tion of the spores was considered necessary for
growth.
The effect of this compound on the oxygen up-
take of resting and growing conidia of F. roseum
and on cells of S. pastorianus is similiar to the
effect of ziram on the oxygen uptake of conidia of
F. rosewm (Tables 2 and 3). While it appears that
growth and the oxygen uptake associated with
growth may be somewhat more sensitive to cyclo-
heximide than the respiration of resting cells, the
latter is affected by concentrations which prevent
growth. As is the case with ziram, the respiration
of resting cells of F. rosewm is depressed about
50 percent by concentrations which prevent
growth. It should be noted that increasing the
concentration of cycloheximide beyond 107° M
does not appreciably increase the degree of inhibi-
tion of the respiration of resting conidia of F.
Fias. 5, 6.—Two dimensional chromatograms of
organic acids extracted from the mycelium of
Fusarium roseum. The mycelium was incubated
with 0.02 M pyruvate. Fig. 5: Organic acids from
untreated mycelium. Fig. 6: Organic acids from
ziram treated mycelium. From left to right for
either figure the spots correspond to citric, malic,
alpha-ketoglutaric, succinic, and fumaric acids.
OcToBER 1957 SISLER AND MARSHALL:
2—Errect oF CYCLOHEXIMIDE ON THE
anp GROWTH OF CONIDIA OF
FUSARIUM ROSEUM!
TABLE
RESPIRATION
Resting conidia Growing conidia
Molar con-
= Oz con- “|
Sooen our j | Per- sumed Per- ae | Per-
be cy ate mg initial | cent tial age cent | increase/) cent
nestmide jdry weight) inhi- | “osont | imhi- | me ini- | inhi-
(micro- | bition] (75,5. | bition | tial dry | bition
liters) ites) | | weight
| |
, = |
0 336 = 710 — | 2.2 —
1075 335 0 677 5 Drill 5
10* 317 6 590, 17 1.8 18
107& 250° | 26 303 | 57 Wel 50
10-8 175 | 48| 170 | 76| 0.4 | 82
10-* 168 | 50 |
10s? 160 52 | |
1 All values are from 5-hour experiments.
roseum. Anaerobic CO» production by cells of S.
pastorianus in the presence or absence of a source
of nitrogen is approximately as sensitive to cyclo-
heximide as is oxygen uptake by these cells
(Table 3).
Cycloheximide apparently has some direct
effect on carbohydrate oxidation or affects seg-
ments of metabolism which are associated closely
enough with carbohydrate oxidation to cause
some inhibition of the latter process.
Sodium azide.—Following an initial period of
inhibition, azide induced a stimulation in the rate
of oxidation of glucose by resting conidia of FP.
roseum. This was true for 10~%, 10-4, and 10-° M
concentrations of azide. The weight increase of
“orowing conidia” treated with azide was much
less than that for untreated resting conidia even
though the oxygen consumed by the former
conidia exceeded that of the latter. The oxygen
consumption of “growing conidia” treated with
FUNGITOXIC COMPOUNDS
900 r “t
x
1
800 3h
[ o
(=
700 2h
:
>
600 | =I
x
3 2 ry
500 _ fe) 47,
~ fp (2
fo} eo
pe
— 1-basal,giucose and NHg Oe
4
o8 | 2-same with azide KG aA
3-basal and glucose x US
: Y
- ,
B00 LL 4-same with azide LON
5-basal medium only GZ Z
6-same with azide aC
200 | eo
7
KA oe
4,7 6
Y
4
Z SS -0)
too L mG Bes a ee
av Boa *
AZO 5
ice eM g
BAL <0 o
aa
° = —— 1 a reel Tee
(o} ' 2 4 5
HOURS
Fic. 7.—Fffect of 5 X 10-4 M sodium azide on
the oxygen uptake and dry weight increase of
conidia of Fusariwm roseum.
azide was almost identical with that of resting
cells treated with this compound (Fig. 7).
At appropriate concentrations, azide is re-
ported to interfere with energy utilization and
assimilation in certain organisms (Clifton, 1946;
Spiegelman, 1947; and James, 1953). Complete
oxidation of acetate by yeast was obtained in the
presence of low concentrations of azide while 66
percent oxidation was obtained with untreated
cells (Winzler, 1940). Using washed cells of FE.
coli, Clifton (1938) found that azide-treated cells
utilized sufficient oxygen to account for 100 per-
cent oxidation of the added glucose, while un-
treated cells utilized approximately 50 percent of
TABLE 3.—HFFECT OF CYCLOHEXIMIDE ON THE REspiRATION, FERMENTATION, AND GROWTH OF CELLS
OF SACCHAROMYC
ES PASTORIANUS!
Resting cells Growing cells
Molar concentration of Oz C022 Oz CO»
cycloheximide consumed | Percent) produced | Percent} consumed | Percent} Increase in | Percent| produced | Percent
(micro-_ | inhibi- (micro- | inhibi- (micro- inhibi- optical | inhibi- (micro- inhibi-
liters/300 tion liters/120 tion liters/300 tion density tion liters/120 tion
minutes) minutes) minutes) minutes)
0) 162 —_— 264 = 235 = 0.43 — 407 =
Bod SK Ire 162 0 262 1 217 8 0.38 12 408 0
Bol) SK UOT 138 15 234 11 145 38 0.10 OU 306 25
Bo X< O-e 104 36 174 34 101 57 0.06 86 181 56
1 Initial inoculum in all experiments had an optical density of 0.41 and a dry weight of 0.3 mg.
2 CO, measurements were made in an atmosphere of No».
328 JOURNAL
the oxygen required for complete oxidation of the
substrate.
With the substrate limited to an amount which
would be consumed during the course of an experi-
ment, the oxygen consumed by resting conidia of
F. roseum treated with 5 X 10-4 M azide would
account for 85 percent of complete oxidation of
the added glucose, whereas the oxygen consumed
by untreated conidia would account for only 20
percent of that necessary for complete oxidation
of the added substrate (Table 4). Apparently a
large percentage of the carbon from glucose is
incorporated into cell material in untreated cells
while most of the glucose is oxidized to COs and
HO by the conidia treated with azide. In cal-
culating the oxygen utilization induced by the
added glucose, the assumption has been made
that the rate of endogenous respiration of resting
cells oxidizing glucose is the same as that of
similarly treated cells without substrate. How-
ever, assuming that the endogenous respiration
is suppressed by the exogenous glucose, the oxygen
consumed by azide-treated conidia may approach
100 per cent of that required for complete oxida-
tion of the added substrate.
Azide affects respiration and growth of F.
roseum in a manner which is generally considered
to be characteristic of compounds which interfere
with energy utilization by cells.
SUMMARY
Ziram inhibits a portion of the respiration
of resting conidia of F. roseum at growth-
inhibiting concentrations, but only the
respiration accompanying new growth is
affected in cells of S. pastorianus. The or-
ganic acids, citric, malic, fumaric, alpha-
ketoglutaric, succinic, and pyruvic, were
found in the mycelium of F’. rosewm. Alpha-
ketoglutaric acid accumulated in cells
treated with ziram. The effect of cyclohexi-
mide on the respiration of cells of /’. rosewm
and S. pastorianus was similar to that of
ziram on Ff’, rosewm. Sulfanilamide did not
effect the oxygen uptake or dry weight
increase of resting cells, but inhibited both
processes in growing cells. The oxygen up-
take by conidia of F’. roseum was initially
inhibited, and then stimulated by azide.
The dry weight increase was inhibited. The
possible effects of these compounds on me-
tabolism are discussed.
OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 10
TaBLE 4.—Errect or Sopium AzIDE ON THE
OXIDATION OF GLUCOSE BY RESTING CONIDIA
or FUSARIUM ROSEUM
_|Total ox-| Percent of
Coe ygen con-| glucose com-
Medium sumed sumed | pletely oxi-
(micro- | minus dized, based
liters) endog- on O» con-
enous sumed?
Basal plus 0.5 mg glu-| 109 76 20
cose
Basal plus 0.5 mg glu-| 389 310 80
cose and azide (5 X
10-4 M)
Basal plus azide (5 X 79 — —
10-4 M)
Basal 33 = =
1The duration of the experiments was 570
minutes at which time respiration of all conidia
had returned to the endogenous rate.
2 Complete oxidation of 0.5 mg of glucose to CO»
and H.O would require 373 microliters of oxygen.
REFERENCES
BuRKHOLDER, P. R. Vitamin deficiencies in yeasts.
Amer. Journ. Bot. 30: 206-211. 1943.
Cavauiini, D., Fronraur, N., and Toscur, G.
Keto-acid content of human blood and urine.
Nature 164: 792-793. 1949.
Crirton, C. E. Studies on the relationship between
synthesis and respiration. Journ. Bact. 36: 248.
1938.
. Microbial Assimilations. In F. F. Nord
(editor), Advances in enzymology. Interscience
Publishers, Inc., New York, 1946.
Goxks@yr, J. The effect of some dithiocarbamyl com-
pounds on the metabolism of fungi. Physiol.
Plant. 8: 719-835. 1955.
James, W. O. The use of respiratory inhibitors.
Ann. Rev. Plant Physiol. 4: 59-90. 1953.
Ku6prine, H. L. Chemical constitution and anti-
fungal action of sulfur compounds. Schotanus
and Jens, Utrecht, 1951.
McCauuan, 8. E. A., Mrnumr, L. P., and WeEp, R.
M. Comparative effect of fungicides on oxygen
uptake and germination of spores. Contrib.
Boyce Thompson Inst. 18: 39-68. 1954.
Owens, R. G. Studies on the nature of fungicidal
action. I. Inhibition of sulfhydryl-, amino-,
iron-, and copper dependent enzymes in vitro by
fungicides and related compounds. Contrib.
Boyce Thompson Inst. 17: 221-242. 1953.
SrypEsTbyN, A. K., and vAN per Kerk, G. J. M.
Investigations on organic fungicides. IX. The
antagonistic action of certain imidazole
derivatives and of a-keto acids on the fungi-
toxicity of dimethyldithiocarbamates. Acta
Biochim. et Biophys. 15: 69-77. 1954.
Investigations on organic fungicides. X.
Pyruvic acid accumulation and its relation to
the phenomenon of inversion growth as effected
by sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate. Acta Bio-
chim. et Biophys. 19: 280-288. 1956.
OcTOBER 1957
Sister, H. D., and Cox, C. E. Effects of tetra-
methylthiuram disulfide on the metabolism of
Fusarium roseum. Amer. Journ. Bot. 41: 338-
345. 1954.
SpreGELMAN, S. The dissociation of anaerobic
metabolism from enzymatic adaptation in yeast.
Journ. Cell. and Comp. Physiol. 30: 315-329.
1947.
Tatum, E. L., and Gress, A. C. Sulfanilamide and
respiration of Neurospora. Arch. Biochem. 9:
15-23. 1945.
Unpreit, W. W., Burris, R. H., and Sraurrer,
J. F. Manometric techniques and tissue metabo-
lism, ed. 2. Burgess Publishing Co., Min-
neapolis, 1949.
SISLER AND MARSHALL:
FUNGITOXIC COMPOUNDS 329
Waker, A. T., andSmrtru, F.G. Effect of actidione
growth and respiration of Myrotheciwm
verrucaria. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 81: 556-
559. 1952.
Wutrren, A. J. Vhe production, assay and anti-
biotic activity of Acti-dione, an antibiotic from
Streptomyces griseus. Journ. Bact. 56: 283-291.
1948.
———. The activity in vitro of cycloheximide (Acti-
dione) against fungi pathogenic to plants.
Mycologia 42: 253-258. 1950.
Winzuer, R. J. The oxidation and assimilation of
acetate by bakers yeast. Journ. Cell. and Comp.
Physiol. 15: 343-354. 1940.
on
THE WASHINGTON HISTORY OF SCIENCE CLUB
In order to make it possible for those
persons living in the Washington, D. C.,
area who are interested in the history,
philosophy, and sociology of science to meet
and exchange ideas, a History of Science
Club has been formed and has embarked on
its second series of meetings.
Dr. Raymond J. Seeger, of the National
Science Foundation, Dr. Robert P. Mult-
haut, of the Smithsonian Institution, and
Morris C. Leikind, of the Armed Forces
Institute of Pathology, made up a temporary
organizing committee until a constitution
could be adopted and officers elected. At the
fourth meeting of the group the following
officers to serve from July 1957 to July 1958
were inducted into office: Dr. Multhauf,
President; Dr. Edward Farber, Timber
Research Laboratory, Vice-President; Mr.
Leikind, Secretary-Treasurer.
About 40 persons are presently enrolled
as members of the Club.
During the first vear the following papers
were presented:
December 6, 1956:
“The Origins of Art and Science in the Work
of Leonardo da Vinci,’ by Dr. Raymond 8.
Stites, curator of education, National Gallery
of Art.
“Aniline Dyes—Their Impact on Biology and
Medicine,’ by Morris C. Leikind, medical
historian and archivist, Armed Forces Institute
of Pathology.
February 7, 1957:
“Benjamin Franklin as a Physicist,” by Dr.
Raymond J. Seeger, National Science Founda-
tion.
Mareh 19, 1957:
“Heavenly Clockwork—A Study of Mechanics
in Medieval China,” by Dr. Derek Price,
consultant, Smithsonian Institution.
May 14, 1957:
“Goethe as a Scientist,’ by Prof. O. Temkin,
Institute of the History of Medicine, Johns
Hopkins University.
330
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 10
PALEONTOLOGY —Morphology and taxonomy of the foraminiferal family Elphi-
diidae. Mary Wapbk, University of Adelaide, South Australia. (Communicated
by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.)
(Received May 16, 1957)
The morphology of species of Elphidium
and related genera is herein described, and
the taxonomy of the group is discussed.
Elphidiella Cushman is suppressed as a
synonym of Elphidium Montfort. A new
species of Parrellina Thalmann is described.
Australian fossil species correctly referred to
Elphidium, Parrellina, and Notorotalia are
listed.
MORPHOLOGY
In the classification of the family Elphidiidae
Galloway (1933, as Elphidimae) the following
characters are used: (1) The presence or absence
of retral processes; (2) a complex canal system;
(3) the diameter of the perforations in the wall;
(4) the wall-structure; (5) the ornamentation; and
(6) the coiling.
1. The retral processes—Carpenter (1862, pp.
278-279, pl.4, fig. 28; pl. 16, figs. 6, 7, 9) regarded
“vetral processes” as ‘“‘a set of processes...
of sarcode... which extend backwards for a
short distance from both the outer or lateral]
margins of each segment of the sarcode body.”
In describing Elphidium craticulatum (as
“Polystomella’”’) he said (p. 282): “The spiral
Jamina which forms the outer wall being modelled
(so to speak) upon the surfaces of these retral
processes, presents internally a corresponding
series of grooves, which are deepest towards the
posterior margin, and become rapidly shallower
in passing towards the anterior margins, of each
chamber.” Evidence of retral processes, there-
fore, should not be sought on the outside of the
test, but inside the chamber lumina. Later
workers, concerned with the external appearance
of the test rather than its detailed internal
characters, have interpreted the external ridges
which partially enclose the retral processes of
protoplasm as “‘retral processes.”” An example is
in the definition of the Elphidiidae given by
Loeblich and Tappan (1953) and quoted by
Smout (1955), ‘‘with retral processes projecting
across the sutures.” Parr (1950) spoke of
Parrellina Thalmann, 1951 (as Elphidioides
Parr 1950), having no ‘true retral processes.”
An examination of the inside of broken or dis-
sected empty tests (including those in Parr’s
material) shows a row of small indentations
around the septal sutures, which must have
covered retral processes in Carpenter’s sense.
Such small hollows may house small retral
processes without being noticeable externally, or,
according to their size, they may underlie small
ridges showing on the walls of the last few
chambers, as in EL. craticulatum, or very large
ridges as in EH. crispum.
Carpenter (p. 282) differentiated between the
internal “grooves” (underlying the external
ridges) which house the retral processes of E.
craticulatum, and the large, deep depressions of
E. crispum “completed into tubes for part of
their length by an additional lamella of shell
given off from the septum’. This difference
seems to be one of size rather than structure
(Figs. 1, 2, [7]). In fossil species the presence of
indentations (grooves, tubes, hollows) in the
chamber wall around the proximal edges of the
chamber lumina is reliable evidence of proto-
plasmic retral processes. As the modification of
the chamber walls indicates the retral processes,
the indentations may be called retral processes
without confusion.
After a detailed study of H. crispwm, using
both thin sections and internal moulds, Ujiié
(1956) criticised Carpenter’s results. He stated
that the retral processes (which he called “septa-
spirothecal stolons’’) lead into the lumen of the
preceding chamber. These conflicting views are
reconciled by a study of broken and dissected
specimens. The retral processes of the last
chamber end blindly against the septal face,
being separated from the canal system by a fold
of the septal flap (Figs. 2b, 3). In earlier chambers
a minute pore appears by resorption in the
septum at the base of each retral process. As still
earlier chambers are investigated the pores are
seen to enlarge until they occupy the base of
each retral process, placing the chamber lumina
in communication with each other through a
series of short tubes, the lateral walls of the
retral processes. It does not seem desirable to
OcToBER 1957 WADE: MORPHOLOGY AND
introduce a new name such as “‘septa-spirothecal
stolons” for retral processes in chambers other
than the last, which have been placed in com-
munication with the preceding chambers by
partial resorption of the septa. The structure is
not synonymous with those commonly called
apertural or foraminal stolons in other groups of
Foraminifera. Ujiié noted the breakdown of the
septal walls in several species with large retral
processes. It also occurs in species with moderate-
sized retral processes but would be very difficult
to observe, and may not occur, in those with very
small retral processes. As Carpenter said, only
the basal ends of the retral processes are tubular,
the tubes being formed from the septal flap and
the adjacent ridges on the chamber walls (Fig.
2). The remainder of the grooves below the
tapering external ridges open into the chamber
| Jumina, as Hofker (1956, p. 153) has again
- described. This fact does not fit Ujiié’s interpre-
Fies. 1, 2.— la, b: Elphidium craticulatum (Fichtel and Moll); 2a, 6: E. crispwm (Linné).
figure, a is a diagrammatic view of the last chamber cut through one of the surface depressions, and (b) a
corresponding view cut through one of the ridges which separate the depressions. (Abbreviations:
a—aperture; af—apertural face; d—surface depression; dc—diverging canal; f—foramen; r—surface
ridge; rp—retral process; s—septum; sc—septal canal.) Approximately x 300.
TAXONOMY OF ELPHIDIIDAB Sort
tation of his internal moulds (1956, p. 271;
Figs. 1, 2), since he states that the ‘‘septa-
spirothecal stolons” are enclosed in complete
cones which open to the surface by a fine pore.
These pores have not been observed by the
writer.
2. The canal system.—Carpenter and Ujiié both
drew attention to the thickening of the outer wall
of the test during growth. Carpenter (p. 280)
noted that the ‘texogenous deposit’? was ‘“‘con-
tinuous with that of which the central nucleus is
composed.” He stated (p. 50, fig. 8) that this
thickening of the wall characterized all the
higher ‘“‘vitreous’’ Foraminifera. Smout (1954,
1955) has shown that it is due to the enclosing
of the whole test in a layer of shelly material
each time a chamber is added; this is character-
istic of the Rotaliidea as a whole, as Carpenter’s
description indicated.
The canal system is enclosed between the
In each
332 JOURNAL OF
initial wall of the chamber (the septal face) and
the septal flap, that part of the succeeding cham-
ber which is attached to the septal face. If retral
processes are present to indent the septal flap
and carry the outer chamber-wall which roofs
them back to the previous chamber, the septal
canal is deeply buried (Figs 1, 2) and communi-
cates with the surface by diverging canals. If no
retral processes are present the septal canals are
roofed by part of the layer of shell material
which encloses the test during growth; if this
material becomes sufficiently thick diverging
canals are again formed. In Elphidiella arctica
(Parker and Jones) and Elphidium subnodosum
(Miinster) the roofing layer is perforate like the
remainder of the wall (Hofker, 1956). In #.
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 10
subnodosum it often breaks down near the margin
and leaves the septal canals open as fissures.
Hofker (1956) says that the septal canals of
E. arctica lead to the surface at either side of the
periphery of the test, and are not complete from
one side to the other. He also says that the roof-
ing layer is imperforate above the canal system
in Elphidium oceanicum Cushman, and from his
figure (pl. 24, fig. 3) this species appears to lack
retral processes. It is hard to see an essential
difference between these simply buried canal
systems, and that so clearly figured by Hofker
(1956, pl. 21, figs. 14, 15) for Elphidiononion
poeyanum (d’Orbigny), type species of Ephidion-
onion Hoftker.
The
full
development — of canal
elphidiid
3b
Fic. 3.—Elphidium crispum (Linné). a (approximately X-400) is an enlargement of the area marked
apcp in b. It represents the ‘‘apertural’’ view of a specimen lacking the last chamber. (Abbreviations:
dc—diverging canal; f/—foramen; rp—retral process; s—septum; sc
sp—septal pore.)
septal canal; sf—septal flap;
OcroBER 1957
systems, which is seen in Z. craticulatum, was well
described by Carpenter (1862). Its understanding
has been amplified very ably by Hofker (1927,
1956) for numerous species of elphidiids.
Typically there are spiral canals following the
umbilical margins of the chambers. In forms with
umbilical plugs, these give rise to straight, un-
branched canals which lead to the surface of the
plugs. A peculiarity of Parrellina Thalmann is the
presence of anastomosing umbilical canals in
place of spiral canals. Hofker (1956, p. 156)
explains the lack of radial umbilical canals in
Elphidiella arctica as due to the inner ends of
the chambers overlapping the spiral canals, and
this appears to be so in a number of the
more involute forms. The spiral canals or the
anastomosing canals give rise to subsutural
septal canals at each septum. These may be
complete, or those from each side may open to
the surface by a pore on either side of the
periphery, a condition which Hofker considers
more primitive. In E. subnodosum the septal
canals often become open fissures part-way to the
periphery, though in other respects its canal
system with well-developed spiral and umbilical
canals is not primitive. Incomplete septal canals
may be a specialized feature in this species
at least.
In most species the septal flap does not cover
the whole of the septal face of the preceding
chamber, so that the septum as a whole is
single-layered near the centre and base, and
double near the outer edges, where it encloses the
canal system. A few species which have massive
walls have completely double septa, and these
may enclose additional intra-septal canals
between the two layers, as Carpenter (1862, pl.
16, fig. 1) figured in EZ. craticulatum and as can be
seen in Parrellina craticulatiformis, n. sp. (Fig. 4, 2,
3,6). Brotzen (1948) showed a connection between
the spiral canal and chamber lumen in Elphidiella
prima (ten Dam), and Hofker (1956) states that
this is typical of all advanced elphidiid canal
systems. The writer has observed it in several
species, including those of Parrellina.
3. The perforations of the wall—Hofker (1956)
places great emphasis on the significance of the
size of the perforations of the wall, and asserts
that the presence of relatively coarse pores is
always associated with a relatively primitive
canal system, not connected to the lumina of the
chambers, the absence of retral processes, and
WADE: MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ELPHIDIIDAE
333
the imperforate nature of that part of the test
wall which roofs the canal system, and is divided
into “pillars”? by the septal pores. On the basis of
these differences he removed several species
from Elphidium to his genus Elphidiononion
which he placed in the Nonionidae. The canal
system, however, differs little from that of
other elphidiids lacking retral processes, and
Hofker has stated that the ‘pillars’ roofing the
canal system of Elphidiwm oceanicum are imper-
forate, like the ‘“‘pillars” of Elphidiononion. It
seems therefore that Elphidiononion is close to
Elphidvwm.
4. The wall-structure—The wall-structure was
tested and found to be radial in topotypes
of Elphidiononion lidoense (Cushman) and in
E. indicum (Cushman); though no other species
were available for examination, their agreement
in described features suggests that they are
likewise radial. This is typical of the Elphididae,
and is a strong argument against a close relation-
ship between Elphidiononion and the granular-
walled Nonion.
5. The ornamentation—Hofker (1956) showed
that fine pustules of shell material, such as cover
the whole surface of Elphidium argentum Parr,
are quite a common form of ornamentation. In
some species it is localized to beading on the
older chambers and sutures. Some elphidiids
have raised ridges of shell material on the surface
of the chambers “situated between the openings
of the canals, and thus coinciding with the retral
processes,’ as Hofker stated. Parrellina Thal-
man has particularly thin, high bars of ornamen-
tation. In some species they are a little irregular
or may even be reticulate and only roughly
coincide with the retral processes.
6. The cotling—One uncoiled form, Ozawaia
Cushman, has arisen whose young stages cannot
be distinguished from Elphidiwm. Trochospirally
coiled forms appear to have arisen several times.
Of these Fawjasina VOrbigny and Polystomellina
Yabe and Hanzawa are rather tenuously
separated by the former being flattened on the
evolute side and the latter flattened on the in-
volute side. The species referred to Notorotalia
Finlay are biconvex; their heavy ornamentation
of transverse or reticulate ridges, usually with
raised sutures, is strikingly similar to that dis-
played by Parrellina imperatrix (Brady) and
related species, as both Finlay and Parr have
said. It is most probable that they arose from
334
Parrellina independently of other trochoid forms.
Hofker (1956, p. 163) has described the canal
system of N. clathrata (Brady) very clearly. A
similar bilateral canal system is present in JN.
howchint (Chapman, Parr, and Collins), which is
widespread in the Middle Tertiary of South
Australia. It has retral processes. N. miocenica
(Cushman) from the Lower Miocene, Muddy
Creek, western Victoria, has particularly large
retral processes on the involute side. They are
also present on the evolute side. The canal system
is again bilateral (with septal pores on both sides).
Another species which is widespread in the Middle
Tertiary of South Australia is very close to, or
may even be identical with, N. tavnuia Dorreen
(described from the Upper Eocene of New
Zealand). It has retral processes with septal pores
between them on the involute side, obscured by
pustules of shell material which sometimes
coalesce into transverse bars. The evolute side
has no retral processes or septal pores, and no
septal canal has been observed inside the test on
the evolute side. As Hofker says that the canal
system of N. clathrata develops on the evolute
side after several chambers, the discovery of a
species in which it is lacking is not surprising.
A form in which early planispiral growth is
followed by annular growth is shown by the genus
Sherbornina Chapman (Wade and Carter, in
Press).
TAXONOMY
Brotzen (1948, pp. 70-71) has given the only
satisfactory description of an early elphidiid,
Elphidiella prima (ten Dam), Danian to Paleo-
cene. HL. multiscissurata Smout (1955), Maestrich-
tian, is well described externally, but details
of the canal system are lacking. Apart from
Hofker’s descriptions (1927, 1956) the ma-
jority of the descriptions of Elphidiids are
totally mmadequate. As a result very little is known
of the phylogeny of the group, or of what charac-
ters are generically important.
Hofker (1956), basing his opinion on Brotzen’s
description of H. prima, and on his own obser-
vation that species of Hlphidium with both single
and double rows of septal pores have the double
rows in the microspheric generation, considers
various characters “primitive” or ‘fadvanced.”
The lack of retral processes and double rows of
septal pores such as are found in EF. prima,
together with imcomplete septal canals like
E. arctica (Parker and Jones), and very fine
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 10
perforations in the walls, he considers “‘primi-
tive.’ Relatively coarse perforations, retral
processes, complete septal canals, well-developed
spiral canals, and single rows of septal pores are
considered ‘‘advanced.”’ According to whether a
species shows more ‘‘primitive” or ‘“advanced”’
characteristics he allots it to a genus. Such a
subjective approach allows room for endless
arguments as to which characters really are
primitive and which specialized (advanced); also
as to which primitive characters outweigh which
advanced ones. Hofker’s usage results in the
recognition of the genera Elphidiononion,
Elphidium, and Elphidiella (he does not take
Parrellina into account). Each of his three
groups is fairly uniform in itself, but for the most
part shares each of the ‘“‘generic” characters with
various species in other genera. Two distinctive
characters appear to separate the species referred
to Elphidiononion from those referred to
Elphidium and Elphidiella: they have fewer,
coarser perforations in the walls, and according
to Hofker their canal systems do not communi-
cate with the chamber lumina. From this it
appears that Hlphidiononion can be recognized
as a genus close to Elphidium.
Cushman (1936, 1939) defined Elphidiella as
“having two rows of openings at the sutures and
with a thickened area between, without definite
retral processes.”” He included in the genus the
Recent E. artica (Parker and Jones) and similar
Late Tertiary to Recent species. Numerous
species of Hlphidium have been described with
some individuals having double rows of septal
pores. They represent a wide variety of forms
from stout-walled EH. craticulatum (Carpenter)
which has retral processes, to more fragile
E. kerguelenense Parr which has none, and which
Parr (1950, p. 373) said “is intermediate between
Elphidium and Elphidiella.”’
Double rows of septal pores and the lack of
retral processes are frequently found to occur
independently, and confusion in classification
has arisen as various authors applied one or the
other character as the essential criterion. Smout
(1955, pp. 207-208) redefined Elphidiella placing
so much emphasis on the lack of retral processes
that he removed it to the family which he con-
sidered ancestral to the Elphidiidae, the Miscel-
laneidae, in spite of its admittedly close relation-
ship to Elphidium. Hofker (1956) emphasized the
“primitive” canal system, septal pores, and lack
of retral processes, while retaining it in the
OcTOBER 1957 WADE: MORPHOLOGY
Elphidiidae (*‘Polystomellidae”) as a genus near
(possibly ancestral to) Elphidiwn. Ujné (1956)
goes to the other extreme and places Elphidiwm
craticulatum in Elphidiella presumably because of
its double row of septal pores in the microspheric
form, although it has retral processes. It may be
difficult to decide whether a species in which the
diverging canals are inclined to each other at a
very low angle has one or two rows of septal
pores. Ujiié illustrates this difficulty by drawing
attention to “Elphidiella’”’ momiyamaensis Uchio,
in which “two rows of sutural pores can hardly be
observed even in large specimens.”” No consistent
differences separate Elphidium from Elphidiella,
so “Elphidiella” Cushman should be suppressed
as a synonym of Elphidium Montfort. From
Brotzen’s description of Elphidiwm primum ten
Dam, it seems that this species can be included
in Elphidium, extending the recognized range of
the genus to Danian. It will be necessary to re-
study other pre-Eocene species referred to
“Elphidiella’’ to see whether they too can be
referred to Elphidiwm.
Loeblich and Tappan (1953) drew attention to
the fact that Cribroelphidiwum Cushman and
Bronnimann (type species, C’. vadescens Cushman
and Bronnimann) is a synonym of Elphidiwm
Montfort. This fact has since been overlooked by
several writers.
EMENDATION OF THE GENUS PARRELLINA
THALMANN
Parrellina imperatrix (Brady), Recent, Port
Jackson, New South Wales, P. verriculata
(Brady), Miocene, Muddy Creek, Hamilton,
Victoria, and P. sp. from the Oligocene, Table
Cape, Wynard, Tasmania, were studied in
addition to Parr’s type material of Parrellina
(“Elphidioides” Parr, not Cushman). In these
species the fine, high, wavy lines of ornamentation
which cover the test do not always coincide with
the retral processes. There is a canal system of
septal canals and diverging canals, such as is
found in Elphidium. All these are extremely
compressed, semievolute forms; tangential
sections parallel to the median plane reveal
anastomosing canals in the poorly developed
umbilical thickening, rather than clear spiral
canals. The septal canals also appear to lead
into one another in a dendroid fashion similar to
that which is much more clearly seen in P.
craticulatiformis, n. sp. (described below). In
tests with heavily thickened walls the diverging
AND TAXONOMY OF
ELPHIDIIDAE 330
canals do not open at the suture in fine septal
pores, but wander on the lateral chamber-surfaces
between the ridges of ornamentation. They do
not occupy the position indicated by Parr (1950,
fig. 7). In the figured specimen the dark lines
which Parr figured as canals are an optical effect
caused by the transluscent shell material of the
surface ridges, and coincide with the retral
processes. The septal and diverging canals can
only be seen in the cut surfaces and from the
exterior. They may send several branches to the
surface of the test. Hofker (1956, p. 161) noted
the fact that the canals enter the marginal spines
in P. imperatrix. In P. verriculata there may be
long, deep slits between the ridges, rather than
canals. Recent specimens of P. imperatrix have
a row of fine apertural pores at the base of the
apertural face. There may be more than one row
of foraminal pores in the septal face.
Parr’s definition (1950, p. 3873) of Elphidioides
(recte Parrellina Thalmann) should be emended
to read:
Test planispiral, bilaterally symmetrical, in-
volute to semi-involute; chambers numerous;
sutures distinct, usually raised, connected across
the intervening chamber surfaces by crossbars of
rather wavy outline, sometimes anastomosing,
which roughly coincide with the retral processes,
the front of the last chamber also ornamented
with raised ridges which radiate from near the
base; wall calcareous radiate in structure; well-
developed canal system with dendroid septal
canals and diverging canals, septal pores small;
aperture a series of fine pores near the base of the
apertural face, often masked by the ornamenta-
tion.
Genus Parrellina Thalmann, 1951
Parrellina craticulatiformis, n. sp.
Fig. 4, 1-6
Test large, up to 1144 mm in diameter, thickness
more than half the diameter, in side view each
half the diameter, in side view each half is
rounded. There is a slight thickened ridge at the
narrowly rounded periphery. The chamber walls
are ornamented by long, thin, rather irregular
cross bars up to three or four times as long as the
narrow, usually raised sutures are wide. No retral
processes have been seen. The very low apertural
face is finely fluted and has a row of deep de-
pressions along the basal suture. These
depressions may lead into apertural pores, as
thin sections show the foramina to be rows of
pores in this position. The septum is double.
336 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 4/, NO. 107
Fra. 4. (For explanation see opposite page).
OcToBER 1957 WADE: MORPHOLOGY
The umbilical plugs are very large, formed by
about fifteen to twenty bosses with pits between
them. The pits are the openings of large radial
umbilical canals some of which originate on
either side of the initial whorl, smaller canals
anastomose between the pillars of calcareous
material which underly the bosses. Septal canals
follow the outer edge of the septa, Just below the
septal sutures. No spiral canal is visible; the
septal canals appear to join the small anastomos-
ing canals in the umbilical plugs. Larger canals
pass between the foraminal pores and across the
septa between the two layers of which each
consists. These canals branch and may join the
septal canals, offshoots from both reaching the
surface of the test as a row of fine pores (septal
pits) along the suture. Near the periphery the
branches (diverging canals) spread more widely
in the thick spiral lamina, and their openings are
not confined to the sutures. Some diverging
canals lead into the lumina of chambers added
above them; others pass between the layers of the
septa, in the later whorls, rebranching, and
extending to the surface of the test (Fig. 4,
2, 3,6). The main canal system is this dendroid
system, which can be traced to its origin in the
walls of the initial chamber, in both megalospheric
and microspheric specimens. The chambers are
narrow and numerous, they range from about
eight in the first whorl to over twenty in the
outer wall of large specimens.
Dimensions.—As follows:
Holotype, F15262, maximum diameter 1.06 mm,
thickness 0.70 mm, Blanchetown.
Paratype, F15263, maximum diameter 1.31 mm,
thickness 0.91 mm, Blanchetown.
Paratype, F15261, maximum diameter 1.36 mm,
thickness 0.81 mm, Myponga Bore.
Occurrences.—Throughout the Lower Miocene
section in the cliffs of the River Murray at
Blanchetown, South Australia. Common. The
type specimen from about 65 feet above sea
AND TAXONOMY
OF ELPHIDIIDAE Soll
level, from the lowest sample with Lepidocyclina
gippslandica subsp. Lower Miocene.
Bore near Myponga, South Australia, 296 to
495 feet. Common. L. gippslandica subsp. is
present. Lower Miocene.
Remarks —Parrellina craticulatiformis, n. sp.,
is probably the species described as Elphidiwm
sp. by Howcehin and Parr (1988, p. 309, pl. 18,
fig. 8), who had a single specimen from the
Miocene of the Metropolitan Abattoirs Bore,
Adelaide. As indicated by its specific name this
at first glance resembles Elphidiwm
craticulatum (Brady) in its rotund proportions.
Its ornamentation differs, however, and it lacks
the clearly defined spiral canals of . craticulatum,
having anastomosing canals in the umbilicus in
addition to the radial umbilical canals found in
both species. Another difference is the subordi-
nation of the septal canals in P. craticulatiformis
to a dendroid intraseptal canal system which I
have not found in £. craticulatum (Recent, New
Guinea), though Carpenter (1862, p. 285; pl.
16, fig. 1) deseribed a similar one from his much
larger specimens. The species Parr (1950) referred
to ‘‘Elphidioides” (recte Parrellina Thalmann),
are rather delicate and do not have a completely
double septum, hence they do not have an
intraseptal canal system. This makes the simi-
larity of their anastomosing umbilical canals,
and the dendroid way the septal canals lead
into each other (through some of the diverging
canals) more striking. Similarly the diverging
canals often spread a long way in the spiral
lamina, particularly near the margin. It seems
that P. craticulatiformis, n. sp., is best placed
in this genus, in spite of its lack of retral proc-
esses which must have been lost in this species.
species
SPECIES PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED FROM
AUSTRALIA
Described species of Australian fossil
elphidiids have been investigated to check their
generic assignations,
Fie. 4.—1-6, Parrellina craticulatiformis, n. sp.:
(1) Vertical section of a megalospheric specimen
F 15277, showing the radial and anastomosing umbilical canals; (2) horizontal section of a megalospheric
specimen, F15276, showing double septa and the dendroid canal system; (3) horizontal section, micro-
spheric, F15275, cut at the side of the initial whorl to show the dendroid canal system radiating from the
earliest part of the test; some cleavages are visible as straight dark lines in the spiral lamina (1-3 approx.
40); (4) holotype, F15262, 30 (a lateral view, b Outline, showing thick test, blunt keel, and low,
ornamented, apertural face); (5) specimen from Myponga, showing umbilical bosses and fine ornamen-
tation; (6) drawing of vertical section F15274, 100, showing dendroid intraseptal canal system, and
foramina in the septa. 7, Elphidium craticulatum (Fichtel and Moll): The arrows point to septal
canals enclosed between the septal face and septal flap, with a retral process on the peripheral side,
as in Fig. 1b. X 200.
338
Elphidium adelaidense Howchin and Parr
(1938), H. rotatum Howchin and Parr (1938), and
E. chapmani Cushman (1936) were obtained
from the Pliocene of the Adelaide Plains Basin,
South Australia. #. macellum (Fichtel and Moll)
var. limbatum Chapman (1907) is common in
the Plocene of Jemmy’s Point, Kalimna, Vic-
toria. EL. pseudonodosum Cushman (1936) also
occurs there and in the Pliocene at Muddy Creek,
near Hamilton, Victoria. Topotypes of #.
crespinae Cushman (1936) were obtained from
the Miocene of Muddy Creek. It seems that
E. crassatum Cushman (1936), which was also
described from the Miocene of Muddy Creek, is
synonymous with the larger variants of HE.
crespinae. EH. parri Cushman (1936) is also
present in the Miocene of Muddy Creek. All
these species are correctly assigned to Elphidium,
and all have true retral processes. No specimens
of Elphidium evolutum (Chapman, 1913) were
available.
No specimens of HE. subinflatum Cushman
(1936), which has the ornamentation typical of a
Parrellina, were available, and only one specimen
of the closely similar H. pseudoinflatum Cushman
(1936), from the Miocene of Muddy Creek. This
species has large septal pores and no ornamenta-
tion on the septal face; it is strongly imvolute
with the umbilical regions depressed. It appears
to be an Elphidiuwm rather than a Parrellina,
in spite of its thin, wavy ornamentation. It is not
possible to give a firm opinion on the classi-
fication of these species until adequate material
for thin-sectioning becomes available.
Parrellina imperatrix (Brady, 1884) is found
rarely in the Pliocene at Jemmy’s Point, Kalimna
(Parr, 1950). P. verriculata (Brady, 1884) is found
in the Miocene at Muddy Creek. A closely
similar species (P. sp. of this paper) is both
common and widespread in slightly older beds in
South Australia and at Table Cape, Wynyard,
Tasmania. No specimens of “Elphidiwm”
howchint Cushman (1936) have been found. A
closely similar species of Parrellina which lacks
the transverse ornamentation on the apertural
face, occurs in the Oligocene of Table Cape.
Notorotalia miocenica (Cushman, 1936) is
common in the Miocene at Muddy Creek. N.
howchini (Chapman, Parr, and Collins, 1934) is
very common and widespread in the Middle Ter-
tiary of South Australia, one specimen was found
in the Pliocene of the Adelaide Plains Basin.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, no. 10
N. aff. tainuia Dorreen (1948) is common and
widespread in the Oligocene of South Australia.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I am indebted to Prof. Sir Douglas Maw-
son for making available the Parr Collec-
tion of Antarctic Foraminifera, and to Dr.
M. F. Glaessner for the loan of much mate-
rial from his private collection, and of
otherwise unavailable literature; also for
his critical reading of the manuscript. Miss
A. M. C. Swan very kindly made the draw-
ings for Figs. 1-3.
REFERENCES
Brapy, H. B. Notes on some of the reticularian
Rhizopoda of the Challenger Expedition, Part
III. Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., 1881, n.s., 21.
1881.
Brorzen, F. The Swedish Paleocene and its
foraminiferal fauna. Sver. Geol. Unders., ser.
C, no. 493: 1-140, pls. 1-19, text figs. 141.
1948.
CarRpPENTER, W.B. Introduction to the study of the
Foraminifera. 1862.
CuapMan, F. Recent Foraminifera of Victoria;
some littoral gatherings. Journ. Quekett Micr.
Club, ser. 2, 10(61). 1907.
Description of new and rare fossils obtained
by deep boring in the Mallee; Part 1—Plantae;
and Rhizopoda to Brachiopoda. Proc. Roy.
Soc. Victoria. n.s., 26, pt. 1, 1913.
CuapMAN, F., Parr, W. J., and Coturns, A. C.
Tertiary Foraminifera of Victoria, Australia.—
The Balcombian deposits of Port Phillip. Part 3.
Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., 38(262) : 553-577, pls.
8-11. 1934.
CusHMAN, J. A. Some new species of Elphidium
and related genera. Contr. Cushman Lab.
Foram. Res. 12(pt. 4): 78-89, pls. 13-15.
1936.
A monograph of the foraminiferal family
Nonionidae. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 191:
1-100, pls. 1-20. 1939.
DorreEEN, J. M. A foraminiferal fauna from the
Kaiatan stage (Upper Eocene) of New Zealand.
Journ. Pal. 22(3) : 281-300, pls. 36-41. 1948.
Euuis, B. F., and Messtna, A. M. Catalogue of
Foraminifera. 1940-1956.
Gattoway, J. J. A manual of Foraminifera.
Bloomington, Ind., 1933.
Horxker, J. The Foraminifera of the Siboga Ex-
pedition. Part 1: 1-78, pls. 1-88, text-figs. 1-11.
Leiden, 1927.
Foraminifera Dentata: Foraminifera of
Santa Cruz and Thatch-Island Virginia-Archi-
pelago West Indies. Univ. Zool. Mus. Koben-
havn 15: 1-237, pls. 1-35. 1956.
Howcuin, W., and Parr, W. J. Notes on the
geological features and foraminiferal fauna of
the Metropolitan Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide.
=
OcToBER 1957 WADE: MORPHOLOGY AND
Trans. Roy. Soe. South Australia 62(pt. 2):
287-317, pls. 15-19. 1938.
Loesiico, A. R., and Tappan, H. Studies of
Arctic Foraminifera. Smithsonian Mise. Coll.
121(7) : 1-501, pls. 1-24, text fig. 1. 1953.
Parr, W. J. Foraminifera. B.A.N.Z. Antarctic
Res. Exp. Reports, ser. B, 5(pt. 6): 233-392,
pls. 3-15, text figs. 1-8. 1950.
Smout, A. H. Lower Tertiary foraminifera of the
Qatar Peninsula: 1-96, pls. 1-15, text figs.
J-44. British Museum, 1954.
TAXONOMY OF ELPHIDIIDAE 339
——. Reclassification of the Rotaliidea (Forami-
nifera) and two new Cretaceous forms resembling
Elphidium. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci.
45 (7) : 201-210, figs. 1-10. 1955.
Usb, H. The internal structures of some Elphi-
diidae. Tokyo University of Education (Tokyo
Kyoiku Daigaku) Sci. Rep. 4(83-40) : 267-282,
pls. 14, 15, text-figs. 1, 2. 1956.
Wann, M., and Carrmr, A.N. The foraminiferal
genus Sherbornina in south-eastern Australia.
Micropaleontology (in press).
WOOD-BORING BEETLES
The Smithsonian Institution has recently ob-
tained a large and important collection of wood-
boring beetles, to be added to the entomological
series of the United States National Museum.
The new collection, numbering more than 100,000
specimens and representing about 16,500 species
of this enormous group of insects, came from
Frederich F. Tippmann, an engineer, explorer,
and entomologist of Vienna, Austria. He as-
sembled the collection over a period of 40 years,
not only collecting personally in every country
of South America and in Africa, Asia, and Europe,
but also purchasing great rarities from many
remote parts of the world.
The wood-boring beetles of this family, num-
bering in all about 25,000 species, comprise one
of the economically most important groups of
insects of the world. In the larval stage they
attack wood and stems of woody and herbaceous
plants, and a few of them eat seeds. It is on
record that one small outbreak of one species,
affecting only 8 square miles of forest, killed
45,000 trees, aggregating nearly 1,000,000 cubic
feet of timber. Fig-growing is impossible in some
parts of India because of the damage caused by
another species. In one area of China 90 percent
of all citrus trees are infested by a wood-borer,
and many young trees are killed annually in
spite of preventive measures. Other species
attack rafters of houses, particularly in con-
tinental Europe, furniture, rustic garden work,
telegraph poles, and orchids.
Not all species, however, are harmful, point
out Smithsonian entomologists. Live-stem borers
are used to control the spread of noxious plants
such as lantana. Larvae of several groups speedily
break down stumps and discarded logs in conife-
rous plantations, greatly enriching the soil and
clearing the ground. Some kinds indicate to the
forester that his trees are unhealthy and are the
victims of more serious foes.
These beetles range in size from minute speci-
mens about 1% inch long to monsters 4 to 5
inches in body length with 8-inch antennae.
Every conceivable color is represented, and
many mimic the form of other beetles, wasps,
flies, and so forth.
The newly acquired collection, together with
others already assembled at the United States
National Museum, will permit studies embracing
the biology and distributional features of the
wood-boring insects and will be available to
interested students of beetles who wish to under-
take studies in this group. It is only through long
and careful study using a working tool such as
this important collection, that scientists are able
to learn about both the useful and destructive
forms of insects and how to distinguish between
them.
340 JOURNAL OF
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 10
ENTOMOLOGY .—Cockroach egg case from the Eocene of Wyoming.! Rotanp W.
Brown, U.S. Geological Survey.
(Received June 19, 1957)
Alive or long since dead, cockroaches
seem to get into the U. 8. National Museum
with comparative ease. Sometimes, of a
morning, when I open my desk I am dis-
agreeably startled to find a large individual
of Perrplaneta americana waving its long,
sensitive antennae at me warily by way of
what, with some reservations, might be
called a blattoid greeting. If the insect is
motivated by good feeling, that emotion is
not reciprocated by me, for I wholeheartedly
detest these pestiferous, prolific, and repul-
sive creatures. Their lumbering | flight
through the air, their quick, furtive dash to
safety in the nearest, impossible crevice,
and their well-known filthy, destructive
habits are neither beautiful to behold nor
pleasant to contemplate. Fortunately, in
some quarters at least, they are kept under
control by species of flies and wasps that
parasitize their eggs.
Fossil remains of ancient cockroaches are
not uncommon in the plant collections that
come to the Museum from many different
localities, particularly those in the coal
measures of Paleozoic age. Most of these
fossils are impressions of wings (tegmina),
entire specimens being seldom found. Per-
haps the wings, tough and without apprecia-
ble nutriment, were discarded by predators,
or the soft body parts decayed before the
insect could be entombed in sediments.
Examples of cockroaches, sometimes 10 em
long, are included in nearly every museum
restoration of a Carboniferous swamp with
its ferns, calamites, lepidodendrons, cor-
daites, and other vegetation. The cockroach
line, however, continued through the suc-
ceeding geologic periods to the present with
its estimated 3,500 species. Some South
American species of Megaloblatta contain in-
dividuals that equal those of the Paleozoic
in overall size.
1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S.
Geological Survey. Grateful appreciation for help
is acknowledged to Drs. Ashley B. Gurney, U.S.
Department of Agriculture; R. E. Snodgrass,
U. S. National Museum; and Louis M. Roth,
U.S. Army, Natick, Mass.
In such a plant collection, taken in 1949
by Dr. J. B. Reeside, Jr., of the U. S. Geo-
logical Survey, from reddish, baked shale
lying above a burned coal bed in lower
Eocene strata of Wasatch age about 18
miles north of Wamsutter, Wyo., I found a
small, squarish capsule (ig. 2) that seems
identifiable only as the egg case (o6theca)
of a cockroach. This capsule is 3 mm long
and 2 mm wide, but somewhat longer at the
top than at the bottom. The top, as the
specimen is here oriented, is apparently the
the dehiscent or sutural crest and is bor-
dered by a narrow flange that is faintly
undulant, fluted, or notched. Seven vertical
lines, equally spaced, indicate the internal
egg chambers. As only one side of the speci-
men is visible the beholder, knowing that
the capsules of living cockroaches, viewed
from above, are seen to consist of two rows
of alternating compartments, may perhaps
be somewhat disappointed. Such, however,
is often the nature of fossil material for
which appropriate allowance must be made.
The odthecae of most cockroaches are pro-
truded lengthwise, the sutural crest being
toward the dorsal (upper) side of the par-
turient insect, as shown well by Roth and
Willis (1954, pl. 5). Not all living species
lay such external, chitinous packages. Those
that do not are more or less viviparous, the
young emerging from an internal odtheca
enclosed in a brood pouch. Roughly, the
fossil capsule can be matched by the small
egg cases of some existing cockroaches, but,
as the cases of living cockroaches differ
greatly in size, shape, and ornamentation
(Shelford, 1912, p. 283) it seems futile to
guess about the relationship of the fossil to
any living species. If the female that laid
this odtheca was proportional to the egg
case in size it must have belonged to a
small-sized species.
Thus far I have found only five previous
records of fossils purporting to be cockroach
odthecae. All these fossils are from the coal
measures of the late Paleozoic. Three are
illustrated by Handlirsch (1908, p. 181, pl.
OcTOBER 1957
18, fig. 49 [originally figured by Sellards,
1904, p. 133, fig. 25], from Pennsylvanian
strata at Lawrence, Kansas; fig. 47 [later
photograhed by Schlechtendal, 1912, pl. 4,
fig. 32], from the Carboniferous at Dolau in
Saxony; and fig. 48, from the Carboniferous
at Wettin in Saxony). Two are illustrated by
Pruvost (1919, p. 244, pl. 22, fig. 16, text
fig. 34, from the Westphalian stage of the
Carboniferous at Aniche, France; pl. 22, fig.
15, text fig. 35, from the Westphalian at
Lievin, France [see also Laurentiaux, 1951,
pelos. pl. 1, fig. 1).
None of these five specimens, judged from
the illustrations, is completely satisfying as
a cockroach oétheca comparable to examples
from living species. Except the two by Pru-
vost, the illustrations depict fragmentary
and featureless material. Sellard’s specimen
is figured as a curved, irregular outline, 15
millimeters long and 5 millimeters wide,
with only a dim suggestion of ornamentation
along the upper (assumed) dehiscence margin
and a rounded notch on the lower margin. I
was unsuccessful in obtaining this specimen
for examination and in eliciting any further
information from Dr. Sellards. His original
report contains no description of the speci-
men but says only that it ‘thas a striking re-
semblance to the egg cases of modern cock-
roaches” (Sellards, 1904, p. 120, 134). One
might compare it casually and doubtfully
with the odthecae of living species of
Latiblattella.
Handlirsch’s figure 47 might be inter-
preted as a wing fragment of a cockroach or
other insect. It contains minute cross vena-
tion not visible in the photograph given by
Schlechtendal. Handlirsch’s figure 48 simu-
lates a stack of small coms, except that the
bottom segment is rounded. Viewed hori-
zontally instead of vertically it could con-
ceivably, by a stretch of imagination, be
Fic. 1.—Forewing or tegmen of a Paleocene cockroach from strata on Cherry Creek, 10 miles north of
BROWN: COCKROACH EGG CASE 341
likened to the odthecal structure of the
living Blaberus craniifer.
Pruvost’s two specimens are well illus-
trated. They are much alike and evidently
belonged to the same or closely related
species of whatever produced them. In 1913
he (1919, footnote, p. 247) identified one
(his text fig. 35) as the tooth of a fish,
Ctenoptychius sp., but later changed his
mind in favor of a cockroach odtheca. In
my untutored opinion his first thought was
in the right direction. Both specimens, as
oriented by Pruvost, have lower borders
with small, rounded projections, and upper
borders that are ragged and irregular. These
borders are unlike the relatively regular,
straight margins on the odthecae of living
cockroaches. By turning his illustrations up-
side downit is easy to imagine that they rep-
resent small, perhaps somewhat worn fish
teeth with fairly distinct crown and root
portions. However, an additional circum-
stance makes a decision difficult about the
true identity of these objects. It is the
ambiguous fact that abundant cockroach
wings and fish remains were found in asso-
ciation with them. Incidentally, I also think
that Pruvost was most likely mistaken in
identifying his specimens on plate 4, figs.
1-5, as the pronota of an unclassified insect
called Omoptilus hispidus. These seem to me
to resemble or suggest the cephalothoraxes
of such xiphosurids as Belinurus, Limulus,
Prestwichia, and related forms (see Pruvost,
pl. 23):
Laurentiaux (1951, p. 188) accepted the
Pruvost specimens as authentic odthecae
and, consequently, considered them as proof
that some Paleozoic cockroaches were an
exception to the apparent general rule for
those insects. When found entire the
Paleozoic females have a fairly long ovi-
positor (Sellards, 1904, figs. 12, 13, 15;
3
Terry, Mont., X 2. Fra. 2.—Egg case of an Eocene cockroach from strata 18 miles north of Wamsutter,
Wyo., X 5. Fic. 3.—Forewing or elytron of a beetle from the same locality as Fig. 2, X 10.
042
aurentiauxe 9a plaleahece2aae2bsmolee2.
figs. 1, 2a, 2b; Zalessky, 1953, text figs. 1-7)
and are, therefore, thought to have laid eggs
in the fashion of some orthopterans, singly
or in batches, in suitable places, instead of
dropping them in a capsule, after the manner
of most of our domestic cockroaches. This
was the basis for the opinion that the
oothecal apparatus did not become per-
fected until the close of the Paleozoic or
later. If now the Pruvost specimens are not
odthecae but fish teeth, Laurentiaux’s
arguments lose most of their force.
It would seem, therefore, that, of all these
examples, the Eocene specimen I am here
reporting comes closest to being an au-
thentic cockroach egg case. No wings, except
those of beetles (Fig. 3), were found with
the specimen. Nevertheless, cockroaches
were undoubtedly in existence there or near
there at that time for their wings (Fig. 1)
occur in underlying Paleocene strata of the
Fort Union formation and in_ overlying
Eocene strata of the Green River formation
(Scudder, 1890, p. 216, pl. 6, fig. 25).
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES vou. 47, No. 10
REFERENCES
HaANDLIRSCH, ANTON.
zig, 1908.
LauRENTIAUX, Daninu. Le probleme des blattes
Paleozoique a _ ovipositeur extreme. Ann.
Paleont. 37: 187-196. 1951.
Pruvost, Prerre. La faune continentale du ter-
rain houiller du nord de la France. Mém. de la
carte geologique detaille de la France. 1919.
Roru, Lours M., and Wituis, Epwin R. The re-
production of cockroaches. Smithsonian Misc.
Coll. 122(M). 1954.
SCHLECHTENDAL, DirETrRIcH von. Untersuchung
viber die karbonischen Insekten und Spinnen
von Wettin. Nova Acta Abh. Kais. Leop.-
Carol. Deutsch. Akad. Naturf. 98: 1-162. 1912.
ScuppER, 8S. H. The Tertiary insects of North
America. U. 8. Geol. Survey Terr. Rept. 13.
1890.
SELLARDS, EH. H. A study of the structure of Paleo-
zoic cockroaches, with descriptions of new forms
from the Coal Measures. Amer. Journ. Sci. 18:
113-134; 213-227. 1904.
SHetrorD, R. The odthecae of Blattidae. Ent.
Rec. 24: 283-287. 1912.
ZaLessKy, M. New Permian cockroaches with ovt-
positors, in the family Spiloblattinidae. Ent.
Obozr. 33: 266-272. 1953.
Die fossilen Insekten. Leip-
The truths of the scientific church are not dogmas, but something put for-
ward as provisional only, and which her most faithful children are welcome to
disprove if they can.—S. P. LANGLEY.
~ OeroBeR 1957
CRABILL: NEWPORT CHILOPOD GENERA 343
ZOOLOGY —On.the Newport chilopod genera. Raupu E. Crasiin, Jr., U.S. Na-
tional Museum.
(Received May 21, 1957)
There is a curious parallel between the
work of William E. Leach and George
Newport in England and that of Horatio
C. Wood and Charles H. Bollman in the
United States. The earlier pair, Leach and
Wood, forged the initial shadowy framework
within which the later men, Newport and
Bollman, were to refine, to rearrange, and
magnify in a flurry of short-lived activity.
Probably the comparison should not be ex-
tended too far, though finally it is tempting
to recall that each of the later men died pre-
maturely and, one might say, as a result of
his zoological interests, Bollman of malaria,
in 1899, in Georgia while engaged in field
work, and Newport in 1854 of a fever con-
tracted while collecting specimens in winter.
As was Wood in America, so was George
Newport the first outstanding monographist
of the Myriapoda in England. And this is
odd, for apparently each was _ primarily
interested in something other than myria-
pods, Wood in botany, and Newport in
insect physiology and amphibian embrv-
ology. Each fell prey to a brief, intense
infatuation with myriapod systematics, and
then each turned again abruptly to other
interests. For some elusive reason the mynia-
pods have had many such transient amours,
though not all were happy, fruitful unions
by any means.
Newport’s reévaluation of the higher
chilopod categories, his presentation of new
species drawn from remote parts of the
world, and particularly his recognition of a
number of new genera all served to establish
the faint lines of a firmer categorical fabric
than had existed previously. The handful
of genera proposed by Linnaeus, Lamarck,
Latreille, and Leach before him had been
born of an undeniable novelty and _ pre-
served by little more than their youth in a
generic void.
The Newport genera are important. They
have lent themselves to three family and
two subfamily names; many of their species
are the most familiar chilopods in various
parts of the world. Because details of publi-
cation have often been misrepresented in
the literature,' and especially because the
identity of the type species, and hence the
content of these genera, seem to have re-
ceived an often indifferent attention, it is
desirable to review them.
Arthronomalus, 1844. (10, p. 193. Proposed
without mention of included species.) Newport
proposed a number of genera without stating
specifically which species each should include.
However, none of these is a nomen nudum, for
each was accompanied by a brief key-diagnosis.
The first species were assigned to Arthronomalus
by Newport in 1845 (72, p. 430). Seven in num-
ber, they included Geophilus longicornis Leach,
1815, which was subsequently designated the
genotype by O. F. Cook in 1895 (8, p. 74).
Apparently Newport distinguished between
Arthronomalus and Geophilus chiefly on the basis
of cephalic proportions and shape,? a practice
which neither was unique to him nor was to
stop with him, for as late as the 1880’s Jerome
MeNeill and C. H. Bollman utilized often the
same criteria in other geophilomorph categories.
It was not until the mandibular and maxillary
criteria had been disclosed that any real insight
into the higher categories was gained.
Since the genotype of Arthronomalus today is
regarded as a congener of electricus Linné, 1758,
the type species of Geophilus Leach, 1814, the
two are subjective synonyms, Geophilus of course
having priority.
Branchiostoma, 1845. (12, p. 411. Proposed
with four species.) This genus is the junior
homonym of Branchiostoma Costa, which was
proposed in 1834 for the reception of a cephalo-
chordate. In 1893 Bollman suggested that
Rhysida Wood, 1862, ought to be used instead
(1, p. 171).
1In this connection I am deeply indebted to
Mr. Francis Hemming, secretary of the Interna-
tional Commission on Zoological Nomenclature,
for his generous assistance in discovering the true
dates of publication of the 1844 and 1845 works.
See References 10, 11, and 12.)
2 Viz, Arthronomalus, ‘‘Segmentum cephalicum
subquadraticum, angulis rotundatis,’’ as against
Geophilus, ‘“‘Segmentum cephalicum parvum,
breve, subtriangulare, antice angustatum, postice
dilatatum transversum... .”
344
Cormocephalus, 1844. (10, p. 193. Proposed
without mention of included species.) In 1845
Newport assigned the first 13 species to his genus
(12, p. 419). Of these, rubriceps was subsequently
designated genotype by Pocock in 1891 (23,
p. 229).
Gonibregmatus, 1848. (8, p. 180. Proposed with
one species.) Only cwmingii Newport was origi-
nally included in the genus; it is therefore the
genotype by monotypy.
Henacops, 1844. (10, p. 192. Proposed without
mention of included species.) Newport rede-
scribed the genus in 1845 (12, p. 372), adding
two new species, one of which was maculatus.
Pocock subsequently designated this the geno-
type in 1901 (14, p. 451).
Heterostoma, 1844. (10, p. 198. Proposed with-
out mention of included species.) The Newport
name was preoccupied by an 1837 trematode
genus, Heterostoma De Filippi. Many of the
species assigned the Newport genus, today are
referred to Ethmostigmus Pocock.
Mecistocephalus, 1848. (8, pp. 177, 178. Pro-
posed with five species.) One of the initial inclu-
sions, punctifrons, was subsequently designated
genotype by R. V. Chamberlin in 1914 (2, p. 61).
O. F. Cook’s action of 1895, the selection of
Geophilus attenuatus Say, 1821, as the type, is
of course invalid, inasmuch as this name was
not among those originally referred to the genus.
It seems clear from this that Cook did not regard
it important that a genotype be a charter mem-
ber of a genus.
His paper of 1895 bears careful study. First,
he reasoned that Say’s nebulous attenwatus could
not be Geophilus (=Arenophilus) bipuncticeps
Wood, 1862, as Bollman had believed, and then
that the Say species must be conspecific both
with Pachymerium ferrugineum (C. L. Koch),
1847 and with Geophilus (=Arciogephilus) fulvus
(Wood), 1862. Actually, in lieu of the type, and
working only from the origmal description, no
one can be certain today of the identity of the
Say species. I am inclined to agree with Boll-
man’s point of view, to equate it provisionally
with bipuncticeps.
Next, having decided that attenuatus, ferru-
gineum, and fulvus were all conspecific, and that
the first should be the genotype of Mecistocepha-
lus, Cook attempted to resolve the matter in the
following way, “This disposition leaves the
species hitherto called Mecistocephalus in need
of a generic name... ,’’ thereupon presenting
as new Dicellophilus, Lamnonyx, and Megethmus.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 10
Necrophloeophagus, 1848. (8, pp. 178, 180.
Proposed as a subgenus of Geophilus, with one
species.) Originally Newport included a single
species, longicornis Leach, 1815, within WNe-
crophloeophagus; therefore the genus is mono- '
basic, and longicornis is its type.
Inasmuch as the same species is also the type
of Arthronomalus (q.v.), the two genera are ob-
jective synonyms, WNecrophloeophagus having
priority. In addition, their genotype presently
is considered congeneric with that of Geophilus,
so that they are junior subjective synonyms of
the Leach genus.*
IT am not altogether convinced that longicornis
and electricus belong in the same subgenus, for
the former exhibits certain features that are
more reminiscent of, say, Arenophilus spp. or
even of the American Geophilus varians McNeill
than of a typical Geophilus. I believe that a
subgeneric division of Geophilus is feasible, but
only desirable if it can be based upon the known
world fauna, rather than upon the extremes of a
restricted fauna which seems to characterize the
attempts to date. Such a revision probably would
involve a subgeneric distinction between longi-
cornis and electricus im which Necrophloeophagus
would be available for use.
Rhombocephalus, 1844. (10, p. 198. Proposed
without mention of included species.) The earli-
est assignment of species to this genus was that
of 1845 (12, p. 425, 426), when its author de-
scribed the following as new: viridifrons, gambiae,
parvus, politus, and brevis. As usual, none was
selected as type. At different times toward the
end of the century Pocock states Scolopendra
cingulata Latreille, 1829, or S. morsitans Linné,
1758, to be the genotype. But since neither of
these names was among those first assigned the
genus in 1845, neither was available for subse-
quent designation (see Bull. Zool. Nomencl., 4:
179-180, 1950, Conel. 69 (38) (a); p. 348, Conel.
31 (b)). Therefore I designate Rhombocephalus
viridifrons Newport as the type-species, and
inasmuch as viridifrons (=cingulata) is conge-
neric with the type of Scolopendra, i.e. morsitans
Linné, the Newport genus becomes a junior sub-
jective synonym of the Linnaean.
3 The year of the proposal of Geophilus is gen-
erally given incorrectly, as is the identity of its
true genotype (which is not carpophagus Leach,
1815). The genus was first presented in the obscure
Brewster’s Edinburgh Encyclopaedia of 1814
(5, p. 409) and originally included only Scolopendra
(=Geophilus) electrica Linné, 1758, which is thus
its type species by monotypy.-
OcToBER 1957
Scolopocryptops, 1844. (11, p. 275. Proposed
without included species.) In 1845 the first five
species were assigned the genus by Newport (22,
p. 405), and according to the present regulations
of the I.C.Z.N. (see reference above under
Rhombocephalus), the type would have to be
selected from that group. The earliest designa-
tion of a genotype was accordingly that of Lucas
in 1849 (7, p. 444). His choice was Scolopocryptops
melanostoma Newport, 1845, which means that
since this species is congeneric with sexspinosa
Say, 1821, and with rubiginosa L. Koch, 1878,
all must bear the Newport name (and not that
of its junior synonym Otocryptops Haase, 1887).
From this it also follows that miersiz Newport
and its congeners required a new name, to which
end Dinocryptops Crabill was proposed in 1953
(4, p. 96).
Theatops, 1844. (10, p. 193. Proposed without
mention of included species.) Newport relegated
the first species to Theatops in 1845 (12, p. 409).
His action fixed Cryptops postica Say, 1821,
automatically as the type-species (by subse-
quent monotypy).
Following is a nomenclatorial abstract of the
foregoing: for details of pagination, etc., see the
preceding discussions.
Arthronomalus, 1844. (10, p. 193.) [=Geophiius
Leach, 1814.]
Genotype: Geophilus longicornis Leach, 1815.
Fixation: By subsequent designation of Cook,
1895.
Branchiostoma, 1845. (12,p. 411.)
A junior homonym of Branchiostoma Costa
(Cephalochordata); replaced by Rhysida
Wood, 1862.
Cormocephalus, 1844. (10, p. 193.)
Genotype: Cormocephalus rubriceps Newport,
1845.
Fixation: By subsequent designation of Po-
cock, 1891.
Geophilus Leach, 1814. (5, p. 409.)
Genotype: Scolopendra (=Geophilus) electrica
Linné, 1758.
Fixation: Monotypy.
Gonibregmatus, 1848. (8, p. 180.)
Genotype: Gonibregmatus cumingit Newport,
1843.
Fixation: Monotypy.
Henicops, 1844. (10, p. 192.)
Genotype: Henicops maculatus Newport, 1845.
Fixation: By subsequent designation of Po-
cock, 1901.
Heterostoma, 1844. (10, p. 193.)
A junior homonym of Heterostoma De Filippi
CRABILL: NEWPORT
CHILOPOD GENERA 345
(Trematoda); replaced in part by EHthmo-
stigmus Pocock, 1891.
Mecistocephalus, 1848. (8, pp. 177, 178.)
Genotype: Mecistocephalus punctifrons New-
port, 1848.
Fixation: By subsequent designation of Cham-
berlin, 1914.
Necrophloeophagus, 1843. (8, pp. 178, 180.) [=Ge-
ophilus Leach, 1814.]
Genotype: Geophilus longicornis Leach, 1815.
Fixation: Monotypy.
Rhombocephalus, 1844. (10,p. 193.) [=Scclopendra
Linné, 1758.)
Genotype: Rhombocephalus viridifrons New-
port, 1845.
Fixation: By present designation.
Scolopocryptops, 1844. (11, p. 275.)
Genotype: Scolopocryptops melanostoma New-
port, 1845.
Fixation: By subsequent designation of Lucas,
1849.
Theatops, 1844. (10, p. 193.)
Genotype: Cryptops postica Say, 1821.
[=Theatops postica (Say).]
Fixation: By subsequent monotypy.
REFERENCES
(1) Bouirman, C. H. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 46:
1-210. 1893.
(2) CHamBERLIN, R. V. Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool. 58(3) : 151-221. 1914.
(3) Coox,O.F. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 18: 59-62.
1895.
(4) Crapity, R. E. Ent. News 64(4): 96. 1953.
(5) Leacu, W. E. Brewster’s Edinburgh En-
cyclopaedia 7 (2) : 408-409. 1814.
. Trans. Linn. Soc. London 11: 381-
386. 1815. .
(7) Lucas, H. Dict. d’Hist. Nat. 11: 444. 1849.
(8) Newport, G. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 10:
177-181. 1843. [Volume labeled 1842, but
issued in February 1843.]
(9) Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 11: 498-502.
1843. [Issued in July 1848, this article is an
exact duplicate of the preceding. ]
(10) . Proce. Linn. Soc. London 1(20): 191-
196. 1844 [May].
(11) . Trans. Linn. Soc. London 19: 265-
302. 1844 |after May]. [Included in the
volume labeled 1845, but actually issued
sometime after May, during 1844.]
(12) Trans. Linn. Soc. London 19: 349-
439. 1845. [According to the librarian of the
Linnaean Society, fide Hemming, volume
19, nominally of 1845, was in fact issued as
follows: Part I, pp. 1-80, 1842; Part II, pp.
81-170, 1843; Part III, pp. 171-302, 1844;
Part IV, pp. 303-537, 1845.]
(13) Pocock, R. I. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 7(6):
221-231. 1891.
(14) Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 7(8) : 451-463.
1901.
346
ZOOLOGY .—A redescription of two parasitic copepods from Bermuda.! Harry C. |
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO.
10
YrEATMAN, University of the South. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received June 20, 1957)
When investigating the littoral and neritic
copepods of Bermuda during July and
August 1955, I became interested in the
apparent scarcity of parasitic copepods on
fishes observed. A preliminary collection of
2 squirrelfishes, Holocentrus ascensionis (Os-
beck); 1 hamlet, Epinephelus — striatus
(Bloch); 4 gray snappers, Lutianus griseus
(Linnaeus); 7 breams, Dzplodus argenteus
(Cuvier and Valenciennes); and 1 chub,
Kyphosus sectatrix (Linnaeus) was exam-
ined for parasitic Crustacea. The last three
species carried an abundance of parasitic
isopods, H.xocirolana mayana (Ives), but
none was infested with copepods. These
isopods have been sent to the U.S. National
Museum (99587). Wilson (1913) found that
isopods were quite abundant and that para-
sitie copepods were few on the fish he ex-
amined at Jamaica, B.W.I.
On August 17, 1955, David Menzel, a
graduate student at the University of
Michigan, collected 2 female copepods from
a tiger rockfish or gag, Mycteroperca tigris
(Cuvier and Valenciennes), taken off North
Rock, Bermuda. These were given to me
and proved to be perfect specimens of
Dentigryps curtus Wilson. These differed
from Wilson’s (1913) original description
chiefly in the armature of the feet and cau-
dal rami. Through the kindness of the Di-
vision of Marine Invertebrates of the U. 8.
National Museum, I was able to examine
the type specimen and two paratype speci-
mens, and these showed by the presence of
attachment bases that some prominent
setae had been broken off.
It is very desirable to redescribe a species
if the original specimens were incomplete in
structure, and even more desirable if there is
danger that someone will describe a complete
specimen of this species as a new species.
This has been done many times in the past.
Taxonomic literature is already overcrowded
with synonyms.
232 from the Bermuda
1 Contribution no.
Biological Station.
Specimens of Lepeophtheirus dissimulatus
Wilson were also lent by the U.S. National
Museum. This species is redescribed here
because of its rather close resemblance to -
the complete specimens of Dentigryps curtus.
I was unable to obtain specimens at
Bermuda.
Wilson (1936) found a single specimen of
Caligus curtus Muller in a deep-water
plankton haul made by Dr. William Beebe
at Bermuda. There is no other Bermuda
record of this species, but it may occur
there on deep-water fishes even though its
common hosts, cod, hake, haddock, pollack,
halibut, and barn-door skate, have not been
reported from Bermuda.
These three species are the only ones re-
ported from Bermuda. I did see a copepod
taken from a shark, but unfortunately it
was not obtained for examination.
The author wishes to express thanks to
David Menzel for the specimens of Dentz-
gryps curtus, to Dr. Fenner A. Chace, Jr.,
and Dr. Thomas E. Bowman of the U. 8.
National Museum for the loan of type
specimens and literature, to Dr. William
H. Sutcliffe, Jr., director of the Bermuda
Biological Station, for the privileges of the
laboratory and many courtesies. He also
wishes to thank the National Science Foun-
dation and the University of the South Re-
search Fund Committee for financial aid in
the study of certain groups of copepods of
which this investigation is only a small part.
Dentigryps curtus C. B. Wilson (1913), new
description
Figs. 1-16
Specimens examined—One mature female
(type specimen, U.S.N.M. 43595) collected from
mouth of yellow-finned grouper, Mycteroperca
venenosa apua (Bloch) by Dr. Edwin Linton,
Bermuda Islands, July 27, 1903.
Two mature females (paratypes, U.S.N.M.
42328) collected from Mycteroperca v. apua by
Louis L. Mowbray, Bermuda Islands, July 27,
1903.
OcTOBER 1957
Two mature females (U.S.N.M. 100899) col-
lected from tiger rockfish or gag, Wycteroperca
(Cuvier and Valenciennes), taken off
‘tigris
North Rock, Bermuda, at a depth of 30 fathoms
by David Menzel, August 17, 1955. Identified by
H. C. Yeatman.
Description of female—Length 2.85 to 3.60
YEATMAN: PARASITIC
2
COPEPODS 347
mm, not including terminal setae of caudal
rami. General body form elliptical. The widely
truncated posterior margin of the genital seg-
ment gives the appearance that some of the
posterior body is missing. Carapace is about as
wide as long and much longer than the remainder
of the body. Grooving of the carapace as in Fig.
a ai
0.1mm.
Fias. 1-16.—Dentigryps curtus C. B. Wilson: 1, Female, dorsal view; 2, genital segment and abdomen,
ventral view; 3, right caudal ramus, dorsal view; 4, second antenna; 5, lateral hook; 6, mouth tube; 7,
mandible; 8, right first maxilla; 9, furca from two different specimens; 10, second maxilla; 11, maxil-
liped; 12, first leg; 13, second leg; 14, third leg; 15, fourth leg; 16, fifth leg, dorsal view. (Figs. 3, 13, and
14 drawn to same scale. Figures 4-6, 8-12, 15, and 16 drawn to same scale.)
oO
res
oa)
1. Frontal plates are without lunules and are
well developed. Eyes fairly small and anteriorly
placed. In none of the specimens I have examined
are the eyes as large and round as Wilson (1913)
shows in his figure 127.
Fourth and fifth body segments fused with the
genital segment and all three covered by a single
dorsal plate, which is as wide as the thoracic
portion of the carapace. This character enables
this species to be distinguished from Lepeoph-
thetrus dissimulatus at a glance (see below).
Posterior border of genital segment is widely
truncated and bears at its posteriolateral corners
a small inner knob, a larger middle knob, and a
very large outer conical prong. These prongs
are somewhat more ventral than are the knobs.
They represent the fifth legs and their armature
is described below.
The single abdominal segment is attached to
the posteroventral surface of the genital segment
(Fig. 2) and is about 119 times as long as wide.
Its posterolateral corners protrude posteriorly.
Caudal rami are about three times as long as the
width at the middle. The distal end is noticeably
wider than the base. The inner distal margins
are hairy. Wilson (1913) described and drew
three terminal setae on each ramus, but the
type and paratype specimens show by attach-
ment bases that 3 more appendages belong on
ach. My undamaged specimens show one outer
subterminal spine, one subterminal dorsal seta
and four terminal setae on each ramus (Fig. 3).
Keg strings resemble those of Lepeophtheirus
dissimulatus (see below).
First antennae short and armed as in Fig. 1.
Second antennae stout and composed of two
well-defined segments. The terminal end bent
abruptly near its end to form a claw.
A lateral prehensile hook is present posterior to
each second antenna. This hook is shghtly
curved medially and lacks any appendages. This
hook, found in the Caligidae, was earlier wrongly
described by Wilson (1905) as the first maxilla.
He corrected the error before he described this
species, but some fairly recent descriptions of
specimens of Caligidae have copied his early
mistakes.
Mouth tube is short and blunt and its details
of structure are difficult to see without dissection
mandible with about eight or nine teeth.
First maxillae are undivided, almost straight
prongs and are posterolateral to the mouth tube.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, no. 10
Second maxillae are 2-jointed; the second
joint longer and more slender than the first and
armed distally with two terminal setae and one
subterminal spine. These setae, unlike the spine,
are separated from the segment by a distinct
joint.
Manillipeds are stout. The terminal claw bears
a small spine on its inner margin.
The furca consists of two smooth prongs and a
base that may or may not be marked with
circular striations. The caudal rami of free-living
copepods are sometimes called furcal rami. The
furca of parasitic copepods is not to be confused
with the caudal rami.
First legs consist of a basal segment bearing a
short spine and a two-segmented exopod. The
proximal segment bears a short comb of small
setae near its distal end. The second segment is
armed with three spines and one seta at its
distal end and three lateral setae.
Second legs with 3-segmented exopod and
endopod and armed as in Fig. 13.
Third legs as in Fig. 14. Terminal segment of
exopod is armed with nine appendages (spines
and setae), not six as in Wilson’s (1913) figure
133. Terminal segment of endopod is armed with
six appendages, not four.
Fourth legs consist of only one slender ramus.
Basal segment bears a seta or spine near the
distal end. Second and third segments bear a
terminal spine each, and fourth segment with
three distal spines.
The fifth legs were described by Wilson (1913)
as being “perfectly smooth” and “cut off ob-
liquely at the tips.’’ In one of his females he
found ‘a single, long, non-plumose spine near
the tip of each prong.’’ His drawings show no
appendages attached to this prong. A quick
glance at the fifth legs of my undamaged speci-
mens would make an examiner think that here
was a new species within the genus Dentigryps.
Wilson, however, overlooked some of the small
setae that are actually present in his type speci-
men. The other missing appendages (spines and
setae) indicate their former presence by their
attachment bases. A dorsal view of an undamaged
fifth lee shows a short dorsolateral seta on a
small papilla near the base of the long, distinct
segment. The long segment bears one short,
straight seta attached just beyond the middle
and a shorter curved seta between it and the
oblique end. A long smooth spine is attached to
OcToBER 1957
the proximal portion of the slanting end of the
segment (Fig. 16).
The male as yet remains unknown. More ex-
tensive collecting and examination of the groupers
around Bermuda will undoubtedly obtain this
YEATMAN: PARASITIC COPEPODS
349
Islands on yellow-
venenosa
Distribulton.—Bermuda
finned grouper, Mycteroperca
(Bloch) and tiger rockfish or gag, Mycteroperca
tigris (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Dry Tortugas, Fla., on yellow-finned grouper,
apua
missing sex. M. v. apua.
22
a
2
CAT
Fries. 17-31.—Lepeophtheirus dissimulatus C. B. Wilson: 17, Female, dorsal view; 18, genital segment,
egg sacs, and abdomen, ventral view; 19, male, dorsal view (after Wilson, 1905); 20, second antenna of
female; 21, second antenna of male (after Wilson, 1905); 22, lateral hook; 23, first maxillae from two
different specimens; 24, second maxilla; 25, furea from two different specimens; 26, maxilliped; 27, first
leg; 28, second leg; 29, third leg; 30, fourth leg; 31, fifth leg, ventral view. (Figs. 20, 22-28, and 30 drawn
to same scale. Figs. 29 and 31 drawn to same scale.)
350
Lepeophtheirus dissimulatus C. B. Wilson (1905),
new description
Figs. 17-31
Specimens examined.—Three mature females,
U.S.N.M. 42073. Collected by E. Linton July 11,
1903, from red grouper, Hpinephelus morio
(Cuvier and Valenciennes), Bermuda Islands.
Identified by C. B. Wilson.
One mature female, U.S.N.M. 42276. From
gills of yellow-finned grouper, Mycteroperca
venenosa apua (Bloch), Bermuda Islands, Sep-
tember 27, 1903. Identified by C. B. Wilson.
Description of female—Length 2.40 to 3.54
mm, not including terminal setae of caudal rami.
Carapace as wide as long or slightly longer and
much longer than the remainder of the body.
Grooving of carapace as in Fig. 17. Frontal
plates well developed and without lunules. Eyes
small and anteriorly placed. Free thoracic seg-
ment short and more than a third as wide as
genital segment.
Genital segment more or less spherical. Its
posterior margin bears two small medial projec-
tions and 2 conspicuous lateral projections which
represent the fifth legs (see below).
The single abdominal segment small and at-
tached to the posteroventral surface of the genital
segment. Caudal rami about twice as long as
wide and armed with 4 fairly long terminal setae.
It is possible that a fifth seta is present and has
been broken off. If so, its attachment base is
very difficult to see. The posterior inner margins
of these caudal rami are hairy.
Egg strings are long and wide and are attached
at points dorsolateral to the abdomen; 15 to 30
eggs are present in each string.
First antennae of two segments and armed as
in Hig. 17.
Second antennae of two segments with a
strongly curved terminal hook. These segments
bear neither spines nor setae.
Lateral prehensile hooks, which were wrongly
called first maxillae by Wilson (1905), are small
and not armed with setae.
First maxillae are conspicuous, slightly im-
wardly curved spines.
Second maxillae are elongate and consist of
two segments. The basal segment is wider but
shorter than the terminal segment. The distal
end of the second segment is armed with two
long terminal setae which are jointed at their
bases and a shorter curved subterminal spine
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO.
10
which is not separated from its segment by a
joint.
Furca with branches slightly laterally inclined.
Branches are slightly more than half the fureal
length and may or may not bear a slight wing
or thin ridge on their outer margins.
Maxillipeds consist of two segments, the
distal, hooklike segment is shorter than the
proximal and not armed with setae or spines.
First legs consist of a basal segment bearing a
short unjointed spine and a 2-segmented exopod.
The terminal segment bears three spines and one
seta at its distal end and three lateral setae.
Second legs with 3-segmented exopod and
endopod and armed as in Fig. 28.
Third legs as in Fig. 29. Terminal segment of
exopod is usually armed with nine appendages
(setae and/or spines) instead of the five that
Wilson (1905) shows in his figure 271. Terminal
segment of endopod is armed with five append-
ages as Wilson shows.
Fourth legs consist of only one ramus. Basal
segment with a small spine or seta on outer
margin near distal end. Second and third seg-
ments with a terminal spine each, and fourth
segment with three distal appendages.
Fifth legs, mentioned above, are not separated
from the genital segment by a joint. There is a
lateral seta on a tiny papilla and a subterminal
seta and two lateral setae on a much larger
papilla.
Description of male—Length about 2.5 mm.
Similar to female, but with free thoracic segment
about as wide as genital segment which is squarely
truncated posteriorly.
Second antennae longer than in female and
branched (Fig. 21).
Fifth legs as in female, but more anteriorly
placed and apparently lacking the outer seta.
Sixth legs consist of a pair of papillae, one at
posterolateral margin of genital segment on each
side. This papilla is armed with three spines.
Distribution.—Charles Island, Galapagos Is-
lands, on white-spotted serranus, Hpinephelus
labriformis.
Bermuda Islands on Nassau grouper, Hpt-
nephelus striatus (Bloch); red grouper, Epi-
nephelus (Cuvier Valenciennes) ;
yellow-finned Mycteroperca venenosa
apua (Bloch).
Dry Tortugas, Fla., on the smooth trunkfish,
Lactophrys triqueter (Linnaeus).
morto and
grouper,
OcToBER 1957 YEATMAN:
DISCUSSION OF SCARCITY OF COPEPOD
PARASITES ON BERMUDA FISHES
Only the two above redescribed species of
copepods have been reported from Bermuda
fishes, and, as mentioned above, another
species, Caligus curtus, was collected in a
plankton net. Without checking collecting
data and the environmental condititions, one
is tempted to ask whether they are really
searce and, if so, why are they scarce? Per-
haps the proper species of fishes have not
been examined or are not present at Ber-
muda. Some species are commonly infested
with copepods and others rarely, if ever,
earry copepods. Sharks and rays nearly
always carry parasitic copepods. The former
are not particularly common at Bermuda,
and only occasional specimens of rays con-
sisting of two species have been reported.
Next, one asks whether there are common
species of fishes at Bermuda that are re-
ported to be hosts of copepods at other
localities.
Perhaps insufficient numbers of fishes
have been examined. A. 8. Pearse (1951)
examined 368 fishes of 73 species at Bimini,
Bahamas. Of these, 171 individuals of 23
species carried 290 copepods, but 140 fishes
of 50 species carried none.
Perhaps the Bermuda fishes are examined
too late after capture and by inexperienced
copepod collectors. A good many parasitic
copepods, especially those of the families
Caligidae and Argulidae, will crawl off a
dying fish and escape into the surrounding
water or into the bottom of a boat or fishbox.
Of course, a collector should be able to recog-
nize parasitic copepods and look for them
in the proper parts of the fish.
Edwin Linton (1905) spent July and
August of 1901 and 1902 at Beaufort, N. C.,
examining 2,051 fishes of 59 species for all
types of parasites. Of these, 17 species of 16
genera were carrying parasitic copepods.
Some of these fishes were heavily infested
with copepods.
In July and August 1903, Linton (1907)
examined 263 fishes of 53 species at Ber-
muda. Of these, 130 fishes of 20 species have
been proved to be hosts of parasitic copepods
PARASITIC COPEPODS
dol
at Beaufort, N. C.; the Dry Tortugas, Fla.;
Bimini, Bahama Islands; and Montego Bay,
Jamaica (see bibliography). Two of these
fishes carried two copepods each—a total of
4 copepods from 263 fishes examined by a
man experienced in finding copepods and
other parasites.
Most copepods which are parasitic on
fishes do not confine their preference to a
particular species but may be found on any
species within a genus, or on any species
within a family, or even on rather unrelated
species of fish. Collecting records are full of
evidence to substantiate this. If genera in-
stead of species of fishes are counted, Lin-
ton’s Bermuda catch included 193 fishes of
24 genera which contain proved hosts of
copepods.
Many authors simply list the fish hosts
which harbor copepod parasites and omit
those which are free of such. Nevertheless,
these lists furnish useful information for
comparison purposes.
C. B. Wilson (1913) at Jamaica listed 26
species of fishes from which he obtained
copepods in 1910. Of these, 19 are found
at Bermuda and many are common. Of the
7 species not found at Bermuda, 6 of their
genera are represented.
Wilson (1935) examined collections of
parasitic copepods secured from Dr. H. W.
Manter and Dr. O. L. Williams at the Dry
Tortugas, Fla. Of the 30 species of fishes
found infected with parasitic copepods, 19
are reported from Bermuda and 6 of these
are of rare occurrence. Eleven are not pres-
ent in Bermuda, but the genera of four of
these are represented. In other words, 13 of
these species are common in Bermuda and
should yield copepods.
A. S. Pearse (1951) listed 23 species of
copepods infesting fishes at Bimini Bahamas.
Of these, 17 species are found at Bermuda
plus two genera represented by different
species.
The above information indicates that the
proper copepod hosts are present at Ber-
muda, but that examination of more speci-
mens is very desirable. Emphasis should be
on examination of the jolthead porgy,
Calamus bajanado (Bloch and Schneider);
the great barracuda, Sphyraena barracuda
302
(Shaw); and species of sharks, snappers,
groupers, puffers, and mullets which usually
carry many copepods.
The possibility of undesirable environ-
mental conditions should be considered if
future extensive collecting proves that
parasitic copepods are as scarce as they now
appear to be.
Wilson (1905) stated that copepods of
the family Caligidae are quickly killed by a
rise of a few degrees in temperature and that
A. Scott gives 16° C. as the upper limit for
Lepeophthetrus pectoralis. Experiment has
shown that other species do not differ much
from this, some having upper tolerance
limits of 18° or 20° C. This susceptibility to
warm water may limit the distribution of
these copepods to cool waters either at
considerable depths or at higher latitudes.
Most of the shallow water at Bermuda is
considerably above 20° C., and it is notable
that most of the copepod-infested groupers
at Bermuda were caught in fairly deep
water. My two specimens of Dentigryps
curtus were collected by D. Menzel from a
gag taken at a depth of 30 fathoms.
One theory concerning the scarcity of
parasitic copepods on Bermuda fishes holds
that many of the planktonic nauplius stages
are carried away from Bermuda by the cur-
rents before they can reach the stage which
attaches to host fish.
As mentioned above, the isopod Hxociro-
lana mayana (Ives) commonly _ infests
groupers, Shappers, breams, and chubs at
Bermuda. Why are these common and par-
asitic copepods rare on Bermuda fishes? The
answer may be concerned with the differ-
ences in life histories of the two groups, or
with differences in physiological require-
ments, or with both. The larval stages
(nauplii) of parasitic copepods may be more
planktonic than the larval stages of this
species of isopod. If so, there is more chance
that the former will be carried away by
ocean currents.
As mentioned above, many species of
parasitic copepods cannot tolerate high
temperatures, and thus their distribution
may be limited to the cool water outside the
encircling reefs. Consequently they may be
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO.
10
subjected to more currents which tend to
sweep the larvae away.
Boden (1952) found that salinities and
temperatures in the Bermuda ‘“‘lagoon”’ were
consistently higher than in outside waters in
the summer. He shows that the currents
within this lagoon become cooled by contact
with the cold ocean water at the platform
margins and thus sink and return to the
lagoon instead of flowing out to be carried
away, mixed with oceanic currents. This
effectively conserves much of the insular
plankton in the summer when reproductive
activities of most marine organisms are at
their maximum.
Plankton volumes were consistently higher
within the lagoon than at the outer stations.
If some parasitic copepod species are con-
fined to the outer cool water by temperature
barriers, their chances of becoming numerous
are much less than if they were able to live
and reproduce within the lagoon.
My specimens of isopods were collected
in relatively warm bays which are fairly
calm even during storms. Whether or not
these isopods can tolerate cold or deep water
conditions has not been determined.
Finally, the possibility of excessive pre-
dation on parasitic copepods must be con-
sidered. Beebe and other observers, includ-
ing myself, have observed the butterflyfish,
Chaeton capistratus Linnaeus, eating crus-
tacean parasites from the sides and from
inside the mouths of gray snappers, Lutianus
griseus (Linnaeus). These butterflyfishes are
common about the harbors and inner reefs
of Bermuda. There is some evidence that
parasitic isopods which commonly infest
Bermuda fish may eat copepod parasites of
fishes. Some are very voracious and will even
bite a collector’s hand.
LITERATURE CITED
Beese, WriitrAM, and TrEpn-Van, Joun. Field
book of the shore fishes of Bermuda. G. P.
Putnam’s Sons, New York and London, 1933.
BopEN, Brian P. Natural conservation of insular
plankton. Nature 169: 697. 1952.
BrREDER, CHARLES M., Jr. Mield book of marine
fishes of the Atlantic coast. G. P. Putnam’s
Sons, New York and London, 1948.
Linton, Epwin. Parasites of fishes of Beaufort,
OcroBER 1957 YEATMAN:
N.C. Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. for 1904; 321-
428. 1905.
Notes on the parasites of Bermuda fishes.
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 33: 85-126. 1907.
PEARSE, A. Parasitic Crustacea from Bimini,
Bahamas. Proce. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 101: 341-372.
1951.
RicHarpson, HARRIET.
of North America. U. 8.
i-li, 1-727. 1905.
Wixtson, CuHartes Brancu. North American
parasitic copepods belonging to the family
Caligidae. Part. 1—The Caliginae. Proc. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 28: 479-672. 1905.
Monograph on the isopods
Nat. Mus. Bull. 54:
PARASITIC COPEPODS
308
——. North American parasitic copepods: New
genera and species of Caliginae. Proc. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 33: 593-627. 1908.
Crustacean parasites of West Indian fishes
and land crabs, with description of new genera
and species. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 44: 189-277.
1913.
Parasitic copepods from the Dry Tortugas.
Pap. Tortugas Lab. 29: Carnegie Inst. Wash-
ington Publ. 452: 327-347. 1935.
Plankton of the Bermuda Oceanographic
Expeditions IV. Notes on Copepoda. Zoologica
21: 89-93. 1936.
SS BO
ENTOMOLOGY IN WORLD WAR II
Since the start of World War II man has gone
far toward the conquest of an enemy in some ways
more vicious than any human foe—the insect.
More than a million-and-a-half American soldiers
were put out of action—many permanently—by
insect-transmitted diseases during the progress
of hostilities. Deaths in some areas exceeded those
from wounds and accidents.
The story of the remarkable progress during
the war, when balance of battle several times de-
pended on beating the disease-carrying insects
as well as Japanese or Germans, is told by Col.
Emory C. Cushing, U.S. A., Ret., ina publication
prepared under the general direction of a com-
mittee of the Entomological Society of Americ
and the American Association of Economic
Entomologists and recently issued by the
Smithsonian Institution. Some of the victories,
Colonel Cushing points out, probably represent
permanent gains. Others may be temporary
as insects adjust to the new weapons forged
under the stress of emergency. Unfortunately,
most of the gains came too late during the war
itself to prevent an enormous amount of suffering
and disablement.
Greatest offender of the insect-transmitted
maladies was dysentery. This appears to have
been the case in most major wars since those of
Greeks and Egyptians before the Christian era.
Easily second was the even more disabling ma-
laria. The enemy, of course, suffered just asmuch.
Malaria outbreaks were the major reason for
German abandonment of both Corsica and
Sardinia with hardly a shot fired, Colonel Cush-
ing points out.
Much of the fight was carried on by entomolo-
gists at the Orlando, Fla., and Beltsville, Md.,
stations of the Department of Agriculture’s
Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine.
Effective insect repellents and killers were de-
veloped, but, since the problem had received little
attention until the actual outbreak of war, some
of these came too late to help. One difficulty was
that new kinds of insect disease carriers, with
which the researchers had no previous experience,
constantly were appearing. It was only near the
end of hostilities that the general fly, louse, and
mosquito insecticide, DDT, could be supplied to
troops in sufficient quantities.
That needs often were urgent is illustrated by
Colonel Cushing with accounts of some little-
known war incidents. For example, he quotes
from a report:
The men at the front in New Guinea were per-
haps the most wretched looking soldiers ever to
wear the American uniform. They were gaunt and
thin, with deep black circles under their sunken
eyes. ... Many of them fought for days with fevers
and didn’t know it... . Malaria, dengue fever, and
dysentery, and in a few cases typhus, hit man after
man. There was hardly a soldier amongst the
thousands who went into the jungle who did not
come down with some kind of fever at least once.
Sand flies, with which American entomologists
generally were unfamiliar before the war, might
have cost victory in Sicily. “In the battle for
Sicily,” Colonel Cushing recounts, ‘31,158
soldiers were killed; Phlebotomus [the sand fly]
put several thousand more out of action at a
time when all available manpower was sorely
needed for the invasion of Italy. From the
Sicilian hills the sand flies welcomed the new-
comers by pumping dose after dose of papatacci
fever into their nonresistant bodies. Within a
short week after the initial landing hundreds of
men with the new and unfamiliar disease filled
the hospitals. Unrecognized by the Army medical
officers, many of these cases were considered to
be simply relapses of malaria contracted in
North Africa and entered on the hospital records
as ‘f.u.o.’ (fever of unknown origin).”’
354
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 10
ZOOLOGY .—A new polychaetous annelid of the family Paraonidae from the North
Atlantic.! Martan H. Perripone, University of New Hampshire. (Communi-
cated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received June 20, 1957)
In working over some of the uncatalogued
polychaete material in the United States
National Museum, some specimens belong-
ing to an undescribed species of Paraonidae
were found. They were dredged by the
Albatross in the North Atlantic in 1883 and
1884.
Family Paraonrpak Cerruti
(Levinseniidae Mesnil and Caullery)
Genus Aricidea Webster, 1879
Type.—Aricidea fragilis Webster, 1879 (by
monotypy).
Diagnosis —Body long, slender, with numer-
ous segments. Prostomium subconical, with
dorsal median antenna and pair of nuchal organs.
First or buccal segment achaetous, more or less
fused with prostomium. Parapodia biramous,
lacking distinct setal lobes, with simple smooth
capillary setae, with conical to filiform postsetal
notopodial lobes (sometimes referred to as dorsal
cirri) and with or without postsetal neuropodial
lobes (sometimes referred to as ventral cirri) on
some anterior segments. Branchiae simple,
paired, straplike, dorsal to notopodia, vbsent
from few anterior segments (3-4) and from a
long posterior region (9-60 pairs of branchiae).
Anal cirri 8, filiform. Anterior end of digestive
tube evaginable as a cylindrical or feebly
lobed proboscis.
Subgenus Aricidea s. str.
Diagnosis—With only capillary setae in
notopodia, without modified acicular setae in
some posterior segments. With or without modi-
fied setae (crotchets, acicular setae or setae with
mucronate tips) in posterior neuropodia.
Aricidea (Aricidea) albatrossae, n. sp.
Fig. 1, a-f
? Aricidea fragilis McIntosh, 1885, p. 354, pl. 48,
figs. 4, 5, pl. 22 A, fig. 18; not Webster, 1879.
The species is known from 14 specimens, all
incomplete posteriorly, dredged in mud and ooze
1This study was aided by a grant from the
National Science Foundation (NSF-G 2012).
at four Albatross stations in the deep North
Atlantic. The types (U.S.N.M. 28638, 28639)
were taken at Albatross station 2018; May 7,
1883; 37° 12’ N., 74° 20’ W., 788 fathoms, blue mud.
Description—Incomplete anterior end of 54
segments 15 mm long and 2 mm wide. Pre-
branchial region rounded, anterior branchial
region strongly flattened dorsoventrally, more
posterior branchial region and _ postbranchial
region subcylindrical. Prostomium (Fig. 1, a-c)
rounded anteriorly, wider posteriorly, with a
short median antenna near middle extending
back nearly to first setiger and with a pair of
nuchal organs; no eyes visible. First or buccal
segment achaetous, more or less fused with
prostomium, enlarged anteroventrally and form-
ing lateral lips of mouth; lobulated lower lip of
mouth formed by ventral part of first two setigers.
Branchiae consist of 26-30 pairs, beginning on
setiger 4; they are simple and straplike, with
short slender tips and they turn medially over
dorsum from origins dorsal to notopodia (Fig.
1, a, e). Three prebranchial and anterior bran-
chial segments (about first 20 setigers) with
thick bundles of noto- and neurosetae which
taper to fine capillary tips (Fig. 1, d, e). Noto-
podia and neuropodia of posterior branchial seg-
ments with setae becoming gradually fewer in
number and more slender; postbranchial seg-
ments with small bundles of slender, capillary
noto- and neurosetae (Fig. 1, f). Notopodial
postsetal lobes on prebranchial segments conical
(Fig. 1, d), on branchial segments subulate
(Fig. 1, e), gradually becoming more slender and
filiform (Fig. 1, f). Neuropodial postsetal lobe
on first setiger conical (Fig. 1, d), nearly as large
as notopodial; on about next 20 setigers low,
rounded (Fig. 1, e); on rest of segments lacking.
In all specimens examined, the posterior ends
were lacking and the proboscises were not ex-
tended.
Remarks.—Aricidea albatrossae, a deep-water
species, resembles the type species, A. fragilis
Webster, found intertidally in Virginia and North
Carolina (Webster, 1879, p. 255; Hartman, 1944,
p. 315), and A. belgicae (Fauvel), reported from
OcToBER 1957 PETTIBONE: A NEW
the Antarctic (Fauvel, 1936, p. 29; Monro, 1939,
p. 127), in having a short prostomial antenna
and in Jacking modified neuropodial setae in the
posterior segments (at least to setiger 54 in A.
albatrossae); the three species differ as shown in
the table opposite.
The anterior fragment (about 36 segments),
reported by McIntosh (1885) as A. fragilis,
from off New York in 1,340 fathoms may prove
to be A. albatrossae.
POLYCHAETOUS
ANNELID
| A. bel-
Ricae A. albatrossae, n. sp. A. fragilis
yoo
|
Number of 15-20 | 26-30 50-60
pairs of
branchiae
Neuropodial | Absent
postsetal
lobes
| Conical on first seti-
ger; low, rounded
on about 20 setigers; |
absent on following.
Conical to low
rounded on about
40 setigers; absent
on following.
0.6mm
0.12 mm
Fig. 1.—Aricidea albatrossae, n. sp.: a, Dorsal view anterior end; b, same, lateral view;c, same, ventral
view; d, right parapodium from first setiger, posterior view; e, same, from setiger 7; f, same, from post-
branchial segment. (All parapodia drawn to same scale.)
356
Additional records.—Albatross station 2072,
1883, 41° 53’ N., 65° 35’ W., 858 fathoms, gray
mud; station 2105, 1883, 37° 50’ N., 78° 03’ W.,
1,395 fathoms, globigerina ooze; station 2207,
1884, 39° 35’ N., 71° 31’ W., 1,061 fathoms.
green mud.
Distribution —Deep North Atlantic off Massa-
chusetts to off Chesapeake Bay, 788 to 1,395
fathoms.
REFERENCES
Fauvet, P. Polychétes Expédition antarctique
Belge. Rés. Voy. Belgica (1897-99), Zool.: 46
pp., 4 figs., 1 pl. 1936.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 10
Hartman, O. Polychaetous annelids. Part VT.
Paraonidae, Magelonidae, Longosomidae,
Ctenodrilidae, and Sabellariidae. Allan Han-
cock Pac. Exped. 10: 311-388, pls. 27-42.
1944.
McIntrosu, W. C. Report on the Annelida Poly-
chaeta collected by H.M.S. Challenger during
the years 1873-76. Challenger Reports Zool.
12(34) : 554 pp., 84 pls. 1885.
Monro, C. C. A. Polychaeta. Rep. B.A.N.Z.
Antaretie Res. Exped. (1929-31), ser. B, 4(4):
87-156, 28 figs. 1939.
Wesster, H. E. On the Annelida Chaetopoda of
the Virginian coast. Trans. Albany Inst. 9: 202—
269, 11 pls. 1879.
FAUNAL CURIOSITIES OF CUBA
Lizards apparently immune to bullets, bat-
crushing snakes, pigmy boa constrictors, frogs
that never are pollywogs, and frogs less than a
third of an inch long are among the curiosities
of reptile and amphibian life recently collected
in Cuba for the Smithsonian Institution by
David Hardy, a graduate student of the Uni-
versity of Maryland. Most curious of the lot are
the ‘bulletproof’ lizards. They are large iguanas,
3 to 4 feet long, with a curious resemblance to
antediluvian monsters. Mr. Hardy found them
in limestone outcroppings and on sandy islands
along the Cuban coast. When shot, he says, they
turn over on their backs and lie still, but when
approached the apparently dead reptile suddenly
“comes to life again,” gets on its feet with mar-
velous speed, and disappears down a hole. About
the only way to collect specimens is with a noose.
The supposed immunity to bullets, of course, is
not quite true. Any creature can be killed if hit
in the right place. Still, Hardy says, he captured
one specimen with 22 shots in its body, apparently
none the worse for the experience. The seeming
immunity he believes is due to two things—the
toughness of the hide and the quite primitive
organization of the nervous system.
The bat-eatmg boas he collected are true
members of the constrictor family and show a
curious adaptation. In the Trinidad Mountains
of Cuba’s south coast are many bat caves. In
their dark, damp depths literally thousands of
fruit-eating bats spend the day asleep. They fly
out at dusk. Each cave consists of several cham-
bers, which have very narrow entrances, often
barely big enough for a bat to squeeze through.
The big snakes hide, coiled in rock crevices, be-
side these entrances. When the nightly exodus
takes place a boa will strike time and time again,
nearly always getting a bat, whose progress is
impeded by the narrow aperture through which
it must go. Then, after the fashion of boas, the
animal is crushed in the coils and eaten. The
snakes apparently have prodigious appetites. In
one cave Hardy found 70 boas, and he obtained
9 dead bats from a single snake.
Another curiosity of Cuba’s reptile life is the
pigmy boa, less than 2 feet long, which lives
mostly on small lizards, which it crushes in its
coils. It progresses rapidly through the hot sand
of its habitat by a “‘side-winding”’ type of loco-
motion, familiar in some rattlesnakes but other-
wise unknown. Other boas have the sinuous
motion common to snakes in general. In the side-
winding movement, Mr. Hardy believes, the
snake’s body 1s momentarily almost completely
off the ground with each twist. It may have been
evolved, he speculates, as a means of relief from
the searing heat of the sand.
The tadpoleless frogs are creatures of the rain-
forest canopy, found only in the tops of the
tallest trees and chiefly in high mountains. Mr.
Hardy found one of the best collecting sites the
summit of Pico Turquino in the Sierra Maestro
Mountains, the highest peak in Cuba. The eggs,
laid in pools formed in hollows of large leaves,
hatch as frogs, not tadpoles, metamorphosis being
completed entirely within the egg. The pigmy
frogs are very rare but are distributed all over the
island, often with gaps of 100 miles or more be-
tween colonies.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington ................00cceecceeeenees CHESTER H. Pace
Anthropological Society of Washington.........................-005- Frank M. SETZLER
Breloricalesociety.of Washington’. << 22.6. i ccs6.0c2 cess cscs cececwsss HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Whenncalisaciety of Washington... < . .. <0 ose Sec cae oie Sac ce cas ee CuHarR.tEs R. NAaESER
Entomological Society of Washington........................05, Cart F. W. MUESEBECK
Namen RIGeOETADNIC SOCICLY ©. <2. 25)05.¢ pcyarecieiee 2 caus diieleis eeiwloiedie ss ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geological Society of Washington................ 2c cece cece cence Epwin T. McKnicat
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. CoE
SUA IABELISCOTICAl SOCICLY< 2/52 2 2 s2ee oie csaeereeeieie cc ae tio ne aeteieieieas U.S. Grant, III
Baurmesie society Of Washington. scp. saci cr eiciars & hevsie oles eieieys eeieree aici Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furpro GRAVATT
Washineton: society of Engineers:....:........+e0cccecscueeee secs HERBERT G. DorsEyY
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers....... ARNOLD H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp 8S. BEAN
Helminthological Society of Washington..................00ee00- Donatp B. McMu.LuEeNn
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MrcHak. J. Pevczar, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Hovuay
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................05: Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovetas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ GrorcE A. HortLe
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..Wi1LLiam T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..............2ee0082 Cuag_es S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
Page
Puiant Puysiotocy.—Physiological effects of certain fungitoxic com-
pounds on fungus cells. Huen D. Sister and Norton L. MarsHALyi 321
PALEONTOLOGY.—Morphology and taxonomy of the foraminiferal family
Elphidiidae..., Mary WADBE.2). 6) wiki: 40.4.) 5 eee 330
EntTomMoLocy.—Cockroach egg case from the Eocene of Wyoming.
IVOLAND UW, BROMNG Sas) on aan ee ee ia te er 340
Zootocy.—On the Newport chilopod genera.. RALPH E. CRABILL. soo OAR
ZooLocy.—A redescription of two parasitic copepods from Bermuda.
Harry ©. YearmMani iy os) 50 5 os on ch Be oe Oe 346
Zootoay.—A new polychaetous annelid of the family Paraonidae from
the North Atlantic. Marian H. PErripone..................-- 354
Notestand@Newster. ie tere he eee teed vo ark eee 329, 339, 353, 356
>) Ur iv
iy
ae
~~
‘ » {WSs .
VOLUME 47 November 1957 NUMBER11
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
MASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CuestEeR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD BamMrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JoURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 334 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. ReupER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
SUvSCHIpion ates OL the OURNAT:— bere yicalaner erent ernest $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Volt tonvoleelOsinelenotpavallableseerneeer ern = =
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......................... $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete: s---.4.------5-5-. eee $25.00
Singlesvolumes; unbound vsjagec as cose Wed econo eee eae eee eee 2.00
Single-numbeérs: 6 5 cae cade cic ie eee Cs ee ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of -Sciences’”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. 8S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
1D), Go
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Sprcut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
Vou. 47
T. D. Stewart.)
November 1957
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
No. 11
ANTHROPOLOGY .—The physique of the Seneca Indians of western New York
| State. MarsHatt T. Newman, U.S. National Museum.! (Communicated by
(Received July 26, 1957)
With few exceptions, the Indians of east-
ern North America were exterminated, ab-
sorbed, or driven west before physical
anthropological studies came into being.
As a result there are only four or five sys-
tematic descriptions of the physical charac-
teristics of living Eastern Indians. In 1911
and 1915 Sir Francis Knowles measured
Iroquois on the Six Nations Reserve Brant
County, Ontario, and the Tonawanda Res-
ervation in New York State while doing
field work for the Geological Survey of
Canada. Unfortunately only a few of
his measurements have been published
(Knowles, 1937), and since he died in 1953
the status of his scientific records is not
clear. Prior to Knowles’s work, the physical
studies at the World’s Columbian Exposi-
tion of 1893 in Chicago included Iroquois,
Cherokee, Choctaw, Chickasaw, Delaware,
Eastern Ojibway, and Micmac and Abenaki,
but to date only mean statures and cephalic
indices have been published (Boas, 1895).
In the 1920’s and 1930’s, Hallowell (1929)
and Strong (see Stewart, 1939) studied rela-
tively intact northern Algonquian Indians
in Labrador. In Oklahoma, Krogman (1935)
and his coworkers made systematic physical
studies of the Creek and Seminole who had
been removed to the former Indian Terri-
tory from the Southeastern States. With
these the only existing physical studies on
living Eastern Indians, the deficiencies in
in our knowledge are obvious. These defi-
ciencies can only be partially filled by stud-
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of
the Smithsonian Institution.
357
ies of archeologically documented Indian
skeletal remains from the East, and these
studies have yet to be carried out on a
comprehensive basis.
Yet our knowledge of Eastern Indians
has been augmented from an unexpected
quarter, namely an obscure and probably
now rare U.S. Sanitary Commission Report
of almost a century ago. This report bears
the unpromising title for Indian researches
of Investigations in the military and anthro-
pological statistics of American soldiers, au-
thored by Benjamin A. Gould and pub-
lished by the Riverside Press, Hurd &
Houghton, Cambridge, in 1869. The pur-
pose of Gould’s study was to present mea-
surements for clothing size tariffs; physical
and educational performance data; and en-
listment, desertion, and mortality figures
for Union Army troops. Yet shortly after
the conclusion of peace in the Civil War,
Dr. George F. Buckley, chief examiner of
the Sanitary Commission, and in effect their
leading anthropometrist, made the first
systematic study of the physique of living
Eastern Indians. Gould’s report does not
say why, when the Civil War was over and
mass troop recruiting was ended, Dr. Buck-
ley measured all the available Iroquois men
of military age on the reservations near
Buffalo, N. Y. But it is apparent that this
study was only part of an ambitious anthro-
pometric survey the Sanitary Commission
(precursor to the Public Health Service)
was endeavoring to carry out. As Gould
says, more Indians could have been mea-
sured if the War Department had consented
FEB 1 1 1958
358
to the study of the Indian prisoners of war
then concentrated at Rock Island, Ill. But
the Sanitary Commission’s request was
denied. At any rate, in 1865 Dr. Buckley
repaired to the Iroquois reservations near
Buffalo and during the course of physical
examinations took measurements on 503
(14 more had previously been measured in
the Army of the Potomac) Iroquois men
19-47 years of age ‘‘claiming and appearing
to have no admixture of white blood.” To
this Gould (1869, p. 150) adds the comment,
“how far this assumption [of racial purity]
is correct must remain a matter of conjec-
ture.’ On this point more can be said later
(see p. 359).
Now while Gould’s figures for mean
stature, weight, and physiological observa-
tions for the Iroquois have had occasional
reference in the anthropological literature,
the rest of the measurements have been ig-
nored. In the first place, the rigorousness of
Dr. Buckley’s techniques seems not to have
been fully appreciated. The bulk of his
measurements may have been dismissed by
latter-day physical anthropologists as being
old, unreliable, and not in accord with
modern techniques. To an extent this is
true (see pp. 360). In addition, physical
anthropology until the past two decades
concentrated upon head and face dimensions
as diagnostic criteria of race. Dr. Buckley
took a few head and face measurements
(see Table 1) and perhaps his others were
not considered useful. More recently, how-
ever, the revived interest in the influence of
the environment upon body size and pro-
portions renders body dimensions of much
greater importance. Because of this, and
since Dr. Buckley’s measurements remain
to this day the largest and most complete
physical survey of a once powerful Eastern
Indian group, it seems worthwhile to re-
record and interpret his data.
HISTORICAL SETTING
Before so doing, the Iroquois, who were
lodged on the reservations near Buffalo
when Dr. Buckley studied them, must be
placed in their proper historical prospective.
Dr. William N. Fenton (personal communi-
cation) advises me that while reservations
near Buffalo are not specifically named by
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 11
Gould they were probably the Tonawanda,
Cattaraugus, and Allegany Reservations.
It seems likely that all three were visited to
provide a series of over 500 men of military
age. Dr. Fenton surmises that these Iroquois
were mainly Senecas, with some Cayugas,
and from his published works (Fenton,
1956) the following Seneca history imme-
diately prior to 1865 can be derived. Pre-
vious to 1779 the Senecas were practicing a
highly successful maize agriculture and
hunting economy in the rich Genesee and
Finger Lakes area of New York State. In
that year they were deprived of their lands
and crops by General Sullivan’s scorched
earth campaign against them. The dispos-
sessed Senecas then made a partial recovery
at Buffalo Creek, only to have these lands
sold out from under them in 1838, during
that time of land pressures and _ political
machinations known as the “Seven Years
of Trouble.” The Seneca generation between
1797 (The Treaty at Big Tree) and the
“Seven Years of Trouble”? experienced the
beginnings of reservation life. This change
was not for the best. As Fenton (1956, p.
573) says, “The first reaction to military
disaster and deprivation of cornfields dur-
ing the Revolution was to fall back on
Niagara..., to live on rations and cook
out of iron kettles. The British Comman-
dant at Niagara was really hardpressed,
during these years, to feed and clothe the
hungry and ragged crowd.”
In 1845 the dispirited Senecas were re-
moved to Cattaraugus and other reserva-
tions near Buffalo. The Reverend Asher
Wright and other missionaries went with
them. Indeed it seems likely that 20 years
later Reverend Wright was present at Cat-
taraugus when Dr. Buckely came to mea-
sure his people. During the 20 years and
more of reservation life, cultural and pos-
sibly physical changes were wrought in the
Senecas. It is common observation (Coon,
Garn, and Birdsell, 1950, p. 44) that when
natives are ‘“‘taken off the range” they take
on more body fat. Dietary changes toward
high carbohydrate intake and lessened work
load are almost certainly factors responsible
for this. Dr. Fenton (personal communica-
tion) states that “there is a great deal of
starch in the Seneca diet and has been since
NOVEMBER 1957
TABLE 1—ANTHROPOMETRIC DETERMINATIONS ON
50S ApuLtt Mase Seneca INDIANS FROM RESER-
VATIONS NEAR Burrato, N. Y. (AFTER GOULD
1869)
(In em except where indicated)
Determination Mean and S.E. | S.D.
Age—range 19-47 vears........ ..| 30.73
Stature—without shoes . ‘ 173.29 + 0.153 | 3.45
Weight—without coat and shoes 73.85 kg.
Body Jength—crotch to vertex .... ...| 92.50
Relative body length—to stature | 53.341
Head and neck length—cervicale to |
“ERS 5 soos sane 24.26 + 0.148 | 3.34
Trunk length—cervicale to crotch | 68.25 + 0.092 | 2.08
Total arm length—acromion to dactyl-|
"NT dese heeene hale 2 ...-| 78.21 + 0.132 | 2.98
Upper arm length—acromion to elbow..| 34.39 |
Lower arm and hand length—elbow to |
MEG UNOM ESE as.) sos ss | 43.27
Brachial index. . ; Serapaeeninee| ee
Relative arm length—to stature séae||
Crotch height (approximation of total |
Wesenpih eer eee. sos les o eas ..| 80.80 + 0.156 | 3.
Lower leg and foot length—floor to knee .| 48.28 + 0.107 | 2.41
SPN; IBNGAN 425 56d Sees eee | 25.71 |
Hip breadth—bicristale................. | 32.77 + 0.141 | 3.18
Chest circumference—across nipples
W TATA tenes ct ooo, eee 98.86
Chest circumference—across nipples
LSS Ts ose bea ep peo eee sae) ES IMS
Chest cirecumference—across nipples
LVGTM : pease ccna o COOH Ota eae 96.52
WRaATSt CIFCUMfEreNCe 2... -0-2. es cass | 87.87 + 0.141 | 2.12
Hip circumference—across trochanteria.| 98.96 + 0.164 | 8.70
Head circumference—glabella to occiput. |571.0 mm.
Interocular breadth—between inner
GIVI . 4405009 Se 0se OSES eee Eee soaipotacal
Bioccular breadth—between oute
COLNCES MEP EPR Ee fone 2 are sa eiseinis 1102.31
Brronialibread thtes.5 2) 22 es sc ve ee ences 131.50
LU cinanl4 6 6 ogee sSes Sete See 190.20 kg.
TENIEG.... vocact: saa eo ae 76.31
TESTIS IGN: dono cb COBRO Beene Eee 15.83
Other Iroquois (Knowles 1937)
Stature—Six Nations Reservation (185). |170.45 + 0.3 6.02
Tonawanda Reserve (32) ...... 168.79 + 0.65 | 5.42
Bizygomatic breadth—Six Nations
(245) eee |144.63,-+ 0.23 | 5.41
Tonawanda
(39) essen: 144.87 + 0.6 5.54
Nasal breadth—Six Nations (244)....... 40.79 + 0.15 | 3.26
Tonawanda (38)........ 41.24 + 0.33 | 3.17
Cephalic index—Six Nations (244) ...... 79.14 + 0.14 | 3.3
Tonawanda (29)....... 79.59 + 0.43 | 3.96
1 Calculated from means.
reservation life, both of maize and potatoes,
bread, and pastry.”’ That such physical
changes took place in the Senecas is quite
possible, especially in view of their large
body weights (see p. 360). These changes
were observed by Eggan and Pijoan (1943,
pp. 15-16), for the Shoshone, who were
placed on a high carbohydrate diet in their
reservation life. This led to a cycle where
NEWMAN: PHYSIQUE OF THE SENECA INDIANS
359
the more the Shoshone ate the fatter they
became. At 5,800 feet altitude great body
bulk is somewhat more of a handicap in
physical exertion than at sea level, so the
fatter Shoshone got less exercise, and under
a reservation ration system became even
fatter. Returning to the Senecas, Dr. Fen-
ton (personal communication) tells me he
often discussed the matter of obesity in the
Seneca with his late father and grandfather.
He goes on to name stout Seneca of his own
personal acquaintance, especially at Cat-
taraugus Reservation. There are also some
very tall families there, with the men over 6
feet. In addition there is a smaller group of
men of slighter body build who do not run
to obesity.
In addition to any physical changes re-
sulting from an altered way of life, it is clear
that over the years the Iroquois absorbed
outside racial elements. As Knowles (1937,
pp. 40-41) says, by 1742, the Iroquois de-
pendents and tributaries comprised the fol-
lowing tribes: Mohicans, Delawares, Shaw-
nees, Conestogas, Nanticokes, and Tutelos.
He found that a number of the Six Nations
Reserve Iroquois had mixed Indian ances-
try. White admixture of course became
more prevalent in time. In 1911-1915, when
Knowles studied about 420 Iroquois on the
Six Nations Reserve, 40 of them claimed
White ancestry. Of the 40, 15 claimed a
White father or mother. Knowles (1937, p.
41) feels that the Tonawanda Senecas he
saw were less mixed with White than the
people on the Six Nations Reserve. Dr.
Fenton (personal communication) states
that the genealogies he collected in 1935-
1937 bear out Knowles’s contention. In
commenting upon the Senecas measured by
Dr. Buckley, Dr. Fenton (personal com-
munication) thinks they may be largely
fullbloods, but if their names were known
(which they are not) he could probably
ascertain those in the series with White ad-
mixture.
MEASURING TECHNIQUES
With the foregoing as background, we
can return to the measurements. As chief
examiner for the Sanitary Commission, Dr.
Buckley was their most experienced anthro-
pometrist. Furthermore, his visit to the
360
Senecas was at the end of his tour of mea-
suring, by which time most of the technical
difficulties should have been ironed out. For
his instrumentation, Dr. Buckley had a
specially made andrometer, calipers, mea-
suring tape, facial angle instrument, plat-
form balance scales weighing to one-fourth
of a pound (Fairbanks-Morse), and a lifting
strength dynamometer designed and con-
structed in New York (Gould 1869, pp.
458-459). The andrometer was an ingenious
apparatus originally designed by an Edin-
burgh tailor, McDonald, for military cloth-
ing measurements and was reproduced in
several models by American craftsmen for
the Sanitary Commission. It was an upright
wooden stand with ten horizontally and
vertically moving gauges which were set to
the measuring landmarks and read to the
nearest one-tenth of an inch after the sub-
ject was properly posed. The subject stood
still on the platform of the andrometer while
the carriages for the horizontal gauges were
adjusted to the height of his bony landmarks.
The horizontal gauges were adjusted to
measure neck, biacromial (and later full
shoulder), and bicristal breadths. The verti-
cal gauges were aligned with the top of the
head, cervicale, crotch, and knee. Readings
were then made. Stature; cervicale, peri-
neum (crotch), and knee heights; and neck,
shoulder, biacromial, and hip (bicristal)
breadths were measured with the androme-
ter, as Gould (1869, p. 234) says, ‘‘with
greater accuracy and rapidity than other-
wise would be possible.’ All other lengths
were measured by calipers, circumferences
by tape.
As Table 1 indicates, some of the land-
marks used by Dr. Buckley do not conform
to modern techniques. For example, total
leg length measured to the crotch as Dr.
Buckley did is a standard tailoring measure-
ment known as inseam length (cf. Randall
and Baer, 1951, item 20), but it gives a di-
mension several centimeters less than the
length to trochanterion (the top of the
greater trochanter of the femur), which is
the standard leg length of anthropometry.
On the other hand, body length to the
crotch is a close approximation to sitting
height. Measuring lower leg length to the
knee is again only an approximation of
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 11
tibiale (the top edge of tibia on the mediale
side), because Gould does not state whether
the landmark was taken to be the top,
bottom, or middle of the patella. Using the
elbow as the landmark for lower arm length,
however, is a very close approximation to
olecranon when the arm is measured in ex-
tended position. The andrometer, or at least
the way it was used, cannot be recommended
for biacromial breadth since the Iroquois
mean of 32.6 em is impossibly low. Probably
the sliding gauges of the andrometer were not
set on the most lateral points on the acromial
processes. The other measurements listed in
Table 1 conform to modern techniques and
also provide reasonable means.
Gould (1869, pp. 308-310) provides prob-
able errors of the means for a few of the
measurements. In Table 1 these have been
converted into standard errors and standard
deviations. All seem very low, especially for
stature where a doubling of both constants
would be more reasonable. Taken at face
value, the other standard deviations suggest
low variability in the present Seneca series.
INTERPRETATION OF THE MEASUREMENTS
In interpreting the bodily measurements
of the Senecas, the most striking aspect is
their large body size and lateral body build.
The mean male stature of 173.3 em (over
5 feet 8 inches) and weight of almost 74 kilo-
grams (162.8 pounds) are the highest re-
corded for adequate series of New World
aborigines. Several of the World’s Colum-
bian Exposition series (see Table 2), which
may have been to some extent selected for
tallness because of obvious exhibit advan-
tages, closely approach the tall mean stature
of the Senecas. No other Indians, even
Gabel’s (1949) Papago employed by the
CCC and probably very well fed, can match
the great body weight of the Seneca. Some
of this great weight in the Senecas may be
reservation fat, to wit, a 47-year-old weigh-
ing 276.8 pounds. Yet the great hip breadth,
and the chest, waist, and hip circumferences
bespeak the laterality of average body build
in the Seneca beyond simple fat accumula-
tions. Knowles (1937, p. 31) indicates that
the great body size of the Iroquois is no new
impression when he says:
NOVEMBER 1957
In the letters of the Jesuit Fathers the Iroquois
of New York State are constantly referred to as
being tall, well-made men. Father Nau in the
earlier part of the eighteenth century describes
the Iroquois in the following terms (as trans-
lated): ‘‘Generally speaking you could find no-
where finer looking men. The savages are of
better build than the French, but side by side
with the Iroquois other savages seem dwarfed.
Nearly all the men of our mission [Iroquois] are
nearer six feet than five feet.”
Table 2 demonstrates the preeminence of
the Senecas in mean stature, although sev-
eral Algonquian-speaking peoples are close
competitors. As stated, there may have been
some selection for tall stature in these series,
while the Senecas reported upon here com-
TABLE 2—MeAN STATURES OF HASTERN
Inp1an MEN
(In em. with standard errors)
| &
Series Author | E | Mean
| 2 |
Iroquois—Seneca........-.. | Gould, 1869 508 |173.29 + 0.15
Troquois—not specified... ... | Boas, 1895 945 172.7
Ojibway—Eastern. ........ | Boas, 1895 —|143 172.3
Micmac and Abenaki....... Boas, 1895 79 |171.7
Dieteagath, 22, ae eee See | Boas, 1895 43 1171.5
Troquois—Six Nations Re- |
SDN. cle sone nee eee | Knowles, 1937 |185 |170.45 + 0.3
@hoctaw.........- snelaepes | Boas, 1895 260 |170.0
Seminole—Oklahoma....... | Krogman, 1935) 59 |169.59 + 1.17
Iroquois—Tonawanda Sen- |
OCA Eee aise shee ea | Knowles, 1937 | 32 |168.89 + 0.65
Chickasaw... 200-0925 --- Boas, 1895 | _59 |167.9
Cherokee—Eastern.......-- | Boas, 1895 104 |167.7
Montagnais—Abenaki...... | Hallowell, 1929) 41 166.2 + 1.36
Montagnais—Naskapi...... | Stewart, 1939 | 10 |164.6
prise the total available male population of
military age.
In addition, the measurements in Table |
indicate quite high mean body (approximate
sitting height) and arm length relative to
stature. There can be no doubt that on the
average the Senecas were very tall, long-
trunked, and long-armed men of heavy,
lateral body build. The very wide mean
bigonial dimension, combined — with
Knowles’s bizygomatic diameters, also be-
speak very wide faces and jaws.
Gould (1937, pp. 308-310) noted that the
mean body length, arm length especially in
the forearm, and all lateral dimensions are
perceptibly greater than in the White mili-
tary population. That greater power went
NEWMAN: PHYSIQUE OF THE SENECA INDIANS
d61
with this greater body size in the Senecas is
indicated by their average lifting strength
of 190 kg (419.3 pounds) as against 158 kg
(348.9 pounds), the next highest military
mean, in this case mulattoes. Anecdotal
material on strength of the Senecas is pro-
vided by Dr. Fenton (personal communica-
tion), who says that in the estimation of
John Holt, one-time trader to the Senecas at
Quaker Bridge, a very plump Indian named
Chauncey Johnny John was the strongest
man he ever knew. Holt tells that one day in
loading green oak railroad ties on a flat car,
Chauncey trotted up the ramp with one
under each arm! Although not readily con-
verted into modern optical standards, visual
acuity tested by distance at which double-
face pica type could be distinctly read was
also perceptibly higher in the Senecas than
either the Whites or Negroes of the Union
Army. Color-blindness, which unfortunately
combines the red-green with other less com-
mon varieties, appears in 1.5 percent of the
Senecas, as against 2.2 percent for White
soldiers. Pulse and respiration are difficult
to gauge by themselves although a mean
pulse rate of 76 is very high for American
Indians. If anything, the mean respiration
rate of about 16 is the lowest recorded for
New World aborigines.
CONCLUSIONS
The paucity of information on the physi-
eal anthropology of living Eastern Indians,
the increased importance of body (as op-
posed to head and face) measurements in
modern syntheses, and the obscurity of the
original publication makes it worthwhile to
appraise a physical study almost a century
old on over 500 adult male Iroquois. This
study was made on the total available male
population of military age in what appears to
be the Cattaraugus, Allegany, and Tona-
wanda Reservations. Inall probability most,
if not all, of these Iroquois were Senecas.
They were selected only on the basis of mili-
tary age and claim and appearance of being
racially pure Indian. It seems likely that the
actual proportion of White ancestry was
very small. At the time of measuring, the
Senecas had been living a reservation life for
about two generations. With this life inevi-
362
tably went cultural and possibly physical
changes. If anything, the physical changes
were toward greater accumulations of body
fat and physical softness.
Since the measurements were largely de-
signed for clothes sizing determinations,
some are not wholly in accord with modern
racial anthropometry. Other measurements,
however, are fully in keeping with modern
practice, as witness Table 1. One experienced
observer, the Chief Examiner of the U. 8S.
Sanitary Bureau, performed all the measure-
ments, and apparently did so with consid-
erable technical rigor and adequate instru-
mentation.
Analyses of these measurements show that
on the average the Senecas are the tallest in
stature and heaviest in body weight of all
known American Indians. Over and above
any accumulation of body fat due to reserva-
tion life, the Senecas show an average lateral
body build. In keeping with most Indians,
the Senecas have long trunks and arms rela-
tive to stature. Wide faces and jaws are also
typical. Performance data show the Senecas
to be very superior in lifting strength and
visual acuity to White and Negro military
samples.
The importance of these physical data on
the Senecas lies in the fact that they repre-
sent the largest carefully taken series of
physical measurements on virtually the en-
tire adult male population of a once numer-
ous, powerful, and at the time largely un-
mixed Eastern Indian group.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 11
LITERATURE CITED
Boas, F. Zur anthropologie der nord amerikan-
ischen Indianer. Verh. Berliner Ges., An-
throp., Ethnol., und Urgeschichte. 1895. ;
Coon, C. 8., Garn, S. M., and Birpsexu, J. B. |
Races: A study of the problems of race forma-
tion in man. C. C. Thomas, Springfield, II1.,
1950.
Kaean, F., and Prsoan, M. Some problems in
the study of food and nutrition. Amer. Indigena
3 (1). Mexico, D. F., 1943.
Fenton, Witu1am N. Toward the gradual civili-
zation of the Indian natives: The missionary
and linguistic work of Asher Wright (1803-
1875) among the Senecas of Western New York.
Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 100 (6) : 567-581. 1956.
GaBEL, N. E. A comparative racial study of the
Papago. Univ. New Mexico Publ. Anthrop.,
no. 4. 1949.
Goutp, B. A. Investigations in the military and an-
thropological statistics of American soldiers.
U. S. Sanitary Commission Report. Cam-
bridge, Mass., 1869.
HauLowe.., A. I. The physical characteristics of
the Indians of Labrador. Journ. Soc. Amer.
Paris, 31: 337-371. 1929.
Know tes, F. H. 8. Physical anthropology of the
Roebuck Iroquois, with comparative data from
other Indian tribes. Nat. Mus. Canada Bull.
87, Anthrop. Ser. no. 22. 1937.
Krocman, W. M. The physical anthropology of
the Seminole Indians of Oklahoma. Com. Ital.
Studio Problemi Popolazine (3) 2. 1935.
Ranpauu, F. E., and Barr, M. J. Survey of
body size of Army personnel, male and female.
Environ. Protection Br. Rep. no. 122 (Reir).
Quartermaster Climatic Res. Lab. 1951.
Stewart, T. D. Anthropometric observations on
the Eskimos and Indians of Labrador. Publ.
Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Anthrop. Ser., 31: (1).
1939.
CATALYST FOR PARAHYDROGEN PRODUCTION SIMPLIFIES LIQUID
HYDROGEN STORAGE PROBLEM
An unusually effective catalyst for converting
ortho- to parahydrogen, developed by the Boulder
(Colo.) Laboratories of the National Bureau of
Standards, greatly simplifies the problem of
liquid hydrogen storage. The research was con-
ducted by the Cryogenic Engineering Labora-
tory as part of its general program to improve
methods of efficient production and storage of
liquid hydrogen and other cryogenic (low-tem-
perature) materials and to facilitate their eco-
nomical large-scale utilization. The present result
was obtained in a project sponsored by the U.S.
Atomic Energy Commission.
The fact that hydrogen consists of two kinds
of molecules, known as orthohydrogen and para-
hydrogen, considerably complicates the problem
of storing liquid hydrogen. This is because the
ortho molecules are unstable at low temperatures
and change into para molecules, liberating heat
energy in the process and causing wasteful
evaporation. Before the development of conver-
sion catalysts, the problem could be met only by
NOVEMBER 1957 CATALYST FOR
the use of special refrigeration equipment to
remove the heat generated during the relatively
long time needed for the orthohydrogen to change
to parahydrogen.
The development of effective catalysts has
made possible the reliable, continuous produc-
tion of liquid hydrogen having a high para con-
tent. The necessity for cumbersome and expen-
sive refrigeration equipment to absorb the heat
of conversion at the storage site is eliminated
since liquid parahydrogen is transferred to stor-
age directly from the liquefier where the cataly-
sis takes place. Thus, efficient storage of the
stable liquid parahydrogen can be accomplished
by providing well-insulated storage vessels to
protect the liquid from heat transferred from the
environment.
TWO KINDS OF HYDROGEN
The two types of hydrogen molecules are dis-
tinguished by the orientations of their nuclear
spins. Each hydrogen molecule is made up of
two atoms, and the positively charged proton in
the nucleus of each atom has associated with it a
field which can be mathematically described as
being caused by spinning of the proton itself.
Since there are two atoms and therefore two
“spinning” protons in each molecule, the two
protons can be visualized as rotating either in the
same direction or in opposite directions; that is,
the “spins” can be either parallel or antiparallel.
In the parallel case there exists an orthohydrogen
molecule; in the anti-parallel case, a parahydro-
gen molecule.
There is also a difference in the energies asso-
ciated with these two molecular varieties. The
orthohydrogen molecule has ‘‘end-over-end”
rotational energy, even at the absolute zero of
temperature, while parahydrogen has negligible
rotational energy at the boiling temperature of
hydrogen. Thus a change from orthohydrogen to
parahydrogen will result in a release of energy as
the molecule goes from the first to the zero rota-
tional energy level.
Tf one (but not both) of the atomic nuclei in a
hydrogen molecule reverses its direction of rota-
tion, it means that the molecule has changed from
orthohydrogen to parahydrogen, or vice versa. A
change of this kind cannot take place unless the
-molecule obtains (from other molecules or from
some outside source) sufficient energy to get it
past the ‘‘energy barrier” which confines it to its
existing energy level. These conversions are con-
PARAHYDROGEN PRODUCTION
363
tinuously taking place among the millions of
molecules in a volume of hydrogen gas or liquid,
but eventually an equilibrium is reached when
the number of ortho-to-para changes exactly
equals the number of para-to-ortho changes.
Thus the ratio of orthohydrogen to parahydro-
gen becomes fixed, and this equilibrium ratio
depends on the temperature of the hydrogen.
At room temperature, for example, so-called
“normal” hydrogen at equilibrium contains 75
percent orthohydrogen and 25 percent parahydro-
gen. At the boiling temperature (—423°F), the
equilibrium ratio shifts to 0.2 percent orthohy-
drogen and 99.8 percent parahydrogen. Thus any
change in temperature of the gas is accompanied
by a change in the equilibrium ratio.
If normal gaseous hydrogen in equilibrium at
room temperature is cooled rapidly to its lique-
faction temperature, a fluid results which is in a
highly unstable energy condition. That is, the
conversion from ortho molecules to para mole-
cules does not take place fast enough to maintain
the rapidly shifting equilibrium ratio between the
two varieties.
Ordinary freshly liquefied hydrogen therefore
contains a much greater fraction of orthohydro-
gen than it will after reaching equilibrium. For
this reason, the ortho-to-para conversion of mole-
cules proceeds faster than the reverse para-to-
ortho conversion. This means, of course, that
energy is released within the liquid. This energy
vaporizes some of the liquid even though the con-
tainer insulation is perfect. It is therefore quite
impossible to store ordinary unconverted liquid
hydrogen efficiently unless a refrigerator is used
to remove continuously the heat of ortho-to-para
conversion.
The problem would be resolved if, while the
hydrogen is cooling down in the liquefier (which
is merely an efficient refrigerator), the ortho-to-
para conversion could keep pace with the change
in equilibrium ratio which occurs as the tempera-
ture goes down. This does not happen because
each ortho molecule is “balanced”, so to speak,
in its unstable configuration and will remain so
until some force influences one proton of the
molecule more strongly than it does that proton’s
partner. If this happens, the disturbed proton
will very likely “flip over” so that its spin orienta-
tion is opposite that of its partner, thereby form-
ing a stable parahydrogen molecule.
The slow natural ortho-to-para conversion,
which continues until eventually 99.8 percent of
364
the liquid is parahydrogen, is caused by a process
known as “‘self catalysis.” This means that if two
orthohydrogen molecules approach one another
closely enough, their magnetic fields interact
(orthohydrogen molecules being magnetic) and
unbalance the molecules so that a reorientation of
spins takes place. However, the frequency of these
events is such that it takes about a month for
normal 25 percent-para liquid to convert to 90
percent-para. The heat energy released during
this month of self conversion is enough to boil
away 64 percent of the original liquid.
SELECTING A CATALYST
The conversion rate would be greatly ac-
celerated if, while still in the liquefier, the hy-
drogen were to pass over a great many points of
intense magnetic gradient so that each surplus
ortho molecule would stand a good chance of
having its unstable equilibrium unbalanced.
This is precisely what the proper catalyst does.
For this, two things are essential: (1) a strong
magnetic field, inhomogeneous on a
molecular dimensions, and (2) a physical struc-
ture which allows all of the hydrogen molecules
to come into intimate contact with the magnetic
centers. The first condition is met by choosing a
material with high magnetic susceptibility, and
the second (in the case of a solid catalyst) by
obtaining an extremely fine porosity which results
in a huge internal surface area. In addition, there
is another mechanism that may play an impor-
tant, if secondary, part in the process (and for
which the evidence is more definite at higher
temperatures). For this mechanism, also, the
hydrogen should be exposed to the maximum
possible surface area of the catalyst.
Many investigators have searched for catalysts
suitable for promoting this conversion.! Workers
at Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory succeeded in
1953 in modifying a 25 liter/hour hydrogen
liquefier for the regular production of 85 percent
para liquid. This achievement was followed
shortly by the successful modification of the
NBS hydrogen liquefier at the Boulder Labora-
scale of
1 For further technical details, see Zron catalyst
for production of liquid parahydrogen, by D. H.
Weitzel and O. E. Park, Rev. Sci. Instr. 27: 57.
Jan. 1956; The regular production of 85 percent,
para liquid hydrogen, by E. R. Grilly, Rev. Sci.
Instr. 24: 899. 1953; The liquefaction and storage of
partially converted liquid hydrogen, by E. R. Grilly,
Rey. Sci. Instr. 24: 1. 1953; The para-hydrogen
conversion at paramagnetic surfaces, by H. 8.
Taylor and H. D. Diamond, Journ. Amer. Chem.
Soc. 55: 2613. 1933.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 11
tories to produce 240 liters per hour of 90-95 _
percent liquid parahydrogen.
Concurrent with these developments, the
Cryogenic Engineering Laboratory in 1952 |
started a research program under the direction
of D. H. Weitzel, sponsored by the AEC, to
study and evaluate catalysts suitable for the
production of liquid parahydrogen. W. V. Loeben-
stein of the surface chemistry laboratory in |
Washington joined the project for the first year
of the work.
Hydrous ferric oxide was one of several catalyst
materials suggested and prepared by Loebenstein.
These catalysts, along with others prepared at
Boulder, were evaluated for effectiveness in
ortho-to-para conversion by Weitzel and co-
workers. The most effective catalyst tested, by a
considerable margin, was hydrous ferric oxide.
Hydrous ferric oxide results from the removal,
through controlled heating, of entrained water |
from ferric hydroxide gel. The product thus ob- |
tained is hard and strong; and it has an available
effective surface area, when measured by gas
adsorption methods, of as much as 150 square
meters per gram (about 16.8 acres per pound).
Furthermore, since iron is ferromagnetic and
therefore has very high magnetic susceptibility,
it is not surprising that it has proved an unusually
effective ortho-para conversion catalyst. Its high
conversion efficiency permits the design of ortho-
para converters about one-fortieth the size of
those used in the early work at Los Alamos and
the National Bureau of Standards. Thus the size
of these installations used in connection with ex-
tremely large hydrogen liquefiers can be kept
manageable.
Experiments have shown that conversion in the
gas phase proceeds slower than conversion in the
liquid phase. Data now exist permitting the pre-
diction of catalyst quantities required to do an
efficient job of gas-phase, as well as liquid-phase,
conversion.
The Cryogenic Engineering Laboratory has
also been domg research on materials and meth-
ods for improving liquid hydrogen storage dewar
design. Both high vacuum and evacuated powder
insulation techniques? have been investigated,
along with novel insulating support methods.
The information has been widely applied by
commercial fabricators of this type of equipment
and highly efficient storage dewars for liquid
parahydrogen have resulted.
2 Powders for low-temperature insulation, NBS
Tech. News Bull. 41: 87. June 1957.
NOVEMBER 1957
COOK: PROPERTIES OF STRUVE FUNCTIONS
365
MATHEMATICS.—Some properties of Struve functions. RicHarp K. Cook,! Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Murray Hill, N. J.
(Received July 31, 1957)
Epiror’s Note.—The Struve functions are closely related to the Bessel functions, which
are solutions of a wave equation in cylindrical coordinates. They arise in diffraction prob-
lems. The following paper contains some manipulative techniques and results that should be
useful to other workers in theoretical acoustics and optics.
A simple method for finding expansions of
Struve functions H(z) (m an integer) as a
Neumann series of Bessel functions J,,(z) is
presented. New expansions of H,(z)/2” as a
Neumann series of /,,(2) are given.
We obtain an addition formula for
Hy(« + y) as a Neumann expansion in
J,,(x), whose coefficients contain H,,(y). This
is got from Sonine’s expansion for the hemi-
cylindrical Weber functions, which differ
from Struve functions only by a polynomial.
An addition formula for
Hj(JS/Z2 + 2 — 227 cos $)
is obtained as a Neumann expansion in
J,(z), whose coefficients contain incomplete
Struve functions. This rather intricate
addition formula reduces to a simple form
for H)(/2 — Z?)/V/2 — Z? in which the
coefficient of J,(z) is the product of a hemi-
cylindrical trigonometric function of Z by a
polynomial in z and Z.
The analysis and results follow Watson’s
notation [/]?.
1. Newmann Expansions for H,(z)
An expansion for Struve functions, H,(z),
has been given by Erdélyi et al. [2], p. 99.
This was obtained from a Neumann expan-
sion for a Lommel function of one variable.
A simple method for finding expansions
for H,(2), n = 0, 1, 2, 3, --- is as follows.
Since
Tv
Te Olas ;
liJ@) == | sin (z sin wu) du
0
then substitution of Jacobi’s Fourier series
1 Now at the National Bureau of Standards,
Washington, D.C.
2 The numbers in brackets refer to literature
references at the end of this paper.
expansion for sin (2 sin w) and term-by-term
integration gives
ie)
Hip ere) 2 ow 8G)
TT y=1,3,5,-°+ e
the integration being valid because of the
uniform convergence of the Fourier series.
This Neumann expansion is convergent for
all values of z in the complex plane. Formula
(1) is the same as Erdélyi’s for »v = 0.
Expansions for Ay(z), H2(z),---, are
readily obtained from formula (1) by means
of the recurrence relations for Struve fune-
tions given in Watson, p. 329, combined
with the well-known recurrence relations for
Bessel functions. The results for H,(z) and
H(z) are
S) i) 20 :
H,(2) AE 2 ile ye Sue)
us T 5 600
Up (pO Gyooe (il
2)
ep tl - IAG 2
H(z) === »~ AO)
On WT u=1,3,5,--- Mo — 4
and these are convergent for all values of 2.
The functions
H,(z) — Z and H(z) — ae
Tv
31
are respectively the same as Weber’s func-
tions — H(z) and —/.(z), and the formulas
(2) agree with those obtainable from Erdélyi,
pp. 42 and 64, for Neumann expansions of
Weber functions.
2. Neumann Expansions for H,(2z)/z2
Struve functions H,(z) are defined by
Vn 2 Tv + 6)HL(2)/2
cos” ® sin (z sin ) d@ = T(z)
366
and this is valid for all values of z if Re(vy) >
—1ls. Replace sin (2 sin ®) in the integrand
by its Fourier series. Then term-by-term
integration of the series is valid because of
its uniform convergence, and so
yO)
u=1,3,5,-°°
I@) = 2
m [2 (3)
: [ cos” ® sin pb db
0
The trigonometric integrals can be evalu-
ated by expansion of sin u® as a polynomial
in sin ®, see for example Watson, p. 33. The
coefficient of J,(z) will then appear as a sum
of several Eulerian integrals of the first
kind. The final result, valid for all values of
zif Rev) > —W, is
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(=)N@ se Wa se 1D)
VOL. 47, No. 11
3. Addition Formulas
An addition formula for Ho(~ + y) can be —
obtained from formula (1). A more direct
method is to use Sonine’s expansion (see »
Watson, p. 354)
E(x oe y) = sy E,u(y) J (x)
which is valid for the class of hemi-cylindrical
functions, of which the Weber functions
E,(z) are members. Since
E(x + y) = —Ho(« + y),
E_,AY) = (S)PaaM)),
and J-2@)) =a. @)
then
H,@ is[<
2-552
which is the Struve function counterpart of
Watson’s expansion (p. 139) for J,(z)/2" as a
Neumann series.
Some special cases of formula (4) are of
interest. Since H:(z) = +/2/mz(1 — cos 2),
then substitution of »y = 14 into formula (4)
yields the interesting expansion
1 — cosz
= Ji(z) s° J2(z)
i. J (2) a J;(2) 6)
ze J4(z) x J1(2) Si a
which can be readily obtained also by direct
evaluation for v = 14 of the coefficients of
J,(z) in formula (3).
For v = 1 and »y = 2, the Neumann ex-
pansion (4) has simple coefficients for
J m41(z). These can be got by direct evalu-
ation of the trigonometric integrals in
formula (3). The expansions are
J, (2)
Hh@ _4 yx _w -2
in paipgoad (He? — ZY)
i = Iw 4b D4
2 in pealghaoe [UlG? —= 4)? —= I)
J (2)
x0 (u — ANITA + 346) + dA +34)
Rano (4)
E(x + y) = E,(y)Jo(2)
+20 (-! BW)
Hy(« + y) = Ay(y)Jo(a)
(6)
= 2 Hy) — 2] 100)
42 Ez x =| Te) b=:
In the latter formula, the coefficients (in the
square brackets) of J,(v) are Weber fune-
tions,
—E,(y) = H,(y) — the polynomial terms
in the asymptotic expansion of H,,(y).
An expansion for Ho(w), where
wo = V7? + 2 — WZ cos 4,
is obtainable as a Neumann series in J,,(2),
similar to the well known expansion for
J((w). The result for Ho(w) 1s considerably
more intricate, however. The quantities w,
Z, z, and the angles @ and W are not all
independent. When real, they are related
as shown in the sketch (Fig. 1).
NoveEMBER 1957 COOK:
|
Z
BGs
Graf’s formula (Watson, p. 359, et seq.) Is
required. The formula can be written
De (Z) Jn) cos Gn® = pW)
nS=—s
J ,(Z)Jo(z) cos why
J,(w) =
l|
+ cos py y iA) + (—)"J .-m(Z)]
m=1
x Jn(z) cos m® + sin pY
es)
a Ss eA) AP (= Tra (A
m=1
- Jn(Z) sin m®
Hence from equation (1),
GO) = MAZ, V)Jo(2)
+ >) M,,(Z, V)Im(2) cos m® (7)
m=1
+ DY N,(Z, VY) In(z) sin m&
m=1
where
PZ, v) = J,(Z) cos pW
I
Ms
M,,(Z, ¥)
p=1,3
: Jem Z) SI (—StrAD
Le
cos uv
»
p=1,3,°"-
NZ) —
x ie (2) <r (SPD
b
sin pW
PROPERTIES OF STRUVE FUNCTIONS
367
With the aid of the above Fourier series,
the M/’s and N’s can be expressed in terms of
familiar functions. In what follows, sum-
mations over pu will be for the odd numbers,
= I By, so° 5 Cds
Consider first
MAG) = yo ek) cos ut
M ML
om = ee J,(Z) sin py
_ _ sin Z sin W)
9
a
from Jacobi’s expansion. Therefore
/9
M(Z,v¥) =% [ 3 sin (Z sin wu) du
Rag
¢ 1/2
[ sin (Z sin wu) du
40
i=l
| bo
9 p¥
— = | sin (Z sin u) du
™ Jo
= T[Ho(Z) — HolZ,)|
and H)(Z, WV) can be called an incom-
plete Struve function. H)(Z, 0) = O and
HZ, 7/2) = HZ).
In a similar way M,,(Z, VW) can be found
in terms of #,,(Z) and E,,(Z, ¥), an incom-
plete Weber function. The details of the
analysis are omitted, except for presentation
of the following Fourier series, which can be
regarded as generalizations of Jacobi’s
expansions:
OM n
= — en (Zh
aw aI w+ ( )
+ (—)"Jy-m(Z)) sin wh
= sin m¥ cos (Z sin WV) (m odd)
—cos mY sin (Z sin VW) (m even)
These series are readily established with the
aid of Bessel’s integrals for Jyimn(Z) and
J,—m(Z). Finally,
M,,.(Z, WV) = — 5 E,(Z) =P 5 En (Z, WV),
where the incomplete Weber function
E,,(Z, W) is given by
368
E,(Z, WV)
I
a
DP, 3 ;
= sin mu cos (Z sin wu) du(m odd)
T /0
9 Vv
y= i cos mu sin (Z sin u) du(m even)
TT 0
I
We note that #,,(Z, 0) = 0, and
AA, aa) = JIA
The analysis for the N,,(Z, VY) shows that
they are expressible in terms of elementary
functions. The details are again omitted,
except for presentation of the following
Fourier series, which are additional generali-
zations of Jacobi’s expansions:
ine m
a7 y Bin CA) ap (—) a free (Z)] cos Ww
= cos mV cos (Z sin VW) (m odd)
sin m¥ sin (Z sin VW) (m even)
Finally,
N,(Z, V)
WV
= i cos mu cos (Z sin wu) du(m odd)
0
WV
= [ sin mu sin (Z sin u) du(m even)
0
By direct integration,
N,(Z, V)
di sin (Z sin W)
Z
NZ, ¥)
sin (ZsinW) — (Z sin V) cos (Z sin V)
=2
x Gi
Since the N,,’s are hemicylindrical functions
of Z, the higher orders can be found from
N, and Nz by means of the recurrence
relation
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 11ff
IN aan Nimv1 = yy)
It is to be noted that N,,(Z, 0) = 0; write
NiA(Z; m/2)) = N,.(Z)s Dhus
sin Z
N\(Z) = Z
oe sin Z ee
N.(Z)
sin Z
NZ) = —
NAZ) 3X Z
He 52 sin Z ae cos Z ad
wv = 0 andl!
Suppose ® = az; then
o = Z ata &. M((Z, 0) oe. (1/4)Ho(Z), i
M,Z, 0) = =@G@2Qee wand |
NnAZ, 0) = 0. Also, Ao(w) = Ay(Z + z). I
Therefore formula (7) reduces to (6). }
Suppose ¥W = 7/2; then w = V2 — Z?. fj
Mi(Z, 2/2) = 0, Ma Ge 2) Oe
N,,(Z, 2/2) are the hemi-cylindrical func- |
tions given above. Formula (7) reduces to _ |
VE =P) = Xo Ng(Z)Su(2) sin me
m=1
= ae J1(z) sin ®
Hpi — ZecosZ
VA
X Je (z) sin 26 + ---
where sin ® = Ve = Bz, sin
9% = WV2 — 27/22, Sine 32) =" |
(422 — 22)V 2? — Z?/2, etc.
REFERENCES
(1) Warson, G. N. Theory of Bessel Functions,
ed. 2. Cambridge University Press, 1944.
(2) ERptnyr, A., Macnus, W., OBERHETTINGER, |
F., and Tricomr, F. G. Higher Transcen-
dental functions, 2. McGraw-Hill Book Co., |
New York, 1953.
NOVEMBER 1957
STRIMPLE: TWO ABERRANT CRINOID SPECIMENS
369
PALEONTOLOGY .—Two aberrant crinoid specimens. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE,
Copan, Okla.
(Received June 20, 1957)
Aberrant forms of life are not acceptable
as taxonomic units, but it is thought the
specimens discussed herein might provide
useful information in genetic or future
taxonomic studies.
An abnormal crinoid calyx of Laudono-
crinus sp. undt., with a diameter of 6.5 mm,
was collected by Arthur Bowsher, now with
the U. S. Geological Survey, while a stu-
dent several years ago at the University of
Tulsa. The exposure was located in the cen-
ter of the north half of section 31, township
23 N., range 12 E., Osage County, Okla.,
and was designated as the Avant limestone
formation, Ochelata Group, Pennsylvanian.
The specimen is in the U. 8. National Mu-
seum and camera-lucida drawings are given
below.
As will be noted, the posterior interradius
Fic. 1.—a, b, Laudonocrinus, sp. undt., view
of dorsal cup from posterior and below.
of this specimen is occupied by six elements.
Normal representatives of the genus have
only three elements, which are the radianal
(RA), first anal (X), and right second anal
(RX). The plates in the present specimen
are designated as follows: The element to
the right and below the left posterior radial
(LPR) is termed inferradial (LPiR); the ele-
ment to the right of LPR and LPiR is termed
the first anal (X); the element directly above
X and to the right of the LPR, being the
second anal, is termed superanal (sX); the
element to the right of LPiR and below RA
is termed inferradianal (iRA); the element
above 1RA and to the right of X is termed
radianal (RA); the element above RA and
to the right of sX is termed right second
anal (RX). Of the above elements the three
normal plates for the genus are RA, X and
RX as has been previously noted. Some of the
more ancient Paleozoic crinoids possess an
inferradianal or superradial, but such ele-
ments are not found in late Paleozoic
crinoids.
Another abnormal crinoid calyx was col-
lected several years ago by Claude Bron-
augh, Oklahoma Military Academy, in the
Fayettville formation, Chester, Mississip-
plan, some three miles southwest of Afton,
Okla. It is a representative of Phanocrinus
alexandert Strimple (1948), with a diameter
of 10.8 mm, and has five plates within the
posterior interradius. The plates are re-
ferred to as follows: LPiR, X, sX, RA and
RX. The specimen thus differs from the
aberrant Laudonocrinus in the absence of
iRA.
The two specimens are of widely different
ages yet have in common two elements not
found in late Paleozoic crinoids, which are
LPiR and sX. The author is unable to at-
tach any special significance to this oc-
currence, but it is hoped they will be useful
in subsequent studies.
LITERATURE CITED
STRIMPLE, Harrett L. Notes on Phanocrinus
from the Fayettville formation of northeastern
Oklahoma. Journ. Pal. 22: 490-493. 1948.
370
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 11}
ZOOLOGY .—Emendation of the foraminiferal genus Palmerinella Bermudez, 1934,
and erection of the foraminiferal genus Helenia. J. B. SaunpERsS, Trinidad Oil })
Co., Pointe-a-Pierre, Trinidad, B. W.
Jr.)
I. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich
?
(Received July 1, 1957)
During sampling of shallow water sedi-
ments off the west coast of Trinidad,
B.W.I., Foraminifera belonging to the genus
Palmerinella Bermudez, 1934, were found.
Subsequent investigation showed that an
emendation of the type species, Palmerinella
palmerae Bermudez, and therefore of the
genus, would be necessary. Examination of
topotype material supplied by Dr. Bermudez
and of the cotypes in the U. 8. National
Museum in Washington enabled the follow-
ing redefinition to be prepared. A new sub-
species, Palmerinella palmerae diminuta, has
been based on the Trinidad specimens.
Also in Recent sediments from Trinidad
was found a foraminifer which seemed
worthy of description because of its distinct
apertural characteristics. Being restricted to
inshore brackish-water sediments, it was felt
that if the species should subsequently be
found in fossil assemblages an understanding
of its nature would be of value paleoecologi-
cally. While this paper was in preparation
the species was described by Warren (1957)
under the name Pseudoeponides andersent.
However, the present writer does not agree
with the assignment of this species to the
genus Pseudoeponides, and it is here made
the type species for the proposed new genus,
Helenva.
Sincere thanks are due to Dr. Alfred R.
Loeblich, of the U.S. National Museum, who
arranged for the very fine drawings to be
prepared by Mr. Lawrence and Mrs. Pa-
tricia Isham, scientific illustrators at the
Museum, and communicated this note for
publication to this JourNaL. Thanks are
also due to Dr. Hans Bolli for a critical
reading of the manuscript and to the man-
agement of the Trinidad Oil Co. for permis-
sion to use their laboratory facilities.
Genus Palmerinella Bermudez, 1934, emended
Original reference—Mem. Soc. Cubana Hist.
Nat. 8 (2): 83, 1934.
Type spectes.—Palmerinella palmerae Ber-
mudez, 1934.
Emended diagnosis.—Test free, trochospiral to
almost planispiral; all chambers usually visible
on the spiral side though early chambers may be |}
partly or wholly obscured by a calcite plug; on
the umbilical side, earlier chambers often ob-
scured by a calcite plug. On the umbilical side
supplementary chambers may be present be-
tween the chambers of the last whorl and the
central plug though these are apparently some-
times obscured by the latter. Wall calcareous, |
perforate. Sutures curved, slightly depressed,
flush with the surface or sometimes. slightly
raised. Aperture in the final chamber consisting
of a pair of slits running almost the whole length
of the terminal face and separated by a vertical |!
septum; the shit towards the spiral side completely
surrounded by a lip, that towards the umbilical
side surrounded by a lip except at the interio-
marginal end where it opens between the last |
chamber and the umbilical plug. On earlier
chambers each slit aperture is closed by a calcite
septum penetrated by pores.
Remarks.—Emendation of the type species of
Palmerinella Bermudez necessitates a similar |
revision of the generic diagnosis. Palmerinella is |
most closely related to Eponidella Cushman and
Hedberg, which it resembles in general shape of
the test, wall structure, and presence of supple- |
mentary chambers on the umbilical side and
from which it differs in apertural characters. In
Palmerinella the aperture is always divided by a
vertical septum, always opens onto the umbilical |
surface, and is closed by thin calcite septa in all
but the last chamber, whereas in Eponidella the |
aperture, though interiomarginal extraumbilical
in position in the early stages, is said to trend |
toward an areal position in the adult, is not
divided by a vertical septum though there may |
be a tendency for a horizontal septum to appear
and has not been recorded closed in early cham- |
bers.
Stainforth and Stevenson (1946) described
Palmerinella thalmanni from the Miocene of |
NOVEMBER 1957
Ecuador; this species does not belong in the
genus Palmerinella, as its aperture is a simple
vertical slit in the centre of the terminal face of
the chamber; it seems probable that this species
should be removed to the genus Ganella Aurouze
and Boulanger.
Palmerinella palmerae palmerae Bermudez,
emended
Figs. 6a, 7
Palmerinella palmerae Bermudez, Mem. Soc.
Cubana Hist. Nat. 8(2): 83-86, figs. 1-3. 1934.
Emended diagnosis ——Test free, low trocho-
spiral, almost planispiral in the adult and may
even tend toward uniserial arrangement of last
chambers in some large, possibly gerontic forms;
all chambers usually visible on the spiral side
though early chambers may be partly or wholly
obscured by a semitransparent calcite plug;
earlier chambers often obscured by a plug of
calcite on the umbilical side; small supplementary
chambers may be present between the chambers
of the last whorl and the central umbilical plug
though these are apparently sometimes obscured
by the latter. Axial periphery rounded, equatorial
periphery slightly lobate. Chambers numerous,
10 to 20 in the last whorl, with an average of 14
to 16. Wall calcareous, vitreous, coarsely per-
forate. Sutures distinct, curved, flush with the
surface or slightly raised. Aperture on the final
chamber consisting of a pair of slits running
almost the whole length of the terminal face and
separated by a vertical septum; the slit towards
the spiral side completely surrounded by a
prominent lip, the slit towards the umbilical
side surrounded by a lip except at the interio-
marginal end where it opens between the last
chamber and the umbilical plug. In all earlier
chambers, the two slit apertures are closed by
thin calcite septa each penetrated by a linear
series of round or elongate pores.
Greatest diameter of lectotype (here desig-
nated) (Cushman Coll. 22707a) 0.52 mm, thick-
ness 0.17 mm, greatest diameter of figured
paratype (Cushman Coll. 22707b) 0.6 mm,
thickness 0.2 mm, greatest diameter of unfigured
paratype (Cushman Coll. 22707c) 0.55 mm,
thickness 0.17 mm.
Remarks—The. discovery in Trinidad of
Foraminifera belonging to the genus Palmerinella
Bermudez led the present author to realize that
the species Palmerinella palmerae Bermudez had
SAUNDERS: PALMERINELLA BERMUDEZ
O71
not been sufficiently fully described. Dr. Ber-
mudez was kind enough to send topotype material
to the author and to say that he would be
pleased to see the species and genus redefined.
During examination of the topotype material,
it become apparent that the Trinidad specimens
differed considerably from what had been de-
scribed by Bermudez as Palmerinella palmerae;
it seems necessary therefore to place them in a
separate subspecies. The original types described
by Bermudez from the Playa de Batabané,
Cuba are now regarded as belonging to the
restricted subspecies, Palmerinella palmerae
palmerae Bermudez, while the specimens from
the west coast of Trinidad are made the basis for
Palmerinella palmerae diminuta n. subsp.; notes
on the differences between the two subspecies
are given below in the remarks on the new sub-
species.
Examination of the three cotypes erected by
Bermudez and deposited in the collection of the
U.S. National Museum in Washington showed
that these exhibit well the apertural features of
the species. On one specimen (Cushman Coll.
22707a) the final chamber is present and the
two slit like apertures are open; this has been
designated as the lectotype of Palmerinella
palmerae palmerae (figs. 6a-c). The other two
cotypes are broken specimens in which at least
one of the chambers of the last whorl has been
lost; both these specimens show the apertures
closed by septa which are penetrated by rows
of pores. These two cotypes are designated as
paratypes (Cushman Coll. 22707b, 22707c), and
one of them is illustrated here (Fig. 7).
Palmerinella palmerae palmerae has been seen
by the present author only in material from the
type locality as designated by Bermudez.
Locality —Lectotype (Cushman Coll. 22707a)
and paratypes (Cushman Coll. 22707b, c) from
Playa de Batabané, Province Haband, Cuba.
Palmerinella palmerae diminuta, n.
Figs. 3-5e
subsp.
Diagnosis.—Test free, low trochospiral, almost
planispiral in the adult; all chambers usually
visible on the spiral side, though early chambers
may be obscured by a» semitransparent calcite
plug; on the umbilical side, early chambers
often obscured by a calcite plug; small supple-
mentary chambers are present between the
chambers of the last whorl and the umbilical
QnyOD
ole
plug. Axial periphery rounded, equatorial periph-
ery slightly lobate. Chambers numerous, 10 to
14 in the last whorl, with an average of 12. Wall
calcareous, vitreous, coarsely perforate. Sutures
distinct, slightly curved, slghtly depressed.
Aperture of the final chamber consisting of a pair
of slits running almost the whole length of the
terminal face and separated by a vertical septum;
the slit towards the spiral side completely sur-
rounded by a prominent lip, the slit toward the
umbilical side surrounded by a lip except at the
interiomarginal end where it opens between the
last chamber and the umbilical plug. In all
earlier chambers, the two slitlike apertures are
closed by thin calcite septa each penetrated by a
linear series of rounded pores.
Greatest diameter of holotype (U.S.N.M.
P6493) 0.33 mm, thickness 0.18 mm, greatest
diameter of paratype (U.S.N.M. P6494a) 0.29
mm, thickness 0.13 mm, greatest diameter of
paratype (U.S.N.M. P6494b) 0.382 mm, thickness
0.13 mm.
Remarks.—This subspecies differs from Pal-
merinella palmerae palmerae in its smaller average
size, greater thickness relative to diameter,
smaller average number of chambers in the last
whorl (12 as against 14 to 16), less sigmoid
sutures, less tendency to an increase in height
of the last chamber, and a tendency for more
involute coiling. Whereas in Palmerinella pal-
merae palmerae the supplementary chamberlets
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 47, No. 11
are often obscured by the umbilical plug, in
Palmerinella palmerae diminuta they are nor-
mally distinct.
To the present time, all specimens of Pal-
merinella palmerae found in Trinidad belong to
Palmerinella palmerae diminuta. They show less
variation than do the Cuban examples of Pal-
merinella palmerae palmerae. It seems likely that
the differences between the two subspecies may
be due in large part to the differences in their
habitats. From the original description by Ber-
mudez (1934) of the localities in which Pal-
merinella palmerae palmerae is found, it would
seem likely that the subspecies is living under
conditions where the water, though brackish, is
clear. On the other hand, at the type locality of
Palmerinella palmerae diminuta the water is
brackish and extremely turbid.
Occurrence.—Holotype (U.S.N.M. P6493) and
paratypes (U.S.N.M. P6494a, b) from sample
J.S. 190, north of Monkey Point, west coast of
Trinidad, B.W.I. Sample taken in fine black
silt from just below low-water mark about 20
feet from the outer edge of a mangrove swamp.
From the San Antonio Bay area of west
Texas, Parker, Phleger, and Peirson (1953)
figure specimens that compare closely with the
Trinidad material.
From Matanzas Bay, Cuba, the author has
seen specimens that fall within the subspecies
Palmerinella palmerae diminuta.
Fias. la-2c.—Helenia anderseni (Warren): 1a, Spiral view of hypotype (U.S.N.M. P6491) showing the
deep folds between the chambers concealing the supplementary sutural apertures; 1b, umbilical view
showing the deep folds between the chambers concealing the supplementary sutural apertures and the
lobe of the last chamber extending across the umbilicus; lc, edge view showing the low arched primary
aperture at the base of the final chamber; X 138. 2a, spiral view of hypotype (U.S.N.M. P6492); 2b,
umbilical view; 2c, edge view showing clearly the low arched primary aperture at the base of the final
chamber; X 138.
Fias. 3-5e.—Palmerinella palmerae diminuta Saunders, n. subsp.: 3, Edge view of paratype (U.S.N.M.
P6494a) showing apertural condition in final chamber; X 138. 4, Edge view of paratype (U.S.N.M.
P6494b) showing apertural condition in an earlier chamber of the last whorl; supplementary chambers
are present between the chambers of the last whorl and the umbilical plug; X 138. 5a, Spiral view of
holotype (U.S.N.M. P6493) showing early chambers obscured by a semitransparent calcite plug; 5),
umbilical view showing series of small supplementary chambers situated between the chambers of the
last whorl and the umbilical plug; the prominent lip around the slit like aperture towards the spiral
side of the terminal face of the last chamber is well shown; 5c, edge view showing paired longitudinal slit
like apertures separated by a septum; the continuation of the aperture onto the umbilical side is clearly
shown; X 188.
Fries. 6a-7.—Palmerinella palmerae palmerae Bermudez emend. Saunders: 6a, Spiral view of lecto-
type (Cushman Coll. 22707a) showing early chambers visible through a semitransparent calcite plug;
6b, umbilical view showing early chambers almost entirely obscured by an umbilical plug; 6c, edge view
showing pair of apertural slits separated by a septum; the slit toward the spiral side is completely sur-
rounded by a prominent lip while that towards the umbilical side is surrounded by a less prominent lip
except at the base where it opens between the last chamber and the umbilical plug; X 105.7, Edge view
of paratype (Cushman Coll. 22707b); the test is broken exposing the terminal face of one of the earlier
chambers of the last whorl; the elongate slit apertures are closed by septa through which open linear
series of pores; X 105.
PALMERINELLA BERMUDEZ
SAUNDERS:
NOVEMBER
=Ahistepichebiitiedt
O14
Fossil examples of the subspecies received
from Dr. Bermudez have been collected from the
Las Salinas formation of Cuba of questionable
Upper Miocene age, from the Phocene of the
Dominican Republic (Jimani formation) and
Cuba and from the Pleistocene of Cuba.
Helenia Saunders, n. gen.
Type species—Pseudoeponides andersent War-
ren, 1957.
Test free, trochospiral, spiral side almost flat,
umbilical side convex with umbilicus concealed
below a lobe of the last chamber. Wall calcareous,
perforate. Sutures on both spiral and umbilical
sides curved and depressed. Primary aperture an
irregular shaped single or multiple opening at the
base of the final chamber; in earlier chambers
an areal aperture may develop. Supplementary
sutural apertures are present on both spiral and
umbilical sides; they may be partly or wholly
concealed in infolds of the test wall between the
chambers. Early whorls of the spiral side show
the sutural apertures remaining open.
Remarks.—The species described from Lou-
isiana as Pseudoeponides andersent Warren and
which is well developed in Trinidad, is here made
the basis of a new genus. In Pseudoeponides
Uchio the supplementary apertures on the
spiral side are placed areally on the chamber
surfaces parallel to the sutures. It is possibly
significant that Pseudoeponides is a marine form
while the only known species of Helenia, n.gen.
is entirely restricted to a brackish water, marsh
environment. Helenia differs from Mississippina
Howe in that its supplementary apertures occur
along the sutures whereas in the latter genus
they are parallel to the equatorial periphery on
both spiral and umbilical surfaces. It differs
from Epistomaria Galloway in that it lacks
supplementary chambers on the umbilical side.
The genus is named for Dr. Helen Tappan
Loeblich.
Helenia anderseni (Warren)
Figs. la—2c
Pseudoeponides anderseni Warren, Contr. Cush-
man Found. Foram. Res. 8, pt. 1: 39, pl. 4, figs.
12-15. 1957.
Test small, trochospiral, involute umbilically
with a very slightly lobate equatorial periphery;
Spiral side almost flat; umbilical side convex with
the umbilicus concealed below a lobe of the last
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 11
chamber. Axia! periphery rounded, equatorial
periphery slightly lobate. Wall calcareous,
fragile, semitransparent, finely perforate. Cham-
bers slightly inflated spirally, more strongly so
umbilically; 6 to 7 in the last whorl increasing in
size gradually and regularly. Sutures on both
spiral and umbilical sides curved, depressed.
Primary aperture an irregular shaped single or
multiple opening at the base of the final chamber;
in earlier chambers a circular areal aperture
commonly is developed in the middle of the
terminal face. Supplementary sutural apertures
are present on both spiral and umbilical sides;
they are partly or wholly concealed in infolds of
the test wall between the chambers. Early
whorls visible on the spiral side show shortened
portions of the supplementary apertures re-
maining open.
Greatest diameter of figured hypotype
(U.S.N.M. P6491) 0.34 mm, thickness 0.13 mm,
greatest diameter of figured hypotype (U.S.N.M.
P6492) 0.25 mm, thickness 0.11 mm. Both
hypotypes from sample J.S. 275, Carenage
Swamp, west coast of Trinidad, B.W.I.
Remarks.—The Trinidad representatives of
this species appear to be identical with those
deseribed by Warren (1957) from the coastal
marshes of Louisiana.
In Trinidad, Helenia anderseni has so far only
been found in numbers in the Carenage Swamp
where it occurs in association with Haplophrag-
moides manilaensts Anderson, Siphotrochammina
lobata Saunders, etc., inan inshore brackish water
environment. Further notes on this locality may
be found in Saunders, 1957, p. 3.
REFERENCES
BermupeEz, P. J. Un genero y especie nueva de
foraminiferos vivientes de Cuba. Mem. Soc.
Cubana Hist. Nat. 8(2): 83-86, figs. 1-3. 1934.
Parker, F. L., Pourcer, F. B., and Perrson, J. F.
Ecology of Foraminifera from San Antonio
Bay and environs, southwest Texas. Cushman
Found. Foram. Res. Spec. Publ. 2: 1-75, pls.
1-4. 1953.
SaunpDERS, J. B. Trochamminidae and certain
Lituolidae (Foraminifera) from the Recent
brackish-water sediments of Trinidad, B.W.I.
Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 184(5): 1-16, pls. 1-4.
1957.
SrarnrortH, R. M., and Stevenson, F.V. Three
new Foraminifera from the Tertiary of Ecuador.
Journ. Pal. 20: 560-565, pl. 86. 1946.
Warren, A. D. Foraminifera of the Buras-
Scofield Bayou Region, southeast Louisiana.
Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 8(1):
29-40, pls. 3, 4. 1957.
NOVEMBER 1957 CRABILL: A NEW
GARIBIUS
FROM VIRGINIA 375
ZOOLOGY—A new Garibius from Virginia, with a key to the North American con-
geners (Chilopoda: Lithobiomorpha: Lithobidae). R. E. Crapiuy, Jr., Smith-
sonian Institution.
(Received July 30, 1957)
Garibius is one of the genera of micro-
lithobiuds whose center of dispersal seems to
be the southeastern United States. Its mem-
bers are distinguished chiefly by their rather
long, thin bodies and long, evenly inflated
ultimate legs, which, inthe males, bear a low
setigerous tibial lobe pierced by a distinct
gland canal. In addition, their possession of
20 antennal articles, of 2+2 prosternal
teeth, their lack both of produced tergites
and divided anterior tarsi, and the absence
in most of DPA on leg 15 help to distinguish
the known species.
Until recently, no typical! member of the
genus was known to have more than two
dorsal prefemoral spurs on each of the ul-
timate legs, so that the formula 15D = 10200
or 10210 was a convenient feature for easy
generic identification. However, collecting
in the mountains of southwestern Virginia,
Richard L. Hoffman uncovered a new species
that places a slightly different complexion
upon the genus. The specimen seems typical
except for the presence of an anterior dorsal
spur upon the ultimate tibia, i1.e., 15D=
10310. It differs from its congeners in other
respects as well. Although the presence or
absence of a single spur alone is often not sig-
nificant, I believe that the presence of one
in this case is, chiefly because of the identity
and critical position of the spur.
Considering the industry with which Mr.
Hoffman has collected the Blacksburg, Va.,
area for many years without ever bringing to
light more than a single specimen of the new
species, I suspect it to be quite rare, at least
in this particular locality. During the same
1 By typical, I refer to those forms whose males
are known to have the customary setigerous,
tibial lobe on leg 15. On this basis G. dendrophilus
Chamberlin is excluded, for the examination of
scores of adult males has revealed no such lobe.
As a matter of fact, there is reason to believe this
species is actually the European Monotarsobius
crassipes (Koch), specimens of which have been
intercepted at quarantine in this country upon at
least one occasion.
period and in the same area Mr. Hoffman’s
efforts have resulted in the accumulation of
numerous specimens of Garizbius opicolens
Chamberlin (see discussion), apparently the
most common member of the genus.
Following the description below is a key
to the known American species of Garibius.
It is based largely upon the data presented
in 1913? by R. V. Chamberlin, whose work
remains virtually our sole source of informa-
tion on the majority of the species. The pre-
sentation of the data has been altered in
some respects to conform with ideas devel-
oped from my studies of several of the spe-
cies, notably opicolens.
The examination of the specimensat my dis-
posal has revealed no better criterion for the
definition of a species in Garibius than plec-
trotaxy. Dimensions, vestiture, sculpturing,
and to a lesser extent size and color seem
untrustworthy, whereas the linear disper-
sions of a number of the spur-series here
seem more stable and predictable than they
do in various other microlithobiid groups
e.g., Tidabius and possibly Sozibius. Of
course this impression, based upon the study
of a sizable series referable to opicolens, may
be quite erroneous. On the basis of this
premise, that the plectrotaxic variation ob-
served in my series of opicolens is essentially
like that of closely-related species, Hoff-
man’s specimen seems sufficiently distinctive
to warrant being called new.
One must admit that the relationship of
any of these species, including psychrophilus,
n.sp., and opicolens, to the hypothetical bio-
logical or polytypic species is not clear at
this time; indeed no myriapod has yet been
subjected to the scrutiny of modern popula-
tion systematics. Unfortunately centipedes
—especially these centipedes—are so rare in
collections that there is very little oppor-
tunity for studying variation and particu-
Chamberlin, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 57(2):
61-80, 1913.
larly distribution effectively, hence to exam-
ine these ancient animals as members of
evolving, kinetic systems through the eyes of
the New Systematics. Therefore we cannot
be sure now whether the presently recog-
nized species of Garibius are geographical
subspecies and interbreeding populations of
one or two polytypic species, or whether the
genus is a true complex of reproductively-
isolated populations. But aside from that,
the evidence at hand suggests that at least
some of these forms are representative of
real populations of some kind and are not
merely unique, local variants.
Garibius psychrophilus, n. sp.
Of the known members of the genus only
catawbae Chamberlin and the new species have
a dorsal spur on the fifteenth femur, but in ad-
ditoin psychrophilus differs from all of its congeners
in possessing an anterior prefemoral spur dorsally
on the ultimate leg, i.e., 15D = 10310. At the
same time a number of other features suggests
its real affinity, not with catawbae, but with
georgiae and alabamae, both of Chamberlin. Of
these, georgiae seems the more closely related to
psychrophilus, for both are relatively smaller
forms, display essentially the same color pat-
terns, lack of coxal armature, and have certain
critical spur-series (VPP and VFP) whose an-
terior limits are displaced quite far to the rear
(see the key, 3a and 3b).
Holotype, #. Virginia, Montgomery County,
Blacksburg, February 1957. Richard L. Hoffman,
leg. Deposited in the United States National
Museum; Myriapod type number 2382.
Total length: 7.0 mm. Color: tergites and legs
1-13 pale sordid yellow, not fulvous or brownish,
without a longitudinal dark streak; cephalic
plate, antennae, and legs 14 and 15 deeper yellow,
approaching yellowish orange. Antennae: each
2.3 mm long, with 20 articles; setae moderately
dense, each long and pale. Cephalic plate: length
to greatest width 1:1, each dimension 0.75 mm;
surface shiny, impressed with large areolations;
marginal interruptions present but very obscure,
the lateral flange essentially continuous; each
eye-group of three series, i.e., 1 + 4, 3, 2, the
single ocellus, the upper serial ocelli, and the
Organ of Tomoésvary all essentially equal in
size. Prosternum: very sparsely clothed with
long, pale setae; chitin-lines complete; teeth
2 + 2, a line through their apices so slightly
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 11
recurved as to appear essentially straight;
medial diastema narrow, acute, strictly V-shaped;
porodonts setiform, conspicuous, their tips de-
flected medially. Tergites: sparsely setose;
slightly rugose; like the head relatively coarsely
areolate; non produced; posterior margins of
major tergites either straight or only slightly
incised; greatest width of the tenth is 0.75 mm.
Legs: anterior tarsi entirely without evidence of
division; tarsus 15 without accessory claws, with
pretarsus only, pretarsus 14 with only the inner
accessory claw, the outer (setiform) accessory
not apparent; ventral tarsal vestiture distinctly
denser than that of other leg articles; no coxa
laterally armed, coxal pores of both right and
left sides, 2, 3, 3, 2; legs 15, as usual, very long,
excluding the coxa 2.3 mm, legs 14 excluding
coxa 1.8 mm long; ultimate tibia 2.33 times
longer than greatest width (measured from
above), distally with a distinct setose, glandular,
dorsomedial lobe, this pierced by a conspicuous,
pigmented gland canal.
Plectrotaxy: whereC = coxa, T = trochanter,
P = prefemur, F = femur, Ti = tibia; and a
= anterior, m = medial, p = posterior.
Dorsal Ventral
C P EF Ti a P 1p Ti
1 pila ja m m
2 p | ap | ¢ m m
3 p | ap| ¢ am m
4 pj apja | am m
5 | p|ap|a | am m
6 p|ap|a am m
7 p | ap|a am m
8 p | ap; ap p jam m
9 p | ap} ap p jam am
10 p p | ap | p jam am
11 mp p| ap p jam am
12 | a mp 1) |] 12} mp jam am
13 | a mp | p]| p amp jam(p)| am
14) a mp p m | amp jam
15 | a | amp p m | amp jam
CONCERNING GARIBIUS OPICOLENS AND
PAGOKETES CHAMBERLIN AND BRANNERI
(BOLLMAN)
According to Chamberlin (op. cit., pp. 62,
63), the chief distinction between pagoketes and
opicolens is the presence in the former of two
pairs of laterally-armed posterior coxae and of
only one pair in the latter. Also, spur-series
VTiA begins on leg 2 in Chamberlin’s type of
opicolens, and on 7 in the type of pagoketes. My
‘
NOVEMBER 1957
examination of a series of specimens referable to
opicolens shows clearly that samples always
have either one or two pairs of coxae laterally
armed, so that the significant distinction in
Garibius seems to be between: 1) specimens
without any lateral coxal armature (e.g. georgiae
and psychrophilus); and 2) specimens with lateral
spurs at least on the 15th coxae. In the same
material the anterior limit of VTiA was found
to vary greatly, from leg 1 through leg 8, so that
distinguishing between the two forms on this
basis seems meaningless. All available evidence
considered, opicolens and pagoketes appear to be
conspecific. Invoking the right of the first reviser,
T select opicolens, whose full description has page
priority, as the senior synonym of pagoketes.
It is also likely that both Chamberlin species
are referable to an older name, Lithobius (=
Garibius) brannert Bollman, which was _ based
upon seven specimens captured at Knoxville,
Tennessee. Unfortunately we cannot be positive
of this synonymy, for the original description
permits no more than a generic assignment, and
none of the National Museum’s cotypes is suffi-
ciently complete to permit a solution to the
problem. Proyisionally, then, it seems necessary
to regard branneri as species inquirendae.
ord
CRABILL: A NEW GARIBIUS FROM VIRGINIA 377
KEY TO THE NORTH AMERICAN SPECIES OF GARIBIUS
(la) DFP present on 15, i.e. 15D=10310 or
OPO ES ernie etal nie oreaatig Sou he es Bn, cept atte ceeraeees 2
(2a) 15D=10310. DPM _ begins approxi-
mately on 11. VFP begins approxi-
mately on 13. VPP begins approxi-
mately on 8. No coxa laterally armed.
ee aha ea . psychrophilus, n.sp.
(2b) 15D=10210. DPM begins on 1-3. VFP
begins on 1-38. VPP begins on 1-3.
At least coxae 15 laterally armed
ae AA iA TEER catawbae Chamberlin
(1b) DFP absent on 15, i.e., 15D=10200....... 3
(BH) WAAL lweeiine Om OH 3 0 oacnccsaccavcen 4
(4a) No coxae laterally armed. DPP
begins on 1-3. georgiae Chamberlin
(4b) At least coxae 15 laterally
armed. DPP begins approxi-
OI OL Was oo coon wobauao oy OO
_.........alabamae Chamberlin
@o) WAL losing On NEB, ..ooccusccovcccdae 5
(5a) VPF begins approximately on 8
....mississtpptensis Chamberlin
(Ob) VBR ibecinsfonel=3eaas see 6
(6a) VPA absent onlland12.........
Bee ure anes opicolens Chamberlin
(6b) VPA present on 11 and 12.......
eA a8 monticolens Chamberlin?
3 This may be a valid point of distinction, for
one each of my specimens of opicolens—of what-
ever stage of epimorphic development and in
adults—VPA begins on 13, never on 11 or 12.
STANDARD MUSICAL PITCH
One of the lesser known services of the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards is the broadcasting
of a musical tone of standard pitch—middle “A”
at 440 cycles per second—over its shortwave sta-
tions WWV (Beltsville, Md.) and WWVH (Maui,
Hawai). These broadcasts make standard pitch
available day and night throughout the United
States and over much of the world. Since a short-
wave receiver is all that is needed, easy access to
standard pitch is thus provided for piano tuners
and amateur and professional musicians, as well
as for makers of musical instruments.
A 600-c/s tone is also broadcast. This, together
with the 440-c/s tone, is used by scientists, elec-
tronics engineers, and manufacturers in the meas-
urement of short intervals of time and for cali-
brating instruments and devices that operate in
the audio and ultrasonic frequency ranges. Both
the 440- and the 600-c/s tones are obtained from
an electronic, crystal-controlled oscillator and
are accurate, as transmitted, to better than 1 part
in 100,000,000.
The two frequencies are broadcast alternately,
starting with 600 c/s on the hour for 3 minutes,
interrupted 2 minutes, followed by 440 c/s for 3
minutes and interrupted 2 minutes. Each 10-
minute period is the same except that WWV is
off the air for 4 minutes beginning at 45 minutes
after each hour; and WWVH is silent, in addition,
for a 34-minute period each day beginning at 1900
Universal Time (9 a.m. in Hawaii or 2 p.m.
Wits 1o))c
To provide greater assurance of reliable recep-
tion, transmissions from the NBS stations are
made simultaneously on several standard broad-
cast frequencies. WWV broadcasts on 2.5, 5, 10,
15, 20, and 25 Mc (megacyecles per second) and
WWVH broadcasts on 5, 10, and 15 Me.
In this country, A = 440 c/s has been accepted
as standard pitch since 1925. Initially, this value
378
was agreed upon by the Music Industries Cham-
ber of Commerce as a useful compromise among
the various pitches chosen arbitrarily by different
musical groups. In 1936 the same pitch standard
was adopted by the American Standards Associa-
tion giving it the status of an industrial standard.
Three years later the International Federation of
the National Standardizing Associations (ISA)!
sponsored a conference in London. France,
Germany, Great Britain, Holland, and Italy sent
delegates, and the United States and Switzerland
sent official messages. Six of the seven countries
independently proposed A = 440 as the standard
and the conference adopted it unanimously. The
same standard was again endorsed by the Inter-
national Organization for Standardization (ISO)
in 1953; and was accepted as an ISO Recommen-
dation in 1955.
The National Bureau of Standards maintains
the A = 440 standard as the one on which general
agreement has been reached. The musical merits
of any particular standard are, of course, outside
its province.
EARLIER PITCH STANDARDS
Previous standards of pitch? were defined in
terms of the frequency of a particular tuning fork
or bar, or the length of a specified vibrating air
column (organ pipe). Since the sound frequencies
generated by these devices vary with the sur-
rounding temperature, it is necessary to specify
the temperature at which comparisons with these
standards should be made.
In 1859 the ‘Diapason Normal” was defined in
terms of a standard tuning fork deposited by the
French Government at the Paris Conservatory of
Music. The vibration frequency of this fork was
stated to be 435 c/s when measured at the then
standard laboratory temperature of 15°C. When
R. Koenig (1880) made a careful determination
of the frequency, it proved to be 435.45 c/s at
15°C and to have a thermal coefficient of — 0.0486
c/s per degree Centigrade. Thus the fork would
really have the defined standard frequency at
slightly over 24°C.
An international congress in Vienna in 1891
adopted the French definition of the Diapason
1 This has now been superseded by the Interna-
tional Organization for Standardization (ISO).
2 A history of earlier standards of pitch is ap-
pended to the English translation of Sensations of
Tone, by Helmholtz, translated by A. Ellis, pub-
lished by Longmans, Green & Co., New York,
1895 (reprinted by Dover, New York, 1957). A
history of British standards of pitch is given in the
folder British concert pitch, published by British
Standards Institution, 28 Victoria Street, London
So Vivo JL
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 11
Normal, and it acquired the name of ‘‘Interna-
tional Pitch.” Great Britain and the United
States apparently did not attend this meeting,
though A = 485 was used as a standard by a
number of musical groups and instrument makers
in this country after its adoption by the Vienna
congress.
In many places the pitch standards in actual
use were strongly influenced by the way large,
permanently installed pipe organs were tuned.
Yet, of all the mechanical devices used to gen-
erate musical frequencies, the vibrating air
column of the pipe organ is the most sensitive to
changes in temperature. Their frequency would
therefore depend on what the temperature hap-
pened to be when they were adjusted to conform
to the standard fork in the Conservatory at Paris.
Since the advent of better heating systems and
air conditioning, the temperature at which most
musical instruments are used today (in the United
States, at least) is better represented by 20°C
(68°F) than by the temperature of 15°C (59°F)
associated with the Diapason Normal. Luckily,
an organ pipe tuned to A = 435 at 15°C will
actually be tuned almost exactly to A = 440 at
20°C.
ADVANTAGES OF PRESENT STANDARD
From a technical point of view, the present
standard of musical pitch, as maintained by the
Bureau, has the advantage that it is free from
the vagaries of the material objects (tuning forks,
organ pipes) that embodied past standards.
Thanks to modern electronic techniques for
generating and stabilizing oscillations, a tone is
produced that for all practical purposes is inde-
pendent of the temperature of the surroundings.
This would apply, of course, to any musical
frequency that might be chosen. It happens,
however, that the 440-c/s frequency stands in a
very simple relation to other frequency standards
maintained by the Bureau and can therefore be
produced with a minimum of additional equip-
ment. A tone of 435 c/s for example, would re-
quire a somewhat more complicated technical
arrangement.
In changing over to Standard Pitch, little or
no alteration is necessary in adjusting instru-
ments tuned to the older standard. Instruments
tuned by string tension and the open vibrating
air columns of pipe organs present no problems
at all. Woodwinds can be corrected partly by the
tuning adjustment of the instrument and partly
by the breath control of the player; and changes
required in the reed stops of the organ are within
the range of the instrument’s tuning adjustments.
NOVEMBER 1957
BAYER: WESTERN ATLANTIC OCTOCORALS
379
ZOOLOGY —A additional records of Western Atlantic octocorals. FREDERICK M.
Bayer, U.S. National Museum.
(Received April 23, 1957)
Since the publication of my paper record-
ing a number of species of Octocorallia from
the Gulf of Mexico (1952), several additions
and corrections have come to light, thanks
chiefly to the work of the U. 8. Fish and
Wildlife Service m/v Oregon and the interest
of Stewart Springer and Harvey Bullis. I
take this opportunity to place this informa-
tion on record.
Exploratory trawlings upon the shrimp
grounds in the Gulf of Mexico have yielded
several interesting sea-pens, a group not well
known in the Gulf of Mexico. These are de-
scribed and figured below, together with a
list of new records of Gorgonacea.
Order PENNATULACEA
Family PRoTOPTILIDAE
Protoptilum thomsonii Kolliker
Fig. 1b
Protoptilum Thomsonii Kolliker, Abh. Senckenb.
Naturf. Ges. 8: 195, pl. 24, figs. 220-222. 1872.
Protoptilum thomsoni Jungersen, Ingolf-Exped. 5
(1): 52, pl. 1, figs. 4-8 (Danish ed.). 1904.
Protoptilum thomsoni Bayer, Journ. Washington
Aead. Sei. 42: 189. 1952.
The specimens before me agree with Kélliker’s
description in all essentials except size, and they
are in excellent conformity with Jungersen’s
later description and figures. They do not, how-
ever, agree with the key characterization given
by Deichmann (1936, p. 264: “anthocodia with
no spicules in the body wall’) which, further-
more, is in contradiction to Jungersen’s descrip-
tion.
The largest specimen is basally incomplete,
lacking stalk entirely. The part preserved is
30.5 cm in length, with nearly round, naked axis
3 mm in diameter projecting another 1 cm. The
distal tip is recurved just as shown by Junger-
sen. The rhachis has a maximum diameter of
6-7 mm; the autozooids occur in 3 irregular rows
on each side of the rhachis and are further ori-
ented in more or less transverse or oblique rows.
The adherent, apically directed calyces show
only a vague suggestion of 2 or 3 marginal teeth.
The autozooids are exsert and have spicules in
bands on the 38 abaxial tentacles, extending
downward on the body wall between the septa.
Except for a dorsal track about 2 mm wide, the
entire surface of the rhachis between the auto-
zooid calyces is occupied with siphonozooids.
Near the naked dorsal track the siphonozooids
are arranged in quincunxial order between the
autozooid calyces, but opposite them the sipho-
nozooids are crowded and irregularly distributed.
The colony is very pale flesh-color, the colored
spicules being only faintly pink.
The other specimens collected by the Oregon
agree with the above in all significant features.
All are fragmentary, lacking both apex and
stalk. They are of smaller size than the specimen
described, the smallest having a major diameter
of about 3 mm. The autozooids show some varia-
tion in spiculation, some specimens having the
rows of needles in the tentacles extending down
the body wall between the septa either as narrow
bands or spreading out to cover the body wall
completely. All 8 tentacles may have strong
spiculation. Many of the spicules in the autozooid
calyces and rhachis are pink or red, imparting
an over-all reddish color to the colonies.
Fragments of Protoptilum were obtained at
two stations off Puerto Rico by the Johnson-
Smithsonian Deepsea Expedition. They are too
small to be determined with any great assurance
but probably represent P. thomsonii.
Type locality.—North Atlantic, lat. 36° 37’
N., long. 7° 38’ W., 322 fathoms; Porcupine
Expedition, 1869.
Records.—Gulf of Mexico, off Alabama and
Louisiana (Bayer, 1952). Now reported off the
coast of Texas: 27° 01.4’ N., 96° 16.8’ W., 200-
280 fathoms, Oregon station 548, April 8, 1952;
also 27° 03’ N., 96° 16’ W., 210 fathoms, Oregon
station 1093, June 4, 1954.
Family VIRGULARIIDAE
Virgularia presbytes Bayer
Virgularia mirabilis Bayer, Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 42: 189. 1952.
Virgularia presbytes Bayer, Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 45: 295, figs. 1, 2a-3e. 1955.
This species has been previously recorded
from localities from Corpus Christi, Tex., to
380
Mobile, Ala., and from the east coast of Florida
north of Cape Canaveral. Since 1955 it has been
collected at the following additional localities:
Off Jacksonville, Fla., 30° 13’ N., 80° 41’ W.,
15-16 fathoms, Pelican station 33, April 23,
1956; off Jacksonville, Fla., 30° 04’ N., 80° 23’
W., 25 fathoms, Bowers station 30, March 9,
1956; south of Cape Fear, N. C., 383° 19’ N.,
XY
<
»
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 11
78° O7’ W., 17 fathoms, Bowers station 59,
March 17, 1956.
The specimens from the above localities are
in full accord with the description published in
1955.
The distribution of this species in the northern
Gulf of Mexico and along the Atlantic coast
conforms with what I have called the ‘Carolin-
Fic. 1.—a, Stylatula elegans (Danielssen), lateral view showing four polyp-leaves; 6, Protoptilum
thomsonii Kolliker, lateral view of part of rhachis showing distribution of siphonozooids and auto-
zooids; c, Acanthoptilum oligacis, n. sp., polyp-leaf and adjacent rhachis showing arrangement of sipho-
nozooids and distribution of spicules in autozooids; d, Acanthoptilum agassizii Kolliker, polyp-leaf and
adjacent rhachis showing arrangement of siphonozooids and distribution of spicules in autozooids.
(5-mm scale applies to a and 6; 1-mm scale to c-d.)
NOVEMBER 1957 BAYER: WESTERN
ian” pattern. If the fossil specimens from the
Tertiary of Trinidad are specifically identical, as
I have suggested, the species was formerly dis-
tributed more widely than present records indi-
eate. Such may prove still to be the case when
eareful collecting is done in the West Indies.
Stylatula antillarum Kolliker
Stylatula antillarum Wd6lliker, Abh.
Naturf. Ges. 7: 568. 1872.
Senckenb.
Kolliker’s type, from the Paris Museum, had
9 leaves in 20 mm of rhachis; at least 26 polyps
(autozooids) in each leaf, arranged in a single
row; calyces 0.24-0.30 mm broad, containing
ealeareous needles; a spicular plate (beneath the
leaves) containing 7 or 8 large needles, smaller
than in S. darwinit but still well developed. The
sizes of spicules from various regions of the type
are given in the table below, compared with
measurements of spicules from specimens taken
in the Gulf of Mexico by the Oregon.
Kolliker’s type | Oregon specimens
Length | Width | Length | Width
(mm) | (mm) (mm) (mm)
Large needles of spic-|
ular plate .......... | 1.8-2.4 | 0.12-0.20 | 1.8-2.0 | 0.25-0.30
Smaller needles of spic-
ular plate........... 0.44-0.60,0.055-0.066) 0.6-1.0 |0.035-0.06
Needles of autozooid |
calycessime! eas. 0.11-0.13)0.011-0.016|0.17-0.25| 0.015
The present specimens are referable to Styla-
tula antillarum but differ from Kélliker’s ma-
terial in some regards. The specimens before me
have only 4-6 leaves in 20 mm of rhachis (com-
pared with 9 in the type). There are 8-12 large
needles in the spicular plate, more numerous and
stouter than in the type. The smaller needles of
the plate and those of the calyces and tentacles
also are somewhat larger. The tentacles are filled
with small needles, which extend into the pin-
nules.
Neither of the species of Stylatula with widely
spaced leaves (elegans and brasiliensis) has so
many polyps in each leaf. Of the species with
needles in the tentacles, only S. lacazii and S.
antillarum have as high a number of polyps in
the leaves as the present specimens. The spicular
plate of S. lacaziz is much weaker than in the
material now under consideration, which conse-
quently agrees most closely with Stylatula antitl-
larum. When numerous specimens from several
ATLANTIC OCTOCORALS 381
West Indian and South American localities are
available for a study of individual and geo-
graphical variation, the status of the various
described species may be clarified.
Type locality.—‘‘Antilles”’ (Paris Museum).
Records.—Off Cape San Blas, Fla.: 29° 30.9’
N., 86° 10.6’ W., 55 fathoms; Oregon station 604,
July 12, 1952. Off Mississippi Delta: 28° 55’ W.,
100 fathoms; Oregon station 1421, September 23,
1955.
Stylatula elegans (Danielssen)
Fig. la
Virgularia elegans Danielssen, Forh. Vid. Selsk.
Christiania (1859) : 277. 1860.
Stylatula elegans Deichmann, Mem. Mus. Comp.
Zool. 58: 270. 1936.
A number of fragmentary specimens, mostly
10-12 cm in length and lacking both apex and
stalk, were taken in 180 fathoms off Cape Cana-
veral, Fla., by the Pelican.
The polyp-leaves are openly spaced and regu-
larly paired, 3 or 4 pairs in 2 cm of rhachis; a
conspicuous spicular fan containing 10-12 large
needles supports each leaf. The leaves consist of
3-7 large, well-separated autozooids. In each leaf
the autozooid nearest the naked dorsal tract is
longest, as much as 7 mm long in preserved
material. A band of needles occurs in the tentacle
backs and for some distance down the polyp
body. In the proximal part of the leaves, where
the autozooids are fused together, conspicuous
bands of spicules follow the lines of fusion be-
tween the autozooids and merge with the spicules
of the supporting fan. The siphonozooids occur
laterally on the rhachis in triangular clusters
above each polyp-leaf (i.e., in the axils) and are
thus hidden from view.
The features noted above agree well with
K6lliker’s description of the species except for
the somewhat larger number of needles in the
supporting fan or plate, and the presence of
spicules on the polyp-bodies. Deichmann (1936,
p. 270) does not mention spicules in the polyp-
bodies, but notes about ten needles in the sup-
porting fan. A specimen dredged south of Cape
Fear by the Albatross has spicules in the polyp-
bodies, but another, from off Chesapeake Bay,
lacks them. Specimens from Japan lack the body
spicules and consequently agree precisely with
the typical form.
Type locality.—Off Molde, Norway,
meters.
25-50
382
Records.—West Atlantic. Off Cape Canaveral,
Fla.: 28° 22’ N., 79° 53’ W., 180 fathoms; Peli-
can station 18, March 11, 1956. South of Cape
Fear, N. C.: 32° 53’ 00” N., 77° 53’ 00” W., 99
fathoms; Albatross station 2313, January 5, 1885.
Off Chesapeake Bay: 37° 59’ 30” N., 73° 48’
40” W., 444 fathoms, Albatross station 2171,
July 20, 1884.
East Pacific. Entrance to Port Heda, Honshu,
North 49°, east 1.9 miles, 161-167 fathoms;
Albatross station 3737, May 17, 1900. (Not re-
corded from Japan by Balss, 1910, or by Nut-
ting, 1912.)
Genus Acanthoptilum Koélliker
The genus Acanthoptilum includes long, slen-
der sea-pens with well-formed polyp-leaves con-
sisting of completely or mostly fused autozooids
decreasing in length dorsoventrally; siphonozo-
oids in single or multiple rows on each side of
the dorsal tract, between the autozooid leaves.
Spiculation weak to moderate, in the form of
needles and, in some species, biscuit-shaped
platelets. In most species a cluster of needles at
the base of each leaf represents the supporting
fan or spicular plate found in the allied genus
Stylatula.
Two species of Acanthoptilum are described
from the western Atlantic, namely, A. powrta-
lesti Wolliker and A. agassizic Kolliker. The
latter of these is represented in the Oregon col-
lection. Also present is a specimen of Acanthop-
tilum that differs in specific characters from both
described species and which must, at least for
the present, be considered as a third western
Atlantic species.
Type species.—Acanthoptilum pourtalesti K6l-
liker, by subsequent designation, Kikenthal,
1915.
Acanthoptilum agassizii Kolliker
Fig. 1d
Acanthoptilum agassizii Kolliker, Abh. Senckenb.
Naturf. Ges. 7: 572, pl. 18, fig. 156; pl. 19, fig.
157. 1872.
Five specimens dredged off Pensacola, Fla.,
agree in the main with Kolliker’s original de-
scription. Discrepancies are attributable to the
larger size of the present material. They range
in length from 20 to 38 cm, compared with 17.5
cm in Kolliker’s specimen. The maximum length
of the leaves is about 4 mm, width at base about
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, No. 11
1 mm; autozooids 7. In the smallest specimen
the leaves are about 2.5 mm long and have only
5 autozooids. The polyp-leaves of all the speci-
mens are conspicuously but moderately spicu-
late. Abundant needles are longitudinally dis-
posed in the calycular part of the autozooids,
somewhat less numerous in the leaf proper;
spicules are more numerous along the dorsal
edge of the leaves; at the base of the leaves is a
clump of needles representing the spicular plate.
No biscuit-shaped sclerites are present. The
siphonozooids occur below each leaf in a single
row along the dorsal side of the rhachis. A few
small needles occur in the vicinity of the siphon-
ozooids, but not to the extent reported by K6l-
liker.
Type locality. —Off Carysfort Reef, Fla., 35
fathoms; L. F. de Pourtalés, March 21, 1869.
Records.—Off Pensacola, Fla.: 29° 41’ N., 87°
11’ W., 100 fathoms; Oregon station 1558, June
21, 1956.
Acanthoptilum oligacis, n. sp.
Fig. le
A large specimen, broken in two places and
missing a small part of the proximal end, meas-
ures 111 cm in length. The fully formed polyp-
leaves are 4-5 mm long, alternating on the
rhachis, 4-5 mm apart (closest basally and
apically). Leaves consisting of 10 autozooids
almost completely fused. Spiculation weak, con-
sisting of a few needles longitudinally disposed
in the calycular part of the autozooids. No
spicules in the middle and basal parts of the
leaves; no trace of a basal cluster of needles.
Siphonozooids in a double row on each side of
the dorsal tract, between the leaves; immediately
above each leaf the rows may irregularly increase
to 3. In the rhachis there are slightly constricted,
slipper- or biscuit-shaped platelets very sparsely
distributed. Axis round, white, smooth.
Holotype.—U.S.N.M. 50561: Gulf of Mexico,
off Mississippi Delta: 28° 17’ N., 89° 55’ W., 100
fathoms; Oregon station 1421, September 23,
1955.
Remarks.—The type of A. oligacis, n. sp.
much resembles the specimens of A. agassizit
just described but is a great deal larger. It is
characterized by the generally weak spiculation
and complete absence of the clumps of needles
in the leaf bases, and siphonozooids in double
rows. A. pourtalesii, which has its siphonozooids
NOVEMBER 1957 BAYER: WESTERN
in double rows, has strong groups of needles that
form a good supporting fan below each leaf, and
only 5 or 6 autozooids in the leaves.
Order GoRGONACEA
Family ANTHOTHELIDAE
Anthopodium rubens Verrill
Gulf of Mexico: East Bank, 30 miles off Free-
port, Tex. Collected by divers in about 5 fath-
oms depth, June 4, 1956. Received from Robert
H. Parker and Willis G. Hewatt. This is a new
record for the Gulf of Mexico and represents the
rediscovery of a species “lost” for 84 years. It
will be redescribed in detail in a subsequent
paper.
Family ACANTHOGORGIIDAE
Acanthogorgia schrammi (Duchassaing
and Michelotti)
Gulf of Mexico: Campeche Bank, west of
Yucatdn Peninsula: 21° 17’ N., 91° 18’ W., 20
fathoms (exceptionally shallow); Oregon station
1048, May 13, 1954. East of Mississippi Delta:
29° 06’ N., 88° 19’ W., 260 fathoms; Oregon
station 1283, March 13, 1955.
Family PARAMURICEIDAE
Bebryce grandis Deichmann
Gulf of Mexico: West of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
29° 30.9’ N., 86° 10.6’ W., 55 fathoms; Oregon
station 604, July 12, 1952. South of Galveston,
Tex: 27° 574’ N., 94° 54’ W., 50 fathoms;
Oregon station 539, April 16, 1952.
Echinomuricea atlantica (Johnson)
Fig. 2
Gulf of Mexico: Off Pensacola, Fla.: 29° 41’ N.,
87° 11’ W., 100 fathoms; Oregon station 1558,
June 21, 1956.
Placogorgia mirabilis Deichmann
Gulf of Mexico: South of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
28° 55’ N., 85° 07’ W., 29 fathoms; Oregon sta-
tion 892, March7, 1954.
Straits of Florida. NW. of Cay Sal Bank:
24° 03’ N., 80° 30’ W., 150 fathoms; Oregon
station 1349, July 1955.
Scleracis guadalupensis (Duchassaing
and Michelotti)
Gulf of Mexico: South of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
28° 50’ N., 85° 00’ W., 28 fathoms; Oregon sta-
ATLANTIC OCTOCORALS
383
tion 897, March 7, 1954. South of Mobile, Ala-
bama: 29° 26’ N., 87° 33’ W., 41-42 fathoms;
Oregon station 793, June 9, 1953.
Swiftia exserta (Ellis and Solander)
Gulf of Mexico: Off Sarasota, Fla., Robert H.
Stewart. [Haul b-170.]
Thesea grandiflora grandiflora Deichmann
Gulf of Mexico: West of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
29° 30.9’ N., 86° 10.6’ W., 55 fathoms; Oregon
station 604, July 12, 1952.
Ze Rotae Kod
: Be Ones
. eon meet PEAS
OOS ERE BYES eG
¥ v : RD :
Sept sx fee ee Ges * aS
Pg 8 hg toe ue
YO 4 hE
ope ey
Fic.
Spicules of: a, Calyx walls; b, cortex; c, antho-
codia. (All figures at same magnification.)
2.—Echinomuricea atlantica (Johnson):
Thesea grandiflora rugulosa Deichmann
Gulf of Mexico: West of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
29° 30.9’ N., 86° 10.6’ W., 55 fathoms, Oregon
station 604, July 12, 1952.
Thesea hebes Deichmann
Straits of Yucatan: NE. of Cape Catoche,
Yucatdn: 22° 40.2’ N., 86° 36.6’ W., 206 fathoms;
Oregon station 590, April 19, 1950.
384
Thesea plana Deichmann
Gulf of Mexico: South of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
28° 55’ N., 85° 07’ W., 29 fathoms; Oregon sta-
tion 892, March 7, 1954.
Genus Trachymuricea Deichmann
The genus Trachymuricea was established by
BE. Deichmann (1936:132) to include Pourtalés’
Acanthogorgia hirta (type species) and Broch’s
Paramuricea kiikenthali. The type species is
known from Bahia Honda, Florida Keys, and
is recorded from Blake stations 166 and 176 off
Barbados, although the latter specimens are
lost. Paramuricea kiikenthali Broch was _ origi-
nally recorded from the lower littoral and upper
abyssal of Trondhjemsfjord, Norway, and later
by Aurivillius (1931) from the same locality, in
100-250 meters and 300-350 meters.
The rind sclerites with a conical or pyramidal
central process are very similar in form to the
spicules of Villogorgia, which, however, regularly
have 4 rootlike projections. The calycular scle-
rites are fusiform, longitudinally placed, with a
slanting, laciniated projection, whereas in Villo-
gorgia they have several spreading root processes
that make the spicules wider than long. Trachy-
muricea differs from Paramuricea in its large
number of collaret and opercular spicules.
Specimens agreeing in every particular with
Broch’s original description of Paramuricea
kiikenthali have recently been collected in the
Gulf of Mexico by the Oregon. They are per-
fectly distinct from the type species, and I give
below a brief description and figures of the
spicules.
Trachymuricea kiikenthali (Broch)
Fig. 3
Colonies much broken. Branching irregular,
lateral, but mostly in one plane, straggling.
Largest stems about 5 mm in diameter, end
twigs 3 mm. Axis woody, rather fragile because
of the abundant loculation of the cortex and
unusually wide, soft medula. Coenechyme thin,
with a thin inner layer and a thicker outer layer;
outer layer containing irregularly fusiform scle-
rites, many of them with a single, central, prickly,
pyramidal process. The inner layer is poor in
spicules, none of which have the central process.
The calyces are about 1.5 mm tall; with the con-
tacted anthocodiae, 3-4 mm. They are widely
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 11
separated, irregularly scattered, and more nu-
merous at the twig tips which therefore appear
somewhat clavate. The calycular walls contain
fusiform sclerites with a terminal or subterminal,
slanting projection. The anthocodiae have nu-
merous rows of curved, transversely placed
spindles in the collaret, and many bent “hockey-
stick” rods en chevron in each tentacle base.
Alternating with the 8 opercular segments are
8 rows of small rods lying along the septal inser-
tions.
Type locality.—Trondhjemsfjord, Norway; in
lower littoral and upper abyssal.
Record.—Gulf of Mexico. Off Mississippi
Delta: 29° 06’ N., 88° 19’ W., 260 fathoms;
Oregon station 1283, March 13, 1955.
Color in life. —‘‘Hell rosa”? (Broch); no record
of the life colors of the specimens from Oregon
station 1283.
Remarks.—The bottom temperature was
50.7°F. Collected at the same time were Acan-
thogorgia schrammi (Duchassaing and Miche-
lotti) and a large, arborescent antipatharian.
Trachymuricea hirta (Pourtalés)
Gulf of Mexico: South of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
28° 55’ N., 85° 07’ W., 29 fathoms; Oregon sta-
tion 892, March 7, 1954. This species differs from
T. kikenthali (Broch) in its more slender
branches, smaller calyeces, and rougher project-
ing processes of rind and calyx sclerites.
Villogorgia nigrescens Duchassaing
and Michelotti
Gulf of Mexico: West of Cape San Blas, Fla.:
29° 30.9’ N., 86° 10.6’ W., 55 fathoms; Oregon
station 604, July 19, 1952.
Family ELLIsELLIDAE
I have already discussed the nomenclatural
difficulties of the ‘‘Gorgonellidae” (1955) and
altered the familial designation to Hllisellidae.
The West Indian representatives of this family
belong to the genera Ellisella (=Scirpearia of
many authors) Nicella, and Riisea. The genus
Junceella has been reported from the area
(Duchassaing and Michelotti; Wright and Stu-
der; Toeplitz) but probably in error. A specimen
reported below (Hllisella grandis) suggests a pos-
sible source of this error.
There is probably no family of Gorgonacea
NOVEMBER 1957 BAYER: WESTERN ATLANTIC OCTOCORALS 385
more sharply defined than the Ellisellidae or one
whose species are more difficult to recognize. It
is therefore insufficient to offer locality records
for any particular species without a documentary
basis for the identification. Deichmann’s mono-
graph (1936) illustrates the spicules of the
species known from the Western Atlantic and
forms the basis for the present determinations.
The spicules illustrating the species reported
herein are drawn at the same magnification used
by Miss Deichmann, so as to facilitate direct
comparison of my drawings with hers.
Fre. 3.—Trachymuricea kiikenthali (Broch) : a, Tip of branch showing calyces and exsert anthocodiae;
b, asymmetrical calycular thorn-scales; c, thorn-scales of stem rind; d, simple spindle and irregular
bodies of inner cortex; e, spicules of operculum; f, spicules of tentacles. (0.5-mm scale applies to b-f.)
Ellisella atlantica (Toeplitz)
Fig. 4a
Gulf of Mexico: South of Terrebonne Bay,
La.: 28° 06’ N., 91° 02’ W., 29 fathoms; Oregon
station 1416, September 21, 1955.
The calyces are prominent, irregularly bi-
serial, more or less upturned. Color (in alcohol)
dark orange with yellowish or whitish calyces,
as reported by Deichmann; spicules in agree-
ment with her figures (1936:206, pl. 24, figs.
20-28a).
Ellisella barbadensis (Duchassaing
and Michelott1)
Fig. 4b
Gulf of Mexico: South of Mobile, Ala.: 29° 26’
N., 87° 33’ W., 41-42 fathoms; Oregon station
793, June 9, 1953.
The calyces are 1.5-2.0 mm tall, biserial, up-
turned, and more or less appressed. Color (dry)
orange, the calyces slightly paler than the sur-
face of the rind. Spicules in agreement with
Deichmann’s illustrations (1936:208, pl. 24,
figs. 1-19).
Ellisella elongata (Pallas)
Fig. 4e-f .
Gulf of Mexico: Off Fort Walton, Fla., 13-14
fathoms; Frank Lyman, June 3-4, 1947. West
of Cape San Blas, Fla.: 29° 33’ N., 86° 13.2’ W.,
60 fathoms; Oregon station 603, July 12, 1952.
The two colonies from the northern Gulf of
Mexico are identical both in external form and
in details of spiculation. They are branched
several times near the base, sending up long,
nearly straight, rather stiff branches. The caly-
ces are placed in lateral bands of 2 or 3, usually
retracted as low mounds. The spicules are in
good agreement with Deichmann’s illustration,
but the double clubs are slightly larger than in
her specimens (1936:212, p. 24, figs. 46-48). The
rind is reddish orange, the calyces yellow.
Ellisella funiculina (Duchassaing
and Michelotti)
Fig. 4g
Gulf of Mexico: South of Pensacola, Fla.: 29°
41’ N., 87° 11’ W., 100 fathoms; Oregon station
1558, June 21, 1956.
The colonies are slender, with cylindrical caly-
ces placed biserially. Color (in alcohol) white.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 11
Spicules in agreement with Deichmann’s illus-
tration (1936:210, pl. 24, figs. 29-36).
Ellisella grandis (Verrill)
Fig. 4ce-d
Caribbean Sea: South east of Jamaica: 17°
44’ 05” N., 75° 39’ 00” W., 23 fathoms; Albatross
station 2138, February 29, 1883.
Lesser Antilles: Barbados: Cable station east,
south by east, Paynes Bay Church northeast,
offshore 24 mile; 35-75 fathoms, sand and rock;
University of Iowa Barbados-Antigua Expedition
station 78, June 3, 1918.
Two records extend the known range con-
siderably southward into the West Indies. The
specimen from Albatross station 2138 is incom-
plete, consisting of a large branch with two
bifurcations. The calyces are placed in 2 or 3
rows along the two sides of the branches; in the
lower part of the specimen they are tall and tu-
bular, but toward the end of one of the branches
they are contracted to low hillocks. The spicules
(Fig. 4, c) are in close agreement with the figures
given by Deichmann (1936:214, pl. 24, figs. 42—
45). The specimen from Barbados consists
of three fragments, including the base, of an
apparently unbranched young colony; the caly-
ces are contracted to low warts throughout. Its
spicules (Fig. 4, d) are consistently assymmetri-
cal, a tendency noted in this species by Deich-
mann, but otherwise like those of the type.
Wright and Studer’s Juncella barbadensis could
have been such a specimen of FE. grandis. The
colonies are very similar in appearance to those
of EH. elongata, with a tendency to branch several
times, producing long, straight end-branches;
the color is dark orange-red with yellow calyces.
Miss Deichmann has already suggested that £.
grandis might be a synonym of EH. elongata, but
has noted that the calycular rods of the former
seem always to be longer than those of elongata.
This feature is noted also in the present material,
which indicates that the two forms should be
maintained separately.
Family CHRYSOGORGIIDAE
Radicipes gracilis (Verrill)
Nicholas Channel: SE. of Cay Sal Bank: 22°
55’ N., 79° 16’ W., 240 fathoms; Oregon station
1341, July 1955. There are a number of records
in the U. S. National Museum from localities off
Georges Bank, Nantucket, and Block Island in
NovEMBER 1957 BAYER: WESTERN ATLANTIC OCTOCORALS 3
RY , A
AS VW, re m2
~~ As oO yp) (
> | (
ee -e &S » ( 4 aye aX,
(wr =~ (E
O™Y DS) O (oy) >)
wos 5 OO
ir
om
¥
tn?
9 Og
¢ O Os 1) ore)
se) J Co
aS | c
CL te
Soon rh
OC: vy
caee
ia
STN
SS
EN
= G
2 ICE
a
SESS
ee
—C—~
Nea
as
LAC)
ZS
se.
Fie. 4.—Spicules of: a, Ellisella atlantica (Toeplitz); b, Ellisella barbadensis (Duchassaing and Miche-
lotti); c, Ellisella grandis (Verrill); d, Ellisella grandis (Verrill), specimen with asymmetrical spicules;
e, Ellisella elongata (Pallas), specimen from Fort Walton, Fla.; f, Ellisella elongata (Pallas), specimen
from Oregon station 603; g, Ellisella funiculina (Duchassaing and Michelotti).
388
depths from 858 to 1,813 fathoms; also two
records from off northern Florida, 270 and 273
fathoms. The present material, from off Cay Sal
Bank, constitutes the southernmost record for
the species.
Family PRIMNOIDAE
Callogorgia verticillata (Pallas)
Straits of Yucatan: NE. of Cape Catoche,
Yucatan: 22° 40.2’ N., 86° 36.6’ W., 206 fath-
oms; Oregon station 590, April 19, 1950.
Gulf of Campeche: Campeche Bank, west of
Yucatan Peninsula: 21° 17’ N., 91° 18’ W., 20
fathoms; Oregon station 1048, May 138, 1954.
Gulf of Mexico: South of Mobile, Ala.: 29°
12’ N., 88° 34’ W., 32 fathoms; Oregon station
817, August 5, 1953.
Nicholas Channel: SE. of Cay Sal Bank: 22°
55’ N., 79° 16’ W., 240 fathoms, Oregon station
1341, July 1955.
Plumarella goési Aurivillius
Nicholas Channel: SE. of Cay Sal Bank: 22°
55’ N., 79° 16’ W., 240 fathoms; Oregon station
1341, July 1955.
Plumarella pourtalesii (Verrill)
Nicholas Channel: SE. of Cay Sal Bank: 22°
55’ N., 79° 16’ W., 240 fathoms; Oregon station
1341, July 1955.
Straits of Florida: NW. of Cay Sal Bank: 24°
03’ N., 80° 30’ W., 150 fathoms; Oregon station
1349, July 1955.
Family IstprpaE
Acanella eburnea (Pourtalés)
Gulf of Mexico: SW. of Dry Tortugas, Fla.:
24° 16’ N., 83° 22’ W., 375 fathoms; Oregon
station 1019, April 16, 1954. South of Pasca-
goula, Miss.: 29° 01’ N., 88° 24’ W., 355-475
fathoms; Oregon station 640, September 19, 1954.
ZOOGEOGRAPHICAL REMARKS
The aleyonarian fauna of the Gulf of
Mexico is divided into a northern shallow-
water element comprised of species that
range northward to Chesapeake Bay, skip-
ping south Florida, a southern shallow-water
element made up of West Indian species,
and a widespread deep-water element repre-
senting an extension of the Caribbean-West
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No 11
Indian fauna. Below about 100 fathoms, a
number of species appear that are known
from the north Atlantic or belong to genera
that flourish in cooler, northern waters.
The shallow water West Indian element
is best developed at the Dry Tortugas and
Key West, where many Antillean species,
such as Antzllogorgia acerosa, flourish. On
the Florida Bank the number of species
diminishes rapidly to the northward and few
species persist beyond the vicinity of Tampa.
Little is known of the aleyonarian fauna of
the Campeche Bank, because the most
favorable bottoms are too rough to be
dredged and so must be collected by hand.
Collectors do not go there. It is known, how-
ever, that the typically West Indian Antzl-
logorgia acerosa occurs there, and so it seems
probable that the other shallow-water species |
would belong to the same fauna. The extent |
of the fauna is completely unknown. The
northwest coast of Cuba is little better |
known, but it almost certainly has a purely |
West Indian fauna in both shallow and deep
water just as do the lower Florida Keys.
The limits of the shallow-water Caro-
linian element in the Gulf of Mexico are
demonstrated by the distribution of such
species as Leptogorgia virgulata (Lamarck),
which occurs from the Texas coast to west
Florida, skipping most of peninsular Florida,
to reoccur somewhere along the Atlantic
coast and extend north to the latitude of the
Virginia Capes. A few other species, includ-
ing Muricea pendula, Lophogorgia hebes, and
the newly rediscovered Anthopodium rubens
Vernill, follow this pattern, but the fauna is
not a very rich one.
The western Gulf coast, that is, the coast
of Texas south to perhaps Veracruz in
Mexico, so far as is known has a shallow-
water Carolinian fauna, including Anthopo-
dium rubens, Muricea pendula, Leptogorgia
virgulata, L. setacea, and Lophogorgia hebes,
and a deeper-water West Indian fauna rep-
resented by Bebryce grandis, Thesea plana,
and Ellisella atlantica. The only sea-pansy
on the coast of Texas seems to be Renilla
miillert, which extends south to Brazil, and
I am not sure that records of R. reniformis
from any part of the Gulf are correct. Addi-
tional dredging between 25 and 200 fathoms
should reveal a larger fauna, which I antici-
NOVEMBER 1957 BAYER: WESTERN
pate will be largely or entirely West Indian.
The appearance ot Trachymuricea ktiken-
thali in the northern Gulf of Mexico is a
matter of considerable interest. The type
locality and all subsequent records, until
now, are in Norway. Protoptilwm thomsonai,
which is also not rare in this region, likewise
was first described from the north Atlantic.
OCTOCORALLIA OF THE TORTUGAS
Shallow-water, down to about 24 fathoms.
West Indian species:
Briareum asbestinum
Muricea muricata
Muricea laxa
Eunicea mammosa
Eunicea calyculata
Bunicea tourneforti
Plexaura flexuosa
Plexaura porosa
Plexaurella dichotoma
Plexaurella nutans (= kunzet)
Antillogorgia acerosa
Antillogorgia rigida (= americana non Gmel.)
Antillogorgia bipinnata
Gorgonia flabellum
Pterogorgia anceps
Pterogorgia citrina
Pterogorgia guadalupensis
Deep-water species, deeper than 25 fathoms.
West Indian species:
Telesto sanguinea
Telesto flavula
Diodogorgia nodulifera
Tciligorgia schrammi
Bebryce cinerea
Echinomuricea atlantica
Placogorgia mirabilis
Placogorgia tenuis
Scleracis guadalupensis
Scleracis petrosa
Thesea citrina
Thesea grandiflora
Thesea plana
Thesea rugosa
Thesea solitaria
Villogorgia nigrescens
Nicella guadalupensis
Ellisella barbadensis
Ellisella funiculina
Ellisella grandis
Plumarella pourtalesii
' Callogorgia verticillata
Chrysogorgia desbonni
Chrysogorgia elegans
Trichogorgia viola
Acanella eburnea
Primnoisis humilis
Stylatula elegans
ATLANTIC OCTOCORALS 389
OCTOCORALLIA OF THE FLORIDA WEST COAST
Shallow water, down to about 25 fathoms.
Carolinian species (with southern limit):
Telesto sanguinea (Tortugas)
Leptogorgia virgulata (Sanibel I.)
Lophogorgia hebes (Key West)
West Indian species (with northern limit) :
Plexaura porosa (Tampa)
Plexaurella nutans (Tampa)
Antillogorgia acerosa (Tampa)
Antillogorgia rigida (Marco)
Pterogorgia anceps (Tampa)
Deeper water, more than 25 fathoms. (Paucity of
species probably due to inadequate collecting.)
Acanella eburnea
Leptogorgia euryale
Leptogorgia medusa
OCTOCORALLIA OF THE NORTHERN GULF
OF MEXICO FROM CAPE SAN BLAS,
FLORIDA, TO THE TEXAS COAST
Shallow water, down to about 25 fathoms.
Carolinian species:
Telesto flavula
Telesto sanguinea
Muricea pendula
Leptogorgia virgulata
Leptogorgia setacea
Lophogorgia hebes
Virgularia presbytes
West Indian species:
Thesea plana (Unusually shallow)
Renilla miilleri
Deeper than 25 fathoms.
West Indian species:
Acanthogorgia schrammi
Bebryce grandis
Echinomuricea atlantica
Scleracis guadalupensis
Placogorgia mirabilis
Swiftia exserta
Swiftia casta
Thesea grandiflora grandiflora
Thesea grandiflora rugulosa
[Thesea plana presumably occurs]
Villogorgia nigrescens
Ellisella elongata
Ellisella atlantica
Callogorgia verticillata
Leptogorgia stheno
Leptogorgia euryale
Leptogorgia medusa
390
Warm-water representatives of northern genera:
Trachymuricea kiikenthali*
Acanella eburnea
Funiculina quadrangularis*
Protoptilum thomsonii*
Acanthoptilum agassizit
Acanthoptilum oligacis n. sp.
Stylatula antillarum
* Species known from north Atlantic.
OCTOCORALLIA OF THE TEXAS COAST
Shallow water, down to about 25 fathoms:
Anthopodium rubens
Muricea pendula
Leptogorgia virgulata
Leptogorgia setacea
Lophogorgia hebes
Renilla miilleri
Virgularia presbytes
Deeper than 25 fathoms:
Bebryce grandis
Chrysogorgia elegans
Protoptilum thomsonii
OREGON STATIONS AT WHICH OCTOCORALLIA
WERE COLLECTED AND THE SPECIES
RECORDED FROM EACH
126. Protoptilum thomsonii Kolliker.
274. Renilla miillert Kolliker.
295. Muricea pendula Verrill;
virgulata Lamarck.
314. Protoptilum thomsonii Kolliker.
436. Antillogorgia acerosa (Pallas).
489. Acanella eburnea (Pourtalés) ; Chrysogorgia
Leptogorgia
534. Anthothela sp.
. Thesea plana Deichmann.
539. Bebryce grandis Deichmann.
548. Chrysogorgia elegans (Verrill); Protoptilum
thomsonii Kélliker.
549. Chrysogorgia elegans (Verrill).
590. Thesea hebes Deichmann;
verticillata (Pallas).
603. Ellisella elongata (Pallas).
604. Bebryce grandis Deichmann; Thesea grandi-
flora Deichmann; Thesea grandiflora rugulosa
Deichmann; Villogorgia nigrescens Duchassaing &
Michelotti; Stylatula antillarum Kolliker.
640. Acanella eburnea (Pourtalés).
793. Scleracis guadalupensis (Duchassaing and
Michelotti); Ellisella atlantica (Toeplitz).
817. Callogorgia verticillata (Pallas).
889. Telesto sanguinea Deichmann.
892. Telesto sanguinea Deichmann; Placogorgia
mirabilis Deichmann; Thesea plana Deichmann;
Trachymuricea hirta (Pourtaleés).
Callogorgia
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 11
897. Scleracis guadalupensis (Duchassaing and
Michelotti).
944. Leptogorgia stheno (Bayer).
945. Leptogorgia stheno (Bayer).
1003. Plexaurella nutans (Duchassaing and
Michelotti).
1004. Telesto riisec (Duchassaing and Miche-
lotti) ; Antillogorgia acerosa (Pallas); Eunicea sp.
1019. Acanella eburnea (Pourtalés).
1047. Muricea elongata Lamouroux.
1048. Acanthogorgia schrammi (Duchassaing
and Michelotti) ; Callogorgia verticillata (Pallas).
1098. Protoptiluwm thomsonii Kolliker.
1283. Acanthogorgia schrammi (Duchassaing
and Michelotti) ; Trachymuricea kukenthali (Broch).
1328. Plumarella pourtalesii (Verrill).
1341. Radicipes gracilis (Verrill); Plumarella
goést Aurivillius; Callogorgia verticillata (Pallas).
1343. Plumarella pourtalesii (Verrill); Callogor-
gia verticillata (Pallas).
1349. Placogorgia mirabilis Deichmann; Pluma-
rella poutalesi (Verrill).
1416. Ellisella atlantica (Toeplitz).
1421. Stylatula antillarum Kolliker.
1558. Acanthoptilum agassizii Kolliker.
REFERENCES
AurRIVILLius, Maenus. The gorgonarians from Dr.
Sixten Bock’s expedition to Japan and Bonin
Islands 1914. Kungl. Svenska Vet.-Akad.
Handl. (3) 9 (4): 1-337, 65 figs., 6 pls. 1931.
Bayer, FrepEriIcK M. New western Atlantic
records of octocorals (Coelenterata: Anthozoa),
with descriptions of three new species. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 42 (6): 183-189, 1 fig.
1952.
. Remarkably preserved fossil sea-pens and
their Recent counterparts. Journ. Washington
Acad. Sei. 45 (9) : 294-300, 2 figs. 1955.
. Contributions to the nomenclature, system-
atics, and morphology of the Octocorallia. Proc.
U.S. Nat. Mus. 105: 207-220, 8 pls. 1955.
Dantetssen, D. C. Forh. Vid.-Selsk. Christiania
(1859) : 251. 1860.
DEICHMANN, EvisaBpetH. The Alcyonaria of the
western part of the Atlantic Ocean. Mem. Mus.
Comp. Zool. 53: 1-317, 37 pls. 1936.
JUNGERSEN, H. F. E. Pennatulida. Den Danske
Ingolf-Expedition 5 (1): 1-91, 3 pls. 1904.
K6uiikER, A. Anatomisch-systematische Beschrei-
bung der Alcyonarien. Erste Abtherlung: Die
Pennatuliden. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 7:
111-225; 487-602; 8: 85-275, 24 pls. 1870-1872.
SPRINGER, STEWART, and Buus, HArvey R., Jr.
Collections by the Oregon in the Gulf of Mexico.
U.S. Dept. Interior, Fish and Wildlife Serv.,
Spec. Sci. Rep.: Fisheries No. 196. 1956. [Con-
tains complete data for Oregon stations 1
through 1429, as well as lists of the Crustacea,
mollusks, and fishes collected 1950-1955. ]
NOVEMBER 1957
ANNUAL REPORT OF ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON
391
ANNUAL REPORT OF THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON
At the annual business meeting of the Anthro-
pological Society of Washington on May 21,
1957, the following officers were elected for 1957—
58: President, THomas Guapwin; Vice Presi-
dent, Harvey C. Moors; Secretary, JosEPH B.
CaSAGRANDE; Treasurer, Berry J. MEGGERS.
SauL RresENBERG and WILLIAM C. STURTEVANT
were elected councillors on the Board of Mana-
gers to serve until 1960. The Secretary’s report
follows:
MEMBERSHIP
Present membership in the Society stands at
129 as compared with 134 a year ago. During the
last year 16 new members were added, 7 resigned,
and 11 were dropped for nonpayment of dues.
The Society notes with deep regret the passing
of one of its oldest and most distinguished mem-
bers, Dr. Frederick Webb Hodge, long associated
with the Bureau of American Ethnology, who
died in Santa Fe, N. M., on September 28, 1956,
just 30 days prior to his 92d birthday.
Newly elected members are:
Mrs. Charles P. Baldwin
William M. Bass III
Margaret Clark
James C. Gifford
Mary Ellen Goodman
Joel Martin Halpern
Genevieve A. Highland
Mrs. Ruth P. Landman
Margaret Lantis
Madeleine Mathiot
Lawrence Oschinsky
David A. Reibel
Saul H. Riesenberg
Joan Rubin
William C. Sturtevant
George H. Vergine
PROGRAM FOR 1956-57
As agreed at the last Annual Meeting, the
program for 1956-57 was devoted to reports on
research undertaken by Society members and
others resident in the Washington area. The pro-
gram arranged by Gottfried Lang, Program
Chairman, included the following lectures:
October 16, 1956, Carl F. Miller, ‘‘Field Imprec-
sions of the Archeology of Russell Cave, North-
ern Alabama.”’
November 20, 1956, Richard P. Schaedel, ‘‘The
Development of Urban Centers in Prehistoris
Peru.”
December 10, 1956, Marshall T. Newman, ‘‘Co-
ordinated Biological Studies on Indians of
Hacienda Vicos, Peru.”’
January 29, 1957, Martin Gusinde, S. V. D., ‘‘The
Pygmies of Schraeder Mountain, New Guinea.”’
February 19, 1957, Mary Ellen Goodman, ‘‘Social
Concepts, Values, and Attitudes in Japanese
Children.”
March 19, 1957. (Joint Meeting with the District of
Columbia Sociological Society.) Symposium on
“Findings in a Study of an Inbred Mixed Racial
Isolate in Maryland,’’ Calvin L. Beale, Chair-
man; William H. Gilbert, Rev. Thomas Harte,
Carl J. Whitkop, and Paul Schmidt, speakers.
April 16, 1957, Lawrence Krader, ‘“‘A Survey of
Soviet Anthropology, Based on a Recent Visit
to the U.S. 8. R.”
May 21, 1957, Joseph B. Casagrande, ‘‘Language
Pattern and Cognitive Functioning: A Study in
Navaho Psycholinguistics.”’
1957-58 DARWIN ANNIVERSARY PROGRAM
In commemoration of the 100th anniversary
in 1959 of the publication of Charles Darwin’s
Origin of Species the Society has planned a pro-
gram for 1957-58 on the general theme of evolu-
tion and anthropological theory. The following
persons have accepted invitations to address the
Society at meetings to be scheduled for the
months indicated:
Ernst Mayr, Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University, October
T. Dale Stewart, Smithsonian Institution, Novem-
ber
Robert Braidwood, University of Chicago, De-
cember
Leslie A. White, University of Michigan, January
George P. Murdock, Yale University, February
Joseph H. Greenberg, Columbia University,
March
A. I. Hallowell, University of Pennsylvania,
April
Clyde Kluckhohn, Harvard University, May
PUBLICATIONS
A selection of the papers presented in the
Society’s 1955-56 program on “Man and His
Environment” will shortly be published by the
Pan American Union in cooperation with the
Society. Lawrence Krader, who arranged the
program, served as editor of the volume which
will include the following papers:
“Keological Potential and Cultural Growth in
Meso-America,’’ by Eric Wolf and Angel Palerm.
“The North American Grasslands: Man-Made or
Natural?”’ by Waldo R. Wedel.
392
“The Ecology of Human Diseases,’”’ by Jacques
M. May.
“Environment and Culture in the Amazon Basin,’
by Betty J. Meggers.
“Man and Nature: Problems and Perspectives,”’
by Lawrence Krader.
)
During the past year the papers presented in
the Society’s 1954-55 program were published in
a volume entitled Some Uses of Anthropology:
Theoretical and Applied. The book is offered for
sale by the Society at $1.50 per copy. A report
on the distribution of the volume as of April 22,
1957, is included in the Treasurer’s Report for
1956-57.
It may also be noted that the printing of 1,000
copies of the Society’s 75th Anniversary Volume,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 11
New Interpretations of Aboriginal American Cul-
ture History, is entirely exhausted.
OTHER ACTIVITIES
The Society has been honored to receive an
invitation from the American Anthropological
Association to serve as host for the 57th Annual
Meeting of the Association to be held in Wash-
ington at the Shoreham Hotel on November
20-23, 1958.
In keeping with the practice of recent years,
the Board of Managers again voted to contribute
the sum of $25 toward the support of the 1957
annual Washington Science Fair sponsored by
the Washington Academy of Sciences.
JosppH B. CasSaAGRANDE, Secretary
Se —__—__—_
DR. KIESS RETIRES
On October 31, 1957, Dr. Cart C. Kress, a
spectroscopist, retired from the National Bureau
of Standards. His 40 years of service brought
honor and distinction to the Bureau, the De-
partment of Commerce, and to Government
service in general. Dr. Kiess early realized the
significance of the regularities in complex spec-
tra—clues to the structure of the atom. His
monographs on the spectra of chromium, in
which he classified over 5,000 lines, culminating
30 years of work on these atoms, are remarkable
achievements in science. Similar studies of
molybdenum, iodine, and tantalum atoms, now
in course of publication, are a fitting climax to
his long career of scientific research.
During World War II Dr. Kiess, in collabora-
tion with Dr. C. J. Humphreys, determined the
electronic configuration of the uranium atom
and thus established for the first time the exist-
ence of a second series of rare-earth elements.
This brilliant discovery is of far-reaching im-
portance today in the study of the heaviest ele-
ments in the periodic table.
In the hands of Dr. Kiess the spectroscope is
truly a ‘master key to the universe.” The
chemist, the metallurgist, the spectrographer,
the physicist, and the astrophysicist draw upon
the wealth of reliable information in his collection
of more than 80 important scientific papers.
He has served as the authority on astronomy
and astrophysics at the National Bureau of
Standards. His work on silicon atoms enabled him
to identify conspicuous lines in the spectrum of
the sun, lines that had defied identification for
years. Similarly, phosphorus was first detected
in the sun’s atmosphere as a result of Dr. Kiess’s
laboratory studies of this atom.
In 1955 Dr. Kiess received the Department’s
Exceptional Service Award for outstanding
scientific research in spectroscopy, through the
discovery of atomic energy levels of the highly
complex atoms, for precision measurement of
wavelength, and for basic contributions to astro-
physies.
ae
The final test of science is not whether its accomplishments add to our com-
fort, knowledge, and power, but whether it adds to our dignity as men, our
sense of truth and beauty.—Davib SARNOFF.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
PhilosaphicalSociety of Washington ~....-...cs..0sccdssececcce sees CuEsTER H. Pace
Anthropological Society of Washington....................0eeeeeeees Frank M. Setzer
rolesiealisociety of Washington’. ..........5. 0. cceesdecne sense scenes. HERBERT FRIEDMANN
ChemicaluSociety, of Washington. ........ 2s s<gc00000 naccineceecimcinss Cuar.tes R. NAarSsER
Entomological Society of Washington....................20.000- Cart F. W. MureseBECK
NetronaleGeographic Society......0.05.ce08 ons sees soneee oe aauoe ccs ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geologiealosociety of Washington... 55... .....0c00ccee-s-eesencceees Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.....................000 FREDERICK O. CoE
Wolumbiagetistorical Society = ...\.. ces. c.ci se cis o's bas woollen ocaaeaeieces U.S. Grant, III
Botsnrealmoociety of Washington)... 5... <ciscc sce tisweiee ce en cee eerios eels Carrou E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Furprpo Gravatt
Wrashinetonisociety Of EMgINeGrs .. es... .cieisieeisis ooo eieisicce isles ele os Hersert G. Dorsey
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers....... Arnotp H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of-Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp S. BEAN
Helminthological Society of Washington.....................205- Donatp B. McMuLuen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHae. J. Peiczar, JB.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houas
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovauas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ George A. Horrin
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. Hersert C. VacHne
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..W1LL1aM T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society.................+++- CHaRLEs S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
ANTHROPOLOGY.—The physique of the Seneca Indians of western New
York State. IWarsHAnn TINE WMAN. 52... 2.2 oc 2
MATHEMATICS.—Some properties of Struve functions. RicHarp K.
COOKE. Waele pele Cot clukadey SEE ueleheters: ee icon ct, Se
PALEONTOLOGY.—Two aberrant crinoid specimens. HarReLu L.
STRIMPLB)..; g.0j e082, 2 bn. MRL ela dag -e2 dea ae
ZooLocy.—Emendation of the foraminiferal genus Palmerinella Ber-
mudez, 1934, and erection of the foraminiferal genus Helenia. J.
IBS SAUNDERSS scii86 Soc, ats Bigs oe hEe oie desea cen ee ee
ZooLocy.—A new Garibius from Virginia, with a key to the North Ameri-
can congeners (Chilopoda: Lithobiomorpha: Lithobiidae). R. E.
CRABIDE, Rie ei cele Miata ooh ote cs
Zootocy.—Additional records of Western Atlantic octocorals. FREp-
BRICK Mi BAER ce iah nen wale neh be, Sate cle Selene
Annual Report of the Anthropological Society of Washington..........
Notes and News
TOLUME 47 December 1957 NUMBER 12
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
_——————
Published Monthly by the
VASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CursteR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BaMrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsSTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year....................... nea ot dal)
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ —— —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.0 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocraru No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InpDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS...................--.---. $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
Sinelesvolumeshun boundless es eeee eee rer eet et rere rr eit codices 2.00
Singlemumbershe once nee eee eer eee nae Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieye#, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D. C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 47
DECEMBER 1957
No. 12
ARCHEOLOGY — Archeology of the Anacostia Valley of Washington, D. C., and
Maryland. Howarp A. MacCorp, Corps of Engineers, U. 8. Army. (Com-
municated by Clifford Evans.)
(Received September 23, 1957)
The historic Indian tribe of Nacotchtank
in many historical references is stated to
have occupied the valley of the Anacostia
River (often called the Eastern Branch of
the Potomac River) now in Washington,
D. C., and adjoining Maryland. While there
has been some debate over the linguistic
affiliation of the Nacotchtanks, there is no
doubt about their cultural relationship.
Their culture was identical to that found at
dozens of historic sites along the lower Po-
tomac River, especially those in the vicinity
of Piscataway Creek, some 15 miles to the
south. Descriptions of their customs are
numerous in the literature of the colonial
period. Despite this wealth of knowledge,
and despite a century of local antiquarian
interest in the Anacostia Valley, there is a
dearth of archeological data available, par-
ticularly of the sequences of pre-Nacotch-
tank occupancies. The growth of Washing-
ton, D. C., and its suburbs has today almost
completely obliterated the former evidences
of Indian occupancy in the valley. The few
remaining sites or portions of sites will be
destroyed in the near future by the con-
struction of the new Anacostia Park and
Highway system. This paper summarizes
the past archeological work done in the
_ Anacostia Valley and brings the data up to
date by reporting the excavation during 1956
of a small, stratified site at Kenilworth.
Sites yielding Indian artifacts are found
along the entire length of the Anacostia
River, from its mouth at Giesboro Point
(the present Naval Air Station and Bolling
Air Force Base) to its headwaters in the
upper regions of Prince Georges County,
393
PRB 2 £ 1958
Md. The sites in the tributary valleys, such
as Paint Branch, Northeast Branch, Sligo
Run, Northwest Branch, etc., usually lack
pottery but do yield many of the large, crude
implements typical of the Archaic Period.
No site in this headwaters area has been
found in which the habitation refuse is suffi-
ciently concentrated to justify excavation.
Steatite quarries were reported from the
vicinity of Four Corners, on Sligo Run, by
Holmes (1897), but they are now destroyed.
Quarry workshops near good outcrops of
gravel were also reported by Holmes, but
none of these has been excavated. No doubt
they would prove identical to the quarry
trenched by Holmes in the valley of Piney
Branch, a part of the present Rock Creek
Park. Since almost all the surface finds of
artifacts in the small valleys of the head-
water tributaries of the Anacostia River can
be assigned to the Archaic Period, the quarry
workshops probably belong to this period
also.
Sites yielding pottery are found primarily
on the eastern shore of the Anacostia River,
from Bladensburg to the mouth of Oxon
Run, a distance of about 10 miles. Only one
pottery-bearing site is known on the western
shore of the River. This site was just down-
stream from the mouth of Hickey Branch
and is now destroyed. It appears, then, that
the Nacotchtanks and their pottery-using
predecessors favored the eastern side of the
Anacostia River, probably because of the
wide, sandy terrace found there as opposed
to the high bluffs found along most of the
western side. No site along the river con-
tained a deposit thick enough to indicate
O94
either the extensive occupation of one area
for a long time or the concentration of many
houses into a compact village. On the con-
trary, the village refuse was scattered along
the entire length of the river, with some
small, thin concentrations of refuse at the
mouths of small stream and creeks. These
sites probably represent single houses or
small groups of houses. The mouths of creeks
were probably the most desirable sites and
seem to have been occupied repeatedly dur-
ing the whole prehistoric period.
Since 1870 several persons in the Wash-
ington area collected Indian artifacts in the
Anacostia Valley. One of the earliest, and
probably the best known of these men, was
S. V. Proudfit. His extensive collection is
now in the Division of Archeology of the
United States National Museum, and he is
the author of several papers on the subject
(Proudfit, 1889, 1890, 1925). About the same
time Louis A. Kengla collected in the area
around Little Falls on the Potomac and to
a lesser extent in the Anacostia Valley. His
collection is now at Georgetown University.
Prof. William H. Holmes explored the whole
Potomac area, including the Anacostia
Valley, during the 1890’s and incorporated
his conclusions in several reports published
by the Bureau of American Ethnology
(1897, 1903). In later years, following World
War I, Titus Ulke and Judge William J.
Graham collected in the Potomac area.
Ulke (1935) published a brief account of his
finds and reported several quarry workshops
on Paint Branch and at Riggs Mill. Through-
out his life Judge Graham made an extensive
collection from the Anacostia region, es-
pecially at Giesboro Point, but he never
published a report of his work. His collec-
tion and notes are now in the Division of
Archeology of the United States National
Museum. Other collectors in the region
include 8. H. DeVault of the University of
Maryland; the author, who presented all
his material to the United States National
Museum; and others whose collections unfor-
tunately have not been made public.
An early archeological report of a doubtful
scientific value was recorded by Elmer R.
Reynolds in 1879. He reported to the An-
thropological Society of Washington the
finding of an “aboriginal paint quarry” in
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 12
the hills east of the Anacostia Valley, south
of Benning. What he describes is a pile of
limonitic iron ore on an eroded hilltop. Since
the Indians undoubtedly used the soft core
of limonite nodules for paint, it is possible
that the Indians had recourse to this source.
However, since the same limonite nodules
can be found at many gravel outcrops and
creek beds in the Anacostia Valley, it is
unlikely that the Indians would quarry a
material so readily available in streams. |
Also, since these same limonite ores were
used as a source of iron in colonial times,
what Reynolds found may well have been
early iron workings or exploratory pits for
iron ore.
In 1938 William B. Marye reported the
existence of an ‘‘Anacostin Indian Fort”
(1938) on the eastern side of the Anacostia
River, just upstream from the present Sousa
Bridge at Pennsylvania Avenue. His de-
scriptions and placement of the fort are
based on his researches into colonial land
grants and deeds in the Maryland records,
but no archeological evidence is known which
supports his choice of the site. I explored
Marye’s “fort site’? during the 1930’s but
found no evidence of an Indian village at
the point specified. However, it is possible
that the fort was of such a nature that no |
village debris accumulated around it, though |
this seems unlikely. The site is now covered
by residences, and it is not likely that any |
further research can be done to prove or |
disprove Marye’s location of the site. |
During recent years, the late Louis D.
Scisco (1955) reviewed the evidence for the
“Anacostin Fort” and determined that it |
had been located on a small ridge just north |
of Giesboro Point, at a place called Poplar
Point. This site is now covered by part of
the Naval Air Station, though I remember |
that that area yielded. many sherds and
other evidence of an Indian village before
it was destroyed by the air base.
In 1936, during the enlargement of Boll- |
ing Field, two Indian ossuary pits were |
discovered. Drs. T. Dale Stewart and Waldo |
R. Wedel, of the United States National
Museum, salvaged a number of skeletons
and some burial data from the site (Stewart |
and Wedel, 1937). To my knowledge, these |
are the only Indian burials found to date in
DECEMBER 1957 MACCORD: ARCHEOLOGY
the Anacostia Valley. Since ossuary burial
seems to have been typical of the lower
Potomae region during late prehistoric and
early historic times, we can with some con-
fidence ascribe these ossuaries to the In-
dians from the historic Nacotchtank village.
The presence of these ossuaries at Bolling
Field on Giesboro Point supports the place-
ment by Scisco of the Nacotchtank village
at or near this point. Relatively large quan-
tities of the late Potomac Creek type
(Schmitt, 1952, p. 63) of pottery were found
at Giesboro Point by Judge Graham and
me. This pottery offers additional evidence
that this site is the main portion of the
Nacotchtank village.
THE KENILWORTH SITE
In a recent reconnaissance of the Ana-
costia River Valley, only one site or portion
of a site was found that would merit testing
archeologically. This site is on low ground
on the left bank of the river, just downstream
from and bordering on Beverdam Creek at
the Washington suburb of Kenilworth.
The site had been farmed for many years,
and much modern debris is found on the
surface and in the plow-disturbed topsoil.
However, enough Indian artifacts were
present to prove that the site had been
occupied, at least intermittently, for many
years. The site is small, covering about one
acre. Since the land was the property of the
National Capital Parks and was to be
destroyed by the construction of the Ana-
costia Park and Highway System, I felt
that immediate work at the site was neces-
sary. Accordingly, I applied for and was
granted permission to excavate enough of
the site to determine the cultural sequences.
The materials found at the site, both on the
surface and in the excavations, have been
placed in the collections of the Division of
Archeology of the United States National
Museum. Before starting any excavation,
a thorough search was made for surface
artifacts.
The surface materials represent the entire
range of cultures at the site. These specimens
were classified according to the types of
pottery established by Schmitt (1952) and
Evans (1955) and the projectile point types
of Holland (1955):
OF ANACOSTIA VALLEY 395
Pottery Sherds Percent-
age
Potomac Creek Series.......... 12 13.5
Albemarle Series........... : | 37 41.6
Chickahominy Series................- | 35 39.3
Stony Creek Series...... ae ues scat | 5 05.6
Sc eh Quartz | Quartzite| Flints
AS Small’inangulart.c.. soni) ee — 1
B, Medium Triangular........ 2 1 —
Caiiniangulanseeeeeeee acer 1 _—
DACrudeginiangulansaaeeeeee 2 = —
He Tanceolate:..o.¢2. 00. .sec8 2s 1 — _
da ONO! IBAA 6c as soobocosneuas — — 1
M, Side-notched.............. _— 2 1
IN[, WHGESIIGC scccagencscoesac|| BD 4 2
V, Unclassified Large Blades... -- 4 —
Motalsy soem sso caine 13 (48%) | 12 (40%) | 5 (17%)
Miscellaneous Artifacts
ID WUE, CHER, CRUCEsccososcanscsogneécoucnsysoubed 1
Knifesquantzitessny ncreeer coerce eer eee re 1
iPipestems a tradeleen aa aces Dy ait ae ONS Na ae 1
A sketch map was made of the site, and a
base line was established along which a
test trench and several squares were dug.
The test trench was 10 feet wide and was
dug in what appeared to be the center of
the site. The trench was 35 feet long, ex-
cavated in four levels, artifically determined.
The upper level (Layer 1) comprised the
plow-disturbed topsoil and was 7 inches
thick. Below this was Layer 2, which was
2 inches of mottled, brown sand containing
many rootlets and some humus. Layer 3
was 3 inches of yellowish sand containing
many chips, but only a few artifacts. Layer
4 was the apparently undisturbed subsoil,
which was tested to a depth of 21 inches.
Pottery was plentiful in Layers 1 and 2,
but scarce in Layers 3 and 4. When it was
observed that the site was shallow, and
when no subsurface features were found,
the method of digging was changed from
trenching to test square digging. Accord-
ingly, six 5-foot squares were dug in line
with the trench. The total area uncovered
was 500 square feet. Levels were maintained
in the test squares as in the trench, so that
all the materials found in each level from all
excavations could be treated as a unit.
No pits, burials, or postmolds were found
in the area uncovered, though a careful
search was made for such features. It ap-
pears that the site represents a small popu-
lation living here over a long period.
Materials found in the excavated area
included:
Ax, notched, felsite l Layer 2
Chopper, quartzite 1 Layer 2
Hammerstone, quartzite pebble 1 Layer 3
Hammerstone, quartzite nodule 1 Layer 3
Sherds, various types 180
Projectile points 47
Chips, assorted materials 962
The distribution of the pottery from the
excavations arranged by series and by depth
is as follows:
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3. | Layer 4
Series :
No.| % |No % |INo.| % |No.| %
Potomac Creek ...| 21 | 26.3 | 14 | 15.2 | — -~
Albemarle. . .| 29 | 38.2 | 39 | 42.2 4 | 36.4 | —
Chickahominy....| 12 | 17.1 9 | 10.0 | — —
Prince George..... —- it) Oil || 2 — |
Stony Creek 14 | 18.4 | 28 | 30.4 7 | 63.6 1 | 100.0
Marcey Creek... — 1 | 01.1 | — —
Motalsevsenes 76 92 | 11 1
Distribution of projectile points from the
excavations by type and by depth is as
follows (the unclassified types, N and V were
not imeluded in the percentage computa-
tions) :
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Layer 1| Layer 2| Layer 3| Layer 4
Type | eel | eee |
No.| % |No.| % |No.| % |No.| %
B, Medium Triangular...) — | — | | = | a 50.0
F, Lanceolate cnsal| = | 1 |14.3, — | = |
I, Notched-stemmed......| 2 50.0} 1 /14.3) 1 |16.7, —
J, Ovoid base.... f= | } it ay) | | —
K, Contracting stem... 1 25.0) 3 43.0, 3 |50.0| — |
L, Parallel-sided stemmed) = || 1 /14.3) — — |
M, Side, notched. ...... 1 .25.0) — | 1 EOD
N, Unclassified............] 9 | 8 || 5) 4
P, Large contracting stem.| — aes | 1 |16.7|-— |
Q, Large parallel-sided | | | |
stemmed........ , = | — oc) = |
V, Unclassified Large |
Blades. eure = 2 — =|
Materials used in the manufacture of
projectile points and other chipped artifacts
are mainly obtainable locally, though the
rhyolite probably came from quarries on
South Mountain, some 70 miles northwest
of Washington, D. C. There is some possi-
bility that the flints and jaspers were im-
VoL. 47, No. 12
ported, too, though these materials are
occasionally found in the local gravels. The
distribution of the rock materials of the
chips by depth is shown in the following
table:
Material Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
(chips) =
No.| % |No.| % |No.| % |No.| %
i}
Quartz..... ..| 95 | 48.9 |182 | 34.8 | 85 | 40.5 | 12 | 48.0
Quartzite........ 83 | 42.8 |288 | 55.0 | 98 | 46.7 | 10 | 40.0
Rhyolite. . ....| 11 | 05.8 | 39 | 07.4 | 24 | 11.4 2 | 08.0
Flint... bere 3 | 01.5 7 | 01.4 1 | 00.4 | —
Jasper......... 2 | 01.0 7 | 01.4 2) 01.0 | —
Argillite.... = _ — 1 | 04.0
Totals..... .../194 523 210 25
The foregoing tables indicate there is
little change in the types of projectile points
made and in the choice of rock materials
during the history of occupation of the site.
The distribution of pottery types indicates
a gradual trend which parallels that noted
at other sites in the Maryland-Virginia
area. The Marcey Creek and Stony Creek
series are undoubtedly the oldest in the
region, probably dating from the Early
Woodland Period. From this we can postu-
late repeated occupancy on the site during
the past 3,000 years, ending about A.D.
1650.
We can conclude from the numerous sur-
face finds of Archaic Period material over
the entire Anacostia drainage that nomadic
hunters lived in the region for many cen-
turies. The steatite (soapstone) bowl frag-
ments, steatite-tempered pottery of the
Marcey Creek Series, and the sandy pottery
of the Stony Creek Series indicate occupancy
of the valley during the Early Woodland
Period. Nothing found to date can definitely
be ascribed to the Middle Woodland Period
in the Anacostia valley, though there is a
possibility that the oystershell-tempered
ware of the Chickahominy Series dates
from this period. The Late Woodland Period
is represented by the Albemarle Series ware
for the earlier portions, and by the Potomac
Creek wares for the terminal part of the
Period. This end of the Late Woodland
Period coincides with the settlement of the
Virginia-Maryland area by Europeans, or
roughly from 1550 to 1650. The Potomac
DECEMBER 1957 MACCORD: ARCHEOLOGY
Creek ware was undoubtedly that used by
the historic Nacotchtank, and the finding
of this type of pottery at sites in the Ana-
costia Valley is good evidence that the
Nacotchtanks lived at the Kenilworth site.
In view of the rapid disappearance of
sites of the former Nacotchtank Indians,
by the encroachment of modern buildings
and highway construction, the data result-
ing from the somewhat limited site at
Kenilworth may be the only available data
for the eventual linkage of the Nacotchtank
Indians with their neighbors upriver and
downriver. It thus serves as an important
contribution to the eventual reconstruction
oi the broader Potomac River area from
Indian occupation to the present day.
REFERENCES
Evans, Ciirrorp. A ceramic study of Virginia
archeology, with Appendix, An analysis of
projectile points and large blades, by C. G.
Holland. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 160. 1955.
Houuanp, C. G. [See Evans, Clifford.]
Houtmes, Witiiam H. Stone implements of the
Potomac-Chesapeake Tidewater Province, in
15th Ann. Rep., Bur. Amer. Ethnol. 1897.
OF ANACOSTIA VALLEY 397
——. Aboriginal pottery of the Eastern United
States, in 20th Ann. Rep., Bur. Amer. Ethnol.
1903.
Marye, Wittram B. The Anacostin Indian Fort.
Maryland Hist. Mag. 33 (2). 1938.
Prouprir, 8. V. Ancient village sites and aboriginal
workshops in the District of Columbia. Amer.
Anthrop. 2 (0.s.). 1889.
. A collection of stone implements from the
District of Columbia. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 13.
1890.
. Aboriginal occupancy of the District of
Columbia. Proc. Columbia Hist. Soc. 25. 1925.
Scumrrr, Karu. Archeological chronology of the
Middle Atlantic States. pp. 59-70 in Griffin,
James B. Archeology of Eastern United States.
University of Chicago Press, 1952.
Sctsco, Louts D. The Indian fort on the Anacostia
River and review of Anacostan tribal history in
the District of Columbia. Typescript, in the
Washingtonian Collection of the Library of
the District of Columbia. [1955.]
Srewart, T. D., and WepgEL, W. R. The finding of
two ossuaries on the site of the Indian village of
Nacotchtanke (Anacostia). Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 27 (5). 1937.
ULKg, Trrus. Additions to our knowledge of Indian
habitations and workshops located at Washing-
ton, D. C., and vicinity. Primitive Man 8 (3).
1935.
When a man’s knowledge is not in order, the more of it he has the greater
will be his confusion HERBERT SPENCER.
398
STATISTICS.—Some considerations of disaster potential. Waurpr 8. DinHn
Washington, D. C.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 12
)
(Received July 31, 1957)
A front-page headline of the Washington
Post for July 1, 1957, reads, ‘Pestilence Now
Perils Area Hit by Hurricane: 400 Now
Believed Dead, Missing.”’ Similar headlines
telling of earthquakes, tornadoes, floods,
and other disasters may be found in almost
any daily newspaper.
One often reads or hears claims that a
given disaster is unequaled by anything in
the past. One also reads and hears that
certain types of disasters, notably storms,
floods, and tornadoes, are increasing in
frequency and magnitude. The evidence
does support at least a part of the claims.
There can be no doubt that the yearly
“crop” of tornadoes is increasing, but there
is much doubt regarding the explanations
that attempt to ascribe the increase to atom
bombs, sunspots, weather cycles, and the
like.
Several questions occur to anyone who
considers the meaning of the evidence. How
do these disasters compare with those of the
past? Are they really more frequent in 1957
than, say, in 1907 or 1857? If they are more
frequent, what is the true explanation? Is
there any pattern to this frequency? If so,
what may we expect in the future from
various kinds of disasters?
It is not surprising to learn that a con-
siderable literature covers this field. One can
find books on tornadoes, books on hurri-
canes, books on floods, books on earth-
quakes, books on volcanoes, and books on
just about any kind of repeating disaster.
It takes time to read one’s way through the
more important works in this series, but
long before that study is completed some of
the answers are found. In looking over my
notes recently it seemed that there was a
significant picture of what had happened,
what could happen, and why it could hap-
pen. Since this is of more than passing 1n-
terest, an effort has been made to present a
brief outline of the findings.
Some of the references, as cited later,
give excellent summaries of the disasters
in special categories for long periods of time.
An example is the long list of major famines
given in the Encyclopedia Britannica. The
World Almanac, under the heading of
“Memorable Dates,” gives many of the
major disasters of the past 2,000 years. An
inspection of these lists shows that the
frequency of disaster has been increasing in
recent times. This could, of course, be merely
a matter of reporting but it could be some-
thing else. In fact there should be little
doubt as to the significance and implications.
In reference 7, Malthus pointed out that
nature sets a limit on the number of people
inhabiting a given area. The Malthusian
Law is that a population tends to increase
faster than the means for subsistence and
that a population always imcreases up to
the subsistence limit. When a bare subsist-
ence level is reached, further imcrease is
prevented by famine, pestilence, and wars.
There is little doubt that famine, as
stated by Malthus, is an important check
on overpopulation. But there are many
other checks. Some of these have been
pointed out by Laing in reference 2. Brown,
in reference 3, gives a remarkably clear
and thorough analysis of the basic problem
of existence. There are many other writers
who have considered the effects of war,
pestilence, economic pressures, et¢., as
limits on population. The sudden applica-
tion of any of these limits is a disaster, and
a disaster may be a real factor limiting
population.
The mounting disaster toll of recent years
could be a transient cycle, but it seems that
it may be here to stay. The population dens-
ity has increased so fast that more and more
people must now be in the path of any kind
of disaster. We are entering an era where
population density begins to have a pro-
found influence on the occurrence and sever-
ity of disasters.
Long before the population density
reaches the bare-subsistence level foreseen
by Malthus, there must be marked increases
in disaster toll. There seems to be a general
law that the magnitude and frequency of
DECEMBER 1957
disasters depend on the density of the popu-
lation they strike. Some applications are
easily seen. A generation ago a violent
tornado could roar across a sparsely settled
area and go virtually unnoticed. Today, a
similar tornado might wreck one or more
villages, towns, or cities, causing great loss
of life and property. This is what happens
when there are numerous innocent’ by-
standers.
We can now proceed to consider some
relations between population density and
disasters. The first step is to prepare a list
of possible disasters, such as:
1. Collision of air- 12. Voleanic action
craft or ships 13. Large meteorites
2. Collapse of struc- 14. Explosions
tures 15. Geological explo-
3. Fire sion
4. Hail, lightning 16. Food poisoning
5. Tornadoes 17. Drouth, famine
6. Hurricanes 18. Epidemic, plague
7. Floods 19. Insect invasion
8. Blizzards 20. Atomic byproducts
9. Smog, poisonous Pal \iiene
gases 22. Major climatic
10. Major earthquake changes
11. Sea waves
This list is far from complete, and there is
no great significance in the order except that
items 16—22 are in a supergroup with vastly
greater potential than the preceding items.
Items 1-4 are relatively unimportant ex-
cept for the obvious connection of popula-
tion density in determining their impact.
No attempt will be made to assess probabili-
ties, since this seems rather futile.
1. COLLISION OF AIRCRAFT OR SHIPS
In 1956 there was a major collision of two
airplanes over Grand Canyon and a collision
of two large ships at sea. There has been a
growing concern over the possibility of this
type of disaster. The increasing number of
aircraft and ships, due to more travel, tends
to increase the hazard involved. A collision
of two ships is, in general, a disaster limited
to the total number of people on board.
This limit does not apply to airplanes where
a collision over a crowded city, school, or
gathering could be a major disaster. We can
see some previews and some “‘near misses”’.
Three airplanes crashed within Elizabeth,
N. J., one each on December 16, 1951,
DIEHL: DISASTER POTENTIAL
399
January 22, 1952, February 11, 1952. These
were bad, but they did not land in large
crowds. On July 28, 1945, a B-25 airplane
flew into the Empire State Building. This
was bad, but it could have been much worse.
2. COLLAPSE OF STRUCTURES
This might appear a minor item in the
list of disasters, but it is not a negligible
one. There have been many cases of struc-
tural collapse in the past and some of these
have been startling. Examples are the Tay
Bridge and the Knickerbocker Theatre. We
are getting more and more large buildings
which house hundreds or thousands of
people. There is no reason to doubt the basic
structural integrity of any building, but the
disaster potential must be present. This
item could appear in combination with
other items such as 1, 3, 5, 6, and 10.
3. FIRE
The World Almanac gives an impressive
list of great fires. Some of these like the
Great Fire of London (1666), Chicago
(1871), Baltimore (1904), and San Francisco
(1906) are so often mentioned that they are
well-remembered. It is frequently assumed
that the improvements in _ fire-fighting
methods and wide use of so-called fireproof
construction will prevent any future dis-
asters of this type. The record does not sup-
port any optimism. In recent years there
have been some serious, if less spectacular,
fires. As the cities continue to build new
subdivisions and allow the older parts to
stand and deteriorate, there is an increasing
potential for great disasters. Several con-
ditions are necessary for a fire to get out of
control, but a long dry period, a shortage of
water, and a strong wind can produce a locai
disaster. All great cities have areas that are
vulnerable, and as the population increases,
the hazard becomes greater.
4. HAIL, LIGHTNING
Only those who have seen at firsthand the
damage done by large hailstones can visual-
ize the disaster potential from this source.
Talman, in reference 4, gives some startling
data on hail damage, with a list of fatalities
from hail for the period 1922-30. In that
period 72 lives were lost. As the population
400
density increases, more people are affected.
A single storm in India in 1888 caused about
250 fatalities.
There have been many cases of hailstones
as large as grapefruit and weighing well
over a pound each. The damage that can
be done by such stones is comparable to
that of the cannon balls of the past. Talman
shows the effect on some automobiles that
were wrecked by a storm at Dallas, Tex.,
in May 1926. If such a storm were to strike
a crowded beach or heavy traffic on a high-
way it could cause disaster.
Lightning kills about 1,000 people a year,
but usually as individuals or small groups.
There is always the possibility of larger
crowds being involved.
5. TORNADOES
Talman calls the tornado “the most
vicious storm on earth.” It is certainly of a
much higher disaster potential than the
previous items. Flora points out, in the
introduction to reference 5, that the damage
from tornadoes tends to increase with popu-
lation density. The fact that more tornadoes
are being reported in recent years is prob-
ably due more to population growth than to
any significant increase in tornado activity.
Flora gives a 16-page tabulation of losses
from noteworthy tornadoes in the period
1804-1953. More than 8,006 people have
been killed and the estimated property
damage is about $500,000,000.
Not all tornadoes are of equal intensity.
I have discussed this with a friend who has
seen and gone through several tornadoes,
including one of maximum intensity. It is
his considered opinion that no practicable
man-made, above-ground structure can
withstand the forces that he has seen at
close range. As our cities in the tornado
belt continue to grow up and outward it
seems that there may someday be a real
test. Some of the most destructive tornadoes
of the past were not particularly intense.
They just happened to hit vulnerable areas.
The maximum disaster potential is in a
tornado like the famous one that struck
Irving, Kans., in May 1879, or the one that
struck Rocksprings, Tex., in April 1927.
If such a tornado ever passes through a
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 47, No. 12
densely populated area the resulting disaster
could be of major magnitude.
6. HURRICANES, TYPHOONS
The hurricane may be somewhat less
violent than the tornado, but the loss in
violence is more than made up by the width
and length of the path of destruction. The
disaster potential of hurricanes has always
been great, but in recent years this has
been increased immensely by the building
of large communities in exposed locations.
Some of the new construction is not of the
type that resists a real storm.
As in the case of tornadoes, there is a
great variation in the strength of hurricanes.
The New England hurricane of 1938 caused
a property loss of over $400,000,000 and
killed more than 500 persons. This was a
severe storm but far from being the strongest
on record. Talman describes the Great
Hurricane of 1780, which was powerful
enough to destroy everything above
ground—including some stone forts. There
have been other storms of great mtensity
but nothing even approaching that of the
Great Storm. It is clear that the disaster
potential increases with time.
The hurricane danger is not confined to
the effect of winds. There can be excessive
rains, enough to produce great floods, as
in the Connecticut River Valley in 1955, or
great tides, as those at Galveston in 1900,
or on Long Island in 1938.
7. FLOODS
Flood disasters can originate from a num-
ber of causes. In addition to the hurricane-
induced tidal flood that strikes coastal
areas there are three basic types of floods:
1. Excessive rain in a drainage basin
2. Heavy rain combined with melting of much
snow and ice
3. Collapse of dams
Each type can cause a disaster that can be
rather widespread. This is possible from
purely natural causes, but the trend of
development has been such that the eventual
disasters will be magnified. There are many
places in the United States where the de-
mand for low-cost homes has led to suburban
DeEcEMBER 1957 DIEHL:
developments that in some cases are defi-
nitely located below the high-water mark
of dry river beds. Furthermore, it has been
a growing fad to build homes or cottages
close to rivers. This is asking for trouble.
There have been several serious floods
due to failure of dams of moderate size.
The best known of these is the Johnstown
Flood of 1889. Another is the St. Francis
Dam, which collapsed in 1928. Both of these
caused great loss in life and property, but a
far greater potential now exists below the
many enormous dams that have been erected
for various reasons. Some of these large
dams are in areas subject to severe earth-
quakes. There have been many minor shocks
at Boulder Dam. The main point here is the
existence of the potential.
8. BLIZZARDS
The midwestern blizzard completely stops
all transportation, sometimes for days or
weeks. The natives are generally prepared
and accept it as another inconvenience.
However, a blizzard can strike outside of its
normal area. When this happened in the
past, the cities were small and geared to a
slow transportation system. The great
March Blizzard of 1888 was accompanied
by drifts that ran from 10 to 30 feet over a
large area surrounding New York City. A
similar blizzard now would be exceedingly
severe in its effects, owing to the increased
population density. The chances are that
such a great blizzard would occur with very
low temperatures, and this might do more
than merely stop transportation.
9. SMOG, POISONOUS GASES
The industrial development in and near
many large cities has resulted in huge
quantities of gases and combustion products
bemg dumped into the air. If there is a
temperature inversion in the atmosphere
these waste gases cannot escape and a
“smog” is formed. This smog in its usual
form irritates the eyes and nasal passages,
but there is great concern over the long-
range effects of breathing the foul mixtures.
There is even greater concern over the possi-
bility that excessive amounts of poisonous
components may some day be_ present.
DISASTER
POTENTIAL 401
Many cities keep a continuous watch over
some phase of the air pollution, and there is
ample reason for this precaution. There
have been several cases where a great num-
ber of fatalities resulted from specific air
pollution. For example, at Donora, Pa., in
1948; and in London, England, in 1952.
The Donora smog caused 20 deaths; the
London smog 4,000. This is a_ startling
demonstration of the disaster potential
increase with population density.
10. MAJOR EARTHQUAKES
In spite of greatly improved knowledge
of the accelerations developed in severe
earthquakes and improved methods of
building construction, we can be sure that
the earthquake toll will increase rather than
decrease with time. There are three major
reasons for the dim outlook. First comes the
population pressure which causes large
communities to be built, in some cases
directly on known major active faults.
Second, there is the “‘It can’t happen here”
attitude, which permits structures of low
earthquake resistance to be built in great
numbers in areas that have not had serious
quakes for two or more generations. And
finally, there is the unwillingness to pay the
full price of protection in known active belts.
Although most of the earth’s seismic
activity is confined to two belts, there is
grave doubt whether any place is really
free from the threat. There have been three
major earthquakes in the eastern part of
the United States. These are Boston, 1755;
New Madrid, 1811-12; and Charleston,
S. C., 1886. Each of the three was much
stronger than the San Francisco earthquake
of 1906. The regions were sparsely settled,
by present standards, and relatively little
damage was done. However, an earthquake
of force 9 or 10 in the eastern part of the
United States today would probably be a
major disaster.
The area of intense direct damage from
an earthquake is usually rather small and
the greatest damage tends to occur from
fire or from sea waves along the coast. These
factors would tend to reduce the total po-
tential but they would be offset by the in-
creases in population density.
402
11. SEA WAVES
Sea or seismic waves have done untold
damage in the not too distant past. No
seacoast can be entirely free from some risk.
The disaster potential here is enormous.
Hundreds of thousands, perhaps millions,
of people go to the beaches for pleasure
each day.
The power of seismic waves is unbelieva-
ble. The Krakotoa explosion of 1883 caused
a seismic wave at least 90 feet high and
probably 135 feet high to strike the Java
coast. The loss of life in such a disaster is
appalling. It has happened again and again
in the past, and when it happens in the
future the toll will be all the greater because
more people will be exposed to the fury.
Very high tides accompany the tropical
hurricane. In the New England storm of
September 1938 it is reported that a wave
more than 30 feet in height did untold dam-
age on the south shore of Long Island.
Hundreds were drowned in Rhode Island
by this great tide.
12. VOLCANIC ACTION
Volcanoes have caused a long list of major
disasters in the past. They always have that
potential, especially when people assume
that they are permanently inactive. One
gets a clear picture in reading of the explo-
sion of Mount Pelée and the destruction
of St. Pierre in 1902. This thing has hap-
pened at irregular intervals in the past, and
it will certainly continue to occur.
The normal voleanic activity is confined
to distinet belts and areas at the present
time. However, an inactive voleano could
go berserk or a new one start up with very
little warning. The effect could be devastat-
ing. The greatest danger appears to be in
the sudden discharge of exceedingly hot,
poisonous gases. If a lot of people happen
to be around it becomes a major disaster.
13. LARGE METEORITES
There have been several scares in the past
when the astronomers announced a near
collision course of some comet. Very little
seems to have been published on the size
of the heads of the comets that cross the
earth’s orbit, but this is not important.
The important fact is that large meteorites
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, NO. 12
have struck the earth on at least four
occasions in recent times. Crater Mound
near Winslow, Ariz., is about 4,000 feet in
diameter and 600 feet deep. It appears to
have been the result of a large meteorite.
Chubb crater in northern Quebec is twice
the size of Crater Mound. In 1918 a huge
meteorite struck in the vicinity of Lake
Baikal in Siberia and leveled many square
miles of forest. An enormous meteorite
broke up and fell near Paragould, Ark., in
1930.
It is clear that the meteorite has a very
remote disaster potential, but if it did hap-
pen to strike a heavily populated area the
damage could be enormous.
14. EXPLOSIONS
There have been a number of disasters
due to explosions. An outstanding example
is the case of the freighter Grandcamp, which
exploded at the pier at Texas City, Tex.,
on April 16, 1947, killmg over 500 people
and causing damage estimated in excess of
$100,000,000.
In general, the potential causes of ex-
plosions are well known, and great precau-
tions are taken to avoid disasters at most,
if not all, places where the potential exists.
The danger arises when there is a human or
mechanical failure that allows something
to go wrong. Unfortunately, from time to
time, there is a big explosion, and the effects
often include some kind of associated disaster
to swell the total.
While the total disaster potential of ex-
plosions is very large, the actual losses have
been kept under some control. With more
innocent bystanders in the future we should
expect no real improvement over the past
record.
15. GEOLOGICAL EXPLOSION
This is a fantastic possibility that must
be included largely as a curiosity.
There has been at least one case of a
mountain “exploding.” Mount Dobratch in
Austria suddenly exploded in 1348. This was
not a voleanic eruption but a true explosion.
It was a major disaster at the time, killmg
thousands of people. No cause for the ex-
plosion could be found, and it still remains
a mystery. The reported magnitude of the
DECEMBER 1957
explosion seems greater than what we would
expect from a deposit of uranium going
critical.
If such an explosion happened once, could
it happen again? If so, could it happen in a
densely populated area?
16. FOOD POISONING
In recent years there has been great con-
cern over mounting death rates from various
types of organic disease. The evidence is
beginning to pile up that the public is being
poisoned by too much of the wrong kinds
of chemicals in modern foods. Most proc-
essed foods, including bread, are “‘adulter-
ated’’ with preservatives and artificial colors.
The long-range effects of the unnatural
processed foods are unknown, but there is a
terrible disaster potential. If someone makes
an erroneous appraisal of long-range toxicity
on a short-range test basis, 1t could result
in a large percentage of the population being
wiped out in a few years.
The reasons that lead to and further the
possibility of wide-scale food poisoning seem
very complex indeed. One can see many
influences at work, but a form of overpopu-
lation seems to be the major factor. The
present situation would have been impossible
in the United States 50 years ago when
the population was only about one-half of
what it is in 1957.
17. DROUTH, FAMINE
Famine is the most potent of all checks
on overpopulation. When the population
level of any country rises to the bare sub-
sistence level the stage is set for famine.
In densely populated areas such as China
and India a severe drouth brings on famine
and disaster. There has been some alleviation
due to improved transportation and _ relief
activities, but these can only alleviate, not
prevent. They work on the effects rather
than on the cause.
Malthus was in error in his predictions
only in the matter of timing. Technology
and transportation merely postpone the
year of reckoning and increase the scale on
which it finally occurs.
18. EPIDEMICS, PLAGUES
The improvements in medicine and sani-
tation have brought under control most of
DIEHL: DISASTER POTENTIAL
403
the major known causes of epidemic disaster.
However, that control is by a slender margin,
and there have been some scares in the recent
past. The real danger lies in the possible
appearance of a new germ or virus that is
immune to present vaccines or drugs. A
new type of plague or its equivalent must
always be considered a major threat.
It is usually assumed that the improve-
ments in medical science, sanitation, and
better living conditions have eliminated the
possibility of serious epidemics. That as-
sumption is plausible and easy to believe
because it is what we would like to believe.
Perhaps it would be more realistic to face
what appear to be scientific facts. A densely
populated area will always be subjected to a
certain threat from both known and un-
known types of epidemic disasters.
19. INSECT INVASION
For many decades entomologists have
repeatedly warned that the insects were
taking charge. One can see some of the
evidence. The chestnut trees are gone, the
elms seem to be going, and each year the
farmers have to fight more pests. The advent
of some of the new insectides gave initial
promise of easing the problem, but these
insectides are poisonous to man also. There
is perhaps about as much concern today
over the long-range effect of these poisons
on mankind as there was concern over the
effect of the pests.
The whole problem is largely one of over-
population or overdevelopment. Man has
violently upset the balance of nature al-
ready. It is clear that the upset gets worse
rather than better. No one knows where
or how the effects of the unbalance will
cause a real disaster, but there is no doubt
about the potential of this one on a long
range basis.
20. ATOMIC BYPRODUCTS
The danger from the fallout of bombs or
the waste products of reactors is still con-
troversial, but no one denies the existence
of a real problem of major magnitude. Un-
less that problem is solved correctly and
solved soon it may be too late.
21. WAR
The disaster potential of atomic warfare
is enormous. So much has been written on
404
this subject that further comment seems
unnecessary.
22. MAJOR CLIMATIC CHANGES
There seem to have been major climatic
changes in the past. They could occur
again.
The foregoing notes seem to show that
the potential for disaster increases with
population density and that in many cases
man has helped to set the stage for real
catastrophes. We can draw several conclu-
sions, or repeat them here for emphasis:
1. Disasters tend to occur with a magnitude and
frequency proportional to population density.
2. The rapid increases in population in known
disaster-prone areas must have an adverse
effect on future statistics.
3. Man seems unwilling to pay the financial costs
or to accept the limitations that are neces-
sary for protection from certain disasters.
In closing, I should like to emphasize as
strongly as possible that this study origi-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES: VOL. 47, No. 12
nated from a desire to appraise the relative
severity of certain disasters and that it
predicts nothing. It merely attempts to
identify the directions from which disaster |
could come—and why.
REFERENCES
(1) Mauruus, Ropert. Essay on the principles
of population, 1798. (Reprinted by the Royal
Economic Society, 1926.)
(2) Laine, 8. Problems of the future and essays
(Chapter 14, Population and Food). The
Humboldt Library of Science 17. 1889.
(3) Brown, H. The challenge of man’s future.
Compass Book C-3, Viking Press, New York,
1954.
(4) Tauman, C. F. The realm of the air. Bobbs-
Merrill, Indianapolis, 1931.
(5) Fuora, 8. D. Tornadoes of the United States.
University of Oklahoma Press, Norman,
1954.
(6) Lenr, LL.D. Causes of catastrophe. Whittlesey
House, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1948.
(7) Anon. Garbage in the sky, Fortune, April
1955: p. 142 et seq.
A theory is not an unemotional thing. If music can be full of passion, merely
by giving form to a single sense, how much more beauty and terror may not a
vision be pregnant with which brings order and method into everything that
we know.—GEORGE SANTAYANA.
DECEMBER 1957
MATHEMATICS.
GOLDMAN: MATRIX MINIMIZATION PROBLEM 405
nr
A matrix minimization problem. A. J. GotpMAN, National
Bureau of Standards. (Communicated by M. Marcus.)
1. Introduction. This investigation deals
with the following problem: Let the norm
N(C) of a complex matrix C = (C;;,) be de-
fined by the usual
N(C) aa @2 | Ca ae
let w,,(1 < m < 4) denote the fourth roots
of unity (1, —1, 7, —7), and let
i
F(A) = > N(A + vw, D/(r’ + N(A)).
m=1
We wish to determine AK, = 14 min F(A),
) where A runs through all complex n X n
) matrices with V(A) < n?. The compactness
) of the domain ensures the existence of the
minimum.
We shall show that
)
pyre 140 -— 24) = 1.207".
This sharpens and generalizes the result
=
| (2) Kops al
due (in a different but equivalent form) to
-M. Morse and W. Transue [1; Lemma
| 5.2]
5.2].
2. Derivation. All matrices considered be-
low aren X n and have complex entries. The
trace of a matrix A will be denoted T(A).
We begin (Lemma 1) by reducing the
matrix minimization problem to a 3-dimen-
sional minimization problem. For this pur-
_ pose we define the function
| (N,v, 8) =
@ + + 2rcos6)? + (N° + n— 2r cos 6):
n: + N
+ (N’ + n+ 2rsind)’ + (N° +n—2rsind)’.
Lemma 1: K, = 4% minf(N, r, 6), where
(NV, 7, 6) has as domain the set defined by
0<0< 27
0<r< Nn: -
O< N < n:
7 =N if n=1)
Proor: (a) We note first that for any A,
| T(A) | S N(A)n},
with equality if nm = 1. This follows from
Cauchy’s Inequality.
(b) Conversely, if NV > 0 and T(complex)
are numbers such that
| 2 << Nee,
with equality if n = 1, then there exists an
A with N(A) = N and T(A) = T. For we
can choose the nonzero entries of A to be
A; = T/n (1 Sj Sn)
Aka = (NP = |Past ve S 1D):
(c) In view of (a) and (6), it suffices to
show that
F(A) = f(N(A), | P(A) |, arg T(A)).
This follows from the easily verified identi-
ties
CVC):
= (N(A))? + n + 2Re(7(A))
(N(A + 721))?
= (NCADP Se @ es Zlib),
where Re(z) and /m(z) denote the real and
imaginary parts of the complex number 2z.
Next (LemMaA 2) we locate a point of the
(N, r, @)-domain at which the minimum
occurs.
LEMMA
point
2: The minimum occurs at the
N = p27 = 0, 0 = 0:
Proor: (a) We note first that the sym-
metry properties of f(V, 7, 8) permit us to
replace 0 < @ < 2m by the subinterval
0 <6 < 7/4. This will be done implicitly in
what follows.
(b) We find by partial differentiation that
iON, & O) < O1or 0 < Pp < Nae
so that the minimum must occur for r = Nn’.
(c) For 0 < @ < 7/4, we can expand the
summands of f(N, 7, 6) as binomial series in
cos 6 or sin 6, obtaining
406
ie)
(n? + N)f(N, r, 6) = 2(N* + n)? (1 ey
m=1
1
( oy Jen’ ahs n) ”"(cos”” 6 ale sin?” 0) f
2m
Since (1) the coefficient of cos’, 8 + sin’ 6
is negative and (2) the function cos’, 6 +
sin’, 0 is monotone decreasing for
0 < @ < 77/4, we see that the continuous
function f(N, r, 6) is (for fixed N, 7) monotone
increasing for 0 < @ < 7/4; thus its mini-
mum for 0 < 6 < 7/4 occurs at 6 = 0.
(d) In view of (b) and (ec), we need only
minimize
g(N) = f(N, Nn?, 0)
= 2(n? + (N? + n)?)/(n? + N)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 12
for 0 < N < n>. Straightforward differen-
tiation shows that
g'(N) < Ofor0 < N <n},
and so the minimum occurs for NV = n?.
From Lemmas 1 and 2 it follows (using
the notation of (d) of the last proof) that
K, = Yeg(n*) = al + 2?)
so that statement (1) of the Introduction is
established.
REFERENCE
(1) Morss, M., and Transug, W.® C-bimeasures
A and their superior integrals A*, Cire. Mat.
Palermo (2) 4: 270-300. 1955.
SE
WAR ON LICE
Vagrants picked up by District of Columbia
police early in the last war contributed notably,
however unwittingly, to American victory. The
story of their help in the conquest of body lice is
told by Col. Emory C. Cushing, USA Ret., in an
account recently issued by the Smithsonian Insti-
tution of the war on pests which went on simul-
taneously with the war against Germans and
Japanese.
Body lice always have been the foes of all
armies in all wars. Entomologists at the Depart-
ment of Agriculture field station at Orlando,
Fla., seeking effective means of de-lousing sol-
diers, needed great numbers of the insects for
their experiments. “In their plans for mass
rearing of lice,” relates Colonel Cushing—
The Orlando workers encountered an initial diffi-
culty in obtaining parent lice to start a colony. It
is an excellent reflection on the standard of per-
sonal hygiene in the United States that by 1941
few people harbored these parasites. With the
assistance of the Washington, D. C., police force,
however, a few infested vagrants were rounded up
and induced to part company with a few of their
close associates. These lice became the ancestors
of the thousands upon thousands of progeny used
in experiments that produced our methods for
controlling typhus fever. The original parent lice
were carefully nurtured and eventually produced a
Jarge colony. As the colony grew the problem of
providing sufficient human blood for its individ-
uals became acute. The young die unless they are
fed during the first 24 to 48 hours of their lives. It
was discovered that lice, by instinct, cling tena-
ciously to small squares of woolen cloth provided
for them in incubators in which they must be kept.
When these pieces of cloth are laid on the human
skin the lice leave them temporarily to feed. When
they become engorged after 15 or 20 minutes they
return to the cloth and are replaced in the incuba-
tor to complete their development, mate, and lay
their eggs... . As many as 25,000 lice can be fed
in a few minutes in this manner.
The entomologists took advantage of the louse’s
habit of clinging to the fibers of woolen fabric to
make a quick evaluation of the relative toxicity of
some 10,000 chemicals... .
The de-lousing procedures of the first world
war, it soon was apparent, were quite unsuited to
the highly mobile kind of fighting of the last war.
Steam sterilization and bathing were extremely
slow. It required use of heavy equipment and a
rather large number of operating personnel. Pro-
duction of steam required fire and smoke which
could be seen by the enemy and would draw fire.
The Bureau of Entomology workers developed
a method of de-lousing by means of toxic gases
which, after various setbacks, contributed notably
to the low incidence of typhus and other louse
carried diseases both among American soldiers
and enemy war prisoners. Various louse powders
for disinfecting individual soldiers were tested but
the real victory came with the introduction of
DDT from Switzerland.
In the course of the experiments human volun-
teers—surely not the least among the heroes of
the last war—were asked to wear suits grossly
infested with several hundred lice of all sizes.
Sometimes they were required to wear the in-
fested clothing for a month or more. They were
housed in a separate dormitory and seldom were
allowed to leave the building. They were aroused
at any time during the day or night to have their
underwear checked to determine the effect of the
insecticides.
DECEMBER 1957 BLAKB: TWO NEW
GENERA OF COMPOSITAE
407
BOTANY —Two new genera of Compositae from Peru and Costa Rica. 8. F. Buaxke,
Crops Research Division, Agricultural Research Service, U. 8. Department of
Agriculture.
(Received July 22, 1957)
The two new genera of Compositae de-
scribed in this paper belong respectively to
the tribes Eupatorieae and Helenieae.
Ferreyrella Blake, gen. nov.
Capitula discoidea homogama multiflora parva
subaequaliflora corollis subbilabiatis. Involucrum
proprium vix ullum; squamae extimae (phyllaria)
ca. 3 vel 4 obovatae membranaceae aequales
- paullum concavae achenia foventes paleis recep-
- taculi similes, demum usque ad medium callose
bicostatae. Receptaculum anguste conicum
_ ubique paleaceum, paleis membranaceis persis-
tentibus aperte cymbiformibus anguste obovatis
vel oblongis. Corollae subbilabiatae omnes sub-
similes sed exterioribus majoribus magis con-
_ spicue subbilabiatis), tubo distincto faucem late
subinfundibuliformem subaequante, dentibus 5
inaequalibus 3 exterioribus quam 2 interioribus
usque ad triplo longioribus ut videtur vivo spe-
ciem capituli breviter radiati praebentibus.
_ Antherae apice inappendiculatae emarginatae
_ basi integrae. Styli rami longiusculi clavellati
apice rotundati. Achenia oblonga plano-convexa
parva 5-costata glabra nigra, facie interiore
planiuscula 3-costata exteriore convexa 2-costata,
basi callo brevi recto apice annulo brevi deter-
gibili donata. Pappus nullus.—Herba annua
pubescens, foliis inferioribus oppositis ovatis
petiolatis crenato-serratis superioribus alternis
subsessilibus, capitulis paucis vel pluribus parvis
_ laxe cymosis albis odore Matricariae chamomillae.
Species typica F. peruviana.
Ferreyrella peruviana Blake, sp. nov.
Herba erecta palmaris simplex vel opposite
ramosa sordide pilosa, foliis ovatis parvis petio-
latis crenato-serratis, capitulis parvis cymosis
pedicellatis, corollarum tubo stipitato-glanduloso.
Slender herb 8-15 cm high, bearing 2-50
heads; stem terete, striatulate, 1-1.5 mm thick,
often purplish-tinged, rather densely pilose with
several-celled acuminate mostly spreading whitish
or purplish hairs up to 0.5 mm long; internodes
few, mostly 1-2.5 em long; petioles of lower
leaves slender, pubescent like the stem, 2-4 mm
long; larger leaf blades 10-15 mm long, 5-8 mm
wide, obtuse to acutish, at base cuneate to
rounded, obtusely about 3-toothed on each side,
triplmerved from near base and lightly reticulate-
veiny beneath, loosely pilose on surface above
and chiefly along veins beneath with hairs like
those of stem, thin-herbaceous; upper leaves
(subtending branches of inflorescence) mostly
sessile, smaller, the uppermost bracteiform; heads
mostly in groups of 2 or 3 at tips of stem and
branches, 3-4 mm high, 3-6 mm thick (as
pressed), on densely pubescent pedicels 3-5
(—15) mm long; involucre (i.e., outermost
phyllaries) 2.3-2.8 mm _ high, the phyllaries
rather densely pilose and ciliate especially above;
receptacle about 1.8 mm high, 0.8 mm thick;
pales obovate to (inner) oblong, acute, 2.5-3 mm
long, 0.8-1 mm wide, shallowly concave, mem-
branaceous, lightly 3-nerved, pilose and ciliate
especially above and (especially the inner)
stipitate-glandular-ciliate above; corollas 2.2
(inner) to 3.8 (outer) mm long, the tube 0.5-0.7
mm long, the throat about 0.5 mm long, the
longer teeth (in different flowers) 1.2-1.8 mm
long, the shorter about 0.5-0.7 mm long; achene
about 1.3 mm long.
Peru: Mountain slope (falda de cerro),
Usquil, Prov. Otuzco, Dept. La Libertad, 3,000-
3,100 meters alt., June 9, 1950, Ramén Ferreyra
7623 (type no. 2028382, U.S. Nat. Herb.); same
data, Ferreyra 7653 (U.S. Nat. Herb.).
This little plant, having anthers completely
deprived of terminal appendage, is a member of
the subtribe Piquerinae of the Eupatorieae. Both
in technical character (lack of pappus) and in
general appearance it there finds its closest rela-
tive in the genus Piqueria, from which it differs
primarily in having a paleaceous receptacle.
Although this distinction is usually important in
the Eupatorieae (for instance, in separating
Eupatoriastrum from Eupatorium, and Carphe-
phorus from Trilisa), as it is in Compositae
generally, it becomes merely a specific or even
in one case a varietal character in Ageratum. The
slenderly conic receptacle and strikingly irregular
corollas of Ferreyrella, very suggestive of those of
408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL, 47, No. 12 l
ANG Pes ee 9 IEG Lear a raee
a P yy \
Peres
\"
= OS re nee
XQ
Z
>
AS ee aoe
as
Fie. 1. A-J, Ferreyrella peruviana. A, plant, 1;B, pale, X 8; C, achene, X 14; D, E, F, corol-
las, X 12; G, style, X 12; H, stamens, X 40; J, involucre, X 6; J, receptacle with pales, X 6.
K-P, Iltisia repens. K, plant, X 1; L, head, X 8; M, N, corollas and young achenes, X 8; O, style,
< 50; P, stamens, X 50.
© DECEMBER 1957
Microspermum (Helenieae) although not so
extremely developed, are additional significant
features not found in Piqueria.
The genus is dedicated to the collector, Dr.
Ramon Alejandro Ferreyra Huerta, personally
known to many botanists in the United States,
whose explorations and publications are steadily
increasing our knowledge of the flora of his native
land and of other South American countries.
Iltisia Blake, gen. nov.
Capitula discoidea homogama multiflora
aequaliflora. Involucrum 2-seriatum aequale
campanulatum appressum; phyllaria paucs
(8-10) oblongo-ovalia submembranacea supra
plana infra concava achenia foventia. Receptacu-
lum leviter convexum rotundatum nudum.
Corollae tubulosae saepius 4-dentatae, tubo
distmeto faucem campanulatam subaequante,
dentibus (3) 4-5 deltoideis aequalibus fauce paullo
brevioribus. Antherae basi integrae rotundatae
apice appendicibus brevibus latis subtruncatis
conspicue cellularibus donatae. Styli rami
breviusculi erecti appendicibus lanceolato-trian-
gularibus subaequalibus acutis utrinque breviter
hispidis praediti. Achenia (immatura) extima
obovato-oblonga ut videtur obcompressa utraque
facie leviter ca. 2-costata nigra glabra basi
callo brevi recto donata, paullo plusquam duplo
longiora quam latiora; interiora ut videtur com-
pressa utroque latere leviter 1-2 costata. Pappus
nullus.—Herba parva repens parum pubescens
ramis floriferis erectiusculis, foliis oppositis
orbiculari-ovatis grosse crenato-serratis breviter
petiolatis impresso-punctatis punctis plusmi-
nusque pellucidis, capitulis apice ramorum
cymosis ternis parvis breviter pedicellatis, corol-
lis albis styli ramis purpureis. Species typica J.
repens.
Iltisia repens Blake, sp. nov.
Herba ramis floriferis 6-9 cm altis remote
foliatis laxe pilosis et puberulis; folia orbiculari-
ovata obtusa basi subabrupte in petiolum bre-
viorem angustata trinervia subglabra herbacea
indistincte pellucido-punctata; capitula apice
ramorum ternata brevissime pedicellata ca. 3.5
mm alta 4-6 mm diam.; involucri 2.5-3 mm alti
phyllaria obtusa sparsissime pilosula ciliolata ad
aplcem saepe purpurascentia; corollae glabrae
sparsissime sessili-glandulosae.
Stems slender (0.6 mm _ thick), subterete,
striatulate, green or purplish-tinged, rooting at
BLAKE: TWO NEW GENERA OF COMPOSITAE
409
some of the nodes, spreading-pilose and with
more numerous short more or less incurved hairs,
somewhat branched with mostly opposite
branches, these (as collected) only about 7 cm
long or less, their internodes mostly 4-8 mm long,
those of the flowering branches mostly 10-28 mm
long; flowering stems 3-headed, erect from
a curved-ascending base, pilose with mostly
spreading several-celled acuminate hairs, toward
apex densely pilose with mostly incurved or
ascending hairs; petioles narrowly margined
essentially to base, 1-3 mm long, glabrous;
blades 4-6 mm long and wide, very obtuse or
rounded at tip, at base broadly rounded or
cuneate-rounded, obtusely crenate-serrate with
1 or 2 coarse teeth on each side, very sparsely
pilose or glabrous above, beneath scarcely paler
green and very sparsely pilose toward base of
costa or glabrous, obscurely pellucid-punctate
(especially in the younger and thinner leaves)
due to the presence of immersed yellowish glands
on lower surface, or sparsely also on upper sur-
face; peduncle terminal, 3-headed, 5-8 mm long,
the pedicels 1-2 mm long, the lateral ones sub-
tended by an oval or suborbicular bract about 2
mm long, entire or 1l-toothed on each side;
phyllaries obtuse or acutish, 1.2-1.5 mm wide,
sparsely dotted with sessile glands, short-ciliate
above and there sometimes very sparsely short-
pilose, lightly I-nerved or obscurely 3-nerved;
corollas 1.4-1.6 mm long (tube 0.4-0.5 mm,
throat 0.5-0.7 mm, teeth 0.3-0.4 mm_ long);
anthers 0.3 mm long; achene 1.3 mm long, 0.4
mm wide.
Costa Rica: Plants creeping, forming mats
in moss on wet cliff in shrub-paramo (Chusquea,
Hypericum, Vaccinium association), Cerro de la
Muerte, Pan-American Highway, 5 km above
Millsville (Villa Mills) (about 8 km above Nivel),
Cordillera de Talamanca, about on San José-
Cartago provincial border, 3,400-3,500 meters
alt., July 25, 1949, Richard W. Holm & Hugh H.
Tltis 594 (type in Missouri Bot. Gard. Herbarium;
duplicate, U.S. Nat. Herb.).
The proper placement of this apparently quite
distinct genus is difficult, partly because the
material is scanty and not fully mature, partly
because of the minuteness of the flowers. In
general appearance, opposite leaves, heads, and
anthers, it strongly suggests such a member of
the Eupatorieae as Phania, but the nature of
the style branches prevents its reference to that
410
tribe. The characters of style and stamens, in
combination with the naked receptacle, exclude
all tribes but the Astereae, Helenieae, and pos-
sibly Senecioneae. It does not fit at all satis-
factorily into any of the subtribes of Astereae
or Senecioneae, and it seems on the whole best
placed in the Helenieae. Even there it does not
conform too well to any of Rydberg’s numerous
subtribes, but perhaps goes best in the Amauri-
anae, where its discoid heads of regular tubular
flowers and relatively short, epappose achenes
distinguish it from Microspermum. It is not im-
probable that when the mature achenes become
available the genus may have to be placed else-
where, but it seems quite unlike any known genus.
From the rather scrappy material available it is
not clear whether the plant is annual or perennial;
at any rate, no perennial root is visible.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 12
The genus is dedicated to Dr. Hugh Hellmut
Iltis, one of the collectors, now curator of the
herbarium of the University of Wisconsin, who
has specialized in the Capparidaceae, and to his
father, Dr. Hugo Iltis (1882-1952), educator,
botanist, and geneticist, formerly of Brinn
(Brno) in Czechoslovakia, where he founded the
Mendel Museum, which was largely destroyed
or stolen during World War II, later professor of
biology at Mary Washingten College, Fredericks-
burg, Va., where he established the Mendel
Museum of Genetics, now transferred to the
University of Illinois. He was the author of a
life of Mendel, which has been translated into
English, coauthor of Flora Photographica, and
author of numerous other papers and books on
biological subjects. (See biographical notice by
L. C. Dunn, Science 117: 3-4. 1953.)
THE TRUE AIM OF SCIENCE—“‘to elucidate the dark mysteries and unknown
forces which surround us for the benefit of our children, and to make the world
more agreeable and intelligible while we ourselves are forgotten, like the seed
in the furrow.” —SantTIaAGo RAMON ¥ CAJAL.
DECEMBER 1957 HAND:
ANOTHER SEA ANEMONE FROM CALIFORNIA
411
ZOOLOGY .—A nother sea anemone from California and the types of certain Californian
anemones. CADET Hanp, University of California. (Communicated by Fenner
A. Chace, Jr.)
Since I completed my earlier study of the
sea anemones of central California (Hand,
1955, 1955a, 1956), a species not included
in those reports has come to my attention,
and, moreover, those earlier studies did not
indicate the location or disposition of the
types of the several new species described.
The present account therefore will add
one more species to those recorded for the
area studied and will give the needed data
regarding the disposition of the types.
Part I. NEMATOSTELLA
The additional species is Nematostella vectensis
Stephenson. This anemone probably is the
*“will-o-the-wisp” species that I have hunted for
more than 10 years in California. In 1946, the
late Prof. S. F. Light described to me a very
small anemone he had seen in small pools on the
Salicornia marshes of Richardson’s Bay (a part
of San Francisco Bay). Several years later
another story of a small anemone in pools in the
marshes of Tomales Bay reached my ears. Al-
though my friends and students and I have many
times searched pools in Salicornia marshes we have
never seen the anemone in the field. However, in
May 1953 a zoology student (John Petersen)
collected 36 specimens of NV. vectensis in a pool on
the landward edge of a Salicornia marsh on Bay
Farm Island, Alameda County, Calif. This col-
lection has come into my possession through the
kindness of Dr. Willard Hartman, of Yale Uni-
versity.
Nematostella, as a genus, is a member of the
family Edwardsiidae and is readily distinguished
from other edwardsians by the lack of nemathy-
bomes, its possession of very short microcnemes
in the upper column, and the unique nemato-
somes found in the coelenteron. The family
Edwardstidae and genus Nematostella are well
diagnosed in Carlgren (1949), and those defini-
tions need not be repeated here. A brief descrip-
tion of NV. vectensis follows.
Nematostella vectensis Stephenson
1935. Nematostella vectensis Stephenson, p. 44.
1946. Nematostella pellucida Crowell, p. 58.
1949. Nematostella vectensis Carlgren, p. 26.
1949. Nematostella pellucida Carlgren, p. 26.
The following description is based upon a
study of 36 preserved specimens, of which 7 have
been prepared as serial sections for histological
study. The nematocyst data is compounded from
a study of four specimens from Bay Farm Island,
two from Woods Hole, Mass., and one from
Shinglestreet, Suffolk, England.
Description —A small anemone with up to 16
tentacles, the outer tentacles slightly longer than
the inner ones. In some of the specimens the
inner tentacles are raised above the mouth,
while the outer ones are reflexed down the column.
The tentacular crown may approach 8 mm in
diameter. The column is vermiform and in very
large specimens is 15 mm long. The column is
readily divisible into physa and scapus, but a
scapulus and capitulum are not clearly distin-
guishable. In many specimens the greatest diam-
eter of the column is at the area of junction of
physa and scapus. The diameter there seldom
exceeded 2.5 mm and the diameter at the junc-
tion of the tentacles and column usually is about
one half of this.
Internally there are eight macrocnemes of the
normal Hdwardsia type and eight microcnemes
which occur bilaterally as a pair in the dorso-
lateral exocoels and single microcnemes at the
position of the fifth and sixth couples of mesen-
teries. This condition is well illustrated by
Crowell (1946, p. 59). The microcnemes extend
no further down the column than the insertion
of the tentacles. The retractors of the macro-
cnemes bear, in large specimens, from as few as 6
to more than 12 branches. Gonads, when present,
occur on all the macrocnemes.
The nematocysts were as follows:
Tentacles:
Spiroeysts 11-21 X 1.5-2.0u
Basitrichs 10-13 X 2.0-2.5u
Basitrichs 20-25 X 2.0-3.0u
Column:
Basitrichs 10-13 X 2.0-2.5u
Throat and filaments:
Basitrichs 14-18 X 2.5-3.0u
Microbasic mastigophores 18-25 X 3.5-5.0u
Nematosomes:
Basitrichs 14-17 X 2.5-3.0u
Microbasic mastigophores 17-22 X 4.0-5.0u
Discussion.—The nematosomes are numerous,
although no attempt to count them in a single
412
specimen was made. They are about 30 in
diameter and histologically look very much like
bits of the cnidoglandular tracts of the mesen-
terial filaments. The function of the nematosomes
remains unknown, although in one set of sections
I have studied it appears that the nematosomes
have aggregated around a small copepod which
the anemone had ingested. This might suggest
that they gather around ingested food items to
ald in their digestion or to subdue active prey
with their nematocysts. These multicellular,
motile organelles, whatever their function, occur
only in Nematostella and are unique in the animal
kingdom, unless they are comparable to the urns
of certain sipunculids.
The cnidom reported above differs slightly
from that reported by Stephenson (1935) and
Crowell (1946). For example, Crowell reported
only a single-size category of basitrichs from the
tentacles. I have examined the nematocysts of
two Nematostella from Woods Hole which Dr.
Crowell kindly sent to me, and I find in his speci-
mens that I can readily separate the basitrichs
into two-size categories. I note also that Stephen-
son reported two sizes of ‘“‘nematocysts” from the
tentacles, and in checking the tentacles of a
specimen kindly sent to me by Miss E. A. Robson
from England I find these are the two sizes of
basitrichs. I have checked the nematocysts of the
several tissues on specimens from Woods Hole,
England, and California and find that they all
agree very well in all respects. Such slight differ-
ences in the sizes as do occur between the nema-
tocysts reported here and those recorded by
Stephenson and Crowell undoubtedly could be
reconciled if a larger series of animals from each
locality could be examined. These differences are
not thought to be significant indications of specific
differences.
I have also compared transverse serial sections
of specimens from all three localities. The number
of siphonoglyphs is constant at 1, the macro-
cnemes and microcnemes at 8, and the number of
branches in the retractor muscles varies from
about 6 to more than 12 in each population. The
number of tentacles apparently does not exceed
18 in any of the geographic representatives of the
species, and the commonest number seems to be
16. The size and general appearance of this animal
at each of the three localities are also quite
similar, as is their habitat in pools where the
salinity may be highly variable. It is concluded,
therefore, that only one species, Nematostella
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 12
vectensis Stephenson, is involved in the three
localities considered.
There are two other species of Nematostella,
namely, NV. polaris (Carlgren, 1921, p. 65) and N.
nathorstii (Carlgren, 1921, p. 67). Both of these
are known only from the Arctic Ocean in the
area of East Greenland and Spitsbergen. These
species were dredged in quite shallow water,
5-45 meters, except for one specimen of JN.
nathorstu from 1,000 meters. N. polaris, as it was
described, seems quite indistinguishable from N.
vectensis, while N. nathorstii can readily be dis-
tinguished from the others by its large nemato-
cysts. The genus Nematostella thus seems to have
at least two, and possibly three species, and can
be described as a cireumpolar genus.
Several species and species-groups of anemones
have circumpolar distributions, ranging south-
ward into temperate waters in the Atlantic and
Pacific Oceans. Examples are Halcampa and
Tealia (Hand, 1955 and 1955a). The genus
Epiactis is well represented also in both temper-
ate and arctic waters (Carlgren, 1921; Hand,
1955a). However, in no example that I can cite
among anemones is there a single species which
shows a comparable range of habitats to that
between N. vectensis and N. polaris. However,
when we consider the variable environment im
which N. vectensis lives we see that this animal
exists throughout an unusually wide range of
factors. For instance, these shallow pools along
our California coast vary in temperature from
about 0° C to 30° C, depending upon the season
of the year, and their salmity must vary from less
than 50 per cent of normal sea water to probably
more than 100 per cent of normal. Arctic waters
on the other hand are hardly variable at all, but
during cold dry weather a temperate pool could
have the same temperature-salinity characteris-
tics as arctic water. Thus, NV. vectensis might be
able to exist in the Arctic Ocean. It does not seem
too probable, however, that N. polaris and N.
vectensis are the same species, but, if they are
then N. polaris has priority over N. vectensis as a
name.
Part Il. Toe Types or Certain CALIFORNIA
Sra ANEMONES
It has not been possible for me to make a study
of the location of the types of several of the sea
anemones discussed in my earlier papers. For
other species, whose types have been designated,
I have included their location in the list below.
DECEMBER 1957 HAND: ANOTHER
Type specimens, and in some instances, para-
types, have been deposited by me in the collec-
tions of the United States National Museum for
the species I have described as new. Many of the
California anemones were first recorded from
other than Pacific waters and others were de-
scribed by early European authors. In most
instances where types have not been designated
it seems highly probable that the specimens
originally described no longer exist. However,
type specimens may yet be located in various
European collections, and in the absence of a
comprehensive search of the many possible
collections I do not deem it wise to select types
from among the material I have available. The
following list of the sea anemones of centrai
California gives the location of the types where
these are known:
Corynactis californica Carlgren, 1936, p. 17.
Holotype: U.S.N.M. 43060.
Halcampa decemtentaculata Hand, 1955, p. 360.
Lectotype: U.S.N.M. 50637.
Cactosoma arenaria Carlgren, 1931, p. 39. Type
not designated by Carlgren?
Carlgren (1931) had but a single specimen,
which he states was poorly preserved, at the
time he originally described this species. In 1936,
he again briefly describes this species and men-
tions that the nematocysts of a single specimen
from Monterey, Calif., are in good agreement
with the ‘type specimen.’ I have a single speci-
men from the breakwater at San Pedro, Calif.,
the type locality of this species. This specimen is
now deposited in the U.S. National Museum as a
| topotype, no. 50636. It may be discovered that the
original specimen is in the collections at Lund,
and therefore is the holotype. If that specimen
cannot be located it may then be desirable to
| designate this topotype above as the neotype.
| Epiactis prolifera Verrill, 1869, p. 492. Type not
designated but may exist in the collections of
Yale University.
Anthopleura xanthogrammica (Brandt, 1835, p.
212.) Type not designated and _ probably
nonexistent.
Anthopleura elegantissima (Brandt, 1835, p. 213.)
Type not designated and _ probably
nonexistent.
_ Anthopleura artemisia (Pickering in Dana, 1849,
p. 149.) Type not designated and probably
nonexistent.
SEA ANEMONE FROM CALIFORNIA
415
Tealia crassicornis (Mueller, 1776, p. 231.) Type
not designated and probably nonexistent.
Tealia coriacea (Cuvier, 1798, p. 653.) Type not
designated and probably nonexistent.
Tealia lofotensis (Danielssen, 1890, p. 47.) Type
not designated and probably nonexistent.
Zaolutus actius Hand, 1955a, p. 89. Lectotype:
U.S.N.M. 50638. Paratypes: 2 specimens.
U.S.N.M. 50639.
Metridium senile fimbriatum (Verrill, 1865, p. 195.)
There is no indication that Verrill designated
a type specimen for his species or that the
material he based the original description
upon any longer exists. The following specti-
mens have been deposited in the United
States National Museum: Topotype; 1 speci-
men: U.S.N.M. 50640 (this specimen is fig-
ured as figure 387A in Hand, 1956, p. 243).
Topotypes; 4 specimens: U.S.N.M. 50641.
Metridium exilis Hand, 1956,. 206 p. Lectotype:
U.S.N.M. 50642.
Haliplanella luciae (Verrill, 1898, p. 413.) Type not
designated and probably nonexistent.
Diadumene leucolena (Verrill, 1866, p. 336.) Type
not designated and probably nonexistent.
Carlgren (1950) examined two specimens of
this species collected by Hargitt. These spec-
imens were loaned to Carlgren by the United
States National Museum, and if these speci-
mens can be found, one of them should be
designated as the neotype.
Diadumene franciscana Hand, 1956, p. 230.
Lectotype: U.S.N.M. 50643. Paratypes: 3 spec-
imens. U.S.N.M. 50644.
Diadumene lighti Hand, 1956, p. 237. Lectotype:
U.S.N.M. 50645. Paratypes: 6 specimens,
U.S.N.M. 50646.
Nematostella vectensis Stephenson, 1935, p. 44
No types designated.
LITERATURE CITED
Branpt, J. F. Prodromus descriptionis ani-
malium ab H. Mertensio in orbis terrarum
circumnavigatione observatorum. Akademiia
nauk, Leningrad. Recueil des actes de la
séance publique de |’académie impériale des
sciences de St. Pétersbourg, 1835: 201-275.
1835.
CarRuGREN, O. Actiniaria. Part I. Danish Ingolf-
Expedition 5 (9): 1-241. 1921.
, Zur Kenntnis der Actiniaria Abasilaria.
Ark. Zool. 23A (3): 1-48. 1931.
Some West American sea anemones.
Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 26 (1): 16-23.
1936.
A survey of the Ptychodactaria, Corali-
morpharia and Actiniaria. Kongl. Svenska
Vete.-Akad. Handl. Fjarde Serien, 1 (1):
1-121. 1949.
414
CROWELL, S. A new sea anemone from Woods
Hole, Massachusetts. Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 36 (2): 57-60. 1946.
Cuvier, G. Tableau élémentaire de Il’histoire
naturelle des animaux. Zoophytes: 650-683.
Paris, 1798.
Dana, J.D. Zoophytes. United States Exploring
Expedition during the years 1838-42, 7, with
atlas. Philadelphia, 1848.
DANIELSSEN, D.C. Actinida. Norske Nordhavs-
Expedition, Christiania, 19: i-v, 1-184. 1890.
Hann, C. The sea anemones of central California.
Part I. The corallimorpharian and athenarian
anemones. Wasmann Journ. Biol. 12 (3):
345-375. 1955.
The sea anemones of central California.
Part II. The endomyarian and mesomyarian
anemones. Wasmann Journ. Biol. 13 (1) : 37-99.
1955a.
The sea anemones of central California.
Part III. The acontiarian anemones. Wasmann
Journ. Biol. 13 (2): 189-251. 1956.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 12
Mus ier, O. F. Zoologiae Danicae Prodromus,
seu animalium Daniae et Norvegiae indigena-
rum characteres, nomina et synonyma imprimus
populartum: xxxil + 228pp. Havinae, 1776.
STEPHENSON, T. A. The British sea anemones 2:
426 pp. Ray Society volume 121. London, 1935.
VeRRILL, A. E. Classification of polyps. (Ex-
tract condensed from a Synopsis of the Polypi
of the North Pacific Exploring Expedition
under Captains Ringgold and _ Rodgers,
U.S.N.). Ann. Mag. Nat. His. ser. 3, 16 (93):
191-197. 1865.
———. On the polyps and echinoderms of New
England, with descriptions of new species.
Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. His. 10: 333-357. 1866.
———. Notes on the Radiata in the museum of
Yale College, with descriptions of new genera
and species. Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts
and Sci. 1: 247-596. 1869.
——. Descriptions of new American actinians,
with critical notes on other species. Amer.
Journ. Sci., ser. 4, 6: 493-498. 1898.
It is the glory of God to conceal a thing: but the honor of a kings 1s to search
out a matter.—SOLOMON.
:
|
|
|
DECEMBER 1957
TRESSLER: OSTRACODA OF GREAT SLAVE LAKE
415
ZOOLOGY —The Ostracoda of Great Slave Lake. Wituis L. TRessuer, U.S. Navy
Hydrographic Office.
(Received June 10, 1957)
The fresh-water Ostracoda of northern
North America, including Canada, Alaska,
and the Northwest Territories, are an almost
unknown quantity. The present author lists
only 29 species that have been reported from
this region, out of a total number of species
from North America of slightly over 200
(Tressler, in press). Of the 29 species re-
ported from northern North America, only
2 have previously been reported from the
Northwest Territories, and 5 from Alaska;
the remainder are from Nova Scotia, New
Brunswick, Ontario, Quebec, Newfound-
land, Alberta, and Saskatchewan.
The first worker to mention ostracods in
this part of the world appears to be Nichol-
son (1872, 1873), who reported ostracods
(“Cypris sp.”) as common on the muddy
bottoms of Lake Ontario. Since then several
workers have reported ostracod species
from northern North America, namely,
Alm, Bigelow, Cushman, Huntsman, Klugh,
Sharpe, and Willey (see Johansen’s anno-
tated bibliography in Sars, 1926). G. O.
Sars (1926) reported upon 16 species col-
lected mainly from the area near Ottawa; 5
of these were new, and a sixth species
(Cypriconcha barbata (Forbes)) was made
the type of a new genus.
No investigation has been made previously
of the ostracods of Great Slave Lake. The
present paper reports on five species of
bottom-dwelling forms, two of which appear
to be new. The most abundant species,
Candona crogmaniana Turner, was found in
all parts of the lake at depths of 5 to 183
meters. Candona decora Furtos was also
widely distributed on the lake bottom, al-
though less abundant, and was the only
ostracod present between depths of 183 and
600 meters. The large Cypriconcha barbata
(Forbes) was found at Yellowknife and off
Slave Point on the western shore of the main
Jake in shallow water. Other shallow-water
forms were Candona rawsoni, found in the
main portion of the lake, and Limnocythere
— oughtoni, found only in the shallow water
near the Talston River and Preble Island.
The material from which the present re-
port was prepared consisted of a large num-
ber of collections made from all parts of the
bottom of Great Slave Lake as a part of the
intensive limnological and fishery investi-
gation carried out from 1944 to 1947 by
parties under Dr. D. 8. Rawson of the Uni-
versity of Saskatchewan. Dr. Rawson for-
warded the separated ostracods to the author
for identification and in addition kindly per-
mitted the use and inclusion in the present
report of ecological and other information
on Great Slave Lake, which are treated in
detail in his two principal reports on the
physical limnology and bottom fauna
(Rawson, 1950, 1953). I am greatly indebted
to Dr. Rawson for the opportunity of ex-
amining this material and for most of the
information covered in the present paper
under the headings of “Great Slave Lake’’
and ‘“‘General Discussion.”
The shdes of the dissected specimens
from which camera lucida drawings were
made of the type specimens, have been de-
posited in the U. S. National Museum.
GREAT SLAVE
Great Slave Lake in the Northwest Terri-
tories 1s a very large, oligotrophic lake
lying geologically between the Mackenzie
lowlands and the Canadian pre-Cambrian
shield. It is of recent origin, probably less
than 10,000 years old. Five-sixths of its
inflow comes from the Slave River, which
drains an area of 234,000 square miles. The
remainder of the inflow comes from local
rivers, which add another 150,000 square
miles to the drainage area. Great Slave Lake
is the principal source of the Mackenzie
River, which flows north to the Arctic
Ocean.
The climate of the region in which the
lake is located may be termed northern con-
tinental, with long, cold winters and short,
warm summers; it has a low annual precipi-
tation. The mean annual air temperature of
the lake region is 23° F. Ice covers the lake
for more than 5 months of the year. In
LAKE
416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 47, No. 12
summer, the mean air temperature runs
between 50° and 60° F. The long daylight
hours during the summer months (15 to
19.5 hours) permit vigorous growth of vege-
tation. The permafrost line runs north of
McLeod Bay, but there are also areas (or
“islands’’) of permafrost scattered around
the lake at Hay River, Resolution, and on
the banks of the Slave River near Snow-
drift. The margin of the continuous perma-
frost belt cuts across the lake from east to
west.
Great Slave Lake is 275 miles long from
Reliance, at the northern end of the east arm
of the lake, to the Mackenzie River source
at the southwest corner. It is 100 miles
from Resolution to Fort Rae. The main lake
occupies a region about 50 by 100 miles in
extent. The shoreline of the main lake is
fairly regular but the north and east arms
of the lake have a very irregular shoreline,
with complex topography caused by the
pre-Cambrian areas in which they lie. The
total length of the shoreline of the entire lake
is about 1,900 miles, giving a shoreline de-
velopment of 5 to 1 and indicating a high
degree of shoreline irregularity. Sand beaches
are common along the south shores, but
there are few along the north shores of the
lake. In the Yellowknife area there are many
sloping, smooth, rocky shores, and in the
east arm of the lake are many cliffs with
few sand beaches. There are, however, some
channels and _ well-protected bays with
warmer water, which have rich humus
bottoms and abundant aquatic plant growth.
These areas make excellent environments
for ostracods. The entire lake covers an
area of 10,500 square miles, of which the
main lake accounts for 7,500 square miles.
The main lake is thus of about the same size
as Lake Ontario. The mean depth of the
main lake is 41 meters, with a maximum
depth of 163 meters. The deepest area of
the lake, however, is in Christie Bay (614
meters) in the east arm.
Surface temperatures of the lake water
in summer average 14° C. offshore and 16°
C. inshore. Bottom water temperatures in
summer in the shallow water of the main
lake, ranged from 14° C. late in July in the
Inner Bay at Yellowknife to 3.4° C. at 37
meters depth 10 miles southwest of Hardisty
Island late in June. In the deep water, tem-
peratures range from 4.0° to 4.8° C. at 100
meters; 3.7° to 3.8° C. at 300 meters; and
3.6° to 3.7° C. at 575 meters.
Oxygen is abundant at all depths, and al-
though there is some decrease in the hypo-
limnion during summer, the saturation
never is below 82 percent. Hydrogen-ion
concentration ranges from pH 7.7 to 8.3 in
most of the lake except in McLeod Bay,
which is slightly acid and has a pH of be-
tween 6.6 and 6.9. Dissolved materials in
the main lake average 150 p.p.m., with cal-
cium and bicarbonates predominating, but
are much lower in McLeod Bay (22 p.p.m.).
Transparency, as measured by Secchi disc,
ranges from 0.1 to 1.0 meters in the Slave
Delta, to 4 to 13 meters in Christie Bay, and
10 to 17 meters in McLeod Bay. The trans-
parency at the inshore stations in the main
lake ranged from 0.1 to 5.3 meters.
Great Slave Lake is thus a cold water,
highly oligotrophic lake, with the McLeod
Bay portion reaching extremes of oligo-
trophy, which is borne out by its low mineral
content, great transparency, and _ poor
plankton productivity. The extreme youth
of the lake, together with climatic, mor-
phometric, and edaphic factors which in-
fluence its oligotrophy make this lake an
extremely interesting subject of study. In
his study of the fish population of Great
Slave Lake, Dr. Rawson (1951) found that
it compared favorably with that of the
northern Great Lakes. Only two species of
fishes, however, were found to have ostra-
cods as part of their stomach contents
(Rawson, 1953).
GENERAL DISCUSSION
In his report on the bottom fauna of
Great Slave Lake, Rawson (1953) discusses
this fauna in relation to morphometric and
edaphic factors and compares it with that
of other large lakes of the north. As a result
of more than 600 dredgings made during
this survey, more than 1,700 ostracods were
obtained. The total ostracod population
averaged 57 individuals per square meter of
bottom surface, with a range of from 4 to
152 per square meter, depending upon depth.
:
:
DECEMBER 1957
The greatest number of ostracods was found
| at between 40 and 50 meters depth, where
the average was 152 per square meter. The
smallest concentration of ostracods oc-
-eurred in shallow water. Also, below 50
_ meters depth the average declined to about
25 individuals per square meter. Throughout
the entire area of Great Slave Lake, ostra-
cods made up 3.5 percent of the total num-
ber of bottom organisms collected. Broken
down into the five main lake regions, the
results were as follows: in the main part of
the lake, 3.8 percent; in Yellowknife Bay,
3.4 percent; in the Islands, 4.2 percent; in
Christie and Wildbread Bays, 0.7 percent;
and 5 percent in McLeod Bay.
In the deepest part of the lake (Christie
Bay) only one species of ostracod (Candona
_decora Furtos) was found, and this was also
true of the other groups of the bottom
fauna such as the amphipods, nematodes,
_oligochaetes, chironomids, and _ sphaeriids,
which were represented by one species each.
The bottom sediments in the deepest part
of the lake were composed of ‘‘fine-grained
grey clay of creamy consistency at the sur-
face and stiffer below’? (Rawson, 1953) with
only minute amounts of organic material in
the surface layer. The sediments were com-
posed of very few particles of sand size and
larger, while silt, with particles 0.01 to 0.1
mm in diameter made up 2 percent, clay
particles of 0.001 to 0.01 mm diameter 40
percent, and the remaining 58 percent was
composed of clay particles of less diameter
than 0.001 mm.
The Slave River empties into the lake
near Resolution and carries a tremendous
load of sediment out over its delta. The bot-
tom population of the delta was carefully
studied by Rawson (1953), who found it
to be highly favorable for oligochaetes and
nematodes, but all other groups of bottom
organisms were scarcer here than in other
parts of the lake. The ostracods were about
one-third as numerous here than elsewhere,
and this is probably caused by the shifting
sediments of the delta which formed an un-
favorable environment for them.
Ostracods were found in the stomachs of
only two of the 12 species of fishes examined,
namely, the common whitefish (Coregonus
TRESSLER: OSTRACODA OF GREAT
SLAVE LAKE 417
clupeaformis) and the cisco (Leucichthys
spp.) (Rawson 1951).
The bottom fauna of Great Slave Lake
compared favorably in quantity with that
of the other great lakes of the northwest
(Winnipeg, Reindeer, Athabaska, and Great
Bear Lakes). These are all large oligotrophic
lakes dominated by the amphipod Ponto-
poreia. Although the ostracod fauna of
these lakes is unknown, a similar pattern to
that found in Great Slave Lake would be
expected of them in such large oligotrophic
lakes, where morphometric factors are dom-
inant in determining the production of
bottom fauna.
There are a comparatively small number
of ostracod species present in Great Slave
Lake; only five species were collected from
the entire series of over 600 samples. Of
these the most abundant and widely dis-
tributed was Candona crogmaniana Forbes,
1893, which was found pretty much over
the entire lake in water as deep as 183
meters, but which was absent from the areas
of greatest depth. Candona decora Furtos,
1933, while not so numerous in individuals
as the previous species, was equally well
distributed and was the only ostracod found
in the deepest portions of the lake (Christie
Bay). A new species of Candona, which is
described for the first time in this report,
was found only in the main portion of the
lake at depths of 11 to 37 meters. The large
ostracod Cypriconcha barbata (Forbes, 1893)
was found only in two locations in the lake
(Yellowknife Bay and off Slave Point). The
fifth species found in Great Slave Lake, also
described as new in this report, was collected
in shallow water in two locations near the
junction of the main part of the lake and
the Islands portion, off the mouth of the
Talston River, and near Preble Island.
The scarcity of species, together with the
large number of individuals, is characteristic
of the colder regions, and is in marked con-
trast with tropical and subtropical realms
where there are enormous numbers of species
with comparatively few individuals. The
bottom fauna of Great Slave Lake offers
an excellent illustration of this well-estab-
lished observation.
418
TAXONOMY
Suborder Popocopa
Family CypripaE
Subfamily CANDOCYPRINAE
Genus Candona Baird, 1845
This genus contains many species, most of
which can be identified only from a close exami-
nation of the internal anatomy. The shape of the
shell is generally ovoid, with a smooth surface
and is more or less finely haired. The eye is
usually not well developed and is often entirely
lacking. The color of the shell is white or creamy.
The anterior antennae are 5-segmented. The
posterior antennae are without natatory setae.
The penultimate segment of the mandibular
palp is short and stout. The palp of the maxillary
process has a terminal segment which is broader
than long. The third thoracic leg is 4-segmented
but frequently appears to be 5-segmented
because of an incomplete division of the
penultimate segment, which has one terminal
seta: terminal segment with three unequal setae,
one of which is much smaller than the others.
The fureal ramus is well-developed with two
claws and one or two setae. In the male the penis
is prominent and has one lateral and one, or some-
times more, terminal lobes. The ejaculatory duct
has five whorls of spines. All known species of
this genus are confined to the northern hemis-
phere.
Candona decora Furtos, 1933
Figs. 3,4
Candona candida (part); Brady and Norman, Sci.
Trans. Royal Dublin Soc., ser 2, 4: 99, pl. 10,
figs. 20-23. 1889.
Candona decora Furtos, Ohio Biol. Surv. 5(6) : 477,
pl. 7, figs. 3-5; pl. 9, figs. 21-22; pl. 11, figs,
5-6. 1933.
Candona decora, Tressler (in press) Ostracoda,
Ward and Whipple’s ‘Freshwater Biology,”’
ed. 2.
Specific characters—Frmaue: Seen from the
side: elongated, height less than one-half the
length, highest in the posterior third; anterior
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 47, No. 12
end broadly rounded, posterior end truncated;
anterior slope of dorsal margin gently arched, —
with an anterior and medial sinuation, posterior |
slope straight; ventral margin with a slight —
sinuation. Seen from above: shape elliptical,
width less than one-half the length; left valve
projects beyond right at anterior and posterior
ends. Surface of valves smooth and _ faintly
reticulated in the posterior region. Valves are
sparsely hairy. Penultimate segment of third
thoracic leg divided, terminal segment slightly
longer than broad and with shortest distal seta
three and one-half times longer than the terminal
segment. Furca curved and sixteen times as long
as the narrowest width of the ramus; dorsal seta
three-fourths as long as the subterminal claw;
terminal claw less than one-half as long as the
ramus: terminal seta one-fourth the length of the
terminal claw. Length of female 1.15-1.25 mm,
height 0.62-0.69 mm. Color white.
Mate: Larger than female with shell of a
different shape, with a much sinuated ventral
margin and a narrower anterior end. Posterior
end broadly truncated. Prehensile palps unlike
each other, one being much narrower. Furca
straight and about eighteen times the length of
the narrowest part of the ramus; much narrower
beyond the dorsal seta. Length of male 1.45 mm,
height 0.75 mm.
Occurrence—This species was widely dis-
tributed in Great Slave Lake at depths of between
12 and 600 meters, during June, July, and August.
It was the only ostracod found between 500 and
600 meters in Christie Bay. In the main lake it
was taken in Yellowknife Bay (14-16 meters),
between Mirage Islands and Gypsum Point
(48 meters), 10 miles off Gypsum Point (96
meters), between Mirage Islands and the Reso-
lution Delta (105 meters), in Resolution Bay
(11 meters) near Burnt Island (11 meters), off
Caribou Island (14 meters), between Jones Point
and Resolution (58 meters), off the mouth of
Big Buffalo River (14 meters), and between
Slave Point and Big Buffalo River (12-25 meters).
In the east arm of the lake this species was found
south-southeast of Wilson Island (22 meters),
Fies. 1-18.—1, Cypriconcha barbata (Forbes): Lateral view of entire animal, female. 2, Candona
crogmaniana Turner: Lateral view of right valve, female. 3, 4, Candona decora Furtos: 3, Lateral view of
right valve, male; 4, lateral view of right valve, female. 5-11, Candona rawsoni, n. sp.: 5, Lateral view of
entire animal, female; 6, lateral view of left valve, male; 7, furca, female; 8, second thoracic leg, female;
9, first antenna, female; 10, third thoracic leg, female; 11, second antenna, female. 12-18, Limnocythere
oughtont, n. sp.: 12, Lateral view of left valve, female; 13, lateral view of right valve, female; 14, 1aaxil-
lary palp, female; 15, first thoracic leg, female; 16, second antenna, female; 17, second thoracic leg,
female; 18, first antenna, female.
DECEMBER 1957 TRESSLER: OSTRACODA OF GREAT SLAVE LAKE 419
Figs. 1-18.—(For explanation see opposite page).
420 JOURNAL OF THE
in Christie Bay (500-600 meters), and east of
Isles du Large (15 meters).
Distribution —Great. Britain, Ohio,
chusetts, Michigan, in ponds and lakes.
Remarks.—This species was described from
Ohio by Furtos (1933) and has been reported by
the same author from Massachusetts. The present
author has identified it from Michigan as well.
It was found in early spring in Ohio and
apparently prefers cool water, as its wide
distribution in Great Slave Lake confirms.
Massa-
Candona crogmaniana Turner, 1894
Fig. 2
Candona crogmaniana Turner, Bull. Sci. Lab.
Univ. 8(2): 20, pl. 8, figs. 24-33. 1894.
Candona crogmani Sharpe, Ostracoda, Ward and
Whipple’s ‘“‘Freshwater Biology,” p. 824. 1918.
Candona crogmaniana, Miller, Ostracoda, Das
Tierreich: 144. 1912.
Candona crogmaniana, Furtos, Bull. Ohio Biol.
Surv. 5(6): 476, pl. 8, figs. 1-3; pl. 9, figs. 17-18;
pl. 11, figs. 9-10, 1933.
Candona crogmaniana, Tressler (in press), Ostra-
coda, Ward and Whipple’s ‘‘Freshwater Bi-
ology,’’ ed. 2.
Specific characters —FEMALE: Seen from the
side, elongated, height less than one-half the
length, highest in the posterior third of the body:
anterior end broadly rounded, the posterior end
narrower. Anterior slope of dorsal margin gently
arched with an anterior sinuation; posterior
slope much steeper. Ventral margin sinuated.
Seen from above, the valves are compressed,
width about two-fifths the length, both extremi-
ties pointed, the posterior end more pointed than
the anterior. The left valve extends past the
right valve at the posterior end. Surface of valves
smooth and with few hairs. The eye is well
developed for the genus Candona and is of a black
color. Penultimate segment of the third thoracic
leg divided; terminal segment with the shortest
seta four times the length of the segment. Furca
19 times as long as the narrowest width of the
ramus: dorsal seta as long as the subterminal
claw; terminal claw one-half as long as the
ramus; terminal seta one-fourth the length of the
terminal claw. Length of female 1.48 mm, height
0.68 mm, width 0.60 mm. Color whitish gray.
Mate: Larger than the female and much
higher, with a strongly arched dorsal margin.
Posterior end very broadly rounded. Prehensile
palps unlike, one stout, the other longer and
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL, 47, No. 12
considerably narrower. Length of male 1.50 mm, |
height 0.75 mm, width 0.65 mm.
Occurrence.—A great many individuals of this
easily recognized species were collected from —
various parts of Great Slave Lake during June,
July, and August, at depths from 5 to 183 meters.
The deepest place at which this form was found
was off Goulet Bay. In the main lake it was also
taken at Yellowknife Bay (5-25 meters), in the
inner bay at Yellowknife (7-13 meters), between
Redrock Point and West Mirage Island (22-
69 meters), south of East Mirage Island (30
meters) between Yellowknife Bay and Gypsum
Point (86 meters), between Gros Cap and
Hardisty Island (31-140 meters), off Gros Cap
(72 meters), near the Outpost Islands (25-65
meters), between Goulet and Egg islands (16-27
meters), near Goulet Island (14-37 meters), at
several places in Resolution Bay (5-7 meters),
near Egg Island (11-25 meters), and between
Egg and Hardisty islands (25-45 meters). In
the east arm of the lake it was found at Francois
Bay (15 meters), south-southeast of Wilson
Island (24 meters), off Pearson Point (17 meters),
in Portage Inlet (19 meters), in Wildbread Bay
(63-104 meters), and east of the Isles du Large
(15-84 meters), at the western extremity of the
“Tslands Area.”
Distribution —Georgia, Illinois, Wisconsin,
Michigan, New York, and as a fossil in post-
Tertiary beds in Kansas and New York.
Remarks.—This species was found in Ohio
(Furtos, 1933) in permanent and temporary
ponds in spring and in fall, and in a cool water
hole the year around. Originally described from
shallow water near Atlanta by Turner (1894),
it has since been reported from such widely
differmg habitations as the bottom of Lake
Mendota in Wisconsin and from the St. Law-
rence River in New York (Tressler, in press).
It is apparently widely distributed over North
America, but seems to prefer cool water.
Candona rawsoni, n. sp.
Figs. 5-11
Specific characters—FrMALE: Seen from the
side, elongated with greatest height at about the
middle and amounting to one-half the length;
dorsal margin rounded with a gentle anterior
slope and a more steeply inclined posterior slope.
The anterior ends of both valves are rounded;
the posterior end of the left valve is much more
DECEMBER 1957 TRESSLER:
broadly rounded than the anterior end. The
posterior end of the right valve is very dissimilar,
ending in a truncated termination which extends
beyond the end of the left valve posteriorly and
ventrally. Ventral margin is sinuated anterior to
the middle. Seen from above, the shells are
moderately tumid. The surface of the shell is
covered with short, thick, stiff hairs. First
antenna 5-segmented. Second antenna short and
thick. The penultimate segment of the third
thoracie leg is not divided but is provided with
one seta; terminal segment slightly longer than
broad with the shortest seta four times the
length of the segment; longest seta two times the
length of the shortest. Furca curved and eleven
times the narrowest width of the ramus; terminal
claw about half the length of the ramus, sub-
terminal claw three-fourths the length of the
terminal claw; terminal seta one-eighth the
length of the terminal claw; dorsal seta two-
thirds the length of subterminal claw and re-
moved from the base of the subterminal claw
by the length of the dorsal seta. Length of fe-
male 1.19 mm, height 0.58 mm, Color brown.
Male. Somewhat larger than the female and
with valves of a different shape. Valves much
higher than one-half the length, highest at about
the middle. Both ends are rounded but the
posterior end is much more broadly rounded than
the anterior. Dorsal margin broadly arched,
ventral margin sinuated with a distinct corner
in the anterior third. Spermatic vessels show
through the valves conspicuously. Other internal
structures are similar to the female. Length of
male 1.26 mm, height 0.72 mm.
Occurrence-—This form was found only in the
main part of the lake at comparatively shallow
depths which ranged from 11 to 37 meters. Col-
lections were made during June, July, and
August. It was taken at Yellowknife Bay (20
meters), near the Outpost Islands (17 meters), in
several places in Resolution Bay (11-25 meters),
west of Egg Island toward Jones Point (20
meters), off the south shore of the lake (13
meters), and between the Talston River and
Goulet Island (14-37 meters). Type locality,
Resolution Bay. Holotype, female, U.S.N.M.
100870; male paratype, 100869.
Distribution —Known only from Great Slave
Lake.
Remarks.—This species, especially in the fe-
male, should be easily recognized from the
peculiar truncation of the posterior part of the
OSTRACODA OF GREAT
SLAVE LAKE 421
right valve which gives it a very distinctive ap-
pearance. As many males as females were col-
lected, the two being associated together. I am
happy to name this interesting species after Dr.
D.S. Rawson of the University of Saskatchewan.
Subfamily Cyprinak
Genus Cypriconcha Sars, 1926
This genus is composed of large ostracods
with valves covered with coarse hairs. The valves
are rather thin and have unarmed edges. The
antennae, although not well-developed, are well
adapted for swimming. The masticatory lobes of
the maxillae are rather narrow; the palp is pro-
duced and has a cylindrical distal joint. Furcal
rami are long and slender, with the distal edge
finely hairy. Ejaculatory tubes have numerous
whorls of radiating spines.
Remarks.—This genus at present contains
only three species: C. barbata, which is reported
upon below; C. alba Dobbin (1941) from Wash-
ington; and C. gigantea Dobbin (1941) from
Alaska. The genus was established in 1926 by
G. O. Sars to include a large ostracod originally
described by Forbes (1893) as “Cypris barbata”’
from Wyoming. Turner (1895) later referred it
to the genus Herpetocypris, and this designation
was also adopted by Sharpe (1918). It is, how-
ever, quite distinctly a separate genus and not
referable to either of the two above mentioned
genera because of differences in shell structure
and appendages. Species of this genus have been
reported only from cooler, northern regions.
Cypriconcha barbata (Forbes, 1893)
Fig. 1
Cypris barbata Forbes, Bull. U. 8. Fish. Comm.
1893: 214, pl. 37, figs. 2, 3; pl. 38. 1893.
Herpetocypris barbata, Turner, Freshwater Os-
tracoda of the United States (Entomostraca of
Minnesota): 316, pl. 77. 1895.
Herpetocypris barbata, Sharpe, Ostracoda, Ward
and Whipple’s ‘‘Freshwater Biology,’ p. 812.
1918.
Cypriconcha barbata, Sars, Rep. Canad. Arctic
Exped., 1913-1918, 7(1): Ostracoda, p. 5, pl. 2.
1926.
Cypriconcha barbata, Tressler (in press), Ostra-
coda, Ward and Whipple’s ‘‘Freshwater Bi-
ology,” ed. 2.
Specific characters—FEMALE: Seen from the
side, shell elongate, height two-fifths the length,
highest in posterior quarter of length; dorsal
margin rather straight, sloping toward the an-
422
terior end; anterior end rounded; posterior slope
dropping sharply at a 45° angle to the posterior
end and forming a blunt angle with a broadly
rounded corner. In the dorsal portion the pos-
terior end is straight, but on the ventral portion
it is rounded. Ventral margin weakly convex.
Seen from above, width about two-fifths the
length. Surface of valves smooth and covered
with fine hairs. Natatory setae of second antennae
extend to the middle of the terminal claws.
Maxillary palp has two smooth spines. The first
thoracic leg has a peculiarly shaped palp, the
tip narrowing and curving over to one side.
Furca long and narrow; 20 times as long as the
narrowest width of the ramus; and S-shaped;
posterior border with thick, short spines with
longer spines at intervals; terminal claws about
one-fifth the length of the ramus; terminal
seta one-fifth length of terminal claw; dorsal seta
one-sixth length of the terminal claw. Length of
female 4.00 mm, height 2.00 mm, width 1.60 mm.
Color dirty-yellowish brown with a_ reddish-
brown patch on either side.
Mats: Slightly smaller than female, of similar
shape except that the height is equal to about
one-half the length. Ventral margin distinctly
sinuated in the anterior third and bowed in the
posterior half. Seen from above, width equal to
one-third the length, with both extremities
pointed, the posterior end more pointed than the
anterior. The appendages are similar to those of
the female. Ejaculatory tubes are very large
with a large number of fine radiating spines.
Length of male 3.40 mm, height 1.70 mm. Color,
same as female.
Occurrence.—A few specimens, both male and
female, were found in shallow water ranging from
3 to 6 meters depth in Yellowknife Bay, in the
inner bay at Yellowknife (1.7 meters), and be-
tween Slave Point and Brabant Island (5 meters),
during July and August.
Distribution —Wyoming, Alberta, in rivers and
sloughs in June, July, and August.
Remarks.—Cypriconcha barbata is another
cool-water species confined to the Northern
Hemisphere. Originally described from female
specimens taken in the cold waters of the Yellow-
stone River in Yellowstone National Park, Wyo.
(Forbes, 1893), a solitary male specimen was
collected in June 1920 by A. G. Huntsman in a
slough, northeast of Medicine Hat, Alberta, and
was described by G. O. Sars (1926). The present
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 12
finding in Great Slave Lake is the only other |
known record of this large species.
Family CyTHERIDAE
Subfamily LrimNocyTHERINAE
Genus Limnocythere Brady, 1867
This genus contains ostracods with thin shells
of chitin and very little calcareous material.
They have broad marginal zones, often reticu-
lated valve surfaces and may or may not have
tubercles, spines or furrows. The first antenna
has an elongate terminal segment; two of the
terminal setae are fused. The second antenna is
4-segmented; the flagellum is often bi-articulate.
Masticatory process of maxilla is strongly de-
veloped with an indistinctly segmented palp.
The thoracic legs are similar and slender; ter-
minal claw of third leg is frequently elongated.
The fureal ramus has a single terminal claw and
one or two lateral setae.
Remarks—This is the only fresh-water genus
of the family Cytheridae. The genus Limno-
cythere contains forms that are either fresh-water
or brackish water inhabitants but never entirely
marine. The thoracic legs are never much differ-
entiated as in the Cyprinae, and the exopodite
of the second antenna, which is absent in this
group, becomes a well-developed flagellum in the
Cytheridae.
Limnocythere oughtoni, n. sp.
Figs. 12-18
Specific characters —FrMALE: Seen from the
side, height about three-fifths the length, highest
well forward of the middle. Anterior end broadly
rounded, posterior end less rounded. Marginal
zone of valves indistinct. Small dorsal and lateral
protuberances present at the highest point and
in the posterior third. One indistinct dorsolateral
furrow present. Surface of valves smooth with no
reticulations or sculpturing; valves are sparsely
hairy. Second antenna with poorly developed
bi-articulate flagellum reaching only slightly
beyond the middle of the terminal claws. Legs
are typical of the genus. Furca is pointed with a
tapering spine and no papilla at the base of the
seta. Length of female 0.90 mm, height 0.56 mm.
Color grayish white.
Mate: Unknown.
Occurence.—Seven female specimens of this
species were collected in shallow water during
_
DECEMBER 1957 HOFFMAN: NEW
July off Preble Island (2-10 meters) and between
the Talston River and Goulet Island (2-9
meters). Type locality, Goulet Island. Female
holotype, U.S.N.M. 100871; female paratype
100872.
Distribution —Known only at present from
Great Slave Lake.
Remarks—It is a pleasure to dedicate this
species to Dr. J. G. Oughton, who was a member
of the field party from 1944 to 1946 and who
assisted in the work of separation of the bottom
organisms for identification.
LITERATURE CITED
DossBin, CATHERINE N. Freshwater Ostracoda
from Washington and other western localities.
Univ. Washington Publ. Biol. 4: 174-246.
1941.
Forpes, 8. A. A preliminary report on the aquatic
invertebrate fauna of the Yellowstone National
Park, Wyoming, and of the Flathead region of
Montana. Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm. 1893: 207-
258.
Furtos, Norma C. The Ostracoda of Ohio. Ohio
Biol. Surv. 5: 411-524. 1933.
Nicuotson, H. A. Preliminary report on dredg-
NAME FOR THE RACE-RUNNER LIZARD 423
ings in Lake Ontario in 1872. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 4, 10: 276-285. 1872.
Contributions to the fauna of Canada.
Canad. Journ. Toronto 13: 278-281. 1873.
Rawson, D. 8S. The physical limnology of Great
Slave Lake. Journ. Fish. Res. Board Canada,
8(1): 1-66. 1950.
Studies of the fish of Great Slave Lake.
Journ. Fish. Res. Board Canada 8(4) : 207-240.
1951.
The bottom fauna of Great Slave Lake.
Journ. Fish. Res. Board Canada. 10(8): 486-
520. 1953.
Sars, G. O. Freshwater Ostracoda from Canada
and Alaska. Rep. Canad. Arctic Exped. 1913-
1918, 7(1): 1-22. 1926.
SHARPE, Ricuarp W. The Ostracoda. Ward and
Whipple’s ‘‘Freshwater Biology”: 790-827.
1918.
TresstER, Wituis L. The Ostracoda. Ward and
Whipple’s ‘Freshwater Biology,” ed. 2. (In
press.)
Turner, C. L. Notes on American Ostracoda with
description of new species. Bull. Sci. Lab.
Denison Univ. 8(2) : 13-25. 1894.
Freshwater Ostracoda of the United States.
Rep. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minnesota, Zool.,
ser. 2, Entomostraca of Minnesota. 1895.
HERPETOLOGY.—A new name for the race-runner lizard of the Middle Atlantic
States (Tejidae). Ricuarp L. Horrman, Blacksburg, Va.
In a recent issue of this JouRNAL (47: 153.
1957) I proposed the name Cnemidophorus
sexlineatus oligoporus for a population of the
species occurring from Maryland to South
Carolina. Subsequently Drs. R. G. Zweifel
and Richard Etheridge kindly brought my
attention to the fact that the subspecific
/ name is preoccupied in the genus by the
combination Cnemidophorus deppei oligo-
porus Smith (Publ. Field Mus. Nat. Hist.,
zool. ser., 24: 26. 1939), proposed for a
Mexican lizard.
A new name is thereby required for the
designation of the northeastern subspecies of
sexlineatus, and I suggest for it the combina-
tion Cnemidophorus sexlineatus pauciporus,
this trinomial having the same denotation
as its predecessor.
424
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 47, No. 12
NEW LIGHT ON THE ADENA PEOPLE
A famous West Virginia Indian mound, lying
in the path of industrial developments, has
recently been excavated under the direction of a
Smithsonian Institution archeologist and has
yielded important information on the prehistoric,
3,000-year-old Adena people of the Ohio Valley.
Frank M. Setzler, head curator of anthropology
of the Smithsonian’s National Museum, recently
returned from directing the excavation of the
finds.
The Welcome mound was located 16 miles
south of one of the largest Indian mounds in the
United States—the Grave Creek mound at
Moundsville, W. Va. Twenty feet high and 110
feet in diameter, and situated on the third terrace
above the Ohio River, the mound was doomed to
imminent annihilation because of the tremendous
expansion program in this rapidly growing indus-
trial area between Wheeling and Huntington.
““\ bulldozer,’ comments Mr. Setzler, ‘could
have leveled the 100,000 cubic feet of earth in a
couple of days. However, the Columbia-Southern
Chemical Corp., a subsidiary of the Pittsburgh
Plate Glass Co., recognized the scientific possi-
bilities and saw a chance to record and preserve
whatever archeological data and materials the
mound might contain. The director of the
Natrium plant, C. E. Wolf, thereupon sought the
assistance of the Smithsonian Institution and
indicated that his corporation would supply the
labor, equipment, laboratory facilities, and an
engineer if the Institution would send an archeol-
ogist to direct the excavation.”
This unique offer of collaboration was accepted,
and Mr. Setzler spend the period from October 7
to November 22 at the site, carefully excavating
with a crew of about half a dozen men using
shovels and mattocks. The spill dirt and the
eroded sides were moved by a bulldozer.
“One of the most remarkable specimens un-
covered,” says Mr. Setzler, “was a carved effigy
tubular pipe. The normal pipe of these Adena
people was a straight tube. In this case the pre-
historic sculptor carved the head and neck of a
shoveler duck with an expanding bill, eyes, and |
slits for nostril. But the most diagnostic trait was
a series of fine incised lines on the underside of |
the bill to represent the lamellae so characteristic
of shoveler ducks. This pipe represents the only
bird efigy recorded from an Adena mound and
is the third carved tubular pipe from this cultural
horizon. It is made from Ohio limestone, a type
of material relatively soft and easy to carve when
freshly dug from the ground. After exposure to
the air the stone becomes hard and brittle.
“Three adult human skeletons had been buried
in the mound. The bodies were lying on and
covered with several layers of what appeared to
be oak bark. The acidity developed by these
bark coverings rapidly decomposed all perishable
objects buried with the dead. Even the bones of
the skeletons were hardly more than imprints in
the earth. A large canine tooth, possibly of a
wolf, was found in the mouth cavity of the male
skeleton. This could indicate that he was buried
wearing a shaman or tribal leader costume such
as a wolf mask. A mask of this type has been
found in one of the Ohio Adena mounds. In one
sense these central burials were unique in the
absence of nonperishable objects such as stone,
bone, or shell associated with the dead.”
The artifacts and skeletal materials recovered
from the mound will be subjected to detailed
study at the U.S. National Museum before a full
report on the site can be made and the finds
finally evaluated and correlated with what is
already known of the archeology of the region.
Particularly noteworthy, Mr. Setzler feels, is
the fine example of cooperation between a large
commercial enterprise and a scientific institution,
under which the work was accomplished. “By
collaboration with the Smithsonian Institution,
the Columbia-Southern Chemical Corp. has effec-
tively supported a phase of basic research outside
its immediate interest and has participated in
the preservation of a small segment of the pre-
history of North America, in particular one of
the earliest of the sedentary cultures in the Ohio
Valley.”
So
Logic is the art of thinking well; the mind, like the body, requires to be
trained before it can use its powers in the most advantageous ways.—LORD
KAMES.
INDEX TO VOLUME 47
An asterisk (*) denotes the abstract of a paper presented before the Academy or an affiliated society
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Anthropological Society of Washington. 391.
Philosophical Society of Washington. 25.
AUTHOR INDEX
Atuarp, H. A. The stridulations of some crick-
ets in the Dominican Republic. 150.
Barser, Epwarp 8S. The role of the civil engi-
neer in soil mechanies. 218.
BacMGarpbT, ErNest. The quantum character of
light and its implications on visual thresholds.
133.
Bayer, Freperick M. Additional
Western Atlantic octocorals. 379.
Busake, 8. F. Two new genera of Compositae
irom Peru and Costa Riea. 407.
BricKWeEppg, F. G. * Temperatures in atomic
explosions. 29.
Broipa, H. P. * Stabilization of free radicals at
low temperatures. 30.
Brown. JerRaAM L. A key to the species and
subspecies of the cyprinodont genus Fundulus
in the United States and Canada east of the
continental divide. 69.
Brown, Rotanp W. Cockroach egg case from
the Eocene of Wyoming. 340.
Burnett, G. E. Civil-engineering research. 206.
Byrns, F. E. The role of the civil engineer in
irrigation. 215.
Cook, RicHarp K.
functions. 365.
CRABILL, Raueu E., Jr. A new Garibius from
Virginia, with a key to the North American
congeners (Chilopoda: Lithobiomorpha: Lith-
obiidae). 375.
On the Newport chilopod genera. 343.
Drexs_, WaLTER 8S. Some considerations of dis-
aster potential. 398.
DRECHSLER, CHARLES. Two medium-sized spe-
cies of Conidiobolus occurring in Colorado.
309.
DunninG, Gorpon. Immediate radiations from
a nuclear detonation. 189.
ErsenBup, Merrit. Global distribution of
radioactivity from nuclear detonations, with
special reference to strontium 90. 180.
Facst, Georce T. A study of the montmoril-
lonite variety galapektite. 143.
The relation between lattice parameters
and composition for montmorillonite-group
minerals. 146.
GaLe, Samuet H. The role of the civil engineer
in applied economics. 235.
GENTNER, WattTeR A. New species of Erythro-
zylon from Colombia. 6.
Gipson, R. E. Cultural implications of scientific
research. 249.
Gorn, CotemMan J. Descriptions of two new
frogs from Colombia. 60.
GotpMaNn, A. J. A matrix minimization prob-
lem. 405.
GraNnum, James O. The role of the civil engi-
neer in highways. 222.
GurtMaANI, O. N. See Narr, N. BALAKRISHNAN.
157.
Haut, H. Tracy. Chemistry at high pressures
and high temperatures. 300.
records of
Some properties of Struve
425
Hanp, Caper. Another sea anemone from Cal-
ifornia and the types of certain Californian
anemones. 411.
The systematics, affinities, and hosts of
the one-tentacled, commensal hydroid Mono-
brachium, with new distributional records. 84.
Hess, W. C., and SHarrran, I. P. The effect
of cortisone on the formation of glycogen
from 2-C-14 labeled alanine and lactic acid. 17.
Hiut, Terrtty. * A model for muscular action
on a molecular level. 31.
HorrmaNn, Ricuarp L. A new name for the race-
runner lizard of the Middle Atlantic States
(Tejidae). 423.
A new subspecies of the teiid lizard
Cnemidophorus sexlineatus (Linnaeus) from
eastern United States. 153.
Imutay, RatepH W. New genera of Early Creta-
ceous ammonites from California and Oregon.
275.
Jones, R. Cuark. On the quantum efficiency of
scotopic and photopie vision. 100.
Kaptan, JosprH. * The International Geo-
physical Year program of the United States.
26.
Knicut, Kennetu L.
117, 196.
Lr, Hur-Lin. New plant names published by
Luigi Castiglioni. 1.
— The evolutionary significance of the en-
dosperm and its bearing on the origin of
anglosperms. 33.
LoEBLICH, ALFRED R., JrR., and Tappan, HELEN.
Woodringina, a new foraminiferal genus (Het-
erohelicidae) from the Paleocene of Alabama.
39.
. The new planktonic foraminiferal
genus Tinophodella, and an emendation of
Globigerinita Bronnimann. 112.
MacCorp, Howarp A. Archeology of the Ana-
costia Valley of Washington, D. C., and
Maryland. 393.
Macuta, Lester. Meterological factors affect-
ing spread of radioactivity from nuclear
bombs. 169.
Marcus, Marvin. A determinantal inequality
of H. P. Robertson, II. 264.
A note on values of a quadratic form. 97.
MarsHatt, Norton L. See Sister, Hueu D.
321.
Mayer, JoHn R.
schools. 25.
McDonatp, C. C. The role of the civil engineer
in hydraulics. 211.
Mucumore, Witu1aAmM B. Some exotic terrestrial
isopods (Isopoda: Oniscoidea) from New York
State. 78.
Narr, N. BALAKRISHNAN, and GuRUMANI, O.N.
Teredo (Nototeredo) nambudalaiensis, a new
shipworm from the Madras coast of India.
157.
See Sronn, Auan. 42,
* Science and the secondary
426
NarpongE, Rotanp M. The electrogram of the
turtle heart in situ and after isolation. 109.
Newman, Marsuatyt T. The physique of the
Seneca Indians of western New York State.
357.
O’Keere, JoHn A. Tradition and conceptive
selection. 273.
Penney, JAMES T. Spongilla discoides Penney:
A correction. 24.
PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ, ALINA, and VON
Branp, THEopor. Studies on the oxygen
consumption of Australorbis glabratus eggs. 11.
PertrBong, Martan H. A new polychaetous
annelid of the family Paraonidae from the
North Atlantic. 354.
North American genera of the family
Orbiniidae (Annelida: Polychaeta), with de-
scriptions of new species. 159.
Purr, Harpans 8. Notes on the ostracode sub-
family Cytherideidinae Puri, 1952. 305.
Postscript notes on the ostracode sub-
family Brachyeytherinae. 306.
REED, CrypE F. Contributions to the herpeto-
fauna of Virginia, 2: The reptiles and am-
phibians of Northern Neck. 21.
Contributions to the herpetology of
Maryland and Delmarva, 12: The herpeto-
fauna of Anne Arundel County, Md. 64.
Contributions to the herpetology of
Maryland and Delmarva, 15: The herpeto-
fauna of Somerset County, Md. 127.
Contributions to the herpetology of
Virginia, 3: The herpetofauna of Accomac and
Northampton Counties, Va. 89.
RosBertson, Rospert. The subgenus Halopsephus
Rehder, with notes on the Western Atlantic
species of Turbo and the subfamily Bothropo-
matinae Thiele. 316.
Rosy, Harrison G. The role of the civil engi-
neer in power. 238.
SaunpERS, J. B. Emendation of the forami-
niferal genus Palmerinella Bermudez, 1934, and
erection of the foraminiferal genus Helenia.
370.
SHAFFRAN, I. P. See Huss, W. C. 17.
SUBJECT
Anthropology. The physique of the Seneea Indi-
ans of western New York State. MarsHaLL
T. Newman. 357.
Archeology. Archeology of the Anacostia Valley
of Washington, D. C., and Maryland.
Howarp A. MacCorp. 393.
Biochemistry. * A model for muscular action on
a molecular level. TerRILL HILu. 31.
The effect of cortisone on the formation of
glycogen from 2-C-14 labeled alanine and
lactic acid. W. C. Huss and I. P. SHAFFRAN.
NC
Botany. New plant names published by Luigi
Castiglioni. Hur-Lin Li. 1.
New species of Hrythroxylon from Colombia.
WALTER A. GENTNER. 6.
The evolutionary significance of the endo-
sperm and its bearing on the origin of angio-
sperms. Hur-Lin Lt. 33.
Two new genera of Compositae from Peru and
Costa Rica. 8. F. Buaxke. 407.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 47, No. 12
SHatowitz, A. L. Alexander Dallas
pioneer American scientist. 267.
SHope, JouN G. The role of the civil engineer
in structures. 226.
Stimpson, R. H. * Aircraft instrumentation and
recorders for hurricane investigation. 27.
Sister, HueuH D., and Marswauyt, Norton L.
Physiological effects of certain fungitoxic
compounds on fungus cells. 321.
Stawsky, Z. I. * High speed gas dynamics. 28.
Strong, ALAN, and Kyicut, Kennetu L. Type
specimens of mosquitoes in the United States
National Museum: IV, The genus Culex
(Diptera, Culicidae). 42.
. Type specimens of mosquitoes in the
United States National Museum: V, The
Sabethini (Diptera, Culicidae). 117.
—————. Type specimens of mosquitoes in the
United States National Museum: VI, Mis-
cellaneous genera, addenda, and summary.
196.
STRIMPLE, Harrett L. Two
specimens. 369.
Tappan, HELEN. See Loesiicu, ALFRED R., JR.
39, 112.
Taussky, Otea. A determinantal inequality of
H. P. Robertson, I. 263.
THomeson, Morris M. See WHITMORE, GEORGE
D. 241.
TREssSLER, Wituis L. The Ostracoda of Great
Slave Lake. 415.
Branp, THEODOR.
SzuMLEWicz, ALINA. 11. :
Wave, Mary. Morphology and taxonomy of the
foraminiferal family Elphidiidae. 330.
Wap, Grorce. * The mechanism of quantum
sensitivity. 32.
WALTHER, Cart H. The dual role of engineering
mechanics. 229.
WuiTMorRE, GrorGE D., and THompson, Morris
M. The role of the civil engineer in survey-
ing and mapping. 241.
Woop, Lawrence A. * Elasticity of rubber. 25.
The elasticity of rubber. 281.
YEATMAN, Harry C. A redescription of two
parasitic copepods from Bermuda. 346.
Bache—
aberrant crinoid
VON See PERLOWAGORA-
INDEX
Chemistry. Chemistry at high pressures and high
temperatures. H. Tracy Hatu. 300.
* Stabilization of free radicals at low tempera-
tures. H. P. Brorpa. 30.
Editorial. The role of the civil engineer. 205.
Engineering. Civil-engineering research. G. H.
BurRnNeEtr. 206.
The dual role of engineering mechanics.
Cari H. WALTHER. 229.
The role of the civil engineer in applied eco-
nomics. SAMUEL H. GaALg. 235.
The role of the civil engineer in highways.
James O. GRANUM. 222.
The role of the civil engineer in hydraulics.
C. C. McDona.p. 211.
The role of the civil engineer in irrigation.
F. EK. Byrns. 215.
The role of the civil engineer in power. Har-
RISON G. Rosy. 238.
The role of the civil engineer in soil mechap-
ics. Epwarp 8. BarBer. 218.
DECEMBER 1957
The role of the civil engineer in surveying
and mapping. GEorRGE D. WurTmMoRE and
Morris M. THompson. 241.
The role of the civil engineer in structures.
JouHn G. Swope. 226.
Entomology. Cockroach egg case from the Eocene
of Wyoming. Ronanp W. Brown. 340.
The stridulations of some crickets in the
Dominican Republic. H. A. Atuarp. 150.
Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United
States National Museum: IV, The genus
Culex (Diptera, Culicidae). ALAN STONE
and KENNETH L. Kniaut. 42.
Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United
States National Museum, V: The Sabethini
(Diptera, Culicidae). Atan SToNE and
KENNETH L. KnreGut. 117.
Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United
States National Museum: VI, Miscellaneous
genera, addenda, and summary. ALAN
STONE and KennetH L. KnicuHr. 196.
General science. Cultural implications of scien-
tifie research. R. E. Grsson. 249.
Genetics. Tradition and conceptive
Joun A. O’KEEFE. 273.
Geology. A study of the montmorillonite variety
galapektite. GrorcEe T. Faust. 148.
The relation between lattice parameters and
composition for montmorillonite-group min-
erals. GEorGE T. Faust. 146.
selection.
Geophysics. * The International Geophysical
Year program of the United States. JosepH
Kapian. 26.
Herpetology. A new name for the race-runner
lizard of the Middle Atlantic States (Teji-
dae). RicHarp L. Horrman. 423.
A new subspecies of the teiid lizard Cnemido-
phorus sexlineatus (Linnaeus) from eastern
United States. RicHarp L. Horrman. 153.
Contributions to the herpetofauna of Vir-
ginia, 2: The reptiles and amphibians of
Northern Neck. CiypE F. REEp. 21.
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland
and Delmarva, 12: The herpetofauna of
Anne Arundel County, Md. Ciyp& F. REEp.
64.
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland
and Delmarva, 15: The herpetofauna of
Somerset County, Md. CiyprE F. REeEp. 127.
Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia,
3: The herpetofauna of Accomac and North-
ampton Counties, Va. CLtypE F. REEp. 89.
Descriptions of two new frogs from Colombia.
CoLEMAN J. Gorn. 60.
History of science. Alexander Dallas Bache
| pioneer American scientist. A. L. SHaLow-
ITZ. 267.
Ichthyology. A key to the species and subspecies
of the cyprinodont genus Fundulus in the
United States and Canada east of the conti-
nental divide. JerraAmM L. Brown. 69.
Malacology. The subgenus Halopsephus Rehder,
with notes on the Western Atlantic species
of Turbo and the subfamily Bothropomati-
nae Thiele. RoprrtT RoBeErRTson. 316.
Mathematics. A determinantal inequality of H. P.
Robertson, I.- Otrea Taussky. 263.
A determinantal inequality of H. P. Robert-
son, II. Marvin Marcus. 264.
A matrix minimization problem. A. J. Goup-
MAN. 405.
|
|
INDEX
427
A note on values of a quadratic form. M.
Marcus. 97.
Some properties of Struve functions. RicH-
ARD K. Cook. 365.
Meteorology. * Aircraft instrumentation and re-
corders for hurricane investigation. R. H.
SIMPsoN. 27.
Mycology. Two medium-sized species of Conidi-
obolus occurring in Colorado. CHARLES
DRECHSLER. 309.
Notes and news. Academy members in the news,
5; Protective coatings for titanium, 9;
Awards for scientific achievement, 10; Emis-
sion spectra of actinium, 40; Employment
profile of scientists, 1954-55, 63; Free radi-
eals research program, 67; Army ants, 68;
News of members, 77; Wind River fossils, 83;
Plant-growth ‘‘brake,’’ 88; The australo-
pithecines, 92; Scent language of honey bees,
93; Reversal of parity law in nuclear phys-
ics, 94; Guaymi “medicine,” 96; Junior
Academy excursion, 99; Chiggers, 108;
Weight of meteorite, 116; Porosity detection
in plated coatings, 128; Fire detection in
aircraft engine spaces, 129; Genetics in the
service of man, 130; River Basins archeology,
131; Solar corona, 132; Economy in planning
of experiments, 148; Member honors, 152;
Habits of hornbills, 168; Functional organi-
zation of human brain, 194; Seminole
legends, 195; Crystal chemistry of tooth and
bone mineral, 202; Solar furnace, 204;
Interstellar matter, 214; Radio stars, 217;
Structure of galaxies, 246; Solar heating
systems, 246; Research on viruses, 247;
Crustacean metamorphosis, 248; Experi-
mental standard frequency broadcast on 60
kiloeycles, 278; Double stars, 279; Language
of the Guaymi, 280; The grasses of Washing-
ton, 299; ‘‘Terrible lizards,’ 320; The
Washington History of Science Club, 329;
Wood-boring beetles, 339; Entomology in
World War II, 353; Faunal curiosities of
Cuba, 356; Catalyst for parahydrogen pro-
duction simplifies liquid hydrogen storage
problem, 362; Standard musical pitch, 377;
Dr. Kiess retires, 392; War on lice, 406; New
light on the Adena people, 424.
Paleontology. Morphology and taxonomy of the
foraminiferal family Elphidiidae. Mary
Wank. 330.
New genera of Early Cretaceous ammonites
from California and Oregon. Rauepu W.
Imuay. 275.
Notes on the ostracode subfamily Cytherid-
eidinae Puri, 1952. Harpans 8. Purr. 305.
Postscript notes on the ostracode subfamily
Brachyeytherinae. Harpans 8. Purt. 306.
Two aberrant crinoid specimens. Harrewu L.
STRIMPLE. 369.
W oodringina, a new foraminiferal genus (Het-
erohelicidae) from the Paleocene of Ala-
bama. Atrrep R. Logsricu, Jr., and
HELEN Tappan. 39.
Physics. * Elasticity of rubber.
Woop. 25.
Global distribution of radioactivity from nu-
clear detonations, with special reference to
strontium 90. Merrit Ersensup. 180.
* High speed gas dynamics. Z. I. Suawsky. 28.
Immediate radiations from nuclear detona-
tion. GoRDON DuNNING. 189.
LAWRENCE A.
428 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
Meteorological factors affecting spread of
radioactivity from nuclear bombs. LESTER
Macnuta. 169.
* Temperatures in atomic explosions. F. G.
BRICKWEDDE. 29.
The elasticity of rubber. LawrRENcE A. Woop.
281.
* The mechanism of quantum sensitivity.
GEORGE WALD. 32.
Physiology. On the quantum efficiency of sco-
topic and photopic vision. R. Chark JONES.
100.
Studies on the oxygen consumption of Aws-
tralorbis glabratus eggs. ALINA PERLOWA-
GORA-SZUMLEWicz and THEODOR VON
Branp. ll.
The electrogram of the turtle heart in situ and
after isolation. Ronanp M. Narponp. 109.
The quantum character of light and its impli-
cations on visual thresholds. ERNEst Baum-
GARDT. 133.
Plant physiology. Physiological effects of certain
fungitoxie compounds on fungus cells.
Hueu D. Sister and Norton L. MARSHALL.
321.
Science education. * Science and the secondary
schools. Joun R. Mayer. 25.
Statistics. Some considerations of disaster po-
tential. WaLTER 8. DIEHL. 398.
Zoology. Additional records of Western Atlantic
octocorals. FreperiIcK M. Bayer. 379.
A new Garibius from Virginia, with a key to
the North American congeners (Chilopoda:
Lithobiomorpha: Lithobiidae). R. E. Cra-
BILL, JR. 375.
A new polychaetous annelid of the family
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 47, No. 12
Paraonidae from the North Atlantic. Mar-
TAN H. Prerrrpone. 354.
Another sea anemone from California and the
types of certain Californian anemones.
Capper Hanp. 411.
A redescription of two parasitic copepods
from Bermuda. Harry C. YearmMan. 346.
Emendation of the foraminiferal genus Palm-
erinella Bermudez, 1934, and erection of the
foraminiferal genus Helenia. J. B. Saun-
DERS. 370.
North American genera of the family Orbini-
idae (Annelida: Polychaeta), with descrip-
tions of new species. Marran H. PETTIBONE.
159.
On the Newport chilopod genera. Raupu HE.
CRABILL, JR. 348.
Some exotic terrestrial isopods (Isopoda:
Oniscoidea) from New York State. WILLIAM
B. Mucumore. 78.
Sponyilla discoides Penney: A correction.
James T. PENNEY. 24.
Teredo (Nototeredo) nambudalaiensis, a new
shipworm from the Madras coast of India.
N. BaLakKRISHNAN Narr and O. N. Guru-
MANI. 157.
The new planktonic foraminiferal genus T7ino-
phodella, and an emendation of Globigerin-
ita Bronnimann. ALFRED R. LoEBLICH, JR.,
and HeLen Tappan. 112.
The Ostracoda of Great Slave Lake. Wiuurs L.
TREsSLER. 415.
The systematics, affinities, and hosts of the
one-tentacled, commensal hydroid Mono-
brachium, with new distributional records.
Caprev Hanp. 84.
BA ee ee
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
iPhlosophies! Society, of Washington ..... 2.2.6. .22. 5. esc ese one: CuEsTER H,. Pace
Anthropological Society of Washington..........................005- Frank M. SETZLER
Biglepicalisociety of Washington... ..... 22.66.01. sccceesae secetess HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Whemrenlssociety of Washington’. «2.526.600. sence see cetera ve des Cuar.es R. NAESER
Entomological Society of Washington........................0. Cart F. W. MursEeBEcK
MamonaliGeopraphic SOCIEbY.. .. 2... nsec sec cece does cob eecoes nein ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geologiealisociety. of Washington... .....s....sc.0- sense meee ee ener Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. Cor
Golumbiaptistoriesl Society. <..<...65 xi 2e6 cose abi ciccsere ewes ccereye es vietece U.S. Grant, III
armtcalnsociety, of Washingtons.< 25.00 tas csvios «nee os settee bale ee a Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Fuippo GRAVATT
Wasim eronisociety Of HNgineers: o....c.6-6 66 nec e veces eno e eee ol Hersert G. Dorsey
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers....... ArNoLp H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp S. BEAN
Helminthological Society of Washington......................... Donaup B. McMutLen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHak. J. Peiczar, Jr.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. Fioyp W. Houcs
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......................+. Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovuatas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ Grorce A. Hotrrize
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HerBert C. VacHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..W1LL1am T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F, N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CuHar.es 8. GILMAN
CONTENTS
; Page
ArcHEoLocy.—Archeology of the Anacostia Valley of Washington,
D. C., and Maryland. Howarp A. MacCorp...............1... 393
STaTisTics.—Some considerations of disaster potential. Water S.
(010)): 1 a ee ie eh SM EMM IIS 398
Maruematics.—A matrix minimization problem. A. J. GotpmMan.... 405
Borany.—Two new genera of Compositae from Peru and Costa Rica.
GARY BUAK Ri :5005 9.28% wish Geese es Ee 407
ZooLocy.—Another sea anemone from California and the types of cer-
tain Californian anemones. CaprT HAND............:.......... 411
ZooLocy.—The Ostracoda of Great Slave Lake. Wuiuis L. Tressupr. 415
HERPETOLOGY.—A new name for the race-runner lizard of the Middle
Atlantic States (Tejidae). RicHarp L. HorrMan................ 423
INotestandaNewse- seat Ss. es see Be ay ale 406, 424
INDEX {POSVOLUMBEYAS . . fis 30 isl. sok idee wl eis A ot 425
we ly wh
lh
TT
ly
3 9088 013